Transcript
HP LaserJet 2100, 2100 M, 2100 TN Printers • User Guide
Copyright© 1998 Hewlett-Packard Co. Printed in Germany
Manual Part No. C4170-90901
Printed on Recycled Paper
*C4170-90901* *C4170-90901* C4170-90901
HP
LaserJet Printers
HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 N, 4000 T, and 4000 TN Printers
Service Manual _____________
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 1997 All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. Publication number C4118-91026 First Edition
Warranty
Trademark Credits
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
PostScript™ is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with respect to this information. HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, or other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information.
Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
CompuServe™ is a U.S. trademark of CompuServe, Inc. Windows® is a U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. TrueType™ is a U.S. trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. ENERGY STAR® is a U.S. registered service mark of the U.S. EPA.
Contents 1 Printer Description Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 Printer Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Model and Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Site Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Paper Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9 Supported Types of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Guidelines for Using Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Card Stock and Heavy Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Laser Safety Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Canadian DOC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 FCC Regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Laser Statement for Finland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Toner Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22 Environmental Product Stewardship. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
2 Service Approach Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 Service Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 Parts and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 Helpful Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Phone Numbers for Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Exchange Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Toner Cartridge Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Warranty Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
EN
Contents-1
3 Printer Operation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 Using the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Control Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Control Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Control Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Settings and Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Control Panel Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Paper Handling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Print Quality Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 I/O Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 EIO Menu (Networked Printers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Resets Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Setting the Page Count, Maintenance Count, and Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Cold Reset Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Clear Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Testing the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Resetting the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 MS-DOS System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Parallel DOS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Serial MS-DOS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Printer I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 Parallel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 Serial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
4 Printer Maintenance Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 Cleaning the Printer and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 Cleaning Spilled Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 Preventative Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Reset Maintenance Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Expected Life of Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Contents-2
EN
5 Functional Information Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 Printer Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Power Supply System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 AC/DC Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Overcurrent Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 High Voltage Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6 Toner Cartridge Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 Engine Controller Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 Engine Controller Board Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Laser and Scanner Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Paper Motion Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Solenoids, Sensors, Clutches, and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Engine Test Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Formatter System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 PowerSave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 EconoMode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Printer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Random Access Memory (RAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 DIMM Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Page Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 PJL Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 PML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Image Formation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Photosensitive Drum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Writing the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Developing the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Transferring the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Image Fusing/Variable Fusing Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Paper Feed System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Clutches and Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Printing from Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Printing from Tray 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Printing from the Optional 500-sheet Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Envelope Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Paper Jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 Basic Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
EN
Contents-3
6 Removing and Replacing Parts Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 Removal and Replacement Strategy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Removing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6 Rear Right Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7 Left Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Front Right Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Removing Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 Fuser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 Formatter Cage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20 Output Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21 Laser Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24 Main Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25 Transfer Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26 Tray 1 Pickup Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27 Tray 1 Pickup Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29 Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33 Registration Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34 Paper Feed Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36 Formatter Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39 Gear Train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40 Delivery Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41 Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module . . . .6-42 Engine Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44 Paper Feed Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48 Separation Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49 Paper Feed Module Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50 Paper Feed Module Gear Train Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51 Paper Feed Module Side Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52 Lower Paper Feed Module Plate (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53 PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54 PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55 PCA Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-56
Contents-4
EN
7 Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 Troubleshooting Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 Troubleshooting Flowchart (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Troubleshooting the Printing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Preliminary Operating Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Engine Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 Printer Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 General Paper Path Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42 Information Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45 Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49 Image System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67 Interface Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-69 AUTOEXEC.BAT Standard Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-72 Reference Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-75 Locations of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-75 Paper Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-81 Engine Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-84 Paper Size Detection Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-86 Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-91 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-92 PCAs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-95 Sensors and Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-97 Solenoids and Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-100 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-102 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-104
8 Parts and Diagrams Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 How To Use the Parts Lists and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Accessories and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Common Screws and Replacement Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Illustrations and Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Alphabetical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57 Numerical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-66
EN
Contents-5
Contents-6
EN
1
Printer Description
Overview This chapter discusses the following:
Printer Features Identification Site Requirements Paper Specifications Safety Information
EN
Overview 1-1
Printer Features Table 1-1. Printer Features Speed
17 pages per minute (ppm) 100 MHz RISC microprocessor First Page Out = 15 sec.
Resolution
300 dpi with PCL5e/HP’s PostScriptTM Level 2 emulation (PS) 600 dpi with PCL5e/PS HP FastRes 1200 (PCL6 only) HP ProRes 1200 (PCL6, PS)
Typefaces
110 Scalable TrueTypeTM (80 built-in, 30 via FontSmart, all PS and PCL accessible)
Memory Options
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 T: 4 MB RAM standard HP LaserJet 4000 N/4000 TN: 8 MB RAM standard Optional Memory: 2, 4, 8, 16 MB EDO DIMMs 32 MB SDRAM DIMM
Expansion Slots
3 100-pin DIMM slots 2 enhanced I/O (EIO) slots
Interface
Bidirectional IEEE 1284 compliant parallel interface RS-232 9-pin serial Paper Handling Connector (PHC)
Optional Networking
10Base-T and 10Base-2 10/100Base-TX Token Ring LocalTalk
Mass Storage Options
2 and 4 MB Flash DIMMs
1-2 Printer Description
EN
Table 1-1. Printer Features (continued) Paper Trays
100-sheet Tray 1 Size: 3 by 5 to legal (76 by 127 mm to 216 by 356 mm) 500-sheet Tray 2 (HP LaserJet 4000/ 4000 N) Size: letter, legal, A4 250-sheet Trays 2 and 3 (HP LaserJet 4000 T/ 4000 TN) Size: letter, A4, executive, legal, B5 (ISO), B5 (JIS), A5 Optional Universal 500-sheet Tray supports standard and custom sizes from 5.8 by 8.2 in (149 by 210 mm) to 8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm).
Paper Path
Straight through from Tray 1 to rear output bin Or to top output bin
Output Capacity
250-sheet top output bin 50-sheet rear output bin
Paper Handling Options
Duplexer, Envelope Feeder, optional 500-sheet universal tray assembly
Table 1-2. Comparison of HP LaserJet 4000 Series Printers HP LaserJet 4000
HP LaserJet 4000 T
HP LaserJet 4000 N
HP LaserJet 4000 TN
optional
optional
standard
standard
3
4
3
4
Standard RAM
4 MB internal
4 MB internal
8 MB internal
8 MB internal
250-Sheet Tray
not available
2 standard
not available
2 standard
500-Sheet Tray
standard
optional
standard
optional
500-Sheet Universal Tray
optional
optional
optional
optional
Ethernet 10-T/ 10-2 Max. # input bins
EN
Printer Features 1-3
Table 1-2. Comparison of HP LaserJet 4000 Series Printers (continued) HP LaserJet 4000
HP LaserJet 4000 T
HP LaserJet 4000 N
HP LaserJet 4000 TN
1 GB EIO Drive
optional
optional
optional
optional
Envelope feeder
available
available
available
available
LocalTalk
optional
optional
standard
standard
10Base-2
optional
optional
optional
optional
Duplexer
optional
optional
optional
optional
1-4 Printer Description
EN
Identification Model and Serial Numbers The model number and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located under the top cover on the right side of the printer. The model number is alphanumeric, such as USEB000194 for the HP LaserJet 4000 N printer. The serial number contains information about the Country of Origin, the Revision Level, the Production Code, and Production Number of the printer. The rear labels also contain power rating and regulatory information as shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1
EN
Sample Labels
Identification 1-5
Site Requirements The following environmental specifications must be maintained to ensure the proper operation of the printer. Consider the following points before installing the printer: z
Install in a well-ventilated, dust-free area.
z
Install on a hard, flat and continuous surface, with all four printer feet level. Do not install on carpet or other soft surfaces.
z
Ensure adequate power is supplied. Printer power requirements are listed in Table 1-3.
z
Install where temperature and humidity is stable, away from water sources, humidifiers, air conditioners, refrigerators, or other major appliances.
z
Install away from direct sunlight, open flames, or ammonia fumes. If the printer is placed near a window, make sure the window has a curtain or blind to block any direct sunlight.
z
Install with enough space around the printer for proper access and ventilation.
z
Install printer away from the direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems.
Table 1-3. Electrical Specifications Volts
Frequency
Amps
Watts (typical)
100-127 VAC±10%
50/60 Hz ±3Hz
8 amps
printing = 330 standby = 18 PowerSave On = 16 (EPA ENERGY STAR®)
220-240 VAC±10%
50/60 Hz ±3Hz
4 amps
printing = 330 standby = 18 PowerSave On = 16 (EPA ENERGY STAR®)
1-6 Printer Description
EN
Space Requirements 39.67 inches (100.76 cm) full length, trays and rear output bin open
16.77 inches (42.6 cm) printer only, rear output bin closed
15.4 inches (39.0 cm)
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N 18.5 inches (46.99 cm) with cover open 13.3 inches (34.3 cm) with cover closed HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN 20.1 inches (51.19 cm) with cover open 15.5 inches (38.5 cm) with cover closed
Figure 1-2
Printer Dimensions
Printer Weight (without toner cartridge)
EN
z
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N printers: 39.27 lb (17.85 kg)
z
HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN printers: 45.66 lb (20.71 kg)
Site Requirements 1-7
Environmental Requirements Table 1-4. Printer and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions Item
Operating
Storage
Temperature
50-91° F (10-32° C)
32 TO 95°F (0 to 35°C)
Relative Humidity
20-80% RH (with no condensation)
10% TO 95% RH
Table 1-5. Acoustic Emissions (Per ISO 9296) Printer State
Sound Power
Printing, 17 pages per minute (ppm)
Lwad= 6.6 bels (A)
Printing, 8 ppm
Lwad= 6.2 bels (A)
PowerSave
Lwad= 0 bels (A)
1-8 Printer Description
EN
Paper Specifications The following tables show paper specifications for the printer. Table 1-6. Paper Specifications, Tray 1 Supported Paper
Dimensions1
Minimum Size (custom)
3 by 5 in (76 by 127 mm)
Maximum Size
8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
Transparencies
Labels
Envelopes
1. 2.
EN
Same as minimum and maximum paper sizes listed above.
Weight
Capacity2
16 to 53 lb (60 to 199 g/m2)
100 sheets of 20 lb (75 g m2) paper
Thickness: 0.0039 in to 0.0045 in (0.099 to 0.114 mm)
75 transparencies
Thickness: 0.005 in to 0.007 in (0.127 mm to 0.178 mm)
50 labels
20 to 28 lb (75 to 105 g/m2)
10 envelopes
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. To print custom-size paper see the user’s guide. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Paper Specifications 1-9
Table 1-7. Paper Specifications, Tray 2 (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N) Supported Paper
Dimensions1
Letter
8.5 by 11 in (216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in (210 by 297 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
1. 2.
Weight
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)
Capacity2
500 sheets of 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper 50-100 transparencies
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Table 1-8. Paper Specifications, Trays 2 and 3 (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN) Supported Paper
Dimensions1
Letter
8.5 by 11 in (216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in (210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in (191 by 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
B5 (ISO) (custom3)
6.9 by 9.9 in (176 by 250 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in (182 by 257 mm)
A5 (custom3)
5.8 by 8.2 in (148 by 210 mm)
1. 2. 3.
Weight
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)
Capacity2
250 sheets of 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper 50-100 transparencies
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions. To print custom-size paper see the user’s guide.
1-10 Printer Description
EN
Table 1-9. Paper Specifications, Optional 500-Sheet Tray Supported Paper
Dimensions1
Letter
8.5 by 11 in (216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in (210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in (191 by 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
B5 (ISO) (custom3) 6.9 by 9.9 in (176 by 250 mm) B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in (182 by 257 mm)
A5 (custom3)
5.8 by 8.2 in (148 by 210 mm)
Custom3
5.8 by 8.2 in to 8.5 by 14 in (149 by 210 mm to 216 by 356 mm)
1. 2. 3.
Weight
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)
Capacity2
500 sheets of 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper 50-100 transparencies
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions. To print custom-size paper see the user’s guide.
Table 1-10. Paper Specifications, Optional Envelope Feeder Supported Paper
Dimensions1
Minimum Size
3.5 by 6.3 in (90 by 160 mm)
Maximum Size 1. 2.
EN
7 by 10 in (178 by 254 mm)
Weight
20 to 28 lb (75 to 105 g/m2)
Capacity2
75 envelopes
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Paper Specifications 1-11
Table 1-11. Paper Specifications, Optional Duplex Printing Accessory (Duplexer) Dimensions Letter
8.5 by 11 in (216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in (210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in (191 by 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in (182 by 257 mm)
Weight
Capacity
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)
not applicable
Supported Types of Paper The printer supports the following types of paper: z
plain
z
preprinted
z
letterhead
z
transparency
z
prepunched
z
labels
z
bond
z
recycled
z
color
z
card stock
z
rough
z
user-defined (5 types)
1-12 Printer Description
EN
Guidelines for Using Paper For best results, use conventional 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper. Make sure the paper is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, and curled or bent edges. Some paper causes print quality problems, jamming, or damage to the printer.
Table 1-12. Guidelines for Using Paper Symptom
Problem with Paper
Solution
Poor print quality or toner adhesion. Problems with feeding.
Too moist, too rough, too smooth, or embossed; faulty paper lot.
Try another kind of paper, between 100-250 Sheffield, 4-6% moisture content.
Dropouts, jamming, curl.
Stored improperly.
Store paper flat in its moisture-proof wrapping.
Increased gray background shading.
Too heavy.
Use lighter paper. Open the rear output bin.
Excessive curl. Problems with feeding.
Too moist, wrong grain direction or short-grain construction.
Open the rear output bin. Use long-grain paper.
Jamming, damage to printer.
Cutouts or perforations.
Do not use paper with cutouts or perforations.
Problems with feeding.
Ragged edges.
Use quality paper.
Note
Do not use letterhead paper that is printed with low-temperature inks, such as those used in some types of thermography. Do not use raised letterhead. The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Make sure that any colored paper or preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with the printer’s temperature (400° F or 205° C for 0.1 second).
EN
Paper Specifications 1-13
Paper Weight Equivalence Table Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight, locate the bond weight (in row 3, second column) and scan across the row to the cover weight (in the fourth column). The equivalent is 28 lb. Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade. Table 1-13. Paper Weight Equivalence U.S. Post Card1 thickness (mm)
U.S. Bristol Weight (lb)
U.S. Index Weight (lb)
U.S. Tag Weight (lb)
Europe Metric Weight (g/m2)
Japan Metric Weight (g/m2)
1
16
41
22
27
33
37
60
60
2
17
43
24
29
35
39
64
64
3
20
50
28
34
42
46
75
75
4
21
54
30
36
44
49
80
80
5
22
56
31
38
46
51
81
81
6
24
60
33
41
50
55
90
90
7
27
68
37
45
55
61
100
100
8
28
70
39
49
58
65
105
105
9
32
80
44
55
67
74
120
120
10
34
86
47
58
71
79
128
128
11
36
90
50
62
75
83
135
135
12
.18
39
100
55
67
82
91
148
148
13
.19
42
107
58
72
87
97
157
157
14
.20
43
110
60
74
90
100
163
163
15
.23
47
119
65
80
97
108
176
176
53
134
74
90
110
122
199
199
16 1.
U.S. U.S. U.S. Bond Text/Boo Cover Weight k Weight (lb) Weight (lb) (lb)
U.S. Post Card measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
1-14 Printer Description
EN
Labels CAUTION
To avoid damaging the printer, use only labels recommended for use in laser printers. If you have problems printing labels, use Tray 1 and open the rear output bin. Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once.
Label Construction When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component: z
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 400° F (205° C), the printer’s maximum temperature.
z
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off of sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.
z
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 0.5 in (13 mm) of curl in any direction.
z
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
Transparencies Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand 400° F (205° C), the printer’s maximum temperature. For best results, close the rear output bin to print transparencies to the top output bin. CAUTION
To avoid damaging the printer, use only transparencies recommended for use in laser printers. If you have problems printing transparencies, use Tray 1.
EN
Paper Specifications 1-15
Envelopes Envelope Construction Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the following components: z
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 28 lb (105 g/m2), or jamming may result.
z
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 0.25 in (6 mm) curl, and should not contain air. (Envelopes that trap air may cause problems.)
z
Condition: Make sure envelopes are not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
z
Sizes in Tray 1: From 3 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm) to 8.5 by 14 inches (216 by 356 mm).
z
Sizes in the optional envelope feeder: From 3.5 by 6.3 in (90 by 160 mm) to 7 by 10 in (178 by 254 mm).
If you do not have an optional envelope feeder, always print envelopes from Tray 1. If envelopes wrinkle, try opening the rear output bin.
1-16 Printer Description
EN
Envelopes with Double-Side-Seams Double-side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope rather than diagonal seams. This style may be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as illustrated below.
Acceptable
Unacceptable
Figure 1-3
Envelopes with Double-Side-Seams
Envelopes with Adhesive Strips or Flaps Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the printer. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams.
Envelope Margins The following table gives typical address margins for a Commercial #10 or DL envelope. Table 1-14. Envelope Margins Type of Address
Top Margin
Left Margin
Return Address
0.6 in (15 mm)
0.6 in (15 mm)
Delivery Address
2 in (51 mm)
3.5 in (89 mm)
Note
EN
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 0.6 in (15 mm) from the edges of the envelope.
Paper Specifications 1-17
Envelope Storage Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to good print quality. Envelopes should be stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope may wrinkle during printing.
Card Stock and Heavy Paper Many types of card stock can be printed from Tray 1, including index cards and postcards. Some card stock performs better than others because its construction is better suited for feeding through a laser printer. For optimum printer performance, do not use paper heavier than 53 lb (199 g/m2) in Tray 1 or 28 lb (105 g/m2) in other trays. Paper that is too heavy might cause misfeeds, stacking problems, paper jams, poor toner fusing, poor print quality, or excessive mechanical wear. Note
Printing on heavier paper may be possible if the tray is not filled to capacity, and paper with a smoothness rating of 100-180 Sheffield is used.
Card Stock Construction z
Smoothness: 36-53 lb (135-199 g/m2) card stock should have a smoothness rating of 100-180 Sheffield. 16-36 lb (60-135 g/m2) card stock should have a smoothness rating of 100-250 Sheffield.
z
Construction: Card stock should lie flat with less than 0.2 in (5 mm) of curl.
z
Condition: Make sure card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
z
Sizes: Use only card stock within the following size ranges: • minimum: 3 by 5 in (76 by 127 mm) • maximum: 8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 millimeters)
Note
Before loading card stock in Tray 1, make sure it is regular in shape and not damaged. Also, make sure the cards are not stuck together.
Card Stock Guidelines z
If cards curl or jam, try printing from Tray 1 and opening the rear output bin.
z
Set margins at least 0.08 in (2 mm) away from the edges of the paper.
1-18 Printer Description
EN
Safety Information Laser Safety Statement The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this service manual may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC Regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements. <>.>>
EN
Safety Information 1-19
FCC Regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Note
z
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
z
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
z
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
z
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
1-20 Printer Description
EN
Laser Statement for Finland LASERTURVALLISUUS LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, 4000 N, 4000 TN -laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1993) mukaisesti. VAROITUS ! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING ! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. HUOLTO HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, 4000 N, 4000 TN -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 770-795 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser
EN
Safety Information 1-21
Toner Safety Note
Toner may stain clothing. Skin and clothing are best cleaned by removing as much toner as possible with a dry tissue, then washing with cold water. Hot water causes toner to melt and permanently fuse into clothing. A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for the toner cartridge used in the HP printers, is available through Hewlett-Packard by mail or fax. Mail. To obtain a MSDS for the C4127X HP LaserJet Toner Imaging System through the mail, call the Customer Information Center (CIC) at 1-800-752-0900 between 6 am and 5 pm Pacific Standard Time. Fax. To obtain a MSDS for the C4127X HP LaserJet Toner Imaging System by fax, call the HP FIRST number at (800) 333-1917 (U.S. and Canada) and request document number 1512.
Note
To get documents from HP FIRST by fax, you must use a Group 3 fax machine.
1-22 Printer Description
EN
Environmental Product Stewardship Protecting the Environment Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally-sound manner. The printer has been designed to minimize impacts on the environment. The printer design eliminates: Ozone Production
The printer uses charging rollers in the electrophotographic process and therefore generates no appreciable ozone gas (03).
CFC Usage
Class I U.S. Clean Air Act stratospheric ozone-depleting chemicals (chlorofluorocarbons [CFCs], for example) have been eliminated from the manufacturing of the printer and packaging.
The printer design reduces: Energy Consumption
Energy usage drops from 330 watts (W) during printing to as little as 16 W while in low-power (PowerSave) mode. This saves energy without affecting the high performance of the printer. This product qualifies for the ENERGY STAR® Program (U.S. and Japan). ENERGY STAR is a voluntary program established to encourage the development of energy-efficient office products. The ENERGY STAR name is a registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
EN
Safety Information 1-23
1-24 Printer Description
EN
2
Service Approach
Overview This chapter discusses the following:
Service Approach Parts and Supplies Warranty Statement
EN
Overview 2-1
Service Approach Repair of the printer normally begins with use of the printer’s internal diagnostics in conjunction with the troubleshooting procedures in Chapter 7. Once a faulty part is located, repair is generally accomplished by assembly level replacement of Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies may be repaired at the subassembly level. PCA component replacement is not supported by Hewlett-Packard.
2-2 Service Approach
EN
Parts and Supplies Ordering Information Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in Chapter 8 of this manual. Replacement parts may be ordered from HP’s Service Materials Organization (SMO) or Support Materials Europe (SME). Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer. Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or support provider. See page 2-5 and page 8-4 for more information.
EN
Parts and Supplies 2-3
Helpful Documentation Table 2-1 lists part numbers to order documentation.
Table 2-1. Helpful Documentation Item
Description or Use
Part Number
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide
A guide to using paper and other print media with HP LaserJet printers.
5021-8909
PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference Documentation Package
A guide to using printer commands with HP LaserJet printers.
5021-0330
An additional copy of the HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, 4000 N, and 4000 TN Printers user’s guide. User’s Guide
C4118-90901 (English)
HP LaserJet 4000 and 4000 N Printers Getting Started Guide
An additional copy of the getting started guide.
C4118-90972 (English)
HP LaserJet 4000 T and 4000 TN Printers Getting Started Guide
An additional copy of the getting started guide.
C4119-90901 (English)
HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, An additional copy of the quick C4118-90926 (English) 4000 N, and 4000 TN Printers reference guide. Quick Reference Guide An additional copy of the User’s Documentation Bundle, HP LaserJet 4000 and user’s guide, the getting started guide, and the quick 4000 N Printers reference guide.
C4118-99001 (English)
An additional copy of the user’s guide, the getting started guide, and the quick reference guide.
C4119-99001 (English)
User’s Documentation Bundle, HP LaserJet 4000 T and 4000 TN
2-4 Service Approach
EN
Phone Numbers for Ordering z
SMO (Service Materials Organization) 1-800-227-8164 (U.S. only)
z
SME (Support Materials Europe) (49 7031) 142253
Exchange Program HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts. These are identified in Chapter 8 and can be ordered through Service Materials Organization (SMO), or Support Materials Europe (SME).
Consumables Paper and Toner Cartridges can be ordered directly from HewlettPackard. See Chapter 8 for ordering information.
Technical Assistance HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) provides free technical support information 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. The ASAP system includes HP AUDIO-TIPS and HP FIRST, both explained below. The ASAP service 1-800-333-1917 (U.S.) requires a touchtone phone. To order additional printer drivers for software applications, call HP’s Distribution Center (HPD) 1-303-739-4009.
HP AUDIO-TIPS HP AUDIO-TIPS is an interactive voice response system providing prerecorded answers to the questions asked most frequently by HP LaserJet printer users. Helpful “System Maps” to the HP AUDIOTIPS recordings are available by fax through HP FIRST.
EN
Parts and Supplies 2-5
HP FIRST HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a phone-in fax service that provides technical information for HP LaserJet users as well as service personnel. Receiving a fax requires a group 3 facsimile machine or fax card. Service related information includes: z
Service notes (HP Authorized dealers)
z
Application notes
z
Product Data Sheets
z
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
z
Typeface and accessory information
z
Printer support software information
z
Toner information
z
Driver request form and Software Matrix
HP FIRST, U.S. Call the HP ASAP system (1-800-333-1917) and follow the voice prompts to enter HP FIRST. HP FIRST, Europe Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers: U.K., 0800-96-02-71 Belgium (Dutch), 078-111906 Switzerland (German), 155-1527 Netherlands, 06-0222420 Germany, 0130-810061 Austria, 0660-8128 For English service outside the above countries, call (31) 20-6815792.
HP CompuServe Forum CompuServe™ members can download a variety of support materials including product data sheets, software application notes, and printer drivers for many popular software applications. Members may also post and reply to questions in an interactive format. To access the HP Forum, type GO HP at any prompt. For more information, or to join CompuServe, call 1-800-524-3388.
2-6 Service Approach
EN
North American Response Center (NARC) The North American Response Center (NARC) is available to assist service technicians. The NARC can be reached at 1-800-544-9976. Other Areas Outside of North America and Europe, contact your local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining technical support.
EN
Parts and Supplies 2-7
Toner Cartridge Information The Toner Cartridge is designed to simplify replacement of the major “consumable” parts. The Toner Cartridge contains the printing mechanism and a supply of toner. At 5% page coverage, a Toner Cartridge will print approximately 6,000 or 10,000 pages (depending on the model installed). However, a Toner Cartridge should print more pages if regularly printing pages with less coverage, such as short memos. The cartridge may print fewer pages if routinely printing dense print. Note
For best results, always use a Toner Cartridge before the expiration date stamped on the Toner Cartridge’s box.
Refilled Toner Cartridges While Hewlett-Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled Toner Cartridges during the warranty period or while the printer is under a maintenance contract, it is not recommended for the following reasons: z
Repairs resulting from the use of refilled Toner Cartridges are not covered under Hewlett-Packard warranty or maintenance contracts.
z
Hewlett-Packard has no control or process to ensure that a refilled Toner Cartridge functions at the high level of reliability of a new HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge. Hewlett-Packard also cannot predict what the long term reliability effect on the printer is from using different toner formulations found in refilled cartridges.
z
The print quality of HP LaserJet Toner Cartridges influences the customer’s perception of the printer. Hewlett-Packard has no control over the actual print quality of a refilled Toner Cartridge.
Recycling Toner Cartridges In order to reduce waste, Hewlett-Packard offers a recycling program for used Toner Cartridges. Cartridge components that do not wear out are recycled. Plastics and other materials are recycled. HP pays the shipping costs from the user to the recycling plant. For each cartridge returned, HP donates one U.S. dollar to be shared by the Nature Conservancy and the National Wildlife Federation. To join this recycling effort, follow the instructions inside the Toner Cartridge’s box.
2-8 Service Approach
EN
Warranty Statement This warranty gives specific legal rights. There may also be other rights which vary from area to area. Refer to the User’s Guide for further warranty information, or see the warranty card included with the printer.
EN
Warranty Statement 2-9
2-10 Service Approach
EN
3
Printer Operation
Overview This chapter discusses the following:
Using the Control Panel Control Panel Menus Service Mode Testing the Printer Resetting the Printer System Configuration Printer I/O Configuration
EN
Overview 3-1
Using the Control Panel Control Panel Layout The printer’s Control Panel consists of the following:
READY 2-line display
Ready
Go
Data
Item
Attention
– Value + Cancel Job
Figure 3-1
Menu
Select
Control Panel Layout
Control Panel Lights Table 3-1. Control Panel Lights Light
Indication
Ready
The printer is ready to print.
Data
The printer is processing information.
Attention
Action is required. See the Control Panel display.
3-2 Printer Operation
EN
Control Panel Keys Table 3-2. Control Panel Keys Key
Function
[Go]
z z z z
z
z z
Places the printer either online or offline. Prints any data residing in the printer’s buffer. Allows the printer to resume printing after being offline. Clears most printer messages and places the printer online. Allows the printer to continue printing with an error message such as TRAY x LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE] or UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE. Confirms a manual feed request if Tray 1 is loaded and TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE has been set from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s Control Panel. Overrides a manual feed request from Tray 1 by selecting paper from the next available tray. Exits the Control Panel menus. (To save a selected Control Panel setting, first press [Select].)
[Cancel Job]
Cancels the print job that the printer is processing. The time it takes to cancel depends on the size of the print job. (Press it only once.)
[Menu]
Cycles through the Control Panel menus. Press the right end of the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move backward.
[Item]
Cycles through the selected menu’s items. Press the right end of the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move backward.
[- Value +]
Cycles through the selected menu item’s values. Press [+] to move forward or [-] to move backward.
[Select]
z
z
EN
Saves the selected value for that item. An asterisk (*) appears next to the selection, indicating that it is the new default. Default settings remain when the printer is switched off or reset (unless you reset all factory defaults from the Resets Menu). Prints one of the printer information pages from the Control Panel.
Using the Control Panel 3-3
Settings and Defaults The printer makes most printing decisions based on either temporary settings or permanent defaults. Note
Settings sent from software applications override printer defaults.
Table 3-3. Settings and Defaults Setting or Default
Explanation
Temporary Setting
A value set for the current print job by the software application. For example, a request from the software to print three copies instead of the Control Panel default value of one copy is a temporary setting. The printer continues to use the temporary setting until it receives another software request or until it is reset.
Control Panel Default
A value set at the Control Panel when you select a menu item. An asterisk appears, indicating the default setting. The printer retains this default when it is turned off.
Factory Default
The value set for each menu item at the factory. Factory defaults are listed in the item column in the menu tables starting on page 3-6.
Setting the Display Language 1. Press and hold [Select] while turning on the printer. Hold [Select] until SELECT LANGUAGE appears. 2. Release [Select]. INITIALIZING appears briefly. Wait for LANGUAGE=ENGLISH to appear. 3. Press [- Value +] repeatedly until the desired language appears. 4. Press [Select] to save your choice. An asterisk (*) will appear beside the selected language.
3-4 Printer Operation
EN
Control Panel Menus Press [Menu] for access to all Control Panel menus. When additional trays or other accessories are installed in the printer, new menu items automatically appear.
To change a Control Panel setting: 1. Press [Menu] until the desired menu appears. 2. Press [Item] until the desired item appears. 3. Press [- Value +] until the desired setting appears. 4. Press [Select] to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears next to the selection in the display, indicating that it is now the default. 5. Press [Go] to exit the menu. Note
Settings in the printer driver and software application override Control Panel settings. (Software application settings override printer driver settings.) If you cannot access a menu or item, it is either not an option for the printer, or the customer’s network administrator has locked the function. (The Control Panel reads ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED.) See the customer’s network administrator.
To print a Control Panel menu map: To see the current settings for all of the menus and items available in the Control Panel, print a Control Panel menu map. 1. Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2. Press [Item] until PRINT MENU MAP appears. 3. Press [Select] to print the menu map.
EN
Control Panel Menus 3-5
Information Menu This menu contains printer information pages that give details about the printer and its configuration. To print an information page, scroll to the desired page and press [Select]. Table 3-4. Information Menu Item
Explanation
PRINT MENU MAP
The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the Control Panel menu items.
PRINT CONFIGURATION
The Configuration Page shows the printer’s current configuration. If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed (HP LaserJet 4000 N/4000 TN printers), a JetDirect Configuration Page will print out as well.
PRINT PCL FONT LIST
The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to the printer.
PRINT PS FONT LIST
The PS font list shows all the PS fonts currently available to the printer.
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY
This item appears only when a mass storage device (such as an optional flash DIMM or hard disk) containing a recognized file system is installed in the printer. The file directory shows information for all installed mass storage devices.
PRINT EVENT LOG
The event log lists printer events or errors.
SHOW EVENT LOG
This item allows you to view the most recent printer events on the Control Panel display. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the event log entries.
PRINT PAPER PATH TEST
The paper path test can be used to verify that the paper path is working properly, or to troubleshoot problems with a type of paper. Choose the input tray, output bin, duplexer (if available), and number of copies.
3-6 Printer Operation
EN
Paper Handling Menu When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the Control Panel, you can print by choosing the type and size of paper from the printer driver or software application. Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override Control Panel settings. Table 3-5. Paper Handling Menu Item
Values
Explanation
ENVELOPE FEEDER SIZE=COM10
For supported paper sizes see page 1-9.
This item appears only when the optional envelope feeder is installed. Set the value to correspond with the envelope size currently loaded in the envelope feeder.
ENVELOPE FEEDER TYPE=PLAIN
For supported paper types see page 1-9.
This item appears only when the optional envelope feeder is installed. Set the value to correspond with the envelope type currently loaded in the envelope feeder.
TRAY 1 MODE= FIRST
FIRST CASSETTE
Determine how the printer will use Tray 1. FIRST: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, the printer will pull paper from that tray first. CASSETTE: A paper size must be assigned to Tray 1 using the TRAY 1 SIZE option (the next item in this menu when TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE). This allows Tray 1 to be used as a reserved tray.
TRAY 1 SIZE= LETTER
For supported paper sizes see page 1-9.
This item appears only when TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE. Set the value to correspond with the paper size currently loaded in Tray 1.
EN
Control Panel Menus 3-7
Table 3-5. Paper Handling Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY 1 TYPE= PLAIN
For supported paper sizes see page 1-9.
This item appears only when TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE. Set the value to correspond with the paper type currently loaded in Tray 1.
TRAY 2 TYPE= PLAIN
For supported paper sizes see page 1-9.
Set the value to correspond with the paper type currently loaded in Tray 2.
TRAY 3 TYPE= PLAIN
For supported paper sizes see page 1-9.
This item appears only when a third paper tray is installed. Set the value to correspond with the paper type currently loaded in Tray 3.
TRAY 4 TYPE= PLAIN
For supported paper sizes see page 1-9.
This item appears only when a fourth paper tray is installed (available only on the HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN printers). Set the value to correspond with the paper type currently loaded in Tray 4.
MANUAL FEED=OFF
OFF ON
Feed the paper manually from Tray 1, rather than automatically from a tray. When MANUAL FEED=ON and Tray 1 is empty, the printer goes offline when it receives a print job and displays MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE].
DUPLEX=OFF
OFF ON
This item appears only when an optional duplexer is installed. Set the value to ON to print on both sides (duplex) or OFF to print on one side (simplex) of a sheet of paper.
BINDING= LONG EDGE
LONG EDGE SHORT EDGE
This item appears only when an optional duplexer is installed and the duplex option is on. Choose the binding edge when duplexing (printing on both sides of paper). ‘
3-8 Printer Operation
EN
Table 3-5. Paper Handling Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
OVERRIDE A4 WITH LETTER=NO
NO YES
Choose YES to print on letter size paper when an A4 job is sent, but no A4 size paper is loaded in the printer (or to print on A4 size paper when a letter job is sent, but no letter paper is loaded in the printer).
CONFIGURE FUSER MODE NO MENU=NO YES
Configure the fuser mode associated with each paper type. (This is only necessary if you are experiencing problems printing on certain paper types.) NO: The fuser mode menu items are not accessible. YES: Additional items appear (see below).
Note To see the default fuser mode for each paper type, select YES, scroll back to the Information Menu, and print a menu map (page 3-6).
[TYPE]= NORMAL
NORMAL LOW HIGH
This item appears only when
CONFIGURE FUSER MODE MENU=YES. Most paper types are set to NORMAL by default. The exception is as follows:
ROUGH=HIGH (The ROUGH=HIGH setting is only available with A4, letter, and legal sizes.) For a complete list of supported paper types, see page 1-9.
EN
Control Panel Menus 3-9
Print Quality Menu Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override Control Panel settings. Table 3-6. Print Quality Menu Item
Values
Explanation
RESOLUTION= FASTRES 1200
300 600 FASTRES 1200 PRORES 1200
Select the resolution from the following values: 300: Produces draft print quality at the printer’s maximum speed (16 ppm). 300 dpi (dots per inch) is recommended for some bitmapped fonts and graphics, and for compatibility with the HP LaserJet III family of printers. 600: Produces high print quality at the printer’s maximum speed (16 ppm). FASTRES 1200: Produces optimum print quality (comparable to 1200 dpi) at the printer’s maximum speed (16 ppm). PRORES 1200: Produces optimum print quality (true 1200 dpi) at half the printer’s maximum speed (8 ppm). When the resolution is changed, any downloaded resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM.
Note It is best to change the resolution from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override Control Panel settings.)
3-10 Printer Operation
EN
Table 3-6. Print Quality Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
RET=MEDIUM
OFF LIGHT MEDIUM DARK
Use the printer’s Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) setting to produce print with smooth angles, curves, and edges. REt does not affect print quality when the print resolution is set to ProRes 1200. All other print resolutions, including FastRes 1200, benefit from REt.
Note It is best to change the REt setting from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override Control Panel settings.)
ECONOMODE=OFF
OFF ON
Turn EconoMode on (to save toner) or off (for high quality). EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by reducing the amount of toner on the printed page by up to 50%.
Caution HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. (If EconoMode is used full-time, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the Toner Cartridge.)
Note It is best to turn EconoMode on or off from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override Control Panel settings.)
EN
Control Panel Menus 3-11
Table 3-6. Print Quality Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
TONER DENSITY=3
1 2 3 4 5
Lighten or darken the print on the page by changing the toner density setting. The settings range from 1 (light) to 5 (dark), but the default setting of 3 usually produces the best results. Use a lower toner density setting to save toner.
Note It is best to change the toner density from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override Control Panel settings.)
CREATE CLEANING PAGE
No value to select.
Press [Select] to print a cleaning page (for cleaning excess toner from the paper path). In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper). Follow the instructions on the cleaning page.
PROCESS CLEANING PAGE
No value to select.
This item appears only after a cleaning page has been generated (as described above). Press [Select] to process the cleaning page.
3-12 Printer Operation
EN
Printing Menu Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override Control Panel settings. Table 3-7. Printing Menu Item
Values
Explanation
COPIES=1
1 to 999
Set the default number of copies by selecting any number from 1 to 999. Press [-Value+] once to change the setting by increments of 1, or hold down [-Value+] to scroll by increments of 10.
Note It is best to set the number of copies from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override Control Panel settings.)
PAPER= LETTER (110V printers) and
ENVELOPE= COM10
For supported paper sizes see Set the default image size for page 1-9. paper and envelopes. (The item name will change from paper to envelope as you scroll through the available sizes.)
Note
(110V printers)
CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=NO
The defaults indicated here are for 110V printers. The default paper size for 220V printers is A4. The default envelope size for 220V printers is DL. NO YES
NO: The custom paper menu items are not accessible.
YES: The custom paper menu items appear (see the next item).
EN
Control Panel Menus 3-13
Table 3-7. Printing Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
UNIT OF MEASURE=INCHES
INCHES MILLIMETERS
This item appears only when
(110V printers) or
measurement for the custom paper size.
MILLIMETERS (220V printers)
X DIMENSION= 8.5 INCHES (110V printers) or
216 MILLIMETERS
CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES. Select the unit of
3.00 to 8.5 INCHES
This item appears only when
(110V printers) or 76 to 216 MILLIMETERS (220V printers)
CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES. Select the dimension to be fed into the printer (short edge).
(220V printers)
Y DIMENSION= 14.0 INCHES (110V printers) or
356 MILLIMETERS
5.00 to 14.0 INCHES
This item appears only when
(110V printers) or 127 to 356 MILLIMETERS (220V printers)
CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES. Select the other dimension (long edge).
(220V printers)
ORIENTATION= PORTRAIT
PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE
Determine the default orientation of print on the page.
Note It is best to set the page orientation from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override Control Panel settings.)
FORM=60 LINES (110V printers) or
64 LINES (220V printers)
3-14 Printer Operation
5 to 128
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size. Press [-Value+] once to change the setting by increments of 1, or hold down [-Value+] to scroll by increments of 10.
EN
Table 3-7. Printing Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
PCL FONT SOURCE=INTERNAL
INTERNAL SOFT SLOT 1, 2, or 3
INTERNAL: Internal fonts. SOFT: Permanent soft fonts. SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored in one of the three DIMM slots.
PCL FONT NUMBER=0
0 to 999
The printer assigns a number to each font and lists them on the PCL Font List. The font number appears in the Font # column of the printout.
PCL FONT PITCH= 10.00
0.44 to 99.99
This item might not appear, depending on the font selected. Press [-Value+] once to change setting by increments of .01 for pitch, or hold down [-Value+] to scroll by increments of 1.
PC-8
Select any one of several available symbol sets from the printer’s control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is recommended for line draw characters. Order the PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference Documentation Package for symbol set charts or for more information see the user’s guide.
PCL SYMBOL SET=PC-8
EN
many others
Control Panel Menus 3-15
Table 3-7. Printing Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
COURIER=REGULAR
REGULAR DARK
Select the version of Courier font to use: REGULAR: The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet 4 series printers. DARK: The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet III series printers. Both fonts are not available at the same time.
WIDE A4=NO
NO YES
The Wide A4 setting changes the number of characters that can be printed on a single line of A4 paper. NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line. YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line.
APPEND CR TO LF= NO
NO YES
Select YES to append a carriage return to each line feed encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Some environments, such as UNIX, indicate a new line using only the line feed control code. This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed.
PRINT PS ERRORS=OFF
OFF ON
Select ON to print the PS error page when PS errors occur.
3-16 Printer Operation
EN
Configuration Menu Items in this menu affect the printer’s behavior. Configure the printer according to your printing needs. Table 3-8. Configuration Menu Item
Values
Explanation
POWERSAVE= 30 MINUTES
OFF 15 MINUTES 30 MINUTES 1 HOUR 2 HOURS 3 HOURS
Set the printer to enter PowerSave after it has been idle for a specified amount of time. Turning PowerSave off is not recommended. The PowerSave feature does the following: 1. Minimizes the amount of power consumed by the printer when it is idle. 2. Reduces wear on the printer’s electronic components. (Turns off the display’s backlight.) When you send a print job, press a Control Panel key, open a paper tray, or open the top cover, the printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode.
Note PowerSave turns off the backlight on the display, but the display is still readable.
PERSONALITY= AUTO
EN
AUTO PCL PS
Select the default printer language (personality). Possible values are determined by which valid languages are installed in the printer. Normally you should not change the printer language (the default is AUTO). If you change it to a specific printer language, the printer will not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the printer.
Control Panel Menus 3-17
Table 3-8. Configuration Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
RESOURCE SAVE= OFF
OFF ON AUTO
Dedicate printer memory to save each language’s permanent resources. (You might need to add memory to the printer in order for this item to appear.) The amount of memory set aside can be different for each installed language. Some languages might have memory set aside for resource saving without requiring all languages to do so. Any time the amount of memory dedicated to a specific language is changed, all languages will lose all saved resources, including any unprocessed print jobs. OFF: No language resource saving is performed, and language-dependent resources, such as fonts and macros, are lost when language or resolution changes. ON: An item will appear for each installed language that allows the user to allocate a particular amount of memory to that language’s resource saving area. (See the items below.) AUTO: The printer automatically determines the amount of memory to use for each installed language’s resource saving area.
PCL MEMORY= 400K
0K and up
3-18 Printer Operation
This item appears only when RESOURCE (This value depends on SAVE=ON. Select the amount of memory the amount of installed used for saving PCL resources. Printer memory.) default is the minimum amount of memory needed to perform resource saving for PCL. Press [-Value+] to change settings by increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
EN
Table 3-8. Configuration Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
PS MEMORY= 400K
0K and up (This value depends on the amount of installed memory.)
This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON. Select the amount of memory used for saving PS resources. Printer default is the minimum amount of memory needed to perform resource saving for PS. Press [-Value+] to change settings by increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
PAGE PROTECT= AUTO
AUTO ON
This item appears only after a 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX, PRESS GO TO CONTINUE message displays. Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) attempts to guarantee that all pages will print. If the page does not print, turn PAGE PROTECT to ON. This might increase chances of a 20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY, PRESS GO TO CONTINUE message. If this occurs, simplify the print job or install additional memory.
CLEARABLE WARNINGS=JOB
EN
JOB ON
Set the amount of time that a clearable warning is displayed on the printer’s Control Panel. JOB: Warning messages display on the Control Panel until the end of the job from which they were generated. ON: Warning messages display on the Control Panel until [Go] is pressed.
Control Panel Menus 3-19
Table 3-8. Configuration Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
AUTO CONTINUE= ON
ON OFF
Determine how the printer reacts to errors. ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message will display, and the printer will go offline for 10 seconds before returning online. OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message will remain on the display and the printer will remain offline until [Go] is pressed. If the printer is on a network, you will probably want to turn AUTO CONTINUE to ON.
TONER LOW=CONTINUE
CONTINUE STOP
Determine how the printer behaves when toner is low. The TONER LOW message will first appear when the Toner Cartridge is almost out of toner. (About 100 to 300 sheets can still be printed.) CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print while the TONER LOW message is displayed. STOP: The printer will go offline and wait for further action.
3-20 Printer Operation
EN
Table 3-8. Configuration Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
MOPIER MODE=STANDARD
STANDARD ENHANCED OFF
Determine how the mopier functions behave. This item appears only when there is at least 8 MB of memory or an optional hard disk is installed. STANDARD: This option is available if there is either a hard disk installed or a RAM disk configured in memory. This option uses I/O data stored in printer memory for generating multiple original prints. (All copies will print at the same speed as the first copy.) ENHANCED: This option is available if there is a hard disk installed and at least 8 MB of memory. This option uses engine video data for printing multiple original prints and should print all copies after the first at the printer’s maximum speed. OFF: Disables the mopier functions. (The printer will not spool any jobs to the hard disk.) When the mopier mode is changed, any downloaded resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM.
RAM DISK=OFF
OFF ON AUTO
Determine how the RAM disk is configured. This item appears only if there is no optional hard disk installed and the printer has at least 8 MB of memory. OFF: The RAM disk is disabled. ON: The RAM disk is enabled. Configure the amount of memory to be used through the following item: RAM DISK SIZE.
Note If the setting is changed from OFF to ON or from OFF to AUTO, the printer will automatically reinitialize when it becomes idle.
EN
Control Panel Menus 3-21
Table 3-8. Configuration Menu (continued) Item
Values
RAM DISK SIZE=xxxK
0K and up
Explanation
Determine the size of the RAM disk. This (This value depends on item appears if RAM DISK=ON or AUTO. the amount of installed Press [-Value+] to change settings by memory.) increments of 100.
Note This setting cannot be changed if RAM DISK=AUTO. Changing this value will cause the printer to reinitialize when it becomes idle.
JAM RECOVERY= AUTO
AUTO ON OFF
Determine how the printer behaves when a paper jam occurs. AUTO: The printer automatically selects the best mode for printer jam recovery (usually ON). This is the default setting. ON: The printer automatically reprints pages after a paper jam is cleared. OFF: The printer does not reprint pages following a paper jam. Printing performance might be increased with this setting.
MAINTENANCE MESSAGE=OFF
OFF
This item appears only after the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message displays.
OFF: The PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message will be cleared and will not be displayed again until the next maintenance is due. The message should not be turned off unless the printer maintenance has been performed. If the required maintenance is not performed, the printer’s performance will degrade.
SMALL PAPER SPEED=NORMAL
3-22 Printer Operation
NORMAL SLOW
Select SLOW when alternately printing envelopes or small paper and standard paper sizes. Be sure to return the speed to NORMAL when finished.
EN
I/O Menu Items in the I/O (input/output) Menu affect the communication between the printer and the computer. Table 3-9. I/O Menu Item
Values
Explanation
I/O TIMEOUT=15
5 to 300
Select the I/O timeout period in seconds. (I/O timeout refers to the time, measured in seconds, that the printer waits before ending a print job.) This setting allows you to adjust timeout for best performance. If data from other ports appear in the middle of your print job, increase the timeout value. Press [- Value +] once to change settings by increments of 1, or hold down [- Value +] to scroll by increments of 10.
I/O BUFFER=AUTO
AUTO ON OFF
Allocate memory for I/O buffering. AUTO: The printer automatically reserves memory for I/O buffering. Additional configurations are not required and the I/O BUFFER SIZE menu item does not appear. ON: The I/O BUFFER SIZE item appears (see below). Specify the amount of memory to be used for I/O buffering. OFF: I/O buffering is not performed and the I/O BUFFER SIZE item does not appear. When the I/O buffer setting is changed, any downloaded resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM.
EN
Control Panel Menus 3-23
Table 3-9. I/O Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
I/O BUFFER SIZE= 100K
10K and up
This item appears only when I/O BUFFER=ON. Specify the amount of memory for I/O buffering. The maximum amount of memory available for I/O buffering is determined by the amount of memory installed in the printer, the languages installed in the printer, and by other memory allocations that must be made. Press [-Value +] to change settings by increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
PARALLEL HIGH SPEED=YES
YES NO
Select the speed at which data is transmitted to the printer. YES: The printer accepts faster parallel communications used for connections with newer computers. NO: The printer accepts slower parallel communications used for connections with older computers.
PARALLEL ADV FUNCTIONS=ON
ON OFF
Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off. The default is set for a bidirectional parallel port (IEEE-1284). This setting allows the printer to send status readback messages to the computer. (Turning on the parallel advanced functions might slow language switching.)
SERIAL PACING=DTR/DSR
DTR/DSR XON/XOFF
Select the type of pacing used. Pacing, or “handshaking” allows the printer to tell the computer when to send information. The printer uses XON/XOFF and DTR/DSR signal protocols rather than ETX/ACK protocol. DTR/DSR: Select this value if your computer requires hardware flow control (most personal computers do). XON/XOFF: Select this value if your computer requires software flow control (a UNIX workstation, for example). The SERIAL ROBUST XON item appears (see below).
3-24 Printer Operation
EN
Table 3-9. I/O Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
SERIAL ROBUST XON=ON
ON OFF
This item appears only when SERIAL PACING=XON/XOFF. Select the method for generating XONs. ON: The printer sends an XON when the printer is online and when sufficient buffer space is available. If the host does not receive data within approximately one second, the printer will transmit additional XONs at one second intervals until the host receives data. OFF: The printer sends one XON when it can accept more data or when it is online. The printer does not send XONs every second while the printer is online and ready for more data.
SERIAL BAUD RATE=9600
300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200
Select the printer’s baud rate (speed at which information is transferred) for communicating from the computer to the printer.
SERIAL DTR POLARITY=HIGH
HIGH LOW
Determine whether pin #8 is high or low when the printer is ready. HIGH: Pin #8 is held high when the printer is ready. LOW: Pin #8 is held low when the printer is ready.
EN
Control Panel Menus 3-25
EIO Menu (Networked Printers) EIO (enhanced input/output) Menus depend on the particular accessory product installed in an EIO slot of the printer. If the printer contains an HP JetDirect print server EIO card, you can configure basic networking parameters using the EIO Menu. These and other parameters can also be configured through HP JetAdmin. Table 3-10. EIO Menu Item
Values
Explanation
CFG NETWORK=NO
NO YES
NO: The JetDirect Menu is not accessible. YES: The JetDirect Menu appears.
NOVELL=ON
ON OFF
Select whether the IPX/SPX protocol stack (in Novell NetWare networks, for example) is enabled (on) or disabled (off).
DLC/LLC=ON
ON OFF
Select whether the DLC/LLC protocol stack is enabled (on) or disabled (off).
TCP/IP=ON
ON OFF
Select whether the TCP/IP protocol stack is enabled (on) or disabled (off).
ETALK=ON
ON OFF
Select whether the Apple EtherTalk protocol stack is enabled (on) or disabled (off).
CFG NOVELL=NO
NO YES
NO: The IPX/SPX Menu is not accessible. YES: The IPX/SPX Menu appears. In the IPX/SPX Menu, you can specify the frame type parameter used on your network. The default is AUTO, to automatically set and limit the frame type to the one detected. For Ethernet cards, frame type selections include EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, EN_SNAP. For Token Ring cards, frame type selections include TR_8022, TR_SNAP. In the IPX/SPX Menu for Token Ring cards, you can also specify NetWare Source Routing parameters, which include SRC RT=AUTO (default), OFF, SINGLE R, or ALL RT.
3-26 Printer Operation
EN
Table 3-10. EIO Menu (continued) Item
Values
Explanation
CFG TCP/IP=NO
NO YES
NO: The TCP/IP Menu is not accessible. YES: The TCP/IP Menu appears. In the TCP/IP Menu, you can specify BOOTP=YES for TCP/IP parameters to be automatically loaded from a bootp or DHCP server when the printer is turned on. If you specify BOOTP=NO, you can manually set selected TCP/IP parameters from the Control Panel. You can manually set each byte of the IP address (IP), Subnet Mask (SM), Syslog Server (LG), and Default Gateway (GW). Also, you can manually set the Timeout time period.
Note If no IP address is assigned within the first 5 minutes, the HP JetDirect print server card will assume a default IP address of 192.0.0.192.
CFG ETALK=NO
NO YES
NO: The EtherTalk Menu is not accessible. YES: The EtherTalk Menu appears. In the EtherTalk Menu you can set the AppleTalk phase parameter (ETALK PHASE=1 or 2) for your network.
EN
Control Panel Menus 3-27
Resets Menu Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or printer configuration settings when you select these items. Only reset the printer under the following circumstances: z
You want to restore the printer’s default settings.
z
Communication between the printer and computer has been interrupted.
z
You are using both the serial and parallel I/O ports, and one of the ports is having problems.
The items in the Resets Menu will clear all memory in the printer, while [Cancel Job] clears only the current job. Table 3-11. Resets Menu Item
Explanation
RESET MEMORY
This item clears the printer buffer and the active I/O input buffer, and makes the Control Panel defaults current. The DATA RECEIVED message might display on the Control Panel. Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS
This item performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory (default) settings. This item also clears the input buffer for the active I/O. The DATA RECEIVED message might display on the printer’s Control Panel.
RESET ACTIVE I/O CHANNEL
This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output buffers (for the active I/Os only). The DATA RECEIVED message might display on the printer’s Control Panel.
RESET ALL I/O CHANNELS
This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output buffers for all I/Os.
3-28 Printer Operation
EN
Service Mode Service Mode should be used only by authorized service personnel. While in Service Mode, you can: z
Verify and set the page count and serial number. These are displayed on the Configuration Page.
z
Set the Cold Reset Default. (This sets the factory default paper size to either Letter or A4).
z
Turn the Diagnostic Functions on or off (for software developers only).
z
Clear the event log.
z
Set the interval at which the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message appears on the control panel.
To enter Service Mode: 1. Hold down [Select] and [Cancel Job] while turning on the printer. (If the control panel reads INITIALIZING, the keys were released too soon.) 2. Press the right side of the [Menu] key, then press [Select]. The message SERVICE MODE is displayed. To exit the Service Mode press [Go].
EN
Service Mode 3-29
Service Menu
Figure 3-2
Service Menu
Setting the Page Count, Maintenance Count, and Serial Number The page count and serial numbers are stored in Non-Volatile Memory. If it is necessary to replace the Formatter PCA, the page count should be set to the current value to reflect the age of the print engine. The procedure for setting the serial number is similar to setting the page count. Note
Before replacing the Formatter PCA, print a Configuration Page to verify the current page count and serial number of the printer, if possible. Use the information on the Configuration Page to reset the page count and serial number for the new Formatter PCA.
3-30 Printer Operation
EN
Page Count The page count stored in NVRAM and displayed on the Configuration Page printout represents the number of pages which the printer has printed (excluding engine test prints). If it becomes necessary to repair a printer by installing a new Formatter, the page count must be reset so that it represents the age of the printer’s engine rather than the age of the Formatter. The page count value is changed using a different method than is used for other control panel values. Instead of increasing the entire value by increments, each digit can be selected and modified individually. The following control panel keys are used to modify the page count value:
[Select]
[Value+]
[-Value]
Enters any changes to the current digit and advances the cursor one digit to the right. If the last digit is currently selected, pressing the [Select] key wraps the cursor around to the first digit. Increases the value of the currently selected digit by one. Pressing [Value+] when 9 is the value of the currently selected digit will change the value of the digit to 0. Decreases the value of the currently selected digit by one. Pressing [-Value] when 0 is the value of the currently selected digit will change the value of the digit to 9.
Table 3-12 shows the sequence of keystrokes used to change the page count from a value of 000000 to a value of 0010480.
EN
Service Mode 3-31
Table 3-12. Changing the Page Count Key Press
Display
Description
SERVICE MODE [Menu+]
SERVICE MENU
[Item+]
PAGES=0000000 *
Enter the SERVICE MENU. Advance to the first item in the SERVICE
MENU. [Select]
PAGES=0000000 *
Advance the cursor one digit to the right.
[Select]
PAGES=0000000 *
Advance the cursor one digit to the right.
[Value+]
PAGES=0010000 *
Increase the value of the third digit by one.
[Select]
PAGES=0010000 *
Enter the change to the third digit and advance the cursor one digit to the right.
[Select]
PAGES=0010000 *
Advance the cursor one digit to the right.
[Value+]
PAGES=0010400 *
Increase the value of the fifth digit by four.
[Select]
PAGES=0010400 *
Enter the change to the fifth digit and advance the cursor one digit to the right.
[-Value]
PAGES=0010480 *
Decrease the value of the sixth digit by two.
PAGES=0010480 *
(2 presses)
Enter the change to the sixth digit and advance the cursor one digit to the right causing the cursor to wrap around to the first digit.
[Go]
To exit.
(4 presses)
(2 presses)
[Select]
3-32 Printer Operation
EN
Maintenance Page Count The maintenance page count should be reset only after a maintenance kit has been installed. This will reset the maintenance counter so that the message PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE will display another 200,000 pages later (default). z
Hold down the [Item-] and [Value-] keys.
z
Turn the printer on.
z
Wait for RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT to be displayed and then release both keys.
MAINTENANCE COUNT in the Service Mode Menu sets the page count interval at which the next service is due for the printer. This is set initially at the factory to 200,000 pages. (For example, the message displays at 200,000 pages. If the Printer Maintenance Kit is installed at 200,114 pages, the message displays 200,000 pages later, at 400,114 pages.) Editing this number is similar to editing the PAGES item above.
Serial Number If a Formatter is replaced, then the serial number must be reentered. Editing this number is similar to editing the PAGES item above.
Cold Reset Paper The default paper size is stored in NVRAM and when the printer is cold reset, the default paper size is set to the factory setting. Possible values are COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER and COLD RESET PAPER=A4. When replacing the Formatter in countries that use A4 rather than letter size paper, set the cold reset paper size to A4.
Diagnostics This menu item enables or disables the use of the firmware diagnostic features. Possible values are DIAGNOSTICS=OFF* and DIAGNOSTICS=ON. When enabled, the diagnostic features are accessible when the printer is in the online READY state by pressing the [Select] key.
Clear Event Log This item allows the internal event log to be cleared.
EN
Service Mode 3-33
Testing the Printer When you print a Configuration Page, the printer checks its internal controller and I/O interface, and then prints a test page. You can review the Configuration Page printout to verify proper installation of such options as paper trays or printer languages. For more information, see page 7-47.
Engine Test The engine test print can be used to verify that the print engine is functioning correctly. For more information, see page 7-11.
3-34 Printer Operation
EN
Resetting the Printer Cold Reset Cold Reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all the defaults back to the factory settings. CAUTION
Performing a Cold Reset resets the JetDirect configuration. To avoid making changes to your configuration, remove the JetDirect card before performing a cold reset. If possible, print a Configuration Page prior to performing a Cold Reset. This will document current settings for later reference. To perform a cold reset: 1. Turn off the printer. 2. While pressing [Go], turn the printer on. COLD RESET appears briefly on the display, then INITIALIZING appears. After a few seconds, RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the display, followed by OFFLINE. The cold reset is complete. 3. Press [Go] to return the printer online. READY appears on the display.
Clearing NVRAM This procedure will clean up the NVRAM by removing old areas that are not being used. 1. Turn off the printer. 2. While pressing [Cancel Job] turn the printer on. CLEANUP NVRAM appears briefly on the display, followed by INITIALIZING. After a few seconds READY appears.
EN
Resetting the Printer 3-35
System Configuration MS-DOS System Configuration To communicate properly with the printer, the MS-DOS environment requires the addition or modification of MODE commands in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Add or modify the MODE command(s), depending on the interface configuration, as follows:
Parallel DOS Commands Most IBM and AT compatible computers default to a parallel printer port. To ensure that information is sent to your parallel printer port, type the following MS-DOS command at your MS-DOS prompt or include it in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: MODE LPT1: , , P For MS-DOS version 4.0 and above, enter: MODE LPT1: , , B Note
This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1. If you are using LPT2 or LPT3, replace LPT1 in the example with the printer port that you are using. Since the MODE command is an external MS-DOS command (a program named MODE.COM is run when the MODE command is invoked), the program file must be contained in the root directory, or in a directory specified in a preceding PATH command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. After changing the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, reboot the computer to initiate the changes.
3-36 Printer Operation
EN
Serial MS-DOS Commands Most IBM compatible computers default to a parallel printer port. To ensure that information is sent to the serial printer port, type the following MS-DOS commands at the MS-DOS prompt, or include them in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. MODE COM1: 9600, N, 8, 1, P MODE LPT1: =COM1 For MS-DOS version 4.0 or above, enter: MODE COM1: 9600, N, 8, 1, B MODE LPT1: =COM1 Note
These examples assume that you are using serial printer COM1. If you are using COM2 or COM3, replace COM1 with the printer port that you are using. Since the MODE command is an external MS-DOS command (a program named MODE.COM is run when the MODE command is invoked), the program file must be contained either in the root directory or in a directory specified in a preceding PATH command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. After changing the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, reboot the computer to initiate the changes.
EN
System Configuration 3-37
Printer I/O Configuration Parallel Menu The default setting for the HIGH SPEED PARALLEL I/O is YES. If it is set to NO, the interface runs at a slower speed that is compatible with older computers. When the default is set to YES, the parallel interface runs at a higher rate supported by newer computers.
Advanced Functions The ADVANCED FUNCTIONS feature of the printer enables bidirectional communications between the printer and the host. The default setting is ON. This default setting (ON) must be active in order to use HP LaserJet Explorer, the Windows® Printing System, and other software applications and drivers.
Serial Configuration Use RS-232C serial configuration when the printer is located 11 to 50 feet (3.35 to 15.24 meters) from the computer. If you need to locate the printer between 51 and 2000 feet (15.54 and 610 meters) from the computer, use an RS-422A serial configuration. Serial I/O settings must be configured correctly for proper serial communication.
Serial Protocol When printing with a serial configuration, the same protocol must be set on both the printer and the computer. Protocol on the printer is set by changing the control panel settings. Protocol on the computer is set by using DOS commands. The default protocol settings are described below.
BAUD Rate The BAUD RATE setting tells the printer how fast information is transferred to and from the computer. The default setting is BAUD RATE=9600*.
3-38 Printer Operation
EN
Pacing (Handshaking) Pacing (or “handshaking”) is a type of communication between the printer and the computer. This is an important setting in the printer because it allows the printer to tell the computer when to send information. If the printer is unable to receive information, for example, when the print buffer is full or when the printer is out of paper, a signal is sent to the computer to stop sending information. When the printer is able to resume receiving information, it sends another signal to the computer to send more data. Pacing is set through the control panel’s I/O Menu. Two types of handshaking are supported by the printer:
EN
z
Select DTR/DSR through the I/O Menu’s PACING item if the computer requires hardware flow control (most personal computers do). Through the I/O Menu’s DTR POLARITY item, the DTR polarity can be set to High or Low. The default is DTR POLARITY=HI.
z
Select XON/XOFF through the I/O Menu’s PACING item if the computer requires software flow control (for example, if you are using a UNIX workstation). Note that status readback messages are not paced when XON/XOFF is selected. Through the I/O Menu’s ROBUST XON item, Robust Xon can be set to ON (the default) or OFF. Note that the ROBUST XON item only appears under the I/O Menu if XON/XOFF is selected.
Printer I/O Configuration 3-39
3-40 Printer Operation
EN
4
Printer Maintenance
Overview This chapter discusses the following:
Cleaning the Printer and Accessories Preventative Maintenance
EN
Overview 4-1
Cleaning the Printer and Accessories To maintain high print quality and performance, thoroughly clean the printer and the paper handling accessories: z
Every time you change the Toner Cartridge (run a cleaning page).
z
After printing approximately 10,000 pages.
z
Whenever print quality problems occur.
Clean the outside surfaces with a lightly water-dampened cloth. Clean the inside parts as indicated in Table 4-1. Observe the warning and caution below. WARNING!
Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard. Be careful when cleaning around the Fusing Assembly area. It may be hot.
CAUTION
To avoid permanent damage to the Toner Cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer. Do not touch the transfer roller. Skin oils on the roller can reduce print quality. If toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Figure 4-1
Location of the Transfer Roller - Do Not Touch!
4-2 Printer Maintenance
EN
Table 4-1. Cleaning the Printer Component
Cleaning Method / Notes
Outside Covers
Use a water-dampened cloth. Do not use solvents or ammoniabased cleaners.
Inside General
With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe any dust, spilled toner, and paper particles from the paper path area, the registration roller, and the Toner Cartridge cavity.
Paper Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers
Use a water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
Separation Pad
Use a dry, lint-free cloth.
Registration Roller
Use a dry, lint-free cloth.
Transfer Roller
Use a dry, lint-free cloth. DO NOT TOUCH with your fingers.
Fuser
Use a water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
EN
Cleaning the Printer and Accessories 4-3
Using the Printer Cleaning Page If toner specks appear on the front or back side of your print jobs, follow the procedure below. From the printer’s control panel, do the following: 1. Press [Menu] until PRINT QUALITY MENU appears. 2. Press [Item] until CREATE CLEANING PAGE appears. 3. Press [Select] to create the cleaning page. 4. Follow the instructions on the cleaning page to complete the cleaning process. Note
In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper). You might need to create a cleaning page more than once. When toner has been cleaned from inside the printer, shiny black spots will appear on the page’s black strip. To ensure good print quality with certain types of paper, use the cleaning page every time the toner cartridge is replaced. If the cleaning page is frequently needed, try a different type of paper.
Cleaning Spilled Toner Defective Toner Cartridges can develop leaks. Also, after a paper jam has occurred, there may be some toner remaining on the rollers and guides inside the printer. The pages that print immediately after the jam may pick up this toner. Clean spilled toner with a cloth dampened with cold water. Do not touch the Transfer Roller with the damp cloth or with your fingers. Do not use a vacuum cleaner unless it is equipped with a micro-fine particle filter.
4-4 Printer Maintenance
EN
Preventative Maintenance The preventative maintenance cycle for this printer is every 200,000 pages. To order the maintenance kit see page 8-2. The kit contains the following replacement parts: one Fuser, one Transfer Roller, one Tray 1 Roller, three Feed Rollers, and three Separation Rollers. Refer to the instructions included in the kit for detailed replacement procedures.
Reset Maintenance Count After the PM kit has been installed, reset the maintenance count. 1. Turn the printer off. 2. While pressing [Item-] and [Value-] turn the printer on. Reset Maintenance Count appears, followed by INITIALIZING. After a few seconds READY appears.
Expected Life of Components The following table shows the expected life of certain components in the printer. To order parts, see Chapter 8. Table 4-2. Life of Components No.
Part name
Part No.
Quantity
Expected Life
1
Tray 1 Pickup Roller
RG5-3718-000
1
100,000 pages
2
Tray Feed Roller
RF5-2490-000
1
200,000 pages
3
Tray Separation Roller
RF5-2490-000
1
200,000 pages
4
Tray 1 Separation Pad
RB1-8873-000
1
200,000 pages
5
Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid RH7-5172-000
1
200,000 pages
6
Fuser 100-127V 220-240V
1 1
200,000 pages 200,000 pages
EN
C4118-69003 C4118-69004
Preventative Maintenance 4-5
Table 4-2. Life of Components (continued) No.
Part name
Part No.
Quantity
Expected Life
7
Transfer Charging Roller
RG5-4283-000
1
200,000 pages
8
Cooling Fan
RH7-1334-000
1
25,000 hours
9
Duplexer Exhaust Fan
RH7-1361-000
1
25,000 hours
4-6 Printer Maintenance
EN
5
Functional Information
Overview This chapter discusses the following:
Printer Subsystems Power Supply System Formatter System Image Formation System Paper Feed System Basic Sequence of Operation
EN
Overview 5-1
Printer Subsystems This chapter presents a generalized functional overview of the printer and the printing processes. The following printer systems are discussed: z
Power Supply Subsystem
z
Engine Controller Subsystem
z
Formatter PCA
z
Control Panel
z
Interface PCA
z
Image Formation System
z
Paper Feed System
z
Basic Sequence of Operation
5-2 Functional Information
EN
Figure 5-1
EN
Paper Feed Subsystem
Printer Subsystems 5-3
Power Supply System AC/DC Power Distribution AC power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit in the Engine Controller Board when the power switch (SW101) is turned on. The low-voltage power supply circuit supplies +24 VDC and +3.3 VDC required for the printer. +24 VDC is supplied to drive the main motor, scanner motor and fan, and to the high-voltage power supply. +3.3 VDC is used for sensors and ICs on the engine controller board. +24 VDC is divided into +24 VA which is normally supplied from the low-voltage power circuit, and +24VB which is interrupted when the door switch (SW101) turns off by opening the upper cover.
Figure 5-2
Low Voltage Power Supply Circuit If a short-circuit or other problems on the load side cause an excessive current flow from the +24VDC, or +3.3 VDC power supplies or generate abnormal voltage, the excess-current protection system and excess-voltage protection system automatically shut off the output voltage to protect the power supplies. If the protection systems are activated and the power supply circuit does not output DC voltage, it is necessary to turn the printer off, correct the problem in the faulty load, then turn the printer on again. The circuit has two fuses, which break and cut off the output voltage if excess-current flows through the AC line.
5-4 Functional Information
EN
Overcurrent Overvoltage Protection The fusing heater safety circuit is located on the Engine Controller Board, and constantly monitors the fusing temperature. In case of abnormality, the output from this circuit turns off the relay (RL101) and interrupts the power to the fusing heater. If an increase in the temperature of the fusing heater causes the thermistor output voltage to exceed about 1.2V (240° C), the output of pin #13 of the comparator (IC301) becomes “L”. When the output of pin #14 becomes “L” and Q302 is turned off, the relay (RL101) is turned off. To protect the Fuser from excessive voltages, the printer has the following three protective functions:
EN
z
The CPU monitors the voltage of TH901. If it is abnormal, the CPU assesses fusing heater failure and turns off the relay (RL101). At the same time, it reports the fusing heater failure to the Formatter.
z
If the temperature of the fusing heater rises abnormally and the voltage of TH901 falls below about 1.2V (240° C), the fusing heater’s safety circuit interrupts the power to the fusing heater, regardless of CPU outputs.
z
If the temperature of the fusing heater rises abnormally and the temperature of the thermal fuse exceeds about 230° C, the temperature fuse melts, which interrupts the power to the fusing heater.
Power Supply System 5-5
High Voltage Power Distribution
Figure 5-3
Engine Controller Board In response to the instructions from the microprocessor (CPU:IC 1501) on the Engine Controller Board, this circuit applies the superimposed voltage of DC voltage and AC voltage to the primary charging roller and developing cylinder, and a positive or negative DC voltage to the transfer charging roller. According to the image density information sent from the Formatter, this circuit varies the primary DC bias and developing DC bias to adjust the image density.
5-6 Functional Information
EN
Toner Cartridge Detection The Toner Cartridge has a toner sensor. The circuit compares the output value of the developing AC bias and the output value from the antenna inside the cartridge, and outputs the toner detection signal. The CPU detects the remaining toner level and the presence of the cartridge when the developing bias is applied to the developing cylinder. The remaining toner level is always detected when the developing bias is applied. The presence of the cartridge is detected only when the developing bias is applied during the initial rotation.
Engine Controller Subsystem The following systems and functions are controlled by the Engine Controller Board: z
DC Power Distribution (+3.3V DC, +5V DC, +24VA)
z
Laser and Scanner Drive
z
Paper Motion Monitoring and Control (photosensors and flags)
z
Clutches (tray pickup and Tray 1 feed)
z
Engine Test
z
Motors (Main Drive, Scanner, and Fans)
The operation sequences of this printer are controlled by the CPU of this circuit. When the power switch of the printer is tuned on and the printer enters the standby mode, the CPU outputs the signals to drive the loads such as laser diode, motors, and solenoids, based on the print commands and the image data input from the external device.
EN
Power Supply System 5-7
Figure 5-4
Engine Controller Board
5-8 Functional Information
EN
Engine Controller Board Inputs and Outputs
Figure 5-5
EN
Engine Controller Board I/O (1 of 4)
Power Supply System 5-9
Figure 5-6
Engine Controller Board I/O (2 of 4)
5-10 Functional Information
EN
Figure 5-7
EN
Engine Controller Board I/O (3 of 4)
Power Supply System 5-11
Figure 5-8
Engine Controller Board I/O (4 of 4)
Laser and Scanner Drive Based on information received from the Formatter, the Engine Controller Board sends signals to the Laser/Scanner Assembly to modulate the laser diode on and off and to drive the Laser/Scanner motor. See “Image Formation System” on page 5-22 for more information.
5-12 Functional Information
EN
Paper Motion Monitoring and Control The Engine Controller Board controls paper motion by continuously monitoring the various paper sensors, and coordinating paper movement with the other print processes. For more information, see “Paper Feed System” on page 5-33.
Solenoids, Sensors, Clutches, and Switches See “Engine Controller Board Inputs and Outputs” on page 5-9.
Engine Test Print See “Engine Test” on page 7-11.
EN
Power Supply System 5-13
Motors See “Timing Diagram” on page 5-50 for specific timing details for the printer motors. The Main Motor, MT1, is controlled by the Engine Controller Board. The Main Motor drives the main Gear Assembly and rotates during the Initial Rotation period (following power-on), the Print period, the Last Rotation period, or whenever the printer’s Top Cover is opened and closed.
Figure 5-9
Main Motor Control The Main Motor is a DC brushless motor and is unified with the motor drive circuit. The CPU (IC501) sets the main motor drive signal (/MON) to “L” and rotates the main motor. When printing at 1200 dpi, the CPU sets the main motor rotation switching signal (/HALF) to “L” and decreases the rotation speed of the main motor to half.
5-14 Functional Information
EN
The Scanner Motor is controlled and monitored by the Engine Controller Board. It rotates the scanner mirror during the Initial Rotation period and the print period. The Fan Motor is controlled and monitored by the Engine Controller Board. The Fan operates at full speed during the printing modes. The Fan turns off in PowerSave mode after the Fuser cools down.
EN
Power Supply System 5-15
Formatter System The Formatter PCA is responsible for the following: z
Controlling the PowerSave mode.
z
Receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces.
z
Monitoring Control Panel inputs and relaying printer status information (through the Control Panel and the Bidirectional I/O).
z
Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine.
z
Storing font information.
z
Communicating with the host computer through the Bidirectional Interface.
The Formatter PCA receives a print job from the Bidirectional Interface and separates it into image information and instructions which control the printing process. The Engine Controller Board synchronizes the Image Formation System with the Paper Input and Output Systems, and then signals the Formatter to send the print image data. The Formatter PCA also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for two EIO cards, additional memory DIMMs, and the Hard Disk accessory.
PowerSave This feature (accessed from the Configuration Menu) conserves power by shutting down the Fuser and exhaust Fans after the printer has been idle for an adjustable period of time. The printer retains all printer settings, downloaded fonts, and macros while in PowerSave mode. The default setting is POWERSAVE ON, with a 30 minute idle time. (PowerSave can also be turned OFF from the Control Panel.) The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm up cycle when any of the following occurs: z
A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the parallel port or an EIO card.
z
A Control Panel key is pressed.
z
The top cover is opened and then closed.
z
A paper tray is opened and then closed.
z
The Engine Test button is pressed.
5-16 Functional Information
EN
Note
Printer error messages override the PowerSave message. The printer will enter PowerSave mode at the appropriate time, but the error message will continue to be displayed.
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) The Formatter PCA contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which modifies the standard video dot data on its way to the Engine Controller Board to produce “smoothed” black-to-white boundaries. REt can be turned on or off from the Control Panel, or from some software applications. The default setting is medium. Note
REt settings sent from software applications or printer drivers override the Control Panel settings.
EconoMode The EconoMode setting uses up to 50% less toner than standard mode printing by reducing the dot density. However, EconoMode does not extend Toner Cartridge component life. EconoMode, which can be thought of as “draft mode” can be selected from the Control Panel (Print Quality Menu) and through some software applications and printer drivers. The default setting is off. Note
EN
EconoMode does not affect print speed, memory usage, nor extend the Toner Cartridge’s life.
Formatter System 5-17
Input/Output Parallel Interface The Formatter PCA receives incoming data through its Bidirectional interface (IEEE 1284). The I/O provides high speed and two way communication between the printer and the host, allowing the user to change printer settings and monitor printer status from the host computer. The user may configure the HIGH SPEED item in the Control Panel menu. The default setting, YES, allows the I/O to run at the higher speeds supported by most newer computers. When set to NO, the parallel interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible for older computers. The user may also configure the ADVANCED FUNCTIONS item. The default setting, ON, allows for two way parallel communications. The OFF mode disables the advanced functionality. The I/O is compatible with the Bi-directional parallel interface standard.
Expanded I/O The optional Expanded I/O card can be installed in the slots provided on the Formatter PCA. It provides automatic I/O switching between multiple computers or networks connected to the printer. The network version printers include the HP JetDirect Multi-protocol Network Card with Ethernet/10Base-T and 10Base-2, and LocalTalk.
Flash Flash is provided in optional 2 and 4 MB flash memory DIMMs for storage of forms, fonts, and signatures.
Disk The optional 1.2 GB EIO-based hard drive is used for creating multiple original prints (mopies) and storage of forms, fonts, and signatures.
Local Talk I/O The printer implements AppleTalk networking protocol through LocalTalk hardware. The LocalTalk network cable (HP P/N 92215N) is connected through the EIO card.
CPU The Formatter PCA incorporates a 100MHz RISC processor.
5-18 Functional Information
EN
Printer Memory Note
If the printer encounters difficulty managing available memory, a clearable warning message will be displayed on the Control Panel. Some printer messages are affected by the Auto Continue and Clearable Warning settings from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s Control Panel. If CLEARABLE WARNING=JOB is set on the Control Panel, warning messages display on the Control Panel until the end of the job from which they were generated. If CLEARABLE WARNING=ON is set, warning messages display on the Control Panel until [Go] is pressed. If an error occurs that prevents printing and AUTO CONTINUE=ON is set, the printer goes offline for 10 seconds before it returns online. If AUTO CONTINUE=OFF is set, the message displays until [Go] is pressed.
Read Only Memory (ROM) Besides storing microprocessor control programs, the ROM stores dot patterns of internal character sets (fonts).
Random Access Memory (RAM) The RAM contains the page and I/O buffers and the font storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print image data before the data is sent to the print engine (see “Page Protect” below). RAM memory capacities for each printer are shown in “Printer Features” on page 1-2. Memory capacity can be increased by adding DIMMs to the Formatter PCA. Note that adding memory (DIMMs) may also increase the print speed of complex graphics.
EN
Formatter System 5-19
DIMM Slots The DIMM slots may be used to add memory, fonts, or firmware upgrades. Note that DIMMs and SIMMS are not compatible.
Non-Volatile Memory (NVRAM) The printer uses NVRAM to store I/O and information on the print environment’s configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected.
Disk Accessory The Disk Accessory is mounted on the rear of the Formatter PCA. It can be used to permanently store downloaded fonts and forms in the printer.
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) The Hewlett-Packard Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety of font and data compression methods. Note
MEt is only available in PCL mode; it is not functional when printing in PS mode.
Page Protect Page complexity (rules, complex graphics, or dense text) may exceed the printer’s ability to create the page image fast enough to keep pace with the Image Formation Process. If Page Protect is disabled, and a page is too complex, it may print in parts (for example, the top half on one page and the bottom half on the next page). Some print data loss is likely in these instances, and the printer will display the 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX error message, alternating with PRESS GO TO CONTINUE. Page Protect allows the Formatter to create the entire page image in page buffer memory before physically moving the paper through the printer. This process ensures that the entire page will be printed. Page Protect applies only to PCL printing. The default setting is Auto.
5-20 Functional Information
EN
PJL Overview Printer Job Language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard Printer Command Language (PCL). With standard cabling, PJL allows the printer to perform functions such as: z
Two-way communication with the host computer through a Bidirectional Parallel connection. The printer can tell the host such things as the Control Panel settings, and allows the Control Panel settings to be changed from the host.
z
Dynamic I/O switching allows the printer to be configured with a host on each I/O. The printer can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. This can occur even when the printer is offline.
z
Context-sensitive switching allows the printer to automatically recognize the personalities (PostScript or PCL) of each job and configure itself to serve that personality.
z
Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is sent to the printer in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are formatted for landscape printing.
PML PML is a printer Management Language that allows remote configuration and status readback through the I/O Ports.
Control Panel The Formatter PCA sends and receives printer status and command data via a Control Panel PCA. See “Using the Control Panel” on page 3-2, and to “Printer Messages” on page 7-17 for more information.
EN
Formatter System 5-21
Image Formation System The image formation system is the main part of the printer, and consists of six stages: 1. Cleaning 2. Conditioning 3. Writing
4. Developing 5. Transferring 6. Fusing
When the Formatter Board sends the print signal to the Engine Controller Board, it drives the main motor to rotate the photosensitive drum, the developing cylinder, the primary charging roller, and the transfer charging roller. The primary charging roller places a uniform negative charge on the surface of the photosensitive drum. The laser beam modulated by the video signal is illuminated on the photosensitive drum surface to form the latent image on the drum with the laser diode. The latent image formed on the photosensitive drum is changed to a visual image by the toner on the developing cylinder, then transferred to the paper by the transfer charging roller. The residual toner on the photosensitive drum surface is scraped down with the cleaning blade. The potential on the drum is uniformed by the primary charging roller to prepare for a new latent image. The cartridge has a toner sensor that detects the remaining toner level and the presence of the cartridge. If the toner in the cartridge becomes lower than the specified level or if there is no cartridge in the printer, it is reported to the Formatter.
5-22 Functional Information
EN
Figure 5-10
Image Formation System After the image has been transferred to the paper, it is then fused onto the paper by heat and pressure at the Fuser.
EN
Image Formation System 5-23
Toner Cartridge
Figure 5-11
Toner Cartridge A major portion of the Image Formation system is contained in the cartridge as shown in the figure above. The Toner Cartridge is the “heart” of the Image Formation System. It houses the cleaning, conditioning, and developing steps of the process. The Toner Cartridge contains the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing station, toner cavity, and cleaning station. Including these components that wear, degrade, or are consumed in the replaceable Toner Cartridge eliminates the need for a service call when replacement is required. The printer also has a new cartridge drive system that minimizes banding, with more constant paper speed.
5-24 Functional Information
EN
Photosensitive Drum The special properties of the photosensitive drum allow an image to be formed on the drum surface and then transferred to paper. The drum is an aluminum cylinder. The outside of the cylinder is coated with a layer of organic-photoconductive material (OPC) which is non-toxic. The OPC material has properties similar to a photo-resistor. It becomes electrically conductive when exposed to light. (The negative charges deposited on the drum are conducted to the ground potential of the drum base.) Areas not exposed to light remain non-conductive and maintain their negative charge. The aluminum base of the photosensitive drum is electrically connected to ground potential.
Photosensitive Layer
Aluminum Base
Figure 5-12
EN
Photosensitive Drum
Image Formation System 5-25
Cleaning the Drum The cleaning blade is in contact with the surface of the drum at all times. As the drum rotates during printing, excess toner is stored in the waste toner receptacle.
Figure 5-13
Cleaning the Drum
5-26 Functional Information
EN
Conditioning the Drum After the drum is cleaned, it must be conditioned. This process consists of applying a uniform negative charge on the surface of the drum with the primary charging roller. The primary charging roller is coated with conductive rubber with an AC bias applied to erase any residual charges and maintain a constant drum surface to create a uniform negative potential on the drum surface. The amount of DC voltage is modified by the print density setting.
Primary charging roller
AC bias
Photosensitive Drum
DC bias
Figure 5-14
EN
Primary Charging Roller
Image Formation System 5-27
Writing the Image During the writing process, a modulated laser diode projects the beam onto the rotating six-sided scanning mirror. As the mirror rotates, the beam reflects off the mirror, through a set of focusing lenses, through a slot in the rear of the Toner Cartridge, and onto the photosensitive drum. The beam sweeps the drum from left to right, discharging the negative potential wherever the beam strikes the surface. This creates a latent electrostatic image, which later is developed into a visible image.
Focusing Lens BDIC PCB
Scanner Motor Scanning Mirror (Hexahedron)
BD Lens
Laser Driver Cylindrical Lens BD Mirror Photosensitive Drum Figure 5-15
Writing the Image Because the beam is sweeping the entire length of the drum and the drum is rotating, the entire surface area of the drum can be covered. The speed of the scanner motor (which turns the scanning mirror) and the speed of the main motor (which turns the drum) are synchronized, and each successive sweep of the beam is offset by 1/1200th of an inch. The beam can be turned on and off to place a dot of light every 1/1200th of an inch. This is how the printer achieves its 1200x1200 dpi resolution. After the writing process, the drum surface has an invisible (latent) electrostatic image. At the end of each sweep, the beam strikes the beam detect lens, generating the Beam Detect Signal (/BD). The BD signal is sent to the Engine Controller Board, where it is converted to an electrical signal used to synchronize the output of data (/VDO) for one sweep (scan line) and to diagnose problems with the laser diode or scanner motor.
5-28 Functional Information
EN
Developing the Image The developing process develops the latent electrostatic image into a visible image on the drum. The developing unit consists of a metallic cylinder that rotates around a fixed magnetic core inside the toner cavity. Toner is a powdery substance made of black plastic resin bound to iron particles, which is uniformly attracted to the magnetic core of the cylinder. The toner particles obtain a negative surface charge by rubbing against the developing cylinder which is connected to a negative DC supply. The negatively charged toner is attached to the discharged (exposed, grounded) areas. An AC potential is applied to the developing cylinder to decrease the attraction between the toner and the magnetic core of the cylinder, and to increase the repelling action of the toner against the areas of the drum not exposed to laser light. This AC potential improves density and contrast.
Figure 5-16
Developing the Image The Print Density control in the Control Panel Menu adjusts the DC bias of the developing cylinder by changing the force of attraction between the toner and drum. A change in the DC bias causes either more or less toner to be attracted to the drum, which in turn either increases of decreases the print density. Both the primary and developer DC bias voltages are changed in response to the density setting.
EN
Image Formation System 5-29
Transferring the Image During the transferring process the toner image on the drum surface is transferred to the paper. A positive charge applied to the back of the paper by the transfer roller causes the negatively charged toner on the drum surface to be attracted to the page. The small diameter of the drum, combined with the stiffness of the paper, causes the paper to peel away from the drum. The static eliminator teeth also help separate the paper from the drum. The static eliminator teeth weaken the attractive forces between the negatively charged drum surface. After separation, the drum is cleaned and conditioned for the next image.
Static Charge Eliminator
Photosensitive Drum
Transfer Charging Roller
Paper Figure 5-17
Transferring the Image
5-30 Functional Information
EN
Image Fusing/Variable Fusing Temperature During the fusing process, the toner is fused into the paper by heat and pressure to produce a permanent image. The paper passes between a heated fusing roller and a soft pressure roller. This melts the toner and presses it into the paper. The fusing roller contains a ceramic heating element that provides heat for the fusing process. Fusing temperature is monitored by the Engine Controller Board, via the thermistor TH901. The Engine Controller Board maintains a temperature of about 383°F (195°C) during print mode. If the fusing system overheats (about 428°F/220°C), a relay opens, interrupting power to the Fusing Heater, causing a Fuser error message (50.X FUSER ERROR). If the fusing system exceeds 464°F (240° C), the thermal fuse will open, cutting off power to the Fuser.
Halogen Heater Fusing Roller
Paper Pressure Roller Toner
Figure 5-18
EN
Image Fusing
Image Formation System 5-31
Variable Fusing Temperature
Figure 5-19
Fusing Temperature Control Variable Fusing Temperature is a feature that gives the user or service technician the ability to adjust the fusing temperature based on the media being used in the printer. The default mode is Normal and should be optimal for most users. There is an optional Low and High Fuser Mode selection. If very heavy or rough media is being used, then High Fuser Mode is beneficial. If transparencies or light media are being used, then Low Fuser Mode might be appropriate. CONFIGURE FUSER MODE is in the Paper Handling Menu and when set to the default of NO, paper types are not displayed in the menu. When CONFIGURE FUSER MODE is set to YES, the different paper types are then displayed in the menu.
5-32 Functional Information
EN
Paper Feed System
Figure 5-20
Paper Path Presence of paper in Tray 1 is detected by the Tray 1 paper sensor (PS105). Presence of paper in Tray 2 is detected by the Tray paper sensor (PS101) for the HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N, and by the upper tray paper sensor (PS101) or the lower tray paper sensor (PS102) for the HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN.
EN
Paper Feed System 5-33
Both the size of the paper in the tray and the presence of a tray are detected by the three switches (SW600, 601, 602) on the paper size detection PCA for the HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N, and by the six switches (SW600, 601, 602, 603, 604, 605) on the paper size detection PCA for the HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN. While the main motor rotates, the Tray 1 pickup solenoid (SL102) is turned on, the Tray 1 pickup roller rotates, and a sheet of paper is fed into the printer. The paper passes the pre-feed roller, which compensates for the skew of the paper. After the top of page sensor (PS103) detects the leading edge of the paper, the horizontal synchronization signal (/TOP) is sent from the Engine Controller Board to the Formatter. After the Formatter receives the /TOP signal, the /VDO signal is sent; this synchronizes the leading edge of the image on the drum with the leading edge of the paper. The paper goes through transfer, separation, and fusing stages, passes through the delivery unit, and is delivered to the Top Output Bin or Rear Output Bin. There are four photo-interrupters (PS102, PS103, PS106, PS501) in the paper path that detect the presence of paper. If the paper does not reach or pass these sensors within a prescribed time interval, the microprocessor on the Engine Controller Board notifies the Formatter of a paper jam.
Clutches and Sensors See “Reference Diagrams” starting on page 7-75 for locations of switches, sensors, and clutches.
5-34 Functional Information
EN
Printing from Tray 1 The presence of paper in Tray 1 is detected by the Tray 1 Paper Sensor (PS105). When the Engine Controller Board receives the /PRNT signal from the Formatter, the printer starts the initial rotation phase. (This consists of Main Motor warm-up, Scanner Motor warm-up, High-Voltage control sequence and Fuser warm-up.) When the initial rotation phase ends, the Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid (SL102) is turned on. The cam rotates, the paper tray lifter rises, and the paper comes in contact with the Tray 1 Pickup Roller. At the same time, the Tray 1 Pickup Roller rotates once and a sheet of paper in Tray 1 is picked up. The Separation Pad removes the unnecessary sheets, and the paper is at the Top-of-Page Sensor (PS103) when SL102 is turned back on again. The paper then reaches the Registration Arm, where its skew is corrected. Then it goes through transfer, separation, and fusing stages, passes through the delivery unit, and is delivered to the tray.
Figure 5-21
EN
Tray 1 Pickup Timing
Paper Feed System 5-35
Figure 5-22
Tray 1 Pickup
5-36 Functional Information
EN
Printing from Tray 2 When the Formatter inputs the /PRNT signal to the printer, the main motor (M1) starts rotation. When the Main Motor reaches its prescribed speed, the Feed Roller Clutch (CL101) and Tray 2 Pickup Solenoid (SL 101 or SL 103) are turned on. (The Tray 2 Pickup Roller, Tray 2 Feed Roller, Separation Roller, and Feed Rollers are driven by the Main Motor rotation.) The Tray 2 Pickup Roller, driven by the Pickup Solenoid, rotates once and picks up the paper in the tray. The unnecessary sheets are removed by the Separation Roller and the paper is fed to the pre-feed sensor (PS102). The CPU monitors the condition of the PS102 for a prescribed period of time. If PS102 does not detect paper within that time, the CPU resumes feeding the paper, maintaining the appropriate between-page distance for continuous printing. The paper then reaches the Registration Arm, where its skew is corrected. Then it goes through transfer, separation, and fusing stages, passes through the delivery unit, and is delivered to the tray.
Figure 5-23
EN
Tray 2 Pickup Timing
Paper Feed System 5-37
Figure 5-24
Tray 2 Pickup
5-38 Functional Information
EN
Multi-Feed Prevention Mechanism When feeding paper from Tray 2, the printer uses the Separation Roller to prevent multi-feeding. Normally, the Separation Roller is imparted with a rotational force in the same direction as the Feed Roller. However, since the Separation Roller is equipped with a torque limiter, it rotates with Feed Roller 1 by transmission of its rotational force via the transported paper. On the other hand, if multiple sheets of paper are picked up, the low friction force between the sheets of paper results in a weak rotational force being transmitted to the Separation Roller from Feed Roller 1. Consequently, the Separation Roller’s own rotational force separates the extra sheet.
Figure 5-25
EN
Multi-Feed Prevention Mechanism
Paper Feed System 5-39
Printing from the Optional 500-sheet Tray The operation sequences of the paper feeder are controlled by the paper feeder driver. A 4-bit microprocessor is used in the paper feeder driver, which controls the sequences of the paper feeder and the serial communication with the Engine Controller Board. The Engine Controller Board outputs the pickup command to the paper feeder driver with the necessary timing. The paper feeder driver drives the solenoid in response to the pickup command. The paper feeder driver also returns the status of the paper feeder to the Engine Controller Board. +24VDC is supplied to the paper feeder from the printer, and +3.3V for the ICs is generated from +24VDC inside the paper feeder driver.
Figure 5-26
Paper Feed Driver I/O
5-40 Functional Information
EN
Pickup and Feeding The paper feeder picks up the paper from the installed trays and feeds the paper to the printer. The flow of the paper is shown below.
Figure 5-27
Paper Feed from Trays The paper size and the presence of the 500-sheet tray are detected by three switches (SW801, 802, 803) on the paper feeder driver PCA. The relationship between the switch combinations and the paper sizes is the same as for the printer. The paper feeder is driven by the Main Motor (M101) of the printer. When the /PRNT signal is sent to the paper feeder from the Formatter, the main motor (M101) of the printer starts rotation. When the Main Motor reaches its prescribed speed, the paper feeder driver PCA receives the pickup command from the Engine Controller Board, and the paper feeder pickup solenoid (SL801) is turned on. (The Pickup Roller, Feed Roller, and Separation Roller are driven by the Main Motor’s rotation.) The Pickup Roller, driven by the solenoid, rotates once, picking up the paper inside the 500-sheet Tray. Any unnecessary sheets are removed by the Separation Roller and the paper is fed to the pre-feed sensor (PS102) of the printer.
EN
Paper Feed System 5-41
The CPU on the Engine Controller Board monitors the conditions of the PS102 for a prescribed period of time after the pickup starts. If the PS102 does not detect paper within that time interval, the CPU turns off the feed roller clutch (CL101) to stop the paper after the top of page sensor (PS103) detects the presence of the preceding page. The paper then reaches the Registration Arm, where its skew is corrected. Then it goes through transfer, separation, and fusing stages, passes through the delivery unit, and is delivered to the output bin.
5-42 Functional Information
EN
Figure 5-28
EN
Paper Feed Pickup
Paper Feed System 5-43
Envelope Feeder The operation sequences of the envelope feeder are controlled by the envelope feeder driver. A 4-bit microprocessor is used in the envelope feeder driver, which controls the sequences of the envelope feeder and the serial communication with the Engine Controller Board of the printer. The Engine Controller Board outputs the pickup command to the paper feeder driver with the necessary timing. The envelope feeder driver drives the solenoid in response to the command. The envelope feeder driver also returns the envelope feeder status to the Engine Controller Board. +24VDC is supplied to the envelope feeder from the printer, and +3.3V for the ICs is generated from the +24VDC inside the paper feeder driver.
Pickup and Feeding The envelope feeder picks up the envelope from the envelope feeder and feeds it to the printer. The envelope path is shown below.
Figure 5-29
Envelope Feed The envelope feeder is driven by the Main Motor (M101) of the printer. When the /PRNT signal is sent to the printer from the Formatter, the printer starts the initial rotation phase. (This phase consists of Main Motor start-up, Scanner Motor start-up, High-Voltage control sequence, and Fusing unit start-up.) When the initial rotation phase is
5-44 Functional Information
EN
completed, the envelope feeder driver PCA receives the pickup command from the Engine Controller Board and turns on the envelope pickup solenoid (SL901). The Pickup Roller, Feed Roller and Separation Roller are rotated sequentially by the Main Motor rotation, and an envelope is picked up. Then, any unnecessary envelopes are removed by the separation roller, and the envelope is fed to the printer.
Figure 5-30
EN
Envelope Feed Pickup
Paper Feed System 5-45
Duplexer The operation sequences of the Duplexer are controlled by the Duplexer driver. A 4-bit microprocessor is used in the Duplexer driver, which controls the sequences of the Duplexer and the serial communication with the Engine Controller Board. The Duplexer driver drives the solenoid, motors, and fan according to commands sent from the Engine Controller Board to the Duplexer and duplex pickup command via serial communication. The Duplexer also returns its status to the Engine Controller Board. +24VDC is supplied to the Duplexer from the printer, and +5V for the ICs is generated from the +24VDC inside the Duplexer driver.
Reversing and Duplexer Pickup The paper is fed to the Duplexer by the Top Output Bin deflector. This Top Output Bin deflector moves in conjunction with the Top Output Bin. However, the Top Output Bin deflector is controlled by the Duplexer solenoid (SL701) when the Top Output Bin is closed. The feed direction of the paper in the Duplexer is controlled by the reversing roller. The paper is then transported by the oblique roller and feed roller so that its edge contacts with the left panel to correct its skew. The Duplexer has two stepping motors, the reversing motor (M701) and the duplex feed motor (M702). Normal and reverse rotations are controlled by the Duplexer driver.
5-46 Functional Information
EN
Figure 5-31
EN
Paper Path for the Duplexer
Paper Feed System 5-47
Figure 5-32
Paper Feed for the Duplexer
Paper Jam There are four photointerrupters (PS102, PS103, PS106, PS501) in the paper path for detecting the presence of the paper. If the paper does not reach or pass three sensors within the prescribed time, the microprocessor in the Engine Controller Board notifies the Formatter of a paper jam.
5-48 Functional Information
EN
Basic Sequence of Operation The Formatter PCA and the Engine Controller Board share information during printer operation. The Interface PCA forms a link which operates as a serial data bus. This allows printer status, command, and dot-image data to be passed between the two PCAs. Table 5-1 shows the general timing of the printer events. The following events take place during normal printer operation:
Table 5-1. Printer Timing Period
Timing
Purpose
WAIT
From power on to the end of Main Motor initial rotation.
Clears the drum surface potential and cleans the Transfer Roller.
STBY (standby)
Maintains the printer in ready state. From the end of the WAIT or the LSTR period until the input of the PRNT signal from the Formatter. Or from the end of the LSTR period until power off.
INTR (initial rotation) From the input of the PRNT signal Stabilizes the photosensitive drum from the Formatter until the engine sensitivity in preparation for controller outputs the TOP signal. printing. Also cleans the Transfer Roller. PRNT
After the end of initial rotation until Forms images on the the top of the page sensor detects photosensitive drum based on the / VDO signal from the Formatter the trailing edge of the paper. and transfers the image to paper.
LSTR (last rotation)
From the primary voltage (DC) off until the Main Motor stops.
Delivers the last sheet of paper and cleans the Transfer Roller.
If another PRNT signal is sent from the Formatter, the printer returns to the INTR period. If not, it returns to the STBY period.
EN
Basic Sequence of Operation 5-49
Figure 5-33
Timing Diagram
5-50 Functional Information
EN
6
Removing and Replacing Parts
Overview This chapter discusses the following:
Removal and Replacement Strategy Removing Covers Removing Assemblies Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module
EN
Overview 6-1
Removal and Replacement Strategy This chapter describes the complete disassembly of the printer. In every instance, tasks that must be performed before beginning the procedure are listed first. Remove the assemblies in the order listed to prevent damage during re-assembly. To ensure optimum print quality, the printer will prompt to have routine maintenance performed every 200,000 pages. When the message PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE appears on the control panel, the Printer Maintenance Kit must be installed. See page 4-5. Servicing the printer involves replacing printed circuit and electro-mechanical assemblies. Do not repair component failures within these assemblies. In all instances, replace the failed assembly. The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure, except where specific instructions are provided. WARNING!
Some sheet metal edges, particularly around the formatter cage, are sharp. Be careful when working in these areas to avoid cutting yourself.
CAUTION
The printer contains parts that are sensitive to Electrostatic-Static Discharge (ESD). Always observe proper ESD procedures when servicing the printer. The ESD symbol appears in this chapter when the parts being serviced are especially susceptible to ESD damage. It is usually best to remove and replace the covers in the order shown. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord and any cables.
6-2 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Tools z
Phillips #2 magnetized screwdriver with 6-inch shaft
z
Flat-blade screwdriver with 6-inch shaft
z
Needle-nose pliers
z
Penlight
Screws Used in the Printer All screws used in the printer are Phillips head, which require a Phillips screwdriver. The following figure shows the difference between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver. Note that the Phillips tip has more beveled surfaces. CAUTION
Using a Posidriv screwdriver will damage the screw heads. Use Phillips only.
Phillips
Figure 6-1
Posidriv
Comparing Phillips and Posidriv Screwdrivers Table 6-1 on page 6-4 describes the screws used in the printer and provides guidelines to help determine where each type of screw is used. The screws can vary in length depending on the thickness of the material being fastened. Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one into its original location.
EN
Removal and Replacement Strategy 6-3
Table 6-1. Screws Used in the Printer Drawing and Description
Purpose
Used to fasten metal to metal when good electrical contact is needed. Threaded Phillips with captive star washer
Used to fasten metal or plastic to plastic mainframes. Silver Self-tapping Phillips screw
Used to fasten metal or plastic to plastic mainframes. Black Self-tapping Phillips screw
Used to fasten metal or plastic to threaded plastic or metal. Threaded Phillips screw with lock and flat washer
6-4 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Table 6-1. Screws Used in the Printer (continued) Drawing and Description
Purpose
Used to anchor Tray 1 Pickup Assembly Long screw (4.8 inches/116 millimeters)
Hint
EN
To insert self-tapping screws, turn the screw to the left (counter-clockwise) until it clicks, then turn it to the right (clockwise) until it is seated. If a self-tapping screw-hole strips, you must repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly.
Removal and Replacement Strategy 6-5
Removing Covers It is usually best to remove and replace the covers in the order shown. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord and any cables. Hint
Left and right are indicated as you face the front of the printer unless otherwise noted.
Rear Right Side Cover
Figure 6-2
Removing the Rear Right Side Cover The Formatter and dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) are located underneath the Right Side Cover. 1. Grasp the Cover by its rear lip and pull it firmly toward the rear of the printer until it stops. 2. Remove the Cover from the printer.
6-6 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Top Cover Open the Top Cover and remove the Toner Cartridge. CAUTION
To prevent damage to the Toner Cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. To remove the Top Cover, you must remove the Rear Right Side Cover (page 6-6), the Toner Cartridge Drive Arm (page 6-9), the Control Panel Overlay and the Control Panel (below).
Control Panel Overlay
Figure 6-3
Removing the Control Panel Overlay 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry upward on the right side of the Control Panel Overlay to loosen it. 2. Remove the Control Panel Overlay from the tabs on the left and lift it upward, off of the printer.
EN
Removing Covers 6-7
Control Panel Tab
Figure 6-4
Removing the Control Panel 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, pry each side of the Control Panel upward. 2. Remove the top of the Control Panel from the tab. 3. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the Control Panel.
6-8 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Toner Cartridge Drive Arm
Figure 6-5
Removing the Toner Cartridge Drive Arm 1. Remove the Toner Cartridge Drive Arm by using needle-nose pliers to pinch the pin from its hinge on the Top Cover.
Note
EN
Be sure to reconnect the Toner Cartridge Drive Arm when you replace the Top Cover, or the Toner Cartridge will not seat properly.
Removing Covers 6-9
Toner cartridge drive arm Rear screws Top screws
Figure 6-6
Removing the Top Cover 2. Remove the four screws holding the Top Cover (two are behind the Rear Output Bin, near the top, and two are on top of the printer under the Top Cover).
6-10 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Release tab if necessary
Figure 6-7
Releasing Tabs to Lift the Top Cover 3. Squeeze the right front side of the Top Cover to remove it. It may be necessary to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the tab inside the small hole. 4. Holding the Output Assembly in place (located toward the rear of the printer), remove the Top Cover.
EN
Removing Covers 6-11
Left Side Cover
Latch (inside)
Figure 6-8
Catches
Removing the Left Side Cover 1. Open Tray 1. 2. Release the latch on the Left Side Cover from the inside of the printer. Release the catches on the front side of the Cover. 3. Lift the Cover upward to release the front top side of the Cover, then pull the Cover away from the printer.
6-12 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Front Right Side Cover Latch
Figure 6-9
Removing the Front Right Side Cover 1. Release the latch at the top center of the Cover. 2. Lift the Cover straight up until it is free of the tabs at the bottom and the power switch rod, then pull it away from the printer.
Hint
EN
When you reinstall the Front Right Side Cover, be sure to reconnect the power switch rod.
Removing Covers 6-13
Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin
Step 2
Step 1
Figure 6-10
Removing the Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin 1. Facing the rear of the printer, pinch the right side of the Rear Output Bin and release the hinge from the slot. 2. Rotate the Bin upward and slide it to the right to release the left hinge.
6-14 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Tray 1
Figure 6-11
Removing Tray 1 from the Front Cover 1. Open Tray 1. 2. Push outward on the two slot hinges to release the pins on Tray 1. 3. Slide the Front Cover to the right and remove it from the three hinges on the bottom.
EN
Removing Covers 6-15
Figure 6-12
Removing the Tray 1 Sensor Arm Cover 4. Firmly pull both sides of the Tray 1 Sensor Arm Cover toward you until it releases from the shaft. See Figure 6-13, “Detail of the Tray 1 Sensor Arm Cover,” on page 6-17. 5. Rotate Tray 1 downward and remove it from the two hinges.
6-16 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Figure 6-13
Detail of the Tray 1 Sensor Arm Cover
Hint
When you reinstall the Tray 1 Sensor Arm Cover be sure the Sensor Arms move freely.
EN
Removing Covers 6-17
Removing Assemblies The order in which you replace the following assemblies depends on the part needing to be replaced. It is not necessary to remove every assembly.
Fuser WARNING!
Let the Fuser Assembly cool before disassembly. 1. Remove the Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin (page 6-14).
Figure 6-14
Removing the Left and Right Duplex Connector Covers 2. If a Duplexer is installed, remove it. If a Duplexer is not installed, remove the Left and Right Duplex Access Covers from the rear of the printer by pulling each from the bottom.
6-18 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Figure 6-15
Loosening the Captive Screws in the Fuser Assembly 3. Loosen the two captive screws on the Fuser Assembly. 4. Pull the Fuser Assembly straight out of the printer.
EN
Removing Assemblies 6-19
Formatter Cage Assembly
For accessing DIMMs
EIO accessory
Figure 6-16
Removing the Formatter Cage Assembly 1. Print a Configuration Page. The information is necessary to reconfigure the printer after you replace the Formatter. 2. Remove the Rear Right Side Cover (page 6-6). The Formatter Cage Assembly is directly underneath. 3. Remove the captive screw and open the DIMM access door to see if any DIMMs are installed. Remove and transfer any DIMMs or EIO accessories if you replace the Formatter. 4. Remove the 5 screws around the Formatter Cage. 5. Slide the Formatter toward the rear of the printer and remove it.
Note
Using the Configuration Page you printed in step 1above, reconfigure the printer after replacing the Formatter. Be sure to reset the printer’s page count (page 4-5).
6-20 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Output Assembly
Brass arm
Figure 6-17
White tab
Removing the Output Assembly 1. Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7). The Output Assembly is on the top, rear of the printer.
EN
Removing Assemblies 6-21
2. Facing the rear of the printer, release the 2 latches as follows:
Figure 6-18
Left End of Output Assembly (Brass Arm) a. On the left end of the Assembly, rotate the brass arm up 90°.
Figure 6-19
Right End of Output Assembly (White Tab) b. On the right end of the Assembly, release the white tab. 3. Lift the Assembly up and out of the printer.
CAUTION
Lift the Assembly carefully to avoid damaging the Top Output Bin Full Sensor Flag. When the Assembly is replaced, the Flag must be able to rotate freely.
6-22 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Laser Scanner Shutter interlock and plate
Figure 6-20
Removing the Laser Scanner 1. Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7). The Laser Scanner is on the top of the printer, tilted toward the rear, and has a yellow label on it. 2. Unplug the 3 connectors as shown. 3. Remove the 4 black screws around the edges of the Laser Scanner. Do not remove the two screws on the cover of the Laser Scanner. 4. Lift the Laser Scanner straight up.
Hint
EN
When you replace the Laser Scanner be sure the black shutter interlock is resting on top of the silver shutter plate.
Removing Assemblies 6-23
Fan
Figure 6-21
Removing the Fan 1. Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7) and the Left Side Cover (page 6-12). The Fan is on the left side of the printer. 2. Unplug the Fan’s connector to the Engine Controller Board. 3. Squeeze the latches on the left and right sides of the Fan Cover. 4. Pull the Fan straight out.
Hint
The Cover attaches to the Fan at the top right and bottom left corners. Retain the Cover; it is separate from the replacement Fan.
6-24 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Main Motor
Figure 6-22
Removing the Main Motor 1. Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7) and the Front Right Side Cover (page 6-13). The Main Motor is on the right front side of the printer. 2. Unplug the connector. 3. Remove the 4 silver screws around the corners of the metal plate. 4. Remove the Main Motor from the printer.
EN
Removing Assemblies 6-25
Transfer Roller
DO NOT TOUCH!
(See Hint)
Figure 6-23
Removing the Transfer Roller 1. Open the Top Cover and remove the Toner Cartridge. The Transfer Roller is underneath the Toner Cartridge.
CAUTION
Do not touch the black rubber part of the Roller. Skin oils on the Roller can cause problems with print quality. 2. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, pry the right end of the metal shaft out of place, then the left end.
Hint
When you replace the Transfer Roller, make sure the black collar is oriented properly, with the open end down.
6-26 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Tray 1 Pickup Roller
Figure 6-24
Removing the Pickup Roller (shown with Envelope Entrance Cover removed) 1. Open Tray 1. The Tray 1 Pickup Roller is in the center of the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly. 2. Grasp the Envelope Entrance Cover and pull it straight away from the printer. 3. Pry open the blue latch on the Roller. 4. Lift the Roller out.
Hint
EN
To replace the Roller, make sure the pin in the Roller lines up with the hole in the shaft.
Removing Assemblies 6-27
Figure 6-25
Detail of the Tray 1 Pickup Roller
6-28 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly 1. Remove the Covers (starting on page 6-6): Top Cover, Left Side Cover, Front Right Side Cover, and Tray 1. The Tray 1 Pickup Assembly is on the front of the printer.
Envelope Feeder Gear Cover
Step 4b
Step 4a
Figure 6-26
Envelope Feeder Connector Cover
Removing the Envelope Feeder Gear Cover 2. Flip down or remove the Envelope Feeder Connector Cover. 3. Remove the Envelope Entrance Cover. 4. Remove the Envelope Feeder Gear Cover as follows: a. Remove the black self-tapping screw at the bottom of the Envelope Feeder Gear Cover. b. Remove the long screw (4.8 inches/116 millimeters) on the right side of the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly.
EN
Removing Assemblies 6-29
Figure 6-27
Removing the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly - Right Side 5. Disconnect the solenoid cable on the right side of the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly. (Note the way the cables are routed for replacement.)
6-30 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Step 7 Step 8
Step 6
Figure 6-28
Removing the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly - Left Side 6. Unplug the connector to the Engine Controller Board on the left side of the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly. 7. Remove the long screw (4.8 inches/116 millimeters) from the left side of the Assembly. 8. Remove the self-tapping screw shown.
EN
Removing Assemblies 6-31
Toner cartridge guide
Figure 6-29
Removing the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly - Front Side 9. Remove the 3 screws shown. 10. Lift the black Toner Cartridge Guide on the right side of the Assembly and pull the Assembly straight out of the printer. See page 6-33 for procedure.
6-32 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide You can lift aside the Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide (instead of removing it) to access the Registration Assembly. It is not necessary to unplug the connectors. Remove the Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide to access the Gear Train. Follow the steps below: 1. Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7), Front Right Side Cover (page 6-13), and Tray 1 (page 6-15). The Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide is on the right front side of the printer.
Step 3
Step 4 Step 2 Figure 6-30
Removing the Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide 2. Remove the black self-tapping screw. 3. Unplug the 3 connectors if necessary. 4. Remove the small silver screw to disconnect the ground wire. 5. Lift the Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide off the printer.
EN
Removing Assemblies 6-33
Registration Assembly
Figure 6-31
Removing the Registration Assembly 1. Remove the following Covers (starting on page 6-6): Top Cover, Left Side Cover, Front Right Side Cover, and Tray 1. Remove the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (page 6-29). The Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide can be lifted without removal (page 6-33). The Registration Assembly is under the Toner Cartridge. 2. Remove the 3 black self-tapping screws shown. (Lift the green handle on the right end of the Registration Assembly to access the black screw on the left rear side.)
6-34 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
DO NOT REMOVE!
Figure 6-32
Detail of Screws for the Registration Assembly
CAUTION
Do not remove the silver screw closest to the Registration Assembly! It holds the spring in place. Take out the silver screw farther from the Registration Assembly, the one that is under the green handle. 3. Lift the green handle. Remove the 2 black self-tapping screws and the rearmost silver screw shown. See the Caution above.
Hint
EN
If the anti-static bar becomes displaced, reinstall it with the left end in the slot, or paper may jam in this area.
Removing Assemblies 6-35
Paper Feed Assembly 1. Remove the following Covers (starting on page 6-6): Top Cover, Left Side Cover, Front Right Side Cover, and Tray 1. Remove the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (page 6-29). The Paper Feed Assembly is on the front of the printer.
Note routing
Figure 6-33
Unplugging the Connector to the Paper Feed Assembly 2. Unplug and unroute the 2-pin connector from the right side.
CAUTION
For replacement of the Paper Feed Assembly, note the way the wires are routed to the connector. If a wire is routed improperly, it can be damaged.
6-36 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Figure 6-34
Removing the Upper Screws from the Paper Feed Assembly 3. Remove the 2 black upper screws.
Hint
EN
After replacing the Paper Feed Assembly, make sure to insert the 2 upper screws only. The 2 lower screws are for holding the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly in place.
Removing Assemblies 6-37
Hint
For replacement of the Paper Feed Assembly, orient the clutch properly by inserting it into the slot, as shown.
Figure 6-35
Detail of the Paper Feed Clutch
6-38 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Formatter Pan
Figure 6-36
Removing the Formatter Pan 1. Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7) and the Front Right Side Cover (page 6-13). Remove the Formatter Cage Assembly (page 6-20). The Formatter Pan is on the right rear side. Remove the Formatter Pan in order to split the engine from the Tray Assembly or to access the Gear Train. 2. Remove the 4 black self-tapping screws. 3. Remove the 3 silver M-3 screws. 4. Pull the Formatter Pan straight out, away from the printer.
EN
Removing Assemblies 6-39
Gear Train Toner Cartridge Drive Arm
Step 4
Figure 6-37
Removing the Gear Train 1. Remove the following Covers (starting on page 6-6): Top Cover, Front Right Side Cover, Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin, and Tray 1. Remove the Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide (page 6-33), the Registration Assembly (page 6-34), the Formatter Cage Assembly (page 6-20), and the Formatter Pan (page 6-39). The Gear Train is on the right side of the printer. 2. If the Registration Assembly has not already been removed, take out the rearmost silver screw under the green handle (page 6-35). 3. Remove the 8 black self-tapping screws. 4. Pull the Ribbon Cable Assembly outward (off the pin), then down, out of the way. 5. Remove any remaining wires from the white plastic guide. 6. Slide out the Gear Train.
Note
When you reinstall the Gear Train, slide the top in first and then push the bottom in.
6-40 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Delivery Drive Assembly
Figure 6-38
Removing the Delivery Drive Assembly 1. Remove the Covers (starting on page 6-6): Top Cover, Left Side Cover, Front Right Side Cover, Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin, and Tray 1. Remove the Output Assembly (page 6-21), Formatter Cage Assembly (page 6-20), Formatter Pan (page 6-39), and Fuser Assembly (page 6-18). The Delivery Drive Assembly is on the right rear side of the printer. 2. Remove the single screw. 3. Unplug the 3-pin connector shown. 4. Lift the Delivery Drive Assembly upward, away from the printer.
EN
Removing Assemblies 6-41
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module This procedure is the same for printers with a single 500-sheet tray or two 250-sheet trays. 1. Remove the Rear Right Side Cover (page 6-6). Remove the Formatter Cage Assembly (page 6-20), Formatter Pan (page 6-39), and 2 long screws from the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (See Figure 6-26 on page 6-29 and Figure 6-28 on page 6-31).
Figure 6-39
Unplugging the Connector to the Paper Feed Module 2. Unplug the connector to the Paper Feed Module on the right rear side of the printer (under the Formatter Pan). Remove the cable from its bracket.
6-42 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Figure 6-40
Separating the Engine from the Paper Feed Module 3. Remove the single black, self-tapping screw from the left side of the printer, below the Fan.
CAUTION
Lift the Engine carefully, being sure that all cables are disconnected. 4. Lift the Engine away from the Paper Feed Module.
EN
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-43
Engine Controller Board Note
After you replace the Engine Controller Board, do not forget to readjust the top margin as described on page 6-46. 1. Separate the Engine from the Paper Feed Module (page 6-42). The Engine Controller Board is on the underside of the engine and contains the following: • DC Controller • Hi-Voltage Power Supply • AC Power Supply • DC Power Supply • Timing Controls
(In the back, not on the board)
Spring Power switch rod
Figure 6-41
Removing the Engine Controller Board 2. Remove the Fuser Assembly (page 6-18).
6-44 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Facing the front of the engine module: 3. Remove 7 screws (shown in Figure 6-41 on page 6-44): • 4 black, self-tapping M4 screws (3 in front and 1 in the right rear) • From the left rear, 3 M3 screws (1 recessed) 4. Disconnect the spring on the right side from the notch. 5. Disconnect the power switch rod.
Figure 6-42
Removing the Engine Controller Board 6. Lifting from the printer’s left side (the side the Fan is on), tip the board up, then unplug all connectors.
Hint
The black cable router in the middle of the Engine Controller Board can be folded aside with the cables intact. When you replace the board, reconnect and route all cables before reconnecting the power switch rod. Be sure to reconnect the spring on the right side to the ground plate.
EN
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-45
Adjusting the Top Margin When you replace the Engine Controller Board, you must readjust the top margin as follows:
Figure 6-43
Location of VR501 1. After setting the VR501 on the Engine Controller Board to the center position (0), load letter or A4 paper in the tray. Press the engine test print button (located on the left side of the printer, below the vent) to make several test prints.
6-46 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Measure this distance
Figure 6-44
Adjusting the Top Margin 2. Measure the distance between the edge of the paper and the print pattern. Measure all the test prints and calculate the average. 3. Adjust VR501 so that the margin becomes .08 inch (2 millimeters). Turn VR501 clockwise to decrease the margin or counter-clockwise to increase the margin. 4. Make several test prints again and perform step 2 above. If the top margin is still incorrect, repeat the procedure.
EN
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-47
Paper Feed Rollers The following procedure is the same for all HP LaserJet 4000 series printers; there are 2 feed rollers for the HP LaserJet 4000 T and 4000 TN and one feed roller for the HP LaserJet 4000 and 4000 N.
Figure 6-45
Removing the Paper Feed Rollers (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN Shown) 1. Remove the tray(s) from the Feeder. The Paper Feed Rollers are inside the Feeder. 2. Pinch the release at the left side of the roller and slide it off the shaft.
6-48 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Separation Rollers
Figure 6-46
Removing the Separation Rollers The Separation Rollers are inside the paper trays. 1. Release the latch and lift the cover inside the tray. 2. Pinch the release at the left side of the roller and slide it off the shaft.
EN
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-49
Paper Feed Module Plate Remove the Paper Feed Module Plate to access the Controller PCA. This procedure is the same for one 500-sheet tray or two 250-sheet trays.
(Small)
Figure 6-47
Removing the Paper Feed Module Plate 1. Remove the 7 black self-tapping screws (one of them is recessed in front). 2. Remove 2 small metal-to-metal screws.
6-50 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Paper Feed Module Gear Train Assembly This procedure is the same for one 500-sheet tray or two 250-sheet trays.
Unplug connector
Figure 6-48
Removing the Gear Train 1. Remove the long recessed screw shown. 2. Unplug the connector (note routing). 3. Lift the Gear Train upward, away from the Paper Feed Module.
EN
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-51
Paper Feed Module Side Rails Remove the Paper Feed Module Side Rails to access the PCA Controller. This procedure is the same for one 500-sheet tray or two 250-sheet trays.
(Long screw)
Figure 6-49
Unplug connector
Removing the Paper Feed Module Side Rails (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN shown) 1. To remove the side rails, remove the 4 recessed screws (1 is long). 2. Unplug the connector. 3. Lift the side rails off of the Paper Feed Module.
6-52 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
Lower Paper Feed Module Plate (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN)
Figure 6-50
Removing the Lower Paper Feed Module Plate 1. Remove 9 black self-tapping screws. 2. Remove 2 small black M3 screws.
EN
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-53
PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN)
Figure 6-51
Removing the PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN) 1. Pinch the left and right sides of the PCA Cover to release it from the side latches. 2. Rotate the PCA Cover downward and toward you to remove it.
6-54 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N)
Figure 6-52
Removing the PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N) 1. Release the latches shown. 2. Remove the PCA Cover.
EN
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-55
PCA Controller This procedure is the same for one 500-sheet tray or two 250-sheet trays.
Figure 6-53
Removing the PCA Controller 1. Unplug 3 connectors to the PCA Controller. 2. Unclip the left side of the PCA Controller and remove it.
6-56 Removing and Replacing Parts
EN
7
Troubleshooting
Overview This chapter discusses the following:
Troubleshooting Process Troubleshooting the Printing System Reference Diagrams
EN
Overview 7-1
Troubleshooting Process The troubleshooting process is a systematic approach that addresses the major problems first, and then other problems as you identify the causes for printer malfunctions and errors. The Troubleshooting Flowchart on page 7-4 illustrates the major steps for troubleshooting the printing system. Each heading depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “yes” answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to the referenced location and follow the directions for that area. After completing the additional testing, proceed to the next major step. The following list describes the basic questions for the customer and the corresponding troubleshooting step to help you quickly define the problem(s). Table 7-1. Major Steps for Troubleshooting Power On (page 7-7)
Does the printer perform the initialization and power-on steps? This section gives the procedures for correcting power supply problems.
Display (page 7-12)
Does the Control Panel indicate READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE
ON? This section gives the procedures for clearing Control Panel error messages and displaying and correcting Event Log codes.
Event Log (page 7-13)
Are there recurring problems in the Event Log? This section gives information about printing the Event Log and evaluating the error history.
General Paper Path Troubleshooting (page 7-42)
7-2 Troubleshooting
Is there a paper jam in the printer? This section gives information about solving problems in the paper path.
EN
Table 7-1. Major Steps for Troubleshooting (continued) Information Pages (page 7-45)
Will the printer print information pages successfully? This section gives the procedures for printing the information pages and evaluating and correcting the printer’s configuration.
Image Quality (page 7-49)
Does the print quality meet the customer’s expectations? This section gives Toner Cartridge checks, information on EconoMode, image defect examples, and the repetitive defect ruler.
Interface Troubleshooting (page 7-69)
Can the customer print from the host system successfully? This section describes how to determine if the printer is communicating properly with the host system.
EN
Troubleshooting Process 7-3
Troubleshooting Flowchart
Figure 7-1
Troubleshooting Flowchart (1 of 2)
7-4 Troubleshooting
EN
Troubleshooting Flowchart (Continued)
Figure 7-2
EN
Troubleshooting Flowchart (2 of 2)
Troubleshooting Process 7-5
Troubleshooting the Printing System Preliminary Operating Checks Prior to troubleshooting a specific printer problem, you should ensure that:
Note
z
The printer is being maintained on a regular basis as described in Chapter 4.
z
The customer is using acceptable paper as specified in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide.
z
The printer is positioned on a solid, level surface.
z
The line voltage does not vary more than 10% from the nominal rated value as specified on the Power Rating Label.
z
The operating environment for the printer and paper is within the temperature and humidity specifications listed in Chapter 1 of this manual.
z
The printer is never exposed to ammonia fumes such as those produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials.
z
The printer is not exposed to direct sunlight.
z
Non-HP components (such as refilled Toner Cartridges, font cartridges, and memory boards) are removed from the printer.
When moving the printer into a warm room from a cold location such as a warehouse, various problems can occur due to condensation in the printer. For example, if the photosensitive drum is cold, the resistance of the photoconductive layer will be high. This will lead to incorrect contrast. Leave the printer running for 10 to 20 minutes.
7-6 Troubleshooting
EN
Power On Note
It is important to have the printer’s Control Panel functional as soon as possible in the troubleshooting process so that the printer’s diagnostics can assist in locating printing errors.
Table 7-2. Power on Defect or Blank Display Problem
Action
Is the power cord plugged into the wall and the printer? Is AC and DC power available?
Verify. See Table 7-3, “No AC Power,” on page 7-9 and Table 7-4, “No DC Power,” on page 7-10.
Is the power switch set to on?
Set the switch to the on position. You should hear the switch toggle. If the Front Right Side Cover has been removed recently, be sure that the rod leading to the power supply moves as the rocker switch is toggled.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-7
Table 7-2. Power on Defect or Blank Display (continued) Problem
Action
Note: Fan operation is significant since the Fan is controlled by Does the Fan turn on for about 4 seconds when you the printer’s Engine Controller Board. An operational Fan indicates the following: first turn on the printer? 1. AC power is present in the printer. 2. DC power supply is functional (both 24VDC and 3.5VDC are being generated). 3. The Engine Controller Board’s micro-processor is functional. If the Fan is not working: 1. Turn off the printer and remove the printer’s Formatter PCA. Disconnect all the printer’s paper handling options. 2. Turn on the printer and check the Fan again. If the Fan is still not working, perform the following steps: 1. Verify that the Fan is connected to the Engine Controller Board. 2. Replace the Fan. 3. Replace the Engine Controller Board. If the Fan is working but the printer’s Control Panel is blank: 1. Print an engine test. See “Engine Test” on page 7-11. If the engine test is successful, perform the following steps: a. Reseat the Control Panel and Formatter connector. b. Replace the Control Panel assembly. c. Replace the Formatter. d. Replace the cable from the Control Panel. 2. If the engine test is not successful, replace the Engine Controller Board.
Note
The Fan only operates during initial power on and while printing, unless the temperature inside the printer is too high. If the temperature is too high, the Fan turns on to cool the inside of the printer.
7-8 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-3. No AC Power Cause
Action
No correct voltage present at the outlet.
Plug the power cord into another AC circuit outlet. Inform the customer that the correct line voltage is not available at the outlet.
The power cord is not firmly plugged into the printer and the outlet.
Insert the power plug firmly.
Blown fuse.
1. Check the fuses (FU1 and FU2) on the Engine Controller Board. 2. Replace the fuses if necessary.
Defective power switch.
Remove the Engine Controller Board. Measure the resistance between the two terminals of the power switch (SW1) by applying the tester probes to the terminals. The resistance must be low (under 1KΩ) when the power is turned ON, and high (over 6MΩ) when the switch is turned OFF. Otherwise, replace the Engine Controller Board.
Defective AC receptacle or AC power line.
Check the printer’s AC receptacle and wiring for the AC power line. If no problem is found, replace the Engine Controller Board.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-9
Table 7-4. No DC Power Cause
Action
No AC power is supplied.
Check the AC power supply. See Table 7-3, “No AC Power,” on page 7-9
The overcurrent/overvoltage detection circuit activated.
If the problem is not rectified after the power switch is turned off and on again, find the cause of activation of the overcurrent/overvoltage detection circuit in the power supply. Wait for more than two minutes before turning the printer back on.
Blown fuse.
1. Check the fuses (FU1 and FU2) on the Engine Controller Board. 2. Replace the fuses if necessary.
7-10 Troubleshooting
EN
Engine Test The printer has one test pattern (vertical lines). When an image defect appears, a test print can be made to identify the problem. The test print can be made by pressing the test print switch located on the left side of the printer (see Figure 7-3 on page 7-12). A test pattern can be printed by pressing the test print switch once after the photosensitive drum has stopped and the printer has entered the standby mode. If the switch is held down, the test pattern is printed continuously. The switch can be used when paper is loaded in any tray other than Tray 1. The Engine Test does the following:
Note
z
Verifies that the print engine is functioning correctly (the Formatter PCA is completely bypassed during an engine test).
z
Is used for isolating printer problems.
z
Is used for checking and adjusting registration.
z
Prints from Tray 2, 3, or 4 only, not from Tray 1.
z
Can be activated with the Formatter PCA removed.
For the printer to perform an engine test, Tray 2, 3, or 4 must be installed and loaded with paper, and the Toner Cartridge must be installed in the printer.
Location of Engine Test Button The engine test button is located on the left side of the printer, below the fan vent, as shown in Figure 7-3 on page 7-12.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-11
Figure 7-3
Location of the Engine Test Button
Printing an Engine Test To print an engine test, use a non-metallic object (such as a pencil) to press the engine test button. A single test page with vertical lines prints. To print multiple test pages, hold down the engine test button.
Display The Control Panel should display READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE ON. For information about errors displayed, access the Event Log (see page 7-13). If the display is blank, see page 7-7.
7-12 Troubleshooting
EN
Event Log Use the Event Log to diagnose and troubleshoot printer errors and intermittent failures. You can either display or print the Event Log. Access the Event Log from the Control Panel’s Information Menu. (Select PRINT EVENT LOG or SHOW EVENT LOG.) The Event Log retains the printer’s last 30 error messages. See the tables starting on page 7-18 for more information about correcting Event Log messages in the printer. Note
EN
The Event Log codes and the error on the Control Panel do not always correspond exactly. The numbers in the Control Panel message may not be the same in the Event Log; the decimal numbers may be shifted by one digit. For example, 13.1 on the control panel reads 13.01 in the Event Log. Refer to the correct number in the tables starting on page 7-18.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-13
Most recent error (up to 30)
Figure 7-4
Sample Event Log
7-14 Troubleshooting
EN
Display the Event Log If the printer cannot print or move any paper, follow these steps to display the Event Log. Otherwise, print the Event Log. 1. Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2. Press [Item] until SHOW EVENT LOG appears. 3. Press [Select] to show the Event Log. 4. Press [+] to scroll through the Event Log. 5. Write down the error messages. 6. Check the Event Log for specific error trends in the last 10,000 printed pages. 7. Ask the customer for any observed error trends. (For example, do paper jams tend to occur in a specific area of the printer?) 8. Record any specific error trends. 9. See Table 7-5, “Alphabetical Printer Messages,” on page 7-18 or Table 7-6, “Numerical Printer Messages,” on page 7-28 and follow the recommended action. 10. If the Control Panel displays READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE ON, go to the next section. If it displays any other message, repeat this procedure starting from step 1.
Print the Event Log The printer’s internal Event Log stores the last 30 errors and can be printed at any time. To print the Event Log: 1. Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2. Press [Item] until PRINT EVENT LOG appears. 3. Press [Select] to print the Event Log.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-15
Interpret the Event Log The Event Log is the key tool in troubleshooting printer problems. Figure 7-4 shows a typical Event Log. The Event Log shows the current page count at the top left of the page with the printer’s serial number directly to the right of the page count. The left column is the error sequence number, with the error listed at the top (the highest sequence number is the most recent error logged). The next column is the page count at the time of the error, and the last column is the Personality (PCL or PostScript) column or the cause of the jam at the time of the error. The Event Log may record errors in a different format than the Control Panel Display. For example, if 13.20 PAPER JAM is displayed on the Control Panel, the Event Log records error number 13.32.48 or 13.20.48. Hint
Whenever a 13.xx appears on the Control Panel, a good practice is to clear the jammed paper from the printer and print the Event Log. If you cannot print the Event Log, you can still display it on the Control Panel. Write the error next to the last error logged. The last error is the error at the top of the Event Log printout with the highest number in the left-most column. To interpret the Event Log: z
Each individual entry in the log is called an “error,” while all errors occurring at the same page count are called an “event.” Read the Recommended Action for each error comprising an event to gain a clear picture of what took place during that event. Events usually conclude with a time-out, or no response from device (error 66.xx in the Event Log) which requires a power cycle of the print engine.
z
Use the Event Log table in this section to associate errors in the Event Log with the Control Panel error message. Follow the Recommended Action listed in the table for each error or event.
7-16 Troubleshooting
EN
Printer Messages The following tables explain messages that might display on the printer’s Control Panel. Alphabetical printer messages and their meanings are listed in Table 7-5, and numerical printer messages are listed in Table 7-6. Hint
If a message persists requesting that you load a tray, or if a message indicates that a previous print job is still in the printer’s memory, press [Go] to print or press [Cancel Job] to clear the job from the printer’s memory.
Note
Not all messages are described (many are self-explanatory). Some printer messages are affected by the Auto Continue and Clearable Warning settings from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s Control Panel. If CLEARABLE WARNING=JOB is set on the Control Panel, warning messages display on the Control Panel until the end of the job from which they were generated. If CLEARABLE WARNING=ON is set, warning messages display on the Control Panel until [Go] is pressed. If an error occurs that prevents printing and AUTO CONTINUE=ON is set, the printer goes offline for 10 seconds before it returns online. If AUTO CONTINUE=OFF is set, the message displays until [Go] is pressed.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-17
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED
The Control Panel function you are trying to access has been locked by the network administrator to prevent unauthorized access.
Ask the network administrator to unlock the function.
BAD DUPLEXER CONNECTION
The duplexer is not connected properly.
1. Re-install the duplexer. 2. If the message persists make sure the duplexer is connected and the connector is not damaged. 3. Replace the Duplexer.
BAD OPT TRAY CONNECTION
The optional tray is not connected properly.
1. Re-install the optional tray. 2. Make sure the optional tray is connected and the connector is not damaged. 3. Replace the optional tray.
CANNOT DUPLEX REAR BIN OPEN
The printer cannot duplex Close the rear output bin. because the rear output bin is open.
CHECK INPUT DEVICE
The optional input tray cannot feed paper to the printer because a door or tray is open.
alternates with
PAPER PATH OPEN PLEASE CLOSE IT
7-18 Troubleshooting
1. Check the doors and trays. 2. If doors and trays are closed, check tabs and sensor levers in the tray for proper operation. Replace any defective tabs or sensors. 3. Replace the PCA Controller in the feeder.
EN
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
CHOSEN LANGUAGE NOT AVAILABLE
A print job requested a printer language that does not exist in the printer. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory.
1. Print the job using a driver for a different printer language, or add the requested language to the printer (if available). 2. Press [Go] to continue.
CLOSE TOP COVER
This message may persist when the Top Cover is closed because of a damaged or improperly connected switch.
1. Check SW101 (Figure 7-34 on page 7-102) for proper operation. Make sure wires are connected. 2. Replace SW101. 3. If the new switch does not solve the error, the wiring or the Engine Controller Board may be defective.
DISK DEVICE FAILURE
The EIO disk had a critical Reseat the EIO disk or failure and can no longer replace it with a new one. be used.
DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a non-existent directory.
1. Check the filename and directory name. 2. Reattempt the operation.
DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
The disk is full.
1. Delete files from the EIO disk and then try again, or add a flash DIMM. 2. Download or delete files from HP JetAdmin, and download or delete fonts from HP FontSmart. (See the software help for more information.)
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-19
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
The EIO disk is protected, Disable the write and no new files can be protection through written to it. HP JetAdmin.
ENV FEEDER LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE]
There is no envelope in the feeder, the wrong size is loaded in the feeder, or the type and size is set incorrectly in the Control Panel.
1. Load the requested envelope type and size into the Envelope Feeder. 2. Make sure the envelope size and type are set correctly from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s Control Panel. 3. Press [Go] if the desired envelope is already loaded in the feeder. 4. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. 5. Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
FLASH DEVICE FAILURE
The flash DIMM had a critical failure and no longer can be used.
Remove the flash DIMM and replace it with a new one.
FLASH FILE OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a non-existent directory.
1. Check the filename and directory name. 2. Reattempt the operation.
7-20 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
FLASH FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
The flash DIMM is full.
1. Delete files from the flash DIMM or add another DIMM. 2. Download or delete files from HP JetAdmin, and download or delete fonts from HP FontSmart. (See the software help for more information.)
FLASH IS WRITE PROTECTED
The flash DIMM is protected, and no new files can be written to it.
Disable the write protection through HP JetAdmin.
INITIALIZING
If the message displays continually, a DIMM may not be inserted completely.
Reseat DIMM(s).
INPUT DEVICE CONDITION xx.yy
An input paper handling device has a condition that needs attention before printing can resume. 1st X= Device number in chain. 2nd X= Device type (3 types): 1 Input 2 Output 3 Stapler/ stacker unit yy= Device specific error.
See the documentation that came with the paper handling device for assistance.
INSTALL TRAY x
The printer is unable to print the current job because the specified tray (x) is open or not inserted correctly.
1. Re-insert the specified tray. 2. Check for damaged tabs in the tray. 3. Check for damaged switches in the printer. 4. Replace the PCA Controller in the feeder.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-21
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message LOADING PROGRAM alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
Wait for the program to Programs and fonts can be stored on the printer’s load. file system. At bootup time these entities are loaded into RAM. (These entities can take a long time to load into RAM depending on the size and number of entities being loaded.) The specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded.
MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE]
One of the following occurred: A manual feed was requested. There is no paper in Tray 1. The wrong size of paper is loaded. The Control Panel is not set for the kind of paper loaded.
1. Load the requested paper into Tray 1. 2. Press [Go] if the desired paper is already loaded in Tray 1. 3. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. 4. Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
MEMORY FULL STORED DATA LOST
There is no available memory in the printer. The current job might not print correctly and some resources (such as downloaded fonts or macros) might have been deleted.
The customer might want to add more memory to the printer or simplify the print job.
7-22 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
MEMORY SETTINGS CHANGED
The printer changed its memory settings because it did not have enough memory to use the previous settings for I/O Buffering and Resource Saving. This usually occurs after removing memory from the printer, adding a Duplexer, or adding a printer language.
You might want to change memory settings for I/O Buffering and Resource Saving (although default settings are usually best) or add more memory to the printer.
MEMORY SHORTAGE JOB CLEARED
The printer did not have enough free memory to print the entire job. The remainder of the job will not print and will be cleared from memory.
1. Press [Go] to continue. 2. Change the Resource Saving setting from the printer’s Control Panel or add more memory to the printer.
MEMORY SHORTAGE PAGE SIMPLIFIED
The printer had to compress the job in order to fit it in available memory. Some data loss might have occurred.
Press [Go] to continue. The customer might want to add more memory to the printer.
OFFLINE
The printer is offline.
Press [Go] to place the printer online.
PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE
To ensure optimum print quality, the printer prompts the customer to have routine maintenance performed every 200,000 pages.
Install the Printer Maintenance Kit. You must reset the maintenance page count after performing maintenance by pressing [Item-] and [Value-] while switching the printer on.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-23
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE
The RAM disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used.
1. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on to clear the message. 2. If the message persists, install a new RAM disk.
RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a non-existent directory.
1. Check the filename and directory name. 2. Reattempt the operation.
RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
The RAM disk is full.
1. Delete files and then try again, or turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on to delete all files on the device. (Delete files using HP JetAdmin, HP FontSmart, or another software utility. See the software help for more information.) 2. If the message persists, increase the size of the RAM disk. Change the RAM disk size from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s Control Panel.
RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
The RAM disk is protected, and no new files can be written to it.
Disable the write protection through HP JetAdmin.
7-24 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message TRAY x EMPTY
EN
Event Log Explanation Message The specified tray is empty, but the current job does not need this tray in order to print correctly. If this message appears and the tray contains paper, a sensor could be damaged. PS101 detects paper in Tray 2. PS105 detects paper in Tray 1. PS107 detects paper in Tray 3. (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN) PS801 detects paper in the optional 500-sheet feeder. PS901 detects envelopes in the Envelope Feeder. See Figure 7-30 on page 7-97 for sensor locations.
Recommended Action 1. Load the empty tray (x) to clear the message. If you do not load the specified tray, the printer will continue printing from the next available tray, and the message will continue to display. 2. Inspect the tray for damaged tabs. 3. Check Sensor Arm Flags for damage and be sure they move freely. 4. Replace any defective sensors.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-25
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message TRAY x LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE]
7-26 Troubleshooting
Event Log Explanation Message One of the following occurred: There is no paper loaded in the specified tray, or the paper is not the size requested, or the Control Panel is not set for the size of paper loaded. The tray is not properly adjusted for size. The default paper size is set incorrectly. If this message appears and the tray contains the correct size of paper, a sensor could be damaged or a paper sensor lever could be stuck.
Recommended Action 1. Load the requested paper into the specified tray (x). Ensure that the trays are correctly adjusted for size. The tray type settings (and size for Tray 1) must be set from the printer’s Control Panel. If you are trying to print from the optional universal 500 sheet tray, be sure to set the paper size dial. If you are trying to print A4 or letter size paper, and this message appears, make sure the default paper size is set correctly from the Printing Menu in the printer’s Control Panel. 2. Press [Go] to print from the next available tray. 3. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. 4. Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size. 5. Inspect the switches in the tray. 6. Turn the printer on with the tray removed and push the switches by hand to see if they register. See “Paper Size Detection Switches” on page 7-86.
EN
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
UNSUPPORTED SIZE IN TRAY [YY]
Load a supported paper An external paper handling device detected size in the tray. an unsupported paper size. The printer will go offline until the condition is corrected.
USE [TYPE] [SIZE] INSTEAD?
If the requested paper size or type is not loaded, the printer asks if it should use another paper size or type instead.
WAIT FOR PRINTER TO REINITIALIZE
The RAM disk setting has Wait for the printer to reinitialize. been changed from the printer’s Control Panel. This change will not take effect until the printer reinitializes.
WRONG ENVELOPE FEEDER INSTALLED
The Envelope Feeder you Install the correct are trying to install will not envelope feeder instead. work for this printer.
EN
1. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. 2. Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-27
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
13.xx PAPER JAM [LOCATION]
Paper is jammed at the specified location (and possibly at other locations). If the message persists after all jams have been cleared, a sensor or sensor lever might be stuck or broken. See page 7-42.
For all paper jam messages, do the following: 1. Remove jammed paper from the specified location. Check the entire paper path for other pieces of paper in the path. 2. Open and close the top cover to clear the message. 3. If the jam reoccurs see “General Paper Path Troubleshooting” on page 7-42. 4. Check sensors and flags in the paper path for proper operation. For locations of sensors, see page 7-82. For 13.1 and 13.2: 1. Ensure that paper trays are loaded properly so paper can feed from the tray. 2. Check the input area for obstructions such as paper in the path, damage to the Registration Assembly, or the Transfer Roller out of place. 3. Check PS102 and PS103 for proper operation. Replace any defective sensors or flags. For locations of sensors, see page 7-82.
13.1 PAPER JAM
13.01
Paper delay jam at paper feed area.
13.2 PAPER JAM
13.02
Paper stopped jam at paper feed area.
7-28 Troubleshooting
Recommended Action
EN
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
13.5 PAPER JAM
13.05
13.6 PAPER JAM
13.06
13.10 PAPER JAM
13.10 or 13.22
Paper delay jam at paper reversing area Paper jam at duplexer.
1. Check the Duplexer and the rear area of the printer for obstructions or damage. 2. Check PS701 and PS703 in the Duplexer for proper operation. Replace the Duplexer if a sensor is defective.
13.20 PAPER JAM
13.20 or 13.32
Paper stopped jam in the paper path.
13.21 PAPER JAM
13.21 or 13.33
Door open jam.
For 13.20 and 13.21: 1. Check the entire paper path for obstructions such as paper in the path, registration area, transfer area, paper feed, and Fuser. 2. Check that all assemblies are seated and doors are closed. 3. Check all sensors and flags in the paper path (see page 7-82).
EN
Recommended Action
Paper delay jam at Fuser. For 13.5 and 13.6: 1. Check the Transfer Roller and Small Media Paper stopped jam at Belt to ensure they are Fuser. operating and can feed paper. 2. Check the paper path for obstructions at the Transfer Roller and Toner Cartridge, at the Paper Feed Guide, and at the Fuser. 3. Check PS501 and PS106 for proper operation. Replace any defective sensors or flags. For locations of sensors, see page 7-82.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-29
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
22 EIO x BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
The printer received more data than can fit in its available memory. You might have tried to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or complex graphics.
Press [Go] to print the transferred data (some data might be lost), then simplify the print job or install additional memory.
The data (dense text, rules, raster or vector graphics) sent to the printer was too complex.
Press [Go] to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.) To print the job without losing data, from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s Control Panel, set PAGE PROTECT=ON, print the job, and then return PAGE PROTECT=AUTO. Do not leave PAGE PROTECT=ON; it might degrade performance. If this message appears often, simplify the print job.
Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot (x).
Press [Go] to clear the message. (Data will be lost.)
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
7-30 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
Too much data was sent to the parallel port. This error can occur if the driver you are using is not IEEE-1284 compliant. For best results, use an HP driver that came with the printer.
Check for a loose cable connection and be sure to use a high-quality cable. (Some non-HP parallel cables might be missing pin connections, or might otherwise not conform to the IEEE-1284 specification.) Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
22 SERIAL I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW
Too much data was sent to the serial port.
1. Make sure the correct serial pacing option is selected from the I/O Menu in the printer’s Control Panel. 2. Print a Menu Map and verify that the serial pacing item (from the I/O Menu in the printer’s Control Panel) matches the setting on the computer. 3. Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
22 PARALLEL I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with
alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-31
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message 40 BAD SERIAL TRANSMISSION alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
40 EIO x BAD TRANSMISSION alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
7-32 Troubleshooting
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
The printer encountered an error while transferring data from the computer. The error might have occurred for several reasons: The computer was powered on or off while the printer was online. The printer’s serial configuration was not the same as the computer’s.
1. Verify cable connections. Make sure the printer’s serial configuration is set the same as the computer from the I/O Menu in the printer’s Control Panel. 2. The serial baud rate setting can be accessed from the I/O Menu in the printer’s Control Panel. 3. Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing. 4. Turn the printer off. 5. Reseat the EIO card and turn the printer on.
The connection has been broken between the printer and the EIO card in the specified slot. X Description 1 EIO Slot 1 2 EIO Slot 2
1. Turn the printer off and reseat the card. 2. Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing.
EN
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
41.3 UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE
The paper size you are trying to print is not the same as the settings for the tray.
1. Make sure that all trays are correctly adjusted for size. (The printer will continue trying to print the job until size settings are correct.) If you are trying to print from Tray 1, make sure the printer’s Control Panel setting for paper size is correctly configured. If you are trying to print from the optional universal 500 sheet tray, be sure to set the paper size dial to match the paper size loaded in the tray. 2. After performing the actions above, press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. (Or, you might want to press [Cancel Job] to clear the job from the printer’s memory.)
41.x PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred. X Description 1 Unknown misprint error. 2 Beam detect misprint error. 3 See error 41.3 above. 4 No VSYNC error. 5 Media feed error. 9 Noise VSREQ error.
Press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. If the error persists: 1. Reseat the connections to the Laser Scanner and the Engine Controller Board. 2. Replace the Laser Scanner 3. Replace the Engine Controller Board.
alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-33
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message A Fuser error has occurred. X Description 1 Low Fuser temperature. 2 Fuser warm up service. 3 High Fuser temperature. 4 Faulty Fuser. 5 Inconsistent Fuser.
50.x FUSER ERROR
Recommended Action Turn the printer off, wait 20 minutes, and then turn the printer on. If the message persists, reseat the Fuser. If that does not work, replace the Fuser. To check the Fuser, turn the printer off and remove the Fuser. Measure the resistance between the Fuser connectors J132-1 and J132-2. See Figure 7-5. If it is not within the range of 200kΩ to 500kΩ replace the Fuser. If there is no continuity between the Fuser connectors J143F (neutral) and J142F (hot) with the Fuser removed, replace the Fuser. If the problem is not related to the Fuser, replace the Engine Controller Board.
J141F J142F J143F J132-5 J132-4 J132-3 Figure 7-5
J132-2
J132-1
Fuser Connectors
7-34 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
51.x PRINTER ERROR
A loss of beam detect occurred. X Description 1 Beam detect error. 2 Laser error.
1. Press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. 2. Turn the printer off and then on. 3. Reseat cables. See Figure 7-23 on page 7-89 (J401, J551, and J501). 4. Replace the Laser Scanner.
52.x PRINTER ERROR
The Laser Scanner speed is incorrect. X Description 1 Scanner startup error. 2 Scanner rotation error.
1. Press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. 2. Turn the printer off and then on. 3. Reseat cables. See Figure 7-23 on page 7-89 (J401, J551, and J501). 4. Replace the Laser Scanner.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-35
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message 53.xy.zz PRINTER ERROR
Event Log Explanation Message There is a memory error with an accessory. The DIMM that caused the error will not be used. Values of x, y, and zz are as follows: x=DIMM type 0=ROM 1=RAM
Recommended Action 1. Turn the printer off, and reseat or replace the specified DIMM. 2. Try the DIMM in another slot. 3. Replace the DIMM that caused the error.
y=Device location 0=internal memory (ROM or RAM) 1 to 4=DIMM slots 1, 2, 3, or 4 zz=Error number 0=Unsupported memory 1=Unrecognized memory 2=Unsupported memory size 3=Failed RAM test 4=Exceeded maximum RAM size 5=Exceeded maximum ROM size 6=Invalid DIMM speed 7=DIMM reporting information incorrectly 8=DIMM RAM parity error 9=ROM needs to be mapped to an unsupported address 10=DIMM address conflict 11=PDC XROM out of bounds 12=Unable to make a temporary mapping
7-36 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
An internal communications error occurred.
1. Press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. 2. Check the power at the customer’s location. 3. Replace the Formatter PCA. 4. Replace the Engine Controller Board.
56.x PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred. X Description 1 Illegal input. 2 Illegal output.
1. Press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. 2. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. 3. Check the printer’s configuration.
57.x PRINTER ERROR
An error occurred with the Fan’s motor. X Description 4 Printer Fan 7 Duplex Fan
1. Check the Fan’s connector and make sure the Fan is not blocked. 2. Replace the Fan.
59.x PRINTER ERROR
A printing error occurred. X Description 0 Motor error. 1 Motor startup error. 2 Motor rotation error.
1. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. 2. Make sure the Fuser or Toner Cartridge is not hindering gear movement in the drive train. 3. Check the Main Motor’s cable to ensure that it is seated properly. 4. If the error persists, replace the Motor.
55 PRINTER ERROR alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-37
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action
62.x PRINTER ERROR
Reseat or replace the There is a problem with the printer’s memory. The specified DIMM. x value refers to the location of the problem: 0 = Internal memory 1 to 4= DIMM slots 1, 2, 3, or 4
64.x PRINTER ERROR
A scan buffer error occurred.
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. If the message persists, replace the Formatter.
66.xx.yy FINISHER/STAPLER STACKER FAILURE or 66.xx.yy INPUT DEVICE FAILURE or 66.xx.yy OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE
An error occurred in an external paper handling device. 1st X= Device number in chain. 2nd X= Device type (3 types): 1 Input 2 Output 3 Stapler/ stacker unit yy= Device specific error.
1. Press [Go] to clear the message. If the message will not clear: 2. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. 3. Check all cables. 4. Reseat the external paper handling device.
An error occurred in the printer’s nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) and one or more printer settings has been reset to its factory default.
1. Print a Configuration Page and check the printer settings to determine which values have changed. 2. Hold down [Cancel Job] while turning the printer on. This will clean up the NVRAM by removing old areas that are not being used.
alternates with
CHECK CABLES AND CYCLE POWER 68 NVRAM ERROR CHECK SETTINGS
7-38 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message
Event Log Explanation Message
Recommended Action 1. Print a Configuration Page and check the printer settings to determine which values have changed. 2. Hold down [Cancel Job] while turning the printer on. This will clean up the NVRAM by removing old areas that are not being used.
68 NVRAM FULL CHECK SETTINGS
An error occurred in the printer’s nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) and one or more printer settings has been reset to its factory default.
69.x PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error 1. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. occurred. 2. Reseat the Duplexer. X Description 0 The duplex mechanism has failed.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-39
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message 79.xxxx PRINTER ERROR
Event Log Explanation Message The printer detected an error. The numbers (xxxx) indicate the specific type of error.
Recommended Action 1. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. 2. Try printing a job from a different software application. If the job prints, go back to the first application and try printing a different file. (If the message only appears with a certain software application or print job, have the customer contact the software vendor for assistance.) If the message persists, try the following: 1. Cycle power. 2. Reseat or replace the interface cable and cycle power. 3. Remove the DIMMs one at a time and cycle power. 4. Try using the parallel interface, if possible. 5. With the EIO cards removed from the printer, perform a cold reset. 6. If the error persists, replace the Formatter.
7-40 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued) Control Panel Message 8x.yyyy
EN
Event Log Explanation Message The EIO accessory in slot x has encountered a critical error as specified by yyyy. X Description 1 EIO slot 1 - The printer detected an error with the EIO card. 2 EIO slot 2 - The printer detected an error with the EIO card. 6 EIO slot 1 - The EIO card detected an error. The EIO card may be defective. 7 EIO slot 2 - The EIO card detected an error. The EIO card may be defective.
Recommended Action 1. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. 2. Reseat or replace the EIO board.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-41
General Paper Path Troubleshooting Paper jams occur in the printer when paper does not either reach or clear a photosensor along the printer’s paper path in a specific amount of time. If a paper jam occurs, a 13.xx PAPER JAM message is displayed on the printer’s Control Panel. The following table contains general questions you might ask and topics to explore prior to troubleshooting. See the 13.xx section in the Event Log for specific error codes. Table 7-7. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions Troubleshooting Check
Action
What is the frequency of the paper jams (for Verify with customer. Print or Show Event Log example: continuous, one jam per 100 pages, to determine paper jam history. See the one jam per 1000 pages)? Display (page 7-12) and Event Log (page 7-13) sections of this Chapter and evaluate the Event Log. Do paper jams only occur when the paper is Use the Paper Path Test to isolate the problem fed from a particular paper input source (such (page 7-44). as Tray 1 or Tray 2)? Do jams only occur when paper is output to a Use the Paper Path Test to isolate the problem specific output bin (either the top output bin or (page 7-44). rear output bin)? Do paper jams occur with a specific type of paper?
Try different media. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide. The guide is bundled with this service manual.
Where does the leading edge of the first sheet of paper in the printer’s paper path stop when a jam occurs? Are any sheets of paper damaged or torn?
Attempt to duplicate. Use the Paper Path Test to isolate the problem. Inspect the paper path and all paper path mechanical assemblies up to the location where the paper jams.
Is the customer loading the paper trays correctly?
Observe the customer loading paper. Do not fan paper. See proper paper handling procedures in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide.
7-42 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-7. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions (continued) Troubleshooting Check
Action
Is the customer overfilling the paper trays?
Ensure that paper is NOT over the maximum fill marks in the paper trays. Observe the customer loading paper in the trays.
Are the paper tray guides set correctly?
Ensure that the Tray 2 and 3 left-side paper guides are set correctly at both the front and rear of the tray, and that the front guide is locked into the correct position. For Tray 4 ensure all adjustments are set correctly; front, back, and side, at the top and bottom of the tray.
Does the printer need to be cleaned?
Inspect the paper path and paper path rollers. See the cleaning procedures in Chapter 4.
When was maintenance last performed on the Determine from the Configuration Page the printer? number of pages since the last maintenance (see Figure 7-7 on page 7-48). The Printer Maintenance Kit should be installed every 200,000 images.
There are four photo sensors (PS102, PS103, PS106, PS501) in the paper path for detecting arrival or passing of the paper. If the paper does not reach or pass these sensors within the prescribed time, the microprocessor on the Engine Controller Board assesses a paper jam and notifies the Formatter of the jam. See page 7-82 for the location and function of sensors.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-43
Paper Path Test To perform a Paper Path Test: 1. Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears 2. Press [Item] until PRINT PAPER PATH TEST appears. 3. Press [Select]. 4. Press [+] to cycle selections until the desired paper tray appears. 5. Press [Select]. 6. Press [+] until the desired output bin appears (open the rear output bin to print to it) 7. Press [Select]. 8. Press [+] until the desired duplex mode (on or off) appears. 9. Press [Select]. 10. Press [+] to cycle selections until the desired number of copies appears. Choose 1, 10, 50, 100, or 500 copies. 11. Press [Select] to perform the Paper Path Test.
7-44 Troubleshooting
EN
Information Pages From the printer’s Control Panel you can print pages that give details about the printer and its current configuration. The following information pages are described here: z
Menu Map
z
Configuration Page
z
PCL or PS Font List
For a complete list of the printer’s information pages, print a Menu Map and see the Information Menu.
Menu Map To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the Control Panel, print a Control Panel Menu Map: 1. Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2. Press [Item] until PRINT MENU MAP appears. 3. Press [Select] to print the Menu Map. The content of the Menu Map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer. The printer driver or software application can override many of these values.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-45
Figure 7-6
Sample Menu Map
7-46 Troubleshooting
EN
Configuration Page Use the Configuration Page to view current printer settings, to help troubleshoot printer problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages. Note
If an HP JetDirect print server EIO card is installed, a JetDirect Configuration Page will print out as well. To print a Configuration Page: 1. Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2. Press [Item] until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears. 3. Press [Select] to print the Configuration Page. Figure 7-7 on page 7-48 is a sample Configuration Page. Numbers in the sample printout match the numbers in the table. The content of the Configuration Page varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-47
Printer Information Lists the serial number, HP JetSend IP addresses, page counts, and other information for the printer.
Memory Lists printer memory, PCL Driver Work Space (DWS), and I/O buffering and resource saving information.
Installed Personalities and Options Lists all printer languages that are installed (such as PCL and PS) and lists options that are installed in each DIMM slot and EIO slot.
Security Lists the status of the printer’s Control Panel lock, Control Panel password, and disk drive.
Event Log Lists the number of entries in the log, the maximum number of entries viewable, and the last three entries.
Figure 7-7
Paper Trays and Options Lists the size settings for all trays and lists optional paper handling accessories that are installed.
Sample Configuration Page
Verify Installed Options Under “Installed Personality” on the Configuration Page, look for options such as hard disk or DIMM types and sizes. Verify that the options which are installed in the printer are reflected on the Configuration Page. If an installed device is not shown, reseat the device and print a new Configuration Page. 7-48 Troubleshooting
EN
Image Quality When you are working with customers, obtain a print sample before you begin troubleshooting the printer. Ask the customer to explain the quality they expect from the printer. The print sample will also help clarify the customer’s explanation.
Table 7-8. Image Quality Checks Image Quality Checks
Action
Does the problem repeat on Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler on page 7-66. the page? Is the Toner Cartridge full and is it manufactured by HP?
Check the Toner Cartridge using the check list on page 7-50.
Is the customer using print media that meets all HP paper specification standards?
For more information about HP’s paper specification standards, see Chapter 1 of this manual and the HP LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide.
Is the print sample similar to Compare and perform the actions recommended in the Print those in the Print Quality Quality Tables. Tables on page 7-53? Is the problem on the Toner Perform the Half Self Test Functional Check (page 7-67) to determine where the defect is. Cartridge drum or the If a dark and distinct toner image is preset on the drum’s surface, Transfer Roller? assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning (cleaning, conditioning, writing, and developing - see Chapter 5), and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-49
Check the Toner Cartridge Image formation defects are often the result of problems with the Toner Cartridge. If there is any doubt, always replace the Toner Cartridge before troubleshooting image defects. Use the following checklist to ensure that the Toner Cartridge is still operable. z
Ensure that the Toner Cartridge has toner.
Table 7-9. Weights of Toner Cartridges Toner Cartridge Capacity
Full Weight
Empty Weight
6,000 pages
45.7 ounces 1295 grams
36 ounces 1020 grams
10,000 pages
51 ounces 1445 grams
35.3 ounces 1000 grams
z
Check the expiration date of the Toner Cartridge (stamped on the box).
z
Check the Toner Cartridge to see if it has been disassembled or refilled.
z
Ensure that the Toner Cartridge is seated properly in the printer.
z
Inspect the cartridge for leaking toner through worn seals. (If the drum has been manually rotated it may have caused internal damage and toner may spill.)
7-50 Troubleshooting
EN
Note
Toner Cartridges are rated for 6,000 or 10,000 images at 5% coverage (depending on the model). It is possible to wear out the gears and the cartridge seals before TONER LOW is displayed if the number of images exceeds 6,000 or 10,000 (depending on the model). See “EconoMode” below. z
Check the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge to see if it has been damaged or scratched. Touching the drum will contaminate the photosensitive surface and may cause spotting and defects during printing.
z
White areas on the page may indicate that the drum has been exposed to light for too long. If white areas appear, stop the printer and wait a few minutes This should eliminate most defective images. If not, the Toner Cartridge may be placed in a dark environment for several days, which may restore some life to the drum.
EconoMode EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by reducing the amount of toner on the printed page by up to 50%. Advise the customer to turn EconoMode on or off from the printer driver or software application, since those settings override the Control Panel settings. EconoMode settings can also be accessed from the Print Quality Menu. CAUTION
EN
HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the Toner Cartridge.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-51
Image Defects The quality of the printer’s output is subject to the judgment of the user. This section of the manual helps you define print quality defects and understand what factors affect print quality. The print samples shown in the following tables illustrate some print quality defects. Keep copies of print quality defects encountered in the field with an explanation of their causes for future reference. The image defects listed below are covered in the following tables. z
Black Page (page 7-53)
z
Blank Page (page 7-53)
z
Blank Spots (page 7-55)
z
Creases (page 7-55)
z
Curl (page 7-56)
z
Dirt on Back (page 7-57)
z
Distorted Image (page 7-57)
z
Dropouts (page 7-58)
z
Faded Print/Bubbles (page 7-59)
z
Gray Background (page 7-59)
z
Horizontal Black Lines (page 7-60)
z
Horizontal Smudges (page 7-60)
z
Horizontal White Lines (page 7-60)
z
Light Print, Dark Print, or Fade (page 7-61)
z
Loose Toner (page 7-62)
z
Repetitive Defects (page 7-62)
z
Skew (page 7-63)
z
Toner Smear (page 7-63)
z
Toner Specks (page 7-64)
z
Vertical Black Lines (page 7-64)
z
Vertical Dots (page 7-65)
z
Vertical White Lines (page 7-65)
7-52 Troubleshooting
EN
Hint
If you find a defect that is not depicted, record the probable cause along with the conditions in the printing environment and save a copy of the defect for future reference.
Table 7-10. Black Page Possible Cause
Action
Clean the High Voltage Power Supply terminals. See The High Voltage Figure 7-19, “Engine Controller Board Layout,” on Power Supply connections are dirty. page 7-84. Also clean the High Voltage springs where they contact the Toner Cartridge. The High Voltage Power Supply is installed improperly. If the High Voltage Power Supply has been removed and replaced, it may not be seated properly.
Remove the Engine Controller Board and check the connectors for damage. Reseat the Engine Controller Board, being certain to fully seat the connectors.
Defective Primary Charging Roller.
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
The laser drive circuitry is damaged on the Engine Controller Board so that the laser is always on.
Replace the Engine Controller Board, followed by the Formatter PCA if necessary.
Table 7-11. Blank Page
EN
Possible Cause
Action
No toner is available for print.
Remove sealing tape or replace the Toner Cartridge.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-53
Table 7-11. Blank Page (continued) Possible Cause
Action
Defective laser shutter.
Check the laser shutter for free operation when inserting the Toner Cartridge.
Toner Cartridge Guide Make sure the Guide is installed properly above the damaged, improperly Toner Cartridge. positioned, or missing. No Transfer Roller voltage.
Without Transfer Roller voltage, toner cannot be attracted from the surface of the drum to the paper. Perform the Half Self Test Functional Check (page 7-67) to check all other electrophotographic processes. Replace the Transfer Roller if necessary.
No Developing Bias.
1. Clean the High Voltage Power Supply contacts. With no Developing Bias charge, toner is not attracted to the drum. 2. Replace the Engine Controller Board.
No drum ground path. With no ground path the drum cannot discharge. The negative charge on the drum repels toner, and leaves a white page with bubble print. 1. Check the drum ground spring and connect it as shown on page 6-43. 2. Replace the Engine Controller Board. Defective Laser Scanner Cable Assembly.
7-54 Troubleshooting
Low-level signals exchanged between the Laser Scanner Assembly and the Engine Controller Board may be affecting laser output. Replace the Laser Scanner Cable Assembly.
EN
Table 7-12. Blank Spots Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet printer specifications or is stored improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°. 3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Dirty or deformed Transfer Roller.
Replace the Transfer Roller.
Defective Toner Cartridge.
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
See also “Dropouts” on page 7-58.
Table 7-13. Creases Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet printer specifications or is stored improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°. 3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Make sure the printer’s operating environment meets Printer’s operating environment does not specifications. meet specifications. Paper is loaded incorrectly.
EN
Make sure paper is loaded correctly and that the guides fit properly against the paper stack.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-55
Table 7-13. Creases (continued) Possible Cause
Action
Wrong tray.
Print from a different tray (such as Tray 1).
Wrong output bin for paper type.
Print to a different output bin (top or rear output bin).
Obstruction in paper path.
1. Check the paper path for paper or label debris. 2. Check for damaged components that could be creasing the paper.
Table 7-14. Curl Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet printer specifications or is stored improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°. 3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Make sure the printer’s operating environment meets Printer’s operating environment does not specifications. meet specifications. Wrong output bin.
Print to a different output bin (top or rear output bin).
Wrong Fuser setting for paper type.
From the Paper Handling Menu on the Control Panel, change the Fuser Mode setting or choose another paper type from the printer driver. See also “Dropouts” on page 7-58.
7-56 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-15. Dirt on Back Possible Cause
Action
Dirt inside printer (Tray Separation Roller, Feed Roller, Transfer Roller, Fuser, Toner Cartridge).
1. Print at least 10 pages to see if the problem goes away. 2. Print a cleaning page (page 4-4). Identify and clean the dirty part according to the “Repetitive Defect Ruler” on page 7-66. If dirt cannot be removed, replace the dirty part. 3. Check for toner leaks.
Paper does not meet printer specifications or is stored improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°. 3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Table 7-16. Distorted Image Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet printer specifications or is stored improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°. 3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Printer’s operating Make sure the printer’s operating environment meets environment does not specifications. meet specifications. Wrong output bin for paper type.
EN
Print to a different output bin.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-57
Table 7-16. Distorted Image (continued) Possible Cause
Action
Poor connection of cables to the Laser Scanner.
Reseat the cables connected to the Laser Scanner.
Poor connection of cables to the Engine Controller Board.
Reseat the cables connected to the Engine Controller Board.
Defective Laser Scanner.
Replace the Laser Scanner.
Defective Engine Controller Board.
Replace the Engine Controller Board.
Table 7-17. Dropouts Possible Cause
Action
Paper might be too smooth.
Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality.
Printer’s operating Make sure the printer’s operating environment meets environment does not specifications. meet specifications. Wrong toner density setting.
From the Print Quality Menu on the Control Panel, adjust the toner density setting. Make sure EconoMode is off.
Wrong Fuser setting for paper type.
From the Paper Handling Menu on the Control Panel, change the Fuser Mode setting or choose another paper type from the printer driver. See also “Blank Spots” on page 7-55.
7-58 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-18. Faded Print/Bubbles Possible Cause
Action
No drum ground path. With no ground path the drum cannot discharge. The negative charge on the drum repels toner, and leaves a white page with bubble print. 1. Check the drum ground spring and connect it as shown on page 6-43. 2. Replace the Engine Controller Board. Engine Controller Board.
Replace the Engine Controller Board.
Table 7-19. Gray Background Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet printer specifications or is stored improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°. 3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Printer’s operating Make sure the printer’s operating environment meets environment does not specifications. meet specifications. Wrong toner density setting.
From the Print Quality Menu on the Control Panel, adjust the toner density setting. Make sure EconoMode is off.
Faulty Toner Cartridge.
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
See also “Light Print, Dark Print, or Fade” on page 7-61.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-59
Table 7-20. Horizontal Black Lines Possible Cause
Action
Defective Laser Scanner Assembly or Engine Controller Board.
1. Reseat connectors on the Laser Scanner and Engine Controller Board. 2. Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly followed by the Engine Controller Board, if necessary. See the “Repetitive Defect Ruler” on page 7-66.
Table 7-21. Horizontal Smudges Possible Cause
Action
Paper path contamination or damage.
1. Check the Toner Cartridge and replace it if necessary. 2. Check the Fuser and replace it if necessary. See the “Repetitive Defect Ruler” on page 7-66.
Table 7-22. Horizontal White Lines Possible Cause
Action 1. Check the Toner Cartridge and replace it if necessary. 2. Check the Fuser and replace it if necessary. 3. Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly, followed by the Engine Controller Board, if necessary.
7-60 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-23. Light Print, Dark Print, or Fade Possible Cause
Action
Wrong toner density setting.
From the Print Quality Menu on the Control Panel, adjust the toner density setting. Make sure EconoMode is off.
Toner Cartridge is low. Replace the Toner Cartridge. Transfer Roller is defective.
Replace the Transfer Roller.
Paper does not meet printer specifications or is stored improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°. 3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Poor contact to the Engine Controller Board.
1. Clean the contacts if they are dirty. If the problem remains after cleaning, or parts are damaged or deformed, replace them. 2. Replace the Engine Controller Board if necessary.
Defective Laser Scanner.
Replace the Laser Scanner.
Defective Engine Controller Board.
Replace the Engine Controller Board.
See also “Faded Print/Bubbles” on page 7-59.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-61
Table 7-24. Loose Toner Possible Cause
Action
Dirt in the printer.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Clean the inside of the printer (page 4-2) or use the printer’s cleaning page (page 4-4).
Toner Cartridge is defective.
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Paper might be too smooth.
Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality.
Wrong Fuser setting for paper type.
From the Paper Handling Menu on the Control Panel, change the Fuser Mode setting or choose another paper type from the printer driver.
Defective Fuser.
Replace the Fuser.
Table 7-25. Repetitive Defects Possible Cause
Action
Dirt or defect on a roller.
See “Repetitive Defect Ruler” on page 7-66.
7-62 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-26. Skew Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet printer specifications or is stored improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°. 3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Paper is not loaded Make sure paper is loaded correctly and that the correctly or trays are guides fit properly against the paper stack. not adjusted properly. Registration Assembly Be sure that the Registration Assembly is installed is improperly installed. correctly.
Table 7-27. Toner Smear
EN
Possible Cause
Action
Dirt in the printer.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Clean the inside of the printer (page 4-2) or use the printer’s cleaning page (page 4-4).
Paper might be too smooth.
Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality.
Defective Toner Cartridge.
Replace the Toner Cartridge. (See instructions with the Toner Cartridge.)
Wrong Fuser setting for paper type.
From the Paper Handling Menu on the Control Panel, change the Fuser Mode setting or choose another paper type from the printer driver.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-63
Table 7-28. Toner Specks Possible Cause
Action
Dirt in printer.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Clean the inside of the printer (page 4-2) or use the printer’s cleaning page (page 4-4).
Paper does not meet printer specifications or is stored improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°. 3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Alternating small and To alternate small and standard paper, from the standard paper (such Configuration Menu on the Control Panel, set SMALL as envelopes and PAPER SPEED=SLOW. letterhead).
Table 7-29. Vertical Black Lines Possible Cause
Action
Defective Toner Cartridge.
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Dirty Fuser Entrance Guide.
Clean the Guide.
Scratches on the Fuser.
Replace the Fuser.
7-64 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-30. Vertical Dots Possible Cause
Action
Dirty static eliminator teeth.
Clean the static eliminator.
Poor contact between Clean the contacts, if dirty. If the problem remains the Static Eliminator after cleaning, or parts are damaged or deformed, replace them. and the Engine Controller Board. Deformed or deteriorated Transfer Roller.
Replace the Transfer Roller.
Defective Engine Controller Board.
Replace the Engine Controller Board.
Table 7-31. Vertical White Lines Possible Cause
Action
Lack of toner or faulty Redistribute the toner in the Toner Cartridge. If the Toner Cartridge. problem continues, replace the Toner Cartridge.
EN
Dirt in the laser path.
Clean the laser path. (Remove the Laser Scanner Assembly and clean the lens.)
Defective Fuser.
Replace the Fuser Assembly.
Dirty mirror in the Laser Scanner.
Replace the Laser Scanner.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-65
Repetitive Defect Ruler Repetitive print defects are usually associated with a specific roller within the printer or the Toner Cartridge. Use Figure 7-8 to isolate the cause of repetitive print defects. Align the first occurrence of the defect with the top of the “ruler” and measure to the next occurrence of the defect to determine the roller in question. When you are certain that your defect pattern matches the pattern of the ruler, replace the indicated roller.
Figure 7-8
Repetitive Defect Ruler
7-66 Troubleshooting
EN
Image System Troubleshooting Half Self Test Functional Check The electrophotographic process can be subdivided into the following stages: z
Cleaning (removes excess toner from drum surface)
z
Conditioning (places a uniform electrical charge on drum)
z
Writing (laser strikes surface of drum and creates latent image)
z
Developing (forms the toner image on drum)
z
Transferring (charge transfers the image to paper)
z
Fusing (heat and pressure produces a permanent image)
The purpose of the Half Self Test Check is to determine which stage is malfunctioning. Perform the test as follows: 1. Print a Configuration Page from the Control Panel Information Menu. 2. Open the top cover after the paper advances half-way through the printer (about five seconds after the Main Motor begins rotation). The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the Toner Cartridge. 3. Remove the Toner Cartridge. 4. Open the Toner Cartridge’s drum shield to view the drum’s surface. If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum’s surface, assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning (cleaning, conditioning, writing, and developing - see Chapter 5), and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem. If no image is present on the photosensitive drum, perform all the following functional checks.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-67
Drum Rotation Functional Check The photosensitive drum, located in the Toner Cartridge, must rotate for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the Main Drive assembly. To verify whether the drum is rotating: 1. Open the top cover. 2. Remove the Toner Cartridge. 3. Mark the cartridge’s drive gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the position of the mark. 4. Install the Toner Cartridge and close the top cover. The start-up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the marked gear. 5. Open the printer and inspect the marked gear. Verify that the mark moved. If the gear did not move, inspect the Main Drive assembly to ensure that it is meshing with the Toner Cartridge gears. If the drive gears function and the drum does not move, replace the Toner Cartridge. Note
This test is especially important if refilled Toner Cartridges are in use.
High Voltage Power Supply Functional Check The High voltage Power Supply Assembly provides the necessary voltages for the printer’s electrophotographic processes. The +24B VDC supply is used to power the High voltage Power Supply Assembly. A summary of the major components of the high voltage system is given in Table 7-32. Table 7-32. High Voltage System Checks Checks
Action
Are the connectors for the Primary Charge roller, Drum Ground, Developing Bias, and Toner Level Sensor damaged, corroded, dirty, or missing?
1. Inspect and correct each item. 2. Check the Toner Cartridge. 3. Check all wire connections. 4. Replace the Engine Controller Board if the connection cannot be repaired.
Are the High Voltage Power Supply connections dirty, bent or broken?
1. Clean the terminals with alcohol only. 2. Check all wire connections. 3. Replace the Engine Controller Board if the connection cannot be repaired.
7-68 Troubleshooting
EN
Interface Troubleshooting This section provides an overview of the printer’s interface requirements.
Communications Check Note
Communication problems are normally the customer’s responsibility. Time spent attempting to resolve these problems may not be covered by the product’s Hewlett-Packard warranty. Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems. If the printer is not connected to an MS-DOS-based host, proceed to the Communications Checks table in this section.
Test Message After the printer is installed, verify communications between the printer and the IBM-compatible computer. Enter the following at the DOS prompt: C: \ DIR > LPT1 Enter (for printing to the parallel port) The printer should print a directory listing of the C: \ directory.
EIO Troubleshooting The JetDirect Configuration Page shown in Figure 7-9 contains valuable information regarding the current status of the EIO accessories. Before attempting to troubleshoot a network problem or notifying your network consultant of a problem, always print a Configuration Page. See the HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for detailed explanations of network issues.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-69
Network statistics
I/O card status
IP address
Novell status Node name
Figure 7-9
Sample JetDirect Configuration Page
7-70 Troubleshooting
EN
JetDirect Configuration
EN
z
If the EIO JetDirect Card has successfully powered up and completed its internal diagnostics, the I/O CARD READY message appears. If communication is lost, an I/O NOT READY message appears followed by a two digit error code. See the HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for further details and recommended action.
z
The “Network Statistics” column indicates that network activity has been occurring. Bad packets, framing errors, un-sendable packets and collisions should be minimal. If a high percentage (greater than one percent) of these occur, contact the network administrator. All of the statistics are set to zero when the printer is powered-off.
z
The “Novell Status” block should state the Novell printer server name to which the printer is connected. If the node name reads “NPIxxxxxx” (xxxxxx=last six digits of the EIO’s LAN address), the EIO card has not been configured for a Novell server. This could indicate that the card is operating under an IPX protocol other than Novell. Consult with the network administrator if the Node Name is not present.
z
In the TCP/IP protocol block, the default IP address is “192.0.0.192.” It is acceptable to operate the printer with this default address. The error message ARP DUPLICATE ADDRESS may appear in this block. This is also an acceptable error code if the TCP/IP protocol is not being used. Check with the network administrator to determine the correct IP Address for the printer.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-71
AUTOEXEC.BAT Standard Configurations Parallel DOS Commands If the previous check did not produce the desired result, ensure that the AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains the following statements for parallel interface communications: MODE LPT1: , , P For MS-DOS version 4.0 and above: MODE LPT1: , , B Note
This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1. If you are using LPT2 or LPT3, replace LPT1 in the example with the appropriate printer port. If the problem persists, see Table 7-33, “Communications Checks,” on page 7-73.
Serial DOS Commands Most IBM-compatible computers default to a parallel printer port. To ensure that information is sent to the serial printer port, type the following MS-DOS commands at the MS-DOS prompt, or include them in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. MODE COM1: 9600, N, 8, 1, P MODE LPT1: =COM1 For MS-DOS version 4.0, or above, enter: MODE COM1: 9600, N, 8, 1, B MODE LPT1: =COM1 Note
These examples assume that you are using serial printer port COM1. If you are using COM2 or COM3, replace COM1 with the appropriate printer port. If the problem persists, see the following checks in Table 7-33 on page 7-73.
7-72 Troubleshooting
EN
Communications Checks Table 7-33. Communications Checks Checks
Action
Is your computer configured These parameters are required to communicate with the printer. to the parameters described Verify that the configuration of the computer's communications port matches these parameters. in the configuration instructions? Note: If these parameters are not set properly, an error may display on the Control Panel.
For Serial Communications Only Does the printer's baud rate Print a Configuration Page to verify the baud rate setting. At the computer, verify that the baud rate is set correctly in any match that of the computer's communications configuration files. port? Note: A baud rate problem may cause an error. Hint: On an RS-232 cable, pins 2 and 3 may need to be reversed Are you using the correct at the printer-end of the cable. cable for communications between the computer and the printer? Are you using the correct RS-232-C protocol?
During the communications “handshake,” the printer transmits both the XON/XOFF signal, and the DTR signal. The DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal may be either negative going, or positive going. DTR polarity is set at the printer's Control Panel. The XON may be set to normal (only transmitted when data is needed), or Robust XON (transmitted every second). This feature is configurable from the Control Panel. DTR is available at pin 20, and XOFF is transmitted from pin 2 of the printer.
If using a serial interface, is The maximum recommended cable length for RS-232 serial the cable longer than 50 communications is 50 feet (15 meters). Use the correct cable or feet (15 meters)? move the printer closer to the host.
EN
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-73
Table 7-33. Communications Checks (continued) Checks
Action
If using a bidirectional parallel cable, is it longer than 10 feet (3 meters) long?
The maximum recommended cable length for the printer is 10 feet (3 meters). Use a serial interface connection or move the printer closer to the host.
Do all the current Control Panel Configuration Menu items match the host system's parameters?
Make appropriate changes. If host system changes are made, be sure to reboot the system, or otherwise ensure the changes are in effect.
Does the printer have a bad If possible, try a different printer interface than the one with the interface port? problem. Reconfigure the printer and host appropriately. Does the host have a bad interface port?
If possible, try a different host system port. Reconfigure both the host and printer appropriately.
If the host system and printer still are not communicating and you have addressed the issues in Table 7-33, replace the Formatter PCA and the EIO card and reconfigure the printer. If the problem persists, a protocol analyzer may be needed to find the source of the problem. CAUTION
HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical switch-box products without proper surge protection. These devices generate high transient voltages that cause permanent damage to the Formatter PCA. This circumstance is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty.
7-74 Troubleshooting
EN
Reference Diagrams Locations of Components
Figure 7-10
EN
Components of the Paper Pickup and Feed System (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N)
Reference Diagrams 7-75
Table 7-34. Components in Figure 7-10 PS101
Tray 2 paper out sensor
PS102
Pre-feed sensor
PS103
Top of page sensor
PS104
Top output bin full sensor
PS105
Tray 1 paper out sensor
PS106
Fuser delivery sensor 2
PS501
Fuser delivery sensor 1
SL101
Tray pickup solenoid
SL102
Tray 1 pickup solenoid
CL101
Feed roller clutch
7-76 Troubleshooting
EN
Figure 7-11
EN
Components of the Paper Feed System (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N with Optional 500-Sheet Feeder)
Reference Diagrams 7-77
Figure 7-12
Components of the Duplexer
7-78 Troubleshooting
EN
Figure 7-13
EN
Components of the Fusing and Delivery Unit
Reference Diagrams 7-79
Figure 7-14
Components of the Envelope Feeder
7-80 Troubleshooting
EN
Paper Path
Figure 7-15
Paper Path (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN Shown)
Figure 7-16
Paper Path with the Duplexer
EN
Reference Diagrams 7-81
Figure 7-17
Paper Path with the Envelope Feeder
Figure 7-18
Paper Sensors and the Paper Path
Table 7-35. Paper Sensors in Figure 7-18 PS102
Pre-feed sensor
Sensor and flag located on Registration/Feed Sensor Assembly.
PS103
Top of page sensor
Sensor and flag located on Registration/Feed Sensor Assembly.
7-82 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-35. Paper Sensors in Figure 7-18 (continued) PS106
Fuser paper delivery sensor 2
Sensor and flag located on Fuser assembly.
PS501
Fuser paper delivery sensor 1
Sensor located on Engine Controller. Flags on Engine Controller Board and Fusing Assembly.
PS701
Duplex pickup paper sensor (Duplexer)
Sensor and flag located in Duplexer.
PS703
Reversed paper sensor (Duplexer)
Sensor and flag located in Duplexer.
PS902
Envelope multiple feed sensor (Envelope Feeder)
Sensor and flag located in Envelope Feeder.
EN
Reference Diagrams 7-83
Engine Controller Board
Figure 7-19
Engine Controller Board Layout
7-84 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-36. Engine Controller Board Layout
EN
SW1
Power switch
SW501
Test print switch
VR201
Adjusted at factory
VR501
Top of page adjustment
VR601
Adjusted at factory
Reference Diagrams 7-85
Paper Size Detection Switches
Figure 7-20
Paper Size Detection Switches (1 of 3), Tray 2 (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N)
Figure 7-21
Tray 2 Switches
Top
Tray 3 Switches
Paper Size Detection Switches (2 of 3), Trays 2 and 3 (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN)
7-86 Troubleshooting
EN
Figure 7-22
Paper Size Detection Switches (3 of 3), Optional 500-Sheet Feeder
Table 7-37. Paper Size Detection Switches in Figure 7-20 to Figure 7-22 Paper Size
Paper Size Detection Switch SW600/603/801
SW601/604/802
SW602/605/803
No tray
OFF
OFF
OFF
Legal
OFF
OFF
ON
Executive
OFF
ON
OFF
Letter
OFF
ON
ON
Other
ON
OFF
OFF
Other
ON
OFF
ON
B5
ON
ON
OFF
A4
ON
ON
ON
EN
Reference Diagrams 7-87
This page intentionally left blank.
7-88 Troubleshooting
EN
6
5 J715
Duplex pickup Duplexing unit paper sensor solenoid PS701 SL701
Duplex feed motor Reversing motor M702 M701
4 J716
J717
PS703 Reversed paper sensor
J713
J702
J701
J706
J703
J133
PS702 Rear Output Bin sensor PS 106 Fuser paper delivery sensor 2
J714
J705
3
J704
J134 J137
FM701 J719
J718
Laser/scanner unit
D Scanning motor
FG J135
J132
J707 J711
Duplexing unit exhaust fan
J712
BD PCA
Laser driver
J551
J401
J501
J131
Duplexing unit
J114
J102
J154
J58
J103
J31
J71
TB11
TB12 FG
LINE INPUT FG
PS501
HOT
TB10 NEUTRAL
J53
J61M TR
J55F
TB64 TB61 TB62 TB63
Test print switch
Fuser paper delivery sensor 1
J1
J60
J75
Control Panel
J113 PS104 Top Output Bin paper full sensor
J56 J72
J52
J50
J125
J126
SL102
J51
Tray 1 pickup solenoid
J301 J127
J128 CL101 Feed roller clutch
J200
J301
C
SW501
Printer controller PCA NEUTRAL HOT
J101
Toner cartridge FU901
TB13
Tray 1 paper sensor PS105
1
Fuser
TH901
Duplexing unit driver PCA
Cooling fan FM101
2
J202
J201
J57
J57
B
J73 Envelope feeder J106
M101 Main motor
J603
J901 J601
J104
J811
J801
J602
J803
J604
J105
PS101 Tray paper sensor
EN
J802
J812
SW801 SW802 SW803 Paper feeder paper size switches
J813
J110
Figure 7-23
Paper feeder driver PCA
Paper size detection PCA
SW600 SW601 SW602 paper size switches
Envelope feeder driver PCA
J911
Video controller
SL101 Tray pickup solenoid
Paper feeder
PS801 SL801 Paper feeder Paper feeder paper sensor pickup solenoid
PS901 Envelope sensor
TB101 J111
J112
J129F
J107 TB102
PS102 Pre-feed sensor
PS103 Top of page sensor
SW101 Door open detection switch
J912 TB902 J902
TB901
J903
A
J913
SL 901 Envelope pickup solenoid
PS902 Envelope mulitplefeed sensor
Wiring Diagram (HP LaserJet 4000/4000N)
Reference Diagrams 7-89
6
5 Duplex pickup Duplexing unit paper sensor solenoid PS701 SL701
Duplex feed motor Reversing motor M702 M701
4 J715
J716
J717
PS703 Reversed paper sensor
J713
J702
J701
J706
J703
J133
PS702 Rear Output Bin sensor PS 106 Fuser paper delivery sensor 2
J714
J705
3
J704
J134 J137
FM701 J719
J718
Laser/scanner unit
D Scanning motor
FG J135
J132
J707 J711
Duplexing unit exhaust fan
J712
BD PCA
Laser driver
J551
J401
J501
J131
Duplexing unit
J114
J102
J154
J58
J103
J31
J71
TB11
TB12 FG
LINE INPUT FG
PS501
HOT
TB10 NEUTRAL
J53
J61M TR
J55F
TB64 TB61 TB62 TB63
Test print switch
Fuser paper delivery sensor 1
J1
J60
J75
Control Panel
J113 PS104 Top Output Bin paper full sensor
J56 J72
J52
J50
J125
J126
SL102
J51
Tray 1 pickup solenoid
J301 J127
J128 CL101 Feed roller clutch
J200
J301
C
SW501
Printer controller PCA NEUTRAL HOT
J101
Toner cartridge FU901
TB13
Tray 1 paper sensor PS105
1
Fuser
TH901
Duplexing unit driver PCA
Cooling fan FM101
2
J202
J201
J57
J57
B
J73 Envelope feeder J106
M101 Main motor
J603
J901 J601
SW603 SW600 SW604 SW601 SW602 SW605 Lower tray Upper tray paper size paper size switches J602 switches
J110
J104
J811
J801
Paper feeder driver PCA
Paper size detection PCA
J604
J606
J605
J803 J105
J802
J812
SW801 SW802 SW803 Paper feeder paper size switches
J813
J115
PS101 SL103 SL101 PS107 Upper tray Lower tray Upper tray Lower tray paper sensor pickup solenoid pickup solenoid paper sensor
Envelope feeder driver PCA
J911
Video controller
Paper feeder
PS901 Envelope sensor
TB101 J111
J112
J129F
J107 TB102
PS102 Pre-feed sensor
PS103 Top of page sensor
SW101 Door open detection switch
J912 TB902 J902
TB901
J903
A
J913
SL 901 Envelope pickup solenoid
PS801 SL801 Paper feeder Paper feeder paper sensor pickup solenoid
PS902 Envelope mulitplefeed sensor
Figure 7-24
Wiring Diagram (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000TN)
7-90 Troubleshooting
EN
Motors
Figure 7-25
Location of Motors
Table 7-38. Motors in Figure 7-25 M101
Main motor
M701
Reversing motor (duplexer)
M702
Duplex feed motor (duplexer)
FM101
Cooling Fan
FM701
Duplexer exhaust Fan (duplexer)
H901
Fusing heater
EN
Reference Diagrams 7-91
Connectors
Figure 7-26
Connectors (1 of 3)
7-92 Troubleshooting
EN
Figure 7-27
EN
Connectors (2 of 3)
Reference Diagrams 7-93
Figure 7-28
Connectors (3 of 3) For locations of connectors see Figure 7-23 on page 7-89 and Figure 7-24 on page 7-90.
7-94 Troubleshooting
EN
PCAs
Figure 7-29
EN
Location of PCAs
Reference Diagrams 7-95
Table 7-39. Location of PCAs 1
Engine Controller Board
Sequence control, high-voltage output, DC output and heater drive.
2
Paper size detection PCA
Relay between sensors/solenoids and Engine Controller Board, and paper size detection.
3
Paper feeder driver PCA Control and detection of solenoids in the paper feeder.
4
Envelope feeder driver PCA
Control and detection of solenoids in the envelope feeder.
5
Duplexer driver PCA
Controls paper in the duplexer.
7-96 Troubleshooting
EN
Sensors and Thermistor
Figure 7-30
EN
Location of Sensors and Thermistor (1 of 2)
Reference Diagrams 7-97
Figure 7-31
Location of Sensors and Thermistor (2 of 2)
Table 7-40. Sensors and Thermistor in Figure 7-30 and Figure 7-31 PS101
Tray 2 paper out sensor
PS102
Pre-feed sensor
PS103
Top of page sensor
PS104
Top output bin full sensor
PS105
Tray 1 paper out sensor
PS106
Fuser paper delivery sensor 2
PS107
Tray 3 paper out sensor (HP LaserJet 4000 T/TN)
PS501
Fuser paper delivery sensor 1
PS701
Duplex pickup paper sensor (duplexer)
PS702
Face up sensor (duplexer)
PS703
Reversed paper sensor (duplexer)
7-98 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-40. Sensors and Thermistor in Figure 7-30 and Figure 7-31 (continued) PS801
Paper feeder paper sensor (paper feeder)
PS901
Envelope sensor (envelope feeder)
PS902
Envelope multiple feed sensor (envelope feeder)
TH901
Fusing surface temperature sensor
EN
Reference Diagrams 7-99
Solenoids and Clutch
Figure 7-32
Location of Solenoids and Clutch (1 of 2)
7-100 Troubleshooting
EN
Figure 7-33
Location of Solenoids and Clutch (2 of 2)
Table 7-41. Solenoids and Clutch in Figure 7-32 and Figure 7-33 CL102
Feed roller clutch
SL101
Tray 2 pickup solenoid
SL102
Tray 1 pickup solenoid
SL103
Tray 3 pickup solenoid (HP LaserJet 4000 T/TN)
SL701
Duplexer solenoid (duplexer)
SL801
Paper feeder pickup solenoid (paper feeder)
SL901
Envelope pickup solenoid (envelope feeder)
EN
Reference Diagrams 7-101
Switches
Figure 7-34
Location of Switches
7-102 Troubleshooting
EN
Table 7-42. Switches in Figure 7-34 SW101
Door open detection switch
SW600
Tray 2 Paper size switch
SW601
Tray 2 Paper size switch
SW602
Tray 2 Paper size switch
SW603
Tray 3 paper size switch (HP LaserJet 4000 T/TN)
SW604
Tray 3 paper size switch (HP LaserJet 4000 T/TN)
SW605
Tray 3 paper size switch (HP LaserJet 4000 T/TN)
SW801
Paper feeder paper size switch
SW802
Paper feeder paper size switch
SW803
Paper feeder paper size switch
EN
Reference Diagrams 7-103
Timing
Figure 7-35
Pickup Timing for Tray 2 (and Lower Trays)
Figure 7-36
Pickup Timing for Tray 1
7-104 Troubleshooting
EN
8
Parts and Diagrams
Overview This chapter discusses the following:
How To Use the Parts Lists and Diagrams Accessories and Supplies Illustrations and Parts Lists
EN
Overview 8-1
How To Use the Parts Lists and Diagrams The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts. A table accompanies each exploded view diagram. Each table lists the item number for the replaceable part, the associated part number for the item, the quantity, and a description of the part. CAUTION
While looking for an electrical part number, pay careful attention to the voltage listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct model of the printer.
Ordering Parts All standard part numbers listed are stocked and may be ordered from HP’s Support Materials Organization (SMO), or Support Materials Europe (SME). Hewlett-Packard Co. Support Materials Organization 8050 Foothills Blvd. Roseville, CA 95678 Parts Direct Ordering: 1-800-227-8164 (U.S. Only) Hewlett-Packard Co. Support Materials, Europe Wolf-Hirth Strasse 33 D-7030 Boblingen, Germany (49 7031) 14-2253
Ordering Consumables Consumables and accessories such as those listed in Table 8-1 can be ordered from Hewlett-Packard. The phone numbers are: U.S.: 1-800-538-8787 Canada: 1-800-387-3154 (Toronto) 516-671-8383 United Kingdom: 0734-441212 Germany: 0130-3322 Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other phone numbers.
8-2 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Note
EN
Parts that have no item number or part number listed are not field replacement parts and cannot be ordered.
How To Use the Parts Lists and Diagrams 8-3
Accessories and Supplies The following items are available through your local authorized HP dealer. To find a dealer near you, call the HP Customer Information Center (800) 752-0900. Note
See page 2-4 for documentation product numbers.
Table 8-1. Accessories and Supplies Description
Part No.
Exchange No.
500-sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
Product No. C4124A
Envelope Feeder
C4122-69001
C4122A
Duplexer
C4123-69001
C4123A
Standard 500-sheet Tray
C3122A
250-Sheet Universal Replacement Tray
C4126A
500-sheet Universal Replacement Tray
C4125A
HP Multi-purpose Paper
HPM1120
HP LaserJet Paper
HPJ1124
Toner Cartridge (6,000 pages)
C4127A
Toner Cartridge (10,000 pages)
C4127X
EDO DIMM 4 MB 8 MB 16 MB
C4135-67901 C4136-67901 C4137-67901
C4135A C4136A C4137A
SDRAM DIMM 4 MB 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB
C4140-67901 C4141-67901 C4142-67901 C4143-67901
C4140A C4141A C4142A C4143A
Flash DIMM 2 MB 4 MB
C4286A C4287A
Font DIMM (8 MB Asian MROM) Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese
C4292A C4293A
8-4 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-1. Accessories and Supplies (continued) Description
Part No.
Exchange No.
Product No.
Hard Disk
C2985A
Parallel Cables 2 Meter IEEE-1284 cable 3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
C2950A C2951A
Serial Cables 9-9 pin serial cable (male/female) 9-25 pin serial cable (male/female)
C2932A C2933A
Serial Adapter 25-9 pin adapter (male/female)
C2809A
Macintosh Computer Serial Cable
92215S
Macintosh Network Cable Kit
92215N
Enhanced I/O Cards Ethernet RJ-45 only Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC, Local Talk J3111-61003 Token Ring RJ-45 and DB-9 10/100Base-TX networks
J3110A J3111A J3112A J3113A
Maintenance Kit1 110V 220V 1.
EN
C4118-67902 C4118-67903
C4118-69001 C4118-69002
The maintenance kits can be ordered from Support Materials Organization (U.S.) or Support Materials Europe. See page 8-2 for ordering information.
Accessories and Supplies 8-5
Common Screws and Replacement Cables Table 8-2. Screws Used in the Printer Description
Part No.
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping (black)
XA9-0870-000CN
Screw, M3x4, washer head
XA9-0434-000CN
Screw, M3x6, with star washer
FA9-1449-000CN
Screw, M3x6, washer head
XA9-0267-000CN
Screw, M4x14, self-tapping
XA9-0916-000CN
Screw, M4x12, self-tapping
XA9-0773-000CN
Screw, M4x116, long, module
RB1-8703-000CN
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping (silver)
XA9-0606-000CN
Screw, M4, captive, Fuser
RB1-8819-000CN
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules
XA9-0917-000CN
Table 8-3. Replaceable Cables Description
Part No.
Table No.
Item No.
Cable and Power Receptacle
RG5-3696-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
15
Cable, Tray 1 Sensor
RG5-3700-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
14
Cable, Laser/Scanner
RG5-3701-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
20
Cable, Output Bin Sensor
RG5-3702-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
24
Cable, Paper Feed/Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid
RG5-3703-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
8
Cable, Envelope Feeder Connect
RG5-3704-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
11
Cable, Top Cover Switch
RG5-3705-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
10
Cable, Feed/Registration Sensors
RG5-3706-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
7
8-6 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-3. Replaceable Cables (continued) Description
Part No.
Table No.
Item No.
Cable, Formatter/Control Panel
RG5-3708-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
2
Cable, Main Motor
RG5-3709-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
5
Cable, Feeder Module
RG5-3710-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
8
EN
Accessories and Supplies 8-7
Illustrations and Parts Lists
Top Cover Assembly
Laser Scanner Assembly
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
Paper Delivery Assembly
Fusing Assembly
Tray 1 Assembly Delivery Drive Assembly Paper Feed Guide Assembly
Formatter Assembly Printer Drive Assembly
Registration Assembly
Engine Controller Board Assembly Figure 8-1
Paper Feed Assembly
Assembly Location Diagram
8-8 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-4. Assemblies (Listed Alphabetically) and Their Part Numbers Description
Part No.
Delivery Drive Assembly
RG5-3721-000CN
Engine Controller Board
RG5-3693-000CN (110V) RG5-3694-000CN (220V)
Formatter
Exchange No.
Exploded View in Figure Figure 8-8 on page 8-22
C4118-69006 (110V) Figure 8-7 on page C4118-69007 (220V) 8-20 C4118-69008
Fuser
RG5-2661-000CN (110V) RG5-2662-000CN (220V)
C4118-69003 (110V) Figure 8-16 on C4118-69004 (220V) page 8-33 and Figure 8-17 on page 8-34
Laser Scanner
RG5-2641-000CN
C4118-69005
Tray 1 Assembly
RG5-2656-000CN
Figure 8-11 on page 8-26
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
RG5-2655-000CN
Figure 8-10 on page 8-24
Paper Delivery
RG5-2648-000CN
Figure 8-15 on page 8-31
Paper Feed
RG5-2651-000CN
Figure 8-12 on page 8-27
Paper Feed Guide
RG5-2643-000CN
Figure 8-14 on page 8-29
Registration
RG5-2652-000CN
Figure 8-13 on page 8-28
Top Cover
RG5-2663-000CN
Figure 8-3 on page 8-12
EN
Figure 8-5 on page 8-16
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-9
1 2 9
8 3 4
6 7
5 Figure 8-2
External Covers and Panels
Table 8-5. External Covers and Panels Item No. Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RB1-8858-000CN
1
Panel, Formatter Cover
2
RG5-2664-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Right Front
3
RB1-8860-000CN
1
Clip, Right Side Panel
8-10 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-5. External Covers and Panels (continued) Item No. Part No.
Quantity
Description
4
RB1-8849-000CN
1
Power Switch Button
5
RG5-2667-000CN
1
Tray 1 Door Assembly
6
RB1-8848-000CN
1
Clip, Left Side Panel
7
RG5-2665-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Left
8
RB1-8843-000CN
1
Tray, Rear
9
RB1-8844-000CN
1
Tray, Rear Extension
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-11
5
4
1
3
2
Figure 8-3
Top Cover Assembly
Table 8-6. Top Cover Assembly Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2663-000CN
1
Top Cover Assembly
2
RB1-8841-000CN
1
Panel, Toner Cartridge Access
3
RB1-8846-000CN
1
Latch, Rear Tray
8-12 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
Table 8-6. Top Cover Assembly (continued) Item No.
Part No.
4
RB1-8847-000CN
5
RB1-8710-000CN
EN
Quantity 1
Description Spring, Rear Tray Latch Plate Cover
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-13
1 16 18
4
2 19
3
5
6 7
8
9
10 14 11
12 15 20
21
22 17 13
Figure 8-4
Internal Components (1 of 3)
Table 8-7. Internal Components (1 of 3) Item No. Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RB1-8862-000CN
1
Guide, Formatter/CP Cable
2
RG5-3708-000CN
1
Cable Formatter/Control Panel
8-14 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-7. Internal Components (1 of 3) (continued) Item No. Part No.
Quantity
Description
3
RB1-8703-000CN
2
Screw, Module Attachment
4
RG5-3729-000CN
1
Main Motor Assembly
5
RG5-3709-000CN
1
Cable, Main Motor
6
RG5-2645-000CN
1
Support, Top Cover, Right
7
RB1-8694-000CN
1
Strap, Interlock Support Ground
8
RG5-3703-000CN
1
Cable, Paper Feed/Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid
9
WC4-5139-000CN
1
Switch, Top Cover Interlock Access
10
RG5-3705-000CN
1
Cable, Top Cover Switch
11
RG5-3704-000CN
1
Cable, Envelope Feeder Connect
12
RB1-8704-000CN
1
Guide, Bottom Cable
13
RB1-8851-000CN
1
Power Switch Activator
14
RG5-3700-000CN
1
Cable, Tray 1 Sensor
15
RG5-3696-000CN
1
AC, Power Receptacle
16
C4118-69003 C4118-69004
1
Fusing Assembly (110V) Fusing Assembly (220V)
17
C4118-69006 C4118-69007
1
Engine Controller Board (110V) Engine Controller Board (220V)
18
RG5-2648-000CN
1
Delivery Assembly
19
RG5-2653-000CN
1
Printer Drive Assembly
20
RG5-2643-000CN
1
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
21
RG5-2655-000CN
1
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
22
RG5-2656-000CN
1
Tray 1 Assembly
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-15
23
21 20
1
19 24 18 17
2
3
16 15
4 5 6
13 14
12
11
10 9
8 22 Figure 8-5
7
Internal Components (2 of 3)
8-16 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-8. Internal Components (2 of 3) Item No.
Part No.
1
RB2-2405-000CN
1
Plate, Control Panel Ground
2
RB1-8671-000CN
1
Support, Top Cover, Left
3
RB1-8827-000CN
1
Leaf Spring
4
RB1-8689-000CN
1
Cable Holder
5
RB1-8708-000CN
1
Plate, Gear Plate Ground
6
RG5-2642-000CN
1
Registration/Feed Sensor Assembly
7
RG5-3706-000CN
1
Cable, Feed/Registration Sensors
8
RG5-3710-000CN
1
Cable, Feeder Module
9
RB1-8690-000CN
1
Retainer, Toner Sensing Spring
10
RB1-8695-000CN
1
Spring, Toner Sensing
11
RB1-8693-000CN
1
Spring, Toner Cartridge Drum Ground
12
RB1-8688-000CN
1
Button, Engine Test
13
RH7-1334-000CN
1
Fan, Main Cooling
14
RB1-8706-000CN
1
Fan Cover
15
RB2-2400-000CN
1
Panel, Left Duplex Access
16
RB2-2401-000CN
1
Panel, Right Duplex Access
17
RB1-8700-000CN
1
Laser Shutter Arm
18
RB1-8702-000CN
1
Spring, Shutter
19
RG5-2641-000CN/ C4118-69005
1
Laser/Scanner Assembly
20
RG5-3701-000CN
1
Cable, Laser Scanner
21
RG5-2666-000CN
1
Control Panel
22
C4118-69006 C4118-69007
1 1
Engine Controller Board (110V) Engine Controller Board (220V)
23
C4118-40002
1
Overlay (English)
24
RG-3702-000CN
1
Cable, Output Bin Sensor
EN
Quantity
Description
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-17
1
5 2 4 3
Figure 8-6
Internal Components (3 of 3)
8-18 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-9. Internal Components (3 of 3) Item No.
Part No.
1
RF5-1867-000CN
1
Pre-Transfer Ground Plate Assembly
2
RG5-4283-000CN
1
Transfer Roller Assembly
3
RS5-0911-000CN
1
Gear, Coupler
4
RF5-2496-000CN
1
Plate, Gear
5
RB1-8747-000CN
1
Plate, Registration Ground
EN
Quantity
Description
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-19
1
Figure 8-7
Engine Controller Board Assembly
8-20 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-10. Engine Controller Board Assembly Item No.
Part No.
Exchange No.
1
RG5-3693-000CN
C4118-69006
1
Engine Controller Board (110V)
1
RG5-3694-000CN
C4118-69007
1
Engine Controller Board (220V)
EN
Quantity
Description
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-21
2
Figure 8-8
1
Delivery Drive Assembly
Table 8-11. Delivery Drive Assembly Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-3721-000CN
1
Delivery Drive Assembly
2
WG8-5362-000CN
1
Sensor, Optical
8-22 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
1
2 3
Figure 8-9
Printer Drive Assembly
Table 8-12. Printer Drive Assembly Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2653-000CN
1
Printer Drive Assembly
2
RB1-8757-000CN
1
Guide, Cable, Gear Assembly Plate
3
RB1-8756-000CN
1
Rod, Toner Drive
EN
Quantity
Description
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-23
1
7
2
6 3 5
Figure 8-10
4
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
8-24 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-13. Tray 1 Pickup Assembly Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2655-000CN
1
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
2
RB2-2386-000CN
1
Cover Envelope Feeder Drive
3
RG5-3718-000CN
1
Tray 1 Pickup Roller Assembly
4
RB1-8787-000CN
1
Arm, Tray 1 Paper Sensing
5
RB2-2387-000CN
1
Arm, Tray 1 Tray Retaining
6
RB1-8788-000CN
1
Cover, Tray 1 Sensor Arm
7
RH7-5172-000CN
1
Solenoid, Tray 1 Drive
EN
Quantity
Description
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-25
1
Figure 8-11
Tray 1 Assembly
Table 8-14. Tray 1 Assembly Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2656-000CN
8-26 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity 1
Description Tray 1 Assembly
EN
1
Figure 8-12
Paper Feed Assembly
Table 8-15. Paper Feed Assembly Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2651-000CN
EN
Quantity 1
Description Paper Feed Assembly
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-27
1
Figure 8-13
Registration Assembly
Table 8-16. Registration Assembly Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2652-000CN
8-28 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity 1
Description Registration Assembly
EN
1
5 3 2
4 3
Figure 8-14
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
Table 8-17. Paper Feed Guide Assembly Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2643-000CN
EN
Quantity 1
Description Paper Feed Guide Assembly
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-29
Table 8-17. Paper Feed Guide Assembly (continued) Item No.
Part No.
2
RF5-2495-000CN
1
Shaft, Belt Idler Assembly
3
RB1-8715-000CN
2
Roller, Belt Idler Shaft
4
RB1-8668-000CN
1
Belt, Feed Guide
5
RB1-8674-000CN
1
Shaft, Belt Drive
8-30 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
1 2
3
4
Figure 8-15
EN
Delivery Assembly
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-31
Table 8-18. Delivery Assembly Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2648-000CN
1
Delivery Assembly
2
RG5-2650-000CN
1
Delivery Sensor Arm Assembly
3
RB2-2408-000CN
1
Arm, Output Kicker, Right
4
RB2-2409-000CN
1
Arm, Output Kicker, Left
8-32 Parts and Diagrams
EN
1
2
Figure 8-16
Fuser Assembly (1 of 2)
Table 8-19. Fuser Assembly (1 of 2) Item No. Part No.
Exchange No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2661-000CN C4118-69003 RG5-2662-000CN C4118-69004
1 1
Fuser
2
RB1-8805-000CN
1
Panel, Fuser Cover
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-33
1
2 3
Figure 8-17
Fuser Assembly (2 of 2)
Table 8-20. Fuser Assembly (2 of 2) Item No. Part No.
Exchange No. Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2661-000CN C4118-69003 RG5-2662-000CN C4118-69004
1 1
Fuser(110V) Fuser(220V)
2
RG5-2659-000CN RG5-2660-000CN
1
Fuser Film Assembly (110V) Fuser Film Assembly (220V)
3
RB1-8794-000CN
1
Roller, Fuser Pressure
8-34 Parts and Diagrams
EN
13 1 2 4 3
5 12
6
14
7 8 10 11
9
Figure 8-18
EN
Internal Components of 500-sheet Feeder
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-35
Table 8-21. Internal Components of 500-sheet Feeder Item No.
Part No.
1
RB1-8890-000CN
1
Guide, Paper
2
RB1-8873-000CN
1
Support, Paper Guide
3
RB1-8876-000CN
1
Cover, Feeder, Right
4
RG5-3711-000CN
1
Cable, Sensor
5
RG5-2673-000CN
1
Feeder Controller PCA
6
RB1-8887-000CN
1
Levers, Tray Sensing
7
RB1-8886-000CN
1
Cover, Feeder PCA
8
RG5-3712-000CN
1
Connector, Lower Tray (with cable)
9
RB1-8107-000CN
4
Foot
10
RG5-2669-000CN
1
Cover, Feeder, Left
11
RS5-2652-000CN
1
Spring, Tray Lock
12
RG5-2672-000CN
1
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly (500-sheet)
13
XA9-0917-000CN
1
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules
14
VS1-6176-000CN
1
Connector (250- and 500-sheet Feeder)
8-36 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
1
8
2
3
6 5
7 Figure 8-19
4
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
Table 8-22. Paper Pickup Drive Assembly Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2672-000CN
1
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly (500-sheet)
2
RS5-2632-000CN
1
Spring, Pickup
EN
Quantity
Description
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-37
Table 8-22. Paper Pickup Drive Assembly (continued) Item No.
Part No.
3
RB1-8877-000CN
1
Coupler, Pickup
4
RF5-2484-000CN
1
Pickup Roller Assembly
5
RB1-2190-000CN
1
Clip, Pickup Spring
6
RB1-8865-000CN
4
Roller, Pickup
7
RF5-2490-000CN
1
Feed, Roller
8
RB1-8879-000CN
1
Arm, Tray Sensing
8-38 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
7
1
3 5
4 2 6
9 8
Figure 8-20
EN
500-sheet Tray
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-39
Table 8-23. 500-sheet Tray Item No.
Part No.
1
RB1-8947-000CN
1
Panel, Roller Access
2
RF5-2489-000CN
1
Mounting Assembly Separation Roller
3
RB1-8948-000CN
1
Gear, Separation Roller Drive
4
RB1-8946-000CN
1
Bushing, Separation Roller
5
RB1-8945-000CN
1
Coupler, Separation Roller
6
RS5-2622-000CN
1
Spring, Separation Roller Tension
7
RB1-8949-000CN
1
Paper Stop, 500-sheet Tray
8
RF5-2490-000CN
1
Roller
9
RB1-8974-000CN
1
Clutch, Separation Roller
8-40 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
1 12
13
11
14 3
2
4 5 3 10 6 8
7
6 9 Figure 8-21
Internal Components of 250-sheet Module (1 of 2)
Table 8-24. Internal Components of 250-sheet Module (1 of 2) Item No.
Part No.
1
XA9-0917-000CN
1
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules
2
RG5-2677-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Upper Right
EN
Quantity
Description
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-41
Table 8-24. Internal Components of 250-sheet Module (1 of 2) (continued) Item No.
Part No.
3
RS5-1309-000CN
2
Bearing, Transport Roller
4
XD9-0135-000CN
1
E-Clip
5
RB1-8923-000CN
1
Roller, Transport
6
RB1-8922-000CN
2
Roller, Transport Pressure
7
RS5-2653-000CN
1
Spring, Transport Roller
8
RB1-8926-000CN
1
Mount, Transport Pressure
9
RB1-8913-000CN
1
Support, Paper Guide Lower
10
RB1-8914-000CN
1
Guide, Paper, Lower
11
RG5-2678-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left Upper
12
RG5-2683-000CN
1
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly, Upper (250-sheet)
13
RB1-8882-000CN
1
Guide, Tray Alignment
14
RS5-0946-000CN
1
Gear, Transport Roller
8-42 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
6 7
4
5A
1 5B 3
8
2
Figure 8-22
EN
Internal Components of 250-sheet Feeder (2 of 2)
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-43
Table 8-25. Internal Components of 250-sheet Feeder (2 of 2) Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2679-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Right Lower
2
RG5-2680-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left Lower
3
RB1-8907-000CN
1
Cover, Feeder PCA
4
RG5-2685-000CN
1
Feeder, Control PCA
5A
RB1-9033-000CN
1
Levers, Tray Sensing Upper
5B
RB1-9034-000CN
1
Levers, Tray Sensing Lower
6
XA9-0917-000CN
1
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules
7
RG5-2684-000CN
1
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly, Lower (250-sheet)
8
VS1-6176-000CN
1
Connector (250- and 500-sheet Feeder)
8-44 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
1 2
Figure 8-23
Upper Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
Table 8-26. Upper Paper Pickup Drive Assembly Item No. Part No.
Quantity Description
1
RG5-2683-000CN
1
Upper Paper Pickup Drive Assembly (250-sheet)
2
RB1-8910-000CN
1
Arm, Tray Sensing
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-45
2
1
Figure 8-24
Lower Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
Table 8-27. Lower Paper Pickup Drive Assembly Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2684-000CN
8-46 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity 1
Description Lower Paper Pickup Drive Assembly (250-sheet)
EN
Table 8-27. Lower Paper Pickup Drive Assembly (continued) Item No.
Part No.
2
RB1-8910-000CN
EN
Quantity 1
Description Arm, Tray Sensing
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-47
1
3 2 Figure 8-25
250-sheet Tray
Table 8-28. 250-sheet Tray Item No.
Part No.
1
RF5-2505-000CN
1 each
Mounting Assembly Separation Roller
2
RB1-9001-000CN
1 each
Panel Roller Access
3
RF5-2490-000CN
1 each
Roller
8-48 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
13
11 13
1
11
2
3 4 10 5
6 9 12 7 8
Figure 8-26
Internal Components of Optional 500-sheet Feeder
Table 8-29. Internal Components of Optional 500-sheet Feeder Item No.
Part No.
1
XD2-1100-502CN
EN
Quantity 1
Description Ring, E
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-49
Table 8-29. Internal Components of Optional 500-sheet Feeder (continued) Item No.
Part No.
2
RG5-2690-000CN
1
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly, Optional (500-sheet)
3
RB1-8865-000CN
4
Roller
4
VS1-6174-000CN
1
Connector
5
RB1-8928-000CN
1
Tray Identifier Plunger
6
RS5-2967-000CN
1
Spring, Compression
7
RB1-8915-000CN
1
Frame, Right
8
RG5-2688-000CN
1
Left Frame Assembly
9
RB1-8927-000CN
1
Spring, Leaf
10
RG5-3822-000CN
1
Paper Feeder Cable
11
RB1-8924-000CN
2
Guide, Lower Tray
12
RG5-3821-000CN
1
Lower Tray Logic PCA
13
RS5-1179-000CN
2
Bearing, Transport Roller
8-50 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
2
3
4
1
5
Figure 8-27
Tray for Optional 500-sheet Feeder
Table 8-30. Tray for Optional 500-sheet Feeder Item No.
Part No.
1
RF5-2489-000CN
1
Separation roller mounting assembly
2
RB1-9374-000CN
1
Stopper
EN
Quantity
Description
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-51
Table 8-30. Tray for Optional 500-sheet Feeder (continued) Item No.
Part No.
3
RS5-2981-000CN
1
Spring
4
RB1-9371-000CN
1
Plate
5
RF5-2490-000CN
1
Feed Roller
8-52 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
EN
4
3
2
1
Figure 8-28
Envelope Feeder
Table 8-31. Envelope Feeder Item No.
Part No.
Exchange No. Quantity
Description
1
C4122A
C4122-69001
Envelope Feeder
EN
1
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-53
Table 8-31. Envelope Feeder (continued) Item No.
Part No.
2
RB1-9088000CN
1
Tray, Envelope Feeder
3
RF5-2511000CN
1
Weight, Envelope
4
RB1-9095000CN
1
Mount, Envelope Weight
8-54 Parts and Diagrams
Exchange No. Quantity
Description
EN
1
2 6 3 5
4
Figure 8-29
Internal Components of Duplexer
Table 8-32. Internal Components of Duplexer Item No.
Part No.
Exchange No.
1
C4123A
C4123-69001
EN
Quantity 1
Description Duplexer
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-55
Table 8-32. Internal Components of Duplexer (continued) Item No.
Part No.
2
RB1-9044-000CN
1
Cover, Top
3
RB1-9047-000CN
1
Cover, Right Duplexer
4
RF5-1876-000CN
1
Cover, Left with Connector
5
RB1-9045-000CN
1
Panel, Rear
6
RH7-1361-000CN
1
Fan
8-56 Parts and Diagrams
Exchange No.
Quantity
Description
EN
Alphabetical Parts List Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
250-Sheet Universal Replacement Tray
C4126A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
500-sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
C4124A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
500-sheet Universal Replacement Tray
C4125A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
AC, Power Receptacle
RG5-3696-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Arm, Output Kicker, Left
RB2-2409-000CN
Table 8-18 on page 8-32
Arm, Output Kicker, Right
RB2-2408-000CN
Table 8-18 on page 8-32
Arm, Tray 1 Paper Sensing
RB1-8787-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
Arm, Tray 1 Tray Retaining
RB2-2387-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
Arm, Tray Sensing
RB1-8910-000CN
Table 8-26 on page 8-45
Arm, Tray Sensing
RB1-8879-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
Bearing, Transport Roller
RS5-1179-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Bearing, Transport Roller
RS5-1309-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
Belt, Feed Guide
RB1-8668-000CN
Table 8-17 on page 8-29
Bushing, Separation Roller
RB1-8946-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
Button, Engine Test
RB1-8688-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Cable Formatter/Control Panel RG5-3708-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Cable Holder
RB1-8689-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Cable, Envelope Feeder Connect
RG5-3704-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Cable, Feed/Registration Sensors
RG5-3706-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Cable, Feeder Module
RG5-3710-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Cable Formatter/Control Panel RG5-3708-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Cable, Laser Scanner
RG5-3701-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Cable, Main Motor
RG5-3709-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Cable, Output Bin Sensor
RG5-3702-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-57
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Cable, Paper Feed/Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid
RG5-3703-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Cable, Sensor
RG5-3711-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
Cable, Top Cover Switch
RG5-3705-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Cable, Tray 1 Sensor
RG5-3700-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Clip, Left Side Panel
RB1-8848-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
Clip, Pickup Spring
RB1-2190-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
Clip, Right Side Panel
RB1-8860-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
Clutch, Separation Roller
RB1-8974-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
Connector
VS1-6174-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Connector (250- and 500sheet Feeder)
VS1-6176-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36 and Table 8-25 on page 8-44
Connector, Lower Tray (with cable)
RG5-3712-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
Control Panel
RG5-2666-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Coupler, Pickup
RB1-8877-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
Coupler, Separation Roller
RB1-8945-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left Lower
RG5-2680-000CN
Table 8-25 on page 8-44
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left Upper
RG5-2678-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Right RG5-2679-000CN Lower
Table 8-25 on page 8-44
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Upper Right
RG5-2677-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
Cover Assembly, Left
RG5-2665-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
Cover Assembly, Right Front
RG5-2664-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
Cover Envelope Feeder Drive RB2-2386-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
Cover, Feeder PCA, 250-sheet RB1-8907-000CN Tray
Table 8-25 on page 8-44
Cover, Feeder PCA, 500-sheet RB1-8886-000CN Tray
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
Cover, Feeder, Left
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
8-58 Parts and Diagrams
RG5-2669-000CN
EN
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Cover, Feeder, Right
RB1-8876-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
Cover, Left with Connector
RF5-1876-000CN
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
Cover, Right Duplexer
RB1-9047-000CN
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
Cover, Top
RB1-9044-000CN
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
Cover, Tray 1 Sensor Arm
RB1-8788-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
Delivery Assembly
RG5-2648-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14 and Table 8-18 on page 8-32
Delivery Drive Assembly
RG5-3721-000CN
Table 8-11 on page 8-22
Delivery Sensor Arm Assembly
RG5-2650-000CN
Table 8-18 on page 8-32
Duplex Printing Accessory (Duplexer)
C4123A
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
E-Clip
XD9-0135-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
EDO DIMM 4 MB 8 MB 16 MB
C4135-67901 C4136-67901 C4137-67901
Engine Controller Board Enhanced I/O Cards Ethernet RJ-45 only Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC, Local Talk Token Ring RJ-45 and DB-9 10/100Base-TX networks
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
RG5-3693-000CN (110V) RG5-3694-000CN (220V)
Table 8-10 on page 8-21 Table 8-1 on page 8-4
J3111-61003
Envelope Feeder
C4122A
Table 8-31 on page 8-53
Fan
RH7-1361-000CN
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
Fan Cover
RB1-8706-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Fan, Main Cooling
RH7-1334-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Feed Roller
RF5-2490-000CN
Table 8-30 on page 8-51
Feeder Controller PCA
RG5-2673-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
Feeder, Control PCA
RG5-2685-000CN
Table 8-25 on page 8-44
Flash DIMM 2 MB 4 MB
C4286A C4287A
EN
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-59
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Font DIMM (8 MB Asian MROM) Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese
C4292A C4293A
Foot
RB1-8107-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
Formatter
C4118-69008
Table 8-4 on page 8-9
Frame, Right
RB1-8915-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Fuser
C4118-69003 (110V) C4118-69004 (220V)
Table 8-19 on page 8-33 and Table 8-20 on page 8-34
Fuser Film Assembly (110V) Fuser Film Assembly (220V)
RG5-2659-000CN RG5-2660-000CN
Table 8-20 on page 8-34
Gear, Coupler
RS5-0911-000CN
Table 8-9 on page 8-19
Gear, Separation Roller Drive RB1-8948-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
Gear, Transport Roller
RS5-0946-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
Guide, Bottom Cable
RB1-8704-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Guide, Cable, Gear Assembly RB1-8757-000CN Plate
Table 8-12 on page 8-23
Guide, Formatter/CP Cable
RB1-8862-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Guide, Lower Tray
RB1-8924-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Guide, Paper
RB1-8890-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
Guide, Paper, Lower
RB1-8914-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
Guide, Tray Alignment
RB1-8882-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
Hard Disk
C2985A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
HP LaserJet Paper
HPJ1124
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
HP Multi-purpose Paper
HPM1120
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Laser Shutter Arm
RB1-8700-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Laser/Scanner Assembly
RG5-2641-000CN/C411869005
Table 8-4 on page 8-9
Latch, Rear Tray
RB1-8846-000CN
Table 8-6 on page 8-12
Left Frame Assembly
RG5-2688-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Leaf Spring
RB1-8827-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Levers, Tray Sensing
RB1-8887-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
Levers, Tray Sensing Lower
RB1-9034-000CN
Table 8-25 on page 8-44
8-60 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Levers, Tray Sensing Upper
RB1-9033-000CN
Table 8-25 on page 8-44
Lower Paper Pickup Drive Assembly (250-sheet)
RG5-2684-000CN
Table 8-27 on page 8-46
Lower Tray Logic PCA
RG5-3821-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Macintosh Computer Serial Cable
92215S
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Macintosh Network Cable Kit
92215N
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Main Motor Assembly
RG5-3729-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Maintenance Kit 110V 220V
C4118-67902 C4118-67903
Mount, Envelope Weight
RB1-9095-000CN
Table 8-31 on page 8-53
Mount, Transport Pressure
RB1-8926-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
Mounting Assembly Separation Roller, 250-Sheet Tray
RF5-2505-000CN
Table 8-28 on page 8-48
Mounting Assembly Separation Roller, 500-Sheet Tray
RF5-2489-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
Overlay (English)
C4118-40002 RBI-8861-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Panel Roller Access
RB1-9001-000CN
Table 8-28 on page 8-48
Panel, Formatter Cover
RB1-8858-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
Panel, Fuser Cover
RB1-8805-000CN
Table 8-19 on page 8-33
Panel, Left Duplex Access
RB2-2400-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Panel, Rear
RB1-9045-000CN
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
Panel, Right Duplex Access
RB2-2401-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Panel, Roller Access
RB1-8947-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Panel, Toner Cartridge Access RB1-8841-000CN
Table 8-6 on page 8-12
Paper Delivery
RG5-2648-000CN
Table 8-18 on page 8-32
Paper Feed Assembly
RG5-2651-000CN
Table 8-15 on page 8-27
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
RG5-2643-000CN
Table 8-17 on page 8-29
Paper Feeder Cable
RG5-3822-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-61
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly, RG5-2690-000CN Optional 500-sheet Tray
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly RG5-2672-000CN (500-sheet)
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
Paper Stop, 500-sheet Tray
RB1-8949-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
Parallel Cables 2 Meter IEEE-1284 cable 3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
C2950A C2951A
Pickup Roller Assembly
RF5-2484-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
Plate
RB1-9371-000CN
Table 8-30 on page 8-51
Plate Cover
RB1-8710-000CN
Table 8-6 on page 8-12
Plate, Control Panel Ground
RB2-2405-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Plate, Gear
RF5-2496-000CN
Table 8-9 on page 8-19
Plate, Gear Plate Ground
RB1-8708-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Plate, Registration Ground
RB1-8747-000CN
Table 8-9 on page 8-19
Power Receptacle
RG5-3696-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Power Switch Activator
RB1-8851-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Power Switch Button
RB1-8849-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
Pre-Transfer Ground Plate Assembly
RF5-1867-000CN
Table 8-9 on page 8-19
Printer Drive Assembly
RG5-2653-000CN
Table 8-12 on page 8-23
Registration Assembly
RG5-2652-000CN
Table 8-16 on page 8-28
Registration/Feed Sensor Assembly
RG5-2642-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Retainer, Toner Sensing Spring
RB1-8690-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Ring, E
XD2-1100-502CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Rod, Toner Drive
RB1-8756-000CN
Table 8-12 on page 8-23
Roller, 250-sheet Tray
RF5-2490-000CN
Table 8-28 on page 8-48
Roller, Belt Idler Shaft
RB1-8715-000CN
Table 8-17 on page 8-29
Roller, Fuser Pressure
RB1-8794-000CN
Table 8-20 on page 8-34
Roller, Pickup, 500-sheet tray
RB1-8865-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
Roller, Transport
RB1-8923-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
8-62 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
EN
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Roller, Transport Pressure
RB1-8922-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules XA9-0917-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36, Table 8-24 on page 8-41, and Table 8-25 on page 8-44
Screw, M3x4, washer head
XA9-0434-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M3x6, washer head
XA9-0267-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M3x6, with star washer FA9-1449-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4, captive, Fuser
RB1-8819-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping (black)
XA9-0870-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping (silver)
XA9-0606-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4x116, long, module RB1-8703-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4x12, self-tapping
XA9-0773-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4x14, self-tapping
XA9-0916-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, Module Attachment
RB1-8703-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
SDRAM DIMM 4 MB 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB
C4140-67901 C4141-67901 C4142-67901 C4143-67901
Sensor, Optical
WG8-5362-000CN
Table 8-11 on page 8-22
Separation roller mounting assembly
RF5-2489-000CN
Table 8-30 on page 8-51
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Serial Adapter C2809A 25-9 pin adapter (male/female)
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Serial Cables 9-9 pin serial cable (male/ female) 9-25 pin serial cable (male/ female)
C2932A C2933A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Shaft, Belt Drive
RB1-8674-000CN
Table 8-17 on page 8-29
Shaft, Belt Idler Assembly
RF5-2495-000CN
Table 8-17 on page 8-29
Solenoid, Tray 1 Drive
RH7-5172-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
Spring
RS5-2981-000CN
Table 8-30 on page 8-51
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-63
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Spring, Compression
RS5-2967-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Spring, Leaf
RB1-8927-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Spring, Pickup
RS5-2632-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
Spring, Rear Tray Latch
RB1-8847-000CN
Table 8-6 on page 8-12
Spring, Separation Roller Tension
RS5-2622-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
Spring, Shutter
RB1-8702-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Spring, Toner Cartridge Drum RB1-8693-000CN Ground
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Spring, Toner Sensing
RB1-8695-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Spring, Transport Roller
RS5-2653-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
Spring, Tray Lock
RS5-2652-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
Standard 500-sheet Tray
C3122A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Stopper
RB1-9374-000CN
Table 8-30 on page 8-51
Strap, Interlock Support Ground
RB1-8694-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Support, Paper Guide
RB1-8873-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
Support, Paper Guide Lower
RB1-8913-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
Support, Top Cover, Left
RB1-8671-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Support, Top Cover, Right
RG5-2645-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Switch, Top Cover Access
WC4-5139-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
Toner Cartridge (10,000 pages)
C4127X
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Toner Cartridge (6,000 pages) C4127A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Top Cover Assembly
RG5-2663-000CN
Figure 8-3 on page 8-12
Transfer Roller Assembly
RG5-4283-000CN
Table 8-9 on page 8-19
Tray 1 Assembly
RG5-2656-000CN
Table 8-14 on page 8-26
Tray 1 Door Assembly
RG5-2667-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
RG5-2655-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
Tray 1 Pickup Roller Assembly RG5-3718-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
Tray Identifier Plunger
RB1-8928-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
Tray, Envelope Feeder
RB1-9088-000CN
Table 8-31 on page 8-53
8-64 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Tray, Rear
RB1-8843-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
Tray, Rear Extension
RB1-8844-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
Upper Paper Pickup Drive Assembly (250-sheet)
RG5-2683-000CN
Table 8-26 on page 8-45
Weight, Envelope
RF5-2511-000CN
Table 8-31 on page 8-53
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-65
Numerical Parts List Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
92215N
Macintosh Network Cable Kit
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
92215S
Macintosh Computer Serial Cable
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C2809A
Serial Adapter Table 8-1 on page 8-4 25-9 pin adapter (male/female)
C2932A C2933A
Serial Cables 9-9 pin serial cable (male/ female) 9-25 pin serial cable (male/ female)
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Parallel Cables 2 Meter IEEE-1284 cable 3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C2950A C2951A C2985A
Hard Disk
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C3122A
Standard 500-sheet Tray
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4118-40002 RBI-8861-000CN
Overlay (English)
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Maintenance Kit 110V 220V
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4118-69003 (110V) C4118-69004 (220V)
Fuser
Table 8-19 on page 8-33 and Table 8-20 on page 8-34
C4118-69008
Formatter
Table 8-4 on page 8-9
C4122A
Envelope Feeder
C4123A
Duplexer
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
C4124A
500-sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4125A
500-sheet Universal Replacement Tray
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4126A
250-Sheet Universal Replacement Tray
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4127A
Toner Cartridge (6,000 pages) Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4127X
Toner Cartridge (10,000 pages)
C4118-67902 C4118-67903
8-66 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
EN
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
EDO DIMM 4 MB 8 MB 16 MB
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4135-67901 C4136-67901 C4137-67901
SDRAM DIMM 4 MB 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4140-67901 C4141-67901 C4142-67901 C4143-67901
Flash DIMM 2 MB 4 MB
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4286A C4287A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4292A C4293A
Font DIMM (8 MB Asian MROM) Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese
FA9-1449-000CN
Screw, M3x6, with star washer Table 8-2 on page 8-6
HPJ1124
HP LaserJet Paper
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
HPM1120
HP Multi-purpose Paper
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Enhanced I/O Cards Ethernet RJ-45 only Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC, Local Talk Token Ring RJ-45 and DB-9 10/100Base-TX networks
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
RB1-2190-000CN
Clip, Pickup Spring
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
RB1-8107-000CN
Foot
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
RB1-8668-000CN
Belt, Feed Guide
Table 8-17 on page 8-29
RB1-8671-000CN
Support, Top Cover, Left
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8674-000CN
Shaft, Belt Drive
Table 8-17 on page 8-29
RB1-8688-000CN
Button, Engine Test
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8689-000CN
Cable Holder
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8690-000CN
Retainer, Toner Sensing Spring
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8693-000CN
Spring, Toner Cartridge Drum Table 8-8 on page 8-17 Ground
J3111-61003
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-67
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RB1-8694-000CN
Strap, Interlock Support Ground
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RB1-8695-000CN
Spring, Toner Sensing
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8700-000CN
Laser Shutter Arm
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8702-000CN
Spring, Shutter
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8703-000CN
Screw, M4x116, long, module Table 8-2 on page 8-6
RB1-8703-000CN
Screw, Module Attachment
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RB1-8704-000CN
Guide, Bottom Cable
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RB1-8706-000CN
Fan Cover
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8708-000CN
Plate, Gear Plate Ground
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8710-000CN
Plate Cover
Table 8-6 on page 8-12
RB1-8715-000CN
Roller, Belt Idler Shaft
Table 8-17 on page 8-29
RB1-8747-000CN
Plate, Registration Ground
Table 8-9 on page 8-19
RB1-8756-000CN
Rod, Toner Drive
Table 8-12 on page 8-23
RB1-8757-000CN
Guide, Cable, Gear Assembly Table 8-12 on page 8-23 Plate
RB1-8787-000CN
Arm, Tray 1 Paper Sensing
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
RB1-8788-000CN
Cover, Tray 1 Sensor Arm
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
RB1-8794-000CN
Roller, Fuser Pressure
Table 8-20 on page 8-34
RB1-8805-000CN
Panel, Fuser Cover
Table 8-19 on page 8-33
RB1-8819-000CN
Screw, M4, captive, Fuser
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
RB1-8841-000CN
Panel, Toner Cartridge Access Table 8-6 on page 8-12
RB1-8843-000CN
Tray, Rear
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
RB1-8844-000CN
Tray, Rear Extension
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
RB1-8846-000CN
Latch, Rear Tray
Table 8-6 on page 8-12
RB1-8847-000CN
Spring, Rear Tray Latch
Table 8-6 on page 8-12
RB1-8848-000CN
Clip, Left Side Panel
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
RB1-8849-000CN
Power Switch Button
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
RB1-8851-000CN
Power Switch Activator
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RB1-8858-000CN
Panel, Formatter Cover
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
RB1-8860-000CN
Clip, Right Side Panel
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
8-68 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RB1-8862-000CN
Guide, Formatter/CP Cable
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RB1-8865-000CN
Roller, 500-sheet Tray
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
RB1-8865-000CN
Roller, Pickup
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
RB1-8873-000CN
Support, Paper Guide
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
RB1-8876-000CN
Cover, Feeder, Right
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
RB1-8877-000CN
Coupler, Pickup
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
RB1-8879-000CN
Arm, Tray Sensing
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
RB1-8882-000CN
Guide, Tray Alignment
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
RB1-8886-000CN
Cover, Feeder PCA, 500-sheet Table 8-21 on page 8-36 Tray
RB1-8887-000CN
Levers, Tray Sensing
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
RB1-8890-000CN
Guide, Paper
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
RB1-8907-000CN
Cover, Feeder PCA, 250-sheet Table 8-25 on page 8-44 Tray
RB1-8910-000CN
Arm, Tray Sensing
Table 8-26 on page 8-45
RB1-8913-000CN
Support, Paper Guide Lower
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
RB1-8914-000CN
Guide, Paper, Lower
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
RB1-8915-000CN
Frame, Right
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
RB1-8922-000CN
Roller, Transport Pressure
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
RB1-8923-000CN
Roller, Transport
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
RB1-8924-000CN
Guide, Lower Tray
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
RB1-8926-000CN
Mount, Transport Pressure
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
RB1-8927-000CN
Spring, Leaf
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
RB1-8928-000CN
Tray Identifier Plunger
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
RB1-8945-000CN
Coupler, Separation Roller
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
RB1-8946-000CN
Bushing, Separation Roller
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
RB1-8947-000CN
Panel, Roller Access
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
RB1-8948-000CN
Gear, Separation Roller Drive Table 8-23 on page 8-40
RB1-8949-000CN
Paper Stop, 500-sheet Tray
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
RB1-8974-000CN
Clutch, Separation Roller
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
RB1-9001-000CN
Panel Roller Access
Table 8-28 on page 8-48
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-69
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RB1-9033-000CN
Levers, Tray Sensing Upper
Table 8-25 on page 8-44
RB1-9034-000CN
Levers, Tray Sensing Lower
Table 8-25 on page 8-44
RB1-9044-000CN
Cover, Top
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
RB1-9045-000CN
Panel, Rear
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
RB1-9047-000CN
Cover, Right Duplexer
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
RB1-9088-000CN
Tray, Envelope Feeder
Table 8-31 on page 8-53
RB1-9095-000CN
Mount, Envelope Weight
Table 8-31 on page 8-53
RB1-9371-000CN
Plate
Table 8-30 on page 8-51
RB1-9374-000CN
Stopper
Table 8-30 on page 8-51
RB2-2386-000CN
Cover Envelope Feeder Drive Table 8-13 on page 8-25
RB2-2387-000CN
Arm, Tray 1 Tray Retaining
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
RB2-2400-000CN
Panel, Left Duplex Access
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB2-2401-000CN
Panel, Right Duplex Access
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB2-2405-000CN
Plate, Control Panel Ground
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB2-2408-000CN
Arm, Output Kicker, Right
Table 8-18 on page 8-32
RB2-2409-000CN
Arm, Output Kicker, Left
Table 8-18 on page 8-32
RF5-1867-000CN
Pre-Transfer Ground Plate Assembly
Table 8-9 on page 8-19
RF5-1876-000CN
Cover, Left with Connector
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
RF5-2484-000CN
Pickup Roller Assembly
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
RF5-2489-000CN
Mounting Assembly Separation Roller, 500-Sheet Tray
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
RF5-2489-000CN
Separation roller mounting assembly
Table 8-30 on page 8-51
RF5-2490-000CN
Feed Roller
Table 8-30 on page 8-51
RF5-2490-000CN
Roller, 250-sheet Tray
RF5-2495-000CN
Shaft, Belt Idler Assembly
Table 8-17 on page 8-29
RF5-2496-000CN
Plate, Gear
Table 8-9 on page 8-19
RF5-2505-000CN
Mounting Assembly Separation Roller, 250-Sheet Tray
Table 8-28 on page 8-48
8-70 Parts and Diagrams
EN
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RF5-2511-000CN
Weight, Envelope
Table 8-31 on page 8-53
RG5-2641-000CN/C411869005
Laser/Scanner Assembly
Table 8-4 on page 8-9
RG5-2642-000CN
Registration/Feed Sensor Assembly
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-2643-000CN
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
Figure 8-14 on page 8-29
RG5-2645-000CN
Support, Top Cover, Right
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RG5-2648-000CN
Delivery Assembly
Table 8-7 on page 8-14 and Table 8-18 on page 8-32
RG5-2648-000CN
Paper Delivery
Table 8-18 on page 8-32
RG5-2650-000CN
Delivery Sensor Arm Assembly
Table 8-18 on page 8-32
RG5-2651-000CN
Paper Feed Assembly
Table 8-12 on page 8-23
RG5-2652-000CN
Registration Assembly
Table 8-16 on page 8-28
RG5-2653-000CN
Printer Drive Assembly
Table 8-12 on page 8-23
RG5-2655-000CN
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
Figure 8-10 on page 8-24
RG5-2656-000CN
Tray 1 Assembly
Table 8-14 on page 8-26
RG5-2659-000CN RG5-2660-000CN
Fuser Film Assembly (110V) Fuser Film Assembly (220V)
Table 8-20 on page 8-34
RG5-2663-000CN
Top Cover Assembly
Table 8-6 on page 8-12
RG5-2664-000CN
Cover Assembly, Right Front
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
RG5-2665-000CN
Cover Assembly, Left
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
RG5-2666-000CN
Control Panel
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-2667-000CN
Tray 1 Door Assembly
Table 8-5 on page 8-10
RG5-2669-000CN
Cover, Feeder, Left
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
RG5-2672-000CN
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly Table 8-22 on page 8-37 (500-sheet)
RG5-2673-000CN
Feeder Controller PCA
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
RG5-2677-000CN
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Upper Right
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
RG5-2678-000CN
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left Upper
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-71
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number
Description
RG5-2679-000CN
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Right Table 8-25 on page 8-44 Lower
RG5-2680-000CN
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left Lower
Table 8-25 on page 8-44
RG5-2683-000CN
Upper Paper Pickup Drive Assembly (250-sheet)
Table 8-26 on page 8-45
RG5-2684-000CN
Lower Paper Pickup Drive Assembly (250-sheet)
Table 8-27 on page 8-46
RG5-2685-000CN
Feeder, Control PCA
Table 8-25 on page 8-44
RG5-2688-000CN
Left Frame Assembly
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
RG5-2690-000CN
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly, Table 8-29 on page 8-49 Optional 500-sheet Tray
RG5-3693-000CN (110V) RG5-3694-000CN (220V)
Engine Controller Board
Table 8-10 on page 8-21
RG5-3696-000CN
AC, Power Receptacle
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RG5-3700-000CN
Cable, Tray 1 Sensor
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RG5-3701-000CN
Cable, Laser Scanner
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-3702-000CN
Cable, Output Bin Sensor
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-3703-000CN
Cable, Paper Feed/Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RG5-3704-000CN
Cable, Envelope Feeder Connect
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RG5-3705-000CN
Cable, Top Cover Switch
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RG5-3706-000CN
Cable, Feed/Registration Sensors
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-3708-000CN
Cable, Formatter/Control Panel
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RG5-3709-000CN
Cable, Main Motor
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RG5-3710-000CN
Cable, Feeder Module
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-3711-000CN
Cable, Sensor
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
RG5-3712-000CN
Connector, Lower Tray (with cable)
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
RG5-3718-000CN
Tray 1 Pickup Roller Assembly Table 8-13 on page 8-25
RG5-3721-000CN
Delivery Drive Assembly
8-72 Parts and Diagrams
Table Number and Page
Table 8-11 on page 8-22
EN
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RG5-3729-000CN
Main Motor Assembly
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
RG5-3821-000CN
Lower Tray Logic PCA
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
RG5-3822-000CN
Paper Feeder Cable
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
RG5-4283-000CN
Transfer Roller Assembly
Table 8-9 on page 8-19
RH7-1334-000CN
Fan, Main Cooling
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RH7-1361-000CN
Fan
Table 8-32 on page 8-55
RH7-5172-000CN
Solenoid, Tray 1 Drive
Table 8-13 on page 8-25
RS5-0911-000CN
Gear, Coupler
Table 8-9 on page 8-19
RS5-0946-000CN
Gear, Transport Roller
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
RS5-1179-000CN
Bearing, Transport Roller
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
RS5-1309-000CN
Bearing, Transport Roller
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
RS5-2622-000CN
Spring, Separation Roller Tension
Table 8-23 on page 8-40
RS5-2632-000CN
Spring, Pickup
Table 8-22 on page 8-37
RS5-2652-000CN
Spring, Tray Lock
Table 8-21 on page 8-36
RS5-2653-000CN
Spring, Transport Roller
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
RS5-2967-000CN
Spring, Compression
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
RS5-2981-000CN
Spring
Table 8-30 on page 8-51
VS1-6174-000CN
Connector
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
VS1-6176-000CN
Connector (250- and 500sheet Feeder)
Table 8-21 on page 8-36 and Table 8-25 on page 8-44
WC4-5139-000CN
Switch, Top Cover Access
Table 8-7 on page 8-14
WG8-5362-000CN
Sensor, Optical
Table 8-11 on page 8-22
XA9-0267-000CN
Screw, M3x6, washer head
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
XA9-0434-000CN
Screw, M3x4, washer head
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
XA9-0606-000CN
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping (silver)
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
XA9-0773-000CN
Screw, M4x12, self-tapping
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
XA9-0870-000CN
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping (black)
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
XA9-0916-000CN
Screw, M4x14, self-tapping
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
EN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-73
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number
Description
XA9-0917-000CN
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules Table 8-21 on page 8-36, Table 8-24 on page 8-41, and Table 8-25 on page 8-44
XD2-1100-502CN
Ring, E
Table 8-29 on page 8-49
XD9-0135-000CN
E-Clip
Table 8-24 on page 8-41
8-74 Parts and Diagrams
Table Number and Page
EN
Index Numerics 250-sheet tray, paper specifications 1-10 500-sheet tray, paper specifications 1-10, 1-11
A AC/DC power distribution 5-4 accessories 8-4 assemblies Delivery 8-31 Delivery Drive 6-41, 8-22 Engine Controller Board 8-20 Fan 6-24 Formatter Cage 6-20 Fuser 6-18, 8-33 Gear Train 6-40 Laser Scanner 6-23 locations of 8-8 Main Motor 6-25 Output 6-21 Paper Feed 6-36, 8-27 Paper Feed Guide 8-29 Paper Pickup Drive 8-37 Paper Pickup Drive, lower 8-46 Paper Pickup Drive, upper 8-45 Printer Drive 8-23 Registration 6-34, 8-28 removing and replacing 6-18 Top Cover 8-12 Tray 1 8-26 Tray 1 Pickup 6-29, 8-24
C cables, replacement 8-6 capacity, paper 250-sheet tray 1-10 500-sheet tray 1-10, 1-11 card stock 1-18 CFC usage 1-23 cleaning accessories 4-2 paper path 4-4 printer 4-2 spilled toner 4-4 using cleaning page 4-4 clutches 5-13, 5-34, 7-100 component locations 7-75 Configuration menu 3-17
EN
Configuration Page 7-47 connectors 7-92 control panel 3-2, 5-21 changing settings 3-5 defaults 3-4 keys 3-2, 3-3 layout 3-2 lights 3-2 printing Menu Map 3-5 settings 3-4 Control Panel Overlay, removing and replacing 6-7 Control Panel, removing and replacing 6-8 covers, removing and replacing 6-6 CPU 5-18 Create Cleaning Page message 4-4
D Delivery Assembly 8-31 Delivery Drive Assembly 8-22 removing and replacing 6-41 diagrams how to use 8-2 paper size detection switches 7-86 reference 7-75 dimensions, paper 250-sheet tray 1-10 500-sheet tray 1-10, 1-11 DIMM slots 5-20 documentation 2-4 drives laser 5-12 scanner 5-12 drum cleaning 5-26 conditioning 5-27 Duplexer 5-46
E EconoMode 5-17 EIO menu 3-26 electrical specifications 1-6 Energy Star 1-23 Engine Controller Board 7-84 inputs and outputs 5-9 Engine Controller Board Assembly 8-20 removing and replacing 6-44
Index-1
engine controller subsystem 5-7 Engine Module 6-42 engine test 7-11 Envelope Feeder 5-44 envelopes 1-16 environmental product stewardship 1-23 Event Log 7-13
F Fan, removing and replacing 6-24 500-sheet tray, paper specifications 1-10, 1-11 Formatter Cage Assembly, removing and replacing 6-20 Formatter Pan, removing and replacing 6-39 Formatter system 5-16 Front Right Side Cover, removing and replacing 6-13 Fuser Assembly 8-33 Fuser Mode setting 5-32 Fuser, removing and replacing 6-18 fusing temperature, variable 5-32
G Gear Train, removing and replacing 6-40
H heavy paper 1-18
I I/O menu 3-23 image developing 5-29 transferring 5-30 writing 5-28 Image Formation System 5-22 photosensitive drum 5-25 Information menu 3-6 input/output 5-18
L labels 1-15 laser drive 5-12 Laser Scanner, removing and replacing 6-23 Left Side Cover, removing and replacing 6-12 Lower Paper Feed Module Plate (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN), removing and replacing 6-53
Index-2
M Main Motor 7-91 Main Motor, removing and replacing 6-25 maintenance 4-1 maintenance count 3-30 memory printer 5-19 Random Access Memory (RAM) 5-19 Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) 5-20 model numbers 1-5 motors 5-14, 7-91
N NVRAM, clearing 3-35
O Optional 500-sheet Tray 5-40 ordering information 2-3 phone numbers 2-5 Output Assembly, removing and replacing 6-21 overcurrent overvoltage protection 5-5 ozone production 1-23
P page count 3-30 page protect 5-20 paper heavy 1-18 motion control 5-13 size detection switches 7-86 specifications 1-9 Paper Feed Assembly 8-27 removing and replacing 6-36 Paper Feed Guide Assembly 8-29 Paper Feed Module 6-42 Paper Feed Module Gear Train Assembly, removing and replacing 6-51 Paper Feed Module Plate, removing and replacing 6-50 Paper Feed Module Side Rails, removing and replacing 6-52 Paper Feed Rollers, removing and replacing 6-48 Paper Feed System 5-33 Paper Handling menu 3-7 paper jam 5-48 paper path 7-81 cleaning 4-4 troubleshooting 7-42 Paper Pickup Drive Assembly 8-37 Paper Pickup Drive assembly lower 8-46 upper 8-45
EN
paper specifications card stock 1-18 envelopes 1-16 guidelines for using paper 1-13 heavy paper 1-18 labels 1-15 supported types 1-12 transparencies 1-15 weight equivalence 1-14 parts 2-3 parts lists alphabetical 8-57 how to use 8-2 numerical 8-66 PCA Controller, removing and replacing 6-56 PCA Cover, removing and replacing HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN 6-54 HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N 6-55 PCAs 7-95 Phillips screwdriver 6-3 photosensitive drum 5-24 Posidrive screwdriver 6-3 power distribution, high voltage 5-6 power on troubleshooting 7-7 power supply system 5-4 AC/DC distribution 5-4 PowerSave mode 1-23 preventative maintenance 4-5 Print Quality menu 3-10 printer display 7-12 features 1-2 messages 7-17 model numbers 1-5 serial numbers 1-5 testing 3-34 weight 1-7 Printer Drive Assembly 8-23 printing Configuration Page 7-47 engine test 3-34, 7-11 Event Log 7-13 images 7-67 interface 7-69 operating checks 7-6 Optional 500-sheet Tray 5-40 Tray 1 5-35 Tray 2 5-37 troubleshooting 7-6 Printing menu 3-13 Product Stewardship, power consumption 1-23
EN
R Random Access Memory (RAM) 5-19 Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin, removing and replacing 6-14 Rear Right Side Cover, removing and replacing 6-6 recycling toner cartridges 2-8 Registration Assembly 8-28 removing and replacing 6-34 regulatory information 1-19– 1-21 removal/replacement strategy 6-2 reset maintenance count 3-30 page count 3-30 serial number 3-30 Resets menu 3-28 resetting printer 3-35 clearing NVRAM 3-35 cold reset 3-35 Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide, removing and replacing 6-33
S safety statements 1-19– 1-21 scanner drive 5-12 screwdrivers 6-3 screws 6-3, 8-6 sensors 5-13, 5-34, 7-97 Separation Rollers, removing and replacing 6-49 sequence of operation 5-49 serial number 3-30 serial numbers 1-5 service mode 3-29 maintenance count 3-30 page count 3-30 serial number 3-30 site requirements 1-6 electrical specifications 1-6 printer weight 1-7 space requirements 1-7 solenoids 5-13, 7-100 space requirements 1-7 specifications electrical 1-6 paper 1-9 supplies 2-3, 8-4 cables, replacement 8-6 screws 8-6 switches 5-13, 7-102
Index-3
T thermistor 7-97 timing diagrams 7-104 toner cleaning spilled 4-4 consumption 1-23 toner cartridge 2-8, 5-22, 5-24 detection 5-7 recycling 2-8 refilled 2-8 Toner Cartridge Drive Arm, removing and replacing 6-9 tools 6-3 Top Cover Assembly 8-12 Top Cover, removing and replacing 6-7 top margin adjustment 6-46 training media 2-4 Transfer Roller, removing and replacing 6-26 transparencies 1-15 Tray 1 5-35 Tray 1 Assembly 8-26 Tray 1 Pickup Assembly 8-24 Tray 1 Pickup Assembly, removing and replacing 6-29 Tray 1 Pickup Roller, removing and replacing 6-27 Tray 1, removing and replacing 6-15 Tray 2 5-37 troubleshooting Configuration Page 7-47 display 7-12 engine test 7-11 Event Log 7-13 flowchart 7-4 image system 7-67 information pages 7-45 interface 7-69 paper path troubleshooting 7-42 power on 7-7 preliminary operating checks 7-6 printer messages 7-17 printing system 7-6 troubleshooting process 7-2 250-sheet tray, paper specifications 1-10
V variable fusing temperature 5-32
W warranty statement 2-9 weight, paper 250-sheet tray 1-10 500-sheet tray 1-10, 1-11
Index-4
EN
HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, 4000 N, and 4000 TN Printers
User's Guide
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 1997 All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. Publication number C4118-90901 First Edition, October 1997
Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with respect to this information. HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, or other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information.
Trademark Credits Adobe, PostScript, and Adobe Photoshop are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Arial, Monotype, and Times New Roman are U.S. registered trademarks of the Monotype Corporation. CompuServe is a U.S. trademark of CompuServe, Inc. Helvetica, Palatino, Times, and Times Roman are trademarks of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft, MS Windows, Windows, and Windows NT are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. TrueType is a U.S. trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered service mark of the U.S. EPA.
Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714
Take a look at all that HP Support has to offer! Thank you for your purchase. Along with your product, you receive a variety of support services from Hewlett-Packard and our support partners that are designed to give you the results you need, quickly and professionally. HP Support Online Services: for 24-hour World Wide Web URL - Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, plus product access to information over your and support information may be obtained from the following URLs: modem, we suggest these services: in the U.S.: http://www.hp.com in Europe:
http://www2.hp.com
Printer drivers may be obtained from the following sites: in Japan:
ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/drivers/
in Korea:
http://www.hp.com.kr
in Taiwan:
http://www.hp.com.tw or from a local driver website of http://www.dds.com.tw
HP Bulletin Board Service - Our electronic download service provides convenient access to HP printer drivers, updated HP printer software, product information, and troubleshooting hints. Set your communications software to N,8,1 and dial or use: in the U.S. and Canada:(1) (208) 344-1691 in Taiwan:
(886) (2) 923-3233
in Korea:
HITEL or CHOLIAN (Go HPK)
in Australia:
(61) (3) 9890-0276
in New Zealand:
(64) (9) 356-3660
in China:
(86) (10) 6261-4172
European Bulletin Board Service numbers are listed at http://www2.hp.com. America Online - (America Online/Bertelsmann is available in France, Germany, and UK) - Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and support documentation to help answer your questions on HP products are available. Use Keyword HP to start your tour or call (1) (800) 827-6364 and ask for representative #1118 to subscribe. CompuServe - Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and interactive sharing of technical information with other members is available on CompuServe's HP User’s forums (GO HP), or call (1) (800) 524-3388 and ask for representative #51 to subscribe. (CompuServe is also available in the U.K., France, Belgium, Switzerland, Germany, and Austria.) Phone: (1) (970) 339-7009
For Asia-Pacific Countries:
Contact Fulfill Plus at (65) 740-4477 (Hong Kong, Indonesia, Philippines, Malaysia, or Singapore). For Korea, call (82) (2) 3270-0805 or (82) (2) 3270-0893.
For Australia, New Zealand, and India:
For Australia and New Zealand, call (61) (2) 565-6099. For India, call (91) (11) 682-6035.
For European English:
For U.K., call (44) (142) 986-5511. For Ireland and outside U.K., call (44) (142) 986-5511.
HP Direct Ordering for Accessories and Supplies:
Call (1) (800) 538-8787 (U.S.) or (1) (800) 387-8164 (Canada).
HP Support Assistant compact disc:
This support tool offers a comprehensive online information system designed to provide technical and product information on HP products. To subscribe to this quarterly service in the U.S. or Canada, call (1) (800) 457-1762. In Hong Kong, Indonesia, Malaysia, or Singapore, call Fulfill Plus at (65) 740-4477.
HP Service Information:
To locate HP-authorized dealers, call (1) (800) 243-9816 (U.S.) or (1) (800) 387-3867 (Canada).
EN
Fax: (1) (970) 330-7655
Mail:
Hewlett-Packard Co. P.O. Box 1754 Greeley, CO 80632 U.S.A.
Obtaining Software Utilities and Electronic Information for U.S. and Canada:
iii
HP Support (Continued) HP Service Agreements:
Call (1) (800) 446-0522 (U.S.) or (1) (800) 268-1221 (Canada).
HP FIRST: HP FIRST Fax will deliver detailed troubleshooting information on common software and troubleshooting tips for your HP product. Call from any touch-tone phone and request up to three documents per call. These documents will be sent to the fax of your choice. Australia
(61) (3) 9272-2627
Korea
(82) (2) 769-0543
Austria
(43) (1) 0660-8128
Malaysia
(60) (3) 298-2478
Belgium (Dutch)
(32) (2) 0800-11906
Netherlands
(31) (20) 0800-222420
Belgium (French)
(32) (2) 0800-17043
New Zealand
(64) (9) 356-6642
Canada
(1) (800) 333-1917
Norway
(47) 800-11319
China
(86) (10) 6505-5280
Portugal
(351) (1) 0505-313342
Denmark
(45) 8001-0453
Philippines
(65) 291-7951
English (outside of U.K.)
(31) (20) 681-5792
Singapore
(65) 275-7251
Finland
(358) (9) 0800-13134
Spain
(34) 900 993123
France
(33) (146) 0800-905900
Sweden
(46) (2) 079-5743
Germany
(49) (13) 081-0061
Switzerland (German)
(41) (1) 0800-551527
Hong Kong
(852) 2506-2422
Switzerland (French)
(41) (1) 0800-551526
Hungary
(36) (1) 252-4647
Taiwan
(886) (2) 719-5589
India
(91) (11) 682-6035
Thailand
(66) (2) 661-3511
Indonesia
(62) (21) 352-2044
United Kingdom
(44) (134) 0800-960271
Italy
(39) (2) 1678-59020
United States
(1) (800) 333-1917
Japan
(81) (3) 3335-8622
iv
EN
Customer Support Options Worldwide The service and support chapter of this user’s guide contains worldwide sales and service addresses and phone numbers for countries not listed here. Call (1) (208) 323-2551 Monday through Friday from 6 am to 6 pm (Mountain Time) free Customer Support and Product Repair Assistance for of charge during the warranty period. However, your standard long-distance phone charges still apply. Have your system nearby and your serial number ready when calling. the U.S. and Canada: (Refer to the service and support chapter of this user’s guide for additional product repair information.)
If you know your printer needs repair, call (1) (800) 243-9816 to locate your nearest HP-authorized service provider, or call (1) (800) 633-3600 for HP centralized service dispatch. Post-warranty telephone assistance is available to answer your product questions. Call (1) (900) 555-1500 ($2.50* per minute, U.S. only) or call (1) (800) 999-1148 ($25* per call, Visa or Master Card, U.S. and Canada) Monday through Friday from 7 am to 6 pm and Saturday from 9 am to 3 pm (Mountain Time). Charges begin only when you connect with a support technician. *Prices subject to change.
European Customer Support Center Language and In-Country Options Available Open Monday through Friday 8:30–18:00 CET HP provides a free telephone support service during the warranty period. By calling a telephone number listed below, you will be connected to a responsive team waiting to help you. If you require support after your warranty has expired, you can receive support for a fee through the same telephone number. The fee is charged on a per-incident basis. When calling HP, have the following information ready: product name and serial number, date of purchase, and description of the problem. English
Dutch French
Ireland: (353) (1) 662-5525 UK: (44) (171) 512-5202 International: (44) (171) 512-5202 Belgium: (32) (2) 626-8806 Netherlands: (31) (20) 606-8751 France: (33) (45) 043-9853 Belgium: (32) (2) 626-8807 Switzerland: (41) (84) 880-1111
German Norwegian Danish Finnish Swedish Italian Spanish Portuguese
Germany: (49) (180) 525-8143 Austria: (43) (1) 0660-6386 Norway: (47) 2211-6299 Denmark: (45) 3929-4099 Finland: (358) (9) 0203-47288 Sweden: (46) (8) 619-2170 Italy: (39) (2) 264-10350 Spain: (34) 902 321 123 Portugal: (351) (1) 441-7199
In-country support numbers: If you require support after your warranty has expired or additional product repair services, or if your country is not listed below, see “Worldwide Sales and Service Offices” in the service and support chapter of this user’s guide. Argentina
(54) (1) 781-4059 (54) (1) 781-4069
Japan Malaysia
(81) (3) (3335-8333 (60) (3) 295-2566
Australia
(61) (3) 272-8000
México D.F.
(52) (5) 326-4600
Brazil
(55) (11) 709-1444
México Guadalajara
(52) (3) 669-9500
Canada
(1) (208) 323-2551
México Monterrey
(52) (83) 378-4240
China
(86) (10) 6261-4174 (86) (10) 6261-4175 (86) (10) 6261-4176 (86) (10) 6262-5666
Middle East/Africa New Zealand Philippines Poland
(41) (22) 780-7111 (64) (9) 356-6640 (63) (2) 894-1451 (48) (22) 37-5065
Czech Republic
(42) (2) 471-7321
Portugal
(351) (1) 301-7330
Greece
(30) (1) 689-6411
Russia
(7) (95) 923-5001
Hong Kong
(852) 800-7729
Singapore
(65) 272-5300
Hungary
(36) (1) 343-0310
Switzerland
(41) (1) 753-7111
India
(91) (11) 682-6035 (91) (11) 682-6069
Taiwan Thailand
(886) (2) 717-0055 (66) (2) 661-4011
Indonesia
(62) (21) 350-3408
Korea
(82) (2) 3270-0700; outside Seoul, call (82) (80) 999-0700
EN
(66) (2) 661-4012 Turkey
(90) (1) 224-5925
v
vi
EN
Contents 1 Printer Basics Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Printer Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Printer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Printer Parts and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessories and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Suggested Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Control Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Control Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Control Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Control Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Printer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Printer Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Software for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Software for Macintosh Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Software for Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2 Printing Tasks Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Selecting the Output Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Printing to the Top Output Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Printing to the Rear Output Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Loading Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Loading Tray 2 (4000/4000 N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Loading Trays 2 and 3 (4000 T/4000 TN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Loading the Optional 500-Sheet Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Printing Both Sides of Paper (Optional Duplexer) . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Printing Special Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Printing Letterhead, Prepunched, or Preprinted Paper . . . . 35 Printing Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Printing Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Printing Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Printing Cards, Custom-Size and Heavy Paper . . . . . . . . . 45 Advanced Printing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Using Features in the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Customizing Tray 1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Printing by Type and Size of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
EN
Contents
vii
3 Printer Maintenance Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Managing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 HP Policy on Non-HP Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Toner Cartridge Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Toner Cartridge Life Expectancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Continue Printing When Toner is Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Cleaning the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4 Problem Solving Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Clearing Jams from the Input Tray Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Clearing Jams from the Top Cover Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Clearing Jams from the Output Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Clearing Jams from the Optional Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Solving Repeated Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Understanding Printer Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Correcting Output Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Determining Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Troubleshooting Flowchart for Macintosh Users . . . . . . . . . 90 Checking the Printer’s Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 PCL or PS Font List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5 Service and Support Hewlett-Packard Warranty Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Service During and After the Warranty Period . . . . . . . . . . 98 Guidelines for Repacking the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Limited Warranty for Toner Cartridge Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Service Information Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 HP Software License Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Worldwide Sales and Service Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
viii
Contents
EN
A Specifications Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Paper Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Supported Sizes and Weights of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 Supported Types of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9 Card Stock and Heavy Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11 Printer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 Serial Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
B Control Panel Menus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Paper Handling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Print Quality Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 I/O Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 EIO Menu (4000 N/4000 TN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19 Resets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
C Printer Memory and Expansion Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Installing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Checking Memory Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 Adjusting Memory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 Installing EIO Cards/Mass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
D Printer Commands Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 Understanding PCL Printer Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 Combining Escape Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 Entering Escape Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 Selecting PCL Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 Common PCL Printer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
EN
Contents
ix
E Regulatory Information FCC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Product Stewardship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toner Material Safety Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laser Safety Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canadian DOC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCCI Statement (Japan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laser Statement for Finland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1 E-2 E-2 E-6 E-7 E-8 E-8 E-8 E-8 E-9
Glossary Index
x
Contents
EN
1 Printer Basics Overview Congratulations on your purchase of an HP LaserJet 4000 series printer. If you have not done so, see the getting started guide provided with the printer for setup instructions. Now that the printer is set up and ready to use, take a few moments to get to know the printer. This chapter introduces the following:
• Features and benefits of the printer. • Important printer parts and locations. • Accessories and supplies available for the printer. • The layout and basic operation of the printer’s control panel. • Helpful printer software for increased printing flexibility.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
1
Printer Features and Benefits Speed and Throughput
• Instant-on fuser prints the first page in 12 seconds • Prints letter-size paper 17 pages per minute (ppm) or A4-size •
paper 16 ppm 100-MHz RISC processor enhances throughput
Resolution
• FastRes 1200 for fast, high quality image printing • ProRes 1200 for best print quality • Up to 220 levels of gray for smooth, photo-like images • New HP precision toner for clear, sharp output Paper Handling
• Handles up to 600 sheets of paper • Prints a wide range of sizes and weights Language and Fonts
• HP PCL 6 and HP’s PostScript Level 2 emulation • 110 fonts for Microsoft Windows, plus HP FontSmart Expandable design
• 500-sheet universal paper tray, 75-envelope power feeder, and • • • •
2
duplex printing accessory available Flash storage for forms, fonts, and signatures Memory can be expanded up to 100 MB Two EIO slots for connecting to networks HP JetSend enabled
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Printer Information Configurations This printer is available in four configurations, as described below.
HP LaserJet 4000 The HP LaserJet 4000 comes standard with 4 MB RAM and one 500-sheet tray.
HP LaserJet 4000 N The HP LaserJet 4000 N comes standard with 8 MB RAM, an HP JetDirect print server card for connecting to a network, and one 500-sheet tray.
HP LaserJet 4000 T The HP LaserJet 4000 T comes standard with 4 MB RAM and two 250-sheet trays.
HP LaserJet 4000 TN The HP LaserJet 4000 TN comes standard with 8 MB RAM, an HP JetDirect print server card for connecting to a network, and two 250-sheet trays.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
3
Printer Parts and Locations Top output bin
Top cover
Control panel
Additional memory can be installed here.
Tray 1 (100-sheet, with extension) Power switch
Tray numbers Paper level indicator
Tray 2 (500-sheet, closed)
(HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N printers shown.)
Serial and model numbers (inside cover) Rear output bin (straight-through paper path)
Serial and accessory interface connectors
Memory, network, or I/O (More than one can be installed.)
Power connector Parallel interface connector
Figure 1
4
Printer Parts (front and rear views)
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Accessories and Supplies You can increase the capabilities of the printer with optional accessories and supplies. Use accessories and supplies specifically designed for the printer to ensure optimum performance.
Note
The printer supports two enhanced input/output (EIO) cards. Other accessories and options are available. For ordering information, see the following page.
Suggested Accessories Use the following accessories to optimize the printer.
HP JetDirect print server (EIO card)
Envelope Feeder
EN
Memory or Flash DIMM
Duplex Printing Accessory Envelope Feeder (or duplexer, for 2-sided printing)
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N printers Figure 2
Hard disk (EIO card)
Optional 500-sheet tray
Duplex Printing Accessory (or duplexer, for 2-sided printing)
HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN printers
Optional Accessories
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
5
Ordering Information Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer. To order an accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
Printing Supplies
Paper Handling
Ordering Information
6
Item
Description or Use
Part Number
500-Sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
Paper feeder and one 500-sheet tray.
C4124A
Envelope Feeder
Automatically feeds up to 75 envelopes.
C4122A
Duplex Printing Accessory (duplexer)
Allows automatic printing on both sides of paper.
C4123A
250-Sheet Replacement Tray
Replacement paper tray for the HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN printers (Trays 2 and 3).
C4126A
500-Sheet Replacement Tray
Replacement paper tray for the HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N printers (Tray 2).
C4125A
HP Multi-purpose Paper
HP brand paper for a variety of uses (1 box of 10 reams, 500 sheets each). To order a sample, in the U.S. call 1-800-471-4701.
HPM1120
HP LaserJet Paper
Premium HP brand paper for use with HP LaserJet printers (1 box of 10 reams, 500 sheets each). To order a sample, in the U.S. call 1-800-471-4701.
HPJ1124
Toner Cartridge (6,000 pages)
Replacement HP precision toner cartridge.
C4127A
Toner Cartridge (10,000 pages)
Replacement HP precision toner cartridge.
C4127X
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Cable and Interface Accessories
Memory, Fonts, and Mass Storage
Ordering Information (Continued)
EN
Item
Description or Use
Part Number
Dual In-line Memory Module (DIMM)
Boosts the ability of the printer to handle large print jobs (maximum 100 MB with HP brand DIMMs):
EDO DIMMs
4 MB 8 MB 16 MB
C4135A C4136A C4137A
SDRAM DIMMs
4 MB 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB
C4140A C4141A C4142A C4143A
Flash DIMM
Font DIMM
Permanent storage for fonts and forms: 2 MB 4 MB
C4286A C4287A
8 MB Asian MROM: traditional Chinese simplified Chinese
C4286A C4287A
Hard Disk
Permanent storage for fonts and forms. Also used for making multiple original prints.
C2985A
Parallel Cables
2 Meter IEEE-1284 cable 3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
C2950A C2951A
Serial Cables
9-9 pin serial cable (male/female) 9-25 pin serial cable (male/female)
Serial Adapter
C2932A C2933A
25-9 pin adapter (male/female)
C2809A
Macintosh Computer Serial Cable
For connecting to a Macintosh computer.
92215S
Macintosh Network Cable Kit
For PhoneNET or LocalTalk connection.
92215N
Enhanced I/O Cards
HP JetDirect print server multi-protocol EIO network cards: Ethernet RJ-45 only Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC, LocalTalk Token Ring RJ-45 and DB-9
J3110A J3111A J3112A
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
7
Documentation
Ordering Information (Continued)
8
Item
Description or Use
Part Number
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide
A guide to using paper and other print media with HP LaserJet printers.
5010-6394
PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference Documentation Package
A guide to using printer commands with HP LaserJet printers.
5021-0330
HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, 4000 N, and 4000 TN Printers User’s Guide
An additional copy of this user’s guide.
C4118-90901 (English)
HP LaserJet 4000 and 4000 N Printers Getting Started Guide
An additional copy of the getting started guide.
C4118-90972 (English)
HP LaserJet 4000 T and 4000 TN Printers Getting Started Guide
An additional copy of the getting started guide.
C4119-90901 (English)
HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, 4000 N, and 4000 TN Printers Quick Reference Guide
An additional copy of the quick reference guide.
C4118-90926 (English)
User’s Documentation Bundle, HP LaserJet 4000 and 4000 N Printers
An additional copy of this user’s guide, the getting started guide, and the quick reference guide.
C4118-99001 (English)
User’s Documentation Bundle, HP LaserJet 4000 T and 4000 TN
An additional copy of this user’s guide, the getting started guide, and the quick reference guide.
C4119-99001 (English)
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Control Panel Layout The printer’s control panel consists of the following:
2-line display
READY Go
Ready
Menu
Data
Item
Attention
– Value + Cancel Job
Figure 3
Select
Control Panel Layout
Control Panel Lights
EN
Light
Indication
Ready
The printer is ready to print.
Data
The printer is processing information.
Attention
Action is required. See the control panel display.
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
9
Control Panel Keys Key
Function
[Go]
• Places the printer either online or offline. • Prints any data residing in the printer’s buffer. • Allows the printer to resume printing after being offline. Clears most printer messages and places the printer online. • Allows the printer to continue printing with an error message such as TRAY x LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE] or UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE. • Confirms a manual feed request if Tray 1 is loaded and TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE has been set from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel. • Overrides a manual feed request from Tray 1 by selecting paper from the next available tray. • Exits the control panel menus. (To save a selected control panel setting, first press [Select].)
[Cancel Job]
Cancels the print job that the printer is processing. The time it takes to cancel depends on the size of the print job. (Press it only once.)
[Menu]
Cycles through the control panel menus. Press the right end of the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move backward.
[Item]
Cycles through the selected menu’s items. Press the right end of the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move backward.
[- Value +]
Cycles through the selected menu item’s values. Press [+] to move forward or [-] to move backward.
[Select]
• Saves the selected value for that item. An asterisk (*) appears next to the selection, indicating that it is the new default. Default settings remain when the printer is switched off or reset (unless you reset all factory defaults from the Resets Menu). • Prints one of the printer information pages from the control panel.
10
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Control Panel Menus For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see page B-1. Press [Menu] for access to all control panel menus. When additional trays or other accessories are installed in the printer, new menu items automatically appear.
To change a control panel setting: 1 2 3 4
Press [Menu] until the desired menu appears. Press [Item] until the desired item appears. Press [- Value +] until the desired setting appears. Press [Select] to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears next to the selection in the display, indicating that it is now the default. 5 Press [Go] to exit the menu. Note
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control panel settings. (Software application settings override printer driver settings.) If you cannot access a menu or item, it is either not an option for the printer, or your network administrator has locked the function. (The control panel reads ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED.) See your network administrator.
To print a control panel menu map: To see the current settings for all of the menus and items available in the control panel, print a control panel menu map. 1 Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press [Item] until PRINT MENU MAP appears. 3 Press [Select] to print the menu map. You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference. The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
11
Printer Software The printer comes with helpful software on a compact disc. See the getting started guide for installation instructions. Check the ReadMe file provided on the compact disc for additional software included and supported languages.
Note
Windows Client
Windows Software Drivers HP Toolbox HP FontSmart
Network Administrator Windows Software HP JetAdmin Drivers HP Toolbox HP FontSmart Macintosh Software PPDs HP LaserJet Utility
Macintosh Software PPDs HP LaserJet Utility Macintosh Client
Figure 4
Printer Software
The printer drivers provided on the compact disc must be installed to take full advantage of the printer’s features. The other software programs are recommended, but are not required for operation. See the ReadMe file for more information. Note
Network Administrators: HP JetAdmin should be installed only on the network administrator’s computer. Load all other applicable software on the server and all client computers. The most recent drivers, additional drivers, and other software are available from the Internet. Depending on the configuration of Windows-driven computers, the installation program for the printer software automatically checks the computer for Internet access to obtain the latest software. If you do not have access to the Internet, see the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide to obtain the most recent software.
12
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Printer Drivers Printer drivers access the printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer (via a printer language). Note
Check the ReadMe file provided on the compact disc for additional software included and supported languages. Certain printer features are available only from the PCL 6 driver. See the printer software help for availability of features.
Drivers Included with the Printer The following printer drivers are included with the printer. The most recent drivers are available on the Internet. Depending on the configuration of Windows computers, the installation program for the printer software automatically checks the computer for Internet access to obtain the latest drivers. PCL 5e
PCL 6
PS1
Windows 3.1x
✓
✓
✓
Windows 95
✓
✓
✓
Windows NT 3.512 Windows NT 4.0 Macintosh computer
✓ ✓
✓
✓
PPDs are included (page 19).
1. Hewlett-Packard’s PostScript Level 1 Emulation for Windows 3.1x; Level 2 Emulation for all other operating systems. 2. The PCL 5e driver is available from the Internet. (See the HP support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
Within the computer installation program, select Typical Install to install the PCL 5e, PCL 6, and PS drivers and HP FontSmart. Select Custom Install to install only the software you prefer, or if you are a network administrator. Select Minimum Install to install only the PCL 6 driver for basic printing.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
13
Additional Drivers You can obtain the following printer drivers by downloading them from the Internet, or by requesting them from an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
• OS/2 PCL/PCL 6 printer driver* • OS/2 PS printer driver* • WordPerfect 5.1 printer driver • Windows NT 3.51 PCL 5e printer driver *The OS/2 drivers are also available from IBM, and are packaged with OS/2. Note
14
If the desired printer driver is not on the compact disc or is not listed here, check the software application’s installation disks or ReadMe files to see if they include support for the printer. If not, contact the software manufacturer or distributor and request a driver for the printer.
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Software for Windows Use the Typical Install or Custom Install option to install the HP software. (This includes several printer drivers. For more information, see page 13.) Note
Network Administrators: If the printer is attached to a network, before you can print, the printer must be configured for that network using HP JetAdmin or similar network software. (See the getting started guide.)
Access the Windows Printer Driver To configure the driver, access it in one of the following ways: Temporarily Change Settings (from a software application)
Change Default Settings (across all applications)
Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0
From the File menu, click Print, and then click Properties. (The actual steps can vary; this is the most common method.)
Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the printer icon, and choose Properties.
Windows 3.1x and Windows NT 3.51
From the File menu, click Print, click Printers, and then click Options. (The actual steps can vary; this is the most common method.)
From the Windows control panel, double-click Printers, highlight the printer, and click Setup.
Operating System
Note
EN
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control panel settings. (Software application settings override printer driver settings.)
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
15
Choose the Right Printer Driver for Your Needs Choose a printer driver based on the way you use the printer.
• Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of the printer’s features. Unless backward compatibility with previous PCL drivers or older printers is necessary, the PCL 6 driver is recommended. • Use the PCL 5e driver if you want print results to look comparable to those from older printers. Certain features are not available in this driver. (Do not use the PCL 5e driver provided with this printer with older printers.) • Use the PS driver for compatibility with PostScript Level 2 needs. Certain features are not available in this driver. The printer automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages.
Printer Driver Help Each printer driver has help screens that can be activated either from the Help button, the F1 key, or a question mark symbol in the upper right corner in the printer driver (depending on the Windows operating system used). These help screens give detailed information about the specific driver. Printer driver help is separate from the software application help.
16
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
HP ToolBox Access HP ToolBox from a printer icon on the desktop in Windows 3.1x or on the Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 Taskbar. HP ToolBox provides one-step access to the current status of the printer and a list of all available features, including the following:
• printer status • “How Do I...” help • utilities From HP ToolBox you can launch utilities such as HP JobMonitor. If you choose not to use HP ToolBox, it can be disabled. See the printer software help. HP JobMonitor HP JobMonitor is a component of HP ToolBox that shows the position of print jobs in the queue, which print jobs have been printed, and who sent them. To access JobMonitor, right-click the tray icon in HP ToolBox, and then select Jobs from the Contents menu.
HP FontSmart Access HP FontSmart from the HP LaserJet folder or through HP ToolBox. HP FontSmart is a font management utility (for Windows only) which does the following:
• installs, uninstalls, and deletes fonts • manages fonts inside a single window by allowing you to • • Note
EN
drag-and-drop shows the 110 matching screen fonts for the internal fonts in the printer downloads fonts to a mass storage device
With Windows 3.1x and Windows 95, you can use HP FontSmart to download fonts to a mass storage device. Types of fonts supported are TrueType, PostScript Type 1 and PostScript Type 42 (TrueType fonts converted to PostScript format). To download Type 1 fonts, Adobe Type Manager must be installed and turned on.
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
17
HP JetSend Communications Technology HP JetSend can be installed through an installer on the compact disc. HP JetSend is a new technology from Hewlett-Packard that allows network devices to communicate with each other directly. Devices which contain the HP JetSend technology can exchange information directly with other devices connected via the Internet or intranet. Sending devices can include scanners and computers. Receiving devices can include printers and computers. In addition to sending and receiving documents, you can view documents using the HP JetView software. HP JetSend technology enables flexible, direct communications between network devices using simple IP addressing. HP JetSend enables simple, targeted, information exchange that is independent of both servers and applications. This means that users can easily exchange information directly between Internet-connected devices like printers and scanners (and other devices in the future). HP JetSend capabilities can be integrated into the Microsoft Windows environment. For example, using devices enabled with HP JetSend, you can capture a document with a scanner (or create a document using computer software) for distribution via the Internet to several users. Users can receive the document in their computer’s InBox or print directly to their HP LaserJet 4000 series printer.
18
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Software for Macintosh Computers PostScript Printer Description Files (PPDs) PPDs, in combination with the LaserWriter driver, access the printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the compact disc. Use the LaserWriter printer driver that comes with the computer. (The LaserWriter driver is also available from Apple.)
HP LaserJet Utility HP LaserJet Utility allows control of features that are not available in the driver. The illustrated screens make selecting printer features from the Macintosh computer easier than ever. Use the HP LaserJet Utility to do the following:
• Customize the printer’s control panel messages. • Name the printer, assign it to a zone on the network, download • •
EN
files and fonts, and change most of the printer settings. Set a password for the printer. From the computer, lock out functions on the printer’s control panel to prevent unauthorized access. (See the printer software help.)
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
19
Software for Networks HP JetAdmin HP JetAdmin should be installed only on the network administrator’s computer. HP JetAdmin can be accessed by clicking the Start button (point to Settings, and then click Control Panel) in Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 or from the HP LaserJet program group folder. Use HP JetAdmin to do the following:
• Install, configure, and manage printers on a network that are •
connected with a JetDirect print server. Perform in-depth diagnostics on the printer and network.
The HP JetAdmin software works on the following network systems:
• Windows NT • Windows 95 • Windows 3.1x • Novell NetWare • HP-UX* • Solaris* • SunOS* • OS/2* *The software for these systems is not included on the compact disc with the printer, but is available from the Internet. If you do not have access to the Internet, see the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide to obtain this software. Note
20
Network Administrators: If the printer is attached to a network, before you can print, the printer must be configured for that network using HP JetAdmin or similar network software. (See the getting started guide.)
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
HP Web JetAdmin This web-based HP JetAdmin software should be installed on a web server. The following systems are supported:
• Windows NT • HP-UX* • OS/2* *The software for these systems is not included on the compact disc with the printer, but is available from the Internet. If you do not have access to the Internet, see the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide to obtain this software.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
21
22
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
2 Printing Tasks Overview This chapter presents basic printing tasks, such as:
• Selecting the output bin. • Loading the trays. • Printing on both sides of paper with the optional duplexer. • Printing on special paper, such as letterhead and envelopes, (including automatically feeding envelopes with the optional envelope feeder). This chapter also introduces some advanced printing tasks, to help you take full advantage of the printer’s features. These tasks are “advanced” because they require you to change settings from a software application, the printer driver, or the printer’s control panel.
• The printer driver allows you to: • Create Quick Sets to save the printer’s setup information for different kinds of print jobs. • Print pages with a watermark in the background. • Print the first page of a document on a different kind of paper than the rest of the pages. • Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper. (See “Using Features in the Printer Driver” on page 48.)
• Tray 1 can be used in several different ways. See “Customizing •
EN
Tray 1 Operation” on page 50. If you frequently use several kinds of paper or share the printer with others, print by type and size to ensure that print jobs always print on the desired paper. See “Printing by Type and Size of Paper” on page 52.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
23
Selecting the Output Bin The printer has two output locations: the rear output bin and the top output bin. To use the top output bin, be sure the rear output bin is closed. To use the rear output bin, open it.
• If paper coming out of the top output bin has problems, such as •
excessive curl, try printing to the rear output bin. To avoid paper jams, do not open or close the rear output bin while the printer is printing.
Printing to the Top Output Bin The top output bin collects paper face-down, in correct order. The top output bin should be used for most print jobs and is recommended for printing the following:
• over 50 sheets of paper, continuously • transparencies
Figure 5
24
Top Output Bin
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing to the Rear Output Bin The printer always prints to the rear output bin if it is open. Paper comes out of the printer face-up, with the last page on top. To open the rear output bin, grasp the handle at the top of the bin. Pull the bin down, and slide out the extension. Printing from Tray 1 to the rear output bin provides the straightest paper path. Opening the rear output bin might improve output quality with the following:
• envelopes • labels • small custom-size paper • postcards • paper lighter than 16 lb (60 g/m2) or heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m2) Note
Opening the rear output bin disables the optional duplexer (if installed) and the top output bin.
Figure 6
EN
Rear Output Bin
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
25
Loading Tray 1 Note
To avoid paper jams, do not load trays while the printer is printing. Tray 1 is a multi-purpose tray that holds a variety of paper, including up to 100 sheets of paper, 10 envelopes, or 20 index cards. The printer might pull paper from Tray 1 first. To change this, see page 50. For supported sizes of paper, see page A-3. 1 Open Tray 1. 2 Pull out the tray extension. 3 Set the side guides to the desired width. 4 Load Tray 1. 5 Paper should fit, without bending, under the tabs on the guides, and below the line as indicated. For correct orientation, see page 36.
26
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Loading Tray 2 (4000/4000 N) Tray 2 is a 500-sheet tray. The optional 500-sheet tray is adjusted differently (page 29). (Tray 2 and the optional 500-sheet tray can be interchanged in the printer.) Tray 2 adjusts for letter, A4, and legal sizes; these adjustments affect printer performance. Lock
Note
To avoid paper jams, do not load trays while the printer is printing. 1 Pull the tray completely out of the printer. 2 If the tray is not already set to the desired paper size, snap the left and right guides into place to match the width of the paper. For A4 size paper, slide the lock down to secure the guide. 3 Lift the back of the rear paper guide and slide it to the desired paper size until it clicks into place. If the tray is not properly adjusted, the printer might display an error message or paper might jam. 4 Load paper into the tray. For correct orientation, see page 36. 5 Make sure the paper is flat in the tray at all four corners and below the tabs on the guides. Slide the tray back into the printer. The printer automatically senses the size of paper loaded if the tray is adjusted correctly. To print by type and size of paper, see page 52.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
27
Loading Trays 2 and 3 (4000 T/4000 TN) Trays 2 and 3 are 250-sheet trays. For supported sizes of paper, see page A-4. Choose A5 and B5 ISO as custom sizes in the printer driver for these trays (page 45). Note
To avoid paper jams, do not load trays while the printer is printing. 1 Pull the tray completely out of the printer. 2 If the tray is not already set to the desired paper size, snap the left and right guides into place to match the width of the paper. 3 Locate the release tabs (indicated by the two arrows). Squeeze the blue tabs to release them from the slots while sliding the back section of the tray to the desired paper size. Make sure the tabs lock into the correct slots. 4 Load paper into the tray. 5 Make sure the paper is flat in the tray at all four corners and below the tabs on the guides. Gently slide the tray back into the printer. The printer senses the size of paper loaded if the tray is adjusted correctly. To print by type and size of paper, see page 52.
28
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Loading the Optional 500-Sheet Tray The optional 500-sheet tray is Tray 3 for the HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N printers, or Tray 4 for the HP LaserJet 4000 T/ 4000 TN printers. This tray is adjusted differently than Tray 2 (page 27). Tray 2 and the optional 500-sheet tray can be interchanged in the printer. For supported sizes of paper, see page A-4. Note
To avoid paper jams, do not load trays while the printer is printing. 1 Pull the tray completely out of the printer. 2 If the tray is not already set to the desired paper size, squeeze the release on the left guide and adjust the left and right guides to match the width of the paper. 3 Squeeze the release on the back of the rear paper guide and slide it to the desired paper size. 4 Load the tray. For correct orientation, see page 36. 5 Make sure the paper is flat in the tray at all four corners and below the tabs on the guides. The guides should touch the paper without bending it. Continued on the next page.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
29
6 Set the dial on the side of the tray so the printer will read the correct size of paper. An error message will appear in the control panel display if the dial is not set properly. Note
Setting the dial adjusts the printer’s sensors. It does not adjust the guides inside the tray. 7 Gently slide the tray into the printer. To print by type and size of paper, see page 52.
30
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing Both Sides of Paper (Optional Duplexer) The printer can automatically print on both sides of paper with an optional duplex printing accessory (duplexer). This is called duplexing. Note
See the documentation included with the duplexer for complete installation and setup instructions. Duplexing might require additional memory (page C-1). The duplexer supports sizes from B5 JIS (7.2 by 10 inches or 182 by 257 mm) to legal (8.5 by 14 inches or 216 by 356 mm).
Removed
Installed
Figure 7
EN
Printer with the Optional Duplexer
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
31
Guidelines for Printing Both Sides of Paper Caution
Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, or paper heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m2). Damage to the printer and paper jamming might result.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury and damage to the printer, do not lift the printer with the duplexer installed. Before relocating the printer, separate the duplexer and optional trays from the printer.
• You might need to configure the printer driver to recognize the • • •
32
duplexer. (See the printer software help for details.) To print on both sides of paper, make the selection from the software or printer driver. (See the printer software help.) If the printer driver does not have this option, change the Duplex setting from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel to DUPLEX=ON. Also in the Paper Handling Menu, set Binding to long edge or short edge. (For more information, see page 34.) Close the rear output bin to use the duplexer (page 24). Opening the rear output bin disables the duplexer.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Paper Orientation for Printing Both Sides of Paper The duplexer prints the second side of paper first, so paper such as letterhead and preprinted paper needs to be oriented as shown in Figure 8.
Figure 8
Paper Orientation for Printing Both Sides of Paper
For Tray 1, load the first side facing down and the top toward you. For all other trays, load the first side facing up and the top toward the printer.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
33
Layout Options for Printing Both Sides of Paper The four print orientation options are shown below. These options can be selected from the printer driver or from the printer’s control panel (set BINDING from the Paper Handling Menu and ORIENTATION from the Printing Menu).
1. Long-edge portrait 2. Long-edge landscape
3. Short-edge portrait 4. Short-edge landscape
Figure 9
Layout Options for Printing Both Sides of Paper
1. Long-edge portrait
This is the default printer setting, and the most common layout used, with every printed image oriented right side up. Facing pages are read from top to bottom on the left page, then from top to bottom on the right page.
2. Long-edge landscape
This layout is often used in accounting, data processing, and spreadsheet applications. Every other printed image is oriented upside-down. Facing pages are read continuously from top to bottom.
3. Short-edge portrait
This layout is often used with clipboards. Every other printed image is oriented upside-down. Facing pages are read continuously from top to bottom.
4. Short-edge landscape
Each printed image is oriented right side up. Facing pages are read from top to bottom on the left page, then from top to bottom on the right page.
34
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing Special Paper Special paper includes letterhead, prepunched (including 3-hole punched), envelopes, labels, transparencies, and custom-size paper.
Printing Letterhead, Prepunched, or Preprinted Paper When printing letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted paper, it is important to load the trays with the correct orientation. Note
Paper orientation is different when you print with an optional duplexer (page 33). Printing in portrait or landscape mode is usually selected from the software application or printer driver. If the option is not available, change the Orientation setting from the Printing Menu in the printer’s control panel (page B-9).
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
35
Paper Orientation For Tray 1, load paper with the side-to-be-printed facing up, and the top, short edge toward the printer.
Figure 10
Paper Orientation for Tray 1
For all other trays, load paper with the side-to-be-printed facing down, and the top edge toward you.
Figure 11
36
Paper Orientation for All Other Trays
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing Envelopes With the optional envelope feeder, the printer will automatically feed up to 75 envelopes. To order an envelope feeder, see page 6. To print with the envelope feeder, see page 39. Many types of envelopes can be printed from Tray 1. (Up to 10 can be stacked in the tray.) Printing performance depends on the construction of the envelope. Always test a few sample envelopes before purchasing a large quantity.
• Set margins at least 0.6 inch (15 mm) from the edge of the •
envelope. If you have problems printing envelopes, try opening the rear output bin.
When you print large numbers of envelopes and standard paper, for best printing performance print paper first, then envelopes. To alternate paper and envelopes, from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control panel select SMALL PAPER SPEED=SLOW. WARNING!
Never use envelopes with coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives, or other synthetic materials. These items can emit noxious fumes.
Caution
Envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives, or other synthetic materials can severely damage the printer. To avoid jamming and possible printer damage, never try to print on both sides of an envelope. Before you load envelopes, make sure they are flat and not damaged or stuck together. Do not use envelopes with pressure-sensitive adhesive. (For envelope specifications, see page A-9.)
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
37
Loading Envelopes in Tray 1 1 Open Tray 1, but do not pull out the extension. (Envelopes feed best without the extension.) 2 Open the rear output bin and pull out the tray extension. (This reduces envelope curl and wrinkling.) 3 Load up to 10 envelopes in the center of Tray 1 with the side-to-be-printed facing up, and the postage-end toward the printer. Slide the envelopes into the printer as far as they will go without forcing them. 4 Adjust the guides to touch the envelope stack without bending the envelopes. Make sure the envelopes fit under the tabs on the guides.
38
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Feeding Envelopes Automatically (Optional Envelope Feeder) With the optional envelope feeder, the printer will automatically feed up to 75 envelopes. To print envelopes without an envelope feeder, see page 37. Note
See the documentation included with the envelope feeder for complete installation and setup instructions. You might need to configure the printer driver to recognize the envelope feeder. See the printer software help for details. Envelope weight
Guides
Tray extension
Figure 12
Envelope Feeder Details
Envelope Sizes
• The envelope feeder supports sizes from 3.5 by 6.3 inches (90 by •
EN
160 mm) to 7 by 10 inches (178 by 254 mm). Other sizes of envelopes should be printed from Tray 1.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
39
Inserting and Removing the Envelope Feeder 1 Open Tray 1. 2 Open the access door on the right, front corner of the printer, inside Tray 1. 3 Remove the plastic cover from the printer. (Replace the cover when the envelope feeder is not attached.) 4 Insert the envelope feeder into the printer as far as it will go. (The connector on the top right side of the envelope feeder fits into the plug in the printer.) Pull gently on the envelope feeder to be sure that it is securely in place. 5 To remove the envelope feeder, press the release button on the left and pull the envelope feeder away from the printer.
40
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Loading Envelopes in the Envelope Feeder Note
Print only on envelopes approved for use in the printer (page 37 and page A-9). 1 Fold down the tray extension. Lift the envelope weight. 2 Squeeze the release lever on the left envelope guide and slide the guides apart. 3 Load envelopes into the envelope feeder with the side-to-be-printed facing up, and the postage end toward the printer. Push the envelopes into the envelope feeder as far as they will go without forcing them. Push the bottom envelope in slightly farther than the top envelopes. (Stack them as shown.) 4 Lower the envelope weight onto the envelopes. 5 Adjust the guides to touch the envelopes without bending them. Make sure the envelope feeder is not overfilled. Note
Select the envelope size from the software application (if the setting is available), the printer driver, and the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel (page B-3). To print by type and size of paper, see page 52.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
41
Printing Labels Use only labels recommended for use in laser printers. Make sure that labels meet the specifications for the input tray you use (page A-8). Do:
• Print a stack of 50 labels from Tray 1 or a stack of 50 to 100 labels • •
from other trays. Load labels in Tray 1 with the side-to-be-printed facing up, and the top, short edge toward the printer. For orientation in other trays, see Figure 11 on page 36. Try opening the rear output bin (page 25) to prevent curl and other problems.
Figure 13
42
Printing Labels
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Do not: Caution
Failure to follow these instructions can damage the printer.
• Do not load the trays to capacity because labels are heavier than • • • •
EN
paper. Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet, wrinkled, or damaged in any way. Do not use labels that have the backing sheet exposed. (Labels must cover the entire backing sheet with no exposed spaces.) Do not feed a sheet of labels through the printer more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only one pass through the printer. Do not print on both sides of labels.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
43
Printing Transparencies Use only transparencies recommended for use in laser printers. For transparency specifications, see page A-8.
• Load transparencies face up in Tray 1 with the top toward the • • •
printer. A stack of 50 to 100 transparencies can be printed from other trays. Because transparencies are heavier than paper, do not load the other trays to capacity. For orientation in other trays, see Figure 11 on page 36. To prevent transparencies from becoming too hot or sticking together, use the top output bin by closing the rear output bin (page 24). Remove each transparency from the output bin before printing another. Place transparencies on a flat surface to cool after removing them from the printer.
Figure 14
44
Printing Transparencies
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing Cards, Custom-Size and Heavy Paper Custom-size paper can be printed from Tray 1 or the optional 500-sheet tray. For paper specifications, see page A-2. Note
Choose A5 and B5 (ISO) as custom sizes in the printer driver for Tray 2 and Tray 3 (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN printers) and the optional 500-sheet tray. Settings for these sizes are marked in the tray, but custom settings must be selected in the software and from the printer’s control panel.
Tray
Minimum Size
Maximum Size
Tray 1
3 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm)
8.5 by 14 inches (216 by 356 mm)
Optional 500-Sheet Tray
5.8 by 8.2 inches (148 by 210 mm)
8.5 by 14 inches (216 by 356 mm)
The maximum paper weight is 53 lb (199 g/m2) from Tray 1 and 28 lb (105 g/m2) from the 500-sheet tray. Note
To prevent curl and other problems, heavy paper and very small custom-size paper should be printed from Tray 1 to the rear output bin. Open the rear output bin to use it (page 25). The printer’s control panel can be set for one custom size at a time. Do not load more than one size of custom paper into the printer.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
45
Guidelines for Printing Custom-Size Paper
• Do not attempt to print on paper smaller than 3 inches (76 mm) •
wide or 5 inches (127 mm) long. Set page margins at least .17 inch (4.23 mm) away from the edges.
Setting Custom Paper Sizes When custom paper is loaded, size settings need to be selected from the software application (the preferred method), the printer driver, or from the printer’s control panel. Note
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control panel settings. (Software application settings override printer driver settings.)
X (front edge)
Y (side edge)
Figure 15
46
Printing Custom-Size Paper
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
If the settings are not available from the software, set the custom paper size from the control panel: 1 From the Printing Menu set CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES. 2 From the Printing Menu, select inches or millimeters as the unit of measurement. 3 From the Printing Menu, set the X dimension (the front edge of the paper) as shown in Figure 15. X can be 3 to 8.5 inches (76 to 216 mm). 4 Set the Y dimension (the side edge of the paper) as shown in Figure 15. Y can be 5 to 14 inches (127 to 356 mm). 5 If custom paper is loaded into Tray 1 and TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE, then set TRAY 1 SIZE=CUSTOM from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel. See “Customizing Tray 1 Operation” on page 50. If custom paper is loaded in the optional 500-sheet tray, be sure the paper size dial is set to Custom (page 29). 6 In the software, select Custom as the paper size. For example, if the custom paper is 8 by 10 inches (203 by 254 mm), set X=8 inches and Y=10 inches (X=203 millimeters and Y=254 millimeters). The control panel must be set if the PCL 5e driver is used, or custom paper is loaded long-edge first (X is longer than Y).
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
47
Advanced Printing Tasks This section will help you take full advantage of the printer’s features. These tasks are “advanced” because they require you to change settings from the printer’s control panel or the printer driver.
Using Features in the Printer Driver When you print from a software application, many of the printer’s features are available from the printer driver. To access Windows printer drivers, see page 15. Note
HP PCL 5e, PCL 6, PS, and Macintosh drivers are slightly different. Check the drivers for available options. The PCL 6 driver takes full advantage of the printer’s features. Settings in the printer driver and software application override control panel settings. (Software application settings override printer driver settings.)
Saving Printer Setup Information Printer drivers allow you to save the printer settings you use most often as the default settings. For example, the driver might be set to print on letter size paper, portrait orientation, with automatic tray selection (from the first available tray). Some PCL 6 printer drivers will allow you to save printer settings for multiple kinds of print jobs. For example, you might want to create a Quick Set for envelopes, or for printing the first page of a document on letterhead. Look for the Quick Sets option in the Windows PCL 6 printer driver, or see the printer driver help for more information.
Printing with a Watermark A watermark is a notice, such as “Top Secret,” printed in the background of each page in a document. Check the driver for available options.
48
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing the First Page on Different Paper From the PCL 6 printer driver, you can choose to print the first page of a document on different paper than the rest of the pages. Look for “Use different paper for first page” in the printer driver.
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature is available in some printer drivers, and provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages. To print more than one page on a sheet of paper, look for a Layout or Pages Per Sheet option in the printer driver. (This is sometimes called 2-up, 4-up, or n-up printing.)
Figure 16
EN
Sample Layout Options (1-up, 2-up, and 4-up)
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
49
Customizing Tray 1 Operation Customize Tray 1 to fit your printing needs. The printer can be set to print from Tray 1 as long as it is loaded, or to print only from Tray 1 if the type of paper loaded is specifically requested. Set TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST or TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel. (Print speed might be slightly slower when printing from Tray 1 when TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST.)
Tray 1 Mode=First If you do not keep paper in Tray 1 all the time, or you use Tray 1 only for manually feeding paper, keep the default setting, TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST in the Paper Handling Menu.
• TRAY •
1 MODE=FIRST means that the printer usually pulls paper from Tray 1 first unless it is empty or closed. You can still choose paper from other trays by specifically choosing another tray in the printer driver.
Tray 1 Mode=Cassette TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE means the printer treats Tray 1 like the internal trays. Instead of looking for paper in Tray 1 first, the printer pulls paper either starting from the bottom tray upward (from the tray with the highest capacity to the tray with the least capacity), or the tray that matches type or size settings selected from the software.
• When TRAY •
50
1 MODE=CASSETTE is set, an option appears in the Paper Handling Menu to configure size as well as type settings for Tray 1. Through the printer driver, you can select paper from any tray (including Tray 1) by type, size, or source. To print by type and size of paper, see page 52.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Manually Feeding Paper from Tray 1 The Manual Feed feature allows you to print on special paper from Tray 1, such as envelopes or letterhead. If Manual Feed is selected, the printer will print only from Tray 1. Select Manual Feed through the software or printer driver. Manual Feed can also be enabled from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel. Note
EN
When Manual Feed is selected, if TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST the printer automatically prints (if paper is in the tray). If TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE the printer prompts to load Tray 1 whether or not Tray 1 is loaded. This enables you to load different paper if necessary. Press [Go] to print from Tray 1.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
51
Printing by Type and Size of Paper You can configure the printer to select paper by type (such as plain or letterhead) and size (such as letter or A4), as opposed to source (a paper tray).
Benefits of Printing by Type and Size of Paper If you frequently use several different kinds of paper, once trays are set up correctly, you do not have to check which paper is loaded in each tray before you print. This is especially helpful when the printer is shared, and more than one person loads or removes paper. Printing by type and size of paper is a way to be sure that print jobs always print on the desired paper. (Some printers have a feature which “locks out” trays, to prevent printing on the wrong paper. Printing by type and size of paper eliminates the need to lock out trays.) To print by type and size of paper, do the following: 1 Be sure to adjust and load the trays correctly. (See the sections on loading paper, starting on page 26.) 2 From the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel, select the paper type for each tray. If you are unsure what type you are loading (such as bond or recycled), check the label on the package of paper. For supported types, see page A-13. 3 Select the paper size settings from the control panel. • Tray 1: If the printer has been set to TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE from the Paper Handling Menu, also set the paper size from the Paper Handling Menu. If custom paper is loaded, set the size of custom paper from the Printing Menu to match the paper loaded in Tray 1. To print custom-size paper, see page 46. • Optional envelope feeder: Set the paper size from the Paper Handling Menu. • Optional 500-sheet tray: Paper size settings are adjusted when paper is properly loaded into the printer and the paper size dial is set to match the paper size. If custom paper is loaded, set the size of custom paper from the Printing Menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. Set the paper size dial in the tray to Custom. To print custom-size paper, see page 46. • Other trays: Paper size settings are adjusted when paper is properly loaded into the printer. (See the sections on loading paper, starting on page 27.) 4 From the software or printer driver, select the desired type and size of paper.
52
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Note
The type and size settings can also be configured from HP JetAdmin for networked printers. See the printer software help. To print by type and size, it might be necessary to unload or close Tray 1, or set TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel. For more information, see page 50. Settings in the printer driver and software application override control panel settings. (Software application settings override printer driver settings.)
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
53
54
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
3 Printer Maintenance Overview This chapter explains basic printer maintenance.
• Managing the toner cartridge. • Cleaning the printer. Note
EN
To ensure optimum print quality, the printer will prompt you to have routine maintenance performed every 150,000 pages. When the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message appears on the control panel, contact an HP-authorized service and support provider to have the maintenance performed. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
55
Managing the Toner Cartridge HP Policy on Non-HP Toner Cartridges Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP toner cartridges, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality. To install a new HP toner cartridge and recycle the used cartridge, follow the instructions included in the toner cartridge box.
Toner Cartridge Storage Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it. (The shelf life of a cartridge in an unopened package is approximately 2.5 years.) Caution
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
Toner Cartridge Life Expectancy The life of the toner cartridge depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. When printing text at 5% coverage, an HP toner cartridge lasts an average of 10,000 or 6,000 pages, depending on which toner cartridge is installed. (A typical business letter is about 5% coverage.) This assumes that print density is set to 3 and EconoMode is off. (These are the default settings.)
56
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
EN
Continue Printing When Toner is Low When toner is low, the printer’s control panel displays the TONER LOW message.
• If the TONER •
LOW message displays, but the printer continues printing, TONER LOW is set to CONTINUE (the default setting). If the printer stops printing when low toner is detected, TONER LOW is set to STOP. To resume printing, press [Go].
The printer will continue to display TONER LOW until you replace the toner cartridge. Select TONER LOW=CONTINUE or TONER LOW=STOP from the Configuration Menu in the control panel (page B-13).
Redistributing the Toner When toner is low, faded or light areas might appear on a printed page. You might be able to temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner. The following procedure might allow you to finish the current print job before replacing the toner cartridge.
EN
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
57
Redistributing the Toner (continued) 1 Open the top cover. 2 Remove the toner cartridge from the printer. WARNING!
Avoid reaching too far into the printer. The adjacent fusing area might be hot! Caution
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. 3 Rotate the toner cartridge and gently shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner. Note
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. (Hot water sets toner into fabric.) 4 Reinsert the toner cartridge into the printer and close the top cover. If the print remains light, install a new toner cartridge. (Follow the instructions provided with the new toner cartridge.)
58
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
EN
Cleaning the Printer To maintain print quality, follow the cleaning procedure (on the following page) every time the toner cartridge is changed, or whenever print quality problems occur. As much as possible, keep the printer free from dust and debris.
• Clean the outside of the printer with a slightly water-dampened cloth.
• Clean the inside with a dry, lint-free cloth. Caution
Do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer. While cleaning the printer, be careful not to touch the transfer roller (the black, rubber roller, located underneath the toner cartridge). Skin oils on the roller can cause print quality problems.
Figure 17
EN
Location of the Transfer Roller—Do Not Touch!
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
59
Cleaning the Printer Before beginning these steps, turn the printer off and unplug the power cord. 1 Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge. WARNING!
Avoid reaching too far into the printer. The adjacent fusing area might be hot! Caution
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. 2 Wipe any dust or dirt off the paper feed guides (shaded areas) with a dry, lint-free cloth. Note
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. (Hot water sets toner into fabric.) 3 Using the green handle, lift the paper access plate and wipe off any residue with a dry, lint-free cloth. 4 Replace the toner cartridge, close the top cover, plug in the power cord, and turn the printer on.
60
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
EN
Using the Printer Cleaning Page If toner specks appear on the front or back side of your print jobs, follow the procedure below. From the printer’s control panel, do the following: 1 2 3 4
Note
Press [Menu] until PRINT QUALITY MENU appears. Press [Item] until CREATE CLEANING PAGE appears. Press [Select] to create the cleaning page. Follow the instructions on the cleaning page to complete the cleaning process.
In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper). You might need to create a cleaning page more than once. When toner has been cleaned from inside the printer, shiny black spots will appear on the page’s black strip. To ensure good print quality with certain types of paper, use the cleaning page every time the toner cartridge is replaced. If the cleaning page is frequently needed, try a different type of paper.
EN
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
61
62
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
EN
4 Problem Solving Overview This chapter will help you to troubleshoot and solve printer problems. Clear paper jams:
Occasionally, paper can jam during printing. This section will help you to locate paper jams, properly clear them from the printer, and solve repeated paper jams.
Understand printer messages:
Many different messages can appear on the printer’s control panel display. Some messages tell the printer’s current status, such as INITIALIZING. Other messages require an action, such as CLOSE TOP COVER. Many of these messages are self-explanatory. However, some messages indicate a problem with the printer, or require further action or description. This section lists these types of messages, and tells what to do if a message persists.
Correct output quality problems:
The printer should produce print jobs of the highest quality. If print jobs do not look sharp and clear, defects such as lines, specks, or smears appear on the page, or paper is wrinkled or curled, use this section to troubleshoot and solve the output quality problem.
Determine printer problems:
Before you can fix a printer problem, you must understand where the problem lies. Use the flowchart in this section to determine the printer problem, and then follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions.
Check printer configuration:
From the printer, you can print information pages, which give details about the printer and its configuration.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
63
Clearing Paper Jams If the printer’s control panel displays a paper jam message, look for paper in the locations indicated in Figure 18, then see the procedure for clearing the paper jam. You might need to look for paper in other locations than indicated in the paper jam message. If the location of the paper jam is not obvious, look first in the top cover area. When clearing paper jams, be very careful not to tear the paper. If a small piece of paper is left in the printer, it could cause additional jams. If paper jams are a recurring problem, see page 71. The top cover of the printer must be opened and then closed to clear a paper jam message.
Note
Paper jams can occur at the following locations:
Output areas (top and rear) Go to page 68.
Top cover area Go to page 67.
Input tray area (optional envelope feeder) Go to page 66.
Optional duplexer Go to page 69. Input tray areas Go to page 65.
Figure 18
Note
64
Paper Jam Locations
Loose toner might remain in the printer after a paper jam, but the toner should clear after a few sheets are printed.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Clearing Jams from the Input Tray Areas Note
To remove paper from the Tray 1 area, slowly pull the paper out of the printer. For all other trays, follow the steps below. (See the next page for clearing envelope feeder jams.) 1 Slide the tray out of the printer, and remove any damaged paper from the tray. 2 If the edge of the paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper down and out of the printer. (Do not pull the paper straight out, or it will tear.) If the paper is not visible, look in the top cover area (page 67). Note
Do not force the paper if it will not move easily. If the paper is stuck in a tray, try removing it through the tray above (if applicable) or through the top cover area (page 67). 3 Before replacing the tray, make sure the paper is flat in the tray at all four corners and below the tabs on the guides. 4 Open and close the top cover to clear the paper jam message. If a paper jam message persists, there is still paper in the printer. Look for paper in another location (page 64).
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
65
Clearing Jams from the Optional Envelope Feeder 1 Remove any envelopes loaded in the envelope feeder. Lower the envelope weight and lift the tray extension up to close. 2 Press and hold the release button on the left side of the envelope feeder. Grasp both sides of the envelope feeder and carefully pull it out of the printer. 3 Slowly pull any envelopes out of the envelope feeder and the printer. 4 Insert the envelope feeder into the printer as far as it will go. (There is a hook on the bottom right side of the envelope feeder that fits through the small access door, and a connector on the top right side that fits into the plug.) 5 Open and close the top cover to clear the paper jam message. If a paper jam message persists, there is still paper in the printer. Look for paper in another location (page 64).
66
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Clearing Jams from the Top Cover Area 1 Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge. Caution
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. 2 Use the green handle to lift the paper access plate. 3 Slowly pull the paper out of the printer. Do not tear the paper! Note
Avoid spilling loose toner. Using a dry, lint-free cloth, clean any loose toner that might have fallen into the printer (page 59). If loose toner falls into the printer, it might cause temporary problems with print quality. Loose toner should clear from the paper path after a few pages are printed. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. (Hot water sets toner into fabric.) 4 Replace the toner cartridge, and close the top cover. If a paper jam message persists, there is still paper in the printer. Look for paper in another location (page 64).
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
67
Clearing Jams from the Output Areas Note
If most of the paper is still inside the printer, it is best to remove it through the top cover area. Go to page 67. 1 Open the rear output bin. 2 Grasp both sides of the paper, and slowly pull the paper out of the printer. (There might be loose toner on the paper. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or into the printer.) Note
If paper is difficult to remove, try opening the top cover all the way to release pressure on the paper. 3 Close the rear output bin. Open and close the top cover to clear the paper jam message. If a paper jam message persists, there is still paper in the printer. Look for paper in another location (page 64).
68
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Clearing Jams from the Optional Duplexer 1 Open the duplexer’s rear door. 2 Slowly pull any paper out of the duplexer. 3 Open and close the top cover to clear the paper jam message. 4 If the paper jam message persists, remove the duplexer by lifting it slightly and pulling it out of the printer. 5 From the rear of the printer, remove any paper on top of Tray 2. (You might need to reach inside the printer.) Continued on the next page.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
69
6 Slowly pull any paper out of the duplexer. 7 Turn the duplexer over and remove any paper. 8 Insert the duplexer into the printer. 9 Open and close the top cover to clear the paper jam message. If a paper jam message persists, there is still paper in the printer. Look for paper in another location (page 64).
70
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Solving Repeated Paper Jams If paper jams occur frequently, try the following: • Check all the paper jam locations. A piece of paper might be stuck somewhere in the printer. (See page 64.) • Check that paper is correctly loaded in the trays, that the trays are correctly adjusted for the loaded paper size, and that the trays are not overfilled. (See the sections on loading paper, starting on page 26.) • Check that all trays and paper handling accessories are completely inserted into the printer. (If a tray is opened during a print job, this might cause a paper jam.) • Check that all covers and doors are closed. (If a cover or door is opened during a print job, this might cause a paper jam.) • Try printing to a different output bin (page 24). • The sheets might be sticking together. Try bending the stack to separate each sheet. Do not fan the stack. • If you are printing from Tray 1, try feeding fewer sheets of paper or fewer envelopes at a time. • If printing from the envelope feeder, make sure it is loaded correctly, pushing the bottom envelope in slightly farther than the top envelopes (page 41). • If you are printing small sizes (such as index cards), make sure the paper is oriented correctly in the tray (page 46). • Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°. • Check the quality of the paper being printed. Damaged or irregular paper should not be used. • Use only paper that meets HP specifications (pages A-2 through A-12). • Do not use paper that has already been used in a printer or copier. (Do not print on both sides of envelopes, transparencies, or labels.) • Check that the power supplied to the printer is steady, and meets printer specifications (page A-14). • Clean the printer (page 59). • Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider to perform routine printer maintenance. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
71
Understanding Printer Messages The following table explains messages that might display on the printer’s control panel. Printer messages and their meanings are listed in alphabetical order, with numbered messages following. If a message persists:
• If a message persists requesting that you load a tray, or if a •
message indicates that a previous print job is still in the printer’s memory, press [Go] to print or press [Cancel Job] to clear the job from the printer’s memory. If a message persists after performing all of the recommended actions, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
Not all messages are described in this user’s guide (many are self-explanatory).
Note
Some printer messages are affected by the Auto Continue and Clearable Warning settings from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control panel (page B-13).
Printer Messages Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED
The printer control panel function you are trying to access has been locked to prevent unauthorized access. See your network administrator.
BAD DUPLEXER CONNECTION
The duplexer is not connected properly. Re-install the duplexer.
BAD OPT TRAY CONNECTION
The optional tray is not connected properly. Re-install the optional tray.
CANNOT DUPLEX REAR BIN OPEN
The printer cannot duplex because the rear output bin is open. Close the rear output bin.
72
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Printer Messages (Continued) Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
CHECK INPUT DEVICE
The optional input tray cannot feed paper to the printer because a door or paper guide is open. Check the doors and paper guides.
alternates with
PAPER PATH OPEN PLEASE CLOSE IT CHOSEN LANGUAGE NOT AVAILABLE
A print job requested a printer language that does not exist in the printer. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory. Print the job using a driver for a different printer language, or add the requested language to the printer (if available). Press [Go] to continue.
DISK DEVICE FAILURE
The EIO disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used. Remove the EIO disk and replace it with a new one.
DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a non-existent directory.
DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
Delete files from the EIO disk and then try again, or add a flash disk DIMM. Download or delete files from HP JetAdmin, and download or delete fonts from HP FontSmart. (See the software help for more information.)
DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
The EIO disk is protected, and no new files can be written to it. Disable the write protection through HP JetAdmin.
ENV FEEDER LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE]
Load the requested envelope type and size into the envelope feeder. Make sure the envelope size and type are set correctly from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel (page B-3). Press [Go] if the desired envelope is already loaded in the feeder. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
FLASH DEVICE FAILURE
The flash disk DIMM had a critical failure and no longer can be used. Remove the flash disk DIMM and replace it with a new one.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
73
Printer Messages (Continued) Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
FLASH FILE OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a non-existent directory.
FLASH FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
Delete files from the flash disk DIMM or add another one. Download or delete files from HP JetAdmin, and download or delete fonts from HP FontSmart. (See the software help for more information.)
FLASH IS WRITE PROTECTED
The flash disk DIMM is protected, and no new files can be written to it. Disable the write protection through HP JetAdmin.
INPUT DEVICE CONDITION xx.yy
An input paper handling device has a condition that needs attention before printing can resume. See the documentation that came with the paper handling device for assistance.
INSTALL TRAY x
The printer is unable to print the current job, because the specified tray (x) is open or not inserted correctly. Re-insert the specified tray.
LOADING PROGRAM
Programs and fonts can be stored on the printer’s file system. At bootup time these entities are loaded into RAM. (These entities can take a long time to load into RAM depending on the size and number of entities being loaded.) The specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded.
alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE]
Load the requested paper into Tray 1. Press [Go] if the desired paper is already loaded in Tray 1. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
MEMORY FULL STORED DATA LOST
There is no available memory in the printer. The current job might not print correctly and some resources (such as downloaded fonts or macros) might have been deleted. You might want to add more memory to the printer (page C-1).
74
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Printer Messages (Continued) Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
MEMORY SETTINGS CHANGED
The printer changed its memory settings because it did not have enough memory to use the previous settings for I/O Buffering and Resource Saving. This usually occurs after removing memory from the printer, adding a duplexer, or adding a printer language. You might want to change memory settings for I/O Buffering and Resource Saving (although default settings are usually best) or add more memory to the printer (page C-1).
MEMORY SHORTAGE JOB CLEARED
The printer did not have enough free memory to print the entire job. The remainder of the job will not print and will be cleared from memory. Press [Go] to continue. Change the Resource Saving setting from the printer’s control panel (page C-5) or add more memory to the printer (page C-1).
MEMORY SHORTAGE PAGE SIMPLIFIED
The printer had to compress the job in order to fit it in available memory. Some data loss might have occurred. Press [Go] to continue. You might want to add more memory to the printer (page C-1).
OFFLINE
Press [Go] to place the printer online.
PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE
To ensure optimum print quality, the printer prompts you to have routine maintenance performed every 150,000 pages. Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider to perform routine printer maintenance. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE
The RAM disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on to clear the message.
RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a non-existent directory.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
75
Printer Messages (Continued) Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL
Delete files and then try again, or turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on to delete all files on the device. (Delete files using HP JetAdmin, HP FontSmart, or another software utility. See the software help for more information.) If the message persists, increase the size of the RAM disk. Change the RAM disk size from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control panel (page B-14).
RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
The RAM disk is protected, and no new files can be written to it. Disable the write protection through HP JetAdmin.
TRAY x EMPTY
Load the empty tray (x) to clear the message. If you do not load the specified tray, the printer will continue printing from the next available tray, and the message will continue to display.
TRAY x LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE]
Load the requested paper into the specified tray (x). (See the sections on loading paper, starting on page 26.) Ensure that the trays are correctly adjusted for size. The tray type settings (and size for Tray 1) must be set from the printer’s control panel (page 52). If you are trying to print from the optional 500-sheet tray, be sure to set the paper size dial (page 29). If you are trying to print A4 or letter size paper, and this message appears, make sure the default paper size is set correctly from the Printing Menu in the printer’s control panel. Press [Go] to print from the next available tray. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
UNSUPPORTED SIZE IN TRAY [YY]
An external paper handling device detected an unsupported paper size. The printer will go offline until the condition is corrected.
USE [TYPE] [SIZE] INSTEAD?
If the requested paper size or type is not available, the printer asks if it should use another paper size or type instead. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
WAIT FOR PRINTER TO REINITIALIZE
The RAM disk setting has been changed from the printer’s control panel. This change will not take effect until the printer reinitializes.
76
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Printer Messages (Continued) Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
WRONG ENVELOPE FEEDER INSTALLED
The envelope feeder you are trying to install will not work for this printer. To order an envelope feeder for the printer, see page 6.
13.x PAPER JAM [LOCATION]
Remove jammed paper from the specified location (page 64). Open and close the top cover to clear the message. If the message persists after all jams have been cleared, a sensor might be stuck or broken. Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
The printer received more data than can fit in its available memory. You might have tried to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or complex graphics. Press [Go] to print the transferred data (some data might be lost), then simplify the print job or install additional memory (page C-1).
alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
22 EIO x BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
EN
The data (dense text, rules, raster or vector graphics) sent to the printer was too complex. Press [Go] to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.) To print the job without losing data, from the Configuration Menu in the printer control panel, set PAGE PROTECT=ON, print the job, and then return PAGE PROTECT=AUTO. (For more information, see page B-13.) Do not leave PAGE PROTECT=ON; it might degrade performance. If this message appears often, simplify the print job.
Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot (x). An improper communications protocol may be in use. Press [Go] to clear the message. (Data will be lost.) Check the host configuration. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
77
Printer Messages (Continued) Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
22 PARALLEL I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW
Too much data was sent to the parallel port. Check for a loose cable connection and be sure to use a high-quality cable (page 7). (Some non-HP parallel cables might be missing pin connections, or might otherwise not conform to the IEEE-1284 specification.) This error can occur if the driver you are using is not IEEE-1284 compliant. For best results, use an HP driver that came with the printer (page 13). Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.) If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
22 SERIAL I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
40 BAD SERIAL TRANSMISSION alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
78
Too much data was sent to the serial port. Make sure the correct serial pacing option is selected from the I/O Menu in the printer’s control panel (page B-19). Print a menu map (page 93) and verify that the serial pacing item (from the I/O Menu in the printer’s control panel) matches the setting on the computer. (For more information on interface settings, see page B-19.) Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.) If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
The printer encountered an error while transferring data from the computer. The error might have occurred for several reasons: • The computer was powered on or off while the printer was online. • There was a network problem (if applicable). • The printer’s baud rate or parity was not the same as the computer’s. (The baud rate tells the printer how fast information will be transferred from the computer to the printer.) Make sure the printer is set for the same baud rate as the computer. The serial baud rate setting can be accessed from the I/O Menu in the printer’s control panel (page B-19). Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Printer Messages (Continued) Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
40 EIO x BAD TRANSMISSION
The connection has been broken between the printer and the EIO card in the specified slot. Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing.
alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE 41.3 UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE
The paper size you are trying to print is not the same as the settings for the tray. Make sure that all trays are correctly adjusted for size. (The printer will continue trying to print the job until size settings are correct.) If you are trying to print from Tray 1, make sure the printer’s control panel setting for paper size is correctly configured (page B-3). If you are trying to print from the optional 500-sheet tray, be sure to set the paper size dial to match the paper size loaded in the tray (page 29). After performing the actions above, press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. (Or, you might want to press [Cancel Job] to clear the job from the printer’s memory.)
41.x PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred. Press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE 50.x FUSER ERROR
An internal error has occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. The message might clear, and then reappear when the next print job is sent. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
51.x or 52.x PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred. Press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
79
Printer Messages (Continued) Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
53.xy.zz PRINTER ERROR
There is a problem with the printer’s memory. The DIMM that caused the error will not be used. Values of x, y, and zz are as follows: x = DIMM type
0 = ROM 1 = RAM
y = Device location
0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM) 1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3
zz = Error number You might need to replace the specified DIMM. Turn the printer off, and then replace the DIMM that caused the error. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
55 PRINTER ERROR alternates with
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
A temporary printing error occurred. Press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
56.x, 57.x, 58.x, or 59.x PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
62.x PRINTER ERROR
There is a problem with the printer’s memory. The x value refers to the location of the problem: 0 = Internal memory 1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3 You might need to replace the specified DIMM. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
64.x PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
80
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Printer Messages (Continued) Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
66.xy.zz INPUT DEVICE FAILURE
An error occurred in an external paper handling device. Press [Go] to clear the message. If the message will not clear, turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
alternates with
CHECK CABLES AND CYCLE POWER 68 NVRAM ERROR CHECK SETTINGS
An error occurred in the printer’s nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) and one or more printer settings has been reset to its factory default. Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to determine which values have changed (page 94). Hold down [Cancel Job] while turning the printer on. This will clean up the NVRAM by removing old areas that are not being used. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
68 NVRAM FULL CHECK SETTINGS
The printer’s nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) is full. Some settings might have been reset to the factory defaults. Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to determine which values have changed (page 94). If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
69.x PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
79.xxxx PRINTER ERROR
The printer detected an error. The numbers (xxxx) indicate the specific type of error. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. Try printing a job from a different software application. If the job prints, go back to the first application and try printing a different file. (If the message only appears with a certain software application or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance.) If the message persists with different software applications and print jobs, record the numbers that appear (xxxx) and contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
81
Correcting Output Quality Problems Use the examples below to determine which output quality problem you are experiencing, then see the following table to troubleshoot the problem. The examples below depict letter-size paper that has passed through the printer short-edge first.
Note
Light Print or Fade
Toner Specks (front or back)
Gray Background
Toner Smear
Misformed Characters
Page Skew
Figure 19
82
Dropouts
Lines
Loose Toner
Repeating Defects
Curl or Wave
Wrinkles or Creases
Examples of Output Quality Problems
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
✓
Wrinkles or Creases
✓
✓
Curl or Wave
✓
Page Skew
✓
Misformed Characters
✓
Repeating Defects
Loose Toner
✓
Toner Smear
Gray Background
Lines
Dropouts
Toner Specks
Light Print or Fade
✓
✓
Troubleshooting Steps (Follow the steps in the order they are listed.)
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem will correct itself. 2. Clean the inside of the printer (page 59) or use the printer’s cleaning page (page 61).
✓
3. Make sure EconoMode is off in the software and in the control panel (page B-7).
✓ ✓ ✓1
✓ ✓1
✓
✓
✓
✓1
✓1
✓ ✓
4. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°.
✓ ✓ ✓
5. Check the paper (or other print media) type and quality (pages A-2 through A-12).
✓ ✓ ✓
✓
✓
6. Check the printer’s environment (page A-14).
✓
7. Make sure paper is loaded correctly and that the guides fit properly against the paper stack. (See the sections on loading paper, starting on page 26.)
✓ ✓
8. Print to a different output bin (page 24).
✓
9. Adjust the toner density setting (page B-7).
✓
✓
10. Change the fuser mode setting to High (page B-4) or choose rough paper type from the printer driver (page 52).
✓
11. Redistribute the toner in the toner cartridge (page 57).
✓
✓
✓ ✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
12. Install a new HP toner cartridge. (See instructions with the toner cartridge.)
✓
13. To alternate small and standard paper, from the Configuration Menu set
SMALL PAPER SPEED=SLOW.
✓ ✓
✓
✓ ✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓ ✓ ✓
14. After trying all the steps suggested above, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
1.Paper might be too smooth.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
83
Determining Printer Problems Troubleshooting Flowchart If the printer is not responding properly, use the flowchart to determine the problem. If the printer does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If you cannot resolve the problem after following the suggestions in this user’s guide, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.) Macintosh users: For more troubleshooting information, see page 90.
Note
1
Does the control panel display READY?
YES
Go to step
2.
NO
The display is blank and the printer’s fan is off.
The display is blank but the printer’s fan is on.
Press any control panel key to see if the printer responds. Turn the printer off, and then turn the Plug the printer printer on. If this into a different does not work, outlet. contact an HP-authorized Check that the power supplied to service or support provider. the printer is (See the HP steady, and Support pages at meets printer the front of this specifications user’s guide.) (page A-14). Check the power cord connections and the power switch.
84
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
The display is in the wrong language.
Turn the printer off. Hold down [Select] while turning the printer on. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available languages. Press [Select] to save the desired language as the new default. Press [Go] to return to READY.
The display shows garbled or unfamiliar characters.
A message other than READY is displayed.
Go to page 72. Make sure the desired language is selected from the control panel. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
EN
2
Can you print a configuration page?
NO
YES
Go to step
3.
Print a configuration page to verify that the printer is feeding paper correctly (page 94).
A configuration page does not print.
Check that all trays are properly loaded, adjusted, and installed in the printer. (See the sections on loading paper, starting on page 26.)
A message other than READY or
A blank page prints.
PRINTING CONFIGURATION is displayed.
Check that the sealing tape is not still Go to page 72. in the toner cartridge. (See the getting started guide or the instructions that came with the toner cartridge.)
From the computer, check the print The toner cartridge might be empty. queue or print spooler to see if the Install a new toner cartridge. printer has been paused. If there are problems with the current print job, or if the printer is paused, a configuration page will not print. (Press [Cancel Job] and try Step 2 again.)
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
85
3 Can you print from a software application?
NO
YES
Go to step
4
Print a short document from a software application.
The job will not print.
If the job will not print, and a message is displayed, see page 72. From the computer, check to see if the printer has been paused. If the printer is on a network, check that you are printing to the correct printer. To verify that it is not a network problem, connect the computer directly to the printer with a parallel cable, change the port to LPT1, and try to print. Check the interface cable connections. Disconnect and reconnect the cable at the computer and the printer. Test the cable by trying it on another computer (if possible). If you are using a parallel connection, make sure the cable is IEEE-1284 compliant (page A-16). If the printer is on a network, print a configuration page (page 94) and verify in the Protocol Information that the server name and the node name match the names in the printer driver. To verify that it is not a computer problem, print from another computer (if possible). Make sure the print job is being sent to the correct port (LPT1, or network printer port, for example). Check that you are using the proper printer driver (page 16).
A PS error page or list of commands prints.
The printer might have received a nonstandard PS code. From the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control panel, set PERSONALITY to PS for this print job only. After the job has printed, return the setting to AUTO (page B-11). Make sure the print job is a PS job, and that you are using the PS driver. The printer might have received PS code when it is set to PCL. From the Configuration Menu, set PERSONALITY to AUTO (page B-11).
Reinstall the printer driver. (See the getting started guide.) Check that the port is configured and working properly. (One way to check this is to connect another printer to that port and print.) If printing with the PS driver, from the Printing Menu in the printer’s control panel, set PRINT PS ERRORS=ON, then print the job again. If an error page prints, see the instructions in the next column. From the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control panel, make sure that PERSONALITY=AUTO (page B-11).
You might be missing a printer message that could help you solve the problem. From the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control panel, temporarily turn the Clearable Warnings and Auto Continue settings off (page B-13) and then print the job again.
86
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
4 Does the job print as expected? (Continued on the following page.)
NO
Print is garbled or only a portion of the page prints.
Printing stops in the middle of the job.
Print speed is slower than expected.
A control panel setting is not taking effect.
Simplify the print job.
Check settings in the printer driver or software application. (Printer driver and software commands override control panel settings.)
Check that you are using the proper printer driver (page 16).
[Cancel Job] might have been pressed.
The data file sent to the printer might be corrupt. To test, try printing it on another printer (if possible), or try a different file.
Add more memory to the Check that the power supplied to printer (page C-1). the printer is steady, and Turn banner meets printer pages off. (See specifications your network (page A-14). administrator.)
Check the interface cable connections. Test the cable by trying it on another computer (if possible). Replace the printer cable with a high-quality cable (page 7). Reduce the job’s complexity, print at a lower resolution (page B-6), or install more printer memory (page C-1). You might be missing a printer message that could help you solve the problem. From the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control panel, temporarily turn the Clearable Warnings and Auto Continue settings off (page B-13) and then print the job again.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
87
Does the job print as expected? (continued)
YES
Go to step 5.
NO
The print job is not formatted correctly.
Pages are not fed correctly or are damaged.
Make sure paper is loaded correctly and that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack. Check the software settings. (See the (See the sections on loading paper, starting on page 26.) software help.) Check that you are using the proper printer driver (page 16).
Try a different font. Downloaded resources might have been lost. You might need to download them again.
There are print quality problems.
Adjust the print resolution (page B-6). Check that REt is on (page B-6).
If you are trying to print A4 paper, the side guides in the tray might have Go to page 82. slipped out of place. (Make sure the side guides are locked into position.) If you are having problems printing custom-size paper, see page 46. If pages are wrinkled or curled, or if the image is skewed on the page, see page 82.
88
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
5 Does the printer select the proper trays,
YES For other problems, check the Contents, the Index, or the printer software help.
output locations, and paper handling accessories?
NO
The printer pulls from the wrong tray.
Make sure paper trays are correctly configured for paper size and type (page 52). Print a configuration page to see current tray settings (page 94). Make sure the tray selection (or paper type) in the printer driver or software application is set correctly. (The printer driver and software application settings override the printer’s control panel settings.) If you do not want to print from Tray 1, remove any paper loaded in the tray or change the TRAY 1 MODE setting to CASSETTE (page 50). By default, paper loaded in Tray 1 will be printed first. If you want to print from Tray 1, but cannot select the tray from a software application, see page 50.
EN
An optional accessory is not working properly.
A message other than READY is displayed.
Print a configuration page to verify that the accessory is installed properly and is functional (page 94).
Go to page 72.
Configure the printer driver for the installed accessories (see the software help). Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. Verify that you are using the correct optional accessory for the printer. If the optional duplexer will not duplex, check that the rear output bin is closed. If the optional duplexer will not duplex, you might need to install more memory (page C-1).
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
89
Troubleshooting Flowchart for Macintosh Users 1
Can you print from a software application?
NO
Go to step 2.
Print a short document from a software application.
The Macintosh computer is not communicating with the printer.
Make sure the printer’s control panel displays READY (page 84). Make sure the correct printer driver is selected in the Chooser. (There will be a printer icon beside the name.) If the printer resides on a network with multiple zones, make sure the correct zone is selected in the AppleTalk Zones box in the Chooser. Make sure the correct printer has been chosen in the Chooser by printing a configuration page (page 94). Make sure the name of the printer displayed on the configuration page matches the printer in the Chooser. Make sure AppleTalk is active. (Select this in the Chooser.) Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. From Control Panels in the Apple menu, select the Network (or the AppleTalk) control panel and then choose the correct network (for example, LocalTalk or EtherTalk).
90
YES
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
Auto Setup did not automatically set up the printer.
The printer driver icon does not appear in the Chooser.
Set up the printer manually by selecting Configure.
Make sure the LaserWriter Chooser extension resides in the Extensions folder. If it is not present anywhere on your system, then obtain the Macintosh LaserWriter driver from Apple.
Reinstall the printer software. (See the getting started guide.) Select an alternate PPD (page 92). The PPD might have been renamed. If so, select the renamed PPD (page 92).
EN
2 Does the job print as expected?
YES For other problems, check the Contents, the Index, the printer software help, or page 84.
NO
The print job is not sent to the desired printer.
Another printer with the same or similar name might have received the print job. Verify that the printer name matches the name selected in the Chooser (page 92).
The computer cannot be used while the printer is printing.
The print job has incorrect fonts.
If you are printing an .EPS file, try downloading the fonts contained in the .EPS file to the printer before printing. Use the HP LaserJet Utility (page 19). If the document is not printing with New York, Geneva, or Monaco fonts, go into the Page Setup dialog box, and select Options to deselect substituted fonts.
EN
Turn Background Printing on in the Chooser. Status messages will be redirected to the Print Monitor, allowing the computer to continue working while the printer is printing.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
91
Selecting an Alternate PPD 1 Open the Chooser from the Apple menu. 2 Click the LaserWriter icon. 3 If you are on a network with multiple zones, select the zone in the AppleTalk Zones box where the printer is located. 4 Click the printer name you want to use in the Select a PostScript Printer box. (Double-clicking will immediately generate the next few steps.) 5 Click Setup... (This button might read Create for first-time setup.) 6 Click Select PPD.... 7 Find the desired PPD in the list and click Select. If the desired PPD is not listed, choose one of the following options: • Select a PPD for a printer with similar features. • Select a PPD from another folder. • Select the generic PPD by clicking Use Generic. The generic PPD allows you to print, but limits your access to printer features. 8 In the Setup dialog box, click Select, and then click OK to return to the Chooser. Note
If you manually select a PPD, an icon might not appear next to the selected printer in the Select a PostScript Printer box. In the Chooser, click Setup, click Printer Info, and then click Update Info to bring up the icon. 9 Close the Chooser.
Renaming the Printer If you are going to rename the printer, do this before selecting the printer in the Chooser. If you rename the printer after selecting it in the Chooser, you will have to go back into the Chooser and reselect it. Use the Set Printer Name feature in the HP LaserJet Utility to rename the printer.
92
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Checking the Printer’s Configuration From the printer’s control panel, you can print pages that give details about the printer and its current configuration. The following information pages are described here:
• Menu Map • Configuration Page • PCL or PS Font List For a complete list of the printer’s information pages, see the Information Menu in the printer’s control panel (page B-2).
Menu Map To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the control panel, print a control panel menu map: 1 Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press [Item] until PRINT MENU MAP appears. 3 Press [Select] to print the menu map. You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference. The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer. (Many of these values can be overridden from the printer driver or software application.) For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see page B-1. To change a control panel setting, see page 11.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
93
Configuration Page Use the configuration page to view current printer settings, to help troubleshoot printer problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages. Note
If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed (HP LaserJet 4000 N/4000 TN printers), a JetDirect configuration page will print out as well. To print a configuration page: 1 Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press [Item] until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears. 3 Press [Select] to print the configuration page. Figure 20 is a sample configuration page. Numbers in the sample printout match the numbers in the table. The content of the configuration page varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer.
94
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Figure 20
1
Sample Configuration Page
Printer Information
2 Installed Personalities and Options
Lists the serial number, HP JetSend IP addresses, page counts, and other information for the printer. Lists all printer languages that are installed (such as PCL and PS) and lists options that are installed in each DIMM slot and EIO slot.
3
Event Log
Lists the number of entries in the log, the maximum number of entries viewable, and the last three entries.
4
Memory
Lists printer memory, PCL Driver Work Space (DWS), and I/O buffering and resource saving information.
5
Security
Lists the status of the printer’s control panel lock, control panel password, and disk drive.
6
Paper Trays and Options
EN
Lists the size settings for all trays and lists optional paper handling accessories that are installed.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
95
PCL or PS Font List Use the font lists to see which fonts are currently installed in the printer. (The font lists also show which fonts are resident on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM.)
To print a PCL or PS font list: 1 Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press [Item] until PRINT PCL FONT LIST or PRINT PS FONT LIST appears. 3 Press [Select] to print the font list. The PS font list shows the PS fonts installed, and gives a sample of those fonts. The following describes the information that can be found on the PCL font list:
• Font gives the font names and samples. • Pitch/Point indicates the pitch or point size of the font. • Escape Sequence (a PCL programming command) is used to select the designated font. (See the legend at the bottom of the font list page.) Note
For step-by-step instructions on using printer commands to select a font with DOS applications, see page D-7.
• Font # is the number used to select fonts from the printer’s control
•
96
panel (not the software application). Do not confuse the font # with the font ID, described below. The number indicates the DIMM slot where the font is stored. • SOFT: Downloaded fonts, which stay resident in the printer until other fonts are downloaded to replace them, or until the printer is turned off. • INTERNAL: Fonts that permanently reside in the printer. Font ID is the number you assign to soft fonts when you download them through software.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
5 Service and Support Hewlett-Packard Warranty Statement HP PRODUCT HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 N, 4000 T, and 4000 TN printers 1 HP warrants HP hardware, accessories, and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. 2 HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. 3 HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. 4 The warranty period begins on the date of the delivery or on the date of installation if installed by HP. If customer schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery.
EN
Chapter 5: Service and Support
97
5 Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from: a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, b software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, c unauthorized modification or misuse, d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or e improper site preparation or maintenance. 6 THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 7 HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of $300,000 (U.S. dollars) or the actual amount paid for the product that is the subject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective HP product. 8 THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE THE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
Service During and After the Warranty Period
• If printer hardware fails during the warranty period, contact an • •
HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.) If printer hardware fails after the warranty period, and you have an HP Maintenance Agreement or HP Support Pack, request service as specified in the agreement. If you do not have an HP Maintenance Agreement or HP Support Pack, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
If you are shipping equipment to be serviced, use the repacking guidelines on the following page.
98
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
Guidelines for Repacking the Printer • Remove and retain any DIMMs (dual in-line memory modules) • • Caution
installed in the printer (page C-2). Remove and retain any optional accessories installed in the printer (such as the duplexer or hard disk). Remove and retain the toner cartridge.
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, store the cartridge in its original packing material, or store it so that it is not exposed to light.
• Use the original shipping container and packing material, if
• • •
EN
possible. (Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packing is the customer’s responsibility.) If you have already disposed of the printer’s packing material, contact a local mailing service for information on repacking the printer. If possible, include print samples and 50-100 sheets of paper or any other media that is not printing correctly. Include a completed copy of the Service Information Form (page 101). HP recommends insuring the equipment for shipment.
Chapter 5: Service and Support
99
Limited Warranty for Toner Cartridge Life Note
The warranty below applies to the toner cartridge that came with this printer. This warranty supersedes all previous warranties (7/19/96). HP toner cartridges are warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the HP toner is depleted. The warranty covers any defects or malfunctions in a new Hewlett-Packard toner cartridge.
How long does the coverage last?
The coverage lasts until the HP toner is depleted, at which time the warranty expires.
How do I know when the HP toner is running out?
The TONER LOW message on the printer’s control panel display provides the first indication that toner is low. (Toner will likely run out in the next 100-300 sheets of paper.)
What will HP do?
HP will, at HP’s option, either replace products which prove to be defective or refund the purchase price. If possible, please attach a print-out sample illustrating what the defective cartridge is printing.
What does this warranty not cover?
The warranty does not cover cartridges which have been refilled, are emptied, are abused, are misused, or are tampered with in any way.
How do I return the faulty cartridge?
In the event the cartridge proves to be defective, complete the Service Information Form (page 101) and attach a print sample illustrating the defect. Return the form and cartridge to the place of purchase, where the cartridge will be replaced.
How does State, Province or Country Law apply?
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state, province to province, or country to country. This limited warranty is the sole warranty on the HP toner cartridge and supersedes any other warranty relating to this product.
IN NO EVENT SHALL HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS FROM ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE.
100
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
Service Information Form The printer has a one year on-site service warranty. However, if you return the printer for service, please enclose this form.
WHO IS RETURNING THE EQUIPMENT?
Date:
Person to contact:
Phone: (
)
Alternate contact:
Phone: (
)
Return shipping address:
Special shipping instructions:
WHAT IS BEING SENT? Model name:
Model number:
Serial number:
Please attach any relevant print-outs when returning equipment. DO NOT ship accessories that are not required to complete the repair (manuals, cleaning supplies, etc.).
WHAT NEEDS TO BE DONE? (Attach a separate sheet if necessary.) 1. Describe the conditions of the failure. (What was the failure? What were you doing when the failure occurred? What software were you running? Is the failure repeatable?) 2. If the failure is intermittent, how much time elapses between failures? 3. Is the unit connected to any of the following? (Give manufacturer and model number.) Personal computer:
Modem:
Network:
4. Additional comments: HOW WILL YOU PAY FOR THE REPAIR?
❏ Under warranty
Purchase/received date: ______________________ (Enclose proof of purchase or receiving document with original received date.)
❏ Maintenance contract number: ______________________ ❏ Purchase order number: ______________________ Except for contract and warranty service, a purchase order number and/or authorized signature must accompany any request for service. If standard repair prices do not apply, a minimum purchase order is required. Standard repair prices may be obtained by contacting an HP-authorized Repair Center. Authorized signature: ______________________________ Billing address:
EN
Phone: ________________
Special billing instructions:
Chapter 5: Service and Support
101
HP Software License Terms ATTENTION: USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE HP SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW. USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE LICENSE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS, YOU MAY RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND. IF THE SOFTWARE IS BUNDLED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND. The following License Terms govern your use of the accompanying Software unless you have a separate signed agreement with HP. License Grant HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the Software. “Use” means storing, loading, installing, executing, or displaying the Software. You may not modify the Software or disable any licensing or control features of the Software. If the Software is licensed for “concurrent use”, you may not allow more than the maximum number of authorized users to Use the Software concurrently. Ownership The Software is owned and copyrighted by HP or its third party suppliers. Your license confers no title to, or ownership in, the Software and is not a sale of any rights in the Software. HP’s third party suppliers may protect their rights in the event of any violation of these License Terms. Copies and Adaptations You may only make copies or adaptations of the Software for archival purposes or when copying or adaptation is an essential step in the authorized Use of the Software. You must reproduce all copyright notices in the original Software on all copies or adaptations. You may not copy the Software onto any public network. No Disassembly or Decryption You may not disassemble or decompile the Software unless HP’s prior written consent is obtained. In some jurisdictions, HP’s consent may not be required for limited disassembly or decompilation. Upon request, you will provide HP with reasonably detailed information regarding any disassembly or decompilation. You may not decrypt the Software unless decryption is a necessary part of the operation of the Software. Transfer Your license will automatically terminate upon any transfer of the Software. Upon transfer, you must deliver the Software, including any copies and related documentation, to the transferee. The transferee must accept these License Terms as a condition to the transfer. Termination HP may terminate your license upon notice for failure to comply with any of these License Terms. Upon termination, you must immediately destroy the Software, together with all copies, adaptations, and merged portions in any form. Export Requirements You may not export or reexport the Software or any copy or adaptation in violation of any applicable laws or regulations. U.S. Government Restricted Rights The Software and any accompanying documentation have been developed entirely at private expense. They are delivered and licensed as “commercial computer software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS 252.211-7015 (May 1991), or DFARS 252.227-7014 (Jun 1995), as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101 (a), or as “Restricted computer software” as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (Jun 1987) (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those rights provided for such Software and any accompanying documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved.
102
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices Worldwide Sales and Service Offices Before calling an HP Sales and Service office, be sure to contact the appropriate Customer Support Center number listed in the front of this user’s guide.
Argentina: Hewlett-Packard Argentina S.A. Montañeses 2140/50/60 1428 Buenos Aires Phone: (54) (1) 787-7100 Fax: (54) (1) 787-7213
Australia: Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd. 31-41 Joseph Street Blackburn, VIC 3130 Phone: (61) (3) 272-2895 Fax: (61) (3) 898-7831 Hardware Repair Center: Phone: (61) (3) 272-8000 Extended Warranty Support: Phone: (61) (3) 272-2577 Customer Information Center: Phone: (61) (3) 272-8000
Austria: Hewlett-Packard GmbH Lieblgasse 1 A-1222 Vienna Phone: (43) (1) 25000-555 Fax: (43) (1) 25000-500
Belgium: Hewlett-Packard Belgium S.A. NV Boulevard de la Woluwe-Woluwedal 100-102 B-1200 Brussels Phone: (32) (2) 778-31-11 Fax: (32) (2) 763-06-13
Brazil: Edisa Hewlett-Packard S.A. Av. Do Contorno, 6321,12° andar 30110-110, Belo Horizonte, MG Phone: (55) (31) 221-8845 Fax: (55) (31) 221-8836
Canada: Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd. 17500 Trans Canada Highway South Service Road Kirkland, Québec H9J 2X8 (1) (514) 697-4232 Phone: (1) (514) 697-6941 Fax:
China: China Hewlett-Packard Co. Ltd. Level 5, West Wing Office China World Trade Center No. 1, Jian Guo Men Wai Avenue Beijing 100004 Phone: (86) (10) 6505-3888, x. 5450 Fax: (86) (10) 6505-1033
Czech Republic: Hewlett-Packard s. r. o. Novodvorská 82 CZ-14200 Praha 4 Phone: (42) (2) 613-07111 Fax: (42) (2) 471-7611
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd. 5150 Spectrum Way Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5G1 Phone: (1) (905) 206-4725 Fax: (1) (905) 206-4739
Denmark: Hewlett-Packard A/S Kongevejen 25 DK-3460 Birkerød Denmark Phone: (45) 99-1000 Fax: (45) 4281-5810
Hardware Repair Center and Extended Warranty Support: Phone: (86) (10) 6262-5666 x. 6101 or 6102 (86) (10) 6261-4167 Far East Region: Hewlett-Packard Asia Pacific Ltd. 17-21/F Shell Tower, Times Square 1 Matheson Street, Causeway Bay Hong Kong Phone: (852) 2599-7777 Fax: (852) 2506-9244
Finland: Hewlett-Packard Oy Piispankalliontie 17 FIN-02200 Espoo Phone: (358) (9) 887-21 Fax: (358) (9) 887-2477
Hardware Repair Center: Phone: (852) 2599-7000 Extended Warranty Support: Phone: (852) 2599-7000 Customer Information Center: Phone: (852) 2599-7066
EN
Chapter 5: Service and Support
103
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices (Continued) France: Hewlett-Packard France 42 Quai du Point du Jour F-92659 Boulogne Cedex Phone: (33) (146) 10-1700 Fax: (33) (146) 10-1705
Germany: Hewlett-Packard GmbH Herrenberger Strasse 130 71034 Böblingen Phone: (49) (180) 532-6222 (49) (180) 525-8143 Fax: (49) (180) 531-6122
Greece: Hewlett-Packard Hellas 62, Kifissias Avenue GR-15125 Maroussi Phone: (30) (1) 689-6411 Fax: (30) (1) 689-6508
Hungary: Hewlett-Packard Magyarország Kft. Erzsébet királyné útja 1/c. H-1146 Budapest Phone: (36) (1) 343-0550 Fax: (36) (1) 122-3692
India: Hewlett-Packard India Ltd. Paharpur Business Centre 21 Nehru Place New Delhi 110 019 Phone: (91) (11) 647-2311 Fax: (91) (11) 646-1117
Italy: Hewlett-Packard Italiana SpA Via Giuseppe di Vittorio, 9 Cernusco Sul Naviglio I-20063 (Milano) Phone: (39) (2) 921-21 Fax: (39) (2) 921-04473
Hardware Repair Center: Phone: (36) (1) 343-0312 Customer Information Center: Phone: (36) (1) 343-0310 Japan: Hewlett-Packard Japan, Ltd. 3-29-21 Takaido-higashi Suginami-ku, Tokyo 168 Phone: (81) (3) 3335-8333 Fax: (81) (3) 3335-8338 Hardware Repair Center: Phone: (81) (4) 7355-6660 Fax: (81) (4) 7352-1848
Hardware Repair Center and Extended Warranty Support: Phone: (91) (11) 642-5073 (91) (11) 682-6042 Korea: Hewlett-Packard Korea 25-12, SHP House Yoido-dong, Youngdeungpo-ku Seoul 150-010 Phone: (82) (2) 769-0114 Fax: (82) (2) 784-7084
Latin American Headquarters: 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 950 Miami, FL 33126 USA Phone: (1) (305) 267-4220
Hardware Repair Center: Phone: (82) (2) 3270-0700 (82) (2) 707-2174 (DeskJet) (82) (2) 3270-0710 (Hardware) Extended Warranty Support: Phone: (82) (2) 3770-0365 (Bench) (82) (2) 769-0500 (Onsite)
México, D.F.: Hewlett-Packard de México, S.A. de C.V. Prolongación Reforma No. 700 Lomas de Santa Fe 01210 México, D.F. Phone: (52) (5) 326-4600 Fax: (52) (5) 326-4274
México Guadalajara: Hewlett-Packard de México, S.A. de C.V. Monte Morelos No.299 Fracc. Loma Bonita 45060 Guadalajara, Jal. Phone: (52) (3) 669-9302 Fax: (52) (3) 669-9560
México Monterrey: Hewlett-Packard de México, S.A. de C.V. Batallón de San Patricio 111 Piso 23-Torre Comercial América Colonia del Valle 66269 Garza Garcia, Nuevo León Phone: (52) (8) 368-5100 Fax: (52) (8) 356-7498
Middle East/Africa: ISB HP Response Center Hewlett-Packard S.A. Rue de Veyrot 39 P.O. Box 364 CH-1217 Meyrin - Geneva Switzerland Phone: (41) (22) 780-4111
Netherlands: Hewlett-Packard Nederland BV Startbaan 16 NL-1187 XR Amstelveen Postbox 667 NL-1180 AR Amstelveen Phone: (31) (20) 547-6911 Fax: (31) (20) 547-7755
New Zealand: Hewlett-Packard (NZ) Limited Ports of Auckland Building Princes Wharf, Quay Street P.O. Box 3860 Auckland Phone: (64) (9) 356-6640 Fax: (64) (9) 356-6620 Hardware Repair Center and Extended Warranty Support: Phone: (64) (9) 0800-733547 Customer Information Center: Phone: (64) (9) 0800-651651
104
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices (Continued) Norway: Hewlett-Packard Norge A/S Postboks 60 Skøyen Drammensveien 169 N-0212 Oslo Phone: (47) 2273-5600 Fax: (47) 2273-5610
Poland: Hewlett-Packard Polska ul.Newelska 6 PK-01-447 Warszawa Phone: (48) (22) 375-065 Fax: (48) (22) 374-783
Portugal: Hewlett-Packard Portugal Rua Gregório Lopes Lote 1732B P-1400 Lisboa Phone: (351) (1) 301-7330 Fax: (351) (1) 301-7345
Russia: AO Hewlett-Packard Business Complex Building #2 129223, Moskva, Prospekt Mira VVC Phone: (7) (95) 928-6885 Fax: (7) (95) 974-7829
Singapore: H-P Singapore (Pte), Ltd. 150 Beach Road #29-00 Gateway West Singapore 0718 Phone: (65) 291-9088 Fax: (65) 292-7089
Spain: Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A. Carretera de la Coruña km 16.500 E-28230 Las Rozas, Madrid Phone: (34) (1) 626-1600 Fax: (34) (1) 626-1830
Hardware Repair Center and Customer Information Center: Phone: (65) 272-5300 Extended Warranty Support: Phone: (65) 374-3173 Sweden: Hewlett-Packard Sverige AB Skalholtsgatan 9 S-164 97 Kista Phone: (46) (8) 444-2000 Fax: (46) (8) 444-2666
Switzerland: Hewlett-Packard (Schweiz) AG In der Luberzen 29 CH-8902 Urdorf/Zürich Phone: (41) (1) 753-7111 Fax: (41) (1) 753-7700
Taiwan: Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd. 8th Floor 337, Fu-Hsing North Road Taipei, 10483 Phone: (886) (2) 712-0404 Fax: (886) (2) 715-3107 Hardware Repair Center, call: (886) (2) 717-9673 (North Taiwan) (886) (4) 327-0153 (Central Taiwan) (886) (8) 073-3733 (South Taiwan) Extended Warranty Support Contact: Phone: (886) (8) 021-1666
Thailand: Hewlett-Packard (Thailand) Ltd. 11th Floor Pacific Place 140 Sukhumvit Road Bangkok 10110 Phone: (66) (2) 254-6720 Fax: (66) (2) 254-6731
Turkey: Hewlett-Packard Company Bilgisayar Ve ölçüm Sistemleri AS 19 Mayis Caddesi Nova Baran Plaza Kat: 12 80220 Sisli-Istanbul Phone: (90) (212) 224-5925 Fax: (90) (212) 224-5939
United Kingdom: Hewlett-Packard Ltd. Cain Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 1HN Phone: (44) (134) 436-9222 Fax: (44) (134) 436-3344
Hardware Repair Center and Extended Warranty Support Contact: Phone: (66) (2) 661-3900 ext. 6001 or 6002 Customer Information Center: Phone: same as above with ext. 3211 Venezuela: Hewlett-Packard de Venezuela S.A. Los Ruices Norte 3A Transversal Edificio Segre Caracas 1071 Phone: (58) (2) 239-4244 Fax: (58) (2) 239-3080
EN
Chapter 5: Service and Support
105
106
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
A Specifications Overview This appendix includes:
• Paper specifications • Printer specifications • Cable specifications
EN
Specifications
A-1
Paper Specifications HP LaserJet printers produce excellent print quality. This printer accepts a variety of media, such as cut-sheet paper (including recycled paper), envelopes, labels, transparencies, and custom-size paper. Properties such as weight, grain, and moisture content are important factors affecting printer performance and output quality. The printer can use a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this manual. Paper that does not meet these guidelines may cause the following problems:
• poor print quality • increased paper jams • premature wear on the printer, requiring repair For best results, use only HP brand paper and print media. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of other brands. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence or control their quality.
Note
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this manual and still not produce satisfactory results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control. Before purchasing a large quantity of paper, make sure it meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide and in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. (To order the guide, see page 8.) Always test paper before purchasing a large quantity.
Caution
A-2
Using paper outside HP specifications may cause problems for the printer, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements.
Specifications
EN
Supported Sizes and Weights of Paper Tray 1
Dimensions1
Minimum Size (custom)
3 by 5 in (76 by 127 mm)
Maximum Size
8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
Transparencies
Labels
Same as minimum and maximum paper sizes listed above.
Envelopes
Weight
Capacity2
16 to 53 lb (60 to 199 g/m2)
100 sheets of 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper
Thickness: 0.0039 in to 0.0045 in (0.099 to 0.114 mm)
75 transparencies
Thickness: 0.005 in to 0.007 in (0.127 mm to 0.178 mm)
50 labels
20 to 28 lb (75 to 105 g/m2)
10 envelopes
1. The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. To print custom-size paper, see page 45. 2. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Trays 2 and 3 (HP LaserJet 4000 T/ 4000 TN)
Dimensions1
Letter
8.5 by 11 in (216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in (210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in (191 by 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
B5 (ISO) (custom3)
6.9 by 9.9 in (176 by 250 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in (182 by 257 mm)
A5 (custom3)
5.8 by 8.2 in (148 by 210 mm)
Weight
Capacity2
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)
250 sheets of 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper 50-100 transparencies
1. The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. 2. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions. 3. To print custom-size paper, see page 45.
EN
Specifications
A-3
Tray 2 (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N)
Dimensions1
Letter
8.5 by 11 in (216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in (210 by 297 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
Weight
Capacity2
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)
500 sheets of 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper 50-100 transparencies
1. The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. 2. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Optional 500-Sheet Tray
Dimensions1
Letter
8.5 by 11 in (216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in (210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in (191 by 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
B5 (ISO) (custom3)
6.9 by 9.9 in (176 by 250 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in (182 by 257 mm)
A5 (custom3)
5.8 by 8.2 in (148 by 210 mm)
3
Custom
Weight
Capacity2
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)
500 sheets of 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper 50-100 transparencies
5.8 by 8.2 in to 8.5 by 14 in (148 by 210 mm to 216 by 356 mm)
1. The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. 2. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions. 3. To print custom-size paper, see page 45.
A-4
Specifications
EN
Optional Envelope Feeder Minimum Size Maximum Size
Dimensions1 3.5 by 6.3 in (90 by 160 mm) 7 by 10 in (178 by 254 mm)
Weight
Capacity2
20 to 28 lb (75 to 105 g/m2)
75 envelopes
1. The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. 2. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Optional Duplex Printing Accessory (duplexer)
Dimensions
Letter
8.5 by 11 in (216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in (210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in (191 by 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in (182 by 257 mm)
Weight
Capacity
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)
not applicable
Supported Types of Paper The printer supports the following types of paper:
• plain • letterhead • prepunched • bond • color • rough EN
• preprinted • transparency • labels • recycled • card stock • user-defined (5 types) Specifications
A-5
Guidelines for Using Paper For best results, use conventional 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper. Make sure the paper is of good quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, and curled or bent edges. If you are unsure what type of paper you are loading (such as bond or recycled), check the label on the package of paper. Some paper causes print quality problems, jamming, or damage to the printer. Symptom
Problem with Paper
Solution
Poor print quality or toner adhesion. Problems with feeding.
Too moist, too rough, too smooth, or embossed; faulty paper lot.
Try another kind of paper, between 100-250 Sheffield, 4-6% moisture content.
Dropouts, jamming, curl.
Stored improperly.
Store paper flat in its moisture-proof wrapping.
Increased gray background shading.
Too heavy.
Use lighter paper. Open the rear output bin.
Excessive curl. Problems with feeding.
Too moist, wrong grain direction or short-grain construction.
Open the rear output bin. Use long-grain paper.
Jamming, damage to printer.
Cutouts or perforations.
Do not use paper with cutouts or perforations.
Problems with feeding.
Ragged edges.
Use good quality paper.
Note
Do not use letterhead paper that is printed with low-temperature inks, such as those used in some types of thermography. Do not use raised letterhead. The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Make sure that any colored paper or preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with the printer’s temperature (400° F or 205° C for 0.1 second).
A-6
Specifications
EN
Paper Weight Equivalence Table Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight, locate the bond weight (in row 3, second column) and scan across the row to the cover weight (in the fourth column). The equivalent is 28 lb. Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade. U.S. Post Card1 thickness (mm)
U.S. Bond Weight (lb)
U.S. Text/ Book Weight (lb)
U.S. Cover Weight (lb)
U.S. Bristol Weight (lb)
U.S. Index Weight (lb)
U.S. Tag Weight (lb)
Europe Metric Weight (g/m2)
Japan Metric Weight (g/m2)
1
16
41
22
27
33
37
60
60
2
17
43
24
29
35
39
64
64
3
20
50
28
34
42
46
75
75
4
21
54
30
36
44
49
80
80
5
22
56
31
38
46
51
81
81
6
24
60
33
41
50
55
90
90
7
27
68
37
45
55
61
100
100
8
28
70
39
49
58
65
105
105
9
32
80
44
55
67
74
120
120
10
34
86
47
58
71
79
128
128
11
36
90
50
62
75
83
135
135
12
.18
39
100
55
67
82
91
148
148
13
.19
42
107
58
72
87
97
157
157
14
.20
43
110
60
74
90
100
163
163
15
.23
47
119
65
80
97
108
176
176
53
134
74
90
110
122
199
199
16
1. U.S. Post Card measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
EN
Specifications
A-7
Labels Caution
To avoid damaging the printer, use only labels recommended for use in laser printers. If you have problems printing labels, use Tray 1 and open the rear output bin. Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once.
Label Construction When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:
• Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 400° F • • •
(205° C), the printer’s maximum temperature. Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets with spaces between the labels, causing serious jams. Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 0.5 inch (13 millimeters) of curl in any direction. Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
To print sheets of labels, see page 42.
Transparencies Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand 400° F (205° C), the printer’s maximum temperature. Close the rear output bin to print transparencies to the top output bin. Caution
To avoid damaging the printer, use only transparencies recommended for use in laser printers. If you have problems printing transparencies, use Tray 1. To print transparencies, see page 44.
A-8
Specifications
EN
Envelopes Envelope Construction Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the following components: of the envelope paper should not exceed • Weight: The weight 2
• • • •
28 lb (105 g/m ), or jamming may result. Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 0.25 inch (6 mm) curl, and should not contain air. (Envelopes that trap air may cause problems.) Condition: Make sure envelopes are not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged. Sizes in Tray 1: From 3 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm) to 8.5 by 14 inches (216 by 356 mm). Sizes in the optional envelope feeder: From 3.5 by 6.3 inches (90 by 160 millimeters) to 7 by 10 inches (178 by 254 millimeters).
If you do not have an optional envelope feeder, always print envelopes from Tray 1 (page 37). To print envelopes with the optional envelope feeder, see page 39. If envelopes wrinkle, try opening the rear output bin.
EN
Specifications
A-9
Envelopes with Double-Side-Seams Double-side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope rather than diagonal seams. This style may be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as illustrated below.
Acceptable
Unacceptable Figure A-1
Envelopes with Double-Side-Seams
Envelopes with Adhesive Strips or Flaps Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the printer. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams.
A-10
Specifications
EN
Envelope Margins The following table gives typical address margins for a Commercial #10 or DL envelope.
Note
Type of Address
Top Margin
Left Margin
Return Address
0.6 in (15 mm)
0.6 in (15 mm)
Delivery Address
2 in (51 mm)
3.5 in (89 mm)
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 0.6 inch (15 millimeters) from the edges of the envelope.
Envelope Storage Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to good print quality. Envelopes should be stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope may wrinkle during printing.
Card Stock and Heavy Paper Many types of card stock can be printed from Tray 1, including index cards and postcards. Some card stock performs better than others because its construction is better suited for feeding through a laser printer. For optimum printer performance, do not use paper heavier than 53 lb (199 g/m2) in Tray 1 or 28 lb (105 g/m2) in other trays. Paper that is too heavy might cause misfeeds, stacking problems, paper jams, poor toner fusing, poor print quality, or excessive mechanical wear. Note
EN
Printing on heavier paper may be possible if the tray is not filled to capacity, and paper with a smoothness rating of 100-180 Sheffield is used.
Specifications
A-11
Card Stock Construction
• Smoothness: 36-53 lb (135-199 g/m2) card stock should have2a • • •
Note
smoothness rating of 100-180 Sheffield. 16-36 lb (60-135 g/m ) card stock should have a smoothness rating of 100-250 Sheffield. Construction: Card stock should lie flat with less than 0.2 inch (5 millimeters) of curl. Condition: Make sure card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged. Sizes: Use only card stock within the following size ranges: • minimum: 3 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm) • maximum: 8.5 by 14 inches (216 by 356 millimeters)
Before loading card stock in Tray 1, make sure it is regular in shape and not damaged. Also, make sure the cards are not stuck together.
Card Stock Guidelines
• If cards curl or jam, try printing from Tray 1 and opening the rear •
A-12
output bin. Set margins at least 0.08 inch (2 mm) away from the edges of the paper.
Specifications
EN
Printer Specifications Physical Dimensions 39.67 inches (100.76 cm) full length, trays and rear output bin open
16.77 inches (42.6 cm) printer only, rear output bin closed
15.4 inches (39.0 cm)
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N 18.5 inches (46.99 cm) with cover open 13.3 inches (34.3 cm) with cover closed HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN 20.1 inches (51.19 cm) with cover open 15.5 inches (38.5 cm) with cover closed
Figure A-2
Printer Dimensions
Printer Weight (without toner cartridge)
• HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N printers: 39.27 lb (17.85 kg) • HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN printers: 45.66 lb (20.71 kg) EN
Specifications
A-13
Environmental Specifications Electrical Specifications Printer State
Power Consumption (average, in watts)
Printing
330
Standby
18
PowerSave (default activation time 30 minutes)
16
Off
0
Minimum Recommended Circuit Capacity 100-127 Volt
8 amps
220-240 Volt
4 amps
Power Requirements (Acceptable Line Voltage)
A-14
100-127 Volt
50-60 Hz
220-240 Volt
50-60 Hz
Specifications
EN
Acoustic Emissions (Per ISO 9296) Printer State
Sound Power1
Printing, 17 pages per minute (ppm)
Lwad= 6.6 bels (A)
Printing, 8 ppm
Lwad= 6.2 bels (A)
PowerSave
Lwad= 0 bels (A)
1. You might want to install printers with sound power Lwad>=6.3 bels (A) or more in a separate room or cubicle.
General Specifications Operating temperature
50-91° F (10-32° C)
Relative Humidity
20-80%
Speed, in pages per minute (ppm)
Up to 17 ppm, letter size paper. Up to 16 ppm, A4 size paper.
Expandable Memory
EN
Up to 100 MB total, combining standard and accessory memory DIMMs.
Specifications
A-15
Serial Cable Specifications Serial communication is simply the transmission of data one bit at a time. With just one bit to transmit at a time, data can be transferred with a simple electrical circuit consisting of only two wires. In this fashion, an eight-bit byte is transmitted one bit at a time and the individual bits are reassembled into the original byte on the receiving end. Bit transmission occurs from the least significant bit to the most significant bit. Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)
Transmit on pin 2 and receive on pin 3. A printer is typically a DTE device.
Data Communications Equipment (DCE)
Transmit on pin 3 and receive on pin 2. A modem is typically a DCE device.
Asynchronous Communication
Asynchronous communication or start/stop transmission is the concept of enclosing a character with a start and stop bit. The RS-232 specification defines the standards for asynchronous serial communication.
Parity
Parity is a method of error checking at the bit level.
HP LaserJet Serial Data Format
Transmission is asynchronous, with one start bit, eight data bits and one stop bit. Parity is not used. HP LaserJet printers are DTE devices.
Serial Interface Protocol (handshaking)
Handshaking is the method by which the flow of data between two devices is controlled. The two methods of flow control that are used by HP LaserJet printers are software flow control, in which one device controls another by the content of the data, and hardware flow control, in which one device can control another by changing the voltage on a wire.
Software Flow Control (software handshaking)
Xon/Xoff is a data stream handshake protocol that sends Xon (DC1; 11 Hex) to the computer from the printer’s transmit data pin when the printer is able to accept data and sends Xoff (DC3; 13 Hex) when the printer is not ready for data.
Hardware Flow Control (hardware handshaking)
By definition, hardware handshaking is performed when two programs manipulate RS-232 control pins-DTR, DSR, RTS, and CTS to achieve a hardware-based form of flow control. In DTR/DSR handshaking, the sender asserts DTR (Data Terminal Ready) before sending the first character in a stream of data and waits for DSR (Data Set Ready) to be asserted in return. RTS/CTS handshaking is similar, but uses the Request To Send and Clear To Send pins rather than Data Terminal Ready. In either case, the sender delays transmitting data until the receiver is ready.
A-16
Specifications
EN
Hewlett-Packard offers the following serial cables and adapter for use with the printer: HP Part Number
Description
C2932A
9 to 9-pin M/F RS-232 Serial Cable, 3m
C2933A
9 to 25-pin M/F RS-232 Serial Cable, 3m
C2909A
9 to 25-pin M/F Serial Cable Adapter
With the C2909A serial cable adapter installed on the printer, you can connect a 25-pin cable connector to the printer. The adapter pin connections are shown below.
25 to 9 Pin Adapter (C2909A)
EN
Standard DB-25 (female adapter end)
Printer DB-9 (male adapter end)
2- Transmit Data
2- Transmit Data
3- Receive Data
3- Receive Data
6- Data Set Ready
4- Data Set Ready
7- Signal Ground
5- Signal Ground
20- Data Terminal Ready
6- Data Terminal Ready
Specifications
A-17
DB-9 Serial Cable Pin Outs Computer DB-9
Printer DB-9 (male cable end)
2- Receive Data
2- Transmit Data
3- Transmit Data
3- Receive Data
4- Data Terminal Ready
4- Data Set Ready
5- Ground
5- Ground
6- Data Set Ready
6- Data Terminal Ready
8- Clear to Send
8- Data Terminal Ready
DB-25 Serial Cable Pin Outs
Note
Computer DB-25
Printer DB-9 (male cable end)
3- Receive Data
2- Transmit Data
2- Transmit Data
3- Receive Data
20- Data Terminal Ready
4- Data Set Ready
7- Ground
5- Ground
6- Data Set Ready
6- Data Terminal Ready
5- Clear to Send
8- Data Terminal Ready
The pin outs for the computer end are typical pin numbers. The actual pin numbers for your computer may be different. Check the documentation for your computer to verify the proper pin outs. Pins not shown are not used by the printer.
A-18
Specifications
EN
B Control Panel Menus Overview You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer through the printer driver or software application. This is the most convenient way to control the printer, and will override the printer’s control panel settings. See the help files associated with the software, or for more information on accessing the printer driver, see page 15. You can also control the printer by changing settings in the printer’s control panel. Use the control panel to access printer features not supported by the printer driver or software application. Note
Printer driver and software commands override the printer’s control panel settings. You can print a menu map from the control panel that shows the current printer configuration (page 11). This appendix lists all the items and possible values for the printer. (Default values are listed in the “Item” column.) Additional menu items can appear in the control panel, depending on the options currently installed in the printer.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-1
Information Menu This menu contains printer information pages that give details about the printer and its configuration. To print an information page, scroll to the desired page and press [Select]. . Information Menu Item
Explanation
PRINT MENU MAP
The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the control panel menu items. For more information, see page 93.
PRINT CONFIGURATION
The configuration page shows the printer’s current configuration. If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed (HP LaserJet 4000 N/4000 TN printers), a JetDirect configuration page will print out as well. For more information, see page 94.
PRINT PCL FONT LIST
The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to the printer. For more information, see page 96.
PRINT PS FONT LIST
The PS font list shows all the PS fonts currently available to the printer. For more information, see page 96.
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY
This item appears only when a mass storage device (such as an optional flash DIMM or hard disk) containing a recognized file system is installed in the printer. The file directory shows information for all installed mass storage devices. For more information, see page C-1.
PRINT EVENT LOG
The event log lists printer events or errors.
SHOW EVENT LOG
This item allows you to view the most recent printer events on the control panel display. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the event log entries.
PRINT PAPER PATH TEST
The paper path test can be used to verify that the paper path is working properly, or to troubleshoot problems with a type of paper. Choose the input tray, output bin, duplexer (if available), and number of copies.
B-2
Control Panel Menus
EN
Paper Handling Menu When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the control panel, you can print by choosing the type and size of paper from the printer driver or software application. For more information, see page 52. Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings. For more information, see page 48.
Paper Handling Menu Item
Values
Explanation
ENVELOPE FEEDER SIZE=COM10
For supported paper sizes, see page A-3.
This item appears only when the optional envelope feeder is installed. Set the value to correspond with the envelope size currently loaded in the envelope feeder.
ENVELOPE FEEDER TYPE=PLAIN
For supported paper types, see page A-5.
This item appears only when the optional envelope feeder is installed. Set the value to correspond with the envelope type currently loaded in the envelope feeder.
TRAY 1 MODE= FIRST
FIRST CASSETTE
Determine how the printer will use Tray 1. FIRST: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, the printer will pull paper from that tray first. CASSETTE: A paper size must be assigned to Tray 1 using the TRAY 1 SIZE option (the next item in this menu when TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE). This allows Tray 1 to be used as a reserved tray. For more information, see page 50.
TRAY 1 SIZE= LETTER
For supported paper sizes, see page A-3.
This item appears only when TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE. Set the value to correspond with the paper size currently loaded in Tray 1.
TRAY 1 TYPE= PLAIN
For supported paper types, see page A-5.
This item appears only when TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE. Set the value to correspond with the paper type currently loaded in Tray 1.
TRAY 2 TYPE= PLAIN
For supported paper types, see page A-5.
Set the value to correspond with the paper type currently loaded in Tray 2.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-3
Paper Handling Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY 3 TYPE= PLAIN
For supported paper types, see page A-5.
This item appears only when a third paper tray is installed. Set the value to correspond with the paper type currently loaded in Tray 3.
TRAY 4 TYPE= PLAIN
For supported paper types, see page A-5.
This item appears only when a fourth paper tray is installed (available only on the HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN printers). Set the value to correspond with the paper type currently loaded in Tray 4.
MANUAL FEED=OFF
OFF ON
Feed the paper manually from Tray 1, rather than automatically from a tray. When MANUAL FEED=ON and Tray 1 is empty, the printer goes offline when it receives a print job and displays MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE]. For more information, see page 51.
DUPLEX=OFF
OFF ON
This item appears only when an optional duplexer is installed. Set the value to ON to print on both sides (duplex) or OFF to print on one side (simplex) of a sheet of paper. For more information, see page 31.
BINDING= LONG EDGE
LONG EDGE SHORT EDGE
This item appears only when an optional duplexer is installed and the duplex option is on. Choose the binding edge when duplexing (printing on both sides of paper). For more information, see page 31.
OVERRIDE A4 WITH LETTER=NO
NO YES
Choose YES to print on letter size paper when an A4 job is sent, but no A4 size paper is loaded in the printer (or to print on A4 size paper when a letter job is sent, but no letter paper is loaded in the printer).
CONFIGURE FUSER MODE MENU=NO
NO YES
Configure the fuser mode associated with each paper type. (This is only necessary if you are experiencing problems printing on certain paper types.) NO: The fuser mode menu items are not accessible. YES: Additional items appear (see below). Note To see the default fuser mode for each paper type, select YES, scroll back to the Information Menu, and print a menu map (page B-2).
B-4
Control Panel Menus
EN
Paper Handling Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
[TYPE]= NORMAL
NORMAL LOW HIGH
This item appears only when CONFIGURE FUSER MODE MENU=YES. Most paper types are set to NORMAL by default. The exception is as follows:
ROUGH=HIGH (The ROUGH=HIGH setting is only available with A4, letter, and legal sizes.) For a complete list of supported paper types, see page A-5.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-5
Print Quality Menu Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings. For more information, see page 48.
Print Quality Menu Item
Values
Explanation
RESOLUTION= FASTRES 1200
300 600 FASTRES 1200 PRORES 1200
Select the resolution from the following values: 300: Produces draft print quality at the printer’s maximum speed (16 ppm). 300 dpi (dots per inch) is recommended for some bitmapped fonts and graphics, and for compatibility with the HP LaserJet III family of printers. 600: Produces high print quality at the printer’s maximum speed (16 ppm). FASTRES 1200: Produces optimum print quality (comparable to 1200 dpi) at the printer’s maximum speed (16 ppm). PRORES 1200: Produces optimum print quality (true 1200 dpi) at half the printer’s maximum speed (8 ppm). When the resolution is changed, any downloaded resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM. Note It is best to change the resolution from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.)
RET=MEDIUM
OFF LIGHT MEDIUM DARK
Use the printer’s Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) setting to produce print with smooth angles, curves, and edges. REt does not affect print quality when the print resolution is set to ProRes 1200. All other print resolutions, including FastRes 1200, benefit from REt. Note It is best to change the REt setting from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.)
B-6
Control Panel Menus
EN
Print Quality Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
ECONOMODE=OFF
OFF ON
Turn EconoMode on (to save toner) or off (for high quality). EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by reducing the amount of toner on the printed page by up to 50%. Caution HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. (If EconoMode is used full-time, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge.) Note It is best to turn EconoMode on or off from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.)
TONER DENSITY=3
1 2 3 4 5
Lighten or darken the print on the page by changing the toner density setting. The settings range from 1 (light) to 5 (dark), but the default setting of 3 usually produces the best results. Use a lower toner density setting to save toner. Note It is best to change the toner density from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.)
CREATE CLEANING PAGE
No value to select.
Press [Select] to print a cleaning page (for cleaning excess toner from the paper path). In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper). Follow the instructions on the cleaning page. For more information, see page 61.
PROCESS CLEANING PAGE
No value to select.
This item appears only after a cleaning page has been generated (as described above). Press [Select] to process the cleaning page.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-7
Printing Menu Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings. For more information, see page 48.
Printing Menu Item
Values
Explanation
COPIES=1
1 to 999
Set the default number of copies by selecting any number from 1 to 999. Press [-Value+] once to change the setting by increments of 1, or hold down [-Value+] to scroll by increments of 10. Note It is best to set the number of copies from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.)
PAPER= LETTER
For supported paper sizes, see page A-3.
Set the default image size for paper and envelopes. (The item name will change from paper to envelope as you scroll through the available sizes.) Note The defaults indicated here are for 110V printers. The default paper size for 220V printers is A4. The default envelope size for 220V printers is DL.
CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=NO
NO YES
NO: The custom paper menu items are not
UNIT OF MEASURE= INCHES
INCHES MILLIMETERS
This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES. Select the unit of measurement for the custom paper size.
(110V printers) and
ENVELOPE= COM10 (110V printers)
(110V printers)
accessible. YES: The custom paper menu items appear (see below).
or
MILLIMETERS (220V printers)
B-8
Control Panel Menus
EN
Printing Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
X DIMENSION= 8.5 INCHES
3.00 to 8.5 INCHES
(110V printers)
(110V printers)
This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES. Select the dimension to be fed into the printer (short edge).
or
or
216 MILLIMETERS
76 to 216 MILLIMETERS
(220V printers)
(220V printers)
Y DIMENSION= 14.0 INCHES
5.00 to 14.0 INCHES
(110V printers)
(110V printers)
or
or
356 MILLIMETERS
127 to 356 MILLIMETERS
(220V printers)
This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES. Select the other dimension (long edge).
(220V printers)
ORIENTATION= PORTRAIT
PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE
Determine the default orientation of print on the page. Note It is best to set the page orientation from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.)
FORM=60 LINES
5 to 128
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size. Press [-Value+] once to change the setting by increments of 1, or hold down [-Value+] to scroll by increments of 10.
INTERNAL SOFT SLOT 1, 2, or 3
INTERNAL: Internal fonts. SOFT: Permanent soft fonts. SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored in one of
(110V printers) or
64 LINES (220V printers)
PCL FONT SOURCE= INTERNAL
the three DIMM slots.
PCL FONT NUMBER= 0
0 to 999
The printer assigns a number to each font and lists them on the PCL Font List (page 96). The font number appears in the Font # column of the printout.
PCL FONT PITCH= 10.00
0.44 to 99.99
This item might not appear, depending on the font selected. Press [-Value+] once to change setting by increments of .01 for pitch, or hold down [-Value+] to scroll by increments of 1.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-9
Printing Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
PCL FONT POINT SIZE=12.00
4.00 to 999.75
This item might not appear, depending on the font selected. Press [-Value+] once to change setting by increments of .25 for point size, or hold down [-Value+] to scroll by increments of 1.
PC-8
Select any one of several available symbol sets from the printer’s control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is recommended for line draw characters. Order the PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference Documentation Package for symbol set charts or for more information (page 8).
PCL SYMBOL SET= PC-8
many others
COURIER=REGULAR
REGULAR DARK
Select the version of Courier font to use: REGULAR: The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet 4 series printers. DARK: The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet III series printers. Both fonts are not available at the same time.
WIDE A4=NO
NO YES
The Wide A4 setting changes the number of characters that can be printed on a single line of A4 paper. NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line. YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line.
APPEND CR TO LF= NO
NO YES
Select YES to append a carriage return to each line feed encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Some environments, such as UNIX, indicate a new line using only the line feed control code. This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed.
PRINT PS ERRORS= OFF
OFF ON
Select ON to print the PS error page when PS errors occur.
B-10
Control Panel Menus
EN
Configuration Menu Items in this menu affect the printer’s behavior. Configure the printer according to your printing needs. Configuration Menu Item
Values
Explanation
POWERSAVE= 30 MINUTES
OFF 15 MINUTES 30 MINUTES 1 HOUR 2 HOURS 3 HOURS
Set the printer to enter PowerSave after it has been idle for a specified amount of time. Turning PowerSave off is not recommended. The PowerSave feature does the following: • Minimizes the amount of power consumed by the printer when it is idle. • Reduces wear on the printer’s electronic components. (Turns off the display’s backlight.) When you send a print job, press a control panel key, open a paper tray, or open the top cover, the printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode. Note PowerSave turns off the backlight on the display, but the display is still readable.
PERSONALITY= AUTO
AUTO PCL PS
Select the default printer language (personality). Possible values are determined by which valid languages are installed in the printer. Normally you should not change the printer language (the default is AUTO). If you change it to a specific printer language, the printer will not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the printer.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-11
Configuration Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
RESOURCE SAVE= OFF
OFF ON AUTO
Dedicate printer memory to save each language’s permanent resources. (You might need to add memory to the printer in order for this item to appear.) The amount of memory set aside can be different for each installed language. Some languages might have memory set aside for resource saving without requiring all languages to do so. Any time the amount of memory dedicated to a specific language is changed, all languages will lose all saved resources, including any unprocessed print jobs. OFF: No language resource saving is performed, and language-dependent resources, such as fonts and macros, are lost when language or resolution changes. ON: An item will appear for each installed language that allows the user to allocate a particular amount of memory to that language’s resource saving area. (See the items below.) AUTO: The printer automatically determines the amount of memory to use for each installed language’s resource saving area. For more information, see page C-5.
PCL MEMORY= 400K
0K and up (This value depends on the amount of installed memory.)
This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON. Select the amount of memory used
PS MEMORY= 400K
0K and up (This value depends on the amount of installed memory.)
B-12
Control Panel Menus
for saving PCL resources. Printer default is the minimum amount of memory needed to perform resource saving for PCL. Press [-Value+] to change settings by increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100 KB). For more information, see page C-5. This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON. Select the amount of memory used for saving PS resources. Printer default is the minimum amount of memory needed to perform resource saving for PS. Press [-Value+] to change settings by increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100 KB). For more information, see page C-5.
EN
Configuration Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
PAGE PROTECT= AUTO
AUTO ON
This item appears only after a 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX, PRESS GO TO CONTINUE message displays (page 77). Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) attempts to guarantee that all pages will print. If the page does not print, turn PAGE PROTECT to ON. This might increase chances of a 20
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PRESS GO TO CONTINUE message. If this occurs, simplify the print job or install additional memory (page C-1).
CLEARABLE WARNINGS=JOB
JOB ON
Set the amount of time that a clearable warning is displayed on the printer’s control panel. JOB: Warning messages display on the control panel until the end of the job from which they were generated. ON: Warning messages display on the control panel until [Go] is pressed.
AUTO CONTINUE= ON
ON OFF
Determine how the printer reacts to errors. ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message will display, and the printer will go offline for 10 seconds before returning online. OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message will remain on the display and the printer will remain offline until [Go] is pressed. If the printer is on a network, you will probably want to turn AUTO CONTINUE to ON.
TONER LOW= CONTINUE
CONTINUE STOP
Determine how the printer behaves when toner is low. The TONER LOW message will first appear when the toner cartridge is almost out of toner. (About 100 to 300 sheets can still be printed.) CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print while the TONER LOW message is displayed. STOP: The printer will go offline and wait for further action. For more information, see page 56.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-13
Configuration Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
MOPIER MODE= STANDARD
STANDARD ENHANCED OFF
Determine how the mopier functions behave. This item appears only when there is at least 8 MB of memory or an optional hard disk is installed. STANDARD: This option is available if there is either a hard disk installed or a RAM disk configured in memory. This option uses I/O data stored in printer memory for generating multiple original prints. (All copies will print at the same speed as the first copy.) ENHANCED: This option is available if there is a hard disk installed and at least 8 MB of memory. This option uses engine video data for printing multiple original prints and should print all copies after the first at the printer’s maximum speed. OFF: Disables the mopier functions. (The printer will not spool any jobs to the hard disk.) When the mopier mode is changed, any downloaded resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM.
RAM DISK=OFF
OFF ON AUTO
Determine how the RAM disk is configured. This item appears only if there is no optional hard disk installed and the printer has at least 8 MB of memory. OFF: The RAM disk is disabled. ON: The RAM disk is enabled. Configure the amount of memory to be used through the following item: RAM DISK SIZE. Note If the setting is changed from OFF to ON or from OFF to AUTO, the printer will automatically reinitialize when it becomes idle.
RAM DISK SIZE= xxxK
0K and up
Determine the size of the RAM disk. This item appears if RAM DISK=ON or AUTO. Press [-Value+] to change settings by increments of 100. Note This setting cannot be changed if RAM DISK= AUTO. Changing this value will cause the printer to reinitialize when it becomes idle.
B-14
(This value depends on the amount of installed memory.)
Control Panel Menus
EN
Configuration Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
JAM RECOVERY= AUTO
AUTO ON OFF
Determine how the printer behaves when a paper jam occurs. AUTO: The printer automatically selects the best mode for printer jam recovery (usually ON). This is the default setting. ON: The printer automatically reprints pages after a paper jam is cleared. OFF: The printer does not reprint pages following a paper jam. Printing performance might be increased with this setting.
MAINTENANCE MESSAGE=OFF
OFF
This item appears only after the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message displays. OFF: The PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message will be cleared and will not be displayed again until the next maintenance is due. The message should not be turned off unless the printer maintenance has been performed. If the required maintenance is not performed, the printer’s performance will degrade.
SMALL PAPER SPEED=NORMAL
EN
NORMAL SLOW
Select SLOW when alternately printing envelopes or small paper and standard paper sizes. Be sure to return the speed to NORMAL when finished.
Control Panel Menus
B-15
I/O Menu Items in the I/O (input/output) Menu affect the communication between the printer and the computer. I/O Menu Item
Values
Explanation
I/O TIMEOUT=15
5 to 300
Select the I/O timeout period in seconds. (I/O timeout refers to the time, measured in seconds, that the printer waits before ending a print job.) This setting allows you to adjust timeout for best performance. If data from other ports appear in the middle of your print job, increase the timeout value. Press [- Value +] once to change settings by increments of 1, or hold down [- Value +] to scroll by increments of 10.
I/O BUFFER=AUTO
AUTO ON OFF
Allocate memory for I/O buffering. AUTO: The printer automatically reserves memory for I/O buffering. Additional configurations are not required and the I/O BUFFER SIZE menu item does not appear. ON: The I/O BUFFER SIZE item appears (see below). Specify the amount of memory to be used for I/O buffering. OFF: I/O buffering is not performed and the I/O BUFFER SIZE item does not appear. When the I/O buffer setting is changed, any downloaded resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM. For more information, see page C-6.
I/O BUFFER SIZE= 100K
10K and up
This item appears only when I/O BUFFER= ON. Specify the amount of memory for I/O
B-16
Control Panel Menus
buffering. The maximum amount of memory available for I/O buffering is determined by the amount of memory installed in the printer, the languages installed in the printer, and by other memory allocations that must be made. Press [-Value +] to change settings by increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
EN
I/O Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
PARALLEL HIGH SPEED=YES
YES NO
Select the speed at which data is transmitted to the printer. YES: The printer accepts faster parallel communications used for connections with newer computers. NO: The printer accepts slower parallel communications used for connections with older computers.
PARALLEL ADV FUNCTIONS=ON
ON OFF
Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off. The default is set for a bidirectional parallel port (IEEE-1284). This setting allows the printer to send status readback messages to the computer. (Turning the parallel advanced functions on might slow language switching.)
SERIAL PACING= DTR/DSR
DTR/DSR XON/XOFF
Select the type of pacing used. Pacing, or “handshaking” allows the printer to tell the computer when to send information. The printer uses XON/XOFF and DTR/DSR signal protocols rather than ETX/ACK protocol. DTR/DSR: Select this value if your computer requires hardware flow control (most personal computers do). XON/XOFF: Select this value if your computer requires software flow control (a UNIX workstation, for example). The SERIAL ROBUST XON item appears (see below).
SERIAL ROBUST XON=ON
ON OFF
This item appears only when SERIAL PACING=XON/XOFF. Select the method for generating XONs. ON: The printer sends an XON when the printer is online and when sufficient buffer space is available. If the host does not receive data within approximately one second, the printer will transmit additional XONs at one second intervals until the host receives data. OFF: The printer sends one XON when it can accept more data or when it is online. The printer does not send XONs every second while the printer is online and ready for more data.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-17
I/O Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
SERIAL BAUD RATE=9600
300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200
Select the printer’s baud rate (speed at which information is transferred) for communicating from the computer to the printer.
SERIAL DTR POLARITY=HIGH
HIGH LOW
Determine whether pin #8 is high or low when the printer is ready. HIGH: Pin #8 is held high when the printer is ready. LOW: Pin #8 is held low when the printer is ready.
B-18
Control Panel Menus
EN
EIO Menu (4000 N/4000 TN) EIO (enhanced input/output) Menus depend on the particular accessory product installed in an EIO slot of the printer. If the printer contains an HP JetDirect print server EIO card, you can configure basic networking parameters using the EIO Menu. These and other parameters can also be configured through HP JetAdmin.
EIO Menu Item
Values
Explanation
CFG NETWORK=NO
NO YES
NO: The JetDirect Menu is not accessible. YES: The JetDirect Menu appears.
NOVELL=ON
ON OFF
Select whether the IPX/SPX protocol stack (in Novell NetWare networks, for example) is enabled (on) or disabled (off).
DLC/LLC=ON
ON OFF
Select whether the DLC/LLC protocol stack is enabled (on) or disabled (off).
TCP/IP=ON
ON OFF
Select whether the TCP/IP protocol stack is enabled (on) or disabled (off).
ETALK=ON
ON OFF
Select whether the Apple EtherTalk protocol stack is enabled (on) or disabled (off).
CFG NOVELL=NO
NO YES
NO: The IPX/SPX Menu is not accessible. YES: The IPX/SPX Menu appears. In the IPX/SPX Menu, you can specify the frame type parameter used on your network. The default is AUTO, to automatically set and limit the frame type to the one detected. For Ethernet cards, frame type selections include EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, EN_SNAP. For Token Ring cards, frame type selections include TR_8022, TR_SNAP. In the IPX/SPX Menu for Token Ring cards, you can also specify NetWare Source Routing parameters, which include SRC RT=AUTO (default), OFF, SINGLE R, or ALL RT.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-19
EIO Menu (Continued) Item
Values
Explanation
CFG TCP/IP=NO
NO YES
NO: The TCP/IP Menu is not accessible. YES: The TCP/IP Menu appears. In the TCP/IP Menu, you can specify BOOTP=YES for TCP/IP parameters to be automatically loaded from a bootp or DHCP server when the printer is turned on. If you specify BOOTP=NO, you can manually set selected TCP/IP parameters from the control panel. You can manually set each byte of the IP address (IP), Subnet Mask (SM), Syslog Server (LG), and Default Gateway (GW). Also, you can manually set the Timeout time period. Note If no IP address is assigned within the first 5 minutes, the HP JetDirect print server card will assume a default IP address of 192.0.0.192.
CFG ETALK=NO
NO YES
NO: The EtherTalk Menu is not accessible. YES: The EtherTalk Menu appears. In the EtherTalk Menu you can set the AppleTalk phase parameter (ETALK PHASE=1 or 2) for your network.
B-20
Control Panel Menus
EN
Resets Menu Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or printer configuration settings when you select these items. Only reset the printer under the following circumstances:
• You want to restore the printer’s default settings. • Communication between the printer and computer has been interrupted.
• You are using both the serial and parallel I/O ports, and one of the ports is having problems. The items in the Resets Menu will clear all memory in the printer, while [Cancel Job] clears only the current job.
Resets Menu Item
Explanation
RESET MEMORY
This item clears the printer buffer and the active I/O input buffer, and makes the control panel defaults current. The DATA RECEIVED message might display on the control panel. Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS
This item performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory (default) settings. This item also clears the input buffer for the active I/O. The DATA RECEIVED message might display on the printer’s control panel.
RESET ACTIVE I/O CHANNEL
This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output buffers (for the active I/Os only). The DATA RECEIVED message might display on the printer’s control panel.
RESET ALL I/O CHANNELS
This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output buffers for all I/Os.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-21
B-22
Control Panel Menus
EN
C Printer Memory and Expansion Overview The printer has three dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slots for upgrading with:
• More printer memory. DIMMs are available in 4, 8, 16, and 32 MB, • • • Note
for a maximum of 100 MB. Flash memory DIMMs, available in 2 and 4 MB. Unlike standard printer memory, flash DIMMs can be used to permanently store downloaded items in the printer, even when the printer is off. DIMM-based accessory fonts, macros, and patterns. Other DIMM-based printer languages and printer options.
Single in-line memory modules (SIMMs) used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the printer. You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often print complex graphics or PS documents, print with the optional duplexer, use many downloaded fonts, or print at ProRes 1200. The printer has two enhanced input/output (EIO) slots for expanding the printer’s capabilities with:
• A network card. • A mass storage device, such as a hard disk. For ordering information, see page 7. To find out how much memory is installed in the printer, or to find out what is installed in the EIO slots, print a configuration page (page 94).
EN
Printer Memory and Expansion
C-1
Installing Memory Caution
Static electricity can damage dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs). When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM’s antistatic package, then touch bare metal on the printer. If you have not already done so, print a configuration page to find out how much memory is installed in the printer before adding more memory (page 94). 1 Turn the printer off. Rotate the printer for access to its right side. Unplug the power cord and disconnect any cables. 2 Grasp the cover (as illustrated) and pull it firmly toward the rear of the printer until it stops. 3 Remove the cover from the printer. 4 Loosen the captive screw holding the DIMM access door with a Phillips #2 screwdriver. Open the door. 5 Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package. Hold the DIMM with fingers against the side edges and thumbs against the back edge. Align the notches on the DIMM with the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open, or outward.)
C-2
Printer Memory and Expansion
EN
6 Press the DIMM straight into the slot (press firmly). Make sure the locks on each side of the DIMM snap inward into place. (To remove a DIMM, the locks must be released.) 7 Close the DIMM access door and tighten the screw. 8 Set the bottom of the cover onto the printer. Make sure the bottom tabs on the cover fit into the corresponding slots in the printer. Rotate the cover up towards the printer. 9 Slide the cover toward the front of the printer until it clicks into place. Reattach any interface cables and the power cord, then turn the printer on and test the DIMM. (Go to page C-4.)
EN
Printer Memory and Expansion
C-3
Checking Memory Installation Follow this procedure to verify that DIMMs are installed correctly: 1 Check that the printer’s control panel displays READY when the printer is turned on. If an error message appears, a DIMM might have been incorrectly installed. Check the printer messages (page 72). 2 Print a new configuration page (page 94). 3 Check the memory section on the configuration page and compare it to the configuration page printed before the DIMM installation. If the amount of memory has not increased, the DIMM might not be installed correctly (repeat the installation procedure) or the DIMM might be defective (try a new DIMM). Note
C-4
If you installed a printer language (personality), check the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration page. This area should list the new printer language.
Printer Memory and Expansion
EN
Adjusting Memory Settings Resource Saving Resource Saving allows the printer to keep downloaded resources (permanent downloaded fonts, macros, or patterns) in memory when the printer language or resolution is changed. If you do not have an optional hard disk or flash DIMM for storing downloaded resources, you might want to change the amount of memory allocated to each language when downloading an unusually large number of fonts, or if the printer is in a shared environment. The minimum amount of memory that can be allocated to Resource Saving is 400 KB each for PCL and PS. To determine how much memory to allocate to a language: 1 From the Configuration Menu, set RESOURCE SAVE=ON (page B-12). You might need to add memory to the printer in order for this option to appear in the printer’s control panel. 2 Also from the Configuration Menu, choose either PCL MEMORY or PS MEMORY and change the setting to the highest value displayed. This amount will vary depending upon how much memory is installed in the printer. 3 Using a software application, download all the fonts you want to use in the selected language. 4 Print a configuration page (page 94). The amount of memory used by the fonts is listed next to the language. Round this figure up to the nearest 100 KB. (For example, if 475 KB are shown, 500 KB should be reserved.) 5 From the Configuration Menu, set PCL MEMORY or PS MEMORY to the value determined in step 4. 6 Repeat step 3. (You must download all fonts again. See the note below.) Note
EN
When you change the Resource Saving setting, all downloaded resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM.
Printer Memory and Expansion
C-5
I/O Buffering To allow the computer to continue working without waiting for the print job to finish queuing, the printer uses a portion of its memory (an I/O buffer) to hold jobs in progress. (If I/O buffering is off, no memory is reserved for this function.) In most cases, it is best to let the printer automatically reserve memory for I/O buffering. (For each megabyte of memory added to the printer, 100 kilobytes are reserved.) To speed network printing, you might want to increase the amount of memory reserved for I/O buffering. To change the I/O Buffer setting: 1 From the I/O Menu, set I/O BUFFER=ON (page B-16). 2 Also from the I/O Menu, set I/O SIZE to the desired value. Note
C-6
When you change the I/O Buffer setting, all downloaded resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM.
Printer Memory and Expansion
EN
Installing EIO Cards/Mass Storage Turn off the printer before installing the EIO card or mass storage device. See Figure C-1 for orientation and location of the EIO card or optional mass storage device, such as a hard disk. Use HP JetAdmin to delete files from a mass storage device. Use HP FontSmart to manage fonts on a mass storage device. For more information, see the printer software help.
Figure C-1
EN
Installing EIO Cards or Mass Storage Devices
Printer Memory and Expansion
C-7
C-8
Printer Memory and Expansion
EN
D Printer Commands Overview Most software applications do not require you to enter printer commands. See your computer and software documentation to find the method for entering printer commands, if needed. PCL
PCL printer commands tell the printer which tasks to perform or which fonts to use. This appendix provides a quick reference for users who are already familiar with PCL command structure.
• The PCL 5e printer commands are backward-compatible with •
previous versions of PCL. The PCL 6 printer commands take full advantage of the printer’s features.
HP-GL/2
The printer has the ability to print vector graphics using the HP-GL/2 graphics language. Printing in the HP-GL/2 language requires that the printer leave PCL language and enter HP-GL/2 mode, which can be done by sending the printer PCL code. Some software applications switch languages through their drivers.
PJL
HP’s Printer Job Language (PJL) provides control above PCL and other printer languages. The four major functions provided by PJL are: printer language switching, job separation, printer configuration, and status readback from the printer. PJL commands may be used to change printer default settings.
Note
The table at the end of this appendix contains commonly used PCL 5e commands (page D-5). For a complete listing and explanation of how to use PCL, HP-GL/2, and PJL commands, order the PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference Documentation Package (page 8). To receive more information about printer commands via fax, call HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Service Technology) and request an index for HP LaserJet printers. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
EN
Printer Commands
D-1
Understanding PCL Printer Command Syntax Before using printer commands, compare these characters: Lowercase l:
l
Uppercase O:
O
Number one:
1
Number 0:
0
Many printer commands use the lowercase letter l (l) and the number one (1), or the uppercase letter O (O) and the number zero (0). These characters may not appear on your screen as shown here. You must use the exact character and case specified for PCL printer commands. Figure D-1 displays the elements of a typical printer command (in this instance, a command for page orientation).
Escape character (begins escape sequence)
Value field (contains both alpha and numeric characters)
Category of command
Figure D-1
D-2
Printer Commands
Uppercase letter (terminates escape sequence)
Printer Command Elements
EN
Combining Escape Sequences Escape sequences may be combined into one escape sequence string. There are three important rules to follow when combining code: 1 The first two characters after the ? character (the parameterized and group characters, see Figure D-1) must be the same in all of the commands to be combined. 2 When combining escape sequences, change the uppercase (termination) character in each individual escape sequence to lower case. 3 The final character of the combined escape sequence must be uppercase. The following is an example of an escape sequence string that would be sent to the printer to select legal paper, landscape orientation, and 8 lines per inch: ?&l3A?&l1O?&l8D The following escape sequence sends the same printer commands by combining them into a shorter sequence: ?&l3a1o8D
Entering Escape Characters Printer commands always begin with the escape character (?). The following table shows how the escape character can be entered from various DOS software applications. DOS Software Application
Entry
What Appears
Lotus 1-2-3 and Symphony
Type \027
027
Microsoft Word for DOS
Hold down Alt and type 027 on the numeric keypad
←
WordPerfect for DOS
Type <27>
<27>
MS-DOS Edit
Hold down Ctrl-P, and press Esc
←
MS-DOS Edlin
Hold down Ctrl-V, and press [
^[
dBase
?? CHR(27)+"command"
?? CHR(27)+" "
EN
Printer Commands
D-3
Selecting PCL Fonts PCL printer commands for selecting fonts can be found on the PCL Font List (page 96). A sample section is shown below. Notice the two variable boxes for symbol set and point size.
These variables must be filled in or the printer will use defaults. For example, if you want a symbol set that contains line-draw characters, select the 10U (PC-8) or 12U (PC-850) symbol set. Other common symbol set codes are listed in the table on page D-7. Note
Fonts are either “fixed” or “proportional” in spacing. The printer contains both fixed fonts (Courier, Letter Gothic, and Lineprinter) and proportional fonts (CG Times, Arial, Times New Roman, and others). Fixed-spaced fonts are generally used in applications such as spreadsheets and databases, where it is important for columns to line up vertically. Proportional-spaced fonts are generally used in text and word processing applications.
D-4
Printer Commands
EN
Common PCL Printer Commands
Page Control Commands
Job Control Commands
Common PCL Printer Commands
EN
Function
Command
Options (#)
Reset
?E
n/a
Number of Copies
?&l#X
1 to 999
2-sided/1-sided printing
?&l#S
0 = Simplex (1-sided) printing 1 = Duplex (2-sided) with long edge binding 2 = Duplex (2-sided) with short edge binding
Paper Source
?&l#H
0 = prints or ejects current page 1 = Tray 2 2 = manual feed, paper 3 = manual feed, envelope 4 = Tray 1 5 = Tray 3 6 = Envelope Feeder 7 = auto select 8 = Tray 4 20-69 = external trays
Paper size
?&l#A
1 = Executive 2 = Letter 3 = Legal 25 = A5 26 = A4 45 = B5-JIS 80 = Monarch 81 = Commercial 10 90 = DL 91 = International C5 100 = B5 101 = Custom
Paper Type
?&n#
5WdBond = Bond 6WdPlain = Plain 6WdColor = Color 7WdLabels = Labels 9WdRecycled = Recycled 11WdLetterhead = Letterhead 10WdCardstock = Cardstock 11WdPrepunched = Prepunched 11WdPreprinted = Preprinted 13WdTransparency = Transparency #WdCustompapertype = Custom1
Orientation
?&l#O
0 = Portrait 1 = Landscape 2 = Reverse Portrait 3 = Reverse Landscape
Printer Commands
D-5
Command
Options (#)
Top Margin
?&l#E
# = number of lines
Text Length (bottom margin)
?&l#F
# = number of lines from top margin
Left Margin
?&a#L
# = column number
Right Margin
?&a#M
# = column number from left margin
Horizontal Motion Index
?&k#H
1/120-inch increments (compresses print horizontally)
Vertical Motion Index
?&l#C
1/48-inch increments (compresses print vertically)
Line Spacing
?&l#D
# = lines per inch (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 16, 24, 48)
Perforation Skip
?&l#L
0 = disable 1 = enable
Vertical Position (Rows)
?&a#R
# = row number
Vertical Position (Dots)
?*p#Y
# = dot number (300 dots = 1 inch)
Vertical Position (Decipoints)
?&a#V
# = decipoint number (720 decipoints = 1 inch)
Horizontal Position (Columns)
?&a#C
# = column number
Horizontal Position (Dots)
?*p#X
# = dot number (300 dots = 1 inch)
Horizontal Position (Decipoints)
?&a#H
# = decipoint number (720 decipoints = 1 inch)
Programming Hints
End of Line Wrap
?&s#C
0 = Enable 1 = Disable
Display Functions On
?Y
n/a
Display Functions Off
?Z
n/a
Enter PCL Mode
?%#A
0 = Use previous PCL cursor position 1 = Use current HP-GL/2 pen position
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode
?%#B
0 = Use previous HP-GL/2 pen position 1 = Use current PCL cursor position
Cursor Positioning
Page Control Commands (Continued)
Function
Language Selection
Common PCL Printer Commands (Continued)
D-6
Printer Commands
EN
Font Selection
Common PCL Printer Commands (Continued) Function
Command
Options (#)
Symbol Sets2
?(#
8U = HP Roman-8 Symbol Set 10U = IBM Layout (PC-8) (code page 437) Default Symbol Set 12U = IBM Layout for Europe (PC-850) (code page 850) 8M = Math-8 19U = Windows 3.1 Latin 1 9E = Windows 3.1 Latin 2 (commonly used in Eastern Europe) 5T = Windows 3.1 Latin 5 (commonly used in Turkey) 579L = Wingdings Font
Primary Spacing
?(s#P
0 = fixed 1 = proportional
Primary Pitch
?(s#H
# = characters/inch
Set Pitch Mode3
?&k#S
0 = 10 4 = 12 (elite) 2 = 16.5 - 16.7 (compressed)
Primary Height
?(s#V
# = points
Primary Style2
?(s#S
0 = upright (solid) 1 = italic 4 = condensed 5 = condensed italic
Primary Stroke Wt.2
?(s#B
0 = medium (book or text) 1 = semi bold 3 = bold 4 = extra bold
Typeface2
?(s#T
Print a PCL font list to view the command for each internal font (page 96).
1
For custom paper, replace “Custompapertype” with the name of the paper, and replace the “#” with the number of characters in the name, plus 1.
2
Order the PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference Documentation Package for symbol set charts or for more information (page 8).
3
The preferred method is to use the primary pitch command.
EN
Printer Commands
D-7
D-8
Printer Commands
EN
E Regulatory Information FCC Regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase separation between equipment and receiver. • Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to • Note
which the receiver is located. Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
EN
Regulatory Information
E-1
Environmental Product Stewardship Protecting the Environment Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally-sound manner. The printer has been designed to minimize impacts on the environment. The printer design eliminates: Ozone Production
The printer uses charging rollers in the electrophotographic process and therefore generates no appreciable ozone gas (03).
CFC Usage
Class I U.S. Clean Air Act stratospheric ozone-depleting chemicals (chlorofluorocarbons [CFCs], for example) have been eliminated from the manufacturing of the printer and packaging.
The printer design reduces: Energy Consumption
Energy usage drops from 330 watts (W) during printing to as little as 16 W while in low-power (PowerSave) mode. This saves energy without affecting the high performance of the printer. This product qualifies for the E NERGY STAR Program (U.S. and Japan). ENERGY STAR is a voluntary program established to encourage the development of energy-efficient office products. The ENERGY STAR name is a registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
Toner Consumption
EconoMode uses about 50% less toner, thereby extending the life of the toner cartridge.
Paper use
The printer’s optional duplexing feature, which provides for two-sided printing, reduces paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
E-2
Regulatory Information
EN
The design of the printer facilitates the recycling of: Plastics
Europe Only: Plastic parts have material identification markings, according to international standards, which enhance the ability to identify plastics for proper disposition at the end of the printer’s life. The plastics used in the printer housing and chassis are technically recyclable. All Other Countries: Plastic parts have material identification markings, according to international standards, which enhance the ability to identify plastics for proper disposition at the end of the printer’s life.
HP Toner Cartridges/ Photoconductive Drum
EN
In many countries, the toner cartridge/drum can be returned to HP at the end of its useful life. A prepaid shipping label and instructions on how to return the toner cartridge/drum are included with the replacement toner cartridge/drum. If your country is not listed in the replacement’s brochure, call your local HP Sales and Service Office for further instructions. (See page 103 or the HP support pages at the front of this user’s guide.) HP Cartridge Recycling Program Information Since 1990, the HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge Recycling Program has collected more than twelve million cartridges that otherwise would have been discarded into landfills or similar facilities. This rapidly growing program returns used cartridges to the manufacturing process, thus conserving a variety of resources. Once a cartridge is returned through the prepaid return program, it is disassembled. The reusable components and the plastic housing are cleaned and inspected for quality conformance. After passing strict inspection procedures, materials such as nuts, screws, and clips are reclaimed and used to produce new cartridges. Remaining materials, like the photoconductive drum, are melted down and used as raw materials for a variety of other products. By the weight of the materials returned, over 95% are recycled. All HP LaserJet toner cartridges are shipped in recycled boxes with the entire box being recyclable through the returns program. Styrofoam end caps, which were used to support HP LaserJet toner cartridges during shipping, have been replaced with molded end caps made from 100% post-consumer paper products. For more information in the U.S., call (1) (800) LASERJET [(1) (800) 527-3753]. International customers can call their local HP Sales and Service Office for further information regarding the HP Toner Cartridge Recycling Program (page 103).
Regulatory Information
E-3
The diagram below represents how HP LaserJet toner cartridges are recycled:
Printer and Parts
U.S. Only: HP’s Hardware Recycling Organization will accept the printer and other HP products when you have no further use for them. HP disposes of these products in an environmentally-sound manner. Many of the functional parts are recovered, tested, and reused as fully warrantied service parts. Used parts are not placed into new product manufacturing. The remainder of the product parts which are not functional are recycled if possible. For this service, call (1) (800) 535-7933. Europe Only: Design for recycling has been incorporated into the printer and its accessories. The number of materials has been kept to a minimum while ensuring proper functionality and high product reliability. Dissimilar materials have been designed to separate easily. Fasteners and other connections are easy to locate, access, and remove with common tools. High priority parts have been designed to be accessed quickly for efficient disassembly and repair. Plastic parts have been primarily designed in two colors to enhance recycling options. A few small parts are colored specifically to highlight customer access points. HP disposes of returned products in an environmentally sound manner. Many of the functional parts are recovered, tested, and reused as fully-warrantied service parts. Used parts are not placed into new product manufacturing. The remainder of the product parts are recycled, if possible. For product take-back information, contact your local HP Sales and Service Office (page 103).
E-4
Regulatory Information
EN
Paper
Europe Only: The printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide. The printer is suited for the use of recycled paper according to DIN 19 309. All Other Countries: The printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide.
EN
Regulatory Information
E-5
To ensure printer longevity, HP provides the following: Extended Warranty
HP SupportPack covers the printer and all HP-supplied internal components. It is a three-year warranty from the date of purchase. HP SupportPack must be purchased by the customer within 30 days of product purchase. Information on HP SupportPack is available by calling your local HP FIRST number. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
Spare Parts and Consumables Availability
Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be made available for at least five years after production has stopped.
Toner Material Safety Data Sheet The Toner Material Safety Data Sheet can be obtained by calling your local HP FIRST number. (See the HP Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
E-6
Regulatory Information
EN
Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN45014 Manufacturer's Name:
Hewlett-Packard Company
Manufacturer's Address:
11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product Product Name:
HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, 4000 N, 4000 TN
Model Numbers:
C4118A, C4119A, C4120A, C4121A
Product Options:
ALL
conforms to the following Product Specifications: Safety:
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3 / EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3
EMC:
IEC 825-1:1993 / EN 60825-1:1994 Class 1 (Laser/LED) 1 CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class B ) EN 50082-1:1992 IEC 801-2:1991 / prEN 55024-2:1992 -
4 kV CD, 8 kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984 / prEN 55024-3:1991 -
3 V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -
0.5 kV Signal Lines 1.0 kV Power Lines
IEC 1000-3-2:1995 / EN61000-3-2:1995 IEC 1000-3-3:1994 / EN61000-3.3:1995 2 1 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B ) / ICES-003, Issue 2 / VCCI-2 ) 1 AS / NZS 3548:1992 / CISPR 22:1993 Class B )
Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CE-marking accordingly: • the EMC directive 89/336/EEC • the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC 1. The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 2. This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
January 15, 1997
For Compliance Information ONLY, contact:
EN
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
European Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 130, D-71034 Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
Regulatory Information
E-7
Safety Statements Laser Safety Statement The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user’s guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC Regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements. <>.>>
VCCI Statement (Japan)
E-8
Regulatory Information
EN
Laser Statement for Finland LASERTURVALLISUUS LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, 4000 N, 4000 TN -laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1993) mukaisesti. VAROITUS ! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING ! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. HUOLTO HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, 4000 N, 4000 TN -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 770-795 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser
E-9
Regulatory Information
EN
E-10
Regulatory Information
EN
Glossary adjustable tray
A paper tray that is able to adapt to more than one size of media. All trays used in the printer are adjustable.
DIMM (dual in-line memory module)
A circuit board that holds extra memory chips for the printer.
drag-and-drop
The ability to execute a function graphically without typing a command. For example, in the Windows 95 Explorer, you can copy or move a file by “dragging” it from one folder and “dropping” it into another.
duplex printing accessory (also called “duplexer”)
An optional accessory used for automatically printing on both sides of a sheet of paper.
enhanced input/output (EIO)
Printer accessory slots used for transferring data between the computer and printer. Modular I/O (MIO) accessories for older printers and the newer EIO technology are not compatible.
media
Any material to be printed, including envelopes, labels, transparencies, and all types of paper. (Paper types include letterhead, prepunched, recycled, bond, color stock, card stock, and preprinted.)
Mopier
An HP LaserJet printer equipped to deliver multiple original prints (or generate copies of a print job).
PCL
HP’s printer control language.
PostScript Emulation
See PS.
preprinted
Having pre-designed forms already printed on the paper.
printer driver
Program files that allow a software application to communicate with the printer and use its features.
printer driver help
On-screen instructions regarding the use of the printer driver.
EN
Glossary
1
printer software
Any or all of the software shipped with the printer. The printer is packaged with a compact disc containing the software needed to access all of the printer’s features. If the printer has been correctly set up, the appropriate software is already installed.
printer software help
On-screen instructions regarding the use of the printer software. Help screens which can be activated from the Help button (or a question mark symbol) in the printer software.
PS
HP’s PostScript Level 2 Emulation (or Level 1 Emulation for Windows 3.1x). A printer language provided with the printer.
size
In this user’s guide, paper size refers to the dimensions of a sheet of paper or other print media.
software application
A computer program or package developed for sale to the general public.
source
In this user’s guide, paper source refers to the paper tray where paper or other print media is loaded.
type
In this user’s guide, paper type refers to the unique properties of paper or other print media, such as rough, transparency, labels, etc.
universal tray
A paper tray that can be adjusted for many paper sizes.
watermark
Text printed on the background of a page.
2
Glossary
EN
Numerics 1200 dpi B-6 250-sheet tray loading 28 ordering 6 paper specifications A-3 2-sided printing guidelines 32 with duplex printing accessory 31–34 2-up printing 49 300 dpi B-6 3-hole punched paper duplexing 33 orientation 35–36 500-sheet tray (4000/4000 N) loading 27 locating 4 ordering 6 paper orientation 36 paper specifications A-4 500-sheet tray (optional) loading 29 locating 5 ordering 6 paper orientation 36 paper specifications A-4 600 dpi B-6
pages Auto Continue setting B-13
B Background Printing setting 91 backlight, turning off B-11 Bad Duplexer Connection message 72 Bad OPT Tray Connection message 72 Bad Serial Transmission message 78 basic printing tasks 23 baud rate B-18 benefits, printer 2 bidirectional parallel communication setting B-17 Binding option for duplex printing 32 Binding setting B-4 bit transmission A-16 blank configuration page, troubleshooting 85 blank display, troubleshooting 84 both sides, printing with duplex accessory 31–34 buffer, changing size C-6
A
C
Access Denied Menus Locked message 11, 72 accessing printer status 17 Windows printer driver 15 accessories locating 5 ordering 6–8 types of 5 verifying installation 94–95 warranty 97–98 acoustic emissions, specifications A-15 adapters ordering 7 pin connections A-17 additional drivers, obtaining 12 adhesive on envelopes, printing with A-10 adjusting memory settings C-5 advanced printing tasks 23, 48–53 allocating memory to printer language C-5 Append CR To LF setting B-10 Attention light 9 authorized dealers, see front
cables, serial ordering 7 pin outs A-18 specifications A-16–A-18 troubleshooting 86, 89 types of A-17 Canadian DOC regulations E-8 Cancel Job key 10, B-21 Cannot Duplex Rear Bin Open message 72 capacity, paper for 250-sheet tray A-3 500-sheet tray A-4 duplex printing accessory A-5 envelope feeder A-5 optional 500-sheet tray A-4 Tray 1 A-3 Tray 2 (4000/4000 N) A-4 Trays 2 and 3 (4000 T/4000 TN) A-3 card stock A-12 see also custom-size paper CFG ETalk setting B-20 CFG Network setting B-19 CFG Novell setting B-19 CFG TCP/IP setting B-20 changing control panel setting 11 I/O buffer size C-6 paper type and size 52–53
EN
characters escape D-3 misformed 83 Check Input Device message 73 checking installed memory C-4 printer’s configuration 93–96 CFC usage E-2 Chooser, troubleshooting 90 choosing driver 16 Chosen Language Not Available message 73 cleaning paper path 61 printer 59–60 cleaning page message B-7 using 61 Clearable Warnings setting B-13 clearing paper jams 64–71 persistent messages 72 combining escape sequences D-3 commands, printer D-1–D-7 PCL D-5–D-7 selecting PCL fonts D-4 syntax D-2–D-3 compact disc 12 Configuration Menu 72, B-11– B-15 configuration page printing 94–95, B-2 sample 95 troubleshooting 85 configurations checking printer’s 93–96 printer 3 printer’s current B-1 Configure Custom Paper message 47 Configure Custom Paper setting B-8 Configure Fuser Mode Menu setting B-4 configuring duplex printing accessory 31 duplexing print options 34 envelope feeder 39 printer driver 15 connectors, locating 4 consumables see also supplies availability E-5 consumption, power A-14 continue printing with low toner 57–58 control panel changing settings 11 current settings, printing 11
1
keys 10 layout 9 lights 9 locating 4 locking 19 menus B-1–B-21 messages 72–81 overriding settings 11 printing menu map 11, 93 troubleshooting 84 converting paper weights A-7 Copies setting B-8 Courier setting B-10 creases, troubleshooting 83 Create Cleaning Page message 61 Create Cleaning Page setting B-7 curling paper, troubleshooting 83, A-6 current printer settings printing 11 verifying 94–96 Custom Install option installing HP software 15 installing preferences 13 customer support worldwide, see front pages customizing Tray 1 operation 50–51 custom-size paper card stock, types of A-11 guidelines for printing 46 margins 46 orientation 35–36 paper specifications A-4 printing 25, 45–47 setting paper size 46–47
D dark printing, setting toner density B-7 Data light 9 data, transmitting speed B-17 dealers, HP authorized, see front pages Declaration of Conformity E-7 default settings, restoring B-21 default values B-1 deleting fonts 17 diagnostics, printer 20 dimensions, paper for 250-sheet tray A-3 500-sheet tray A-4 duplex printing accessory A-5 envelope feeder A-5 optional 500-sheet tray A-4 Tray 1 A-3 Tray 2 (4000/4000 N) A-4 Trays 2 and 3 (4000 T/4000 TN) A-3
2
dimensions, printer’s A-13 DIMMs accessories 5 checking memory installation C-4 location for additional memory 4 ordering 7 upgrading memory C-1 Disk Device Failure message 73 Disk File Operation Failed message 73 Disk File System Is Full message 73 Disk Is Write Protected message 73 display control panel 9 turning off backlight B-11 DLC/LLO setting B-19 Do Not Power Off message 74 documentation, ordering 8 DOS, entering escape characters D-3 double-side-seam envelopes, printing with A-10 draft-quality printing B-7 drivers, printer 13–16 accessing Windows 15 configuring 15 help software 16 included with printer 13 installation options 13 installing 13 selecting 14, 16 switching languages 16 dropouts, troubleshooting 83, A-6 duplex printing accessory clearing paper jams 69–70 locating 5 ordering 6 paper orientation 33 paper specifications A-5 print layout options 34 printing with 31–34 troubleshooting 89 Duplex setting 32, B-4 duplexer, see duplex printing accessory duplexing guidelines 32 print layout options 34 with optional duplex printing accessory 31–34
E EconoMode setting B-7 EDO DIMMs, ordering 7 EIO cards installing C-7
locating C-7 ordering 7 EIO Menu B-19–B-20 EIO x Bad Transmission message 79 EIO x Buffer Overflow message 77 electrical specifications A-14 emissions, acoustic A-15 Energy Star E-2 Env Feeder Load message 73 envelope feeder clearing paper jams 66 envelope specifications A-9 inserting 40 loading 41 locating components of 39 ordering 6 paper specifications A-5 printing with 39–41 removing 40 sizes supported 39 Envelope Feeder Size setting B-3 Envelope Feeder Type setting B-3 envelopes clearing repeated jams 71 double-side-seams, printing with A-10 guidelines 37 margins A-11 printing 25 printing from Tray 1 38 printing margins 37 printing with adhesive strips or flaps A-10 problems with 37 quality A-9 sizes 39 specifications A-9 storing A-11 wrinkled, correcting 37, A-9 environmental product stewardship E-2–E-7 environmental specifications A-14–A-15 equivalent weights to US paper A-7 error log, see event log error messages 72–81 clearing repeated messages 72 escape characters entering in DOS D-3 examples D-2 escape sequences combining D-3 information on PCL font list 96
EN
ETalk setting B-19 event log B-2 event log, displayed on configuration page 95 example configuration page 95 expandable memory, specifications A-15 expanding memory C-2–C-4 extended warranty E-5
F face-down output bin 24 face-up output bin 25 faded print, troubleshooting 83 FastRes 1200 B-6 FCC regulations E-1 features, printer 2 feeding paper, problems with 88, A-6 file directory B-2 Finland’s laser statement E-9 500-sheet tray (4000/4000 N) loading 27 locating 4 ordering 6 paper orientation 36 paper specifications A-4 500-sheet tray (optional) loading 29 locating 5 ordering 6 paper orientation 36 paper specifications A-4 fixed-spaced fonts D-4 flaps on envelopes, printing with A-10 Flash Device Failure message 73 flash DIMMs accessory 5 locating 4 ordering 7 printing PCL font list 96 resident fonts 96 Flash File Operation Failed message 74 Flash File System Is Full message 74 Flash Is Write Protected message 74 flash memory, upgrading C-1 flowchart, troubleshooting for Macintosh 90–91 printer errors 84–91 fonts accessories for 5 fixed-spaced D-4 information about 96 installing and deleting 17 internal 96 locating additional memory 4 ordering DIMMs 7
EN
printing list of 96 proportional-spaced D-4 selecting PCL D-4 soft 96 troubleshooting 91 FontSmart, see HP FontSmart format problems, troubleshooting 87–88 frequent paper jams, clearing 71 Fuser Error message 79
G garbled print, troubleshooting 87, 88 Go key 10 graphics, vector D-1 gray background, troubleshooting 83, A-6 guidelines card stock A-12 custom-size paper 46 duplexing 32 envelopes 37 labels 42, 43 paper A-6 paper quality A-2 printing both sides 32 repacking printer 99 transparencies 44
H hard disk installing C-7 ordering 7 printing font list 96 hardware warranty 97–98 heavy paper printing 25, 45–47 problems with A-11 specifications A-11 weight specifications A-11 Help button, in printer driver 16 help screens 16 help, online 16 HP Bulletin Board Service, see front pages HP FIRST, see front pages HP FontSmart installing 17 managing fonts C-7 HP JetAdmin 52–53 for networking printers 20 installing 12 networks compatible with 20 HP JetDirect print server card configuring network parameters B-19 installing C-7 ordering 7
HP JetSend, installing 18 HP JobMonitor, accessing 17 HP LaserJet 4000 series printer configurations 3 HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge Recycling Program E-3 HP Maintenance Agreement 98 HP Software License Term 102 HP Support Pack 98 HP support, see front pages HP ToolBox, accessing 17 HP worldwide sales and service offices 103–105 HP-GL/2 commands D-1 HP-UX 20
I I/O Buffer message C-6 I/O Buffer setting B-16 I/O Buffer Size setting B-16 I/O buffer, changing memory buffer size C-6 I/O cards installing C-7 locating 4 ordering 7 I/O Menu B-16–B-18 I/O Size message C-6 I/O Timeout setting B-16 incorrect fonts 87, 88, 91 index cards A-12 see also custom-size paper Information Menu B-2 information pages, for troubleshooting 93–95 Input Device Condition message 74 Input Device Failure message 81 input tray areas clearing jams from envelope feeder 66 clearing paper jams 65, 65– 66 troubleshooting 89 inserting envelope feeder 40 Install Tray message 74 installed personalities and options, displayed on configuration page 95 installing drivers 13 EIO cards C-7 fonts 17 HP FontSmart 17 HP JetAdmin 12 HP JetSend 18 mass storage devices C-7 printer memory C-2–C-4 toner cartridges 56 Insufficient Memory message
3
77 interface accessories, ordering 7 interface connections, troubleshooting 86 internal fonts 96, B-9 Item key 10
Loading Program message 74 locating paper jams 64 locking control panel 19 locking out paper trays 52 loose toner, troubleshooting 83, A-6
J
Macintosh network cable kit, ordering 7 PPDs 13 printer drivers 13, 19 printing problems 90–91 selecting alternate PPD 92 serial cable, ordering 7 software for 19 troubleshooting flowchart 90–91 maintaining the printer 55–61 Maintenance setting B-15 Manual Feed setting B-4 Manually Feed message 74 manually feeding paper 51 manuals, ordering 8 margins custom-size paper 46 envelopes 37, A-11 mass storage devices installing C-7 locating C-7 material safety data sheet E-6 maximum paper size custom-size paper 45 envelopes A-5, A-9 Tray 1 A-3 maximum paper sizes 500-sheet tray (optional) A-4 Trays 2 and 3 (4000 T/4000 TN) A-3 media, see paper memory allocated to languages C-5 changing I/O buffer size C-6 changing resource saving C-5 checking installation C-4 dedicating to printer languages B-12 flash DIMMs, upgrading C-1 information on configuration page 95 installation location 4 installing C-2–C-4 installing mass storage device C-7 ordering 7 upgrading printer’s C-1 Memory Full Stored Data Lost message 74 Memory Settings Changed message 75 Memory Shortage Job Cleared
Jam Recovery setting B-15 Japan’s VCCI statement E-8 JetAdmin, see HP JetAdmin JetSend, see HP JetSend Job Cancel key, see Cancel Job key JobMonitor, see HP JobMonitor
K keys, control panel 10
L labels clearing repeated jams 71 guidelines 42, 43 printing 25, 42, 43 quality A-8 specifications A-8 languages allocating memory to C-5 correcting 84 dedicating memory to B-12 selecting default B-11 switching 16 laser safety statement E-8 laser statement for Finland E-9 LaserJet paper, ordering 6 LaserJet Utility, see HP LaserJet Utility LaserWriter printer driver 19 latest drivers, obtaining 12 layout options duplexing 34 printing multiple pages on one sheet 49 letterhead paper duplexing 33 orientation 35–36 license for software 102 light paper, printing with 25 light printing setting toner density B-7 troubleshooting 83 lights control panel 9 turning off B-11 lines, troubleshooting 83 loading envelope feeder 41 envelopes in Tray 1 38 paper trays 26–30
4
M
message 75 Memory Shortage Page Simplified message 75 Menu key 10 menu map B-2 menu map, printing 11, 93 menu tree, see menu map menus, control panel B-1– B-21 messages, printer 72–81 MEt B-13 Minimum Install option, installing driver 13 minimum paper size custom-size paper 45 envelopes A-5, A-9 Tray 1 A-3 minimum paper sizes 500-sheet tray (optional) A-4 Trays 2 and 3 (4000 T/4000 TN) A-3 misformed characters, troubleshooting 83 model number, locating 4 Mopier Mode setting B-14 MS Windows 3.1, 95, or NT help 16 network software 20 printer drivers 13 software 15–17 multi-purpose paper, ordering 6 multi-purpose tray, see Tray 1
N networks installing HP JetAdmin 20 locating memory 4 ordering cards 7 ports, locating 4 software for 12, 20 troubleshooting cables 86 troubleshooting Macintosh 90 troubleshooting print problems 86 no jobs print, troubleshooting 86 Novell NetWare 20 Novell setting B-19 n-up printing 49 NVRAM Error Check Settings message 81 NVRAM Full Check Settings message 81
O Offline message 75 online services, see front
EN
pages on-site warranty 97–98 operating temperature A-15 optional 500-sheet tray loading 29 locating 5, 6 paper orientation 36 paper specifications A-4 optional accessories troubleshooting 89 verifying installation 94–95 warranty 97–98 optional duplex printing accessory clearing paper jams 69–70 locating 5 paper orientation 33 paper specifications A-5 print layout options 34 printing with 31–34 troubleshooting 89 optional envelope feeder clearing paper jams 66 inserting 40 loading 41 locating 5 printing with 39–41 removing 40 optional paper tray loading 29 printing card stock 45–47 Orientation setting B-9 orientation, paper 33 special types 35–36 OS/2 printer drivers 14 output areas, clearing paper jams 68 output bin 24–25 output locations, troubleshooting 89 Override A4 With Letter setting B-4 overriding printer settings 15 ozone production E-2
P Page Protect setting B-13 page skew, troubleshooting 83 Page Too Complex message 77 paper card stock specifications A-11 changing type and size 52– 53 clearing jams 64–71 converting paper weights A-7 creases, correcting A-6 curl, troubleshooting A-6 custom sizes, printing guidelines 46
EN
guidelines for A-6 heavy A-11 HP brand 6 jams, correcting A-6 manually feeding 51 optional 500-sheet tray, specifications for A-4 ordering 6 orientation 36 printing by type and size 52– 53 printing guidelines A-6 problems with A-6 recycling E-5 sizes supported A-3–A-5 special types, orientation 35–47 specifications A-2–A-12 Tray 1, specifications for A-3 Tray 2 (4000/4000 N), specifications for A-4 Trays 2 and 3 (4000 T/4000 TN), specifications for A-3 types supported A-5 using recycled E-5 weight equivalence table A-7 weight specifications A-3 Paper Handling Menu B-3–B-5 Paper Jam message 77 paper jams, clearing 64–71 duplexer 69–70 envelope feeder 66 input tray areas 65, 65–66 output areas 68 repeated jams 71 top cover area 67 Tray 1 65 paper jams, locating 64 paper level indicator, locating 4 Paper Path Open Please Close It message 73 paper path test B-2 paper path, cleaning 61 Paper setting B-8 paper trays clearing paper jams 64–71 clearing repeated jams 71 current size settings 95 customizing Tray 1 50–51 extension 26 loading 26–30 locking out 52 multi-purpose 26 ordering 6 selecting from wrong tray 89 troubleshooting 89 Parallel Adv Function setting B-17 parallel cables, ordering 7 Parallel High Speed setting
B-17 Parallel I/O Buffer Overflow message 78 parallel interface connectors, locating 4 parts, locating 4 PCL commands D-1, D-5–D-7 printing font list 96 selecting fonts D-4 syntax D-2–D-3 PCL 5e drivers 13 function 16 PCL 6 drivers 13 function 16 PCL font list B-2 PCL Font Number setting B-9 PCL Font Pitch setting B-9 PCL Font Point Size setting B-10 PCL Font Source setting B-9 PCL Memory message C-5 PCL Memory setting B-12 PCL Symbol Set setting B-10 Perform Printer Maintenance message 75 permanent fonts downloaded 96 setting B-9 Personality setting B-11 Personality setting, configuring 86 photoconductive drum E-3 physical dimensions, printer’s A-13 pin connections A-17 pin outs serial cables A-18 pitch/point information 96 PJL commands D-1 ports locating 4 troubleshooting 86 postcards A-11 see also custom-size paper 45 PostScript emulation, see PS power connections, locating 4 power consumption A-14 power switch, locating 4 PowerSave mode E-2 PowerSave setting B-11 PPDs Macintosh 13, 19 selecting alternate 92 preprinted paper duplexing 33 orientation 35–36 prepunched paper, orientation 35–36 Print Configuration message
5
94 Print Menu Map message 93 Print PCL Font List message 96 Print PS Errors setting 86, B-10 Print PS Font List message 96 Print Quality Menu B-6–B-7 print quality, improving A-6 print queue, viewing 17 print resolution, information on configuration page 95 printer adapters A-17 changing control panel settings 11 checking configuration 93– 96 cleaning 59–60 commands D-1–D-7 control panel layout 9–11 diagnostics 20 dimensions A-13 drivers 13–16 drivers, Macintosh 19 features 2 help software 16 information pages 93–95 locating parts 4 maintenance 55–61 managing through network 20 memory C-1–C-7 menu map 11 messages 63, 72–81 operating temperature A-15 ordering supplies 6–8 output bins 24–25 overriding control panel settings 15 parts and location 4 PCL commands D-5–D-7 physical dimensions A-13 relative humidity A-15 renaming 92 repacking 99 sales and service offices 103–105 saving setup 48 service and support agreements 97–98 shipping 99 software 12 specifications A-13–A-14 status, see messages upgrading memory C-1 verifying current settings 94–96 printer cleaning page, using 61 printer drivers help software 16 icon does not appear 90 installation options 13
6
installing 13 obtaining most recent 14 selecting 16 software 15–17 troubleshooting 86 Printer Error messages 79, 80, 81 printer errors, troubleshooting 63–96 printer information, displayed on configuration page 95 printer languages allocating memory C-5 dedicating memory to B-12 selecting default B-11 printer memory C-1–C-7 printer messages 72–81 Printer Page Description Files, see PPDs printer status, accessing 17 printing 23–53 advanced tasks 48–53 basic tasks 23 configuration page 94–95 custom-size paper 45–47 duplexing 31–34 envelopes 37 envelopes from Tray 1 38, A-9 envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps A-10 envelopes with double-side-seams A-10 envelopes with feeder 39– 41 first page on different paper 49 font list 96 heavy paper 45–47 labels 42, 43 manually feeding paper 51 menu map 11, 93 multiple pages on one sheet 49 output bins 24–25 paper quality guidelines A-6 setup 24–25 special paper 35–47 speed A-15 transparencies 44 troubleshooting problems 86 watermark 48 with low toner 57–58 printing languages 16 Printing Menu B-8–B-10 printing stops, troubleshooting 87, 88 printing supplies ordering 6 problem solving, printer errors 63–96 Process Cleaning Page setting
B-7 Product Stewardship acoustic emissions A-15 consumables, see supplies energy consumption, see power consumption memory expansion C-2–C-4 noise emissions, see acoustic emissions paper, using recycled E-5 parts supply 6–8, E-6 power consumption A-14, E-2 product return 99 supplies 5–8, E-3, E-6 toner cartridge, ordering 6 using recycled paper E-5 warranty options E-5 standard 97–98 proportional-spaced fonts D-4 ProRes 1200 B-6 PS printing font list 96 troubleshooting error page 86 PS drivers function 16 included with printer 13 PS font list B-2 PS Memory message C-5 PS Memory setting B-12
Q quality, print correcting problems 63, 82– 83, A-6 with low toner 57–58 Quick Sets 48
R Ram Disk Device Failure message 75 Ram Disk File Operation Failure message 75 Ram Disk File System Is Full message 76 Ram Disk Is Write Protected message 76 Ram Disk setting B-14 Ram Disk Size setting B-14 Ready light 9 rear output bin clearing paper jams 68 locating 4 using 25 recycled paper, using E-5 recycling used toner cartridges 56 redistributing toner 57–58 regulatory information E-1–
EN
E-9 relative humidity A-15 removing envelope feeder 40 renaming the printer 92 repacking the printer 99 repeated paper jams, clearing 71 repeating defects, troubleshooting 83 Reset Active I/O Channel setting B-21 Reset All I/O Channels setting B-21 Reset Memory setting B-21 Resets Menu B-21 Resolution enhancement technology B-6 Resolution setting B-6 Resource Save message C-5 Resource Save setting B-12 Resource Saving, allocating memory C-5 restore default settings B-21 Restore Factory Settings B-21 REt setting B-6
S safety statements E-8–E-9 sales and service offices 103– 105 samples configuration page 95 print quality problems 82 saving printer setup 48 toner B-7 SDRAM DIMMs, ordering 7 security, information on configuration page 95 Select key 10 selecting alternate PPD 92 default printer language B-11 output location 24–25 printer driver 14 serial adapter, ordering 7 serial and accessory interface connectors, locating 4 Serial Baud Rate setting B-18 serial cables ordering 7 pin outs A-18 troubleshooting 86 types of A-17 Serial DTR Polarity setting B-18 Serial I/O Buffer Overflow message 78 serial number, locating 4 Serial Pacing setting B-17 Serial Robust XON setting
EN
B-17 service agreements 97–98 see also front pages after warranty expires 98 service information, see front pages setting custom paper sizes 46–47 paper type and size 52–53 settings affecting printer messages 72 changing control panel 11 overriding 11 printing current 11 toner density B-7 sharing printers, recommendations for 52 shipping the printer 99 show event log B-2 600 dpi B-6 size settings 50 small paper, printing 25 soft fonts downloaded 96 permanent B-9 software drivers 15–17 help for drivers 16 HP FontSmart, installing 17 HP JetSend, installing 18 HP JobMonitor, accessing 17 HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh 19 HP ToolBox, accessing 17 included with printer 12 license 102 Macintosh 19 Macintosh printer drivers 19 networks 20 obtaining most recent 14 troubleshooting print problems 86 Windows 15–17 Solaris 20 spare parts E-5 special paper manually feeding 51 printing with 35–47 specifications acoustic emissions A-15 cable A-16–A-18 card stock A-11 electrical A-14 envelope feeder A-9 envelopes A-9 expanded memory A-15 general A-15 heavy paper A-11 labels A-8 paper A-2–A-12
printer A-13–A-14 transparencies A-8 speed printing A-15 transmitting data B-17, B-18 status, see printer messages storing envelopes A-11 toner cartridges 56 straight-through paper path 25 Sun OS 20 supplies 5 availability E-5 ordering 6–8 warranty 97–98 support agreements 97–98 after warranty expires 98 support, worldwide, see front pages supported sizes, paper Tray 1 A-3 SupportPack E-5 switching printer languages 16 syntax for printer commands D-2–D-3
T TCP/IP protocol, setting B-20 TCP/IP setting B-19 3-hole punched paper duplexing 33 orientation 35–36 300 dpi B-6 toner correcting problems with A-6 redistributing 57–58 spilling 67 troubleshooting 83 toner cartridges 56–58 installing 56 life expectancy 56 limited warranty 100 material safety data sheet E-6 ordering 6 recycling 56, E-3 toner consumption E-2 Toner Density setting B-7 toner density setting B-7 Toner Low message 57 Toner Low setting B-13 Toner Material Safety Data Sheet E-6 ToolBox, see HP ToolBox top cover area, clearing paper jams 67 top cover, locating 4 top output bin locating 4 using 24
7
transmitting data, speed B-18 transparencies clearing repeated jams 71 guidelines 44 printing 44 specifications A-8 Tray 1 clearing paper jams 65 customizing operation 50– 51 deselecting 89 envelope specifications A-9 envelopes, loading 38 loading 26 locating 4 mode settings 50–51 paper orientation 36 paper sizes A-3 paper specifications A-3 printing labels 43 Tray 1 Mode setting B-3 Tray 1 Mode=Cassette 50 Tray 1 Mode=First 50 Tray 1 Size setting B-3 Tray 1 Type setting B-3 Tray 2 (4000/4000 N) loading 27 locating 4 paper orientation 36 paper sizes A-4 paper specifications A-4 Tray 2 Type setting B-3 Tray 3 Type setting B-4 Tray 4 Type setting B-4 tray extension 26 Tray x Empty message 76 Tray x Load message 76 Trays 2 and 3 (4000 T/4000 TN) loading 28 ordering 6 paper orientation 36 paper sizes A-3 paper specifications A-3 troubleshooting flowchart 84–91 output quality problems 63 paper jams 64–71 printer errors 63–96 printer messages 63 repeated paper jams 71 using configuration page 94 TrueType fonts 17 1200 dpi B-6 250-sheet tray loading 28 ordering 6 paper specifications A-3
8
2-sided printing 31–34 2-up printing 49 Type setting B-5 type settings 50 types of paper supported A-5 serial cables A-17 Typical Install option 14 installing drivers and utilities 13 installing HP software 15
U
troubleshooting 83 Wrong Envelope Feeder Installed message 77 wrong printer selected, troubleshooting 91 wrong tray, troubleshooting 89
X X Dimension setting B-9
Y Y Dimension setting B-9
Unexpected Paper Sizes message 79 uninstalling fonts 17 Unit of Measure setting B-8 UNIX, see HP-UX Unsupported Size In Tray message 76 upgrading printer memory C-1 Use x x Instead message 76 user’s guide, ordering 8
V Value key 10 VCCI statement, Japan E-8 vector graphics D-1 viewing print queue 17
W warranty E-5 standard 97–98 toner cartridges, limited 100 watermark, printing 48 waves, troubleshooting 83 weight, paper equivalence table A-7 weight, paper for 250-sheet tray A-3 duplex printing accessory A-5 envelope feeder A-5 optional 500-sheet tray A-4 Tray 1 A-3 Tray 2 (4000/4000 N) A-4 Trays 2 and 3 (4000 T/4000 TN) A-3 Wide A4 setting B-10 Windows help 16 network software 20 printer drivers 13 software 15–17 Windows NT 3.51 PCL 5e printer driver 13 WordPerfect 5.1 printer driver 14 World Wide Web addresses, see front pages wrinkled paper,
EN
May 1998 Edition
HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference Service Guide Volume I
HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference Service Guide Volume I
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 1998 All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. Publication number 5021-8943 First edition, May 1998 Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with respect to this information. HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, or other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information.
Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
Trademark credits Adobe and PostScript are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc., which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Microsoft® is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. MS-DOS® is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.
Contents 1
Control panel messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4
Input/Output (I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5
Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6
Toner cartridge information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
7
Printer options and user replaceable parts . . . . . . 131
8
Service parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9
Summary of service notes and technical tips . . . . 197
10 Image defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 11 Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 12 Services, support, and training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 13 Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion . . . . . . . . . . 343 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
EN
iii
Ordering Other Manuals This HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference Service Guide was created to help the LaserJet Service Engineer quickly troubleshoot common printer problems. While this reference is intended to provide all of the information the Service Engineer will need for on-site repair of HP LaserJet products, it is not intended to replace the service manual for any HP LaserJet product. For detailed information about the HP LaserJet products described in this guide, see the user guide or service manual for that product. Service manuals for HP LaserJet products are available from the HP Support Materials Organization (SMO). The Service Parts Order Desk number is:
(800) 227-8164 (U.S. Only) If you are located outside of the U.S., contact your local HP Sales and Service office.
iv
EN
Supported Products This service guide supports the following printers: Printer Name HP LaserJet Companion (minimal support only) HP LaserJet 6L HP LaserJet 5Si Mopier HP LaserJet 5Si/5Si MX HPLaserJet 5L HP LaserJet 6P/6MP HP LaserJet 5P/5MP HP LaserJet 5/5M/5N HP LaserJet 4V/4MV HP LaserJet 4P/4MP HP LaserJet 4L/4ML HP LaserJet 4+/4M+ HP LaserJet 4/4M HP LaserJet 4Si/4Si MX HP LaserJet IIISi HP LaserJet IIIP HP LaserJet IIP+ HP LaserJet IIP HP LaserJet IIID HP LaserJet III HP LaserJet IID HP LaserJet II HP Classic LaserJet (2686D) HP Classic LaserJet (2686A)
Printer Abbreviation LJ Companion LJ 6L LJ 5Si Mopier LJ 5Si LJ 5Si MX LJ 5L LJ 6P LJ 6MP LJ 5P LJ 5MP LJ 5 LJ 5M LJ 5N LJ 4V LJ 4MV LJ 4P LJ 4MP LJ 4L LJ 4ML LJ 4+ LJ 4M+ LJ 4 LJ 4M LJ 4Si LJ 4Si MX LJ IIISi LJ IIIP LJ IIP+ LJ IIP LJ IIID LJ III LJ IID LJ II LJ 2686D LJ 2686A
Note The abbreviation for each printer name is used in the text. .
EN
v
Reference Name Used in this Guide
Model Number
Maximum Pages per Month
Service Manual Part Number
LJ 6L 5Si Mopier, LJ5Si MX/5Si* LJ 5L
C3990A C3166A/C3167A C4076A/C4077A C3941A
6K 100K
C3990-99001 C4077-99015
4K
C3990-99001
LJ 6P/6MP* 5P/5MP* LJ 5/5M*/5N
C3150A/C3155A/ C3980A/C3982A C3916A/C3917A/ C3952A
12K
C3980-99001
35K
C3916-90984
LJ 4V/4MV
C3141A/C3142A
50K
C3141-90929
LJ 4P/4MP*
C2005A/C2040A
8K
C3980-90956
LJ 4L/4ML*
C2003A/C2015A
8K
C3980-90956
LJ 4+/4M+*
C2037A/C2039A
20K
C3916-90984
LJ 4/4M* LJ 4Si/4SiMX*
C2001A/C2021A C2010A/C2011A
20K 75K
C3916-90984 C2010-90939
LJ IIISi LJ IIIP
33491 33481
50K 8K
C2010-90939 33481-90951
LJ IIP+ LJ IIP
C2007A 33471
8K 6K
33481-90951 33481-90951
LJ IIID
33459
20K
33459-90906
LJ III
33449
16K
33449-90906
LJ IID LJ II
33447 33440
16K 12K
33459-90906 33449-90906
Classic LJ 2686D Classic LJ 2686A
2686D
15K
02686-90920
2686A - 2686A+
12K
02686-90920
*Macintosh-compatible
vi
EN
1
Control panel messages
Overview This chapter provides information on the display lights on the HP LaserJet 6L, 5L, 6P, 5P, and 4L printers and includes illustrations and detailed error codes for all printers. Error codes are listed as they appear on the printer display. Not all codes are included as many are self-explanatory.
Note Displays shaded in color represent primary lights. Displays that are not shaded represent secondary lights. To view the secondary lights on the printer, press [Go] and [Reset/Job]Cancel] simultaneously.
EN
Overview – 7
LJ 6L, 5L Printer Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Displays See the legend that follows for a description of the error and the action to remedy it. STATUS MESSAGES
1. Error LED is on. (*Unclearable error)
2. Error LED is
blinking.
3. All LEDs are blinking.
4. Data LED is blinking.
Error Data Ready 5. All LEDs are off. When all the lights are on, there is a Service error. Press and hold the front panel button to display the LED error code pattern. The code will be shown only while the button is pressed. The following pictures show the possible LED error patterns.
1. Error LED is on. (*Unclearable error)
2. Ready LED is on.
3. Error and Ready LEDs are on.
4. Error and Data LEDs are on.
5. Data LED is on.
6. All LEDs are on.
7. Data and Ready LEDs are blinking.
8. Formatter error.
* An unclearable error is not strictly a service message. It will appear without all three lights being displayed first. See item 1 in the following table. 8 – Control panel messages
EN
Legend (6L, 5L Display Lights) Status Messages Item
Description
Recommended Action
1
Paper out Door open No Electro-photographic (EP) cartridge Paper jam
See page 21 See page 18
2
Memory error
See page 34
3
Incompatible memory card
See page 49
4
Manual feed
See page 70
5
Sleep mode
See page 69
See page 32 See page 26
Error and Service Messages Item
Description
Recommended Action
1
Unclearable error Engine error
See item 1, above See page 39
2
ROM/RAM error
See page 50
3
Fuser error
See page 44
4
Beam error
See page 45
5
Scanner error
See page 47
6
Formatter PCA error
See page 57
7
Firmware error
See page 61
8
Formatter PCA error
See page 57
Note Before troubleshooting any service error, power cycle the printer to see if the error persists.
EN
LJ 6L, 5L Printer Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Displays – 9
1
LJ 6P Printer LED Displays See the legend that follows for a description of the error and the action to remedy it. If both the error and data lights are lit, simultaneously press [Go] and [Reset/Job[Cancel] to display the Data Error pattern. LJ 6P Printer LED Displays STATUS
Error Data Ready Tray 1 Tray 1 LED Blinking
Tray 2
CONTINUABLE ERRORS
SIMM ERRORS
FATAL ERRORS
Primary * To view secondary lights press the [Go] and buttons simultaneously.
10 – Control panel messages
* = Any other combination
Secondary
[Reset/Job[Cancel]
EN
Legend (6P Display Lights) Status Messages Item
Description
Recommended Action
1
Paper out (Tray 1)
See page 21
2
Paper out (Tray 2)
See page 21
3
Printer open No toner cartridge Paper jam
See page 18 See page 32 See page 20
4
Manual feed
See page 70
Continuable Errors When the ERROR and DATA LEDs are on, press [Go] and [Reset] simultaneously. Follow the instructions for the secondary light patterns shown. Item
Description
Recommended Action
5
Primary light pattern
See note on primary and secondary lights, page 13
5-1
Error 20 (memory overflow)
See page 34
5-2
Error 21 (print overrun)
See page 35
5-3
Error 22 (I/O error)
See page 36
5-4
Error 40
See page 38
5-5
Error 41.1, 41.2, 41.3
See page 40
5-6
Error 68, 68.1
See page 64
5-7
Error 51 (beam detect)
See page 45
5-8
Error 52 (scanner malfunction)
See page 47
5-9
Error 55
See page 53
EN
LJ 6P Printer LED Displays – 11
1
SIMM Errors Remove all SIMMs and power cycle the printer. Retry the operation. Replace the SIMMs one at a time to locate the defective module. Refer to the Service Manual for details. Item
Description
Recommended Action
6
Error 53-0 ROM error
See note below
7
Error 53-1 RAM error
See note below
Fatal Errors When the DATA, TRAY 2, TRAY 1, and ERROR LEDs are on, press [Go] and [Reset] simultaneously and follow the instructions for the secondary light patterns shown. Item
Description
Recommended Action
8
Primary light pattern
See note on primary and secondary lights, page 13
8-1
Error 50 fuser
See page 44
8-2
Error 57/58 (main motor)
See page 54
8-3
Error 61.x (x=1, 2, 3 SIMM)
See page 58
8-4
Error 62.x (x=1, 2, 3 SIMM)
See page 59
8-5
Error 62.0
See page 58
8-6
Error 63, 64, 64, 65
See pages 59–60
8-7
All other errors
See pages 61–72
12 – Control panel messages
EN
LJ 5P Printer LED Displays See the legend that follows for a description of the error and the action to remedy it. If both the error and data lights are lit, simultaneously press [Go] and [Reset] to display the Data Error pattern. LJ 5P Printer LED Displays STATUS
Error Tray 1 (MP Tray) Tray 2 (Paper Cassette) Data Ready
CONTINUABLE ERRORS
SIMM ERRORS
FATAL ERRORS
Any Combination
Primary * To view secondary lights press [Go] and
EN
Secondary
[Reset.
LJ 5P Printer LED Displays – 13
1
Legend (5P Display Lights) Status Messages Item
Description
Recommended Action
1
Paper out (Tray 1)
See page 21
2
Paper out (Tray 2)
See page 21
3
Printer open No toner cartridge Paper jam
See page 18 See page 32 See page 20
Continuable Errors When the ERROR and DATA LEDs are on, press [Go] and [Reset] simultaneously. Follow the instructions for the secondary light patterns shown. Item
Description
Recommended Action
4
Primary light pattern
See note on primary and secondary lights, page 13
4-1
Error 20 (memory overflow)
See page 34
4-2
Error 21 (print overrun)
See page 35
4-3
Error 22 (I/O error)
See page 36
4-4
Error 40
See page 38
4-5
Error 41.1, 41.2, 41.3
See page 40
4-6
Error 68, 68.1
See page 64
4-7
Error 51 (beam detect)
See page 45
4-8
Error 52 (scanner malfunction)
See page 47
4-9
Error 55
See page 53
14 – Control panel messages
EN
SIMM Errors Item
Description
Recommended Action
5
Error 53-0 ROM error
See note below
6
Error 53-1 RAM error
See note below
Note Remove all SIMMs and power cycle the printer. Retry the operation. Replace the SIMMs one at a time to locate the defective module. Refer to the Service Manual for details. Fatal Errors When the DATA, TRAY 2, TRAY 1, and ERROR LEDs are on, press [Go] and [Reset] simultaneously. Follow the instructions for the secondary light patterns shown. Item
Description
Recommended Action
7
Primary light pattern
See note on primary and secondary lights, page 13
7-1
Error 50 fuser
See page 44
7-2
Error 57/58 (main motor)
See page 54
7-3
Error 61.1/62.1
See page 58
7-4
All other errors
See 79 Error, pages 61-71
8
Error 63 service error
See page 59
EN
LJ 5P Printer LED Displays – 15
1
LJ 4L Printer LED Displays Recoverable Errors For more details, see the page number provided. Error Paper Data Ready LED Legend RECOVERABLE ERRORS (Displayed on single lights) Paper Out (See page 23)
Printer Open (See page 24)
Paper Jam (See page 26)
21 Print Overrun (See page 35)
Paper LED on steady.
Error LED on steady.
Paper LED is blinking.
Error LED is blinking.
SERVICE ERRORS (Displayed while pressing front panel button) Service Error
All 4 LEDs are on. 50 Error/Service (See page 42)
When all four lights are on, a service error is indicated. Press and hold the front panel button to display the error code. The code will be shown only while the button is pressed. The following pictures show the possible error codes. NOTE: If all four lights remain on, yet no error code is displayed when pressing the button, power cycle the printer. If the condition persists, replace the formatter PCA. 51 Loss of Beam 52 Incorrect Scanner 53 Accessory Detect Speed Memory Error (See page 45) (See page 47) (See page 49)
Ready and Error LEDs are on. 55 Engine (See page 53)
Data and Error LEDs are on. 58 Fan (See page 56
Paper and error LEDs are on. 61.x Formatter (See page 58)
Error LED is on.
Ready, Data, and Error LEDs are on.
Error LED is off; other LEDs display a pattern.
16 – Control panel messages
Data LED is on. Blank Display (See page 68
All LEDs are off.
EN
4L-Specific Error Configurations Priority of Errors
1
Each error has a priority in relation to the others. If more than one error condition occurs at the same time, the highest priority error will be displayed. The priority of errors is as follows: Service Errors 1 Formatter PCA 2 RAM 3 Engine 4 Scanner 5 Beam 6 Fan Recoverable Errors 1 Door Open/No Toner Cartridge 2 Paper Jam 3 Paper Out 4 Memory Error 5 Manual Feed
Note Before troubleshooting any Service error, power cycle the printer to see if the error persists.
EN
LJ 4L Printer LED Displays – 17
Error Codes Clear Staple Jam 5Si Mopier •
Clear the jam.
•
Check the staple cartridge.
•
Check the stapler and cabling.
•
Check the stapling unit control’s printed-circuit assembly (PCA).
•
Replace the entire stapling unit as required.
Close Printer Cover/Printer Open All Printers •
The printer door is open.
•
Check that the toner cartridge is fully seated and that the covers are firmly closed.
•
The direct current (DC) power supply is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
•
The actuator or tab is missing or broken.
•
The paper control printed-circuit assembly (PCA) is defective.
18 – Control panel messages
EN
Install Toner Cartridge/No Cartridge All Printers •
Reseat or install a new toner cartridge.
•
The high voltage contacts are dirty or defective.
•
The high voltage power supply is defective.
1
LJ 5 •
The DC Controller is defective.
Install Tray 2 LJ 5 •
The lower cassette (Tray 3) is selected and the printer has detected that the paper cassette (Tray 2) is not installed. – Install or reseat the paper cassette (Tray 2), which is the paper guide for the lower cassette (Tray 3).
•
The paper cassette (PC) is improperly fitted. – Firmly reseat the PC.
Out of Staples Optional Output X 5Si Mopier •
Replace the staple cartridge. – If the message continues after the cartridge has been replaced, check the stapler, top cover assembly, and cabling.
•
Check the stapling unit control PCA.
•
Replace the entire stapling unit if required.
EN
Error Codes – 19
Output Operation Condition x.yy 5Si Mopier x=output device number yy=condition code For the multibin mailbox: 01 = face-up tray not installed
Note See also the section on troubleshooting the 2,000-sheet input unit and multibin mailbox/mailbox with stapler.
Remove Paper Jam LJ 5 •
See 13 Paper Jam—all printers
•
The rear door is open.
•
The cassette paper out sensor flag is broken or missing.
•
The 500-sheet lower cassette is not properly adjusted (see service note C2001A-04). – Adjust the tray, using the instructions in the service note.
•
Check the transfer roller to ensure that it is properly seated.
•
The input sensor (PS1) or fuser exit sensor (PS3) is bad; or with jams from the MP tray (Tray 1), the paper end sensor (PS5) is bad.
Staple Limit Reached 5Si Mopier •
Send print jobs of only 20 pages or fewer to the stapler.
20 – Control panel messages
EN
Stapler Align Error 5Si Mopier •
Remove the paper from the stapler and re-send the job.
Stapler Malfunction 5Si Mopier •
Clear the stapler jam and re-send the job.
Stapler Supply Out 5Si Mopier •
Load a new staple cartridge.
Toner Low 5Si, 5 •
The toner is uneven in the cartridge.
•
The toner cartridge contact points are malfunctioning.
•
The high-voltage power supply (HVPS) is defective.
Tray x Empty/x Load/Paper Out All Printers •
The paper tray is empty or is seated incorrectly.
•
The sensor arm is stuck or broken.
•
The tray-size sensor is defective or configured incorrectly. – Verify the tray tabs and switches at the right rear (or right front) of the tray slot, or configure the tray from the control panel. – The paper control/sensor PCA is defective.
EN
Error Codes – 21
1
Warming Up 5Si, 5 •
Separate all accessories.
•
Power cycle the printer.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
•
The power supply is defective.
02 Warming Up (if 3 Minutes)—See also 50 Error 4V •
The Input/Output (I/O) cable is hooked up incorrectly or there is bad I/O in the computer. – Remove the I/O cables and power cycle the printer.
•
There are defective component(s). – Replace the fusing assembly if it is not warming up the DC controller, PCA power supply, or formatter PCA.
4Si/IIISi •
The display cable or formatter PCA is defective.
IID, II •
The I/O cable is hooked up incorrectly or there is bad I/O in the computer. – Remove the I/O cables. Replace the formatter PCA.
2686A/D •
The DC power supply/main motor drive is defective.
22 – Control panel messages
EN
11 Paper Out (MP/PC/UC/LC/EC/LE LOAD) All Printers
1
•
The paper tray is empty or is seated incorrectly.
•
The sensor arm is stuck or broken.
•
The tray-size sensing or configuration is defective. – Verify the tray tabs and switches are at the right rear (or right front) of the tray slot, or configure the tray from the control panel.
•
The paper control/sensor PCA is defective.
4L •
The paper cassette is empty or missing.
•
The paper cassette is seated incorrectly.
•
The paper out flag PS2 is broken or stuck.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
Tray 1 (the MP tray) is empty. – Add paper to Tray 1; then press [Go] to continue.
•
Tray 2 (the paper cassette) is empty. – Add paper to the tray if it is on continuously; verify that the sensor flag movement is not hindered.
EN
Error Codes – 23
12 Printer Open All Printers (Exceptions: 4P, IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP) •
The printer door is open. – Check that the toner cartridge is fully seated and that the cover is firmly closed.
•
A DC power supply malfunction or DC controller malfunction occurred.
•
Tab is missing on the top cover; replace the tab.
4V •
Check the front Door Open sensor flag sensor; it could be broken or stuck. – PS402 is located on the small Front Door Unit Terminal PCA, on the front door under the transfer roller.
•
A toner cartridge microswitch malfunction has occurred. – Check the toner cartridge microswitch (SW501) on the high voltage PCA.
•
A DC controller PCA malfunction has occurred.
4 Plus, 4 •
The plunger is missing on the top cover.
•
A paper control PCA malfunction has occurred.
4Si, IIISi •
A PS1 malfunction has occurred. – Check that the PS1 is blocked by the latch flag. Replace the PS1 if it is defective.
•
The fuser bulb has burned out. – Check to see if the fuser bulb turns on. If the fuser bulb does not turn on, reset SW101 on the AC power supply.
•
A DC controller PCA malfunction has occurred.
24 – Control panel messages
EN
12 Open or No EP 4P •
The top cover is open.
•
The toner cartridge is not installed.
•
There is a defective interlock switch assembly.
1
4L •
Part of the top door that pushes the plunger down is broken.
•
The top door switch (plunger assembly) is broken.
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP •
The paper path door or top cover is open. – Close the paper path door or top cover.
•
A toner cartridge is not installed or it is not seated. – Replace or reseat the toner cartridge.
•
There is a defective fan, PS4, or PS5.
•
The external fuser access door is not closed.
EN
Error Codes – 25
13 Paper Jam/Remove Paper Jam All Printers •
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The paper path is dirty or obstructed. – Clean the paper path components; ensure that the transfer roller is seated properly.
•
The pickup (or other) rollers and/or the separation pad is worn.
•
The paper is the wrong length or the paper size is selected incorrectly in the software.
•
The exit sensor or flag is defective.
•
A defective input (paper-out) sensor does not sense that the printer is out of paper.
•
The paper cassettes are not correctly loaded.
•
The solenoid operation is bad. – Verify proper solenoid operation and replace if necessary.
•
The gear(s) is bad or not meshing in the drive train. – Replace the bad gear(s) or check the toner cartridge gears for damage.
•
The main motor or drive circuit is bad.
•
The delivery mechanism or the coupler gear to the main drive is bad.
•
The main motor drive circuitry is bad.
•
The DC controller is defective.
26 – Control panel messages
EN
5L, 6P, 5P •
If all of the flags move properly and the connectors are seated, but the error persists, replace the DC controller.
6P, 5P •
There are paper fragments under the oblique rollers (top or front). – Remove the rollers and the paper fragments.
4V •
The toner cartridge gears are worn or damaged.
•
The paper path gears are worn or damaged.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The registration guide is defective.
4P, 4L •
The rear door of the printer is open.
•
The flags/sensors are stuck or broken.
•
There are paper fragments under the oblique rollers (top or front). – Remove the rollers and clear out the paper.
•
The transfer roller guide is not seated.
4 Plus, 4 •
The rear door is open.
•
The cassette paper-out sensor flag is broken or missing.
•
The 500-sheet lower cassette is improperly adjusted (see service note C2001A-01A). – Adjust the tray according to the service note instructions.
•
The transfer roller is seated improperly.
•
There is a bad input sensor (PS1) or fuser exit sensor (PS3); or with jams from the MP tray (Tray 1), a bad paper-end sensor (PS5).
•
The output rollers (service note C2001A-03A) are defective.
EN
Error Codes – 27
1
IIID, III, IID, II •
The registration assembly is defective.
•
The fuser is defective.
IIID, IID •
The duplex paper path is obstructed or contains worn components.
•
The switchback assembly is misadjusted or bent.
III, II •
The sensor cable is defective. – Replace the fuser to the DC controller cable (RG1-0907-000CN).
2686D/A •
The separation belt is broken.
•
The transfer guide assembly is defective.
•
The paper pickup clutch is turning more than once. – Disassemble the clutch and re-grease. NOTE: If one clutch needs re-greasing, it is likely that they all do.
•
The registration shutter is stuck.
•
The rear paper guide door is worn. – Replace the worn paper rollers or readjust the rear door.
•
The front paper guide door is worn or misadjusted, preventing paper from getting to the registration assembly on time. – Readjust the front paper guide door.
28 – Control panel messages
EN
13.1 Internal, 13.2 Input, 13.3 Duplex, 13.4 Output 4Si, IIISi •
Media is not picked up, or media is jammed in the printer. –
•
Check and clean the entire paper path.
Media is in the duplex unit. – Check the paper input path and paper re-feed from the sensor PS2 duplex unit.
•
A sensor malfunction has occurred. – Check the PS4 or PS5 in the duplex or switchback, respectively.
•
An output sensor malfunction has occurred. – Check the PS7 in the output area Optional Power Stacker.
•
Check the registration area: fuser-exit sensor flag and sensor. – Install a user maintenance kit (110 V - C2062A, 220 V - C2087A).
EN
Error Codes – 29
1
13.x Paper Jam 5Si Note When troubleshooting the LJ 5Si, always troubleshoot the error log message. See the LJ 5Si service manual for detailed error log information. X=Location of jam 0=Non-specific jam 1=Paper feed/paper late jam—paper late arriving at PS 2, which is located in the paper pickup unit. Inspect the paper path. Verify flag movement. 2=Paper feed/paper late jam—paper late arriving at PS 2, which is the registration photo sensor. Remove the toner cartridge and lift up the green lever to access the sensor flag. Verify flag movement. 3=Fuser output paper late jam—paper late arriving at PS 1403, which is in the fusing assembly. Verify flag movement. 4=Fuser output, paper jam. 5, 6=Duplex module paper jam. PS 1402 face-down delivery photo sensor is located in the face-down delivery assembly. Inspect the diverter drive assembly. Verify that the paper path from the fuser to the top of the face-down bin is clear and that the flag moves freely. 7-10=Duplex module paper jam. The paper is diverted to the duplex module after leaving the fusing assembly. The paper is turned around in the duplexer and re-fed into the printer's paper path. Reset the duplex module. If the problems persist, replace the complete duplex assembly.
30 – Control panel messages
EN
11=External input device paper jam If the control panel displays a 13.11 paper jam message, the printer will list additional error codes in the error log. These can be printed or viewed. A 2000-Sheet Input Tray Paper Jam error is related to the first device in the C-Link daisy chain. In the supported configuration, this device should be the 2000-sheet high-capacity tray. Verify that Tray 4 lifts to its feed position. Inspect the flags in the vertical transfer door. 12=External output device paper jam If the control panel displays a 13.12 Paper Jam message, the printer will list additional error codes in the error log. These can be printed or viewed. Multibin Mailbox/Stapler paper jam. The error is related to the second or third device on the C-Link daisy chain. In the supported configuration, the second device should be the Multibin Mailbox. Verify that all bins are in position and that the “scan bar” is complete. Verify that the Multibin Mailbox completes its power-up sequence. In the supported configuration, the stapler is the third device in the C-Link daisy chain. Verify that the stapler completes its power-up sequence. 13=Fuser accordion jam. Inspect the paper path before and after the fuser. 14=Printer could not auto-eject the paper. Inspect the entire paper path for paper or debris.
EN
Error Codes – 31
1
14 No EP Cartridge or No Toner Cartridge All Printers •
A toner cartridge is not installed or the cartridge is not fully seated.
•
The sensitivity tabs are missing (except 4 Plus, LJ 4, and 2686). Replace the toner cartridge.
4V •
The toner cartridge microswitch (SW501) on the high-voltage PCA is defective.
•
The front-door-open sensor flag sensor is malfunctioning. PS402 is located on the small Front Door Unit Terminal PCA, on the front door under the transfer roller.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
4 Plus, 4 •
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The HVPS is defective or there are dirty or misaligned contacts.
4Si, IIISi •
Check the tabs on the right side of the toner cartridge. At least one of the two tabs must be present.
•
The support tab of the switch actuator, which is located on the upper-right corner of the DC controller, is bent or installed incorrectly.
•
The HVPS is defective.
IIID, III, IID, II •
The paper control PCA is defective.
2686A/D •
The cassette microswitch is defective.
32 – Control panel messages
EN
16 Toner Low All Printers
1
•
The toner in the toner cartridge is uneven.
•
The toner cartridge contact points are malfunctioning.
•
The HV power supply is defective.
4Si, IIISi •
The door-open sensor flag is defective. – Replace the PS1.
•
The toner level sensor connector is damaged. – Replace the toner level sensor.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
III, II •
The cable is defective. – Replace the DC controller to the HV power supply cable (part number RG1-0906-000CN).
18 MIO Not Ready All Printers •
The printer is not connected to an active LAN. – Connect the printer to a LAN or terminate the connection, using a BNC T-connector with two 50-ohm resistors.
•
The MIO card is misaligned or defective. –
EN
Reseat or replace the MIO card.
Error Codes – 33
18 MIO Initialization All Printers •
The error message remains on after 5 minutes. – Check the network card or host.
20 Error/Memory Overflow All Printers •
A large print job exceeds memory capacity. – Verify that the SIMMs are seated. Add memory, remove soft fonts, decrease resolution, or simplify the print job. Adjust the settings for Image Adapt and Page Protect, if available.
6L/5L •
Set the enhanced input/output (I/O) to auto mode (printer command language [PCL] mode). – Re-send the print job. If the auto-continue variable is on within the printer job language (PJL), the printer will continue to print after 10 seconds. If it is off, press the front panel button to continue printing.
LJ 5 •
There is too much data or the data is too complex. – Turn Image Adapt and Page Protect to On or Auto. (This can be set within the remote control panel.) Press [Go] to resume printing.
34 – Control panel messages
EN
21 Error/Print Overrun All Printers •
1
There is too much data or the data is too complex. – Simplify the print job or add memory.
6L, 5L, 6P, 5P •
Use the remote control panel to turn Page Protect to Auto or On.
5Si •
There is too much data or the data is too complex. – Enable Page Protect from the control panel and from the software. (This may require additional memory.)
LJ 5 •
There is too much data or the data is too complex. – Turn Image Adapt and Page Protect to On or Auto. (This can be set within the remote control panel.) Press [Go] to resume printing.
4L •
There is too much data or the data is too complex. – Reduce the complexity of the print job.
•
The print job is too complex. – Turn Image Adapt and Page Protect to On or Auto. (This can be set within the HP Explorer remote control panel.)
•
There is not enough memory. – Add the optional memory module.
4M Plus, 4 Plus, 4M, 4 •
There is too much data or the data is too complex. – Enable Page Protect from the control panel and from the software. (This may require additional memory.)
EN
Error Codes – 35
III, IIID, IIIP •
There is too much data or the data is too complex. – With 1 MB extra memory, enable Page Protect.
22 Error/ I/O Configuration Error/Par I/O Error/MIO Error All Printers •
The I/O configuration for the computer or printer is incorrect. – Refer to the service manual for the proper configuration.
•
The I/O Cable is wrong or damaged. – Replace the I/O cable with the specified (IEEE-1284) cable.
•
The computer is turned off. – Turn the computer on.
•
The printer I/O port is damaged. – Replace the I/O PCA or formatter PCA.
5Si •
A non-HP modular input/output (MIO) device is being used. – Replace with an HP MIO device.
6P, 5P, 5, 4 Plus •
The computer and printer are not communicating because of improper signal protocols. This indicates a loose cable connection or a bad or poor-quality cable. – Reseat the cable and make sure you are using a high-quality cable (IEEE-1284).
36 – Control panel messages
EN
23 I/O Not Ready All Printers •
1
The I/O card is unable to accept data or it is not connected to the network. – Check the I/O card seating and replace if necessary.
24 Job Memory Full All Printers •
There is too much data or the data is too complex. – Add memory or simplify the print job.
25 XXX Memory Full All Printers •
There is too much data or the data is too complex. – Add memory or simplify the print job.
30 PS Error 16 All Printers •
An I/O timeout or prompt for user interaction (for example, manual feed) has been exceeded. – Check the I/O connections; check if media requests are being made.
EN
Error Codes – 37
30 PS Error 22 or 25 All Printers •
An unexpected PostScript firmware error has occurred. – Replace the PostScript SIMM.
30 PS Error XX (all others) All Printers •
A PCL file is being sent to the printer while it is in PostScript mode, or a PostScript file or application error has occurred. – Check the configuration, application, and print files.
30.1.1 Disk Failure 5 Si •
The optional disk failed a self-test. – Press [Select] to continue.
40 Error (data transfer error) All Printers •
The computer and printer may be set to different baud rates. – Refer to the service manual to reset the baud rates.
•
The computer is turned off.
•
– Turn the computer on. The MIO card is unseated or defective.
•
– Remove, reseat, or replace the MIO card. An abnormal connection break occurred while transferring data from the computer. – Press [Continue] or [Go] on the printer to clear the error message.
38 – Control panel messages
EN
40.x MIO Error 5Si •
1
An abnormal connection break in the specified MIO card occurred. If x=1; HP MIO port 1 (upper slot) If x=2; HP MIO port 2 (lower slot) – Press [Select] to continue, or power cycle the printer. If the error persists, replace the MIO card.
41 Error (temporary print engine failure) All Printers •
A momentary error has occurred. – Press [Continue] or [Go] to reset the printer.
6L, 5L •
Temporary Error – Power cycle the printer. If the error persists, reseat the formatter PCA to the DC controller PCA.
•
Engine Error – Replace the formatter PCA. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA.
6P, 5P •
A temporary error occurred while printing. – This error most commonly occurs when the printer picks two sheets of paper at once. The page containing the error is reprinted automatically. Remove the page from the output tray and press [Go] on the printer.
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP •
Paper feed problems have occurred. – Check the paper feed, especially the operation of the PS1.
EN
Error Codes – 39
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIID, III, IID, II •
The fiber optic cable is bent or broken.
IIP •
For service notes between 2925J00000 and 3047J99999: – Replace the fusing assembly.
IIID, III, IID, II •
There is a bad laser scanner or a bad laser scanner cable. – Replace the cable assembly from the DC controller to the laser scanner.
2686D/A •
The laser power is misadjusted. – Refer to the service manual to adjust the laser power.
41.1 or 2 Error, 41.3 Error All Printers •
There are defective connections. – Reseat J205, J206, J207, and laser scanner connections.
•
There is a paper multifeed or the wrong size of paper is being used. – See service notes C2001A-01 and -02 (for LJ4 and 4+).
•
The paper size selection does not match the installed paper.
•
One of the cassettes is overfilled or improperly adjusted. – Remove the paper from the cassette. Readjust the cassette.
•
The paper does not meet HP specifications.
40 – Control panel messages
EN
41.4 or 5 Error All Printers •
1
The DC controller or formatter PCA is defective.
IIISi/4Si •
The tab on the toner cartridge is broken.
41.x Error 5Si, 5 •
If x=1: Defective connections: – Reseat J205, J206, J207, and the laser scanner connections.
•
If x=2: Beam detect malfunction: – Reseat the connectors, including the laser scanning assembly.
•
If x=3: Paper size selection does not match installed paper or paper multifeed: – Check for paper jams, multifeeds, or misfeeds. Insert paper that is the correct size. One of the cassettes is overfull or improperly adjusted.
•
If x=4: Sync error: – Reseat the DC controller and the formatter PCA connections.
•
If x=5: Video sync or undetermined error: – Reseat the DC controller and the formatter PCA connections.
EN
Error Codes – 41
50 Error/50 Service (fuser malfunction) All Printers •
A temporary error has occurred. – Turn the printer off for 20 minutes to clear the temporary 50 Error.
•
The power is low or unstable (for example, in a brownout). – Locate and verify a stable power source.
6L, 5L •
Check the resistance between pins 1 and 2 from connector J102 of the DC controller and the thermistor. – If there is no resistance, replace the heating element. If the resistance is correct, replace the DC controller.
6P, 5P •
The fuser is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
LJ 5, 4 Plus, 4 •
The fuser or power supply is defective. – if the problem persists, replace the fuser and then replace the power supply.
•
A temporary error has occurred. – Short the C202 (LJ 4) or C205 (LJ 4 Plus) on the DC controller to bypass the Error 50 time delay.
4V, 4L, 4P •
The fuser is improperly seated.
•
The fuser is defective.
42 – Control panel messages
EN
4Si, IIISi •
The fuser is improperly seated.
•
The connector J201 is improperly connected. – Reseat the connector J201 on the sensor PCA.
•
The SW 101 is disengaged. – Check the SW101 to make sure it is engaged with the top cover closed.
•
A temporary error has occurred. – Turn the printer off. Short the DC controller CP005 to bypass the Error 50 time delay.
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP •
The fuser assembly is defective.
•
A temporary error has occurred. – Turn the printer off. Short the C212 on the DC Controller to bypass the Error 50 time delay.
•
The power supply is defective.
IIID, III, IID, II •
The fuser is defective.
•
The AC power module is defective.
•
A temporary error has occurred. – Turn the printer off. LJ II only: Short the C211 on the DC controller to bypass the Error 50 time delay. LJ IID only: Short the C216 on the DC controller to bypass the Error 50 time delay.
EN
Error Codes – 43
1
III, II •
There is a defective fuser to the DC controller cable (hot fuser or blown thermoswitch). – Replace the cable fuser to the DC controller (part number RG1-0907-000CN).
•
Check the fuser to the AC power module cable (cold fuser). – Replace the cable DC controller to the AC power module (part number RG1-0912-000CN).
•
The +24VA is missing. – Check the voltage and replace the DC power supply as necessary.
2686A/D •
There is a blown 47 Ohm resistor. – Replace the plug-in resistor on the fuser safety PCA (part number FF1-3872-000CN).
•
The fuser bulb is defective.
•
The fuser safety PCA is defective.
50.x Fuser Error 5Si •
Fuser malfunction. If x=1: Fuser low temperature failure. If x=2: Warm up failure. If x=3: Over temperature failure. If x=4: Bad fuser. – Turn the printer off for 20 minutes, and then turn it back on. Verify that the fuser is installed correctly and fully seated. Reseat or replace the fuser cable assembly.
44 – Control panel messages
EN
51 Error (loss of beam detect) 6L, 5L, 6P, 5P, 4P, 4L •
1
A temporary error has occurred. – Power cycle the printer.
•
The laser scanner assembly is not seated.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective. – Replace the laser scanner assembly (or cable on the 5L only).
•
The DC controller PCA is defective (5L, 5Si only).
LJ 5, 4Plus, 4 •
The laser scanner cable connectors are faulty.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
4V •
There is a problem with the fiber optic cable.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
4Si, IIISi •
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
There is a problem with the fiber optic cable.
•
The connectors are faulty. – Reseat the connectors J002 on the DC controller and the J601 on the laser drive PCA.
•
The DC voltage is poor. – Verify that the 12 VDC is present on the J601-2 of the laser drive PCA.
•
EN
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
Error Codes – 45
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP •
The toner cartridge is improperly seated.
•
The laser shutter operation is functioning improperly.
•
The fiber optic cable is damaged.
•
The laser PCA is bad.
IIID, III, IID, II •
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
There is a bad cable in the laser scanner to the DC controller. – Replace the cable in the laser scanner to the DC controller (RG1-0908-000CN).
•
The fiber optic cable has cuts or kinks.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
2686D/A •
The laser or laser power setting is defective.
•
The scanner is defective.
51.x Error 5Si •
Laser subsystem problem. If x=1: Beam detect malfunction. If x=2: Laser malfunction. – Press [Select] to resume operation. If error persists: Check the cable from the DC controller to the laser scanner. Replace the laser scanner assembly. Replace the DC Controller PCA.
46 – Control panel messages
EN
52 Error (incorrect scanner speed) 6L, 5L, 6P, 5P •
1
A temporary error has occurred. – Power cycle the printer.
•
The scanning assembly is improperly fitted.
•
A problem has occurred with the scanner cable.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
LJ 5 •
The laser scanner cable is faulty.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
4V, 4Si, IIISi •
The cable assembly is faulty.
•
There is a scanner motor problem. – Listen for the scanner motor to start up, and watch for the LED 003 on the DC controller to illuminate (4Si, IIISi).
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
4P, 4L •
A temporary error has occurred. – Power cycle the printer.
•
The scanner assembly is improperly fitted.
•
There is a scanner cable problem.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
EN
Error Codes – 47
4 Plus, 4 •
The laser scanner cable is faulty.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP •
The scanner motor is bad.
•
The DC controller is bad.
IIID, III, IID, II •
The laser scanner cable to the DC controller is defective. – Replace the cable assembly (part number RG1-0908-000CN).
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
2868A/D •
The scanner assembly is defective.
52.x Error 5Si •
Scanner subsystem problem. If x=1: Scanner startup failure. If x=2: Scanner rotation failure – Switch the printer off and then back on. If the error continues: Check the cable from the DC controller to the laser scanner assembly. Replace the laser scanner assembly. Replace the DC controller PCA.
48 – Control panel messages
EN
53 Error (accessory memory error) 4Si, IIISi •
1
A temporary error has occurred. – Power cycle the printer.
•
A laser malfunction has occurred. – See 51 Error recommendations.
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP •
53 Error Memory Unit 1 (on the top).
•
53 Error Memory Unit 1 (on the bottom).
IIID, III •
There is a failure in the front memory slot. (53.1 Error)
•
There is a failure in the rear memory slot. (53.2 Error)
IID, II •
An accessory memory failure has occurred.
2686D/A •
EN
A laser temperature malfunction has occurred.
Error Codes – 49
53.XY.ZZ Error 6L/5L •
An error has been found in the RAM or ROM. – Power cycle the printer.
•
The memory card is defective or incompatible. – Turn off the printer, remove any additional memory, then turn the printer back on. If the message clears, replace the memory card.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
5Si, 6P, 5P, 5, 4V, 4P, 4Plus, 4, 4Si •
A SIMM malfunction has occurred. – Verify that the SIMM board is installed correctly. Replace the SIMM that caused the error.
50 – Control panel messages
EN
Table 1-1
53.XY.ZZ Error for 5, 5Si, 4 P, 4 Plus, 4, 4Si
x (Hardware Type)
zz (Error Number)
x=0, ROM
0=Unsupported memory
1
1=Unrecognized memory x=1, RAM
2=Unsupported memory size 3=Failed RAM test
x=2, Flash
4=Exceeded maximum RAM size
Y (Hardware Device)
5=Exceeded maximum ROM size
y=0 Internal mem.
6=Invalid SIMM speed
(Formatter PCA)
7=SIMM reporting information incorrectly
y=1 SIMM Slot 1
8=SIMM RAM parity error
y=2 SIMM Slot 2
9=SIMM ROM mapped to an unsupported address
y=3 SIMM Slot 3
10=SIMM address conflict
y=4 SIMM Slot 4
11=ROM out of bounds 12=Could not make temporary mapping
Note An Error 53.1y.08 generates if HP LJ 4P Plus memory is installed in an HP LJ 4.
4L •
An error has been found in the RAM (or ROM: 5L only). – Power cycle the printer.
•
The memory card is defective or incompatible. – Turn the printer off; remove any additional memory; then turn the printer back on. If the message clears, replace the memory card.
•
EN
The formatter PCA is defective.
Error Codes – 51
54 Error 5Si •
The duplexer is defective. – Replace the duplexer.
IID, IIID: Duplex Feed Error •
The duplex shift plate is improperly fitted. – Check the duplex shift plate for correct position and operation.
•
The PS5 or SL4 is bad. – Verify proper operation and replace as necessary.
•
There is a defect in the main motor. – Replace the main motor or the power supply or main drive motor PCA.
2686 D/A: Main Motor Stall •
The input tray is too full. – Remove some of the paper.
•
The fuser drive gears are bent or locked up. – Adjust or replace the fuser drive gears.
•
The main motor has problems. – Replace the main motor.
52 – Control panel messages
EN
55 Error (internal communication problem) All Printers •
The cable is loose or bad.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective. – Replace the DC controller PCA. Note: Error 55 on a LJ Series II requires replacing both the DC controller and the Interface PCA at the same time.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
The paper input PCA is defective.
•
The main motor is defective.
•
There is inadequate site power (or the problem may be the result of thunderstorms). Examine the surge protector. – Replace the DC controller PCA and/or the formatter PCA if necessary.
4V •
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
4Si, IIISi •
The connectors are improperly fitted. – Check and reseat the connectors J4 and J5 on the low-voltage power supply. Check J8, J9, J10, and J15 on the DC controller PCA
•
Cable is loose or faulty. – Check and reseat the cable between the DC controller and formatter PCAs.
•
The DC controller is defective.
•
The DC power supply is defective.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
The paper input PCA is defective.
•
The main motor is defective.
EN
Error Codes – 53
1
2686D/A •
The interface or formatter PCA is defective.
56 Error 4Si, IIISi •
An attempt is being made to print envelopes while the printer is in duplex mode.
IID, IIID •
The output selector knob is not in duplex position.
56.x Error 5Si •
An invalid input source or output destination has been selected. If x=1: invalid input source. If x=2: invalid output destination. – Check the input and output devices. Reselect a valid device.
57 Error 6L, 5L •
The memory card is incompatible. – Remove the card and replace it with a 1, 2, 4, or 8 MB, 5V, 70 nanosecond (nsec.) or faster card.
6P, 5P, 5 •
The main motor is not functioning properly. – Check for any binding in the motor or gear train. Check the connection to the DC controller, and then replace the main motor or the DC controller as necessary.
54 – Control panel messages
EN
4L, 4 •
The main motor is not functioning properly.
1
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP (57 Error 1) •
An incompatible memory card is in the top slot.
•
An incompatible memory card is in the bottom slot.
•
The motor cables or connectors are poorly seated.
•
The main motor is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
IIID, III (57-1 Error) •
An incompatible memory card is in the front slot.
•
An incompatible memory card is in the rear slot.
57.x Service 5Si, 4 Plus, 4Si, IIISi, (x=2, 3, or 4) •
The fan motor x is faulty. – Check fan number x, main, or duplexer fan, and replace if necessary.
LJ 5 •
The main motor has failed.
4 Plus (x = 1) •
The gears are seized.
•
The DC controller or main motor is bad.
4Si, IIISi (x = 1) •
The gears are seized. – Check and replace the top cover or fuser gears.
•
EN
The top cover switch is faulty.
Error Codes – 55
•
The AC kill switch operation is faulty.
•
The connector J010 is improperly fitted.
•
There is a bad main motor PCA or main motor.
58 Service 6P, 5P, 5, 4V, 4P, 4L, 4 •
The fan cable is improperly fitted. – Check the fan cable; reseat the fan cable if necessary.
•
The fan is defective.
4V •
The DC controller PCA is defective.
58.1 and 58.2 4Si, IIISi •
The paper cassette is improperly inserted.
58.x Printer Error 5Si •
Tray/lifter malfunction. If x=1: Tray 2 lifter malfunction. If x=2: Tray 3 lifter malfunction. If x=3: Tray 1 lifter malfunction. If x=4: Tray 4 lifter malfunction. – Press [Select] to continue. Repair or replace the tray lifter.
56 – Control panel messages
EN
59 Add Memory 4Si, IIISi •
1
Not enough optional memory is installed to support the PostScript option for the application being used. – Verify that the SIMMs are seated properly; replace any defective SIMMs, or install additional SIMMs.
59.x Printer Error 5Si •
Main motor malfunction. If x=1: main motor startup failure. If x=2: main motor rotation failure. – Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on. – If the message persists: Check the cabling between the main motor and the DC controller. Replace the main motor. Replace the DC controller.
60 Service 4 P, 4 Plus, 4, 2686D/A •
The formatter PCA is defective.
60 Memory 4V, 4Si, IIISi •
EN
The SIMMs are defective.
Error Codes – 57
61 Service 4P, IIIP, IIID, III, IIP Plus, IIP, IID, II, 2686D/A •
The formatter PCA is defective.
61 Memory 4V, 4 Si, IIISi •
The SIMMs are defective.
61.x Service All Printers •
The SIMM in slot x is improperly fitted.
•
The SIMM in slot x is defective.
•
The formatter PCA is defective. Note: If x=0, the SIMM slot could not be determined.
62 Service 4P, IIIP, IIID, III, IIP Plus, IIP, IID, II, 2686D/A •
The formatter PCA is defective.
62 Memory 4V, 4Si, IIISi •
The SIMMs are defective.
58 – Control panel messages
EN
62.x Service/Printer Error, 62.0 Service, 62.1–4 Service, 62.5 Service, 62.6 Service All Printers •
The font cartridge or the SIMMs are improperly fitted. – Reseat the SIMMs and/or the font cartridge; power cycle the printer.
•
The internal memory is defective. (x=0) – Replace the formatter PCA.
•
The SIMM in slot x is defective.
•
The font cartridge (x=5) is defective.
4V •
Replace the cache.
63 Service 6L, 5L •
The formatter PCA is defective. – Power cycle the printer. Disconnect the parallel I/O cable and run a self test. If the error persists, replace the formatter PCA.
6P, 5P, 5, 4P, 4 Plus, 4, IIIP, IIID, III, IIP Plus, IID, II, 2686A/D •
The formatter PCA is defective. – Replace the formatter PCA.
4V •
The formatter PCA is defective. – Power cycle the printer; replace the formatter PCA.
4V, 4Si, IIISi • EN
The SIMMs are defective. Error Codes – 59
1
64 Service/Printer Error All Printers •
The formatter PCA is defective.
5Si •
The DC controller PCA is defective.
65 Memory 4V, 4Si, IIISi •
The SIMMs are defective.
65 Service All Printers (except 4Si, IIISi) •
The formatter PCA is defective.
4V, 4Si •
A temporary error has occurred. – Power cycle the printer.
65 Printer Error 5Si, 6P, 5P, 5 •
A dynamic RAM error is indicated. – Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on. If the message persists, replace the formatter PCA.
60 – Control panel messages
EN
66.x.yy Device Error 5Si
1
If the control panel displays a 66.x.yy device error message, the printer will list additional error codes in the error log. These can be printed or viewed. A device error message indicates a paper-handling error. The printer is unable to communicate with the external paper handling PCA. Verify that the C-link cables are installed correctly. Print the PCL configuration page and note which installed devices are not present on the configuration page. x=paper-handling device 0=external paper handling (EPH) PCA 1=first device attached to EPH 2=second device attached to EPH 3=third device attached to EPH 4=fourth device attached to EPH 5=fifth device attached to EPH – Switch the printer and paper-handling devices off and then on. If the message persists: yy=paper-handling device error code If yy=1-22, 24: – Check the cabling between the printer and the device. Check the mechanical interface between the printer and the device. Replace the external paper-handling PCA. If yy=23: – Check the cabling and mechanical interface between the printer and the device. Replace the external paper-handling PCA. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to isolate the defective device. Repair or replace the defective device.
EN
Error Codes – 61
If yy=31: The printer is not supported by the paper-handling device 1. If yy=32: The printer is not supported by the paper-handling device 2. If yy=33: The printer is not supported by the paper-handling device 3. If yy=34: The printer is not supported by the paper-handling device 4. If yy=35: The printer is not supported by the paper-handling device 5. For error codes 31-35: Verify that the device is supported. – If the device is supported, follow the steps under yy=23. If yy=41: Device 1 reports an invalid configuration. If yy=42: Device 2 reports an invalid configuration. If yy=43: Device 3 reports an invalid configuration. If yy=44: Device 4 reports an invalid configuration. If yy=45: Device 5 reports an invalid configuration. For error codes 41-45: – Verify proper configuration for the device. If the configuration is correct, follow the steps under yy=23.
62 – Control panel messages
EN
67 Service/Printer Error 5Si •
1
The field replacement units (FRUs) are not installed properly. – Reinstall the FRUs.
LJ 5 •
The formatter PCA is defective. – Reseat any accessories. If the error persists, replace the formatter PCA.
4V •
A temporary error has occurred. – Power cycle the printer.
•
The paper guide and plate assembly are defective.
4P, 4Plus, 4, IIIP, IIID, III, IIP Plus, IIP, IID, II, 2686D/A •
The formatter PCA is defective. – Reseat any accessories. If the error persists, replace the formatter PCA.
4Si •
A temporary error has occurred. – Power cycle the printer.
•
The paper guide and plate assembly are defective.
67 Memory 4V, 4Si, IIISi •
EN
The SIMMs are defective.
Error Codes – 63
68 Error/Service All Printers •
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
A temporary error has occurred. – Press ]Continue] and check the control menu settings. Then, power cycle the printer.
6P, 5P •
(68 SERVICE) -NVRAM full. – Perform a nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM) initialization by holding down [Reset] for more than 20 seconds while turning on the printer.
5Si, 6P, 5P, 5 •
(68 Error) - error in NVRAM. – Check the control panel settings. Replace the formatter PCA if the problem persists.
5Si, 5 •
(68 SERVICE) -NVRAM full. – Power cycle the printer. If the problem persists, perform a NVRAM initialization by holding down [Item] or [Job Cancel] on the LJ 5) while turning the printer on. All control panel settings (including service mode settings) must be reset after this procedure.
4P, 4 Plus, 4 •
(68 Error) There is an error in the NVRAM. – Check the control panel settings. Replace the formatter PCA if the problem persists.
64 – Control panel messages
EN
4P, 4 Plus, 4 •
(68 SERVICE) The NVRAM is full. – Power cycle the printer. If the problem persists, perform a NVRAM initialization by holding down [Item] while turning on the printer. All control panel settings (including service mode settings) will require resetting following this procedure.
68 Memory 4V, 4Si, IIISi •
The SIMMs are defective.
69 Service All Printers •
The I/O PCA is defective. – Remove the optional I/O PCA, and then re-test.
•
The formatter PCA is defective. – Replace the formatter PCA.
70–71 Error All Printers •
The personality cartridge or the SIMM installed in the font or SIMM slot is incompatible with the printer. – Replace with compatible cartridges or the SIMM.
5Si •
EN
The MIO cards are faulty.
Error Codes – 65
1
72 Service All Printers •
The formatter PCA or the font cartridge is defective. – Replace the formatter PCA.
•
The font cartridge was removed during formatter PCA access. – Power cycle the printer and continue.
79 Service All Printers •
Check the software; drivers; memory PCAs; font, macro, or personality; cartridges; and optional I/O cards. Check the toner cartridge for defects.
•
Remove any accessories (such as font cartridges, memory PCAs, and SIMMs) that are plugged into the formatter PCA; reprint the file. If the problem persists, verify proper setup with the application vendor.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
66 – Control panel messages
EN
5Si •
An unrecoverable firmware error occurred.
1
1 Power cycle the printer. 2 Reseat or replace the interface cable; power cycle the printer. 3 Remove the SIMMs one at a time and power cycle the printer. 4 Remove the MIO card(s) one at a time and power cycle. 5 Try using the parallel interface, if possible. 6 With the MIO cards out of the printer, perform a cold reset. 7 If the error continues, replace the formatter PCA. Write down the page count and serial number.
80 MIO Failure All Printers •
The MIO connection is improper. – Inspect the pins on the formatter PCA MIO connection.
•
The MIO card is defective.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
81 Error All Printers •
EN
The formatter PCA is defective.
Error Codes – 67
89 PostScript ROM Failure All Printers (except 6L and 5L) •
The PostScript ROMs have bent or broken pins.
•
Inspect the PostScript ROMs/SIMM for bent or broken pins.
•
The ROMs/SIMM are improperly located. – Check that the ROMs/SIMM are in the correct location and are oriented properly.
•
A temporary error has occurred. – Power cycle the printer.
•
The PostScript ROMs/SIMM are defective.
Blank Display All Printers •
There is no power. – Check the AC and DC voltages.
•
The display panel, related cabling, or drive circuitry is defective. – Check the input voltages that illuminate the display panel.
•
The display, cable, formatter PCA, or DC controller is faulty.
4V •
There is no power. – Verify the input power, and then check CB101 and F101.
•
The control panel or formatter PCA is defective. – Print an engine test print; if it is satisfactory, replace the control panel and then replace the formatter PCA.
68 – Control panel messages
EN
All LEDs Off (blank display) 6L, 5L •
1
The printer is in sleep mode. – Press the front panel button or open the EP door.
•
No power is supplied to the printer. – Check the power cord connections and the power source.
•
Determine if the print engine is functional. – Print an engine test; if it is successful, replace the formatter PCA.
•
The control panel PCA cable is defective.
•
Check the fuses on the DC controller.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
4L •
The printer is in Intelligent Off mode. – Press the front panel button, or open the top door.
•
Power is not supplied to the printer. – Check the power cord connections and the power source.
•
Print an engine test print to determine if the print engine is functional. – If the test is successful, replace the formatter PCA.
•
Check fuses FU101 and FU201 on the DC controller PCA. – Replace if necessary.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The connector between the DC controller and the formatter PCA is defective. – Replace the connector.
EN
Error Codes – 69
All LEDs On (without pressing the front panel button) 6L, 5L, 4L •
This is a service error. – Hold down the front panel button to display the error LED code. This code will be shown only while the button is pressed.
•
All LEDs remain on while pressing the front panel button. – Power cycle the printer. If the error persists, replace the formatter PCA.
Data and Ready LEDs are Blinking 6L, 5L •
This indicates a firmware error. – Note the LED pattern, bitronics error code, printer condition, data sent, and any other information that may help to isolate the error. Contact HP technical support with this information.
Data LED is Blinking 6L, 5L •
The printer is set to manual feed. – Insert paper into the manual feed slot. Ensure that the correct paper is loaded in the printer. Press and release the front panel button. If manual feed is not desired, turn off the setting in the software application.
•
The printer is stuck on manual feed. – Press the front panel button to override the manual feed request and to feed paper from the paper cassette.
•
The input paper sensor (PS1) or the front oblique roller assembly is defective. – Replace the PS1 or the front oblique roller assembly.
70 – Control panel messages
EN
Display Is All Block Characters All Printers •
1
The display cable is defective or disconnected. – Reseat or replace the display panel cable.
•
The control panel is defective.
•
The formatter PCA is defective. – Check and replace as needed.
Error LED is On Continuously 6L, 5L •
Power cycle the printer.
•
There is a bad connection between the formatter PCA and the AC controller.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
The AC controller is defective.
Tray 1 LED is Blinking 6P •
The printer is set to manual feed. Insert paper into Tray 1 and press [Go].
FS Disk Failure 4V •
The printer detected a disk failure.
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Press [Shift] + [Continue] to continue printing. – Power cycle the printer.
EN
Error Codes – 71
•
The disk drive is improperly fitted. – Reseat the disk drive; ensure that the connector pins are fully seated.
•
The disk drive is not installed. – Run a self-test to verify the presence of the disk drive (look under Installed Options: Disk on the self-test page).
•
The disk drive is defective. – Replace the disk drive.
PC Install 4V •
The paper size is incorrect. – Verify that the correct paper-size label (protruding tab) is installed in the left side of the paper cassette.
•
The size-sensor arm is damaged. – Check cassette-size sensor arms for bending or damage.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective. – Replace the control panel. If the problem still exists, replace the formatter PCA.
4V, 4 Plus, 4 •
The lower cassette (Tray 3) is selected and the printer has detected that the paper cassette (Tray 2) is not installed. – Install or reseat the paper cassette (Tray 2). Tray 2 is the paper guide for the lower cassette (Tray 3).
•
The paper cassette is improperly fitted.
72 – Control panel messages
EN
2
Service mode
Overview This chapter provides the procedures used to access service mode and related functions.
EN
Overview – 73
Service Mode Tasks You can perform the following tasks while in service mode. •
Print a service mode self-test page.
•
Verify the page count. (The page count is also displayed on the standard self-test page.)
•
Set the page count (not available on 4L and IIP).
•
See the maintenance count and serial number (4 Si and IIISi).
•
Set the cold reset default (LJ5, 4P, 4 Plus, LJ4). This sets the factory default paper size.
•
Set the diagnostic function on and off (LJ5, 4P, 4 Plus, LJ4), (for software developers use only).
•
Remove the demo page option from the self-test menu: Demo Page = On/Off (LJ5, 4 P, 4 Plus, LJ4).
Note The tasks listed above are not available on the 2686D/A.
74 – Service mode
EN
Accessing Service Mode Use the following procedures to access service mode.
Note There is no service mode or NVRAM on LaserJet 6L, 5L, 6P, 5P, or 4L printers. The page counts are retained only while the printer is plugged in; the page count is lost when the printer is unplugged.
2
Note Use PJL commands in the software to access service mode in LJ5P and LJ 4 ML printers. See the service manual for more information. LJ5Si Mopier, LJ5 Si 1 Turn the printer off. 2 Press [Items] and [+] simultaneously while turning the printer on. 3 Press [Select]. After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode. LJ5 1 Turn the printer off. 2 Press [Menu +] and [Value+] simultaneously while turning the printer on. After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode. LJ 4V, 4P, 4Plus, 4, 4Si 1 Turn the printer off. 2 Press [On Line], [Form Feed], and [Enter] simultaneously while turning the printer on. 3 Press [Form Feed], and then press [Enter]. After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode.
EN
Accessing Service Mode – 75
LJ IIISi 1 Turn the printer off. 2 Press [On Line], [Continue], and [Enter] simultaneously while turning the printer on. 3 Press [Continue], and then press [Enter]. After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode. LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP 1 Turn the printer off. 2 Press [On Line}, [Menu], and [Enter] simultaneously while turning the printer on. 3 Press [Form Feed], and then press [Enter]. After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode. LJ IIID, III, IID, II 1 Turn the printer off. 2 Press [On Line], [Continue/Reset], and [Enter/Reset Menu] simultaneously while turning the printer on. 3 Press [Continue/Reset], and then press [Enter/Reset Menu] After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode.
76 – Service mode
EN
Setting the Page Count (except on the LJ 6L, 6P, 5P, 4L, IIP) The page count is stored in the printer in non-volatile memory. If it is necessary to replace the formatter PCA, the page count should be reset to the original page count to reflect the age of the print engine. Use the following procedure to set the page count. 1 When 00 SMODE or SERVICE MODE is displayed, press [Menu] to modify the page count. 4, 4+, and 4P only: Press [Menu] to access the service menu. Press [Item] to proceed through the menu. PAGES=XXXXXX is displayed. (XXXXXX represents the page count currently stored in non-volatile memory in the printer. The underlined character denotes the position of the cursor.) 2 Press [+] (or [ALT] and [-]) to scroll until the correct value is displayed for the underlined digit. 3 Press [Enter] to select the correct value. The cursor automatically moves one place to the right. 4 Set each digit in the same manner. When the last digit’s value has been selected, the display returns to 00 SMODE or SERVICE MODE. 5 Press [On Line] to exit service mode.
EN
Setting the Page Count – 77
2
Setting the Page Count and Serial Number LJ 4V 1 Enter service mode. See page 74 for instructions. 2 When Service Mode is displayed, press [Menu] to access the service menu. 3 Press [Item] to proceed through the menu. Pages=XXXXXX is displayed. (XXXXXX represents the page count currently stored in non-volatile memory in the printer. The underlined character denotes the position of the cursor.) 4 Press [Enter] to scroll the cursor to underline the desired digit. 5 Press [+/]-] to select the correct value. 6 Press [Enter] to store the new value in NVRAM. 7 Set each digit in the same manner. 8 Press [On Line] to return the display to Service Mode. 9 Press [On Line] a second time to exit service mode.
Setting the Page Count LJ 5Si, 4Si, IIISi 1 Hold down the [Item-] and [Value-] keys. 2 Turn the printer on. 3 Wait until RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT displays and then release both keys.
Note MAINTENANCE COUNT in the Service Mode menu sets the page count interval at which the next service is due for the printer. This is set initially at the factory to 200,000 pages (350,000 for 5Si printers). Editing this item is similar to editing the Pages item.
78 – Service mode
EN
Setting the Default Paper Size for a Cold Reset The initial default paper size for the formatter PCAs in Europe is A4. When replacing formatters whose default is set for A4 (European Formatters), set the customization variable to A4. When the customization variable is set to A4, the cold reset procedure cannot reset the paper size to Letter. Use the following procedures to customize the cold reset paper size: LJ 5Si 1 Enter service mode. See page 74 for instructions. 2 Press [Menu] to access the Service Menu. 3 Press [Items] to step through the menu until COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER* is displayed. 4 Press [+] to toggle between Letter and A4 paper. 5 Press [Select] to activate your choice. 6 Press [On Line] to exit service mode. 7 Perform a cold reset to activate a new choice. LJ 5 1 Turn the printer off. 2 Hold [Go] down while turning the printer on. FACTORY DEFAULTS BEING RESTORED is displayed. The cold reset does not take effect until READY is displayed. When READY displays, the default settings have been returned to the factory defaults and the printer is ready to accept new settings. LJ 4V 1 Enter service mode. See page 74 for instructions. 2 Press [Menu] to access the service menu. 3 Press [Item] to step through the menu until CR PAPER=LETTER* is displayed. 4 Press [+/]-] to toggle between Letter and A4 paper. EN
Setting the Default Paper Size for a Cold Reset – 79
2
5 Press [Enter] to save your selection. 6 Press [On Line] to return the display to SERVICE MODE. 7 Press [On Line] a second time to exit service mode. LJ 4, 4 Plus, and 4P Only 1 Enter service mode as described in this section. 2 Press [Menu] to display SERVICE MENU. 3 Press [Item] to display CR PAPER=LETTER*. 4 Press [+/]-] to toggle between Letter and A4 paper. 5 Press [Enter] to save your selection. 6 Press [On Line] to exit service mode.
Setting the PowerSave Interval In service mode, you can add an additional 10-second time interval to the PowerSave function. LJ 4V 1 With Service Mode displayed, press [Menu] until JOB MENU is displayed. 2 Press [Item] until PWRSAVE= is displayed. 3 Press [+/]-] until the desired time interval is displayed. 4 Press [Enter] to save your selection. 5 Press [On Line] once to return to service mode. 6 Press [On Line] again to place the printer back online.
80 – Service mode
EN
3
Power supply
Overview The following schematics will assist in checking and verifying printer systems and functions, including operating voltages, power supplies, and circuitry.
EN
Overview – 81
LaserJet 6L, 5L The DC controller PCA coordinates all print engine activities, drives the laser, and coordinates print data from the formatter PCA with the image formation process. The DC controller includes both an AC and DC power supply and distribution circuitry. The DC controller controls the following systems and functions: Print Engine Control • Laser and Scanner Drive • Paper Motion Photosensors (Paper Out, Paper Registration, and Paper Exit Sensors) • Motor Power System • AC Power Distribution • DC Power Distribution • Overcurrent/Undervoltage Protection • SleepMode • High Voltage Power Distribution
82 – Power supply
EN
DC Controller
3 Figure 3-1
EN
DC Controller Loads
LaserJet 6L, 5L – 83
LaserJet 5Si The AC and DC power supply circuits are contained in the Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS). The high voltages required for image formation are generated by the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). The Low Voltage Power Supply and Distribution System are illustrated below.
Figure 3-2
Low Voltage Power Supply and Distribution System
84 – Power supply
EN
LaserJet 5P, 4P, and 4L The DC power supply circuitry, located on the DC controller PCA, generates +5 DC and +12 DC. Uses for each are summarized below. +5 DC • Formatter PCA • Photosensors • DC controller circuitry • Laser scanner assembly +12 V DC • High voltage power supply • Main motor • Solenoids • Fan (through the laser scanner assembly)
Figure 3-3 EN
Power System Block Diagram LaserJet 5P, 4P, and 4L – 85
3
LaserJet 5, 4 Plus, 4
Pin 1
2
3
4
6
5
TB 201
Figure 3-4 DC Power Supply Checks (LJ5, LJ4 & LJ4+) TB201 on DC controller Use this procedure to verify the operating voltages of the LJ5, LJ4, and LJ4+: 1 Listen for the exhaust fan. A rotating fan indicates that the +5V DC and the +24 V DC are present. (The fan runs on +24V DC.) 2 Listen for the main motor. If the main motor runs, +24V DC is enabled. TB201 electrical connector Voltage
Color
Pin Number
+5V DC
Brown
1, 2
+24V DC
Red
3
Ground
Blue
4, 5, 6
86 – Power supply
EN
LaserJet 4V The DC power distribution circuitry, located on the DC controller PCA, distributes +5 V DC, +12 V DC, and +24 V DC, as shown. +5 V DC • Control Panel • Formatter PCA • Photosensors (PS 401, PS 402) • DC Controller Circuitry • Laser Scanner Assembly • Exhaust Fans, FM1 and FM2 (low speed) • Intake Fan, FM3 +12 V DC
3
• Laser Scanner Assembly +24 V DC • Laser Scanner Assembly • High Voltage Power Supply • Clutches and Solenoids • Exhaust Fans, FM1 and FM2 (high speed)
EN
LaserJet 4V – 87
Power Supply Unit Circuit Breaker CB101
Noise Filter
Power Switch (SW101)
Filter Fuse (F101)
Front Door Switch (SW102) Fusing Heater Drive Circuit
Switching Transistor
Transformer
Control IC
Photocoupler
+24V
Rectifier 24V to 5V
Overcurrent Protection Front Door Switch (SW102)
+5V
/RELE /FUSE1ON /FUSE2ON +24V
Fuser Heater
+24V +5V +12V
+24V
/RELE /FUSE1ON /FUSE2ON
+24V
FM1
+24V (High Spd.) +5V (Low Spd.)
FM2
+24V (High Spd.) +5V (Low Spd.)
Intake Fan FM3
Figure 3-5
+5V (Low Spd.)
High Voltage Power Supply
Developing Bias Transfer Charging Roller Toner Sensor
DC Controller +24V
Exhaust Fans
Primary Charging Roller
+5V
+5V
+24V
Laser / Scanner Unit
+5V +24V
+5V
Main Motor (M1)
Front Door Assembly
Interface PCA
+5V +24V
Sensors, Clutches, Solenoids
Control Panel Formatter PCA
DC Controller Loads
88 – Power supply
EN
LaserJet 4Si, IIISi Follow this procedure to verify the voltages on the LaserJet 4Si and IIISi printers: 1 Listen for the fans. Running fans indicate that the +5 V DC and the +24 V DC are present. 2 Make sure that the 24A V DC is available on pin 1 of J203 on the sensor PCA. 3 Listen for the main motor to start. If the main motor runs, 24B V DC is enabled. This means that the 24B V DC is also present.
LaserJet 4Si, IIISi Voltage Test Points
3
Voltage
Test Point
Notes
+5 V DC
CP031
On DC controller
+24 A
CP028
On DC controller
+24 B
CP023 and top of R 006
On DC controller (off when the top cover is open)
+12 V DC
J14, Pin 5
Present when top cover is closed
EN
LaserJet 4Si, IIISi – 89
LaserJet IIIP, IIP+, IIP
Figure 3-6
DC Power Supply Checks (IIIP, IIP+, IIP)
1 DC power supply 2 J1 on formatter PCA PIN
1
n/c
2
3
4
SIGNAL
+5
n/c
+5
Ground
Ground
COLOR
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue
3 J212 on DC Controller Pin Number
Color
1
BLUE
Supply GROUND
2 3
BLUE
GROUND
RED
+24V *
4 5
RED
+24V *
BLUE
GROUND
6 7
ORANGE
+12V
BLUE
GROUND
8 9
BROWN
+5V
YELLOW
/FSRDRV
*Requires that the paper path door is closed or the power supply interlock disabled.
90 – Power supply
EN
LaserJet IIID, III, IID, II
3 Figure 3-7
DC Power Supply Checks (IIID, III, IID, II)
The LaserJet Service Diagnostic Tool can also be used to check voltages. Test tool III, II: Part number 33440-67905 • Checks DC voltages • Checks high-voltage bias • Runs test patterns Test tool IIID, IID: Part number 33447-67906 • Checks DC voltages • Checks high-voltage bias • Monitors the status of the paper sensors • Monitors the status of the solenoids
EN
LaserJet IIID, III, IID, II – 91
LaserJet 2868D/2686A
J502 +24V (UA) GND +30V (UB) -5 GND +5 GND +24V (R)
J208 Figure 3-8
DC Power Voltage Supply Checks (2686D, 2686A)
92 – Power supply
EN
4
Input/Output (I/O)
Overview This section provides information on cabling and the printer interface.
EN
Overview – 93
Bidirectional Parallel Interface (LJ 6L, 5Si, 5L, 6P, 5P, 5, 4V, 4P, 4L, 4 Plus, 4, 4Si, and IIISi) The bidirectional parallel interface (IEEE-1284 compliant) is compatible with Centronics parallel interfaces. The following items are required to take advantage of the enhanced capabilities provided by bidirectional parallel interfaces, such as bidirectional communication: •
Software application support for these features.
•
An IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable with the correct pin configuration (see below). Signal Name
Printer Pin #
Parallel Port Pin # 1
nSTROBE
1
DATA 1
2
2
DATA 2
3
3
DATA 3
4
4
DATA 4
5
5
DATA 5
6
6
DATA 6
7
7
DATA 7
8
8
DATA 8
9
9
nACKNLG
10
10
BUSY
11
11
CALL (PE)
12
12
SELECT
13
13
nAUTOFd
14
14
On VDC (GND)
19 THRU 30
18 THRU 25
nFAULT
32
15
nSelIn
36
17
94 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
IEEE-1284 Compliant Parallel Cables HP helped develop the IEEE-1284 standard and is one of the first companies to introduce products that are compliant with it. HP offers the following IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cables. Part Number
Length
Connector Type
C2950A
2 meters (7 feet)
Host A to printer B (large) connector
C2951A
3 meters (10 feet)
Host A to printer B (large) connector
C2945A
2 meters (7 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
C2946A
3 meters (10 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
C2947A
10 meters (33 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
4
EN
IEEE-1284 Compliant Parallel Cables – 95
RS-232-C/RS-422-A Serial Interface Common Serial I/O Cables The following serial cabling schematics are typical of IBM (AT/XT) and compatible personal computers that use the standard (9/25) pin serial RS-232C interface.
Male DB-25 cable to Female DB-25 (17255D) Printer (Male connector) Chassis Ground TD RD DSR Sig Gnd DTR
Computer (Female connector) 1 2 3 6 7 20
1 3 2 20 7 5 6
Chassis Ground RD TD DTR Sig Gnd DSR Clear to Send
(Pins not shown are not used)
Male DB-25 cable to Female DB-9 (24542G) Printer (Male connector) TD RD DSR Sig Gnd DTR
Computer (Female connector) 2 3 6 7 20
96 – Input/Output (I/O)
2 3 4 5 6 8
RD TD DTR Sig Gnd DSR Clear to Send
EN
Male DB-9 cable to Female DB-9 (C2932A) Printer (Male connector)
Computer (Female connector) 2 3 4 5 6 8
TD RD DSR Sig Gnd DTR DTR HOOD M DB-9
2 3 4 5 6 8
RD TD DTR Sig Gnd DSR CTS
HOOD F DB-9
SHIELD
Male DB-9 cable to Female DB-25 (C2933A) Printer (Male connector) TD RD DSR Sig Gnd DTR DTR
HOOD M DB-9
EN
Computer (Female connector)
2 3 4 5 6 8
3 2 20 7 6 5 1
RD TD DTR Sig Gnd DSR CTS Chassis Ground HOOD F DB-9
RS-232-C/RS-422-A Serial Interface – 97
4
25- to 9-pin serial adaptor (P/N C2809A) The pin-outs for the adaptor are shown below:
C2809A pin configuration 9-pin Male 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Shell
98 – Input/Output (I/O)
25-pin Female 4 2 3 6 7 20
not connected not connected not connected Shell
EN
Serial I/O Specifications Handshaking Protocol
RS-232-C: Xon/Xoff (software) and Data Terminal Ready (hardware) RS-422-A: Xon/Xoff (software) only The signal logic or “sense” of the data terminal ready (DTR) line is switchable to either active HIGH (the factory default) or active LOW from the printer control panel.
Data Format
Asynchronous with 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit
Parity
Not used
Supported Baud Rates
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 57600*, 115200**
*LJ 4 and newer: Supports up to 57,600 Baud **LJ 4000/LJ 5000: Supports up to 115,200 Baud
Maximum I/O Cable Lengths 4 Serial RS-232C RS-22A
15 meters (50 feet) 1200 meters (4,000 feet)
Parallel (non-IEEE 1284)
3 meters (10 feet)
Parallel (IEEE 1284 with “B” type connector)
3 meters (10 feet)
Parallel (IEEE 1284 with “C” type connector)
10 meters (34 feet)
EN
Serial I/O Specifications – 99
Configuring the Computer Interface The following information applies to IBM personal computers (PCs) and compatible computer systems. Use MS-DOS® EDIT or a similar program to enter the appropriate MSDOS MODE commands in the computer's AUTOEXEC.BAT file. See the getting started guide or set-up manual for the printer for step-bystep instructions. For parallel communication, enter:
MODE LPT1:,,B (Note: Change “B” to “P” if PRN and press [Enter]. When you do, the printer's Form Feed light should illuminate. 5 If necessary, take the printer off line and press [Form]Feed] to eject the page.
4
EN
Verifying Communication – 101
Macintosh Use this procedure to verify communication between a Macintosh computer and an HP LaserJet III printer:
Note The LaserJet printer must have PostScript and AppleTalk installed and have at least 1 megabyte of additional memory. 1 Turn the computer on. 2 Make sure the PostScript cartridge is properly seated. 3 Turn the printer on and wait until the printer displays POSTSCRIPT READY. 4 Verify that the front panel is set to I/O=APPLETK. 5 Pull down the Apple menu. 6 Select Chooser. 7 Select Printer Type. 8 Select Printer (AppleTalk must be active). 9 Close Chooser by selecting box in the upper-left corner. 10 Pull down the File menu. 11 Select Print Window or Print Desktop. The READY light should start flashing before the page ejects.
102 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
Infrared Communications (6P, 5P, 5 Only) The 6P, 5P, and 5 printers feature an infrared (IR) port that is compliant with the Infrared Data Association (IrDA) standard. (The LaserJet 5 requires an additional transceiver pod.) A status light indicates when the port is active. The light is located just above the port, which is located on the lower-left corner of the LJ 6P and the LJ 5P, and on the pod on the LJ 5.
Note The IrDA standard for infrared communications represents an emerging technology. Older portable devices that are not IrDAcompliant may not be compatible with these printers.
Troubleshooting IR Printing Problems IR printing problems can be caused by any of the several system components or by a lack of proper configuration. The following checklist will help determine the source of the problem. 1 Verify that the user is operating the printer and PC as described in the user guide: less than 1 meter between devices, and not more than +/-15 degrees from the direct center. 2 Verify that the host PC or laptop and the printer are IrDA-compliant and have the necessary hardware components for IR communication. 3 Verify that the IR software has been loaded on the primary device (system software from the PC manufacturer). 4 Verify that the host PC or laptop is properly configured. Check the port assignment, the interrupt request (IRQ) level, and the base address value. Check both the DOS AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files, and check the Windows system configuration.
EN
Infrared Communications (6P, 5P, 5 Only) – 103
4
IR Test Tool If all these elements are properly installed and configured, use the IR Tester to test the IrDA protocol transmission and device operation. Designed for troubleshooting IR communication problems, this tool was developed by Genoa Technology, Inc., in cooperation with HewlettPackard. The part number is 5062-4661. Order it through HP Parts Direct Ordering (see inside back cover). To test the peripheral device: 1 Put the LaserJet printer in READY mode. 2 Press the “Peripheral Test” button on the tester. The LEDs on the tester will illuminate in sequence. If the “PASS” LED lights, the test was successful, which indicates that communication with the printer's IR port is functioning normally. A selftest page will print as a result of the test. If the “TEST” LED goes out and the “PASS” LED fails to light, the printer's IR port is not functioning correctly. To test the host computer: 1 Place the tester on a table in front of the PC's IR port. 2 Press the “Computer Test” button. The tester will sequence the LEDs. If the “PASS” LED lights, the test was successful, which indicates that communication with the computer's IR port is functioning normally. If the “TEST” LED goes out and the “PASS” LED fails to light, the host's IR port is not functioning correctly.
104 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
Selecting the I/O Type Use the front panel menus to select the I/O type and to configure the I/Os. When the formatter PCA is replaced, the I/O type will reset to the default value. In early LaserJet printers (2686D/A), use the formatter switches to select the I/O configuration, as follows.
LaserJet 2686D, 2686A Only Setting Switch 1 (SW1) Switch Use No.
ON
OFF
11
I/O Type
Parallel
Serial RS 232C/422
2-42
Baud Rate
See figure 4-1.
See figure 4-1.
51
Auto Continue
Continues on print and data errors after flashing 10 times.
Flash error occurs until the operator presses [Continue].
61
Robust X-ON X-ON is repeated every 1 second when the printer is waiting for data.
Only 1 X-ON is sent when the printer needs more data.
73
Auto Select Mode
Powers up in auto-select mode.
Powers up with autoselect mode off.
82
DTR Polarity
DTR pin 20 high when the printer is ready.
DTR pin 20 low when the printer is ready.
1
Refers to HP 2686A+ and HP 2686D models
2
Refers to all models of HP 2686 printers
3
Refers to HP 2686D models only
EN
Selecting the I/O Type – 105
4
Baud Rate Switch (SW1) Switch Number Baud Rate
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
300
OFF
OFF
ON
600
OFF
ON
OFF
1200
OFF
ON
ON
2400
ON
OFF
OFF
4800
ON
OFF
ON
9600
ON
ON
OFF
19200
Figure 4-1
Baud Rate Switch
106 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
5
Media specifications
Overview Select media that meets the specifications listed on the following pages. By doing so, you will minimize the incidents of jams, prevent premature wear to the printer, and reduce repair costs. Hewlett-Packard recommends testing print media before buying it in large quantities.
Note For complete paper specifications for all LaserJet printers, see the HP LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide.
EN
Overview – 107
Paper Sizes Metric System Size
Metric Dimensions
U.S. Dimensions
A0
841 x 1189 mm
33.1 x 46.8 in
A3
297 x 420 mm
11.7 x 16.5 in
A4
210 x 297 mm
8.3 x 11.7 in
A5
148 x 210 mm
5.8 x 8.3. in
B4 (ISO)
250 x 353 mm
9.8 x 13.9 in
B5 (ISO)
176 x 250 mm
6.9 x 9.8 in
Imperial (U.S.) System Size
U.S. Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Ledger
11 x 17 in
279 x 432 mm
Legal
8.5 x 14 in
216 x 356 mm
Letter
8.5 x 11 in
216 x 279 mm
Executive
7.25 x 10.5 in
184 x 267 mm
JIS B4**
10.1 x 14.3 in
257 x 364 mm
JIS B5**
7.2 x 10.1 in
182 x 257 mm
J Postcard*
3.9 x 5.8 in
100 x 148 mm
J Double Postcard*
5.8 x 7.9 in
148 x 200 mm
* J - Japanese ** JIS Japanese Industry Standard
108 – Media specifications
EN
Paper Specifications Category
Specifications
Acid Content
5.5 pH to 8.0 pH
Basis Weight: LJ 5, 6L front output slot LJ 6P Tray 1
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb)
LJ 5P paper cassette LJ 5L,6L paper output bin LJ 5 Tray 2 LJ 5Si Tray 2, Tray 3,Tray 4* *(Opt. 2000 sheet feeder) LJ 6P Tray 2
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb)
LJ 5Si Tray 1
60 to 199 g/m2 (16 to 63 lb)
LJ 5 Tray 1
60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb) (5P may use media up to 42 lb with Sheffield rating of 100 to 180 in the manual feed slot only)
LJ 5 Tray 3
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)
4V, 4MV all paper sources
64 to 105 g/m2 (17 to 28 lb)
II, III IID, IID upper Tray LJ 4, 4+ MP Tray LJ 4L, 4P manual feed slot
60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb) (4P and 5P may use media up to 42 lb with Sheffield rating of 100 to 180 in the manual feed slot only)
IIP, IIIP, IIP+ IIISi, 4Si simplex LJ 4, 4+ PC Tray LJ 4L, 4P paper cassette
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb)
IID, IID lower Tray IID, IIID 4+ duplex IIISi, 4Si duplex LJ 4, 4+ LC Tray
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)
Caliper
3.0 to 7.0 mils (0.094 to 0.18 mm)
Curl In ream
Flat within 5 mm (0.2 in)
Cut edge conditions
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 seconds
Grain
Long grain
Moisture content
4% to 6% by weight
Smoothness
100-250 Sheffield
EN
Paper Specifications – 109
5
Paper Weight Equivalences (Approximate) Metric Weight U.S. Weight (lb) or Thickness (mm) (g/m2) Europe Japan
Postcard* Bond Text thickness Wt Book Wt
Cover Bristol Index Tag Wt Wt Wt Wt
1
60
60
16
41
22
27
33
2
64
64
17
43
24
29
35
39
3
75
75
20
50
28
34
42
46
4
80
80
21
54
30
36
44
49
5
80
80
22
56
31
38
44
49
6
90
90
24
60
33
41
50
55
7
100
100
27
68
37
45
55
61
37
8
105
105
28
70
39
49
58
65
9
120
120
32
80
44
55
67
74
10
120
120
34
80
44
55
67
74
11
135
135
36
90
50
62
75
83
12
148
148
39
100
55
67
82
91
13
157
157
.19
42
107
58
72
87
97
14
163
163
.20
43
110
60
74
90
100
15** 176
176
.23
47
119
65
80
97
108
.18
* U.S. postcard measurements are approximate. Use for reference only. ** This media weight (row 15) may perform to your satisfaction but it is beyond the printer’s specifications. Printing with this media weight will not damage the printer.
110 – Media specifications
EN
Troubleshooting Paper Problems Paper problems can be difficult to detect. The following series of steps will help isolate paper-induced problems versus printer problems: •
Isolate a paper path.
•
Isolate a brand of paper.
•
Isolate a type of paper.
•
Evaluate paper-use practices.
•
Evaluate environmental conditions.
Here are some simple tips: •
Turn the paper over and print on the other side. Doing so often corrects excess paper curl.
•
Rotate the paper 180° (end-for-end) to feed a different leading edge. This can help correct multi-sheet feeding problems.
5
EN
Troubleshooting Paper Problems – 111
Papers to Avoid •
NCR self-carbon (or “carbonless” paper)
•
Paper that has been preprinted (such as letterhead) with ink that will not withstand fuser heat (205° C [400° F] for 0.1 second)
•
Plastic-fiber paper
•
Embossed paper
•
Paper with cutouts or perforations
•
Chemically treated paper
•
Coated paper
•
Synthetic paper
•
Multi-part forms
•
Odd-sized paper
If your printer is having trouble with paper jams, multi-feeds, or misfeeds, use HP-brand paper: HP 20 lb Multi-Purpose Paper, (part number 9300-2092); HP 24 lb LaserJet Paper, (part number 9300-2091).
112 – Media specifications
EN
General Tips Paper Curl Paper curl results both from the heating process used to bond the print image (toner) to the paper and from the path the paper must negotiate through the printer. Take the following actions to help reduce paper curl: 1 Turn the paper over in the input tray. Some paper packages (reams) have an arrow indicating the preferred printing side. Experiment to determine which orientation yields the least curl. 2 Try a different output paper path (if available for your printer). Using the face-up output path may yield more acceptable results than the standard face-down output bin. Note that the LJ5N, 5M, and 5 printers have no alternative output paper path. Use the LJ 6L/5L Front Output Slot and Paper Input Support if paper is curled or wrinkled. 3 Protect the paper from adverse environmental conditions prior to use. Paper designed for laser printing has an initial moisture content of 4-6 percent, which is maintained as long as the paper is stored properly. Once the paper has been removed from its packaging, it will dry out or absorb additional moisture, depending on the environment. Excess moisture in the paper will increase the amount of curl. 4 Try a different type or brand of paper. Not all paper is designed for laser printing. Much of the paper curl that is induced by the laser printer fusing process will tend to relax within the first 24 hours following printing. However, the curl on the leading edge of the page may remain longer because the leading edge tends to remain in contact with the fusing roller for longer periods. Consult the user guide for the printer and the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide, for more information.
EN
General Tips – 113
5
Envelope Specifications Category
Specifications
Basis Weight
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) single layer
Caliper
3.3 to 5.5. mils (0.084 to 0.14 mm) single layer thickness
Curl
Less than 5 mm (0.2 in) curl across entire surface
Finishing
Accurate, sharply creased folds with no more than two thicknesses of paper at the leading edge
Fusing Compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second
Moisture Content
4% to 6% by weight
Paper Smoothness
Must meet all the normal paper specifications 100 to 250 Sheffield
Envelope Sizes Metric System Size
Metric Dimensions
U.S. Dimensions
DL
110 x 220 mm
4.3 x 8.6 in
C5
162 x 229 mm
6.4 x 9.1 in
B5
176 x 250 mm
7.0 x 9.9 in
Imperial (U.S.) System Size
Metric Dimensions
U.S. Dimensions
Commercial #10
105 x 241 mm
4.1 x 9.5 in
Monarch #7 3/4
98 x 191 mm
39 x 7.5 in
114 – Media specifications
EN
Envelopes to Avoid Do not use the following envelopes: •
with clasps, snaps, or tie strings
•
with transparent windows, holes, perforations, or cutouts
•
having an open flap with adhesive exposed
•
having paper, inks, adhesives, or materials that discolor, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when exposed to 205° C (400° F)
•
having extremely smooth, shiny, rough, textured, or deeply embossed surfaces
•
damaged, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped
•
constructed with encapsulating adhesives that do not require moistening, but rely instead on pressure to seal them
Preventing Printer Malfunctions Caused by Envelopes When you are printing on envelopes, use these preventive measures to avoid printer malfunctions. •
Carefully feed the envelopes into the printer.
•
Be aware of the envelope’s construction.
5
EN
Envelope Specifications – 115
Envelope Feeding Following these preventive measures when feed envelopes •
Envelopes can be manually fed through the printer or they can be fed automatically through an envelope tray or feeder.
•
Closely inspect the leading edge of the envelopes before feeding them into the printer. Ensure the leading edge is flat. Watch for envelope curl. Flatten the leading edge of the envelope before printing.
•
Be patient; in manual feed mode the printer displays a message when it is ready to accept the next envelope. Wait for this message to appear before inserting the next envelope.
•
Do not allow a large quantity of envelopes to accumulate in the output bin.
•
On most printers, use the rear (or front) output bin (if available) when printing envelopes. Do not use the top (face-down) output bin.
Envelope Construction •
The corner folds need to be well-creased, with no more than two thicknesses of paper.
•
The envelopes must lay flat.
•
The paper grain should be diagonal to the direction of the feed.
•
Adhesives must meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
•
Basis weight must not exceed 90 g/m2 (24 pounds).
•
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, tie strings, or windows.
•
Do not use envelopes made of synthetic materials.
116 – Media specifications
EN
Label Specifications Category
Specifications
Adhesive
Must not be on any external surfaces of the label before, during, or after printing. Label construction and die-cutting must not allow labels to peel off during transport, printing, or fusing
Caliper
Most not exceed 0.18 mm (0.007 inches)
Curl
In ream: flat within 13 mm (0.5 inches)
Finishing Precision
Cut sheet within 0.79 mm (0.031 inches) of nominal and 0.20° square
Fusing Compatibility
All adhesions, carrier sheets, top sheets, and other materials used in label construction must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second
Packaging
Use moisture-proof wrap to preserve properties
5
EN
Label Specifications – 117
Preventing Printer Malfunctions Caused by Adhesive Labels As with envelopes, prevention is the best way to avoid printer malfunctions caused by adhesive labels. To prevent paper jams and feed problems, labels must meet the following requirements: •
Be cut long grain (as opposed to short grain)
•
Totally cover the carrier sheet (no spaces between labels, no removed labels)
•
Contain no excessive glue. (The adhesive should be acrylic-based emulsion and should not come into direct contact with the printer.)
•
Meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility
•
Meet HP specifications for caliper
•
Have a carrier sheet that is not too smooth
•
Use the flat paper path (manual feed slot and rear, or front, face-up delivery door), which is the recommended printing method
118 – Media specifications
EN
Transparency Specifications Category
Specifications
Caliper
3.9 to 4.3 mils (0.100 to 0.110 mm)
Cutting Angle
90° ± 0.2°
Finishing Precision
Cut sheet to within 0.8 mm (0.03 inches) of nominal and ± 0.2° of square.
Fusing Compatibility Overhead transparency material must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset material, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second
Preventing Printer Malfunctions Caused by Transparencies To prevent printer malfunctions caused by transparencies: •
Use the straightest paper path to avoid curling and other problems.
•
Use transparencies with the correct resistivity.
•
Use transparencies that meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
•
Remove each printed sheet from the tray and place it on a flat surface before printing the next sheet.
5
EN
Transparency Specifications – 119
HP Paper Training Video HP has developed a training video focusing on how paper is manufactured and how the manufacturing process relates to the use of paper in HP LaserJet printers. Part numbers are shown below.
Part No.
Version (VHS Format)
5961-0711
National Standard Television Committee (NTSC) Version (U.S.)
5961-0712
PAL Version (Europe, Asia)
The Paper Video explains the manufacturing process.
120 – Media specifications
EN
6
Toner cartridge information
Overview This chapter provides information on toner cartridges and their use. HP recommends using HP toner cartridges, which are designed specifically to enhance the output from the HP LaserJet family of printers.
EN
Overview – 121
Cartridge Weights/Page Counts Page Count at 5% Coverage
HP LaserJet
Product
Cartridge Full Weight
Empty Weight
6L, 5L
C3906A
EP-A
730 gm (25.7 oz.)
630 gm (22 oz)
2,500
5Si
C3909A
EP-W
3000 gm (106.7 oz)
2200 gm (80.5 oz)
15,000
6P, 5P
C3903A
EP-V
920 gm (32.8 oz)
740 gm (26 oz)
4,000
5
92298A
EP-E
1500 gm (52.9 oz)
1220 gm (43 oz)
6,800
4V
C3900A
EP-Bll
2060 gm (72.5 oz)
1710 gm (60.2 oz)
8,100
4P, 4L
92274A
EP-P
860 gm (30.3 oz)
740 gm (26 oz)
3,350
4Plus, 4
92298A
EP-E
1500 gm (52.9 oz)
1220 gm (43 oz)
6,800
4Si, IIISi
92291A
EP-N
2050 gm (72.2 oz)
1710 gm (60.2 oz)
10,250
IIIP, IIP+, IIP 92275A
EP-L
1050 gm (37 oz)
820 gm (28.9 oz)
3,500
IIID, III, IID, II 92295A
EP-S
1360 gm (47.9 oz)
1130 gm (39.8 oz)
4,000
2686D, 2686A
EP-C
1590 gm (56 oz)
1320 gm (46.5 oz)
3,000
92285A
122 – Toner cartridge information
EN
Potential Toner Cartridge Issues Banding When printing with a laser printer, the toner is applied across the page in horizontal strips. The page is moved through the printer and toner is continually applied. When printing text or black pages, a large amount of toner is deposited on the page. As the amount of toner deposited on the page decreases, slight speed variations become more apparent. As the resolution (dots per inch) and the speed (pages per minute) increase, a variation in pattern intensity may appear on the page as lines or bands. The bands are more visible in certain grayscale patterns. High speed printers that are capable of printing high resolution grayscale patterns are more likely to display the pattern variations. Changing the grayscale pattern or reducing the resolution may significantly reduce the amount of banding that occurs.
Character Voids Small gaps or voids may appear in some of the characters when printing on media other than standard photocopier paper. These “character voids” occur because some print media does not accept the transfer of toner as well as others. To minimize the occurrence of character voids, avoid media with a rough finish. Use media that is within the Hewlett-Packard paper specifications listed in the user guide or the HP LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide. If the finish is too rough, the surface will consist of large inconsistencies. If the finish is too smooth, toner will not adhere well. Adjusting the print density may affect the severity of character voids.
6
EN
Potential Toner Cartridge Issues – 123
Toner Cracking When the paper is folded and the crease aligns with a line of text, it is possible with certain types of paper for the text to break along the line, giving the appearance of a white line through the text. Papers that do not meet the smoothness (100-250 Sheffield, 100-500 Bendtsen) and/or wax pick (>11 Dennison) are likely to exhibit this effect more than others. Toner in the HP LaserJet printers is composed of minute particles of pigmented plastic material (styrene) and iron oxide. When the toner is subjected to the fusing temperature, these individual iron-impregnated plastic particles become part of a larger plastic image on the page. When the printed page is subsequently folded, the plastic image must also give, in some fashion, to accommodate the fold. If the print image has been well-set into the paper, this resulting break in the plastic will not be apparent. However, if the toner is unable to adequately penetrate the paper fibers, or if, in the process of folding the paper, the paper fibers behind the toner break away from the page itself, the result will be a “white line” through the image. There are several ways to minimize this effect: •
Ensure that the paper being used meets ALL of the specifications provided in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide, in particular the smoothness and wax pick.
•
A lighter density setting will ensure that the toner image will be composed of less plastic material, thus minimizing the resulting effect of trying to fold the toner image.
•
For the reasons listed earlier, a more narrow character-stroke width might also help.
•
Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) paper may fix toner cracking problems (see also the HP MICR User's Guide 5091-3857).
In xerographic (laser) printing, using paper that has a laid finish often causes problems. The surface roughness of the paper is often responsible for the problems. Paper that is stiffer than xerographic paper also causes problems. Stiff papers do not fold well. When stiff paper is folded and a toner image is applied to the paper’s surface, the problems are even worse.
124 – Toner cartridge information
EN
Transfer of Toner Image After printing a document on an HP LaserJet printer, folding it, and sending it through the mail, you might observe that a portion of the print image was transferred to opposing surfaces of the folded document. The laser printing process uses a pigmented plastic powder (toner) to form a print image that is first transferred to a sheet of paper (or other print medium) and then melted (fused) onto the surface of the paper to form a permanent image. Although paper is usually thought of as being soft, it is actually quite abrasive. When the printed page is folded, movement under pressure between a paper surface and the toner image may cause the paper to abrade (scratch) the toner, causing a transfer of the toner material onto the opposing surface of the paper. This can be demonstrated by rubbing a print image against (or into) a clean sheet of paper. Some machinery, such as that used by the U.S. Postal Service to sort mail, can apply the necessary pressure and agitation to cause this phenomenon of toner image transfer. To minimize this effect: •
Reduce the amount (or height) of toner used to produce the print image.
•
Use a paper that is less abrasive.
•
Ensure optimal fusing of the toner (print) image to the paper.
The amount of toner used to produce a print image is controlled by the print density dial, slide, or control panel settings in the HP LaserJet printers. The print density should be adjusted for a lighter image to reduce the amount (height) of toner prone to abrasive transfer. The HP LaserJet printers have been designed for optimum results with xerographic (laser) bond papers, such as XEROX 4024 photocopy paper. The properties of this type of paper (for example, surface roughness, composition, moisture content) are such that the other causes of potential toner transfer are minimized. Photocopy papers are typically less abrasive than other types of paper (such as writing bond) and are also formulated to ensure optimal fusing of the toner image. Using other types of paper will generally yield less than optimal results in laser printers. For help in selecting paper suitable for use in the EN
Potential Toner Cartridge Issues – 125
6
HP LaserJet printers, refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. This guide can be ordered by calling HP Parts Direct at 800-227-8164 in the U.S., or HP Distribution at 970-339-7009. Because of the way that laser printing is accomplished, currently there is no way to entirely eliminate the possibility of toner transfer. However, using these techniques should yield more satisfactory results and will often reduce the problem to imperceptible levels.
Gray Background on Envelopes Poor print quality is normally the result of using envelopes that are of the incorrect weight or finish. The paper used to construct the envelope may be embossed; or may be too heavy, too rough, or too slick; or may be made in such a way that it is incompatible with the high temperatures encountered in toner fusing. The result is that the toner does not adhere well to the surface. Also, on heavier envelopes, a gray background may appear on the front (or print side) of the envelope. To reduce the gray background, the print density may need to be set to a darker setting. (On the LaserJet 5, “5” is the darkest setting and “1” is the lightest.)
126 – Toner cartridge information
EN
HP PLANET PARTNERS The U. S., Canada, Europe, and Australia now have HP toner cartridge recycling programs. The used toner cartridge should be placed in the wrapper and box that held the new cartridge and sent back for recycling. U.S.
A brochure explaining the recycling program in the U.S., part number 5091-1325EUS, can be ordered. The customer returns used toner cartridges via UPS at no cost to the customer, using shipping labels included in the brochure. The toner cartridges can be shipped one at a time or in volume shipments. Some of the parts are recycled to make new cartridges. Other parts are melted for re-use as raw materials. If the customer has any questions, and to receive the free recycling brochure, refer them to the Customer Information Center at (800) 752-0900.
AUSTRALIA Australian customers can send their toner cartridges to their local HP dealer. If more than 30 cartridges a month are used, contact the local dealer for instructions on how to have the cartridges picked up directly from the customer's site. For further information, contact the dealer or local HP sales office.
EUROPE
The recycling program in Europe currently includes these countries: Germany, Switzerland, Austria, United Kingdom, the Netherlands, and Sweden. If more than 30 cartridges a month are used, contact the local dealer for instructions on how to have the cartridges picked up directly from the customer's site. For further information, contact the dealer or local HP sales office.
CANADA
Canada uses Federal Express for their recycling program. At least eight but no more than 40 Toner Cartridges can be shipped at one time. Shipments of fewer than eight cartridges are at the shipper's expense. Call Federal Express at (800) GoFedEx; (800) 463-3339 to arrange for free pickup of the bundled cartridges. Fill out a Federal Express Waybill or obtain a preprinted one from your dealer. In Alberta, B.C., Manitoba, NWT, Saskatchewan, and the Yukon, send the bundles to: Hewlett-Packard Toner Cartridge Recycling Program 6551 Westminister Hwy, Unit 160 Richmond, B.C. V7C 4V4 Acct. No.: 1246-1740-5 In the Atlantic provinces, Ontario, and Quebec send the bundles to: Hewlett-Packard Toner Cartridge Recycling Program 6600 Goreway Drive, Unit C Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1S6 Acct. No.: 1246-1740-5 For more information, call: Canada wide: (800) 387-3867, Dept. 129; Toronto: (800) 678-9430, Ext. 4981
EN
HP PLANET PARTNERS – 127
6
Note Recycling information is now also included in the toner cartridge package. For additional information about HP corporate-wide, environmental policies, practices, and awards, visit www.hp.com.
Refill Statement Hewlett-Packard toner cartridges have been designed to maximize the reliability of the HP LaserJet printer by including all of the components that need frequent replacement or adjustment within the cartridge. While we recognize that all parts of this critical printer mechanism will not wear consistently, the HP toner cartridge has been designed to optimize the exceptional print quality that is synonymous with the HP LaserJet printer name. While Hewlett-Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled toner cartridges during the warranty period or under a maintenance contract, we also do not recommend their use for the following reasons: 1 The HP LaserJet toner cartridge is not designed to be refilled or remanufactured. 2 Hewlett-Packard has no control or process to ensure that a refilled toner cartridge will function at the high level of reliability of a new HP LaserJet toner cartridge. Hewlett-Packard also cannot predict what the long-term effect on the printer's reliability could be from using different toner formulations found in refilled cartridges. Because the HP LaserJet printer has the highest reliability reputation in the industry, we are concerned about any usage that might affect this reputation. 3 Hewlett-Packard has no control over the actual print quality of a refilled toner cartridge. The print quality of the HP LaserJet toner cartridge directly influences the customer's perception of the HP LaserJet printer itself. The high print quality of the HP LaserJet printer is one of the primary reasons for the success of the product and we are keenly interested in maintaining that image.
128 – Toner cartridge information
EN
The entire family of HP LaserJet printers is covered under a standard one-year warranty from the date of purchase. Hewlett-Packard offers optional maintenance contracts after the one-year warranty expires. The use of refilled toner cartridges alone does not affect either the warranty or any maintenance contract purchased from HP. However, if an HP LaserJet printer failure or damage is found to be directly attributed to the use of a refilled toner cartridge, the repair will not be covered under the warranty or by the maintenance contract. Rather, standard time and material charges will be applied to service the printer for that particular failure or damage. Hewlett-Packard is constantly striving to provide the highest quality printer products possible. The HP LaserJet printer family was designed for optimum output performance when the printing mechanism is periodically replaced with a new HP toner cartridge. The HP toner cartridge is designed specifically to enhance the output from the HP LaserJet family of printers. We know that the highest quality print results will be obtained when new HP toner cartridges are used with HP LaserJet printers.
6
EN
Refill Statement – 129
130 – Toner cartridge information
EN
7
Printer options and user replaceable parts
Overview The following tables list the product, product number, product description, and service part number for each printer. Parts can be ordered through HP Parts Direct Ordering at (800) 227-8164 (U.S. only). For additional product support, see the inside back cover.
EN
Overview – 131
Product
Memory
Language Emulation
Boards I/O
Envelope Feeder Duplex
Product Number
Product Description
Service Part Number C2063A
C2963A
1 MB SIMM 36 Bit
C2064A
2 MB SIMM 36 Bit
C2064A
C2065A
4 MB SIMM 36 Bit
C2065A
C2066A
8 MB SIMM 36 Bit (IIISi S/N 3200 & up)
C2066A
C3130A
1 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3130-60001
C3131A
2 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3131-69991
C3132A
4 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3132-60001
C3133A
8 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3133-60001
C3146A
16 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3146A
C3838A
1 MB JEIDA
C3838A
C3938A
2 MB JEIDA
C3938A
C3148A
4 MB JEIDA
C3148A
C3930A
2 MB FLASH SIMM
C39301A
C3931A
4 MB FLASH SIMM
C3931A
C3152A
PostScript Level 2 SIMM
C3152-69001*
C3169A
PostScript Level 2 SIMM
C3169A-69001*
C3918A
PostScript Level 2 SIMM
C3918-69001*
C3987A
PostScript Level 2 SIMM
C3987-96001*
J2550A
JetDirect Card for Ethernet/10Base-T
J2550-69001*
J2552A
JetDirect Card for 10Base-T/BNC/Ltalk
J2552-69001*
J2555
JetDirect Card for Token Ring
J2555-69002*
J2374C
JetDirect Network Software/HP-UX
N/A
J2375C
JetDirect Network Software/Sun Unix
N/A
J2382A/B
JetDirect EX for Ethernet/10Base-T/BNC J2382-69003*
J2591A
JetDirect EX for Ethernet/10Base-T/BNC J2591A
C3927A
Envelope Feeder
C3927-69001*
C3765A
Envelope Feeder
C3765-60501*
C3720A
Duplexer Upgrade
C3762A
Duplexer Upgrade
C3971A
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V fuser C3971-69001*
Service C3972A Maintenance and PM Kits Cleaning Tool Disk Drive C2965A Sheet C3763A Feeder/ Stacker
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V fuser C3972-69001*
C3762-60501
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V fuser C3916-69001* Service Maintenance Kit with 110V fuser C3916-69002* 5P Cleaning Brush
RF5-0593-000CN
Disk Drive
C2965-69001*
2000 Sheet Input (Tray 4)
C3763-69501*
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
132 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
6L
5Si
5L
6P
• • • • • • • •
5P
• • • • •
5 • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • •
• • •
• • • • • • • •
•
• •
EN
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 133
7
Product
Paper Trays
Product or Part Number
Product Description
R75-4000-000CN
Universal Paper Cassette
C3921A
Optional Lower Cassette w/Tray 3
C3924A
250 Sheet Universal Cassette
R77-0004-000CN
Tray 2
R77-0003-000CN
Tray 3
R98-4000-000CN
Universal Paper Cassette
C2950A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (2.0m)
C2951A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (3.0m)
I/O
C2946A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to C (3.0m)
Cables
C2947A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to C (10.0m)
Toner
C2933A
Serial 25-pin-F/9 pin-M
C2932A
Serial 9-pin-F/9 pin-M
92298A
HP Toner Cartridge
C3903A
HP Toner Cartridge
C3906A
HP Toner Cartridge
C3909A
HP Toner Cartridge
134 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
6L
5Si
5L
6P
5P
5 • • •
• • • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• • • •
• •
•
• •
EN
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 135
7
Product
Memory
Product Number 33443A** 33443B** 33444A/B** 33445A/B** 33474A** 33475A** 33474B 33475B C2024A C2063A C2064A C2065A C2066A C3130A C3131A C3132A C3133A C3146A 33438P** 33439P** 33439Q** 33494B** 33484C** 33494D** 33494E**
Language C2013A Emulation C2049A** C2080A C3159A C3129A 33498A** C2081A** C2088A** C2089A**
Product Description
Service Part Number 1 MB Board (Revision A) 33443-69001* 1 MB Board (Revision B) 33443-69004* 2 MB Board 33444-69012* 4 MB Board 33445-69012* 1 MB Board (replaced by Revision B) 33474-69004* 2 MB Board (replaced by Revision B) 33475-69011* 1 MB Board 33474-69004* 2 MB Board 33475-69011* 1 MB Memory Upgrade C2024-69001* 1 MB SIMM 36 Bit C2063A 2 MB SIMM 36 Bit C2064A 4 MB SIMM 36 Bit C2065A 8 MB SIMM 36 Bit (IIISI S/N 3200 & C2066A up) 1 MB SIMM 32 Bit C3130-60001 2 MB SIMM 32 Bit C3131-60001 4 MB SIMM 32 Bit C3132-60001 8 MB SIMM 32 Bit C3133-60001 16 MB SIMM 32 Bit C3146A PostScript cartridge PostScript cartridge 33439-69001* PostScript cartridge 33439-69001* PS Level 1 ROM (IIISi S/N 3199 & 3349469002* lower) PS Level 1 SIMM (IIISi S/N 3200 & 33494-69004* later) PS Level 2 ROM (IIISi S/N 3199 & 33494-69007* lower) PS Level 2 SIMM (IIISi S/N 3200 & 33494-49008* later) PostScript Level 2 SIMM (4Si) C2013-69001* PostScript SIMM C2049-67901 PostScript SIMM C2080-69001* PostScript SIMM C3159-69001* PostScript SIMM C3129-69001* Epson/IBM ProPrinter cartridge 33498-67901 Epson/IBM ProPrinter Emulated n/a SIMM PCL 5 cartridge C2088-60101 PostScript cartridge Plus C2089-69001*
*Requires exchange. ** No longer available.
136 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
4V
4P
4L
4+
4
4Si
IIISi IIIP
IIP IIID IIP+
III
IID
•
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
II • • • •
•
• • • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • •
EN
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 137
7
Product Product Number 33416B** 33417C* 26013A* C2059A** C2059B** C2059C** C2059D** C2059E** C2059F* C2059H* C2059T* J2337A** J2338A** J2339A** J23401** J2341B** 92270N** Boards C2071A I/O C2071B C2071C C2071D C2071E C2071F C2071S C2071T J2371A** J2372A**
Product Description
Service Part Number AppleTalk 33416-67901 AppleTalk 33417-67901 Status Readback card 26013-60001 Novell Ethernet MIO 28636-69001* LAN Server/LAN Manager 802.3 28636-69101* Novell Token Ring MIO 28637-69001* LAN Server/LAN Manager Token Ring 28637-69201* EtherTalk MIO 28636-69301* LocalTalk MIO J2341-69001* MPE ESC? MIO card for the HP 3000 28644-60101 TCP/IP Ethernet 28636-69401* Ethernet/802.3 (BNC/RJ-45) Novell J2337-69001* 802.3 (BNC/RJ-45) LAN Srvr/LAN Mgr J2338-69001* EtherTalk (BNC/RJ-45) Apple J2339-69001* TCP/IP Ethernet (BNC/RJ-45) Unix J2340-69001* LocalTalk (DIN-8) J2341-69001* RS-422-A Serial Adapter for LJ IIIP N/A Novell/Ethernet/802.3; BNC 27303-69001* Novell/Ethernet/802.3; RJ45 port 27305-69001* LAN Manager/Ethernet/802.3 BNC 27303-69101* LAN Manager/Ethernet/802.3; RJ45 27305-69101* Novell/Token Ring/802.5 27304-69001* LAN Manager/Token Ring/ 802.5 27304-69201* HP JetDirect Card for UNIX/10Base-T 27305-69401* HP JetDirect Card for UNIX/ThinLan 27303-69401* JetDirect Card for Ethernet/Base-T J2371-69001* JetDirect Card for Ethernet/10Base-T/ J2372-69001* BNC J2373A** JetDirect Card for Token Ring J2373-69001* J2550A JetDirect Card for Ethernet/10Base-T J2550-69001* J2552A JetDirect Card for 10Base-T/BNC/Ltalk J2552-69001* J2555A JetDirect Card for Token Ring J2555-69002* J2374C JetDirect Network Software/HP-UX N/A J2375C JetDirect Network Software/Sun Unix N/A J2382A/B JetDirect EX for Ethernet/10Base/T/ J2382-69003* BNC J2383B JetDirect EX for Token Ring J2383-69005*
.
*Requires exchange. **No longer available
138 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
4V
4P
4L
4+
4
4Si
IIISi IIIP
•
• • • • •
•
IIP+ IIID IIP • • •
III
IID
II
•
•
•
•
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
7
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • •
•
•
• • • • • •
•
•
•
•
EN
• •
• •
• •
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 139
Product
Envelope Feeder
Product Number 33457A** 33458A** C2060A C2082A** C2082B
Duplex
C2061A C3157A
Service Maintenance PM Kits
C2062A C2087A
Power Cord Cleaning Tool
Disk Drive Sheet Feeder/ Stacker
C3295A C2921A C2920A C2810A
Product Description
Service Part Number 50 envelope power feeder 33457-69001* 50 envelope power feeder 33458-69001* 100 envelope power feeder C2060-69001* 75 envelope power feeder C2082-69001* 75 envelope power feeder C2082-69001* Separation Pad for IID Env. Feeder RF1-2660-000CN Paper Tray Lid for Envelope Feeder RG1-2802-000CN Duplexer Upgrade C2061-69001* Duplexer Upgrade Service Maintenance Kit with 115V 33449-69007* fuser Service Maintenance Kit with 240V 33449-69008* fuser Service Maintenance Kit with 110V C2001-69012* fuser Service Maintenance Kit with 240V C-2001-69013* fuser 110V User Maintenance Kit C2062-69001* 220V PM Kit C2087-69001* Service Maintenance Kit with 110V C2037-69010* fuser Service Maintenance Kit with 240V C2037-69011* fuser Service Maintenance Kit with 110V 33481-69007* fuser Service Maintenance Kit with 110V C1341-69010* fuser Service Maintenance Kit with 220V C1341-69011* fuser Right Angle 110V power cord 8120-6177 Velcro adhesive cleaning brush holder Cleaning brush Cleaning brush Disk Drive 1500 Sheet Feeder (Letter) 1500 Sheet Feeder (A4) 2000 Sheet Output Stacker
RB1-3389-000CN RF5-0690-000CN FB1-0733-000CN C3295-69101 C2921-63001 C2920-63001
*Requires exchange. **No longer available.
140 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
4V
4P
4L
4+
4
4Si
IIISi IIIP
IIP IIID IIP+
III
IID
II
• •
•
•
•
• •
• •
7
• • •
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• • • •
• •
• • •
•
• •
• • • •
•
• • •
• • •
•
EN
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 141
Product
Product or Part # 33472A** 33472A/B** 92275B 92275C 92275D 92275E 92275F 92295B** 92295C** 92295D** 92295E** 92295F** 92297B 92297C 92297D 92297E Paper 92297F Trays 92291B 92291C 92291D 92291E C2083A** C2083B** C2083D C3160A C3161A C3760A C2084A C2084B** C2085A C2085B C2085C C2085D R75-0010-000CN R752010-000CN Paper 92295R Tray 92295S Replace- 92295U ment 92297R Top Cover 92297S
Product Description Optional Lower Cassette with letter tray 92275B Optional Lower Cassette with A4 tray 92275D Letter-size tray (8.5 x 11 in) Legal-size tray (8.5 x 14 in) A4-size tray (210 x 297 mm) Executive-size tray (7.25 x 10.5 in) Envelope tray (Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5) Letter-size tray (8.5 x 11 in) Legal-size tray (8.5 x 14 in) A-4 size tray (210 x 297 mm) Executive-size tray (7.25 x 10.5 in) Envelope tray (Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5) Letter-size tray (8.5 x 11 in) Legal-size tray (8.5 x 14 in) A-4 size tray (210 x 297 mm) Executive-size tray (7.25 x 10.5 in) Envelope tray (Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5) Letter-size tray (8.5 x 11 in) Legal-size tray (8.5 x 14 in) A-4 size tray (210 x 297 mm) Executive-size tray (7.25 x 10.5 in) Optional Lower Cassette with C2084A tray Optional Lower Cassette with C2084B tray Optional Universal Lower Cassette 250 Sheet Cassette (Letter/A4) 250 Sheet Cassette (11x17/A3) Optional Lower Cassette and Base (500 sheet) Universal LC tray--all paper except Legal (500 sheet) Universal LC tray—all paper except Legal (250-sht) Universal PC tray—all paper except Legal (250-sht)
PC tray—letter only (250 sheet) PC tray—A4 only (250 sheet) 250 Sheet Universal Cassette Universal Paper Cassette Universal Paper Cassette For 92295 B/D/E For 92295C For use with 33457A envelope feeder For 92297 B/D/E For 92297C
*Requires Exchange. **No longer available.
142 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
4V
4P
4L
4+
4
4Si
IIISi IIIP • • • • • • •
IIP+ IIID IIP • • • • • • •
IID
III
II
7
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • • • • • •
• • • •
• • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
EN
• • • •
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 143
Product
Product or Product Description Part Number
I/O
92284A**
Parallel 25 pin-M/36 pin-M 2.13 m (7.0 ft)--most PCs
Cables
24542D** C2950A
Parallel 25 pin-M/36 pin-M 3.0 m (9.9 ft) Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (2.0 m)
C2951A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (3.0 m)
C2913A 92219J**
Serial 25 pin-F/25 pin-M 1.2 m (3.9 ft) Serial 9 pin-F/25 pin-M 5.0 m (16.7 ft)
24542G 92215S
Serial 9 pin-F/25 pin-M 3.0 m (9.9 ft) (for most PCs) Serial, DIN8 2.0 m (6.6 ft) for Apple Macintosh
92215N
Phone NET or LocalTalk, Macintosh Network Cable Kit
C2933A C2932A
Serial 25 pin-F/9 pin-M Serial 9 pin-F/9 pin-M
92275A 92285A
HP Toner Cartridge HP Toner Cartridge (2686A, 2686D)
92295A 92291A
HP Toner Cartridge HP Toner Cartridge
92298A
HP Toner Cartridge
92274A C3900A
HP Toner Cartridge HP Toner Cartridge
*Requires exchange. **No longer available.
144 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
4V
4P
4L
4+
4
4Si
IIISi IIIP
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
•
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
•
•
•
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
•
•
• • • •
IID
III
II
• •
• • •
IIP+ IIID IIP
•
•
•
•
•
EN
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 145
7
146 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
8
Service parts
Overview This chapter provides a list of the hardware found in HP LaserJet printers. In the following tables, the shaded areas refer to the location of the part in the printer, as shown in the corresponding illustration. The tables also provide the part or product number and a description.
EN
Overview – 147
6 mm
8 mm 10 mm 12 mm
14 mm
Figure 8-1
16 mm
M3 M4
25 mm
Common Hardware
148 – Service parts
EN
Common Hardware 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5
EN
XB1-2300-606CN XB1-2300-507CN XB1-2300-607CN 0515-1895 XB1-2301-407CN XB1-2400-606CN XB1-2400-809CN 0515-1912 XB1-1300-807CN XA9-0434-000CN XA9-0267-000CN XA9-0253-000CN XA9-0542-000CN XA9-0540-000CN XA9-0653-000CN XA9-0389-000CN XA9-0654-000CN XA9-0192-000CN XA9-0828-000CN RBI-5552-000CN RAI-7636-000CN RBI-5489-000CN XA9-0342-000CN XB4-7300-609CN XB4-7400-809CN XB4-7401-009CN XB4-7401-007CN XB4-7401-209CN XB6-7300-607CN
M3 x 5mm M3 x 5mm BH3 x 6mm M3 x 8mm M4 x 14mm M4 x 6mm M4 x 8mm M4 x 8mm M3 x 8 mm M3 x 4mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 10mm M4 x 8mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 10mm M4 x 6mm M3 x 6mm M3 M3 M3 x 4mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 6mm M4 x 8mm M4 x 10mm M4 x 10mm M4 x 12mm M3 x 6mm
Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips
Common Hardware – 149
8
Common Hardware continued 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 10
XA9-0253-000CN XA9-0584-000CN FA9-1449-000CN XB1-2302-507CN XB6-7300-809CN XA9-0326-000CN XB6-7300-807CN XD2-1100-242CN XD2-1100-322CN XD2-1100-402CN XD2-1100-502CN XD2-1100-642CN XG9-0260-000CN XD2-2300-507CN XA9-0375-000CN XA9-0686-000CN XA9-0724-000CN XA9-0824-000CN XA9-0813-000CN
150 – Service parts
M3 x 8mm M3 x 12mm M3 x 25mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 4mm M3 x 8mm 2.4mm 3.2mm 4.0mm 5.0mm 6.4mm 5.0mm 3m x 25 mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 8 mm M3 x 10mm M3 x 8mm
Loose Flat/Lock Washer Phillips Loose Flat/Lock Washer Phillips Star-washer trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Grip Ring (c-type) Loose Flat/Star Washer Phillips Hexhead Screw Hexhead Screw Hexhead Screw Hexhead Screw with washer
EN
J 6L, 5L Parts
8
Figure 8-2
EN
LJ 6L, 5L Parts
Common Hardware – 151
LJ 6L, 5L Parts (See figure 8-2) 1
RB1-7177-000CN
Paper Feed Frame
2
RG5-1940-000CN 5L RG5-3486-000CN 6L
Pick-up Roller Assembly
3
C3941-69001 5L RG5-3506-000CN 6L
DC Controller PCA, exchange (110V)
3
C3941-69002 5L RG5-3509-000CN 6L
DC Controller PCA, exchange (220V)
4
RF5-1534-000CN
Transfer Roller
4
RF5-1530-000CN 5L RF5-2358-000CN 6L
Transfer Roller Guide
5
RG5-1942-000CN 5L RG5-3485-000CN 6L
Feed Assembly
6
RG5-2012-000CN 5L RG5-3474-000CN 6L
Delivery Assembly
7
RG5-2028-000CN
Control Panel PCA
8
RG5-2013-000CN 5L RG5-3475-000CN 6L
Separation Guide Assembly
C3942-67902 5L C3991-60001 6L
Formatter (new)
C3942-69002 5L
Formatter (exchange)
RG5-1964-000CN 5L RG5-3459-000CN 6L
Heating Element (110V)
RG5-1965-000CN 5L RG5-3463-000CN 6L
Heating Element (220V)
RH7-1282-000CN 5L RH7-1320-000CN 6L
Main Motor
152 – Service parts
EN
LJ 6L, 5L Parts (continued) (See figure 8-2)
EN
RF5-1516-000CN 5L RF5-2362-000CN 6L
Pressure Roller
RG5-2000-000CN 5L RG5-3494-000CN 6L
Laser Scanner (new)
C3941-69003 5L
Laser Scanner (exchange)
RY7-5005-000CN
Gear Kit #1
RY7-5006-000CN 5L RY7-5036-000CN 6L
Gear Kit #2
RY7-5007-000CN
Fuser Release Kit
RY7-5008-000CN
Separation Pad Kit
RY7-5009-000CN
Input Sensor Arm Kit
RG5-2029-000CN
Paper Pickup Cable
RG5-2031-000CN 5L RG5-3662-000CN 6L
Door Sensor Cable
RG5-2032-000CN
Thermistor Cable
RG5-2033-000CN
Motor Cable
Rg5-2034-000CN 5L RG5-3661-000CN 6L
Scanner Cable
RG5-2035-000CN 5L
Laser Cable
RG5-2036-000CN 5L RG5-3499-000CN 6L
Control Panel Cable
RG5-2037-000CN 5L
Door Switch Cable
Common Hardware – 153
8
LJ 5Si Mopier Paper Handling
7 8 9
6
5 4
3
1 2
Figure 8-3
LJ 5Si Mopier Paper Handling Components
154 – Service parts
EN
LJ 5Si Mopier Paper Handling Components 1
C3763A C3763-69501
2
RG5-2155-000CN
Tray 4 Assembly
3
C3764-69100
Multi-Bin Mailbox (exchange)
3
C3766-69515
Mailbox with Stapler (exchange)
4
RB1-6822-000CN
Duplex Unit Roller 1
5
C3762-60501
Duplex Unit
6
C3766-69500
Stapling Unit (exchange)
7
RB1-6491-000CN
Face Up Bin
8
C3764-60504
External Paper Handling PCA (Multi-Bin Mailbox)
8
C40776-60500
External Paper Handling PCA (Mailbox with Stapler)
9
EN
2000 Sheet Input Unit Assembly (exchange)
C3765-60501
Envelope Feeder
C3764-7000
C-Link Cable (178 cm)
C3763-7000
C-Link Cable (61 cm)
C3766-60512
C-Link Cable (97 cm)
C4077-60102
3-Way Power Adaptor
LJ 5Si Mopier Paper Handling – 155
8
LJ 5Si Parts
Figure 8-4
LJ 5Si Parts
156 – Service parts
EN
LJ 5Si Parts 1
RF5-1412-000CN
Transfer Roller
2
RH7-1260-000CN
Main Motor
3
RG5-1874-000CN
Face-Down Delivery Assembly
4
C3166-69012
Fusing Assembly 100-120V, exchange
4
C3166-69013
Fusing Assembly 220-240V, exchange
5
RG5-1834-000CN
Feeder Assembly
6
RG5-1833-000CN
Registration Assembly
7
RG5-1880-100CN
Tray 1 Pick Up Assembly
8
RB1-6730-000CN
Tray 1 Feed Roller
8
9
RF5-1455-000CN
Tray 1 Separation Pad
10
C3166-69011
Paper Input Unit (PIU), exchange
11
RG5-1847-000CN
Main Gear Assembly
12
RG5-1887-000CN
Transfer Roller Assembly
13
RG5-1884-000CN
Tray 1 PCA
EN
LJ 5Si Parts – 157
LJ 5Si Parts
Figure 8-5
LJ 5 Si Parts
158 – Service parts
EN
LJ5 Si Parts 1
C3166-69006
2
RH7-1266-000CN
Laser Scanner Assembly, exchange Fan 1
3
RG5-1846-000CN
Switch/Sensor PCA
4
C3166-69005
High Voltage Power Supply, exchange
5
C3166-69010
DC Controller PCA, exchange
RG5-2433-000CN
Front Panel (Control Panel Display) not shown
8
EN
LJ 5Si Parts – 159
LJ 5Si Parts
Figure 8-6
LJ 5Si Parts
160 – Service parts
EN
LJ 5Si Parts 1
C3166-69007
Low Voltage Power Supply, 110-120, exchange
1
C3166-69008
Low Voltage Power Supply, Universal, exchange
2
C3168-69005
Formatter, exchange
3
RH7-1271-000CN
Fan 3
4
RH7-1266-000CN
Fan 2
5 & 6 RG5-1845-000CN
Paper-Size Sensing PCA, Trays 2 and 3
8
EN
LJ 5Si Parts – 161
LJ 6P, 5P Parts
1
2
3
Figure 8-7
4
5
6
LJ 6P, 5P Parts
162 – Service parts
EN
7 8 9
8
10
11 12
13
14
15
16
17 Figure 8-8
EN
18
LJ 6P, 5P Parts (continued)
LJ 6P, 5P Parts – 163
LJ 6P, 5P Parts (See figures 8-7 and 8-8) 1
RG5-1799-000CN 5P RG5-2786-000CN 6P
Motor Assembly Motor Assembly
2
RF5-1290-000CN 5P RF5-0596-000CN 6P
Transfer Roller Assembly Transfer Roller Assembly
3
RG5-1786-000CN
Mirror Assembly
4
C3150-69005* 5P C398069005* 6P
Laser Scanner Assembly (exchange) Laser Scanner Assembly (exchange)
5
R75-4000-000CN 5P R981001-000CN 6P
Complete Tray 2 Assembly Complete Tray 2 Assembly
6
C3903A
Toner Cartridge
7
C3150-69003* C3150-69004* C3980-69003* C3980-69004*
8
RG5-1801-000CN 5P RG5-2776-000CN 6P
Fan Assembly Fan Assembly
9
RG5-1698-000CN RF5-1283-000CN
Top Oblique Roller Assembly Static Charge Eliminator
10
RG5-1713-000CN 5P RG5-2778-000CN 6P
Gear Train Assembly Gear Train Assembly
11
RG5-1692-000CN RG5-2796-000CN RG5-1693-000CN RG5-2790-000CN
Pickup Assembly (Tray 2) Pickup Assembly (Tray 2) Complete Tray 1 Pickup Assembly Complete Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
12
RB1-6332-000CN
Complete Fuser Assembly (100-120V)(exchange) Complete Fuser Assembly (220-240V)(exchange) Complete Fuser Assembly (100-120V)(exchange) Complete Fuser Assembly (220-240V)(exchange)
5P 5P 6P 6P
5P 6P 5P 6P
164 – Service parts
Pickup Roller (Tray 2)
EN
LJ 6P, 5P Parts (continued) (See figures 8-7 and 8-8) 13
RB1-2205-000CN
Tray 1 Roller
14
C3151-69001* 5P C3981-69001* 6P
Formatter PCA (exchange) Formatter PCA (exchange)
15
1252-5460
Formatter to Controller PCA Connector
16
RG5-1719-000Cn
High-voltage Connector Assembly
17
RH7-1258-000CN 5P RH7-5160-000C 6P
Tray 1 Solenoid (SL2) Tray 1 Solenoid (SL2)
18
C3150-69001* C3150-69002* C3980-69001* C3980-69002*
DC Controller PCA (110-120V) (exchange) DC Controller PCA (220-240V) (exchange) DC Controller PCA (110-120V) (exchange) DC Controller PCA (220-240V) (exchange)
5P 5P 6P 6P
RG5-1702-000CN RG5-1703-000CN RG5-2802-000CN RG5-2803-000CN RG5-1801-000CN RG5-2776-000CN RG5-0593-000CN RB1-5939-000CN 5062-4661
5P 5P 6P 6P 5P 6P
Hot Roller 120V Hot Roller 220V Hot Roller 120V Hot Roller 220V Fan Fan Brush, Mirror Sensor Arm, Tray 1 Infrared Communication Test Tool
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange **Cover assembly does not include items 3, 5, and 6.
EN
LJ 6P, 5P Parts – 165
8
LJ 5 Parts
Figure 8-9
LJ5 Parts
166 – Service parts
EN
LJ 5 Parts 1
RG5-0475-060CN
2
RG5-2189-000CN
Paper Output Sensor Assembly Paper Output Assembly
3
C2037-69004*
DC Controller PCA
4
C2037-69008*
Laser Scanner Assembly
5
C3919-69001*
Formatter PCA
RB1-2205-000CN
Tray 1 Pickup Roller
RB1-7911-000CN
Tray 2 Pickup Roller
RB1-7983-000CN
Tray 3 Pickup Roller
RB1-2133-000CN RF5-0343-000CN RF5-0349-000CN
Paper Out Sensor Flag Tray 1 Separation Pad Transfer Roller
8
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
EN
LJ 5 Parts – 167
LJ 5 Parts, continued
Figure 8-10 LJ5 Parts 168 – Service parts
EN
LJ5 Parts (See figure 8-10) 1
C2037-69001* C2037-69002*
110V Fusing Assembly 240V Fusing Assembly
2
RH7-1301-000CN
Main Motor
3
C2037-69006* C2037-69007*
110V Power Supply 240V Power Supply
4
C3916-69005*
Paper Feed Assembly
5
RG5-2238-000CN
Display Assembly (without overlay)
6
RG5-0469-020CN
Transfer Guide Assembly
7
RG5-0512-070CN
Paper Control PCA
8
RG5-0514-000CN
Sensor PCA
9
C2037-69009*
High Voltage PCA
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
EN
LJ 5 Parts, continued – 169
8
LJ 5 Duplexer Parts
Figure 8-11 LJ5 Duplexer (cross-section)
170 – Service parts
EN
LJ5 Duplexer Parts 1
RH7-1235-000CN
Switchback Fan
2
RF1-3813-000CN
Switchback Stepper Motor (M2)
3
RG1-3529-000CN
Switchback Sensor Cable
4
RF1-3808-000CN
Switchback Solenoid (SL1)
5
RF1-3814-000CN
Rear Holding Tray Motor (M3)
6
RG1-3503-000CN
Power Supply Assembly
7
RG1-3582-000CN
Duplex Control PCA
8
RA2-2072-000CN
Timing Belt
9
RA2-2076-000CN
Sensor Arm
10
WG8-5210-000CN
Photosensor (PS2)
11
RG1-3530-000CN
Paper Pickup Cable
12
RF1-3815-000CN
Front Holding Tray Motor (M1)
EN
8
LJ 5 Duplexer Parts – 171
LJ 4V, 4MV Parts
Figure 8-12 LJ 4V/4MV Major Assemblies
172 – Service parts
EN
LJ 4V/4MV Parts 1
C3143-69001*
Exchange Formatter PCA
2
RG5-0198-000CN
Face Down Delivery Assembly
3
RG5-1545-000CN
Guide, Delivery Unit
4
RG5-1398-000CN
Main Drive Assembly
5
C3141-69003*
DC Controller PCA Assembly
6
RG5-2044-000CN
HV Power Supply Assembly
7
RG5-1552-000CN
Fuser
8
C3141-69002*
Fusing Assembly 100/115V
9
C3141-69001*
Fusing Assembly 220/240V
EN
RG5-1391-000CN
Pickup Roller Assembly (not shown)
RF5-0302-000CN
Separation Pad
RG5-1566-000CN
Drum Drive Assembly
RS5-2123-000CN
Spring, Compression
RH7-1126-000CN
Fan (FM1)
RH7-5094-000CN
Registration Clutch
RG5-2041-000CN
Laser/Scanner Assembly
C3141-69005*
Power Supply Assembly 100/115V
C3141-69006*
Power Supply Assembly 220/240V
C3141-69007*
Paper Guide Plate Assembly
RH7-1199-000CN
Motor, dc 17.5W
WD1-0224-000CN
Fuse,125V, 6.3A
VD7-0643-151CN
Fuse, 250V, 3.15A
RH7-1214-000CN
Fan (FM2)
RH7-1317-000CN
Fan (FM3)
RG5-1539-000CN
Digital Display Panel 100/115V
RG5-1540-000CN
Digital Display Panel 220/240V
RB1-6389-000CN
Static Charge Eliminator
RG5-1410-000CN
Transfer Roller Assembly
RG5-1555-060CN
Guide
LJ 4V, 4MV Parts – 173
8
RG5-1442-000CN
Cable, Beam Detect
RG5-1446-000CN
Option Cable Assembly, 500 Sheet LC
RB5-1447-000CN
Clutch Cable
RH-6-0098-000CN
Plastic Bezel (does not include digital display)
RG-5-0239-000CN
DC Cable Assembly
RG5-1485-000CN
Display Panel Cable Assembly
LJ 4P, 4L Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 8-13 LJ 4P, 4L Parts 174 – Service parts
EN
7 8 9
8
10
11 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 8-14 LJ 4P, 4L Parts (continued)
EN
LJ 4P, 4L Parts – 175
LJ 4P, 4L Parts (See figures 8-13 and 8-14) 1
RG5-0765-000CN
Motor Main Assembly
2
RF5-0596-000CN
Transfer Roller Assembly
3
RG5-0667-000CN 4L RG5-0802-000CN 4P
Beam-to-Drum Mirror Beam-to-Drum Mirror
4
C2003-69005* 4L C2005-69005* 4P
Laser/Scanner Assembly Laser/Scanner Assembly
5
R75-0010-000CN 4L R75-2010-000CN 4P
Universal Paper Cassette Universal Paper Cassette
6
92274A
Toner Cartridge
7
C2003-69001* C2003-69002*
Fuser Assembly 100-120V Fuser Assembly 220-240V
8
RG5-0703-000CN 4L RG5-0804-000CN 4P
Fan Assembly Fan Assembly
9
RG5-0711-020CN
Top Oblique Roller Assembly
10
RG5-0684-000CN 4L RG5-0791-000CN 4P
Drive Train Plate Assembly Drive Train Plate Assembly
11
RG5-0668-000CN 4L RG5-0796-000CN 4P
Pickup Assembly Pickup Assembly
12
RB1-3029-000CN 4L RB1-3368-000CN 4P
Pickup Feed D-Roller Pickup Feed D-Roller
13
RG5-0669-000CN
Front Oblique Roller Assembly
14
C2004-69001* 4L C2016-69001* 4ML C2006-69001* 4P C2041-69001* 4MP
Formatter C2003A Formatter C2015 Formatter C2005A Formatter C2040A
15
1252-5278 4L 1252-5460 4P
DC Controller Connector DC Controller Connector
16
RG5-0701-000CN
High Voltage Connector Assembly
17
RH7-5092-000CN
Paper Feed Solenoid
18
C2003-69003* C2003-69004* C2005-69003* C2005-69004*
100-120V DC Controller PCA 220-240V DC Controller PCA 120V DC Controller PCA 220V DC Controller PCA
4L 4L 4P 4P
RG5-0678-000CN RG5-0679-000CN RY5-0011-000CN RF5-0690-000CN RF5-0601-000CN RB1-3389-000CN RS5-8209-000CN RF5-0601-000CN
Hot Roller 120V Hot Roller 220V Filter Brush Input Paper Sensor Arm Velcro Strip EP Label Input Sensor Arm
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange **Cover assembly does not include items C, E, and F
176 – Service parts
EN
LJ 4 Plus, 4 Parts
8
Figure 8-15 LJ4+, 4 Parts LJ 4+, 4 Parts 1
RG5-0475-060CN
Paper Output Sensor Assembly
2
RG5-0456-000CN 4
Paper Output Assembly
2
RG5-0886-070CN 4+
Paper Output Assembly
3
C2001-69002* 4
DC Controller PCA
3
C2037-69004* 4+
DC Controller PCA
4
C2001-69006* 4
Laser/Scanner Assembly
4
C2037-69008* 4+
Laser/Scanner Assembly
5
C2002-69001* 4
Formatter PCA
5
EN
C2038-69004* 4+
Formatter PCA
RBI-2127-000CN 4, 4+
MC Pickup Roller
LJ 4 Plus, 4 Parts – 177
RBI-2126-000CN 4
PC Pickup Roller
RBI-3477-000CN 4+
PC Pickup Roller
RBI-2632-000CN 4 RBI-2650-000CN 4+
LC Pickup Roller LC Pickup Roller
RB1-2133-000CN RF5-0343-000CN RF5-0349-000CN
Paper Out Sensor Flag MP Tray Separation Pad Transfer Roller
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
178 – Service parts
EN
LJ 4 Plus, 4 Parts
8
Figure 8-16 LJ 4+, 4 Parts
EN
LJ 4 Plus, 4 Parts – 179
LJ 4+, 4 Parts (see Figure 8-16)
1
C2001-69003* 4 C2001-69004* 4 C2037-69001* 4+ C2037-69002* 4+
110V Fusing Assembly 240V Fusing Assembly 110V Fusing Assembly 240V Fusing Assembly
2 2
RH7-1151-000CN 4 RH7-1301-000CN 4+
Main Motor Main Motor
3
C2001-69007* C2001-69008* C2037-69006* C2037-69007*
110V Power Supply 240V Power Supply 110V Power Supply 240V Power Supply
1
3
4 4 4+ 4+
4 4
C2001-69005* C2037-69003* 4+
Paper Feed Assembly Paper Feed Assembly
5 5
RG5-0478-000CN 4 C2001-69010* 4 C2037-69005* 4+ RG5-1077-000CN* 4+
Display Assembly (without overlay) Display Assembly (English) Display Assembly (without overlay) Display Assembly (English)
6
RG5-0469-020CN
Transfer Guide Assembly
7
RG5-0512-070CN
Paper Control PCA
8
RG5-0514-000CN
Sensor PCA
9 9
C2001-69009* 4 C2037-69009* 4+
High Voltage PCA High Voltage PCA
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
180 – Service parts
EN
LJ 4Plus Duplexer Parts
8
Figure 8-17 LJ 4Plus Duplexer (cross-section) 1
RH7-1235-000CN
Switchback Fan
2
RF1-3801-000CN
Switchback Stepper Motor (M2)
3
RG1-3529-000CN
Switchback Sensor Cable
4
RF1-3808-000CN
Switchback Solenoid (SL1)
5
RF1-3804-000CN
Rear Holding Tray Motor (M3)
6
RG1-3503-000CN
Power Supply Assembly
7
RG1-3501-000CN
Duplex Control PCA
8
RA2-2072-000CN
Timing Belt
9
RA2-2076-000CN
Sensor Arm
10
WG8-5210-000CN
Photosensor (PS2)
11
RG1-3530-000CN
Paper Pickup Cable
12
RF1-3807-000CN
Front Holding Tray Motor (M1)
EN
LJ 4Plus Duplexer Parts – 181
LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts
Figure 8-18 LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts
182 – Service parts
EN
LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts 1 1
RG5-0076-200CN IIISi C2009-69004* 4Si
HV Power Supply HV Power Supply
2
C2009-69008*
Job Offset Assembly
3 3
RG5-0088-000CN IIISi RG5-0162-000CN 4Si
Control Panel Assembly Control Panel Assembly
4
RG5-0067-180CN
Delivery Cover Assembly
5
RG5-0094-000CN
6
RG5-0095-120CN RG5-0096-000CN RG5-0166-060CN RG5-0167-060CN
Sensor PCA IIISi IIISi 4Si 4Si
115V AC Power Supply 240V AC Power Supply 115V AC Power Supply 240V AC Power Supply
7
RG5-0102-000CN
Main Switch Assembly
8
RG5-0085-060CN IIISi RG5-0086-060CN IIISi C2009-69005** 4Si C2009-69006** 4Si
115V DC Power Supply 240V DC Power Supply 115V DC Power Supply 240V DC Power Supply
9
28644-69002*
MIO Interface Card
10 10 10
33491-69143* IIISi 33491-69160* IIISi C2009-69001* 4Si
Formatter PCA S/N < 3199 Formatter PCA S/N > 3200 Formatter PCA
11
33491-69011* IIISi C2009-69002* 4Si
DC Controller PCA DC Controller PCA
12 12
RG5-0021-000CN IIISi C2009-69003*
Laser Scanner Assembly Laser Scanner Assembly
6
8
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
EN
LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts – 183
8
Figure 8-19 LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts 1
RG5-0038-000CN
Left Main Block Assembly
2 2
33491-69012* 33491-69013*
115V Fusing Assembly 240V Fusing Assembly
3
RG5-0039-070CN
Right Main Block Assembly
4
RG5-0161-090CN
Registration Assembly
5
C2009-69007*
Paper Input Assembly
6
RG5-0056-000CN
Paper Refeed Assembly
7
RG5-0040-060CN
Main Motor Drive Assembly
8
RG5-0042-000CN
Main Motor PCA
RF5-0041-000CN
Pickup/Separation Roller
RG5-0034-100CN
Paper Input PCA
RH7-1104-000CN
Fan Motor 1 (Back)
RH7-1105-000CN
Fan Motor 2 (Right Front), 3Si
RH7-1106-000CN
Fan Motor 3 (Right Center), 3Si
RH7-1162-000CN
Fan Motor 2 (Right Front), 4Si
RH7-1163-000CN
Fan Motor 3 (Right Center), 4Si
RG5-0141-000CN
Transfer Roller Assembly
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
184 – Service parts
EN
8
Figure 8-20 LJ 4Si, IIISi Sensor Locations LJ 4Si, IIISi Sensor Locations
1
PS7
Face-Down Output Sensor
2
PS151
Fusing Assembly Exit Sensor
3
PS3
Registration Assembly Sensor
4
PS2
Paper Refeed Sensor
5
PS5
Duplex Assembly Sensor
6
PS4
Switchback Assembly Sensor
EN
LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts – 185
LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts
Figure 8-21 LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts 1 1 1
33471-67905 IIP 33486-67901 IIIP C2092-67901 IIP+
Interface Assembly Dual I/O Interface Assembly Dual I/O Interface Assembly Single I/O (Parallel only)
2 2
RG1-1771-000CN RG1-1769-020CN
Scanner Motor Assembly Laser PCA
3
RG9-0696-000CN
High Voltage Power Supply
4
RA1-7674-000CN
Lower Cassette Pickup Roller (3 required)
5
33472-69001*
Lower Cassette Assembly
6
RA1-7654-000CN
Lower Cassette Feed Roller
7
33471-69002*
DC Controller PCA
8 8 8
33471-69001* IIP 33481-69001* IIIP C2008-69001* IIP+
Formatter PCA Formatter PCA Formatter PCA
33471-69017
120V DC Power Supply
RG1-1910-020CN
240V DC Power Supply
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
186 – Service parts
EN
Figure 8-22 LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts
8
LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts 1
RG1-1604-000CN
Density PCA
2 2
33471-69018* 33471-69019*
115V Fuser Assembly 240V Fuser Assembly
3
RA1-7627-000CN
Transfer Roller
4
RG1-1792-000CN
MP Pickup Roller Assembly
5
RG1-1912-080CN
Separation Pad
6
RF1-2394-000CN
Input Feed Roller
RH7-1121-000CN RH6-0010-000CN RG1-1777-000CN RG1-1806-070CN
Fan Cooling Control Panel Assembly EP Drum Drive Gear Assembly MP Tray Assembly
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
EN
LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts – 187
Figure 8-23 LJIIP, IIP+, IIP Sensor Locations LJIIP, IIP+, IIIP Sensor Locations 1
WG8-0291-000CN
PS3 Photosensor
(Senses paper in fuser)
2
WG8-0323-000CN
PS4 Photosensor
(Senses door open)
3
WG8-0291-000CN
PS1 Photosensor
(Senses paper at input feed rollers)
4
WG8-0323-000CN
PS2 Photosensor
(Senses paper in MP tray)
5
WG8-0291-000CN
PS5 Photosensor
(Senses door open and toner cartridge installed)
WG8-0291-000CN
PS6 Photosensor
(Senses paper in optional lower cassette)
188 – Service parts
EN
LJ IIID, III, IID, II Parts
8
Figure 8-24 LJ IIID, III, IID, II Parts LJ IIID, III, II Parts 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 6
RG9-0205-000CN II RG9-0206-000CN II 33459-69001* IID, III, IIID RG9-0750-000CN IID, III, IIID RH7-1122-000CN RF1-2130-000CN** RG1-1753-000CN II 33449-69005* II III 33440-69010* II III RG1-1310-000CN IID RG1-1312-000CN IID RG1-2007-000CN IIID RG1-2009-000CN IIID RG1-0718-000CN II, III, IID RG1-2549-000CN IIID RG1-0932-120CN II, III RG1-1326-000CN IID, IIID 7 33449-69006* 8 RG1-0936-110CN 9 RG1-0933-060CN 10 33440-69003* 10 33440-69009*
115V AC Power Module 240V AC Power Module 115V AC Power Module 240V AC Power Module Fan Upper Cooling Ozone Filter (User replaceable) Ozone Filter (Upgrades to user replaceable) 115V DC Power Supply 240V DC Power Supply 115V DC Power Supply 240V DC Power Supply 115V DC Power Supply 240V DC Power Supply Paper Control PCA Paper Control PCA Registration Assembly (with separation pad) Registration Assembly (with separation pad) Laser Scanner Assembly High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly Transfer Corona Assembly 115V Fuser Assembly 240V Fuser Assembly
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange **Order 92295Q for package of 2 each.
EN
LJ IIID, III, IID, II Parts – 189
Figure 8-25 LJ IIID, III, II Parts
190 – Service parts
EN
LJ IIID, III, II Parts 1
SW205 Switch Activation Lever
2
RH7-1056-000CN
Fan, Lower Cooling
3
Information Only
3 3 3 3
33440-69002* II 33449-69004* III RG1-1278-000CN IID RG1-1970-070CN IIID
Many failures attributed to DC Controller PCAs are actually cable/connector problems. Always reseat cables before replacing PCA. Replace cable(s) to solve intermittent problems. DC Controller PCA DC Controller PCA (see “1” above) DC Controller PCA DC Controller PCA (see “1” above)
4 4 4
33440-69001* II 33497-69001* III, IIID 33446-69001* IID
Formatter PCA Formatter PCA Formatter PCA
5
RH7-1048-000CN
Motor, Main Drive
RG1-0931-060CN II, III RG1-0945-000CN RG1-0959-000CN II RG1-1974-000CN III RF1-1145-020CN II, III RA1-8278-030CN III RG1-0966-030CN RG1-0967-000CN 33449-69007* 33449-69008* 33440-67905 II, III 33447-67906 IID, IIID
Feed Roller Assembly (Paper pickup) Delivery Assembly (with Output rollers) Control Panel Control Panel Separation Pad Top Cover Release Button Fuser Cleaning Pad Delivery Coupler Assembly Engine Rebuild Kit (115V) Engine Rebuild Kit (240V) Test Tool (see chapter 4) Test Tool (see chapter 4)
RG1-0905-000CN RG1-0906-000CN RG1-0907-000CN RG1-0908-000CN RG1-0912-000CN RH2-5108-000CN RG1-2307-000CN III SG4-6271-000CN II
AC Power Module/DC Power Supply Cable High-Voltage Supply/DC Control Cable Fusing/DC Control Cable Laser Scanning/DC Control Cable AC Power Module/DC Control Cable Fiber Optic Cable Control Panel Cable Assembly Control Panel Cable Assembly
This switch lever may need to be removed when the DC Controller PCA is replaced.
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
EN
LJ IIID, III, IID, II Parts – 191
8
LJ IIID, IID Parts
Figure 8-26 LJ IIID, IID Parts
192 – Service parts
EN
LJ IIID, IID Parts
1 1
RG1-1350-000CN IID RG1-1992-000CN IIID
Switchback Assembly Switchback Assembly
2
RG1-1349-000CN
Switchback Drive Control Assembly
3
RG1-1347-000CN
Lower Feed Drive Motor Assembly
4 4
RG1-1370-000CN IID RG1-2067-000CN IIID
Laser Scanner Cable Laser Scanner Cable
5
RG1-2500-000CN
Lower Pickup Roller Assembly
6
RG1-1345-060CN
Duplex Drive Roller Assembly
7
RG1-2498-000CN
Lower Duplex Guide Assembly
8
RG1-1344-000CN RG1-0931-060CN RG1-2499-000CN RH6-0009-000CN RG1-1989-000CN SG5-4022-000CN RF1-2548-000CN RF1-1145-020CN RG1-2498-000CN RG1-1344-000CN RG1-1356-000CN
EN
Upper Duplex Guide Assembly IID IIID IID IIID
Upper Pickup Roller Upper Pickup Roller Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Cable Assembly Lower Separation Pad Upper Separation Pad Lower Duplex Guide Assembly Upper Duplex Guide Assembly Duplex Align/Drive Roller
LJ IIID, IID Parts – 193
8
LJ 2686D, 2686A Parts
Figure 8-27 LJ 2686D, 2868A Parts LJ 2686D, 2868A Parts 1 1
02686-69011* 02686-69111*
115V Fusing Assembly 220V Fusing Assembly
2 2
02686-69008* 2686A RG1-0560-000CN 2686D
DC Controller PCA DC Controller PCA
3 3
RG1-0468-060CN RG1-0624-000CN
115V DC Power Supply 240V DC Power Supply
4
02686-69010*
Scanning Unit
5
RG0-0009-000CN
Laser Unit
02686-69001* 2686A 115V 02686-69004* 2686A 240V 02686-69005* 2686D
Formatter PCA (Replaces SG4-6014-000CN) Formatter PCA (Replaces SG4-6019-000CN) Formatter PCA (Replaces SG4-6022-000CN in 2686A, Opt. 200, 210, 300, and 2686D) Formatter PCA (Replaces SG4-6025-000CN in 2686A and D with 2 MB option)
02686-69006
2686D
194 – Service parts
EN
8
Figure 8-28 LJ 2686D, 2686A Parts LJ 2686D, 2686A Parts 1
RG9-0102-000CN
2
RG1-0649-000CN
High Voltage Power Supply
3 3 3
RG1-0209-030CN RG1-0210-040CN RG1-0204-080CN
AC Controller PCA (115V) AC Controller PCA (240V) AC Driver Assembly (115V)
4
RG1-0208-030CN
Fuser Safety PCA
5
FG1-2354-000CN
Manual Feed Assembly
EN
Main Motor Assembly
LJ 2686D, 2686A Parts – 195
Figure 8-29 LJ 2686D, 2686A Parts LJ2686D, 2686A Parts 1
RG1-1039-000CN
2
RG1-0191-020CN
Transfer Corona Assembly
3
RG1-0195-000CN
Transfer Guide Assembly
4
Feed Guide Assembly
RG1-0215-000CN
Registration Shutter Assembly
RG1-0328-020CN FF1-3872-000CN RA1-0666-000CN 2686A RA1-2621-000CN 2686D RA1-2622-000CN 2686D FS1-2651-000CN 6040-0018 FA2-5664-020CN RH7-1006-000CN RH7-1007-000CN RH7-4007-000CN RH7-4009-000CN FG1-2377-020CN
Separation Belt Fuse, Resistor 47Ω 1/4 Watt Pick-Up Roller (3 required) Pick-Up Roller (6 required) Pick-Up Roller small (2 required) Pick-Up Clutch Spring Clutch Grease (3/8-oz Tube) Ozone Filter Fan (115V) Fan (240V) Fuser Bulb (110V) Fuser Bulb (220V) Fuser Cleaning Pad
196 – Service parts
EN
9
Summary of service notes and technical tips
Overview This chapter addresses some of the more common service issues.
The Troubleshooting Process The troubleshooting process, illustrated in figures 9-1 and 9-2, is a systematic approach to resolving printer problems. In searching for the causes for printer malfunctions and errors, the troubleshooting process addresses major problems first and then identifies secondary problems. In figures 9-1 and 9-2, each heading depicts a major troubleshooting step. A YES answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step. A NO answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to the referenced location and follow the instructions for that area. After completing the additional testing, proceed to the next major step.
EN
Overview – 197
1
3
2
Power On Is the printer on and displaying a readable message?
NO
Display
Configuration
Does the display Will it print YES indicate any of YES configuration the following? pages?
YES
READY OFFLINE POWER SAVE NO
NO A.
A.
Perform Power On checks.
Show Error Log to display information on Current Error and correct it.
A. Show Error log to display information on Current Error and correct it.
B. After control panel display becomes functional, go to Step 2.
B. After correcting all messages and errors, go to Step 3.
B. Verify information on PCL Configuration page.
C. After verifying configuration pages, go to Step 4.
Figure 9-1
Troubleshooting process for HP LaserJet printers
198 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
4 Aa Image Quality Does the print quality meet the customer’s requirements?
A. Compare the configuration pages to samples.
5
6 Error Log
Have you evaluated the error log?
A. Print and evaluate the error log.
7
Communication
Can the customer print successfully from their system?
Verification Does the printer pass the verification tests?
A.
A.
Run a print job from the customer host system.
Run a paper path test to verify operation.
B.
B.
After successful completion of the print job, go to Step 7.
Run a print job from the customer host system.
9 B. After meeting print quality requirements, go to Step 5.
B. After evaluating the error log, go to Step 6.
END
Figure 9-2
EN
Troubleshooting process for HP LaserJet printers
Overview – 199
Service Topic Index Obtain service notes from HPNN or HP FIRST. See the chapter on services and support for additional information. The tables that follow provide illustrations of printer models, a description of common problems, and pertinent reference information. Printer Model
Problem Description
Service Note Technical Tip (number) (page number)
LaserJet 6L/5L
Replacement formatter and date code
N/A
Accordion jams in fuser Countermeasure for clearing fuser jams
C3941A-01 207 C3941A-02A 208
Print quality defect: smeared print
C3166A-01 C3167A-01
213
Noisy fan
C3166A-02 C3167A-02
214
2000-sheet input unit jams
C3166A-03 C3167A-03
215
13.x paper jams are due to bad clutch connector Firmware revision corrects 79 Errors Revised DC controller improves fusing MIO and NVRAM reset problems
C3166A-04 C3167A-04 C3166A-05 C3167A-05 C3166A-06A C3167A-06A C3166A-07 C3167A-07
216
LaserJet 5Si and 5Si MX
200 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
206
217 220 221
EN
Printer Model
Problem Description
Service Note Technical Tip (number) (page number)
LaserJet 5Si and 5Si MX (continued)
Toner dumping and/or 79 service (04CC)
C3166A-08A 223
Improved MP tray
C3166A-09 C3167A-09 C3166A-10 C3167A-10 C3166A-11 C3167A-11 C3166A-12 C3167A-12 C3166A-13 C3167A-13
224
C3166A-14 C3167A-14
232
Improved 220V fuser C3166A-15 reduces toner contamination C3167A-15
234
Improved MP tray
C3166A-16 C3167A-16
235
Vendor revision “B” causes 79 service errors
C3166A-17 C3167A-17
237
C3166A-18 Entire Image Manager software C3167A-18 LJ 5 Introduction: service C3916A-01 note is available through HP FIRST and other sources
238
Printer firmware rolls to version 9.1 Set default printer font from front panel High-capacity input (2,000sheet input tray) Microswitch assembly in the 2,000-sheet input tray Executive-size paper tray
LaserJet 5
EN
226 228 229 231
N/A
Service Topic Index – 201
9
Printer Model
Problem Description
LaserJet 4V, 4MV
Paper jams with three-hole punched paper Printer hangs and displays “79 (0523) Service Error” Printer will not access service model PostScript SIMM replacement part Repeating 94MM print defect 57 Service Error (not caused by main motor) Thumb screw and back plate (part numbers) 55 Service Error troubleshooting hints MP tray jams Preventing damage to toner cartridge shutter arm Multipurpose tray pickup roller does not stop Leading edge smudge Formatter fan noise Paper jams occur in output area when large media is used Input jamming when feeding from the 500-sheet feeder
Service Note Technical Tip (number) (page number) C3141A-01 241 C3141A-02
242
C3141A-03
243
C3141A-04
N/A
C3141A-05 C3141A-06
243 244
C3141A-07
244
C3141A-08
245
C3141A-10 N/A
245 246
C3141A-12 & C3142A-12 C3142A-13 C3141-14 C3142A-15
246 247 248 250
C3760A-02C 250
202 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Printer Model Problem Description LaserJet 4P/ 4MP and 4L/4ML
EN
Service Note (number)
Technical Tip (page number)
Clearing paper jams in LJ 4L C2003A-01 and 4P
252
Fusing assembly gear lubricant
C2003A-02
N/A
LaserJet 4P product introduction
C2005A-01
N/A
LaserJet 4P “50 Service Error” (220 volt units only)
C2005A-02
N/A
LaserJet 4P Service Manual part corrections LaserJet 4L, 4P part number and diagram corrections Media jams caused by input paper sensor arm that is broken or binding
C2005A-03
N/A
C2005A-04
N/A
C2003A-03 C2015A-03 C2005A-07 C2040A-07 C3134A-01 Broken printer frame - paper C2003A-04 cassette support guides C2015A-04 C2005A-08 C2040A-08 C3150A-02 C3155A-02 C3134A-02 C3932A-02 C3935A-02
253
254
Service Topic Index – 203
9
Printer Model Problem Description
Service Note (number)
Technical Tip (page number)
LaserJet Paper jams in optional 500 4 Plus/4M Plus lower cassette and 4/4M Paper jam errors 13 and 41.3 (multi-feed jams)
C2001A-01
255
C2001A-02
256
Accordion jams in output assembly
C2001A-03
257
500-sheet lower cassette (Tray 3) shim improves paper handling
C2001A-04 C2021A-04 C2037A-02 C2039A-02 C3916A-03 C3171A-03 C395AA-03
258
LJ 4 Plus ONLY: product introduction
C2037A-01
N/A
LJ 4 Plus ONLY: duplex product introduction
C3157A-01
N/A
LaserJet 4Si
False paper jams (last page N/A only)
259
Image skew (missing paper weight) Error 52 laser scanner failures Missing scan lines 70110mm from top of page Preventing jams: face up or output stacker Paper jamming and feed problems
N/A
260
C2010A-01
N/A
C2010A-02
261
C2010A-03
262
N/A
263
204 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Printer Model Problem Description
Service Note (number)
Technical Tip (page number)
LaserJet IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP
Moaning sound in separation pad
N/A
264
Compressed print Continuous “PS Busy”
N/A N/A
265 267
Incompatibility: new fusing assembly component
33471A/AB-04 33481A/AB-04 C2007A-02
268
Potential safety issue following fuser repair
33440A/AB/AU12 269 33447A/AB/AU09 33449A/AB-05 33459A/AB-03
Internal cabling problems
N/A
Light-brown stain on front side of duplexed page
33447A/AB/AU10 271 33459A/AB-04
LaserJet Series III, II
LaserJet IIID, IID
EN
270
Misaligned duplexed image N/A Duplex jamming: duplex N/A drive roller assembly Duplex jamming: N/A misaligned switchback assembly
272 273
Duplex jamming: worn lower duplex guide assembly
N/A
274
Power envelope feeder jams N/A
275
274
Service Topic Index – 205
9
Technical Tips LaserJet 6L, 5L
Replacement Formatter and Date Code Service Note Number: N/A Situation: The HP LaserJet 5L printer contains three formatter PCAs and three firmware versions. Solution: The replacement formatter for all versions of the formatter and firmware is the C3942-69002 formatter with a firmware date code 19950623. Formatter
FW Date Code
C3942-60001
19950227
C3942-60001
19950522
C3942-60001
19950623
C3942-60002
19950623
C3942-60003
19950522
C3942-60003
19950623
Replacement Formatter (all)
Replacement Date Code (all)
C3942-69002
19950623
206 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Accordion Jams in the Printer Fuser Service Note Number: C3941A-01 Serial Numbers Affected: C in the middle of sending a PostScript job in a UNIX environment and then selecting Cancel Job from the front panel.)
Action: Verify the error, sub-code, and serial number range. If the serial number has a “C” or “D” in the fourth character location, the printer was built with the 7_9 version firmware, which may experience the 79 errors. The new version firmware is an 8_5. Always confirm the firmware revision by reviewing the configuration page. All printers in which the fourth character is an “F” are of the new revision. Use the configuration page to get the serial number, page count, default paper size, and maintenance count information needed for the new formatter PCB. See pages 3-18 in the service manual for accessing service mode. Replace the formatter if a 79 error and one of the above subcodes are associated.
EN
Technical Tips – 215
9
Revised DC Controller Improves Fusing from Trays 2 and 3 Service Note Number: C3166A-06A & C3167A-06A Serial Number Range: • 110V XXCB00000 - XXCB019885 XXCB019886 - XXCG999999 XXCC00000 - XXCC019885 XXCC019886 - XXCG999999 XXCD00000 - XXCD019885 XXCD019886 - XXCG999999 XXBB00000 - XXBB013886 XXBB013887 - XXBG999999 XXBC00000 - XXBC013886 XXBC013887 - XXBG999999 XXBD00000 - XXBD013886 XXBD013887 - XXBG999999 • 220V XXQB00000 - XXQB015530 XXQC00000 - XXQC015530 XXQD00000 - XXQD015530 XXRB00000 - XXRB008920 XXRC00000 - XXRC008920 XXRD00000 - XXRD008920 Where XX = US, NL, or SG
Part Required: Revised DC Controller Situation: This service note is to communicate the availability of a new DC controller which has an increased temperature for all supported paper sizes. The service note it supersedes affected only letter-sized and ledger-sized media. Printers in the serial number range listed above have an older version firmware which can be updated if fusing is found to be a problem with any of the supported paper sizes. If a printer was updated by the first revision (C3166-06 or C3167-06) of this service note, there is no need to update to the 2.60—unless a paper size other than letter or ledger is experiencing a problem with toner adhesion. Printers manufactured with an “H” in the fourth character position of the serial number have this new 2.60 version DC controller firmware.
216 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Solution: To improve fusing ability on all supported paper sizes, the fusing temperature has been increased from 180 degrees Celsius to 190 degrees Celsius for trays 2 and 3. The solution is provided through updated firmware on the DC Controller PCB. Action: Confirm the printer is within the serial number range listed, and then replace the DC controller PCB. It is also important to be cautious of the media being used. If you need to verify the firmware revision, refer to IC201 on the DC controller board. The first revision 1.11 is identified by a “02.” The current 2.22 revision is identified by a “05” on IC201. The 2.6 revision is identified with a “060"on IC201.
New Firmware Revision Fixes MIO and NVRAM Reset Problems Service Note Number: C3166A-07 & C3167A-07
9
Serial Number Range: • 110V XXYC00000 - XXYC99999 XXYF00000 - XXYF99999 • 220V XXYC00000 - XXYC99999 XXYF00000 - XXYF99999 Where XX = US, NL, or SG Y=B,C,D for 110V, or Q,R, or S for 220V
Affected Part Numbers: C3168-69002 Part Required: Formatter PCB
EN
Technical Tips – 217
Situation: When the printer is turned off and then back on again, there is a potential that the MIO or NVRAM configuration will be lost. As a result, the user could no longer successfully print a job, and they must reconfigure the Network card before successful printing is resumed. If the NVRAM is reset, the printer has no serial number, accurate page count, or default paper size. When the formatter has been reset, it forces the MIO card to reset itself. (This function is part of the MIO card specification.) The reset of the MIO card will occur even if the MIO card was not installed at the time the formatter reset itself. If plugged in later, the MIO card will detect the bits in NVRAM, which will tell it to perform a RESET of the MIO Card. This condition may have been misdiagnosed in the past as a defective MIO card. It is easy to assume the MIO card is the problem when in fact it is not. Solution: HP has completed testing and (as of July 1, 1996) made available a revised formatter assembly to the service channel. This new 8.6 version firmware resolves the problem of MIO and NVRAM resets.
Action: Replace the formatter if MIO and NVRAM resets are experienced. All printers in which the fourth character of the printer serial number is a “G” are of the new revision. Any serial number lower than “G” in the fourth character position has a potential to fail. Use the configuration page to get the serial number, page count, default paper size, and maintenance count information needed for the new formatter PCB. If the NVRAM has reset the serial number, locate it on the back panel of the printer. See page 3-18 in the service manual for information on accessing service mode to re-enter this information for the new formatter. Note At installation, the formatter will force a reset of itself and the MIO card; therefore, an MIO configuration will be required at the time of installation.
218 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Toner Dumping and/or 79 Service with (04CC) Subcode Service Note Number: C3166A-08A Serial Number Range: • 110V: XXXH00000 - XXXX99999 • 220V: XXXH00000 - XXXX99999
Parts Required: C3166-69010 (Exchange), RG5-1844-050CN (New)
Situation: HP has been investigating an increase in calls regarding toner dumping inside of the printer. The investigation revealed three potential scenarios in which toner dumps. It is imperative that the support partners thoroughly troubleshoot this condition in order to successfully complete the repair. Scenario Number 1: (Most likely scenario) Toner cartridge usage may have exceeded the life of the cartridge. A toner cartridge for the 5Si family of printers has a life expectancy of 15,000 images. A toner cartridge that is used longer than 15,000 images can experience a failure due to wear on the photoconductive drum and on some mechanical components such as gears and seals. This failure can cause some toner to leak into the printer. In this scenario, no printer parts are needed. Refer the customer to proper usage. Scenario Number 2: If the printer has a formatter revision that is earlier than 9.1, the engine may continue to run, which causes dumping of the toner cartridge. Verify that the version of the DC controller is a 1.11 version. To do so, refer to IC 201 on the DC controller; the identifier is “02.” Replace the DC controller if it is a 1.11 version. Do not replace the formatter for this condition.
EN
Technical Tips – 219
9
Scenario Number 3: (Least likely scenario) The printer may be exhibiting a 79 Service (04CC) error. The 79 Service (04CC) was added to the firmware code of formatters (9.1 version or greater) to capture the signal combination that resulted in toner dumping. Verify that the DC controller is not a 1.11 version, as in scenario number 2. If the error condition continues, power cycle the printer; do not replace the formatter. Escalate through the normal escalation channel if the error persists.
Action: Replace the DC controller only if it is a 1.11 version. Improved MP Tray Service Note Number: C3166A-09 & C3167A-09 Serial Number Range: • 110V: XXYC00000 - XXYC99999 XXYD00000 - XXYD99999 • 220V: XXYC00000 - XXYC99999 XXYD00000 - XXYD99999 Where XX = US, NL, or SG Y=B,C,D for 110V, or Q,R, or S for 220V
220 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Affected Part Number: RG5-1880-090 Part Required: MP tray Situation: The current MP tray experienced a higher than acceptable level of failures from the tray failing to lift. This can be an intermittent failure. The failure occurs when the actuating solenoid fails to engage the tray-lifting mechanism. The feed roller engages to drive the paper, but the paper tray is never lifted. The printer will attempt to raise the tray twice before posting an error. The majority of the time the printer will post a 13.2 paper jam error, which can be cleared by opening and closing the printer door. Sometimes the printer will report a 58.3 error, which requires that the printer be power-cycled. However, if the printer has a formatter with version 8.6 or older firmware, the 58.3 error message will disappear within 5 seconds, leaving the previous message that occurred in the display. The printer is now in a state requiring that it be power cycled, but nothing is indicated on the control panel. With version 9.1 firmware, the 58.3 error message will remain on the display, stating that the printer be power cycled. In all cases, the error will be logged and can be viewed by printing the error logs. Although there may be many causes for a 13.2 paper jam error, only an MP tray failure will cause a 58.3 error.
Solution: The MP tray has been modified with a more powerful solenoid and a metal sleeve designed to reduce friction. Action: Replace a failing MP tray with a new one. The failure can be confirmed by observing the tray not lifting when the feed roller is in operation or by 58.3 Errors in the error logs.
EN
Technical Tips – 221
9
LaserJet 5Si Printer Firmware Rolls to Version 9.1 Service Note Number: C3166A-10 & C3167A-10 Serial Number Range: • 110V: XXYC00000 - XXYG99999 • 220V: XXYC00000 - XXYG99999 Where XX = US, NL, or SG Y = B, C, D for 110V, or Q, R, or S for 220V
Affected Part Number: C3168-69003 Part Required: Formatter PCB Situation: The firmware for the LaserJet 5Si has rolled to a new revision that includes corrections to some specific error conditions that were found after the product's introduction. HP recommends upgrading to the new version if any of the problems listed below occur. Solution: HP has completed testing and, as of November 1, 1996, has made available a 9.1 version of the formatter assembly. The following fixes are included in the new version of the firmware: • HUNG IN PROCESSING JOB. The printer has the potential to hang up and not respond to any key presses to the front panel. The front panel will display PROCESSING JOBS. Getting out of this locked-up mode requires power-cycling the printer. This is corrected in the 9.1 firmware. • 20 MEMORY OVERFLOW PROBLEM. A problem with memory allocation existed in the 73 firmware, which allocated the maximum amount available. This resulted in numerous memory overflow problems. The problem was fixed to allocate just the required amount of memory.
222 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
• FORM LENGTH SELECTION FROM THE FRONT PANEL. This function can be found in the PCL MENU structure of the control panel. • SLOW PRINTING OF FORMS. Versions 7.9, 8.5, and 8.6 firmware had a problem handling raster graphics in 300 dot-per-inch (dpi) mode. Often, the size of the raster strip used was too small and inefficient. The implemented fix allows the formatter to run close to engine speed. • INTERNAL TRAYS NOT LIFTING WHILE IN POWERSAVE MODE. If the user opened one of the internal trays while the printer was in PowerSave mode, the tray would not lift it after it was closed. This would result in an “Out of Paper” message for that tray. • IMPROPER SELECTION OF TRANSPARENCIES AND CARDSTOCK ALLOWED FROM INTERNAL TRAYS. Customers were able to select transparencies and card stock as a paper type from the front panel even though these paper types were not supported from internal trays 2 and 3. These selections no longer appear on the front panel.
Action: Replace the formatter assembly if the problem is listed in this service note or depicted in the troubleshooting section of the LaserJet 5Si Service Manual.
Note For information on a complete Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5Si Printer Mopy Upgrade, call (800) 563-2983.
EN
Technical Tips – 223
9
Default Printer Font Can Now Be Set from the Front Panel Service Note Number: C3166A-11 & C3167A-11 Serial Number Range: • 110V: XXY C00000 - XXY G99999 • 220V: XXY C00000 - XXY G99999 Where XX = US, NL, or SG Y = B, C, D for 110V, or Q, R, S for 220V
Part Required: Formatter PCB Situation: The LaserJet 5Si printer was introduced without the capacity of being able to set a default front panel font. HP soon realized the importance of this capability to many customers, particularly those in a UNIX environment who rely on setting a default font at the front panel of the printer. Solution: HP has added this functionality back into the current 9.1 version of firmware. Any customer needing the front panel font capability can get it by contacting the Customer Support Center (U.S.) at (208) 323-2551 or by contacting the nearest HP Authorized Dealer Service Center. Outside of the U.S., customers should contact the European Customer Support Center or the nearest HP Authorized Service Center. There are also PJL commands that allow for permanent changing of the default printer font. For example: For font number 2, Ec%-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM :PCL FONTNUMBER = 2 Ec%-12345X
224 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Action: Replace the formatter assembly according the instructions provided in the removal and replacement section of the service manual, part number C4077-99014. BE SURE TO RE-ENTER THE SERIAL NUMBER, PAGE COUNT, AND MAINTENANCE COUNT VIA THE SERVICE MODE. This information is required so the printer will report the “PERFORM USER MAINTENANCE” message at the 350,000 page interval.
High-Capacity Input (2,000-Sheet Input Tray) Service Note Number: C3166A-12 & C3167A-12 Serial Number Range: LCF00000 to LCF99999 Part Required: None Situation: In some cases, the registration from Tray 4/HCI causes print to start too close to the edge of the paper. Although this may or may not be within specifications, some users do not want printing to be so close to the edge. To them, the situation is unacceptable.
Solution: This issue is not affecting all of the installed base, since in many cases the Tray 4 alignment is fine. In other cases, customers do not care about the Tray 4 offset. However, for those customers experiencing the problem, perform the adjustment procedure given below. Action: Adjustment procedure from the Tray 4/HCI left margin: 1 With the HCI stand-alone, remove the left, right, and rear covers from the HCI. 2 Remove the vertical transfer unit.
EN
Technical Tips – 225
9
3 Open the HCI paper tray. 4 Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on the right side of the HCI. 5 Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle (right side). 6 Slide the bracket so the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the bracket hole. 7 Tighten both screws. 8 Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on the left side of the HCI. 9 Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle (left side). 10 Slide the bracket so the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the bracket hole. 11 Tighten both screws. 12 Reassemble the vertical transfer unit. 13 Make sure that all cables (vertical transfer unit and paper deck drive assembly) are re-connected. 14 Reinstall the left, right, and rear covers to the HCI.
Note Positioning the locating pin at the middle could still be unacceptable for some customer’s applications. If so, repeat the procedure by moving the locating pin further back and testing the margin.
226 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Microswitch Assembly in the 2,000-Sheet Input Tray Service Note Number: C3166A-13, C3167A-13 Serial Number Range: LCF00000 to LCF99999 Affected Part Number: C3168-69003 Part Required: RG5-2546-000CN Situation: A microswitch, located at the center top of the HCI tray, has been implemented to protect the tray’s functionality. When depressed, this microswitch displays “TRAY 4 EMPTY”, causing the tray to not lift at all. For unknown reasons, this microswitch has been failing or breaking. When this happens, replacement of the whole unit is required because the microswitch was not set up as a spare part and is not documented in either the service or operator manuals. The purpose of this switch is to avoid serious damage to Tray 4 if a customer loads Letter or A4 paper sizes (portrait orientation) in the right side of Tray 4, and stocks paper or any other media in the empty left side at the same time. If this happens, the tray will be unable to lift all the way up because the microswitch is depressed. The depressed microswitch disables the current of the lifting motor, thus avoiding serious damage to Tray 4.
Solution: Work is currently underway to obtain samples from the field in order to perform a failure analysis and to design a countermeasure. It is strongly recommended that customers do not stock paper in the empty space of the HCI. Results of usability tests indicate that users do not pay attention to the warning label attached on the bottom-left side of Tray 4.
EN
Technical Tips – 227
9
Action: If the microswitch is damaged, regardless of the cause, replace it by ordering part number RG5-2546-000CN. This number is already set up at SMO/SME. The microswitch assembly includes the microswitch itself, the mounting metallic bar, and the necessary cables.
Removal and Replacement: Lift the printer clear of the HCI and place it on a smooth, sturdy surface. WIth the HCI standalone: 1 Remove the top cover. 2 Remove the back cover. 3 Disconnect the outside cables (connector with two cables) to release the microswitch assembly from the back top of the frame. 4 Release the screw that holds the microswitch mounting metallic bar. 5 Take out the microswitch assembly (switch and metallic bar) by pushing forward the back edge of the mounting metallic bar. 6 Install the replacement microswitch assembly.
LaserJet 5Si Now Available with an Executive-Size Paper Tray Service Note Number: C3166A-14 & C3167A-14 Situation: HP recently made available the LaserJet 5Si with an executive-size paper tray. The 5Si Executive printer is product number C3166A, option #ABAUEA. The product option is specifically for the Marriott Corporation. This tray provides users with the capability to print from a 500-sheet tray, which is exclusive to executive-size media (10.5 x 7.3 in).
228 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Prior to the new executive tray, Tray 1 was the only source for printing this size of media. The executive tray replaces the standard Tray 2. All other sizes must feed from either Tray 1 or Tray 3.
Support Information: The Executive printer is identified with an “X” in the fourth position of the serial number. Response Center systems have been updated to recognize the Executive printer for repair purposes because the Executive printer has three unique parts: • DC controller, part number C3166-60153 • Executive-size tray, part number R77-0008-000CN • Printer label, C3166-00032 Become familiar with these two specific conditions: 1 If you receive the message “MANUALLY FEED TRAY 1 PLAIN EXECUTIVE”, when Tray 2 is empty, load executive-size paper into Tray 2 and press [Select] on the printer control panel. 2 If Tray 1 and Tray 2 are loaded with different types of executive-size paper, such as plain executive paper in Tray 1 and yellow executive paper in Tray 2, you must select your input tray by media type, rather than by the input tray. See the user guide for information on configuring the media types at the control panel for each tray. Make the type selection in the printer driver on the PAPER tab, which is under the OPTIONS button for the printer, or from the Page Setup dialog of the word processing application.
EN
Technical Tips – 229
9
Improved 220V Fuser Reduces Toner Contamination Service Note Number: C3166A-15 & C3167A-15 Serial Number Range: • 220V: NLYC000000 - SGYK999999 Where XX = NL or SG
Affected Part Number: C3166A Part Required: New: RG5-1871-190 Exchange: C3166-69013
Situation: This service note is to communicate the availability of a new revision of the C3166A fuser unit in Europe. This new fuser reduces the likelihood of build-up from calcium carbonate on fuser rollers, which can degrade print quality. Calcium carbonate is used as a filler and brightener by European paper manufacturers. This build-up has only been seen on papers using calcium carbonate. The problem is often described as “blobs on the output” or “printouts getting dirty after a few days.” Solution: Replace the failing user assembly with this new version to reduce problems of print quality caused by European paper containing calcium carbonate.
Action: Confirm that the print quality problems are caused by the fusing unit and are not attributable to other components such as the toner cartridge or the use of media that does not meet HP specifications. The build-up on the fuser can be visually inspected by examining the surface of the rollers. If the rollers are contaminated, replace the fuser unit and record the page count in the CSO (in the “Usg Qty” field on the U2 screen).
230 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Improved Multipurpose Tray Service Note Number: C3166A-16A & C3167A-15A Serial Number Range: • 110V XXBY000000 - XXBY142588 XXJY000000 - XXJY 142588 XXDY000000 - XXDY097990 XXLY000000 - XXLY097990 XXCY000000 - XXCY099999 • 220V XXZY000000 - XXQY028190 XXSY000000 - XXSY070281 XXRY000000 - XXRY099999
9
Where XX = US, NL, or SG Y = B, C, D, F, G, H, J, K, X
Affected Part Numbers: RG5-1880-100CN, MP serial numbers JAA0326819 to JAA0420130; RG5-1880-110CN, MP serial numbers JAA0420131 and higher Part Required: MP Tray Situation: The current MP tray has been experiencing a higher than acceptable level of failures in which the tray fails to lift. This can be an intermittent failure. The failure occurs when the actuating solenoid fails to engage the tray-lifting mechanism. The feed roller engages to drive the paper, but the paper tray is never lifted. The printer attempts to raise the tray twice before posting an error.
EN
Technical Tips – 231
The majority of the time, the printer posts a 13.2 paper jam error, which can be cleared by opening and closing the printer door. Sometimes the printer reports a 58.3 error message, which requires the printer to be power-cycled. However, if the printer has a formatter with version 8.6 or older firmware, the 58.3 error message disappears within 5 seconds. In this case, the message for the previous error remains on the display. The printer is now in a state requiring that it be power- cycled, with no indication on the control panel. With version 9.1 firmware, the 58.3 error message remains on the display, stating that the printer needs to be power-cycled. In all cases, the error is logged and can be viewed by printing the error logs. Although there may be many causes for a 13.2 paper jam error, only an MP tray failure will cause a 58.3 error.
Solution: The MP tray has been modified with a more powerful solenoid and a metal tab designed to reduce friction.
Action: Replace a failing MP tray with a new one: RG5-1880-100CN, MP serial numbers JAA0326819 to JAA0420130 or RG5-1880-110CN, MP serial numbers JAA0420131 and higher. The failure can be confirmed by observing the tray not lifting when the feed roller is in operation or by 58.3 errors in the error logs.
232 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
16-Megabyte SIMM Manufactured by HP: Vendor Revision “B” Causes 79 Service Errors Service Note Number: C3166A-17 & C3167A-17 Serial Number Range: • 110V: XXYC00000 - XXYJ99999 • 220V: XXYC00000 - XXYJ99999 Where XX = US, NL, or SG Y=B,C,D for 110V, or Q,R, or S for 220V
Affected Part Number: C3146 Part Required: C3146A Situation: LaserJet 5Si family printers having 16-Megabyte (MB) (revision “B”) SIMMs installed can fail with various 79 service errors. Removing or replacing these SIMMs with non-revision “B” SIMMs or two 8 MB SIMMs resolves this issue. To identify the failing SIMMs, look for the identification number “HM5117400BS6” on the components. Older 16 MB SIMMs (Revision “A”, identification number ends with AS6), as well as SIMMs made with other components (not marked with this specific identification number) do not exhibit this problem.
Solution: Replace the failing SIMM with a non-revision “B” SIMM.
EN
Technical Tips – 233
9
Action: • Verify that the printer has a 16 MB SIMM marked with HM5117400BS6. • Do not replace the formatter. • Remove the 16 MB SIMM and verify that the printer no longer fails. • Replace the failing SIMM with a non-revision “B” SIMM and return the failing SIMM. • CSO entries: Move the product number and the serial number to the system entry fields. Change the product number field from the printer model number to C3146A (SIMM) and the serial number to 0000A00000.
LaserJet 5Si and Entire Image Manager Software Service Note Number: C3166A-18 Serial Number Range: • 110V: XXYC00000 - XXYJ99999 • 220V: XXYC00000 - XXYJ99999 Where XX = US, NL, or SG Y=B,C,D for 110V, or Q,R,S for 220V
Part Required: C3168-69005
234 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Situation: HP has entered an agreement with Entire, Incorporated. Entire has developed a software solution called the Entire Image Manager. Essentially, the solution takes up to four LJ 5Si printers and enables them to work as one logical printer. With print speeds up to 96 pages per minute, it is ideal for printing books and manuals as well as other high-volume print jobs. The software comes with a full standard set of tools to raster image process (RIP), manage, merge, retrieve, impose, queue, and store in an electronic library, and to output files to an LJ 5Si. Image Manager can accept PostScript Level 2, PCL 5e, TIFF, and CCITT G3/G4 files from modems, floppy disks, tapes, or other media. Customers can connect their printer cluster to almost any Ethernet, Token Ring, LocalTalk, and FDDI networks. It supports TCP/IP, Novell, DECnet, AppleTalk, LAN Manager, LAN server, SNA, and Banyan protocols. Any engine sold after September 1, 1997 that does not have the 9.7 firmware or later will require a formatter replacement.
Solution: Clarity of support and firmware compatibility for this solution is important. If the customer is having problems with the solution, please instruct them to call the HP reseller that sold them their solution. If the reseller is distributing the Image Manager software, they also have the responsibility for first-level support for the software. Second-level support is provided by the master distributor: Ahearne & Soper support (800) 879-3224 (extension 120).
EN
Technical Tips – 235
9
The master distributor will determine whether the equipment is defective and, if so, direct the customer to the manufacturer. Entire, Inc. is responsible for third-level support on the software bundle: Entire’s support group can be reached at (716) 742-2200 (extension 251). HP’s traditional LJ 5Si support infrastructure will be responsible for supporting the LJ 5Si engine. The Image Manager Software only works with firmware version 9.7 or later. This service note covers any 5Si printers sold after September 1, 1997 that do not have the required firmware to be compatible with the Entire Image Manager software. In Europe, the solution will be rolled out as a co-labeled HP and Entire product. In North America, the solution will be a third-party program. The rest of the world will not be addressed until we have the other two major regions running. Both regions are expected to see installations around September 1, 1997.
Action: Confirm the firmware version by printing a configuration page. Replace the formatter assembly (part number C3168-69005) as noted above.
236 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
LJ 4V/4MV
Paper Jams When Using Three-Hole Punched Paper Service Note Number: C3141A-01 & C3142A-01 Serial Numbers Affected: • 110V: JPBF000000-JPBF002856, JPBC000000-JPBC003385, JPBH000000-JPBH001216 • 220-240V: JPBQ000000-JPBQ014821, JPBR000000JPBR008695, JPBS000000-JPBS003616
Associated Part Numbers: DC controller PCB (P/N RG5-1932000CN)
Situation: Printers in the serial number ranges listed above have a DC controller that may not allow enough time for three-hole paper to pass by the first paper sensor (PS501).
Solution: To increase paper feed performance with three-hole punched paper, an end of the front registration sensor lever has been widened. To accommodate the widened lever, the guide assembly was notched as necessary, and the main frame structure was enlarged. Sensor levers for the serial number range above are unique. If they are worn or broken, the only replacement part is RF5-0397-000CN. Action: If a three-hole jam problem occurs in printers that are within the serial number range, replace the DC controller PCB.
EN
Technical Tips – 237
9
Printer Hangs or Displays 79 (0523) Service Error Service Note Number: C3141A-02 Situation: When using a PostScript level 1 driver, the printer will either hang or exhibit a 79 SERVICE (0523) error when the following condition is present: Page size A has been selected, with the printer containing Page size B, according to the following table: B (Tray) A (Driver)
Legal
Legal
A4
JB5
X
X
JB4
11 x 17
X
X
X
X
A3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
JB4 Custom
X
X
The hang occurs if the job consists of only one page. If the job consists of multiple pages, the error 79 occurs.
Solution: • Ask the customer to use PostScript level 2 drivers exclusively. •
If #1 is not feasible, replace the formatter PCA.
238 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Printer Will Not Access Service Mode Service Note Number: C3141A-03A Serial Numbers Affected: JPB0000000 - JPB9999999 Associated Part Numbers: C3141-60003 - patch SIMM Description: Printers manufactured in the range shown above may have firmware that will not recognize depressed control panel keys upon power-up. Therefore, there is no access to Service Mode, Language Localization, or Cold Reset. This affects 110V and 220V units with the #ABA English option. Solution: To order a patch SIMM, call HP Distribution at (970) 339-7009 (U.S.) or (+31) 20 682-8291 (Europe). Repeating 94mm Print Defect
9
Service Note Number: C3141A-05 Associated Part Numbers: Toner cartridge: C3900A Situation: Toner cartridges for the LaserJet 4V and 4MV products could have a damaged print drum. Due to the design of the product, this defect can be induced if the cartridge body is squeezed hard in the middle. The defect can also occur if the cartridge is dropped (even if the cartridge is still in the box). The symptom will be one or two black or white dots that repeat every 94mm in the direction of the paper path. The dots will be located near the center of a letter-sized page when viewed in a landscape orientation.
Solution/Action: Any toner cartridge that exhibits this defect should be returned to HP or an HP Authorized Service Center for replacement. Cartridges beginning with lot code 4I28S* will not have the potential to become damaged.
EN
Technical Tips – 239
57 Service Error (not caused by the main motor) Service Note Number: C3141A-06 Associated Part Numbers: RS5-2125-000CN - Spring Description: A 57.1 SERVICE error, which normally indicates a main motor failure, may also be caused by a broken spring in the sensor flag associated with the Front Door Open Sensor (PS402). Failure of the Door Sensor prohibits power to the main motor, causing the error.
Solution: Before replacing the main motor assembly, check the spring and sensor flag. Replace the spring, if broken.
Parts for Thumb Screws and Back Plate of Formatter Card Cage Can Be Ordered Service Note Number: C3141A-07 & C3142A-07 Associated Part Number: Thumb screws (RB1-5788-000CN) and the Cardcage Back Plate (RB1-5556-000CN) Situation: Some cases have been reported of the formatter thumb screws breaking; in some cases, the threads in the card cage back plate have been stripped. The design and material used for the screw is being addressed. However, in the event that this becomes a problem, it is important that the individual pieces are available through our normal parts-ordering channels. Therefore, the thumb screws (RB1-5788-000CN) and the card cage backplate (RB1-5556-000CN) are now available. Replace broken screws or stripped back plate on failure only. Refer to Internal Components in chapter 8 of the LaserJet 4V service manual. The back plate is part of the formatter card cage, as shown in figure 8-10, item 11. Make the appropriate mark-ups in your service manuals.
240 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
55 Service Error Troubleshooting Hint Service Note Number: C3141A-08 & C3142A-08 Situation: A “55 Service Error” is usually caused by a communication error between the DC controller and the formatter PCA. If the formatter PCA is not seated properly to the interface PCA, this error will occur. This is an important troubleshooting tip because the service manual directs you to replace the laser/scanner as the second most-likely solution. Mark your service manuals with the second mostlikely fix to be: “2. Reseat the formatter PCA” prior to unnecessarily replacing the laser/scanner assembly. The next revision to the service manual will reflect this change.
MP Tray Paper Jams Service Note Number: C3141A-10 Associated Part Numbers: RB1-6389-000CN - static charge eliminator, RG5-1555-050CN - guide
Serial Numbers Affected: • 110V: JPCF011302, JPCG007020, JPCH005190 • 220V: JPCQ002711, JPCR000101, JPVQ003523, JPVR008774, JPVS000101
Description: Early units have an increased possibility of paper jams. The parts listed above have been upgraded to fix the problem. Solution: Refer to chapter 6 in the service manual to remove the registration roller guide plate and anti-static brush. Replace with the redesigned parts.
EN
Technical Tips – 241
9
Preventing Damage to Toner Cartridge Shutter Arm Service Note Number: NONE Associated Part Numbers: NONE Description: If the front door of the printer is not fully opened when a toner cartridge is being removed, it is very likely that the shutter that covers the cartridge drum will be broken, destroying the cartridge and resulting in blank pages being printed.
Solution: Advise the customer to always open the front door completely before removing the toner cartridge.
Pickup Roller on the Multipurpose Tray Does Not Stop Service Note Number: C3141A-12 & C3142A-12 Serial Numbers Affected: • 115V: JPBXXXXXXX - ALL, JPCXXXXXXX - ALL, JPDFXXXXXX ALL, JPDGXXXXXX - ALL, JPDH000000 - JPDH030601 • 220V: JPBXXXXXXX - ALL, JPCXXXXXXX - ALL, JPDXXXXXXX - ALL, JPXS000000 - JPDH007198
Associated Part Number: RG5-1584-000CN (paper guide plate assembly), C3141-69007 (exchange part number) Situation: Occasionally the pickup clutch on the paper guide plate assembly will not disengage. If this occurs, paper is continually picked from the (MP) multipurpose tray, and as many as three or more sheets jam in the printer.
242 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Solution: A new clutch is now being used on the paper guide plate assembly (RG5-1584-000CN). The old clutch used an oil-impregnated metal bushing as a lubricant. On some clutches, this oil would leak from the bushing, causing the armature to stick. Then, the clutch would not disengage. The new clutch uses a mold bushing that does not require oil, thus solving the problem. The part number for the paper guide plate assembly containing this new clutch is the exchange part number C3141-69007. After confirming the error condition described above, replace the paper guide plate assembly. Leading Edge Smudge Service Note Number: C3142A-13 Associated Serial Numbers: • 115V: JPFH000000-JPFH001548, JPBXXXXXXX-ALL, JPCXXXXXXX-ALL, JPDXXXXXXX-ALL • 220V: JPFQ000000-JPFQ000389, JPXS000000-JPXS022660, JPVXXXXXXX-ALL, JPWXXXXXXX-ALL
Associated Part Number: Old part number: RF5-1380-000CN; New part number: RF5-1380-030CN
Situation: The fuser entrance guide has a ridge of material along its length. Toner can build up along the edge of this ridge. This accumulated toner can cause the page to catch at the inlet to the fuser; when caught, the unfused toner scatters, creating a print defect called “leading edge smudge.” This defect appears as smudged print or a toner halo around the characters. This print defect can occur as early as a 10K page count. The smudges can occur anywhere along the leading edge of the document (landscape paper path).
EN
Technical Tips – 243
9
Solution: Material has been removed along the length of the fuser entrance guide, and the ribs were extended. This change prevents the toner accumulation on the entrance guide from hitting the paper. Refer to the LaserJet 4V and 4MV Service Manual, Second Edition (C314190929), section 8, figure 8-4, item 28 for the part. Replace the part with the new part number: RF5-1380-030CN.
Action: For the replacement procedure, see the LaserJet 4V and 4MV Service Manual: Second Edition (C3141-90929).
Note Be sure to observe all warnings, notes, and cautions provided in this procedure.
Formatter Fan Noise Service Note Number: C3141-14 Serial Numbers Affected: • 100V/120V JPBF000000 to JPBF999999, JPDF000000 to JPDF999999, JPBG000000 to JPBG999999, JPDG000000 to JPDG999999, JPBH000000 to JPBH999999, JPDH000000 to JPDH999999, JPCF000000 to JPCF999999, JPFF000000 to JPFF018699, JPCG000000 to JPCG999999, JPFH000000 to JPFH005145, JPCH000000 to JPCH999999 • 220V/240V JPBQ000000 to JPBQ999999, JPVQ000000 to JPVQ999999, JPBR000000 to JPBR999999, JPVR000000 to JPVR999999, JPBS000000 to JPBS999999, JPVS000000 to JPVS999999, JPCQ000000 to JPCQ999999, JPWQ000000 to JPWQ999999, JPCR000000 to JPCR999999, JPWR000000 to JPWR999999, JPCS000000 to JPCS999999, JPWS000000 to JPWS999999, JPDQ000000 to JPDQ999999, JPXQ000000 to JPXQ012118, JPDR000000 to JPDR999999, JPXS000000 to JPXS033088, JPDS000000 to JPDS999999, JPFQ000000 to JPFQ006200, JPFS000000 to JPFS010991
244 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Associated Part Number: Fan: RH7-1317-000CN or video controller assembly: RG5-1560-060CN
Situation: The majority of formatter fan replacements have been for noise. These replacements have been categorized into two failure modes: •
The fan/card cage assembly produces a strong pitch or tone due to the fan rotational speed that causes the formatter cage to resonate. Customers may be more sensitive to this noise because this fan is the only fan on at all times.
•
Some fans may have a defective bearing which causes noise.
Solution: The operating speed of the fan has been re-engineered. The fan speed has been reduced from 7,000 revolutions per minute (rpm) to 5,000 rpm with no detrimental effect upon the printer operation. Also, an inspection process was created to check for bearing defects. The formatter fan has received a new part number RH7-1317-000CN and is available now through regular parts distribution. Action: For the replacement procedure, refer to the LaserJet 4V and 4MV Service Manual, Second Edition (C3141-90929), section 6, pages 6-16; “Card Cage.” The fan then can be removed from the card cage assembly and the countermeasure fan installed.
Note Be sure to observe all warnings, notes, and cautions provided in this procedure.
EN
Technical Tips – 245
9
Paper Jams In Output Area When Using Large Media Service Note Number: C3142A-15 Affected Serial Numbers: All Units Associated Part Number: RG5-0198-000CN Situation: After 400k images are printed, toner can build up on the face-down delivery assembly rollers. This can cause paper jams in the fuser or output area and/or leave claw marks on large-sized media (B size or 11X17 media). Solution: Clean or replace the face-down delivery assembly rollers. Action: For the replacement procedure, refer to the LaserJet 4V and 4MV Service Manual, Second Edition (C3141-90929). Note Be sure to observe all warnings, notes, and cautions provided in this procedure.
Input Jamming When Feeding from the 500-Sheet Feeder Service Note Number: C3760A-02C Associated Part Numbers: C3760-67900/Roller and Clip Kit Situation: The volume of calls has increased for LaserJet 4V/4MV printers with the 500-sheet optional cassette. The jam occurs at the registration area (PS1) and/or there are mis-picks from the optional tray. After extensive investigation and testing, we determined that installing the Roller and Clip kit should resolve the input jamming condition.
246 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Solution: 1 The tooling mold for the J11 clip was modified to ensure that the manufactured part is free of burrs. 2 The manufacturing process of the rollers has been modified with a new ultrasonic cleaning procedure to eliminate any blooming effects. The new preconditioned rollers have been tested extensively, with good results and performance. 3 A new Roller and Clip kit (C3760-67900) has been set up at SMO/ SME. The kit contains a J11 deflector clip, a new preconditioned roller assembly, and installation guidelines.
Action: 1 If the failure occurs, install the new Roller and Clip kit C3760-67900, using the instructions sheet included in the kit. 2 If you continue to experience a jamming problem from the lower cassette after performing the service note, consider the following recommendations: • Be sure not to install the roller assembly backwards. • Be sure that paper-size slider is seated properly into the four black pulleys (bushings). Ensure the pulleys are fully seated in their channels. • Be sure that the position lock on the paper-size slider is engaged in the correct hole. (The position lock has a green lever.) • Be sure that the magnetic sensors that detect paper size are properly placed. • Try different media or have the media evaluated. We have seen numerous issues relating to the customer's media. • The lower cassette units with serial number DE03695118 and greater are shipped with the new preconditioned roller assembly.
EN
Technical Tips – 247
9
LJ 4P/4MP and LJ 4L/4ML
Paper Jams Service Note Number: C2003A-01 (Information only) Description: A majority of the problems on the LaserJet 4L and 4P center around paper jams and removal of paper jams. In their haste to remove paper jams, people often damage the paper-input sensor flag (RF5-0601-000CN). The printer is inoperable with a broken sensor flag.
Solution: Replace the broken flag, and INSTRUCT THE CUSTOMER on proper removal of jams. If a jam occurs at the printer's input: 1 Slide the paper to the right, freeing it from the front and top oblique rollers of the printer. 2 Carefully pull the paper out from the front of the printer. If a jam occurs at the rear of the printer: 1 Open the fuser door and lift up on the release lever of the printer's rear fusing assembly. 2 Carefully pull the paper out from the rear of the printer.
248 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Media Jams Caused by Broken or Binding Input Paper Sensor Arm Service Note Number: C2003A-03, C2015A-03, C2005A-07, C2040A-07, C3134A-01
Serial Numbers Affected: AAAA000000 - ZZZZ999999 Description: Improperly removing jammed media can damage or break the Input Paper Sensor Arm (RF5-0601-000CN). As a result, media will jam frequently or constantly, regardless of whether media is fed from the lower cassette or from the manual feed slot. Solution: Replace the Input Paper Sensor Arm. This sensor arm has been re-designed to prevent it from breaking even if a media jam is removed improperly. Note When replacing the Input Paper Sensor Arm, the replacement sensor arm may bind with the High Voltage Shield (RB1-2987-000CN). If this occurs, also replace the High Voltage Shield. Due to the increased size of the redesigned Input Paper Sensor Arm, it may come into contact with the flange on the original version of the High Voltage Shield. To prevent this from happening, a flange on the original version of the High Voltage Shield has been removed.
EN
Technical Tips – 249
9
Broken Printer Frame - Paper Cassette Support Guides Service Note Number: C2003A-04, C2015A-04, C2005A-08, C2040A-08, C3150A-02, C3155A-02, C3134A-02, C3932A-02, C3935A-02
Serial Numbers Affected: AAAA000000 - ZZZZ999999 Description: A customer can damage a printer by improperly removing the paper cassette. Improper removal usually consists of pulling up or pushing down excessively on the paper cassette before it is fully removed from the printer. Improper removal can break off the support guide(s) the frame of the printer, which may cause an increase in media jams and image skew, or may crease printed output.
Solution: Install the paper cassette support guide repair kit (50624662). First, be sure that the printer is placed on a firm, flat surface. Apply the kit (a three-piece appliance) directly to the paper cassette. The kit includes two bottom supports, a left-side support, and instructions.
Procedure: To ensure correct installation, before starting the procedure go through the steps below carefully without removing the adhesive backing from the supports: 1 Remove the paper cassette and place it on a flat surface. 2 Remove the adhesive backing from one of the bottom supports. Carefully place the support in one of the two positions. 3 Remove the adhesive backing from the other bottom support and place it in the remaining position. 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the left-side support. Carefully place the support in position. 5 Replace the paper cassette in the printer; check for proper operation.
250 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
LJ 4 Plus/4M Plus and LJ 4/4M Paper Jams in Optional 500-Sheet Lower Cassette Service Note Number: C2001A-01 Description: Misadjustment of the counter-balance adjustment on the 500-sheet optional lower cassette is a leading cause of paper jams. Either no-picks or multi-picks will occur, resulting in 13 and/or 41 errors. Solution: Follow these instructions to adjust the cassette: 1 Fill the cassette completely full of paper of all the same weight (do not overfill). Make sure the paper is flush against the rear paper guide and that it rests under the front left corner tab. 2 Push down and release the front edge of the paper in the cassette until it bounces. If the cassette is adjusted correctly, the purplecolored indicator will stop in the very center of the indicator window. If you need to adjust it, rotate the knob and try “bouncing” the paper once again. Repeat these steps until the purple indicator stops in the center of the window.
Figure 9-3
EN
Adjustment of the optional 500-sheet lower cassette
Technical Tips – 251
9
Repeat this process any time you change the paper basis weigh. Note that if the indicator behaves erratically, the paper may not be flush against the rear paper guide.
Paper Jam Errors 13 and 41.3 (multi-feed jams) Service Note Number: C2001A-02 Associated Part Numbers: RA2-1999-000CN - corner tab Description: LaserJet 4/4M only: Multi-feed paper jams (where more than one sheet of paper is picked from the paper tray) may become a recurring problem if customers use marginal paper (paper that does not meet HP specifications or that is damaged).
Solution: A modified corner tab was designed to correct this problem. Service Note C2001A-02 provides instructions for obtaining and installing free replacement corner tabs (in quantities from one to ten). The redesigned corner tab is installed in the 250-sheet paper tray, and is specifically designed to increase the paper-feeding performance of lighter weight (60-75 g/m2 [16-20 lb]) papers. The original tab should be retained if the customer intends to use heavier weight papers in the future.
Figure 9-4
Installing the corner tab
To obtain free tabs, phone HP Distribution: United States: (970) 339-7009 Europe: (+31) 20 682-8291
252 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Accordion Jams in Output Assembly Service Note Number: C2001A-03A Associated Part Numbers: RF5-0425-000CN, quantity of 4 Description: Accordion jams occur on the LaserJet 4 as the paper leaves the fusing assembly and enters the output stacker. The leading edge of the paper may catch in the output stacker and fold up like a fan or an accordion. A defective output roller holder that was used in the manufacture of a number of printer caused this problem. Only U.S.-built printers had this flawed roller holder. European and Asian- built printers did not. The following ranges of serial number may contain the defective roller holder: • USBB074298 through USBB081811 • USBB099540 through USBB190983 • USBC085451 through USBC093129
9
• USBC112090 through USBC234957 • USTB000101 through USTB007397 • USTC000101 through USTC010123
Solution: Replace the defective output rollers with the redesigned rollers.
Note Your customer may have a printer with serial numbers within this range and never experience the “accordion jam” problems. Note that the likelihood of these jams increases with the use of somewhat marginal papers (papers with a poor leading-edge cut). The roller holders do not need to be replaced if accordion jams are not occurring.
EN
Technical Tips – 253
500-Sheet Lower Cassette (Tray 3) Shim Improves Paper Handling with Letter and Legal Size Paper Service Note Numbers: C2001A-04, C2021A-04, C2037A-02, C2039A-02, C3916A-03, C3917A-03, C3952A-03
Associated Part Numbers: C3916-67906/Lower Cassette (Tray 3) Shim Kit
Situation: The lower cassette (Tray 3) accessory of the LJ4, LJ4+, and LJ5 series printers requires some user setup and adjustment to operate properly. If the lower cassette tray is not set up properly and monitored for proper adjustment, the performance of the tray can suffer. The performance degradation typically exhibits itself as 13 PAPER JAMS and/or 41.3 ERRORS from the lower cassette tray. The 500-Sheet Feeder Paper (Tray 3) Installation Guide provides instructions on properly adjusting the tray. The bottom plate of the lower cassette also contains illustrated installation instructions. For a variety of reasons, the tension adjustment and/or the right-side guide adjustment are often not correct. Testing indicates that improper adjustment of the right-side guide is the major cause of performance problems with the lower cassette tray. This problem has been found to predominantly affect letter/legal size paper.
Solution: HP has developed a right-side shim that enhances the performance of the lower cassette (Tray 3). The shim is designed to be used with letter/legal size paper. The shim installs in the lower cassette (Tray 3) between the side-guide adjustment and the side rail of the tray. The shim stiffens the side guide and positions the guide properly for letter/legal size paper. Installing the shim improves the performance of the lower cassette (Tray 3).
254 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Note This shim kit will not solve all paper feed problems from the lower cassette. All the standard media checks should be performed to assure media meets HP specifications, is not damaged, and so forth. The adjustment for paper tension should also be set properly for the weight of the paper that is installed in the tray.
Action: A Lower Cassette Shim Kit has been designed that includes the shim and an instruction sheet for proper installation. The shim kit is user-installable and available to service providers or end users. The shim kit can be ordered free of charge by calling HP Distribution at (970) 339-7009. Callers should request the HP Shim Upgrade Kit, part number C3916-67906. The shim kit will work only for customers using letter or legal-size paper.
False Paper Jams (last page only) Associated Part Numbers: RB1-2133-000CN Description: If the printer is giving a false paper jam message on only the last page, and a piece of paper cannot be found in the printer, verify that the paper-out sensor flag is still attached. To locate the flag, remove the 250-sheet paper cassette and look for a small, black piece of plastic hanging down in the center of the slot. Solution: If this flag is missing, the printer will give a false paper jam message. If this occurs, replace the sensor flag.
EN
Technical Tips – 255
9
Image Skew or Paper Damage (feeding from the 250sheet tray) Service Note Number: NONE Associated Part Numbers: RF5-0369-000CN - hinge (front), RB1-2259-000CN - hinge (back)
Description: Skewed print images, and/or damage to the left edge of the paper can result when a paper weight is missing from the cavity of the 250-sheet paper tray. To check for this problem, remove the 250sheet cassette and look inside the cavity. You should see a “V”- shaped, hinged plastic weight hanging down from under the high voltage power supply area. This weight puts a slight amount of pressure in the paper and prevents the paper from skewing as it is fed into the paper path.
Solution: Replace the weight.
256 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
LaserJet 4Si
Missing Scan Lines, 70-110 mm from Top of Page Service Note Number: C2010A-02 Associated Part Numbers: RG5-0381-180CN (Job Offset Assembly)
Description: An intermittent print-quality defect may occur when the job-offset feature is used to print multiple-page jobs. Missing scan lines, approximately 70 to 110 mm from the top of the page, are caused when the bumper that is mounted on the Job Offset Assembly becomes deformed. This causes the assembly to “bang” to the left. As a result, the beam-to-drum mirror mounted on the printer's top cover vibrates, resulting in what appears to be missing scan lines. This defect appears only if more than three pages are being printed and the job-offset feature is being used. The first and second page do not exhibit the defect. Solution: Replace the Job Offset Assembly.
EN
Technical Tips – 257
9
Preventing Jams: Face Up or Output Stacker Service Note Number: C2010A-03 Associated Part Numbers: RB1-0557-040CN (Paper Guide) Description: When printing jobs to the face-up tray with an output stacker (C2801A), the potential exists for an increase in the number of paper jams. The jams are a result of paper being deflected incorrectly by the paper guide of the delivery cover assembly. The adhesive used to secure the gray pad on the paper guide causes this problem. Over time, the adhesive causes incorrect paper deflection and jamming. Typically the left leading edge of the paper may catch on the upper edge of the rear exit slot of the delivery cover assembly and cause the media to skew and jam. The error also can occur when the upper tray has been selected and the output is delivered to the lower tray.
Solution: The rear delivery cover assembly has been redesigned so that the pad is no longer needed. Either of the two fail conditions cited above can be corrected by replacing the paper guide on the delivery cover assembly. When printing to the face-up tray or output stacker, the paper-handling performance will be improved because the paper is routed more precisely through the paper slot in the delivery cover assembly. Perform the modification only when the specified failure occurs. Use the procedures shown in the source note.
258 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Paper Jamming and Feed Problems Associated Part Numbers: RF5-0041-000CN (Paper Feed Rollers)
Description: Since introduction, the paper feed rollers have been replaced more frequently than any other part. These rollers have been life-tested at nearly 300K pages without any problem. Theoretically, these parts should not need replacement until regularly scheduled (200,000 page) user maintenance. Premature wear is likely to be caused by media that does not meet specifications. Solution: Replace the paper feed rollers and consult with the customer to ensure that the media used meets specifications and is not causing undue printer wear.
9
EN
Technical Tips – 259
LJ IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP
Moaning Sound in Separation Pad Associated Part Numbers: RG1-1912-080CN - separation pad Description: After a certain amount of printer usage, the combination of separation pad wear and the use of smoother papers can cause a vibration in the separation pad assembly. The vibration occurs at a resonant frequency while paper is being fed into the printer. This resonance is amplified by the lower frame pan, and results in an audible moaning sound that continues the entire time the page is being fed into the printer. An important diagnostic clue is the length of time that the noise is audible. Note that some noise during the first second of paper pickup from the MP tray is considered normal.
Solution: A production change was made to the separation pad to minimize the occurrence of the moaning sound in the separation pad. The improved pad is indistinguishable from the previous pad to the naked eye. The former part number, RG1-1912-000CN, can no longer be ordered. The new part number is RG1-1912-080CN.
Note This problem may still be exhibited when the customer uses excessively smooth paper or the separation pad is worn.
260 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Compressed Print Associated Part Numbers: RG1-1777-000CN - drum drive gear assembly
Description: On rare occasions, you may see compressed print on a LaserJet IIP. The print may be compressed anywhere on the page. It may look like text compressed into a thin line or appear as a gap between lines. Troubleshooting can be difficult because the problem is usually intermittent.
9
Figure 9-5 page
EN
Gap between lines and compressed line on the same
Technical Tips – 261
Why does this happen? When something causes the toner cartridge to freeze up, the shaft on the drum drive gear continues to turn for a short period of time but the gear does not. This can later cause the toner cartridge drum to stop turning momentarily due to slippage between the deformed gear and the shaft (even though the rest of the printer is functioning normally). This results in compressed print or in gaps in the print. Once the shaft has turned, the problem may recur intermittently even after the toner cartridge is replaced.
Solution: Replace the drum drive gear assembly, part number RG1-1777-000CN.
Drum Drive Gear Assembly (Item #10 on figure 8-5, LaserJet IIP/IIIP Service Manual)
Figure 9-6
Drum drive gear assembly
Normal Shaft
Turned Shaft
Figure 9-7
Good versus bad drum drive assembly
262 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Continuous “PS Busy” Description: On rare occasion, when using the HP PostScript Cartridge (HP 33439P/Q) with a LaserJet IIP, a continuous PS BUSY condition can occur if auto continue is ON and the document being printed is longer than 1 or 2 pages. If the page is printed, this condition may result in missing lines, shifted text, and some malformed letters. If the faulty pages are ejected, the printer flashes PS BUSY on the display indefinitely and no more text is printed. This error condition can result from a fuser discharge phenomena that causes a 41 ERROR in the LaserJet IIP. Since the PostScript mode of operation does not report errors in the same manner as PCL, the 41 ERROR is not displayed and the printer displays a continuous PS BUSY status.
Note Many other conditions can cause a similar PS BUSY symptom. However, if a LaserJet IIP printer exhibits this problem, a bad fusing assembly is the likely culprit.
EN
Technical Tips – 263
9
Incompatibility of New Fusing Assembly Component Service Note Number: 33471A/AB-04, 33481A/AB-04, C2007A-02
Associated Part Numbers: RF1-3305-000CN Description: Some changes have occurred to the fusing assemblies used in the HP LaserJet IIP, IIP+ and IIIP printers. All assemblies are fully compatible with all LaserJet IIP/IIP+/IIIP printers, with the exception of the original fusing assembly used in the LaserJet IIP printer (see Service Notes 33471A-02B and 33471AB-01B for details). Changes made in the later assemblies have made some component-level repairs unfeasible.
Solution: Newer fusing assemblies are identified by a missing blue wire from the center conductor of the thermistor assembly connector. If the thermistor or its cable assembly (including the connector) requires replacement in a newer fusing assembly, the correct replacement part number is RF1-3305-000CN. Replacements are not available for the right connector holder (item 14 in the LJIIP/IIP+/IIIP Service Manual), and they are not available for the plates to which the diode leads that are soldered on the right end of the assembly. If these components are damaged, replace the entire fusing assembly. Use all other assembly components documented in Table 8-8 of the LaserJet IIP/IIP+/IIIP service manual to perform component repair of any fusing assembly.
264 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
LJ II, III
Potential Safety Issue Following Fuser Repair Service Note Numbers: 33440A/AB/AU-12, 33447A/AB/AU-09, 33449A/AB-05, 33459A/AB-03
Associated Part Numbers: RA1-3959-000CN, RA1-3960000CN
Description: There have been reports of damage incurred to the left and/or right fusing assembly covers of the LaserJet II, IID, III, and IIID printers as a result of repair or replacement of the fusing assembly. A primary function of these covers is to protect the user from hazardous line voltages (100-240 VAC). These voltages are routed to the fusing lamp via wires fastened to metallic strips just beneath these covers. The wires, strips, and screws used to fasten these wires are all exposed if the covers are missing or damaged. The line voltage used to power the fusing lamp is present at these exposed surfaces as long as the printer is turned on, even when the top cover is open.
EN
Technical Tips – 265
9
Solution: When servicing these printers, ensure that the left and right fusing assembly covers are undamaged and properly fastened in place upon completion of the repair. The cover can be damaged if all the wires routed beneath the covers are not positioned properly prior to tightening the cover screws. Damage can occur during shipment or through other mishandling of the fusing assembly. The replacement part numbers are as follows: Cover, Left, Fuser
RA1-3959-000CN
Cover, Right, Fuser
RA1-3960-000CN
Internal Cabling Problems Description: Four cable harnesses located in the LaserJet series II and LaserJet III printers may be the cause of certain printer failures.
Solution: Replace these cables before attempting to replace expensive assemblies. Part numbers for the cable assemblies appear in the following table. Part Number
Description
Error Conditions
RG1-0908-000CN
Laser scanner cable assembly
41 51 52 scanner motor whining, distorted print, lines across page.
RG1-0907-000CN
Fusing assembly cable (long, 7-wire)
13, 50, ghosting, open thermoprotector.
RG1-0906-000CN
High-voltage power supply cable (8-wire)
Constant ozone production, repetitive print defects, improper toner-low sensing.
RG1-0912-000CN
AC power module cable (short, 4-wire)
50, with a cold fuser.
The LaserJet IID/IIID scanning cable assembly may also cause errors 41, 51, or 52. Cable assembly part numbers are: LaserJet IID: RG1-1370-000CN LaserJet IIID: RG1-2067-000CN.
The printer test tool (see chapter 4) is useful in detecting problems in high voltage power supply.
266 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Light-Brown Stain on Front Side of Duplexed Page Service Note Number: 33447A/AB/AU-10,33459A/AB-04 Associated Part Numbers: RG1-1356-000CN, RG1-2498-000CN
Description: A light-brown streak can appear on the front side of a duplexed page when the duplex feature is not used for several weeks. The stain is approximately 10 mm (3/8" wide) and can be seen along the entire length of the page, approximately 38 mm (1.5") from the right edge of the paper. Some have described the stain as being some sort of oil contamination, such as excess lubricant on the fuser cleaning pad. The oblique duplex registration roller in the LaserJet IID and IIID printer requires a preservative to help protect it from the long-term effects of normal usage and ozone exposure within the printer. Without this preservative, the roller would fail prematurely and, as a result, would not continue to feed paper properly through the duplexing portion of the printer. This preservative can accumulate on the surface of the roller if the duplexer is not used for extended periods of time. The accumulation may result in the light-brown stain on the “front” side of a duplexed page.
EN
Technical Tips – 267
9
Solution: The problem will typically resolve itself after 10-50 pages have been run through the duplex portion of the printer. This process cleans the surface of the oblique roller. If you must replace the roller, prior to installing the new roller in the printer, be sure to rub the surface of the new roller with some clean paper to remove any excessive buildup of the preservative. Do not clean the roller with alcohol or other cleaning solutions. Doing so would remove the preservative altogether, leading to premature failure of the new roller. If the oblique roller (RG1-1356-000CN) requires replacement, be sure to also check the inside portion of the white plastic alignment guide. Paper being run through the duplexer and forced into the side of the alignment guide can eventually wear a groove into the plastic. If a groove has developed, replace the entire lower duplex guide assembly (RG1-2498-000CN). If it is not replaced, subsequent duplex paper jams can result when paper gets caught in the groove. (Contrary to the implication in the service manual, note that the lower duplex guide assembly does not include the oblique paper alignment roller.)
Misalignment of Duplexed Images Description: Sometimes, a customer may notice that the images on the front and back of a duplexed page may not exactly align when held up to the light. This is most noticeable when printing on pre-printed forms or when the document has a border. The most prevalent reason for this misalignment is the process of fusing the toner into the page. The first time paper passes through the fusing assembly, it is heated and almost all the moisture is removed. This causes the paper to shrink. Therefore, the physical size of the paper and the printed image are no longer the same when the second image is placed on the page. This results in the second image being slightly larger than the first. The manufacturing tolerances for the registration of the paper also cause misalignment between the front and back images. The current registration specification for these printers is 4.2 mm (+/- 2.5 mm) from the leading edge of the paper to the first printed dot. Reducing this tolerance would increase the cost of the printer exponentially.
268 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Duplex Jamming: Duplex Drive Roller Assembly Associated Part Numbers: RG1-1345-060CN Description: The lower and upper duplex guide assemblies (figures 8-24 and 8-25 in the IID/IIID service manual) are used to properly position the paper left-to-right prior to its passing a second time through the printer. When this is performed, the leading edge of legal-sized paper may buckle slightly, causing it to dive between the lower duplex guide and the duplex drive roller assemblies (figures 8-24 and 8-26 in the IID/IIID service manual). A clear plastic strip was attached to the drive assembly to prevent paper from diving into the gap between these assemblies. With use, a slight nick may develop in this plastic strip, leading to paper jams. If such a nick is the cause of a jamming problem, it can be felt with your fingernail.
Solution: This problem was fixed by extending the metal base of the duplex drive roller assembly, thus alleviating the need for the plastic strip. The part number of this new assembly is RG1-1345-060CN. If paper is jamming in the duplexer just prior to the duplex drive roller assembly, install a new assembly.
EN
Technical Tips – 269
9
Duplex Jamming: Misaligned Switchback Assembly Associated Part Numbers: RA1-8420-000CN Description: Another possible cause of paper jams in the duplexer is a misaligned switchback assembly (figure 8-16A/B in the IID/IIID Service Manual). This is often the result of using the switchback assembly as a handle while lifting the printer, or shipping the printer without the packing rods installed in the switchback assembly. The switchback assembly should never be used as a handle when the printer is being moved. If the printer needs to be transported, install the packing rods to properly support the switchback assembly. If the rods have been disposed of or misplaced, they can be ordered from HP Parts Direct (800) 227-8164, part number RA1-8420-000CN.
Solution: To properly realign the switchback assembly, loosen the mounting screws and re-position the assembly until the switchback frame is parallel with the output slot at the rear of the printer.
Duplex Jamming: Worn Lower Duplex Guide Assembly Associated Part Numbers: RG1-2498-000CN Description: Some time after 60,000 pages have been printed (and depending upon the paper being used), a groove may develop in the white plastic guide in the lower duplex guide assembly (figure 8-24 in the IID/IIID service manual). The assembly is used to perform the leftto-right alignment of the paper during its pass through the duplexer. This guide can be best observed by removing the printer's cover panel just below the switchback assembly. If a groove has been cut into the plastic, paper will tend to hang up as it is dragged through the cut. If this failure occurs, replace the lower duplex guide assembly (RG1-2498000CN).
270 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Jams in the Power Envelope Feeder Associated Part Numbers: 33457A/33458A Description: Proper envelope feeding is a difficult task for most printers. Jams and multiple feeds are the most common complaints. HP has done extensive testing with a wide variety of envelopes and has concluded that while many envelopes are suitable for use with these feeders, many others are not. Some envelopes will cause jams on the order of one in six, while others may not experience a single jam in a thousand! Can HP recommend a specific envelope to use for diagnostic purposes? Unfortunately, it is not that simple. Envelopes within a particular region are manufactured by local converters. Though a specific envelope may perform well in one region, there is typically enough variance in the manufacturing process that the same brand of envelope may not be at all suitable for use in another region! If you encounter regular complaints from customers that their envelopes will not work properly with the HP envelope feeders, it might be well worth your time to test a variety of envelopes in your area so that you can make some worthwhile recommendations. This will also help you identify an envelope to use for diagnostic purposes when troubleshooting potential envelope feeder problems.
EN
Technical Tips – 271
9
Jams in the Power Envelope Feeder: 13 PAPER JAM Error Indication Associated Part Numbers: RG1-0718-000CN (IID Paper Control PCA), RG1-2549-000CN (IIID Paper Control PCA) The power envelope feeders use the Manual Feed Sensor (PS302) in the printer to determine whether an envelope has been fed correctly into the printer. If this sensor is faulty, a 13 PAPER JAM message will be displayed after the feeder has been installed and the printer is turned on. This is because the printer determines that an envelope is “jammed” in its input area. To resolve this problem, replace the paper control PCA (figure 8-33 in the LaserJet IID/IIID Service Manual).
272 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
10
Image defects
Overview This chapter provides illustrations of image defects, lists suspected causes, and offers suggested remedies
Using a Cleaning Page For any print-quality defects, try using HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility to generate a cleaning page. The HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility is designed to remove excess paper and toner particles that can accumulate on the fusing assembly rollers. The buildup of toner/paper dust results in random spots on the front and back of the printout. Running the HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility at regular intervals can extend the useful life of the fuser and reduce service procedures. The HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility works on all HP monochrome printers, regardless of driver type. To download the HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility file and obtain instructions on using it, access the HP website at www.hp.com/cposupport/printers/software/lj123en.exe.html.
EN
Overview – 273
Image Defect Table For more information, see the page numbers below each image.
Blank Page (see page 276)
Black Page (see page 278)
Thin Dark Vertical Black Lines (see page 279)
Image Skew (see page 280)
Faulty Registration (see page 282)
Light Print/ Faded Print (see page 284)
Horizontal Lines/ Repetitive Defect (see page 286)
Poor Fusing/ Character Voids (see page 287)
Background Scatter (see page 288)
Back of Page Dirty (see page 290)
Thin Vertical White Lines/ Stripes (see page 291)
Improperly Sized Image (see page 292)
274 – Image defects
EN
Smudged Band with Overprint (see page 293)
Toner Smear on Right/Left Side (see page 293)
Vertical Fogged Stripes (see page 294)
Right/Left Text Missing/Distorted (see page 295)
Bubble Print (see page 296)
Leading Edge Scatter (see page 297)
Dropout (see page 298)
LP Distortion (see page 296)
10 Compressed Print (see page 299)
Portion of Page Blank (see page 299)
White Horizontal Line (see page 300)
Horizontal Fogged Stripes (see page 300)
Wavy Print (see page 301)
EN
Image Defect Table – 275
Blank Pages
All Printers •
The toner cartridge is empty or defective.
•
The sealing tape has been left in the toner cartridge.
•
The high-voltage power supply (HVPS), contacts, or cable is bad. LJ 4L and 4P: The HVPS, AC power module, and the DC controller are all on the same board.
•
The laser shutter arm or beam-to-drum mirror is broken.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The direct-current (DC) controller is defective.
•
Occasional blank pages are being printed. – Check the software, sharing device, or network settings. If the printer is feeding multiple pages, the paper may not meet HP specifications.
•
There are multiple paper feeds.
2686A, 2686D •
The transfer corona wire is broken.
276 – Image defects
EN
II, IID, III, IIID •
The transfer corona wire or assembly is bad.
•
The toner cartridge or HVPS connections are bad.
•
The HV power supply cable is defective.
•
The toner cartridge drum is not rotating. – Replace the toner cartridge and inspect the gears.
•
The laser/scanner assembly or cable is bad.
•
The hinge brackets of the top cover are bent.
IIP, IIP+, IIIP •
The laser interlock tab of the toner cartridge is broken. – Replace the laser cover assembly (RG1-1773-000CN).
•
The transfer roller assembly is defective.
•
The HV PCA or HV contact cable is defective.
IIP Only •
There is an error 41 and the serial number is between 2925J0000 and 3047J9999. – Replace the fusing assembly.
10
IIISi/4Si, 4, 4 Plus, 4L, 4P •
The transfer roller assembly is defective.
•
The HV PCA or HV contact cable is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective
EN
Image Defect Table – 277
Black Pages
All Printers •
The toner cartridge is improperly installed or is defective.
•
The HV contacts are dirty or the HV PCA is defective – Clean the HV contacts or replace the HV PCA. LJ 4L and 4P: The HVPS, AC power module, and DC controller are all on the same board.
•
The DC controller is defective.
•
The laser/scanner cable or assembly is defective.
5L, 5P, 6P, 6L •
Light is leaking into the printer
IIP, IIP+, IIIP •
The fiber optics cable is defective.
4L, 4P, 4V •
Light is leaking into the printer.
278 – Image defects
EN
Thin, Dark, Vertical Black Lines
All Printers •
The toner cartridge is defective. – Check for a thin scratch around the print drum. If present, replace the toner cartridge.
•
The primary charging roller is dirty because of a defective cartridge. – Replace the cartridge.
•
Paper does not meet HP specifications.
•
The static eliminator teeth are contaminated or defective. – Clean the printer.
•
The fuser cleaning pad or fusing assembly is defective.
10
EN
Image Defect Table – 279
Image Skew
All Printers •
The paper is loaded incorrectly.
•
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The rollers or separation pads are worn.
5Si •
The pickup and separation rollers are worn.
•
The registration assembly is dirty or defective.
•
The drive gears in the drive train assembly are defective.
5L •
The LC, PC, or MP pickup rollers are worn.
•
The separation pad is worn.
•
The LC or input feed roller is worn.
•
The pickup, oblique, or registration roller is worn.
•
The pickup or registration roller is worn.
5L, 5P, 6P, 6L •
The paper guides need to be adjusted.
•
The separation pad and/or pickup roller are worn or dirty.
280 – Image defects
EN
2686A, 2686D •
The leading edge of the paper is curled. – Replace with another ream of paper.
•
The paper tray is defective.
•
The laser/scanner unit is misaligned.
•
The paper input door is misaligned
•
The registration assembly is defective.
II, IID, III, IIID •
The paper and paper tray are not installed correctly.
•
The feed roller assembly is worn.
•
The registration assembly is defective.
IIISi, 4Si •
The registration assembly is dirty or defective. – Replace the separation pad.
•
The drive gears in the drive train assembly are defective. – Replace the LC or the input feed roller.
4, 4 Plus •
The beam-to-drum mirror requires an adjustment.
4L, 4P •
The paper guides need to be adjusted.
•
The fuser cleaning pad or fusing assembly is defective.
EN
Image Defect Table – 281
10
Faulty Registration
All Printers •
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The paper is loaded incorrectly or the paper guides are not adjusted correctly.
•
The leading edge of the paper is curled. – Replace with another ream of paper.
•
The paper is overloaded.
•
The feed rollers are worn.
•
The registration assembly is dirty or defective.
•
The drive gears are worn or broken.
•
The input paper sensor is defective.
5L •
The first dot row of the page is not 2 mm (+/- 1 mm) from the leading edge of the page on engine test print. – A registration adjustment is required (VR202 on DC Controller).
5P, 6P •
The first dot row of the page is not 2 mm (+/- 0.5 mm) from the leading edge of the page. – A registration adjustment is required (VR301 on DC Controller).
282 – Image defects
EN
2686A, 2686D •
The registration shutter assembly is sticking or defective. (The white nylon rollers should turn freely.) – Remove the rubber bumper on the shutter. If the problem persists, replace the registration shutter assembly.
•
The paper tray is defective.
•
The laser/scanner unit is misaligned.
II, IID, III, IIID, IIISi, IVSi, 4V •
The feed roller assembly is worn. – The registration solenoid is stuck
•
Replace the paper control PCA.
•
The registration assembly is defective.
•
The paper tray is defective.
•
The input sensor is defective.
IIP, IIP+, IIIP •
The first dot row of the page is not 3 mm (+/- 1 mm) from the leading edge of the page. – A registration adjustment is required (VR201 on DC Controller).
•
The drive gears are worn or broken.
•
The input paper sensor is defective (PS1).
4, 4 Plus •
The first dot row of the page is not 2 mm (+/- 1 mm) from the leading edge of the page on engine test print. – A registration adjustment is required (VR202 on DC Controller).
•
The drive gears are worn or broken.
•
The input paper sensor is defective (PS1).
EN
Image Defect Table – 283
10
4L, 4P •
The first dot row of the page is not 2 mm (+/- 0.5 mm) from the leading edge of the page. – A registration adjustment is required (VR301 on DC Controller).
•
Drive gears are worn or broken.
•
Pickup, oblique, or registration rollers are worn.
Light Print/Faded Print
All Printers •
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The toner cartridge is low on toner or empty.
•
The print density is improperly set.
•
EconoMode is turned on.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The HV PCA or HV contact assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
2686A, 2686D •
The transfer corona assembly is defective.
•
The laser power is low. – Adjust the laser power; replace if necessary.
•
The HV power supply is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The drum sensitivity microswitch (MS3, MS4) is faulty. – Replace MS3, MS.
284 – Image defects
EN
II, IID, III, IIID •
The transfer corona assembly is defective.
•
The HV power supply or cable is defective.
IIP, IIP, IIIP, IIISi, 4Si •
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The HV PCA or HV contact assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
4, 4 Plus, 4L, 4P, 4V •
EconoMode is on.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The HV PCA or HV contact assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
10
EN
Image Defect Table – 285
Horizontal Lines/Repetitive Defect
All Printers •
The toner cartridge is not seated properly or is defective.
•
The laser/scanner assembly is defective.
•
The gear train is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
A repetitive defect has occurred if the lines are repeated at consistent intervals. – Use the Repetitive Image Ruler to check the drum.
•
The static teeth are dirty. – Clean the printer.
2686A, 2686D •
The laser unit is defective or is adjusted improperly.
•
The DC power supply/main motor drive PCA is defective.
II, IID, III, IIID •
The laser/scanner cable to the DC controller is bad. – Readjust or replace the fiber optic cable.
•
The fiber optics cable is bad or improperly seated.
IIP, IIP, IIIP, IIISi/4Si •
The fiber optics cable is defective or improperly seated (may be 41 or 51 ERROR).
286 – Image defects
EN
Poor Fusing/Character Voids
All Printers •
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The transparencies are defective.
•
Printing is on the wrong side of the paper.
•
The fuser is defective. – Replace the fuser.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The HVPS or DC controller is defective.
2686A, 2686D •
The fuser cleaning pad is improperly installed.
10
II, IID, III, IIID •
The print density is set improperly. Set to “9" to minimize voids.
•
Cover the interlock switch on the DC controller. – The switch is not present on all DC controllers (see Service Note 33449A-04, 33459A-02).
•
The fuser cleaning pad is dry (non-HP). – Replace the cleaning pad.
EN
Image Defect Table – 287
Background Scatter
All Printers •
The print density is set improperly. – Adjust the print density to a darker setting.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
Media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The paper may be wet or too dry. – Optimum humidity should be between 40 and 60 percent.
•
The inside of the printer is dirty.
•
The transfer roller or corona is dirty or defective.
5Si •
Toner buildup has occurred in the fuser inlet guide. – Clean the fuser inlet guide.
288 – Image defects
EN
5L/6L •
Printing is on the envelope seams. – Switch envelopes or move text to an area with no seams.
•
Printing is on the wrong side of paper. – Turn the paper over. In the future, check to see if the ream label indicates the proper print side.
•
The density or grayscale settings need to be adjusted. – Change the software density or grayscale settings to minimize the scatter effect.
•
The entire background of the page is dark. – Clean the high-voltage contact points on the toner cartridge and transfer roller. If the error persists, first replace the laser/scanner unit, and then replace the DC controller.
2686A, 2686D •
The grounding spring is set improperly. – Adjust to the center of the drum drive gear.
•
The laser power is out of adjustment.
•
The HV power supply is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The DCPS/main motor driver PCA is defective.
II, IID, III, IIID •
The primary corona wire is dirty. – Replace the toner cartridge.
•
EN
The transfer corona is dirty or worn.
Image Defect Table – 289
10
Back of Page Dirty
All Printers •
Toner has leaked from the toner cartridge. – Replace the toner cartridge.
•
The inside of the printer is dirty.
•
The transfer roller is dirty.
•
The feed rollers are dirty.
•
The fuser is contaminated.
2686A, 2686D, II, IID, III, IIID •
The fuser cleaning pad is dirty.
II, III Only •
The corona wire is stuck “on.” – Use the test tool to verify (see chapter 4). Replace the cable HV power supply to the DC controller (P/N RG1-0906-000CN).
IIP, IIP, IIIP, IIISi, 4Si, 4, 4 Plus, 4L, 4P •
The input feed roller is dirty.
•
There is toner build-up in the fuser assembly. – Use cleaning paper to clean the rollers. If needed, clean the thermoswitches (TS1 & TS2). Note: To create cleaning paper, print a self-test page.
290 – Image defects
EN
Thin Vertical White Lines/Stripes
All Printers •
The toner cartridge is defective or nearly empty. – Gently shake the toner cartridge and reseat. If the error persists, replace the toner cartridge.
•
Foreign obstacles are in the path of the laser beam. – Check the laser beam shutter.
•
The printer needs to be cleaned.
5Si/5 •
The focusing lenses in the scanner assembly may be dirty.
•
The beam-to-drum mirror is contaminated.
10
2686A, 2686D •
The fuser cleaning pad is dirty.
•
The transfer corona wire is dirty.
•
The laser/scanner assembly is defective.
II, IID, III, IIID •
The transfer corona is dirty or worn.
•
The beam-to-drum mirror is dirty.
•
The laser/scanner assembly is defective.
EN
Image Defect Table – 291
IIISi, 4Si •
The focusing lenses in the scanner assembly may be dirty.
4, 4 Plus, 4L, 4P •
The beam-to-drum mirror is contaminated.
Improperly Sized Image
All Printers •
Check the microswitches in the paper tray.
•
The paper size specified in the software does not match the actual paper size.
292 – Image defects
EN
Smudged Band with Overprint
All Printers •
The gear train assembly in the main motor is not engaging with the toner cartridge drum gears. – Replace the gear train and/or main motor assembly.
•
The fusing assembly is dirty or defective.
•
The static teeth are dirty.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
Toner Smear on Right or Left Side of Page
10
2686A, 2686D •
The separation belt, separation roller or pinch roller is dirty.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
II, IID, IIID •
The primary corona wire in the toner cartridge is dirty.
.
EN
Image Defect Table – 293
Vertical Fogged Stripes
2686A, 2686D •
The conductive surface of the guide is worn, causing static charge. – The feed guide assembly (P/N RG1-1039-000CN) is defective.
•
The primary corona wire is dirty.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The inside of the printer is dirty.
IIP, IIP, IIIP •
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The fusing assembly is dirty or defective. – Use a self-test cleaning page to clean the fusing assembly, or replace the fusing assembly.
4, 4 Plus, 4V •
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The fusing assembly is dirty or defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
•
The static teeth are bent.
294 – Image defects
EN
Right or Left Hand Text Missing/Distorted
All Printers •
A foreign object is in the path of the laser beam.
II, IID, III, IIID •
The toner cartridge is empty.
•
The instruction label on the beam mirror shutter has come loose.
•
The beam-to-drum mirror is bent or misaligned.
•
The hinge brackets of the top cover assembly are bent.
10
EN
Image Defect Table – 295
Distortion
LP All Printers •
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The gear train is damaged.
2686A, 2686D •
There is a problem with the paper drive. – Check all parts of the drive mechanism, gear train, and motor.
•
The main motor is defective.
•
The DC power supply/main motor driver PCA is defective.
Bubble Print
All Printers •
The print density dial is not aligned properly with the HVPS. – Reseat the HV power supply PCA.
296 – Image defects
EN
• The photosensitive drum inside the toner cartridge is not grounded. –
Reseat the toner cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge. Reseat the HVPS. Replace the HVPS.
•
The fuser is defective.
•
The toner cartridge is leaking.
•
Paper does not meet HP specifications.
•
The HVPS is defective.
Leading Edge Scatter
All Printers •
The media does not meet HP specifications; a single sheet of paper may be defective.
10
EN
Image Defect Table – 297
Dropout
All Printers •
The fuser inlet guide is set improperly. – Replace the fuser inlet guide (see chapter 6 in the service manual).
•
Paper is defective, improperly loaded, or does not meet HP specifications.
•
The HVPS or transfer roller/wire is defective.
5L/6L •
The print density requires adjustment. – Adjust the print density through the software.
•
The rollers and high-voltage contact points require cleaning.
•
Blank spots appear on the page. – Replace the toner cartridge. If the spots persist, first replace the transfer roller, and then replace the DC controller.
298 – Image defects
EN
Compressed Print
All Printers •
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The drive gear in the drum is broken or worn.
IIP, IIP+, IIIP •
The gear assembly of the drum drive is defective.
Portion of Page Blank
10 All Printers •
The page is too complex. – Reduce the complexity of the page or set Page Protect to On or Auto.
•
There is not enough memory.
•
The printer is printing is on legal paper, but the setting in the software is letter-size paper.
EN
Image Defect Table – 299
White Horizontal Line
5L/6L •
The toner cartridge is defective.
Horizontal Fogged Stripes
III, II •
The laser scanner cable is defective.
•
The toner cartridge is damaged. – Replace the toner cartridge and HV cable.
2686A, 2686D •
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The HV PCA is defective.
•
The ground contact to the toner cartridge is defective.
300 – Image defects
EN
Wavy Print
All Printers •
The scanner unit is defective.
IIID, III, IID, II •
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
•
The laser scanner cable is defective.
2686D, 2686A •
The DC controller PCA is defective.
10
EN
Image Defect Table – 301
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 6L/5L Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances between repetitive image defects.
302 – Image defects
EN
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 5Si First occurrence of print defect
Registration Roller 44 mm (1.73 in) Toner Cartridge Primary Charging Roller 44.4 mm (1.75 in) Face-Up Delivery Roller 47 mm (1.86 in) Toner Cartridge Developing Roller 53.5 mm (2.11 in) Transfer Roller 58.4 mm (2.3 in)
10
Fuser Lower Roller 94 mm (3.71 in) Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm (3.71 in)
Fuser Upper Roller 125 mm (4.92 in)
EN
Image Defect Table – 303
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 6P/5P Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances between repetitive image defects. First occurrence of print defect
Developing Cylinder 25 mm (1.0 in) Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in) Face Down Delivery (Upper) Roller 38 mm (1.5 in) Transfer Roller 44 mm (1.75 in) Fusing Pressure Roller 47 mm (1.88 in)
Upper Fusing Assembly Film 75 mm (2.94 in) Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 75 mm (2.94 in)
Registration Roller 119 mm (4.69 in)
304 – Image defects
EN
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 5 Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
10
Developing Roller 51 mm (2.0 in) Transfer Roller 54 mm (2.13 in) Upper and Lower Fusing Roller (LJ4 ONLY) 63 mm (2.5 in)
Upper and Lower Fusing Roller (LJ4 Plus ONLY) 79 mm (3.13 in)
EP-E Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm (3.69 in)
EN
Image Defect Table – 305
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 4V Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Primary Charging Roller 43 mm (1.69 in) Face Down Delivery (Upper) Roller 50 mm (2.0 in) Registration Roller 50 mm (2.0 in) Transfer Roller 61 mm (2.38 in) Developing Cylinder 63 mm (2.5 in)
Fusing Pressure Roller 86 mm (3.38 in) Upper Fusing Roller 88 mm (3.44 in) Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm (3.75 in)
306 – Image defects
EN
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 4P, 4L Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances between repetitive image defects. First occurrence of print defect
Developing Cylinder 25 mm (1.0 in) Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in) Face Down Delivery (Upper) Roller 38 mm (1.5 in) Transfer Roller 44 mm (1.75 in) Fusing Pressure Roller 47 mm (1.88 in)
10 Upper Fusing Assembly Film 75 mm (2.94 in) Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 75 mm (2.94 in)
Registration Roller 119 mm (4.69 in)
EN
Image Defect Table – 307
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 4+, 4 Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
Developing Roller 51 mm (2.0 in) Transfer Roller 54 mm (2.13 in) Upper and Lower Fusing Roller (LJ4 ONLY) 63 mm (2.5 in)
Upper and Lower Fusing Roller (LJ4 Plus ONLY) 79 mm (3.13 in)
EP-E Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm (3.69 in)
308 – Image defects
EN
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 4Si, IISi Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in) Upper Registration Roller 44 mm (1.75 in)
10
Developer Roller 50 mm (2.0 in)
Transfer Roller 63 mm (2.5 in)
Fuser Roller or Toner Cartridge Drum 94 mm (3.69 in)
EN
Image Defect Table – 309
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler IIP, IIP+, IIP Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in) Input Feed Roller 49 mm (1.94 in) Developing Roller 51 mm (2.0 in) Transfer Roller 52 mm (2.06 in) Lower Fusing Roller 54 mm (2.13 in) Upper Fusing Roller 63 mm (2.5 in)
Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm (3.69 in)
310 – Image defects
EN
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler IID, III, IID, II Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Registration Assembly Transfer Roller 13 mm (0.5 in)
Upper Registration Roller 38 mm (1.5 in) Lower Registration Roller 44 mm (1.75 in)
10
Toner Cartridge Developer Roller 51 mm (2.0 in)
Lower Fusing Assembly Roller 65 mm (2.56 in)
Upper Fusing Assembly Roller 80 mm (3.13 in)
Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 95 mm (3.75 in)
EN
Image Defect Table – 311
312 – Image defects
EN
11
Wiring diagrams
Overview The chapter provides wiring diagrams for printers supported in this guide.
EN
Overview – 313
Figure 11-1 Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 6L and 5L
314 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-2
Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5Si (1 of 5)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 315
Figure 11-3 Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5Si (2 of 5)
316 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-4 Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5Si (3 of 5)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 317
Figure 11-5 Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5Si (4 of 5)
318 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-6 Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5Si (5 of 5)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 319
Figure 11-7 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5P
Main Wiring Diagram
EP DRUM
PRIMARY ROLLER
DEV ROLLER
Tray 1 Inter-connect PCA 54321 54 321
TRANSFER ROLLER
AA
J101
Toner Cartridge 1
3
J402
J403
High Voltage Power Supply Circuitry
J404
J401
AC Power Supply Circuitry
TO FRONT OF PRINTER
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly Tray 1 Empty Sensor PS5
VR301 Registration Adjust
Input Paper Sensor PS1
AA
Solenoid SL3
J301 J302
Winding Paper Sensor PS4
DC Power Supply Circuitry
Exit Paper Sensor PS3
J201
Pickup Solenoid SL1
1 2
J601
J202
Paper Out J207 Sensor PS2
SW201
J204
1 18
4
1
MOTOR M1
MAIN DRIVE
SW301 Engine Test
1
FU201 FU101
J103
54321
1 3
Infer Red Sensor
EN
320 – Wiring diagrams
MEMORY
J801
FORMATTER PCA
LASER DRIVER
BD UNIT
SCANNER MOTOR
J804
FAN
THERMOPROTECT FUSER HEATING ELEMENT
TH1
FUSING ASSEMBLY
I/O
Figure 11-8 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 321
Figure 11-9 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4V (1 of 2)
322 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-10 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4V (2 of 2)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 323
Figure 11-11 Main Wiring DIagram: HP LaserJet 4 Plus
324 – Wiring diagrams
EN
EN
J101
J403
FU201 FU101
AC P ower Supply Cir cuitry
J401
J404
J402
High V oltage Power Supply Circuitry
J206
DC P ower Supply Cir cuitry
J103
SL002
J301
J204
SW201
SW301 Engine T est
J601
J202
J201
Pickup Solenoid SL2
Paper Out J207 Sensor P S2
Exit P aper Sensor P S3
Winding P aper Sensor P S4
VR301 Registration Adjust
Input P aper Sensor P S1
TO F RONT OF P RINTER
PRINTER WIRING DIAGRAM, 4L/4ML, 4P/4MP
Figure 11-12 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4P/4MP, 4L/4ML
11
Wiring diagrams – 325
Figure 11-13 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4
326 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-14
Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4Si, IIISi (1 of 3)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 327
Figure 11-15 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4Si, IIISi (2 of 3)
328 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-16 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4Si, IIISi (3 of 3)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 329
Figure 11-17 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet IIIP, IIP, IIP Plus
330 – Wiring diagrams
EN
PRIMARY CORONA GRID
Figure 11-18 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet IIID, IID
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 331
Figure 11-19 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet III, II
332 – Wiring diagrams
EN
PT2 NF2 TB101 TB102 NF1
FORMATTER PWR SUPP PW1
PRIMARY CORONA GRID
Figure 11-20 Main Wiring Diagram: HP 2686D, 2686A
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 333
334 – Wiring diagrams
EN
12
Services, support, and training
Overview This chapter provides information on obtaining training, support, and materials.
EN
Overview – 335
How to Get Training Lecture/Lab Training (U.S. Only) Service technicians who want individual, hands-on training can attend regularly scheduled lecture/lab training classes. These classes are offered throughout the country. To receive the latest schedule, call HP FIRST at (800) 333-1917, or see the HP website (www.hp.com/go/ resellertraining) and request document ID number 9104. The latest schedule will immediately be sent to the fax number of your choice. Class schedule and registration information can also be obtained by calling the centralized registration center at (512) 434-1520.
Self-Paced Training Kits Product All LaserJet Printers
LJ 5
LJ 5P/6P
Description
Part Number 5961-0880
Basic Hardware Training Course (prerequisite for all LaserJet service training) Paper Specifications for LaserJet Printers
5961-0711 (NTSC) 5961-0712 (PAL)
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C3916A+49A-61 C3916A+49A-62
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C3980A+49A-60001 C3980A+49A-60002
336 – Services, support, and training
EN
Self-Paced Training Kits (continued) Product LJ 5L/6L
Description
Part Number
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C3990+49A-60001 C3990+49A-60002
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C4076-61101 C4076-61102
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C3980-61101 C3980-61102
LJII and III
Self-paced Training Kit
33449A + 49A-0
LJ IID and IIID
Self-paced Training Kit
33459A + 49A-0
LJ IIP, IIIP, and IIIP Plus
Self-paced Training Kit
33481A + 49A-00
LJ 4 and 4 Plus
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C3916-67903 C3916-67904
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C3980-61101 C3980-61102
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C2009A + 49A-61 C2900A + 49A-62
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C314XA + 49A-61 C3141-67903 C3141-67901
LJ 5Si/5Si Mopier
5P/6P
LJ 4L/4P
LJ IIISi and 4Si
LJ 4V
12
EN
How to Get Training – 337
Support Resources North American Response Center (NARC) The North American Response Center (NARC) provides technical support to service technicians. Reach the NARC at (800) 544-9976.
Other Areas Outside of North America and Europe, contact your local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining technical support.
HP FIRST Fax System HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a phone-in fax service that provides technical information to HP LaserJet users as well as to service personnel. Receiving a fax requires a group-3 facsimile machine or fax card. Service-related information includes the following: •
Service notes (HP Authorized dealers)
•
Application notes
•
Product Data Sheets
•
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
•
Typeface and accessory information
•
Printer support software information
•
Toner information
•
Forms for requesting drivers and the Software Matrix
338 – Services, support, and training
EN
To retrieve Service Notes (Authorized dealers, HP CEs ONLY): 1 Dial (1) (800) 333-1917 from any touch-tone phone. 2 Select (1) for HP FIRST. 3 Select (3) for a password customer. 4 Enter the password: 737842. 5 Follow the voice prompts to enter a document ID number or to select the index. 6 Follow the voice prompts to enter your fax number or the fax number of your customer.
Note Delivery time depends on the length and complexity of the document.
HP FIRST, U.S. Call the HP ASAP system at (800) 333-1917 and follow the voice prompts to enter HP FIRST.
HP FIRST, Europe Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers: United Kingdom
(44) (134) 0800-960271
Netherlands
(31) (20) 0800-222420
Belgium (Dutch)
(32) (2) 0800-11906
Germany
(49) (13) 081-0061
Switzerland (German)
(41) (1) 0800-551527
Austria
(43) (1) 0660-8128
For English service outside the countries listed above, call (31) 20-681-5792.
EN
Support Resources – 339
12
HP End-User Support Options Local Support Assistance The user's first source of assistance should be the local dealer or service center. HP continuously provides local computer dealers and service centers with the latest information regarding products and services. To locate the nearest authorized dealer or service center, phone (800) 243-9816 (U.S.) or (800) 387-3867 (Canada).
24-Hour Support Information Phone (800) 333-1917 to access the HP ASAP system for 24- hour automated support services. User support information includes notes for common software applications and troubleshooting tips. Users may request up to three documents per call.
Electronic Information Services For 24-hour access to information via modem, we suggest: •
CompuServe- The CompuServe HP Peripherals forum (GO HPPER) provides printer drivers and interactive sharing of technical communication. To subscribe, call CompuServe, Inc. at (800) 5243388. Note: CompuServe is not an official HP support channel, but the forum is maintained and supported by users.
•
Internet - Printer drivers and product and support information can be obtained from the HP anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) site 192.6.71.2 or ftp-boi.external.hp.com. The site is available to anyone with FTP access to the Internet. Access through the World Wide Web is available at URL http://www.hp.com/.
340 – Services, support, and training
EN
Printer Drivers by Mail To obtain printer drivers, contact the software application manufacturer. HP distributes printer drivers for a few of the most popular applications. Call (970) 339-7009, 6 days a week, 24 hours a day (closed Sundays). Shipping and handling charges may apply on some printer drivers.
Telephone Assistance - In Warranty Call (1) (208) 323-2551 Monday through Friday from 6 am to 10 pm, Saturday 9 am to 4 pm (Mountain Time) free of charge during the warranty period. However, your standard long-distance phone charges still apply. Have your system nearby and your serial number ready when calling.
Telephone Assistance - Post-Warranty Post-warranty telephone assistance is available to answer your product usage questions. Call (1) (900) 555-1500 ($2.50 per minute, U.S. only) or call 1-800-999-1148 ($25 per call, Visa or MasterCard, U.S. and Canada) Monday through Friday from 7 am to 6 pm and Saturday from 9 am to 3 pm (Mountain Time). Charges begin only when you connect with a support technician. *Prices subject to change.
Hardware Repair Services To find a local authorized repair center for hardware repair needs, call (800) 243-9816. HP also offers a variety of service contract options to complement the standard warranty. Call (800) 743-8308 (U.S.) or (800) 268-1221 (Canada).
12
EN
HP End-User Support Options – 341
342 – Services, support, and training
EN
13
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
Overview This section provides information on the LaserJet 300 DPI page scanner, which is available in three models.
EN
Overview – 343
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion The HP LaserJet Companion includes the following models: •
C3989A Companion
•
C3079A Companion SE
•
C4106A Companion XI
(Except for minor differences in software, these are the same product.)
Description The HP LaserJet Companion is a 300-DPI page scanner, parallel port pass-through accessory designed for Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 4, 5, and 6 series printers.
Warranty The HP LaserJet Companion comes with a 1-year warranty, offering Central Repair only (no dealer repairs); Express Exchange (U.S. and Canada); and Repair and Return (Worldwide).
344 – Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
EN
Supported Media •
The following media sizes are supported: Maximum: 216 mm x 762 mm (8.5 by 30 inches) Minimum: 51 mm x 89 mm (2 by 3.5 inches)
•
The following media weights are supported: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 lb to 28 lb)
Skew Specifications Some skew is normal. The maximum amount of skew that is considered normal is 3.35 millimeters (0.13 inches) over 279 millimeters (11 inches). Skew exceeding the normal amount may be caused by media that is damaged, media that does not meet the specifications, or media that is loaded incorrectly. If media meets specifications, is not damaged, and is correctly loaded, but skew remains excessive, clean the separation pad, pickup roller, and scan roller.
Cleaning Clean these parts with isopropyl alcohol: •
separation pad
•
pickup roller
•
the white scan roller
Clean the image sensor with glass cleaner.
EN
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion – 345
13
Cables HP Part Number
Part Description
8120-6963
Cable shipped with the HP LaserJet Companion
C2950A
Printer parallel cable
C2951A
Printer parallel cable
Power Supply Modules Output = 22 V DC, + or - 25% HP Part Number
Part Description
9100-5534
120 Vac 60 Hz (U.S./CN/MX)
9100-5535
230 Vac 50 Hz (EUROPE)
9100-5536
240 Vac 50 Hz (U.K.)
9100-5537
220 Vac 50 Hz (ARG)
9100-5539
240 Vac 50 Hz (AUSTRL)
9100-5541
220 Vac 50 Hz (TI/INDO)
9100-5542
220 Vac 50 Hz (HNG KNG)
346 – Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
EN
Appendix
Acronyms and Abbreviations AC
Alternating current
AUTOCONT
Automatic continue
BNC
A 10-Base 2 connector used with coaxial cables
CFG
Configuration on control panel
DC
Direct current
DCPS
Direct current power supply
MS-DOS
Disk operating system
DPI
Dots per inch
DTR
Data terminal ready
DTR LINE
Data terminal ready line
EP
Electro-photographic
EPH
External paper handling
FRU
Field replacement unit
FTP
File transfer protocol
HP FIRST
Hewlett-Packard Fax information retrieval support technology
HP-GL/2
Hewlett-Packard graphics language
HTML
Hypertext markup language
HV
High voltage
EN
Acronyms and Abbreviations – 347
HVPS
High-voltage power supply
I/O
Input/output
IR
Infrared
IrDA
Infrared Data Association
IRQ
Interrupt request
JEIDA
A type of memory module
JOBID
Print job identification
JP
Jobpack
LAN
Local area network
LED
Light-emitting diode
LVPS
Low-voltage power supply
LC PICKUP ROLLER
Lower-cassette pickup roller
MB
Megabyte
MEM
Memory
MIO
Modular input/output
MP PICKUP ROLLER
Multipurpose tray pickup roller
MP Tray
Multipurpose tray
MSDS
Material safety data sheets
NARC
North American Response Center
NTSC
National Television Standard Committee
NVRAM
Nonvolatile random-access memory
Ohm
A unit of measure of electrical resistance
PAL
Phase alternation line format
PCA
Printed-circuit assembly
PCB
Printed circuit board
PCL
Printer command language
PC PICKUP ROLLER
Paper-cassette pickup roller
PIU
Paper input unit
348 – Appendix
EN
PJL
Printer job language
RAM
Random-access memory
RIP
Raster image process
ROM
Read-only memory Single inline memory module
SMO
Support materials organization
SMODE
Service mode
SPEC
Specifications
SRVR
Server
TCP/IP
Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol
TS l/T52
Thermoswitch
UNIX
Network operating system using TCP/IP protocol
URL
Universal resource locator
VDC
Volts direct current
EN
Acronyms and Abbreviations – 349
Appendix
SIMM
350 – Appendix
EN
Index A
H
accessing service mode 75
hardware repair services 341 Hardware Technical Support Center 338 hardware, part numbers 149 HP FIRST 338 HP LaserJet Companion cables 345 cleaning 345 description 344 power supply modules 346 supported media 345 warranty 344 HP paper training video 120 HP Planet Partners program 127
B banding, reducing 123 baud rate switch 106 bidirectional parallel interface 94
C character voids 123 cleaning page 273
D default paper size, setting 79 defect rulers repetitive image 302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309 display lights 8
E envelopes construction 116 feeding 116 reducing gray background 126 sizes 114 specifications 114 error messages 9
I I/O type, selecting 105 image defects 274 infrared communications 103 infrared printing problems 103 IR test tool 104
L labels specifications 117 types to avoid 118 light emitting diode displays 8
G
M
gray background, reducing 126
Macintosh, verifying communication 102
EN
Index – 351
media envelope sizes 114 envelope specifications 114 label specifications 117 label types to avoid 118 paper curl 113 paper problems 111 paper sizes 108 paper specifications 109 paper types to avoid 112 paper weights 110 sizes 108 transparency specifications 119
O operating voltages 86 ordering manuals iv parts 131 ordering, printer drivers 340
P page count, setting 77, 78, 79 paper curl 113 sizes 108 specifications 109 troubleshooting problems 111 types to avoid 112 weights 110 paper out 21 paper size, setting 79 parallel cables 95 part numbers 152 parts, ordering 131 PC interface, configuring 100 post image transfer 125 power save interval, setting 80 power supply checks 81 352 – Index
printer baud rate switch 106 bidirectional parallel interface 94 cleaning page 273 configuring PC interface 100 display lights 8 error messages 9 hardware part numbers 149 I/O cables, specifications 99 infrared printing problems 103 light emitting diode displays 8 operating voltages 86 parallel cables 95 parts 152 product part numbers 132 schematics 81, 82 serial cabling schematics 96 service messages 9 setting page count 77, 78, 79 setting paper size 79 status messages 9 technical tips 206 troubleshooting printing system 197 troubleshooting problems 200 verifying communication 101 wiring diagrams 313 printer drivers, ordering 341 product description 132 ordering parts 131 part numbers 132
R recycling, toner cartridges 127 refill statement 128 repetitive image defect ruler 302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311
EN
S
toner cracking 124 training class schedules 336 training kits, self-paced 336, 337 transparencies specifications 119 types to use 119 troubleshooting banding 123 character voids 123 envelope problems 115 image defects 274 infrared printing problems 103 paper problems 111 post image transfer 125 printer problems 200 printing system 197 technical tips 206 toner cracking 124
W T
wiring diagrams 313
technical support, contacting 338 test tool 91 toner cartridges banding 123 character voids 123 minimizing post image transfer 125 page count 122 product numbers 122 toner cracking 124 weights 122
EN
Index – 353
Index
self-paced training kits 336, 337 serial cabling schematics 96 serial I/O specifications 99 serial number, setting 78, 79 service manuals, ordering iv service messages 9 service mode, accessing 75 service notes 206 index 200 retrieving 339 service part numbers 132 setting page count 77 power save interval 80 sizes envelopes 114 paper 108 status messages 9
Service Websites Electronic Support Center Software, drivers, support documentation, frequently asked questions http://www.hp.com/go/support
HP Technical Training (North America) Classes and schedules http://www.hp.com/go/resellertraining
Parts Parts information http://outfield.external.hp.com/spi/welcome.htm
Service Phone Numbers All numbers listed are for North America only.
Dealer Response Line Dealer pre/post sales and service support (800) 544-9976 U.S. Only (800) 363-6594 Canada
Customer Care Center User questions, applications, LaserJet Fax (208) 323-2551
HP First Fax – Information Retrieval System Service notes, sales information, user help, software information (208) 344-4809 (800) 333-1917 U.S. Only
Customer Information Center Sales dealer locations, literature, and specifications (800) 752-0900 U.S. Only
HP Driver Distribution Center Printer drivers and software application notes orders (970) 339-7009 U.S. Only
Customer Support Sales Center Authorized repair locations (800) 243-9816 U.S. Only
Parts Direct Ordering / SMO Service parts, supplies, and accessories orders (800) 227-8164 U.S. Only
Parts Identification Service part number identification (916) 783-0804
North American Response Center Online technical assistance (800) 477-5526 HP Only
Corvallis Customer Service Center Express exchange/customer return services (916) 785-1200
May 1998 Edition
HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference Service Guide Volume II
HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference Service Guide Volume II
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company, 1998 All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. Publication number 5021-8942 First edition, May 1998 Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with respect to this information. HEWLETTPACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, or other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information.
Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
Trademark credits MS-DOS® is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.
Contents 1
Control panel messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Error listings, descriptions, and recommended actions
2
Service mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 How to access Service mode and related functions
3
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 DC voltages, test points, and tools
4
Input/Output (I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Printer interface and cabling information
5
Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Supported sizes and specifications for paper and special media
6
Toner cartridge information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Cartridge weights, capacities, and potential service issues
7
Printer options and replaceable parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Support matrix and part numbers for accessories
8
Printer parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Selected high-usage replacement parts
9
Image quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Image defect samples, suspect causes, and remedies
10 Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Main wiring schematics 11 Services and support/resources and training . . . . . . . . . . . 173 How and where to get training, support, and materials 12 Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 HP LaserJet information and specifications A
Acronyms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
EN
iii
Ordering other manuals The HP LaserJet Quick Reference Service Guide, Volume II, provides support for newer monochrome printers (see the following page for a complete list of supported printers). It has been created to help the HP LaserJet service engineer quickly troubleshoot common printer problems. For older monochrome printers, see the HP LaserJet Quick Reference Service Guide, Volume I. It provides support for the following printers: LJ 6L, LJ 5Si Mopier, LJ 5Si, LJ 5Si MX, LJ 5L, LJ 6P, LJ 6MP, LJ 5P, LJ 5MP, LJ 5, LJ 5M, LJ 5N, LJ 4V, LJ 4MV, LJ 4P, LJ 4MP, LJ 4L, LJ 4ML, LJ 4+, LJ 4M+, LJ4, LJ 4M, LJ 4Si, LJ 4Si MX, LJ IIISi, LJ IIIP, LJ IIP+, LJ IIP, LJ IIID, LJ III, LJ IID, LJ II, LJ 2686D, LJ 2686A. While the quick reference guides are intended to provide all the information the service engineer will need for on-site repair of HP products, they are not intended to replace the service manual for any HP LaserJet product. For detailed information about the HP LaserJet products described in this guide, see the user guide or service manual for that product. Service manuals for HP LaserJet products are available from Hewlett-Packard. The phone number for the Service Parts Order Desk is:
(800) 227-8164 (U.S. only) If you are located outside of the U.S., contact your local HP Sales and Service office.
iv
EN
Supported products Reference name used in this guide
Model number
Maximum pages per month
Service Manual part number
LJ 4000/4000T 4000N/4000TN
C4118A/C4119A/ C4120A/C4121A
65K
C4118-99024
LJ Companion
LJ C3989A/ C3979A/C4106A
N/A
HP Central Repair Only
LJ 5000/5000N/ 5000GN
C4110A/C4111A/ C4112A
65K
C4110-91033
LJ 3100
C3948A
6K
C3948-90958
LJ8000/8000N/ 8000DN
C4085A/C4086A/ C4087A
130K
C4085-91017
LJ Mopier 240
C4228A
130K
C4085-91017
Note This guide will be updated on a regular basis as the service needs change, as new products are introduced, and as information becomes available.
EN
v
1
Control panel messages
Overview This chapter provides a list of printer control panel messages. Alphabetical messages are listed first, followed by numerical messages. Control panel messages that are self-explanatory are not included. If you need more detailed information, see the service manual for the printer.
EN
Chapter 1 – 7
Alphabetical messages (number) is a group, group not allowed •
Enter a different one-touch key or an unassigned speed-dial code.
Access denied, menus locked •
Ask the network administrator to unlock the function.
Already in group •
While programming a group-dial code, a fax number has been added that is already in the group. – Add the next fax number to the group.
Bad duplexer connection •
Re-install the duplexer.
•
If the message persists, make sure that the duplexer is connected and that the connector is not damaged.
•
Replace the duplexer.
Bad opt tray connection •
Re-install the optional tray.
•
Make sure that the optional tray is connected and that the connector is not damaged.
•
Replace the optional tray.
8 – Control panel messages
EN
Blacklisted (France only) •
The attempted fax number has received a voice answer or no answer, was busy on the first dial and redials, or was busy with redials pending. – Unplug the power cord for the fax machine from the power strip or outlet, and then plug it back in.
Busy •
Check the fax number and try resending the fax. If the message appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
Cancel group edit, ENTER to confirm •
Back space was pressed while in a group-dial code in the Group Dial Setup level of the menu.
1 Press [Start] to return to the group-dial code and continue editing. 2 Press [Enter/Menu] to go to the Group Dial Setup level of the menu. (Press [Enter/Menu] again to choose a different group-dial code.) 3 Press [Stop/Clear] to exit the Menu settings.
Check finisher device alternates with Clear jam •
Check to see if paper is jammed in the external paper-handling finishing device.
Check finisher device alternates with Finisher align error •
EN
Check to see if an alignment error has occurred in the external paper-handling finishing device.
Chapter 1 – 9
1
Check input device alternates with Paper path open, please close it •
Check the doors and trays.
•
Check the tabs and sensor levers in the tray for proper operation. – Replace any defective tabs or sensors.
•
Replace the printed-circuit assembly (PCA) controller in the feeder.
Check output device alternates with Close output delivery path •
Make sure the paper path is closed between the printer and the external paper-handling output device.
Chosen language not available 1 Print the job using a driver for a different printer language, or add the requested language to the printer (if available). 2 Press [Go] to continue.
Clear document from scanner •
Check to see if the document is jammed or if multiple sheets of the document were loaded.
•
Check the special media lever. It should be to the left for regularweight items or to the right for thick items. Thick items must be fed one at a time.
•
Check the control panel configuration for outgoing faxes, including the “send long pages” setting.
10 – Control panel messages
EN
Close top cover •
Check SW101 for proper operation. Verify that the wires are connected.
•
If necessary, replace SW101. – If the new switch does not solve the error, the wiring or the engine controller board may be defective.
Communication error 1 Try resending the fax. 2 If the call fails again, check that the telephone cord is securely connected. Then check for a dial tone on the phone line by pressing [Manual Dial]. 3 Wait; try resending the fax later.
Note For additional details, see the HP LaserJet 3100 Product Service Manual.
Configuration err # (number 1-4) •
An error was detected in the static random-access memory (SRAM). – Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Config. stuck addr •
In Service mode only, SRAM stuck address test. – Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
EN
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Chapter 1 – 11
1
Config. tied addr. •
In Service mode only, SRAM tied address test. – Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
[Date] [Time] •
The battery has failed. You can continue to use the HP LaserJet 3100 product without replacing the battery, but if you re-enter the Menu settings and then turn off the power, the settings are erased again.
Decoding error # (number 1-3) •
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Disk device failure •
Reseat the enhanced input/output (EIO) disk or replace the old disk device with a new disk.
Disk file operation failed •
Check the filename and directory name.
•
Reattempt the operation.
Disk file system is full •
Delete the files from the EIO disk and then try again, or add a Flash dual inline memory module (DIMM).
•
Download or delete files from the HP JetAdmin software, and download or delete fonts from the HP FontSmart software.
12 – Control panel messages
EN
Disk is write protected •
Use the HP JetAdmin software to disable the write protection.
Documents were lost, START to continue 1 Press [Start]. A report is printed. 2 Check the fax log status column for the “Fax Document was Lost” message. 3 Resend the associated outgoing faxes. Ask the sender to resend incoming faxes.
Duplex error, check duplexer •
Check the duplexer for a paper jam.
•
Reseat the duplex assembly, and check the connection.
•
Replace the Duplex unit.
EIO x disk initializing •
Stand by until the EIO disk is done initializing.
EIO x disk spinning up •
Stand by until the disk accessory card is done initializing.
EIO disk x non-functional •
Replace the EIO disk.
Encoding error •
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
EN
Chapter 1 – 13
1
Envelope feeder load 1 Load the requested envelope type and size into the envelope feeder. 2 Make sure that the envelope size and type are set correctly on the Paper-Handling menu in the printer control panel. 3 Press [Go] if the envelope is already loaded in the feeder. 4 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes.
Errors likely in pages: (page range) •
Resend the fax or ask the sender to resend the fax to you.
Fax document was lost •
If you set up faxes to be sent at a future time or to be polled, print a fax log to identify which faxes were lost. Then re-enter the faxes.
•
Faxes that were received to memory (instead of printing) have been lost. Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Fax memory error # (number 1-5) •
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If you set up faxes to be sent at a future time or to be polled, print a fax log to identify which faxes may have been lost. Then, re-enter the faxes.
•
Faxes that were received to memory (instead of printing) have been lost. Ask the sender to resend the fax.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Flash device failure •
Remove the Flash DIMM and replace it with a new one.
14 – Control panel messages
EN
Flash file operation failed •
Check the filename and directory name.
•
Reattempt the operation.
1
Flash file system is full •
Delete files from the Flash DIMM or add another DIMM.
•
Download or delete files from the HP JetAdmin software, and download or delete fonts from the HP FontSmart software.
Flash is write protected •
Use the HP JetAdmin software to disable the write protection.
Group is empty, use ONE-TOUCH/SPEED DIAL 1 Begin adding fax numbers to the group-dial code by pressing the one-touch key for each number or by pressing [Speed Dial]. 2 Enter the speed-dial code for the fax number. 3 Press [Enter/Menu].
Initializing •
EN
Reseat the DIMM(s).
Chapter 1 – 15
Input device condition xx.yy 1st x = Device number in chain. 2nd x = Device type (3 types): 1 = Input 2 = Output 3 = Stapler/stacker unit yy = Device specific error. •
See the documentation that came with the paper-handling device.
Input limit reached •
The maximum number of fax numbers that can be added to an ad-hoc group is 100. Resend the fax, but only to 100 or fewer fax numbers.
Install front duplex cover •
Re-insert the duplexer’s front cover.
Install tray x •
Re-insert the specified tray.
•
Check for damaged tabs in the tray.
•
Check for damaged switches in the printer.
•
Replace the PCA controller in the feeder.
Invalid date or time •
Re-enter the date and time.
16 – Control panel messages
EN
Keypad test failed •
Run the keypad test again.
•
If the error persists, try each of the following in the order given: – Check the cabling. – Replace the control panel. – Replace the formatter.
Loading program alternates with Do not power off •
Wait for the program to load.
Long page? START to continue •
Press [Start] to continue scanning. If [Start] is not pressed within 3 seconds, the message disappears and the document scanner stops scanning because it thinks the page has jammed.
•
If sending a fax or copying a document longer than 991 mm (39 in), the control panel configuration can also be set to “Send long pages.” This ensures that long pages feed without having to monitor the task. Press [Start] before the document scanner shuts off.
Manually feed [type] [size] 1 Load the requested paper into Tray 1. 2 Press [Go] if the appropriate paper is already loaded in Tray 1. 3 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. 4 Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
Memory full - send unscanned pages •
Reload the unscanned pages and re-send them to finish the fax job.
•
Scan the unscanned pages to the computer and fax them from the computer.
EN
Chapter 1 – 17
1
Memory full - stored data lost •
Add more memory to the printer or simplify the print job.
Memory is full •
This message should clear automatically when the next task starts (for example, when you start a copy or receive a fax).
Memory settings changed •
Try changing the memory settings for I/O Buffering and Resource Saving (although default settings are usually best).
•
Install additional memory in the printer.
Memory shortage job cleared •
Press [Go] to continue.
•
On the printer control panel, change the setting for resource saving, or add more memory to the printer.
Memory shortage page simplified •
Press [Go] to continue.
•
Add more memory to the printer.
Modem error # (number 1-3) •
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, try each of the following in the order given: – Check the cabling. – Replace the LIU. – Replace the formatter.
18 – Control panel messages
EN
No answer •
Check the fax number and try resending the fax. If the message appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
No dial tone •
Check that the telephone cord is securely connected.
•
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by pressing [Manual Dial].
•
If necessary, check the wall outlet by plugging in a phone and attempting to place a call.
No fax in (number) tries •
Check the fax number and try resending the fax. If the message appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
No fax pages in memory to reprint •
Wait for a fax. As soon as a fax is in the memory, the fax will reprint.
No memory for report, erase/print document •
Print all faxes that have been received in memory.
•
If you have several faxes set up to be sent at a future time or to be polled, use job status to clear them.
No modem installed •
There is a problem with the line interface unit (LIU). – Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug in the power cord.
•
If the problem persists, replace the LIU.
•
If the problem persists, replace the formatter.
EN
Chapter 1 – 19
1
No room in fax log •
The fax log was unable to print because of an error, such as out-ofpaper. – Load paper in the paper input bin so the HP LaserJet 3100 product can print the log.
Not enough memory •
Try resending the job. If the error persists, try reducing the amount of activity on the HP LaserJet product. Cancel jobs in memory before resending the job.
Out of memory -- switching to ONE COPY •
The HP LaserJet product continues to copy, but only one copy is output. – Divide the copy job into smaller sections and then try copying again. – If you are collating the job, turn the collation feature off, make only one copy of the document at a time, or see the user guide for instructions about using the Document Assistant.
Output bin full alternates with Clear paper from [bin name] 1 Remove the media from the face-down tray. 2 Check PS1401 on the sensor PCA. 3 Make sure the sensor flag moves freely.
20 – Control panel messages
EN
Paper bin is empty, please add paper 1 Load paper.
1
2 If paper is already loaded, remove it. 3 Check for, remove, and discard any jammed sheets. 4 Reload the paper.
Password must be 4 digits •
Re-enter a four-digit password.
Paused (memory full) •
Reduce activity on the HP LaserJet product, or wait for other jobs to finish so memory will be freed.
•
If faxes are set up to be polled or sent at a future time, you may want to cancel these jobs to free memory.
Perform printer maintenance Reset the maintenance page count only after a maintenance kit has been installed. Resetting the maintenance page count causes PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE to appear after another 150,000 (LJ 5000 series), 200,000 (LJ 4000 series), or 350,000 (LJ 8000) pages have printed. 1 Hold down the [Item-] and [Value-] keys. 2 Turn the printer on. 3 Wait until RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT appears, and then release both keys.
EN
Chapter 1 – 21
PC print timed out •
Let the “print jobs retry” continue for 5 minutes. If the HP LaserJet 3100 product still does not print, resend the print job.
Phone number error •
The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 40. If you have a number longer than 40 characters, break the number into smaller chunks.
1 Enter the first part of the number, and press [Redial/Pause] as the last character in the first number. 2 Enter the second part of the number as if it were a second number going to a group. When the product dials, it will treat both numbers as if they are one.
Polling-in error •
Make sure that the sender’s fax machine is ready to be polled, and check the fax number. Then set up to poll again.
Printer comm error^1 •
Check that the parallel cable is securely connected between the HP LaserJet 3100 product and the computer.
•
If the problem persists, unplug the power cord from the power source for 5 seconds, and then replug it.
•
If the problems persists, replace the formatter.
Printer cover open or no cartridge •
Verify that the printer door is closed.
•
Check the toner cartridge for proper installation.
22 – Control panel messages
EN
Printer fixing error, replace fixing unit •
There is an error with the print engine.
•
Check the cabling to the heating element.
•
If the problem persists, replace the heating element.
•
If the problem persists, replace the ECU.
1
Printer is busy •
No action is needed. If you already started another job, the job will be completed when the HP LaserJet product becomes available.
Printer laser error, call for service •
Open and reclose the printer door.
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the problem persists, replace the laser scanner assembly.
Printer motor error, call for service •
A problem has occurred with the print engine. – Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord. – If the problem persists, replace the motor. – If the problem persists, replace the ECU.
Printer paper jam, check paper path •
EN
Check the input areas, the output areas, and the interior for the jam, and then clear the jam. The job should continue to print. If it does not, try reprinting the job.
Chapter 1 – 23
Printer signal error •
Open and reclose the printer door.
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the problem persists, replace the laser scanner assembly.
Processing job from Tray x •
Check the tray selected and the type settings. If the printer does not respond after you press the control panel keys, turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on to clear the message.
•
If paper is loaded when the printer is in Power Save mode, it might not be recognized. Open and close the affected source when the printer is in Ready mode.
RAM disk device failure •
Turn the printer off and on to clear the message.
•
If the message persists, install a new RAM disk.
RAM disk file operation failed •
Check the filename and directory name.
•
Reattempt the operation.
24 – Control panel messages
EN
RAM disk file system is full •
Delete files and then try again, or turn the printer off and then turn the printer on to delete all files on the device. (Use HP JetAdmin software, HP FontSmart software, or another software utility to delete files.)
•
If the message persists, increase the size of the RAM disk. – Change the RAM disk size from the Configuration menu in the printer control panel.
RAM disk is write protected •
Use HP JetAdmin software to disable the write protection.
Received error •
Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Redial failed •
Try resending the fax. If the fax still fails to transmit, call the recipient to check that the fax machine is on and working and to verify the fax number.
Remote fax was busy •
Try resending the fax. If the fax still fails to transmit, call the recipient to check that the fax machine is on is on and working and to verify the fax number.
Scan reference error •
Recalibrate the document scanner.
•
If the problem persists, replace the CIS.
EN
Chapter 1 – 25
1
Scanner error #1 •
An error has occurred within the SRAM.
•
Press and hold down the [Stop/Clear] key for 7 seconds to reset the product.
•
If the error persists, unplug the power cord from its power source for 10 seconds, and then replug it.
•
If the error persists, replace the CIS.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Scanner isn’t available •
The document scanner mechanism is in use. – Wait until the document scanner has finished the current job before sending the next job.
Scanner jam - reload •
Pull open the document release door and then remove the jammed document.
Speed dial (number) is not assigned •
Choose a speed-dial code that has already been assigned a fax number.
System error •
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the message is still displayed, replace the formatter.
26 – Control panel messages
EN
There are no documents in memory •
No action is required. There are no faxes to retrieve.
Tray x empty •
Load the empty tray (x) to clear the message.
•
Inspect the tray for damaged tabs.
•
Check the sensor-arm flags for damage. Be sure the flags can move freely.
•
Replace any defective sensors.
Tray x lifting •
Verify that the media can be pulled from another tray.
•
Replace the paper input unit.
Tray x load 1 Load the requested paper into the specified tray (x). Ensure that the trays are correctly adjusted for size. 2 Press [Go] to print from the next available tray. 3 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. 4 Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size. 5 Inspect the switches in the tray. 6 Remove the tray, and then turn the printer on. Push the switches by hand to see if the switches register.
EN
Chapter 1 – 27
1
Unrecognized format •
When printing, the incorrect printer driver was selected or an error occurred on the parallel interface.
1 After selecting the Print command in the software application you are using, select the HP LaserJet 3100 as the printer. 2 Reprint the job.
Unsuccessful call •
Check the fax number and try resending the fax.
•
If the message appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
Unsupported size in tray [yy] •
Load a supported paper size in the tray.
Use [type] [size] instead? 1 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. 2 Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
28 – Control panel messages
EN
Numerical messages XX.YY printer error, press GO to continue Press [Go] on the printer control panel to clear the error message.
13 Paper jam •
Remove the jammed paper from the specified location. Check the entire paper path for other pieces of paper.
•
Open and close the top cover to clear the message.
•
Check sensors and flags in the paper path for proper operation.
13.1 Paper delay jam at paper feed area 13.2 Paper stopped jam at paper feed area •
Ensure that the paper trays are loaded properly so that paper can feed from the trays.
•
Check the input area for obstructions such as paper in the paper path or damage to the registration assembly.
•
Verify that the transfer roller is positioned correctly.
•
Check PS 102 and PS 103 (4000 series) and PS 402 and PS 403 (5000 series) for proper operation. – Replace any defective sensors or flags.
EN
Chapter 1 – 29
1
13.5 Paper delay jam at fuser 13.6 Paper stopped jam at fuser •
Check the transfer roller and small media belt to ensure that the roller and belt are operating and can feed the paper.
•
Check the paper path for obstructions at the transfer roller, toner cartridge, paper feed guide, and fuser.
•
Check PS 501 and PS 106 (4000 series), PS 1307 (5000 series), or PS 1403 (8000 series) for proper operation. Replace any defective sensors or flags.
13.9 Check left door •
Inspect the path between the fuser and delivery assemblies.
•
Check the diverter assembly.
13.10 Paper delay jam at paper reversing area/ duplexer •
Check the duplexer and the rear area of the printer for obstructions or damage.
•
In the duplexer, check PS 701 and PS 703 for proper operation.
•
Replace the duplexer if a sensor is defective.
13.11 Paper jam •
Check the entire paper path.
•
Reseat the duplexer.
•
Try the Paper Path Test.
•
Replace the duplexer.
30 – Control panel messages
EN
13.11 Paper jam in input device 1 Open the vertical transfer unit (VTU) and remove the media. 2 Verify that the entry or exit sensor can move freely. 3 If the problem persists, open the VTU and override its Open Door sensor, perform a Paper Path test from the 2,000-sheet Input Tray (or 2x500-sheet Input Tray), and make sure the feed rollers are advancing the paper. – If the rollers do not rotate, verify the connections at the main drive assembly, pickup assembly, controller PCA, and power supply. If the rollers still do not rotate or do not drop down, replace the pickup assembly. – If the rollers rotate and drop down without advancing the paper, replace the feed rollers using the maintenance kit. – If the problem persists, replace the VTU.
13.12 Paper jam •
Check the paper path between the fuser and duplex assembly.
•
Reseat the duplexer.
•
Replace the duplexer.
13.13 Paper jam •
Check the entire paper path.
•
Remove the duplex assembly and look for paper in the side of the assembly. – Retest.
•
EN
Replace the duplexer.
Chapter 1 – 31
1
13.20 Paper jam •
Check the paper path for obstructions.
•
Check that all assemblies are seated and all doors are closed.
•
Check all sensors and flags in the paper path.
13.21 Door open jam •
Check that all assemblies are seated and all doors are closed.
•
Check all sensors and flags in the paper path.
13.22 Paper jam in output device •
Open the flipper jam access door and remove the media.
•
Make sure the sensor flag moves freely.
•
Make sure that the flipper shaft is in place.
•
If the problem persists, replace the flipper assembly.
•
If the problem persists, replace the mailbox controller PCA.
20 Insufficient memory alternates with Press GO to continue •
Press [Go] to print the transferred data (some data might be lost); then simplify the print job or install additional memory.
32 – Control panel messages
EN
21 Page too complex •
Press [Go] to print the transferred data. (Some data could be lost).
•
To print the job without losing data, select Page Protect=on from the Configuration menu in the printer control panel and then print the job. Afterward, return to Page Protect=auto. Do not leave Page Protect=on; doing so could degrade performance.
•
If this message appears often, simplify the print job or install additional memory.
22 EIO x buffer overflow alternates with Press GO to continue (too much data sent to EIO card) Press [Go] to clear the message. (Data will be lost.)
•
22 Parallel I/O buffer overflow (too much data sent to parallel port) •
Check for a loose cable connection. Use a high-quality IEEE-1284 cable.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
22 Serial I/O buffer overflow alternates with Press GO to continue (too much data sent to the serial port) •
Verify that the correct option for serial pacing is selected on the I/O menu.
•
Print a Menu Map and verify that the serial pacing item (from the I/O Menu on the printer control panel) matches the setting on the computer.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
EN
Chapter 1 – 33
1
40 Bad serial transmission (data transfer error) •
Verify cable connections.
•
Verify that the printer serial configuration is set the same as the computer. – Access the serial baud rate setting from the I/O Menu on the printer control panel.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing.
40 EIO x bad transmission (connection between printer and EIO card broken) x = Description 1 = EIO slot 1 2 = EIO slot 2 •
Turn the printer off and reseat the card.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing.
41.3 Unexpected paper size •
Verify that all trays are adjusted correctly for size. (The printer attempts to print the job until size settings are correct.)
•
If you are trying to print from Tray 1, make sure that the paper-size setting in the printer control panel is configured correctly.
•
If you are trying to print from the optional 500-sheet tray, be sure to set the paper-size dial to match the paper size loaded in the tray.
•
Press [Go]. The page containing the error is automatically reprinted. (Or, press [Cancel Job] to clear the job from the printer’s memory.)
34 – Control panel messages
EN
41.x Printer error alternates with Press GO to continue •
1
A temporary printing error occurred. x = Description 1 = Unknown misprint error 2 = Beam detect error 4 = No VSYNC error 5 = Media feed error 9 = Noise VSREQ error Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically. If the error persists, try the following procedures:
•
– Reseat the connections to the laser scanner and the engine controller board. – Replace the laser scanner. – Replace the engine controller board.
50.x Fuser error x = Description 1 = Low fuser temperature 2 = Fuser warm-up service 3 = High fuser temperature 4 = Faulty fuser 5 = Inconsistent fuser 1 Turn the printer off, wait 20 minutes, and then turn the printer on. 2 If the message persists, reseat the fuser. 3 If the message persists, replace the fuser.
EN
Chapter 1 – 35
51.x Printer error (loss of beam detect) x = Description 1 = Beam detect error 2 = Laser error •
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Reseat the cables.
•
Replace the laser scanner.
52.x Printer error (the laser scanner speed is incorrect) x = Description 1 = Scanner startup error 2 = Scanner rotation error •
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Reseat the cables.
•
Replace the laser scanner.
53.xy.zz Printer memory error with an accessory The DIMM that caused the error will not be used. x = DIMM type 0 = read only memory (ROM) 1 = random access memory (RAM) y = Device location 0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM) 1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3 zz = Error number 36 – Control panel messages
EN
0 = Unsupported memory 1 = Unrecognized memory
1
2 = Unsupported memory size 3 = Failed RAM test 4 = Exceeded maximum RAM size 5 = Exceeded maximum ROM size 6 = Invalid DIMM speed 7 = DIMM reporting information incorrectly 8 = DIMM RAM parity error 9 = ROM needs to be mapped to an unsupported address 10 = DIMM address conflict 11 = PDC XROM out of bounds 12 = Unable to make a temporary mapping •
Turn the printer off, and reseat or replace the specified DIMM.
•
Try the DIMM in another slot.
•
Replace the DIMM that caused the error.
55 Printer error alternates with Press GO to continue (internal communications problem) •
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Check the power at the site.
•
Replace the formatter PCA.
•
Replace the DC controller.
•
Replace the engine controller board.
EN
Chapter 1 – 37
56.x Printer error alternates with Cycle Power to continue x = Description 1 = Illegal input 2 = Illegal output •
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Turn the printer off and on.
•
Check the printer’s configuration.
57.x Printer Error x = Description 4 = Printer fan 7 = Duplex fan •
Check the fan’s connector and verify that the fan is not blocked.
•
Replace the fan.
59.x Printer error x = Description 0 = Motor error 1 = Motor startup error 2 = Motor rotation error •
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Make sure that the fuser or toner cartridge is not hindering gear movement in the drive train.
•
Verify that the cable in the main motor is seated properly.
•
If the error persists, replace the motor.
38 – Control panel messages
EN
62.x Printer error (printer memory) x = Location of problem
1
0 = Internal memory 1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3 •
Reseat or replace the specified DIMM.
64.x Printer error (scan buffer) •
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
If the message persists, replace the formatter.
66 Error (external paper-handling device) First x = Device number in chain Second x = Device type (3 types): 1 = Input 2 = Output 3 = Stapler/stacker unit yy = Device-specific error •
Press [Go] to clear the message.
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Check all of the cables.
•
Reseat the external paper-handling device.
EN
Chapter 1 – 39
66.11 Input device failure •
Verify that the lifting plate lifts up freely by hand.
•
Verify that the paper size plates are installed correctly and are not bent.
•
Check the pickup roller for proper installation.
•
Check the pickup assembly and replace if necessary.
•
Replace Tray 4.
66.xx.yy Input device failure alternates with Check cables and cycle power •
Check for an error in an external paper-handling device. 1st x = Device number in chain 2nd x = Device type (3 types): 1 = Input 2 = Output 3 = Stapler/stacker unit yy = Device specific error
•
Press [Go] to clear the message.
•
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
•
Reseat the external paper-handling device.
68 NVRAM full check settings •
Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to determine which values have changed.
•
Hold down [Cancel Job] while turning the printer on.
40 – Control panel messages
EN
69.x Printer error x = Description
1
0 = The duplex mechanism has failed. 1 = The duplex side adjust has failed. •
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
•
Reseat the duplexer.
79.xxxx Error (printing) The printer detected an error. The numbers (xxxx) indicate the specific type of error. •
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Try printing a job from a different software application. If the job prints, go back to the first application and try printing a different file. (If the message appears only with a certain software application or print job, the customer should contact the software vendor for assistance.)
If the message persists, try the following procedures: •
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Reseat or replace the interface cable and power cycle the printer.
•
Remove the DIMMs one at a time and power cycle the printer.
•
If possible, use the parallel interface.
•
With the EIO cards removed from the printer, perform a cold reset.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
EN
Chapter 1 – 41
8x.yyyy critical error (EIO accessory) •
The EIO accessory in slot x has encountered a critical error as specified by yyyy. x = Description 1 = EIO slot 1 -The printer detected an error with the EIO card. 2 = EIO slot 2 -The printer detected an error with the EIO card. 6 = EIO slot 1 -The EIO card detected an error. The EIO card may be defective. 7 = EIO slot 2 -The EIO card detected an error. The EIO card may be defective.
•
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
•
Reseat or replace the EIO board.
42 – Control panel messages
EN
2
Service mode
Overview Service mode allows service personnel to verify and manipulate internal printer settings and to access the diagnostic feature. Service mode should be used only by authorized service personnel.
EN
Chapter 2 – 43
Service mode tasks You can perform the following tasks while in Service mode. •
Verify the page count.
•
Set the page count.
•
Set the maintenance count.
•
Verify and set the serial number.
•
Set the cold reset default. This sets the factory default paper size to either Letter or A4.
•
Turn the diagnostic function on or off (for software developer’s use only).
•
Clear the event log.
•
Use the extended Service mode.
•
Reset softswitches.
•
Perform a firmware download.
•
Recalibrate the document scanner.
•
Set the interval at which the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message appears on the control panel.
44 – Service mode
EN
Accessing Service mode 4000, 5000, and 8000 series only Use the following procedure to access Service mode. 1 Turn the printer off. 2 Press [Select] and [Cancel Job] simultaneously while turning the printer on. Hold the keys down until all lights are illuminated. (If the control panel reads INITIALIZING, the keys were released too soon.) 3 Press the right side of the [Menu] key, and then press [Select]. SERVICE MODE appears. 4 To exit Service mode, press [Go].
Accessing Service mode 3100 only Use the following procedure to access Service mode. 1 Press [Backspace#**] to access the extended service menu. 2 Use the [<] and [>] keys to select the choices given in the extended service menu (see the Extended service menu tree, page 52) and press [Enter/Menu]. See the display for further instructions. Notes about some of the menu choices are provided in the Extended service menu tree on page 52.
EN
Chapter 2 – 45
2
Setting the page count 4000, 5000, and 8000 series only The page count is stored in the printer’s non-volatile memory. If it is necessary to replace the formatter PCA, the page count should be set to the current value to reflect the age of the print engine. Use the following procedure to set the page count. 1 Before replacing the formatter PCA, print a Configuration Page to verify the current page count and serial number of the printer, if possible. Use the information on the Configuration Page to reset the page count and serial number for the new formatter PCA.
Note Press the right side of the [Menu] and [Item] buttons to increase the value (+). Press the left side of the [Menu] and [Item] buttons to decrease the value (-). 2 Press [Menu+] to display SERVICE MENU. 3 Press [Item+] to advance to the PAGES=XXXXXX display. XXXXXX represents the page count currently stored in the non-volatile memory. The underlined character denotes the position of the cursor. 4 Press [Select] to advance the cursor one digit to the right. If the last digit is currently selected, the cursor will move to the first digit when you press the [Select] key. 5 Press [Value+/-] to scroll the digit until the correct value is displayed for the underlined digit. (Pressing [Value+] when 9 is the value of the currently selected digit changes the value of the digit to 0). 6 Press [Select] to enter numeric changes to the current digit and to advance the cursor one digit to the right. 7 Press [Go] to exit the Service Menu.
46 – Service mode
EN
Setting the maintenance count 4000 and 5000 series only The maintenance count should be reset only after a maintenance kit has been installed. Resetting the maintenance count resets the maintenance counter so that the message PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE displays after another 150,000 (5000 series), 200,000 (4000 series), or 350,000 (8000 series) pages are printed.
2
Note MAINTENANCE COUNT in the Service mode Menu sets the page count interval for when the next printer service is due for the printer. The maintenance count is set initially at the factory. Editing this number is similar to editing the PAGES item. 1 Hold down the [Item-] and [Value-] keys. 2 Turn the printer on. 3 Wait until RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT displays and then release both keys.
EN
Chapter 2 – 47
Setting the serial number 4000 and 5000 series only Re-enter the serial number whenever you replace a formatter. 1 Press [Menu] to display the SERVICE MENU. 2 Press [Item+] three times. SERIAL NUMBER=XXXXXX displays. XXXXXX represents the page count currently stored in the printer’s nonvolatile memory. The underlined character denotes the position of the cursor. 3 Press [Select] to advance the cursor one digit to the right. If the last digit is currently selected, the cursor wraps around the first digit when you press the [Select] key. 4 Press [Value+/-] to scroll the digit until the correct value is displayed for the underlined digit. (Pressing [Value+] when 9 is the value of the currently selected digit will change the value of the digit to 0). 5 Press [Select] to enter numeric changes to the current digit and to advance the cursor one digit to the right. 6 Press [Go] to exit the Service Menu.
48 – Service mode
EN
Setting the page count, maintenance count, and serial number 8000 series only The page count, maintenance count, and printer serial numbers are stored in non-volatile memory. PAGECOUNT is the total number of images printed by the printer; MAINTCOUNT is the page count when the next preventive maintenance should be performed (every 350,000 images); and S.N. is the printer serial number (also located on the printer back cover). If it is necessary to replace the formatter PCA, these numbers should be set to the current values to accurately reflect the age of the print engine. The printer service manual provides the procedure for setting these values. Before removing the old formatter PCA, print a configuration page to verify the current values, if possible.
Note If it is not possible to print a configuration page, try to verify the values before replacing the formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 5, below.
After verifying the page count, maintenance count, and printer serial number from the old formatter PCA, replace it with the new PCA. 1 Enter Service mode. See “Service mode” in the printer service manual for instructions. 2 When SERVICE MODE is displayed, press [Menu] to access the Service Menu. 3 Press [Items] to display Pages = Maintenance count = Maintenance Interval = Serial Number =. 4 Enter the appropriate values for each item. 5 Press [Go] to exit Service mode.
EN
Chapter 2 – 49
2
Setting the default paper size used in a cold reset 4000, 5000, and 8000 series only Cold reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all defaults back to the factory setting. The default paper size is stored in NVRAM. Whenever the printer is cold reset, the default paper size is restored. The default paper size is set to the factory setting. Possible values are COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER and COLD RESET PAPER=A4. When replacing the formatter in countries that use the A4 paper size (in place of the letter- size paper), set the cold reset paper size to A4. To customize the cold reset paper size: 1 Enter the Service mode. See “Service Mode in the printer service manual for instructions. 2 Press [Menu] to display SERVICE MENU. 3 Press [Item+] until COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER* or A4 displays. 4 Press [Item+] to toggle between LETTER and A4. 5 Press [Select] to activate your choice. 6 Press [Go] to exit the Service Menu.
50 – Service mode
EN
Diagnostics 4000, 5000, and 8000 series only The diagnostics menu item enables or disables the use of the firmware diagnostic features. These features are accessible when DIAGNOSTICS=ON displays. To access the diagnostic features, verify that the printer is in the READY state and press [Select].
Note
2
This procedure is for software developers only.
Clear event log Select this item to clear the internal event log.
Extended service menu 3100 only Use the extended service menu to run various self-tests and to change softswitch settings, such as the country code softswitch setting. The following page shows the layout of the extended service menu settings in a hierarchical diagram.
EN
Chapter 2 – 51
Extended service menu tree Reports Help T.30 protocol trace SRAM dump Scanner plots Log debug report Task stacks Translations Printer fonts
Help prints a menu report for the product.
Softswitches Clear memory Check documents Edit SRAM SRAM dump Firmware version
See “To change the country code softswitch” on the following pages.
Memory/softswitch
Control panel Keypad test LCD test Control panel test Sensor states Speaker test All LCD characters
Various tests under Control panel can assist in troubleshooting the product.
Scanner Scanner plots Scanner LED
ADF feed test
ADF motor test Do TWAIN scan White ref summary
Scanner LED is the contact image sensor light bar test. ADF feed test runs the document feeder pickup rollers once. ADF motor test runs the document scanner motor.
Self test
Modem/PTT
52 – Service mode
Burn-in prints a report Burn-in Individual diagnostics after running the following tests: System reset Program test, Configuration test #1, Modem tone Fax memory test #2, Modem modulation Modem test #2, Scanner Modem type test #1, Scanner LED.
EN
Self-test in extended service mode 3100 only If you perform a self-test from the extended Service Menu, the printed report will also show the firmware revision number and details.
Note Print the internal reports before performing extended service mode tests. The reports contain a record of all settings and can assist you in restoring the product to its settings. The table below lists the tests that are performed during a self-test and the actions to take when tests fail. Extended service mode self-test failures Test
If the test fails, take these actions:
Configuration test #1 Replace the formatter. Fax memory test #1 Program test #1
1 Cycle power by unplugging the power cord
Configuration test #2
from the power source, waiting 10 seconds, and replugging the power cord.
Configuration test #3
2 If the test fails again, clear all memory (see
Configuration test #4
3 If the test fails again, replace the formatter.
the extended service menu tree, page 52).
Fax memory test #2 Fax memory test #3 Fax memory test #4 Fax memory test #5 Modem 1 test #1 Modem 1 test #2 Modem 1 test #3
EN
Chapter 2 – 53
2
Extended service mode self-test failures Test Modem 1 dial tone detect
If the test fails, take these actions: 1 Make sure that the telephone cable is plugged into the correct connector on the product and that the telephone line is operational (use a telephone to test the line).
2 If the test fails again, check the configuration settings in the control panel.
3 If the test fails again, replace the LIU. Scanner test #1
This test fails under normal conditions if the document scanner is busy. If the document scanner is not busy:
1 Cycle power by unplugging the power cord from the power source, waiting 10 seconds, and replugging in the power cord.
2 If the test fails again, clear all memory (see the extended service menu tree).
3 If the test fails again, replace the formatter.
54 – Service mode
EN
Other tests in extended service mode 3100 only The following charts shows tests that can be performed in extended service mode and provides a brief explanation of each test: Extended service mode tests Test
Explanation
Keypad test
Tests that all keys are functioning (by pressing the keys in sequence)
LCD test
Tests the control panel display
Control panel test
Tests the control panel lights
Sensor states
Shows current detector activation levels. Detector 1 and detector 2 are paper-size detectors. The control panel display shows the percentage of time each detector is activated
All LCD characters
Scrolls through the full list of control panel display characters
Scanner plots
Tests and recalibrates the document scanner
Scanner LED
After selecting this menu item, lift the document release door and verify that all of the LEDs in the contact image sensor are lit.
ADF feed test
Runs the document scanner pickup rollers once
ADF motor test
Runs the document scanner motor
Individual diagnostics
Run individual tests from the self-test sequence (see the extended service mode self-test failures table).
Modem tone
Generates tones with various frequencies from 300 Hz to 2425 Hz
Modem modulation
Generates various fax identification signals
EN
Chapter 2 – 55
2
Reports in extended service mode 3100 only The following chart shows reports that can be printed from extended service mode and provides a brief explanation of each report. Extended service mode reports Report
Explanation
T.30 protocol trace
Prints a report of the G3 protocol transmissions and receptions
SRAM dump
Prints SRAM address values in an address range you select
Scanner plots
Prints the calibration page
Log debug report
Prints detailed fax and memory address information. Fax information includes job number, start time used, fax ID, transmission type, pages, communication mode, and status.
Task stacks
Prints address locations of various tasks
Translations
Prints text strings used in the display, beginning with the number you select. These text strings are printed in the language currently in use by the product. Compare the numbers in this report to the numbers in an English report to translate non-English messages on the display.
Printer fonts
Prints all characters of fonts available in memory
Firmware version (under “memory/ softswitch”)
Shows firmware revision information on the control panel display
White reference summary (under “scanner”)
Displays average, minimum, and maximum white reference values
56 – Service mode
EN
Clear memory in extended service mode 3100 only
CAUTION Clearing memory clears all parameters, which can render the product illegal or inoperable. Print the internal reports before clearing memory in extended service mode. The reports contain a record of all settings and can assist you in restoring the product to its settings. To perform a system reset, use extended service mode to choose Memory/softswitch, and then choose Clear memory. Use the [<] and [>] keys to select the memory you want to clear: •
Documents (and log) deletes all documents stored in memory and all log information.
•
Phonebook deletes all numbers stored in the phonebook.
•
Configuration resets all menu settings printed in the configuration report to their defaults.
•
Softswitches resets all softswitches to their defaults.
•
Counters resets all page counts except the total number of pages printed. These page counts are printed at the end of the configuration report.
•
Everything deletes and resets all of the above. Information retained includes white reference curve, total page count, and serial number.
EN
Chapter 2 – 57
2
Softswitches 3100 only
Note Reset the country code softswitch whenever the formatter board is replaced or otherwise removed from the product, or when softswitches are reset to defaults. Extended service mode allows you to change softswitches on the 3100 product. A softswitch is a set of eight bits. See the software service manual for a complete list of softswitches.
To change the country code softswitch 1 Press [Backspace], [#], [*], and [*], in sequence, to access the extended service menu. 2 Press [<]or [>] until Memory/Softswitches appears below Service on the control panel. 3 Press [Enter/Menu]. 4 If Softswitches does not appear below Memory/Softswitches on the control panel, press [<] or [>] until it appears. 5 Press [Enter/Menu]. 6 Use the keypad to enter 101 (the “country code” softswitch). 7 Press [Enter/Menu]. 8 Use the keypad to enter the sequence that corresponds to the country in which the product is used. (See the list on the following page.)
58 – Service mode
EN
Country code softswitch sequences Australia Denmark Finland France Germany Ireland Netherlands Norway Sweden United Kingdom United States Canada
00001011 (0B hex) 00001100 (0C hex) 00001000 (08 hex) 00000111 (07 hex) 00000110 (06 hex) 00000010 (02 hex) 00001101 (0D hex) 00000101 (05 hex) 00000100 (04 hex) 00000001 (01 hex) 00000000 (00 hex) 00101001 (29 hex)
2
9 Press [Enter/Menu] to complete the softswitch change. 10 Press [Stop/Clear]. The product will exit extended service mode within a few minutes.
Firmware download 3100 only Newer versions of the firmware for the HP LaserJet 3100 product can be downloaded to the product.
To perform a firmware download 1 Restart the computer in MS-DOS® mode (do not use an MS-DOS window). 2 Press down and hold [Stop/Clear] while performing step 3. 3 Cycle power by unplugging the power cord from the power source, and then replugging in the power cord. 4 Type the following, substituting the current version of the firmware for XXX: Copy /b leonXXX.rom lpt1:
EN
Chapter 2 – 59
Recalibrating the document scanner 3100 only Recalibrate the document scanner if you notice that copies, items scanned to the computer, or faxes you send have black or white lines running through them.
To recalibrate the document scanner 1 Clean the HP LaserJet 3100 product before recalibrating it. (See “Cleaning the HP LaserJet 3100 product” in the product service manual.) 2 On the control panel, press [Enter/Menu]. 3 Press [<] once to display Service and press [Enter/Menu]. 4 Use the [<] and [>] keys to select Scan Correction and press [Enter/Menu].
5 Insert a blank, bright white piece of letter-sized paper into the document feeder tray. The HP LaserJet 3100 product pulls the piece of paper through and then prints a recalibration test page. Discard this page. The recalibration procedure is complete.
60 – Service mode
EN
3
Power supply
Overview This chapter details the distribution of AC and DC power.
EN
Chapter 3 – 61
Distribution of AC and DC power for the LaserJet 4000 series AC power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit in the engine controller board when the power switch (SW 101) is turned on. The low-voltage power supply circuit supplies +24 V DC and +3.3 V DC to the printer. DC power drives the following items: +24 VDC •
main motor
•
scanner motor
•
fan
•
high-voltage power supply
+3.3 VDC •
sensors
•
ICs on the engine controller board
•
EIO accessories
62 – Power supply
EN
3 Low-voltage power supply circuit (4000 series)
EN
Chapter 3 – 63
Distribution of AC and DC power for the LaserJet 5000 series The AC line voltage for the LaserJet 5000 printer is applied through the main switch (SW 101) and supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit through the fuse (FU1). The low-voltage power supply divides the AC voltage to +24 VDC, +5 VDC and +3.4 VDC and supplies them to the DC controller PCA. This circuit generates a zero-cross signal (ZEROX) and supplies it to the DC controller PCA. DC power is supplied as follows: +3.4 VDC •
ICs on the DC controller PCA and the BD PCA
+5 VDC •
laser driver PCA
•
sensors
+24 VDC •
high-voltage power supply PCA to drive the main motor
•
exhaust fan
•
scanner motor
•
clutches
•
solenoids
64 – Power supply
EN
3
Low-voltage power supply circuit (5000 series)
EN
Chapter 3 – 65
Distribution of AC and DC power for the HP LaserJet 3100 The AC, DC, and high-voltage power supply circuits are all contained within the ECU. The AC power circuitry supplies AC voltage whenever the power cord is connected to the AC power source. AC voltage is distributed to the DC power supply circuitry and to the AC driver circuitry. The AC driver circuitry controls AC voltage to the heating element in the fusing assembly. The DC power distribution circuitry distributes +5 V DC and +12 V DC as follows: +5 V DC •
formatter
•
photosensors
•
DC controller circuitry
•
laser/beam detect circuitry
+12 V DC •
motor
•
scanner motor
•
solenoid
+12VA DC •
high-voltage power supply
66 – Power supply
EN
Distribution of AC and DC power for the HP LaserJet 8000 series The AC and DC power supply circuits are contained in the low-voltage power supply (LVPS). The high voltages required for image formation are generated by the high-voltage power supply (HVPS). The lowvoltage power supply and distribution system are illustrated below.
3
Low-voltage power supply circuit (8000 series)
EN
Chapter 3 – 67
Protection Systems Problems on the load side, such as short-circuits, can cause an excessive flow of current from the DC power supplies or can generate abnormal voltage. When this happens, the excess-current and excessvoltage protection systems automatically shut off output voltage to protect the power supplies. If the protection systems are activated and the power supply circuit does not output DC voltage, turn the printer off, correct the problem in the faulty load, and then turn the printer on again.
68 – Power supply
EN
4
Input/Output (I/O)
Overview This chapter provides information on cabling and the printer interface.
EN
Chapter 4 – 69
Bidirectional parallel interface The formatter PCA receives incoming data through its bidirectional interface (IEEE 1284). The bidirectional parallel interface (IEEE-1284 compliant) is compatible with Centronics parallel interfaces. To take advantage of its enhanced capabilities, such as bidirectional communication, the following must be provided: •
Software application support for these features.
•
An IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable with the correct pin configuration (see Table 4-1).
4000, 5000, and 8000 only The user may configure the HIGH SPEED item in the Control Panel menu. The default setting, YES, allows the I/O to run at the higher speeds supported by most newer computers. When set to NO, the parallel interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible for older computers. The user may also configure the ADVANCED FUNCTIONS item. The default setting, ON, allows for two-way parallel communications. The OFF mode disables this advanced functionality.
70 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
Pin configurations Signal Name
Printer Pin #
nSTROBE DATA 1
1 2
Parallel Port Pin # 1 2
DATA 2
3
3
DATA 3
4
4
DATA 4 DATA 5
5 6
5 6
DATA 6 DATA 7
7 8
7 8
DATA 8 nACKNLG
9 10
9 10
BUSY CALL (PE)
11 12
11 12
SELECT nAUTOFd
13 14
13 14
On VDC (GND)
19 THRU 30
18 THRU 25
nFAULT
32
15
nSelIn
36
17
EN
4
Chapter 4 – 71
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cables HP helped develop the IEEE-1284 standard and is one of the first companies to introduce products that are compliant with it. HP offers four IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cables. Each is described below. Part number
Length
Connector type
C2950A
2 meters (7 feet)
Host A to printer B (large) connector
C2951A
3 meters (10 feet)
Host A to printer B (large) connector
C2945A
2 meters (7 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
C2946A
3 meters (10 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
C2947A
10 meters (33 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
Maximum I/O Cable Lengths Serial RS-232C RS-422A Parallel (non-IEEE-1284)
15 meters (50 feet) 610 meters (2000 feet)
Parallel (IEEE-1284) with “B” type connector Parallel (IEEE-1284) with “C” type connector
3 meters (10 feet)
72 – Input/Output (I/O)
3 meters (10 feet)
10 meters (33 feet)
EN
Attaching the printer cables The printer’s parallel port can have one or both of the following connectors: B-type parallel (large) C-type parallel (small)
B-type
C-type
Printer interface connections
RS-232-C/RS-422-A serial interface For this information, see the wiring diagram for common serial input/output cables in the printer service manual.
EN
Chapter 4 – 73
4
Configuring the computer interface To configure the computer interface, see the HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference Service Guide, Volume I.
74 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
LocalTalk I/O* The printer implements AppleTalk networking protocol through LocalTalk hardware. The LocalTalk network cable (HP part number 92215N) is connected through the EIO card.
Expanded I/O* The optional expanded I/O card can be installed in the slots provided on the Formatter PCA. The expanded I/O card provides automatic I/O switching between multiple computers or networks connected to the printer. The network version printers include the HP JetDirect Multi-protocol Network Card with Ethernet/10Base-T and 10Base-2, and LocalTalk.
Flash* Flash is provided in optional 2 and 4 megabyte (MB) flash memory DIMMs for storage of forms, fonts, and signatures.
4
Disk* The optional EIO-based hard disk is used for creating multiple original prints (mopies) and for storing forms, fonts, and signatures. *This feature does not apply to the HP LaserJet 3100.
EN
Chapter 4 – 75
76 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
5
Media specifications
Overview Use media that meet the specifications listed on the following pages. By doing so, you will minimize the incidents of paper jams, prevent premature wear to the printer, and reduce repair costs. Hewlett-Packard recommends testing print media before buying it in large quantities.
Note For complete paper specifications for all HP LaserJet printers, see the HP LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide.
EN
Chapter 5 – 77
Paper sizes Metric System Size
Metric Dimensions
U.S. Dimensions
A0
841 x 1189 mm
33.1 x 46.8 in
A3
297 x 420 mm
11.7 x 16.5 in
A4
210 x 297 mm
8.3 x 11.7 in
A5
148 x 210 mm
5.8 x 8.3. in
B4 (ISO)
250 x 353 mm
9.8 x 13.9 in
B5 (ISO)
176 x 250 mm
6.9 x 9.8 in
Imperial (U.S.) System Size
U.S. Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Ledger
11 x 17 in
279 x 432 mm
Legal
8.5 x 14 in
216 x 356 mm
Letter
8.5 x 11 in
216 x 279 mm
Executive
7.3 x 10.5 in
191 x 267 mm
Custom
5.8 x 8.2 in to 8.5 x 14 in
149 x 210 mm to 216 x 356 mm
JIS B4**
10.1 x 14.3 in
257 x 364 mm
JIS B5**
7.2 x 10 in
182 x 257 mm
J Postcard*
3.9 x 5.8 in
100 x 148 mm
J Double Postcard*
5.8 x 7.9 in
148 x 200 mm
* J - Japanese ** JIS Japanese Industry Standard
78 – Media specifications
EN
Paper specifications Category
Specifications
Acid content
5.5 pH to 8.0 pH
Basis weight: 4000 series Tray 1 4000/4000 N Tray 2 4000 T/4000 TN Tray 2 and Tray 3 4000 series optional 500-sheet tray 4000 series Duplexer 5000 series: Tray 1 Tray 2 or optional 250-sheet Tray Optional 500-sheet Tray Duplexer 3100: Paper input bin Single-sheet input slot Document feeder tray
8000 series: Standard output bin Left output bin Optional 2000-sheet input tray Duplexer
60 to 199 g/m2 (16 to 53 lbs) 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) (up to 42 lbs using the front output slot) 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) (up to 42 lbs using the front output slot) 44 to 105 g/m2 (12 to 28 lbs) (up to 67 lbs using the special media lever)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
Optional envelope feeder: 4000 series 8000 series
75 to 105 g/m2 (20 to 28 lbs) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lbs)
Caliper
3.0 to 7.0 mils (0.094-0.18 mm)
5
Curl in ream
Flat within 5 mm (0.2 in)
Condition of cut edge
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 205°C (400°F) for 0.1 second
Grain
Long grain
Moisture content
4% to 6% by weight
Smoothness
100-250 Sheffield
EN
Chapter 5 – 79
Paper weight equivalences Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight, locate the bond weight (in row 3, fourth column) and scan across the row to the cover weight (in the sixth column). The equivalent is 28 lb.
Note Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade. Metric wt (g/m2) U.S. weights (lb) or thickness (mm) Europe
Japan
Postcard* Bond thickness Wt
Text book Wt
Cover Bristol Index Wt Wt Wt
Tag Wt
37
60
60
16
41
22
27
33
64
64
17
43
24
29
35
39
75
75
20
50
28
34
42
46
80
80
21
54
30
36
44
49
80
81
22
56
31
38
46
51
90
90
24
60
33
41
50
55
100
100
27
68
37
45
55
61
105
105
28
70
39
49
58
65
120
120
32
80
44
55
67
74
120
128
34
86
47
58
71
79
135
135
36
90
50
62
75
83
148
148
0.18
39
100
55
67
82
91
157
157
0.19
42
107
58
72
87
97
163
163
0.20
43
110
60
74
90
100
176
176
0.23
199
199
47
119
65
80
97
108
53
134
74
90
110
122
* U.S. postcard measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
80 – Media specifications
EN
Troubleshooting paper problems Paper problems can be difficult to detect. The following series of steps will help isolate paper-induced problems versus printer problems: •
Isolate a paper path.
•
Isolate a brand of paper.
•
Isolate a type of paper.
•
Evaluate paper-use practices.
•
Evaluate environmental conditions.
Here are some paper usage tips: •
Turn the paper over and print on the other side. Doing so often corrects excess paper curl.
•
Rotate the paper 180° (end-for-end) to feed a different leading edge. This can help correct multi-sheet feeding problems.
Papers to avoid •
NCR self-carbon (or “carbonless” paper)
•
paper that has been preprinted (such as letterhead) with ink that will not withstand fuser heat (205° C [400° F] for 0.1 second)
•
plastic-fiber paper
•
embossed paper
•
paper with cutouts or perforations
•
chemically treated paper
•
coated paper
•
synthetic paper
•
multi-part forms
•
odd-sized paper
5
If your printer is having trouble with paper jams, multi-feeds, or misfeeds, use HP-brand paper: HP 20 lb Multi-Purpose Paper, part number 9300-2092; HP 24 lb LaserJet Paper, part number 9300-2091.
EN
Chapter 5 – 81
General tips Paper curl Paper curl results from both the heating process used to bond the print image (toner) to the paper and from the path that the paper must negotiate through the printer. Take the following actions to help reduce paper curl: 1 Turn the paper over in the input tray. Some paper packages (reams) have an arrow indicating the preferred printing side. Experiment to determine which orientation yields the least curl. 2 Try a different output paper path (if available for your printer). Using the “face-up” output path may yield more acceptable results than the standard “face-down” output bin. 3 Protect the paper from adverse environmental conditions prior to use. Paper designed for laser printing has an initial moisture content of 4-6 percent which is maintained as long as it is stored properly. Once the paper has been removed from its packaging it will dry out or absorb additional moisture, depending on the environment. Excess moisture in the paper will increase the amount of curl. 4 Try a different type or brand of paper. Not all paper is designed for laser printing. Much of the paper curl that is induced by the laser printer fusing process will tend to relax within the first 24 hours following printing. However, the curl on the leading edge of the page may remain longer because the leading edge tends to remain in contact with the fusing roller for longer periods.
82 – Media specifications
EN
Envelope specifications Category
Specifications
Basis weight
Should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 lb)
Caliper
3.3 to 5.5 mils (0.084 to 0.14 mm) single layer thickness
Curl
Less than 6 mm (0.25 in) curl across entire surface
Finishing
Accurate, sharply creased folds with no more than two thicknesses of paper at the leading edge
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 205° C (400° F) for 0.1 second
Moisture content
4% to 6% by weight
Paper
Must meet all the normal paper specifications
Smoothness
100 to 250 Sheffield
Envelope sizes Imperial (U.S.) system Size
U.S. Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Tray 1: Minimum Maximum
3 x 5 in 8.5 x 14 in
76 x 127 mm 216 x 356 mm
Optional envelope feeder: Minimum 3.5 x 6.3 in Maximum 7 x 10 in
90 x 160 mm 178 x 254 mm
EN
Chapter 5 – 83
5
Envelopes to avoid Do not use the following envelopes: •
with clasps, snaps, or tie strings
•
with transparent windows, holes, perforations, or cutouts
•
having an open flap with adhesive exposed
•
having paper, inks, adhesives, or materials that discolor, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when exposed to 205° C (400° F)
•
having extremely smooth, shiny, rough, textured, or deeply embossed surfaces
•
damaged, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped
•
constructed with encapsulating adhesives that do not require moistening, but rely instead on pressure to seal them
Preventing printer malfunctions caused by envelopes When you are printing on envelopes, use these preventive measures to avoid printer malfunctions. •
Carefully feed the envelopes into the printer.
•
Be aware of the envelope’s construction.
84 – Media specifications
EN
Envelope feeding Follow these preventive measures when feeding envelopes: •
Envelopes can be manually fed through the printer or they can be fed automatically through an envelope tray or feeder.
•
Closely inspect the leading edge of the envelopes before feeding them into the printer. Ensure that the leading edge is flat. Watch for envelope curl. Flatten the leading edge of the envelope before printing.
•
Be patient; in manual feed mode the printer displays a message when it is ready to accept the next envelope. Wait for this message to appear before inserting the next envelope.
•
Do not allow a large quantity of envelopes to accumulate in the output bin.
•
On most printers, use the rear (or front) output bin (if available) when printing envelopes. Do not use the top (face-down) output bin.
Envelope construction •
The corner folds need to be well-creased, with no more than two thicknesses of paper.
•
The envelopes must lay flat.
•
The paper grain should be diagonal to the direction of the feed.
•
Adhesives must meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
•
Basis weight must not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 pounds).
•
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, tie strings, or windows.
•
Do not use envelopes made of synthetic materials.
EN
Chapter 5 – 85
5
Label specifications Category
Specifications
Adhesive
Must not be on any external surfaces of the label before, during, or after printing. Label construction and die-cutting must not allow labels to peel off during transport, printing, or fusing.
Caliper
Must not exceed 0.18 mm (0.007 in)
Curl
In ream: flat within 13 mm (0.5 in)
Finishing precision
Cut sheet within 0.79 mm (0.031 in) of nominal and 0.20° square
Fusing compatibility
All adhesions, carrier sheets, top sheets, and other materials used in label construction must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 205° C (400° F) for 0.1 second.
Packaging
Use moisture-proof wrap to preserve properties.
86 – Media specifications
EN
Preventing printer malfunctions caused by adhesive labels As with envelopes, prevention is the best way to avoid printer malfunctions caused by adhesive labels. To prevent paper jams and feed problems, labels must meet the following requirements: •
Be cut long grain (as opposed to short grain).
•
Totally cover the carrier sheet (no spaces between labels, no removed labels).
•
Contain no excessive glue. (The adhesive should be acrylic-based emulsion and should not come into direct contact with the printer.)
•
Meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
•
Meet HP specifications for caliper.
•
Have a carrier sheet that is not too smooth.
•
Use the flat paper path (manual feed slot and rear, or front, face-up delivery door), which is the recommended printing method.
5
EN
Chapter 5 – 87
Transparency specifications Category
Specifications
Caliper
3.9 to 4.3 mils (0.100 to 0.110 mm)
Cutting angle
90° ± 0.2°
Finishing precision Cut sheet to within 0.8 mm (0.03 in) of nominal and ± 0.2° of square Fusing compatibility
Overhead transparency material must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset material, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 205° C (400° F) for 0.1 second.
Preventing printer malfunctions caused by transparencies Use these preventive measures to avoid printer malfunctions caused by transparencies: •
Use the straightest paper path to avoid curling and other problems.
•
Use transparencies with the correct resistivity.
•
Use transparencies that meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
•
Remove each printed sheet from the tray and place it on a flat surface before printing the next sheet.
88 – Media specifications
EN
HP paper training video HP has developed a training video focusing on how paper is manufactured and how the manufacturing process relates to the use of paper in HP LaserJet printers. Part numbers are shown below. Part Number
5961-0711
The Paper Video explains the manufacturing process.
5961-0712
Version (VHS Format) National Standard Television Committee (NTSC) version (U.S.) PAL version (Europe, Asia)
5
EN
Chapter 5 – 89
90 – Media specifications
EN
6
Toner cartridge information
Overview This chapter provides information on toner cartridges and their use. Hewlett-Packard recommends using HP toner cartridges, which are designed specifically to enhance the output from the HP LaserJet family of printers.
EN
Chapter 6 – 91
Cartridge weights and page counts Page count at 5% coverage
HP LaserJet
Product Cartridge Full weight
Empty weight
4000 series
C4127A
EP-A
1295 gm (45.7 oz)
1020 gm (36 oz)
6,000
4000 series
C4127X
EP-X
1445 gm (51 oz)
1000 gm (35.3 oz)
10,000
5000 series
C4129X
1880 gm (66.3 oz)
1450 gm (51.1 oz)
10,000
3100
C3906A
730 gm (26.1 oz)
640 gm (22.7 oz)
2,500
8000 series
C3909A
3000 gm (106 oz)
2200 gm (80.5 oz)
15,000
Mopier 240 C3909S
3000 gm (106 oz)
2200 gm (80.5 oz)
15,000
92 – Toner cartridge information
EN
Potential toner cartridge issues Banding When printing with a laser printer, the toner is applied across the page in horizontal strips. The page is moved through the printer and toner is continually applied. When printing text or black image pages, a large amount of toner is deposited on the page. As the amount of toner deposited on the page decreases, slight speed variations become more apparent. As the resolution (dots per inch) and the speed (pages per minute) increase, a variation in pattern intensity may appear on the page as lines or bands. The bands are more visible in certain grayscale patterns. High speed printers that are capable of printing high resolution grayscale patterns are more likely to display the pattern variations. Changing the grayscale pattern or reducing the resolution may significantly reduce the amount of banding that occurs.
Character voids Small gaps or voids may appear in some of the characters when printing on media other than standard photocopier paper. These “character voids” occur because some print media does not accept the transfer of toner as well as others. To minimize the occurrence of character voids, avoid media with a rough finish. Use media that is within the Hewlett-Packard paper specifications listed in the user guide or the HP LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide. If the finish is too rough, the surface will consist of large inconsistencies. If the finish is too smooth, toner will not adhere well. Adjusting the print density may affect the severity of character voids.
6
EN
Chapter 6 – 93
Toner cracking When the paper is folded and the crease aligns with a line of text, it is possible with certain types of paper for the text to break along the line, giving the appearance of a white line through the text. Papers that do not meet the smoothness (100-250 Sheffield, 100-500 Bendtsen) or wax pick (>11 Dennison) are likely to exhibit this effect more than others. Toner in the HP LaserJet printers is composed of minute particles of pigmented plastic material (styrene) and iron oxide. When the toner is subjected to the fusing temperature, these individual iron-impregnated plastic particles become part of a larger plastic image on the page. When the printed page is subsequently folded, the plastic image must also give, in some fashion, to accommodate the fold. If the print image has been well-set into the paper, this resulting break in the plastic will not be apparent. However, if the toner is unable to adequately penetrate the paper fibers or if, in the process of folding the paper, the paper fibers behind the toner break away from the page itself, the result will be a “white line” through the image. There are several ways to minimize this effect: •
Ensure that the paper being used meets all of the specifications provided in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide; in particular the smoothness and wax pick.
•
A lighter density setting will ensure that the toner image will be composed of less plastic material, thus minimizing the resulting effect of trying to fold the toner image.
•
For the reasons listed earlier, a more narrow character-stroke width might also help.
•
Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) paper may fix toner cracking problems (see also the HP MICR User’s Guide).
In xerographic (laser) printing, using paper that has a laid finish often causes problems. The surface roughness of the paper is often responsible for the problems. Paper that is stiffer than xerographic paper also causes problems. Stiff papers do not fold well. When stiff paper is folded and a toner image is applied to the paper’s surface, the problems are even worse.
94 – Toner cartridge information
EN
Transfer of toner image After printing a document on an HP LaserJet printer, folding it, and sending it through the mail, you might observe that a portion of the print image was transferred to opposing surfaces of the folded document. The laser printing process uses a pigmented plastic powder (toner) to form a print image that is first transferred to a sheet of paper (or other print medium) and then melted (fused) onto the surface of the paper to form a permanent image. Though paper is usually thought of as being “soft,” it is actually quite abrasive. When the printed page is folded, movement under pressure between a paper surface and the toner image may cause the paper to abrade (scratch) the toner, causing a transfer of the toner material onto the opposing surface of the paper. This can be demonstrated by rubbing a print image against (or into) a clean sheet of paper. Some machinery, such as that used by the U.S. Postal Service to sort mail, can apply the necessary pressure and agitation to cause this toner image transfer phenomenon. To minimize this effect: •
Minimize the amount (or height) of toner used to produce the print image.
•
Use a paper that is less abrasive.
•
Ensure optimal fusing of the toner (print) image to the paper.
The amount of toner used to produce a print image is controlled by the print density dial, slide, or control panel settings in the HP LaserJet printers. The print density should be adjusted for a lighter image to reduce the amount (height) of toner prone to abrasive transfer. HP LaserJet printers have been designed for optimum results with xerographic (laser) bond papers, such as XEROX 4024 photocopy paper. The properties of this type of paper (for example, surface roughness, composition, moisture content) are such that the other causes of potential toner transfer are minimized. Photocopy papers are typically less abrasive than other types of paper (such as writing bond) and are also formulated to ensure optimal fusing of the toner image. Using other types of paper will generally yield less than optimal results in laser printers. For help in selecting paper suitable for use in the EN
Chapter 6 – 95
6
HP LaserJet printers, refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. This guide can be ordered by calling HP Parts Direct at 800-227-8164 in the U.S., or HP Distribution at 970-339-7009. Because of the way that laser printing is accomplished, currently there is no way to entirely eliminate the possibility of toner transfer. However, using these techniques should yield more satisfactory results and will often reduce the problem to imperceptible levels.
Gray background on envelopes Poor print quality is normally the result of using envelopes that are of the incorrect weight or finish. The paper used to construct the envelope may be embossed; or may be too heavy, too rough or too slick; or may be made in such a way that it is incompatible with the high temperatures encountered in toner fusing. The result is that the toner does not adhere well to the surface. Also, on heavier envelopes, a gray background may appear on the front (or print side) of the envelope. To reduce the gray background, the print density may need to be set to a darker setting.
96 – Toner cartridge information
EN
HP PLANET PARTNERS The U. S., Canada, Europe, and Australia now have HP toner cartridge recycling programs. The used toner cartridge should be placed in the wrapper and box that held the new cartridge and sent back for recycling. U.S.
A brochure explaining the recycling program in the U.S., part number 50911325EUS, can be ordered. The customer returns used toner cartridges via UPS at no cost to the customer using shipping labels included in the brochure. The toner cartridges can be shipped one at a time or in volume shipments. Some of the parts are recycled to make new cartridges. Other parts are melted for re-use as raw materials. If the customer has any questions, and to receive the free recycling brochure, refer them to the Customer Information Center at (800) 752-0900.
AUSTRALIA Australian customers can send their toner cartridges to their local HP dealer. If more than 30 cartridges a month are used, contact the local dealer for instructions on how to have the cartridges picked up directly from the customer's site. For further information, contact the dealer or local HP sales office.
EUROPE
The recycling program in Europe currently includes these countries: Germany, Switzerland, Austria, United Kingdom, the Netherlands, and Sweden. If more than 30 cartridges a month are used, contact the local dealer for instructions on how to have the cartridges picked up directly from the customer's site. For further information, contact the dealer or local HP sales office.
CANADA
Canada uses Federal Express for their recycling program. At least eight but no more than 40 Toner Cartridges can be shipped at one time. Shipments of less than eight cartridges are at the shipper's expense. Call Federal Express at (800) GoFedEx; (800) 463-3339 to arrange for free pickup of the bundled cartridges. Fill out a Federal Express Waybill or obtain a preprinted one from your dealer. In Alberta, B.C., Manitoba, NWT, Saskatchewan, and the Yukon, send the bundles to: Hewlett-Packard Toner Cartridge Recycling Program 6551 Westminister Hwy, Unit 160 Richmond, B.C. V7C 4V4 Acct. No.: 1246-1740-5 In the Atlantic provinces, Ontario, and Quebec send the bundles to: Hewlett-Packard Toner Cartridge Recycling Program 6600 Goreway Drive, Unit C Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1S6 Acct. No.: 1246-1740-5 For more information, call: Canada wide: (800) 387-3867 Dept. 129; Toronto: (800) 678-9430 Ext. 4981
Note Recycling information is included in the toner cartridge package.
For additional information about HP corporate-wide, environmental policies, practices, and awards, visit www.hp.com. EN
Chapter 6 – 97
6
Refill Statement Hewlett-Packard toner cartridges have been designed to maximize the reliability of the HP LaserJet printer by including all of the components that need frequent replacement or adjustment within the cartridge. While we recognize that all parts of this critical printer mechanism will not wear consistently, the HP toner cartridge has been designed to optimize the exceptional print quality that is synonymous with the HP LaserJet printer name. While Hewlett-Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled toner cartridges during the warranty period or under a maintenance contract, we also do not recommend their use for the following reasons: 1 The HP LaserJet toner cartridge is not designed to be refilled or remanufactured. 2 Hewlett-Packard has no control or process to ensure that a refilled toner cartridge will function at the high level of reliability of a new HP LaserJet toner cartridge. Hewlett-Packard also cannot predict what the long-term effect on the printer's reliability could be from using different toner formulations found in refilled cartridges. Because the HP LaserJet printer has the highest reliability reputation in the industry, we are concerned about any usage that might affect this reputation. 3 Hewlett-Packard has no control over the actual print quality of a refilled toner cartridge. The print quality of the HP LaserJet toner cartridge directly influences the customer's perception of the HP LaserJet printer itself. The high print quality of the HP LaserJet printer is one of the primary reasons for the success of the product and we are keenly interested in maintaining that image. The entire family of HP LaserJet printers is covered under a standard one-year warranty from the date of purchase. Hewlett-Packard offers optional maintenance contracts after the one-year warranty expires. The use of refilled toner cartridges alone does not affect either the warranty or any maintenance contract purchased from HP. However, if an HP LaserJet printer failure or damage is found to be directly attributed to the use of a refilled toner cartridge, the repair will not
98 – Toner cartridge information
EN
be covered under the warranty or by the maintenance contract. Rather, standard time and material charges will be applied to service the printer for that particular failure or damage. Hewlett-Packard is constantly striving to provide the highest quality printer products possible. The HP LaserJet printer family was designed for optimum output performance when the printing mechanism is periodically replaced with a new HP toner cartridge. The HP toner cartridge is designed specifically to enhance the output from the HP family of printers. We know that the highest quality print results will be obtained when new HP toner cartridges are used with HP LaserJet printers.
6
EN
Chapter 6 – 99
100 – Toner cartridge information
EN
7
Printer options and replaceable parts
Overview The following tables list the products, product numbers, product descriptions, and service part numbers for each printer. Parts can be ordered through HP Parts Direct Ordering at (800) 227-8164 (U.S. only). For additional product support, see the inside back cover of this guide.
EN
Chapter 7 – 101
Printer options and replaceable parts Product Memory
Fonts
Enhanced I/O Cards
Hard Disk
Product Product Description Number
Service Part Number
C4135A
4 MB EDO DIMM
C4135-67901
C4136A
8 MB EDO DIMM
C4136-67901
C4137A
16 MB EDO DIMM
C4137-67901
C4140A
4 MB SDRAM DIMM
C4140-67901
C4141A
8 MB SDRAM DIMM
C4141-67901
C4142A
16 MB SDRAM DIMM
C4142-67901
C4143A
32 MB SDRAM DIMM
C4143-67901
C3913A
64 MB SDRAM DIMM
C3913-67901
C4286A
2 MB Flash DIMM
N/A
C4287A
4 MB Flash DIMM
N/A
C4292A
Traditional Chinese Font DIMM (8 MB Asian ROM)
N/A
C4293A
Simplified Chinese Font DIMM (8 MB Asian ROM)
N/A
D4838A
Korean (8 MB Asian ROM)
N/A
J3110A
Ethernet RJ-45 only
N/A
J3111A
Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC, LocalTalk
J3111-61003
J3112A
Token Ring RJ-45 and DB-9
N/A
J3113A
10/100Base-TX networks
N/A
C2985A
Hard Disk
N/A
102 – Printer options and replaceable parts
EN
EN
4000
5000
8000
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
3100
Chapter 7 – 103
7
Product
Product Product Description Number
Service Part Number
Parallel Cables
C2950A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (2.0 m)
N/A
C2951A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (3.0 m)
N/A
C2945A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to C (2.0 m)
N/A
C2946A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to C (3.0 m)
N/A
C2947A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to C (10.0 m)
N/A
C2932A
9-9 pin serial cable (male/female)
N/A
C2933A
9-25 pin serial cable (male/female)
N/A
C2809A
25-9 pin serial adaptor (male/female)
N/A
92215S
Macintosh Computer Serial Cable
N/A
92215N
Macintosh Network Cable Kit
N/A
C4781A
2,000-sheet Input Tray and Paper N/A Feeder
C4124A
500-sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
C4125-67901
C4125A
500-Sheet Universal Replacement Tray
N/A
C3122A
Standard 500-sheet Tray
N/A
C4115A
500-sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
N/A
C4117
500-Sheet Replacement Tray
C4117-69001
Serial Cables
Trays
104 – Printer options and replaceable parts
EN
4000
5000
z
z
z
z
8000
3100
z z
z z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z z
z z z z z
EN
z
Chapter 7 – 105
7
Product
Product Product Description Number
Service Part Number
Trays, continued
C4780A
Two 500-sheet trays and Paper Feeder
N/A
C4114A
250-sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
N/A
C4126A
250-sheet Universal Replacement Tray
C4126-67901
C4116A
250-sheet Replacement Tray
C4116-69001
C4098A
Tray 2 (500-sheet Input Tray) or RG5-3951-000CN Tray 4 (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray)
C4099A
Tray 3 (500-sheet Input Tray) or RG5-3952-000CN Tray 5 (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray)
C4122A
Envelope Feeder
Envelope Feeder
C3765B
Envelope Feeder
Duplexer
C4123A
Duplex Printing Accessory
C4123-69001
C4113A
Duplex Printing Accessory
C4113-69001
C4782A
Duplex Printing Accessory
C4783A
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
C4785A
Multibin Mailbox
C4787A
5-bin Mailbox with stapler
Mailbox
Media
C4122-69001
HPM1120 HP Multi-purpose Paper
M1120
HPJ1124
J1124
HP LaserJet Paper
106 – Printer options and replaceable parts
EN
4000
5000
8000
3100
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
EN
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Chapter 7 – 107
7
Product
Product Product Description Number
Service Part Number
Toner Cartridges
C4127A
Toner Cartridge (6,000 pages)
N/A
C4127X
Toner Cartridge (10,000 pages)
N/A
C4129X
Toner Cartridge (10,000 pages)
N/A
C3906A
Toner Cartridge (2,500 pages)
N/A
C3909A
Toner Cartridge (15,000 pages)
N/A
C3909S
3 Toner Cartridges (15,000 pages) (Mopier 240)
N/A
C4789A
Connects a multibin mailbox to N/A the printer when the printer is on a printer stand.
Power Box
Upgrade Kit C4095A
LJ 5Si to LJ 8000 Upgrade Kit
108 – Printer options and replaceable parts
N/A
EN
4000
5000
8000
3100
z z z z z
z
z
EN
Chapter 7 – 109
7
Product
Product Description
Service Exchange Part Number Number
Maintenance Service Maintenance Kit with C4118-67902 110V fuser (4000 series) Kit
C4118-69001*
Service Maintenance Kit with 220V fuser (4000 series)
C4118-67903
C4118-69002*
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V fuser (5000 series)
C4110-67902
C4110-69006*
Service Maintenance Kit with 220V fuser (5000 series)
C4110-67903
C4110-69007*
Preventative Maintenance Kit C3971B with 110 V fuser (8000 series)
C3971-69002*
Preventative Maintenance Kit C3972B with 220 V fuser (8000 series)
C3972-69002*
*Requires exchange
110 – Printer options and replaceable parts
EN
4000
5000
8000
3100
z z z z z z
EN
Chapter 7 – 111
7
112 – Printer options and replaceable parts
EN
8
Printer parts
Overview This chapter provides the part numbers and descriptions of the most commonly used assemblies and subassemblies in the HP LaserJet printers. The shaded numbers in the tables refer to the location of the part in the printer, as shown in the corresponding illustrations.
Note See your printer service manual for a complete listing of hardware components.
EN
Chapter 8 – 113
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
Figure 8-1
Common Hardware
114 – Printer parts
EN
Common Hardware 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6
EN
Part Number
Product Description
XB1-2300-606CN XB1-2300-507CN XB1-2300-607CN 0515-1895 XB1-2301-407CN XB1-2400-606CN XB1-2400-809CN 0515-1912 XB1-1300-807CN FA9-1449-000CN XA9-0267-000CN XA9-0253-000CN XA9-0542-000CN XA9-0540-000CN XA9-0653-000CN XA9-0653-000CN XA9-0389-000CN XA9-0654-000CN XA9-0192-000CN XA9-0828-000CN RBI-5552-000CN RAI-7636-000CN RBI-5489-000CN XA9-0342-000CN XB4-7300-609CN XB6-7300-607CN XB4-7400-809CN XA9- 0870-000CN XB4-7401-009CN XB4-7401-007CN XB4-7401-209CN XA9-0773-000CN XA9-0916-000CN XA9-0253-000CN XA9-0584-000CN
M3 x 5mm M3 x 5mm BH3 x 6mm M3 x 8mm M4 x 14mm M4 x 6mm M4 x 8mm M4 x 8mm M3 x 8 mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 10mm M4 x 8mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 10mm M4 x 6mm M3 x 6mm M3 M3 M3 x 4mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 6mm M4 x 8mm M4 x 10mm M4 x 10mm M4 x 10mm M4 x 12mm M4 x 12mm M4 x 14mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 12mm
Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips (black) Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Loose Flat/Lock Washer Phillips Loose Flat/Lock Washer Phillips
Chapter 8 – 115
8
Part Number 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 10
FA9-1449-000CN XB1-2302-507CN XB6-7300-809CN XA9-0326-000CN XB6-7300-807CN XD2-1100-242CN XD2-1100-322CN XD2-1100-402CN XD2-1100-502CN XD2-1100-642CN XG9-0260-000CN XD2-2300-507CN XA9-0375-000CN XA9-0686-000CN XA9-0724-000CN XA9-0824-000CN XA9-0813-000CN
116 – Printer parts
Product Description M3 x 25mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 4mm M3 x 8mm 2.4mm 3.2mm 4.0mm 5.0mm 6.4mm 5.0mm 3m x 25 mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 8 mm M3 x 10mm M3 x 8mm
Star-washer trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Grip Ring (c-type) Loose Flat/Star Washer Phillips Hexhead Screw Hexhead Screw Hexhead Screw Hexhead Screw with washer
EN
Notes
8
EN
Chapter 8 – 117
Parts for the HP LaserJet 4000 series 3
4
5
2
1 6 13
7
12
8
9
11
118 – Printer parts
10
EN
HP LaserJet 4000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
Fusing Assembly
C4118-69003 (110V)** C4118-69004 (220V)**
2
Paper Delivery Assembly
RG5-2648-000CN
Paper Pick-up Drive Assembly
RG5-2690-000CN
Pick-up Roller
RB1-8865-000CN
Feed Separation Roller
RF5-2490-000CN
Drive Coupler
RB1-8877-000CN
3
Top Cover Assembly
RG5-2663-000CN
4
Laser Scanner Assembly
5
Tray 1 Pick-up Assembly
RG5-2655-000CN
Tray 1 Pick-up Roller
RG5-3718-000CN
Front Panel
RG5-2666-000CN C4110-69008**
6
Tray 1 Assembly
7
Formatter Assembly
C4118-69008**
8
Printer Drive Assembly
RG5-2653-000CN
RG5-2656-000CN
Release Rod
RB1-8756-000CN
Main Motor
RH7-1331-000CN
9
Registration Assembly
10
Paper Feed Assembly Clutch
RG5-2652-000CN RG5-2651-000CN RB1-8974-000CN
11
ECU (Engine Controller Board)
C4118-69006 (110V)** C4118-69007 (220V)**
12
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
RG5-2643-000CN
13
Paper Feed Belt
RB1-8668-000CN
Transfer Roller
RG5-4283-000CN
Delivery Drive Assembly
RG5-3721-000CN
**These parts require exchange
EN
Chapter 8 – 119
8
Parts for the HP LaserJet 5000 series 1 2
3
4
5
6
7
Major assembly locations (1 of 2)
120 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 5000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
Fusing Assembly
C4110-69002 (110V)** C4110-69003 (220V)**
2
Registration Assembly
RG5-3524-000CN
3
Paper Pick-up Assembly
RG5-3521-000CN
4
Paper Tray
C4116-69001 (250-sheet)** C4117-69001 (500-sheet)**
5
Upper Delivery Assembly
RG5-3542-000CN
6
Paper Feed Belt Assembly
Pick-up Roller
Delivery Roller
RB2-1984-000CN RG5-3526-000CN
Paper Feed Belt (Large)
RB2-1887-000CN
Paper Feed Belt (Small)
RB2-1888-000CN
Transfer Roller
7
RB2-1820-000CN
Paper Feed Roller Assembly
RG5-3579-000CN RG5-3522-000CN
**These parts require exchange
EN
Chapter 8 – 121
8
Parts for the HP LaserJet 5000 series 3 4
2
1
Major assembly locations (2 of 2)
122 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 5000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
RG5-3544-000CN
Pick-up Drive Assembly Spring
RS5-2434-000CN
2
Main Gear Assembly
3
DC Controller
C4110-69001**
4
Formatter
C3974-69001**
Laser Scanner Assembly
C4110-69008**
DC Power Supply
C4110-69004 (110V)** C4110-69005 (220V)**
Main Motor
Top Cover Front Panel Fan
RG5-3543-000CN RH7-1357-000CN
RB2-1748-000CN RG5-3604-000CN RH7-1354-000CN
Toner Cartridge Engagement Arm
RB2-1856-000CN
Separation Pad with Spring
RG5-3585-000CN
Paper-handling PCA
RG5-3560-000CN
MP Separation Pad
RF5-2400-000CN
**These parts require exchange
EN
Chapter 8 – 123
8
Parts for the HP LaserJet 3100 1 2 3 9 6
5
8 4 7
11 12
14 10 13
Major assembly locations
124 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 3100 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies Paper Pick-up Assembly 1
2
Pick-up Roller Assembly Clutch
RG5-3486-000CN RB1-7197-020CN
Separation Arm Assembly Input Sensor Assembly
RB1-7181-000CN RB1-7182-000CN
Solenoid Transfer Guide Assembly Transfer Roller
3 4
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14
RH7-5139-000CN RG5-3452-000CN RF5-1534-000CN
Delivery Assembly
RG5-3474-020CN
Separation Guide Assembly
RG5-3475-020CN
Lever Sensor Arm Fuser Exit Roller Assembly
5
Part numbers RG5-3484-000CN
Document Scanner Assembly
RB1-7293-000CN RF5-2368-000CN RG5-4223-000CN
Pick-up Roller Assembly
RG5-4688-000CN
Scanner Motor, AC 1.08 Watts
RH7-1376-000CN
Contact Image Sensor Assembly Cable, Contact Image Sensor
RG5-4239-000CN RG5-4233-000CN
Document Scanner Guide/Cover
RB2-3436-000CN
Paper Input Support*
RB2-3362-000CN
Paper Output Support*
RB2-3410-000CN
Document Feeder Support*
RB2-3455-000CN
Document Output Support*
RB2-3470-000CN
Strap*
HB1-2867-000CN
Upper Guide Assembly
RG5-4221-000CN
Cover, Arm***
HB1-2895-000CN
Sheet, Pad***
RB2-4114-000CN
Document Scanner Separation Pad***
RB2-3430-000CN
Feed Assembly
RG5-3485-030CN
Feed Roller
RB2-1699-000CN
Control Panel Assembly
RG5-4241-000CN
* These are customer-replaceable parts. *** Replace these 3 parts as a set.
EN
Chapter 8 – 125
8
Parts for the HP LaserJet 3100
2
4
3
1 5
8
6
126 – Printer parts
7
EN
HP LaserJet 3100 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
LIU Board (U.S.) LIU Board (Worldwide)
C3948-67903 C3948-67904
2
ECU (Engine Controller Board) 110V ECU 220 V
RG5-4690-000CN RG5-4691-000CN
3
Laser Scanner Assembly
RG5-3494-050CN
4
Fixing/Fusing Assembly 110V Fixing/Fusing Assembly 220V
RG5-4678-000CN RG5-4681-000CN
5
Fixing Assembly Pressure Roller
RF5-2362-000CN
6
Formatter (without shield)
C3949-67901
7
Cable ECU to Formatter
RH2-5346-000CN
8
Fuser Exit Roller Assembly
RF5-2368-000CN
EN
Foot (4)
RF5-2663-000CN
Speaker
RH6-3845-000CN
Cable, Laser
RG5-2035-000CN
Motor, D.C. 12V
RH7-1320-000CN
RFI Shield, Formatter
C3948-00002
Chapter 8 – 127
8
Parts for HP LaserJet 8000 series
7
8 9
6 10 11
5 4
3
1 2
14 12
13
Major assembly locations (1 of 4)
128 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 8000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
2000-sheet Input Unit Assembly
C4781A
2
Tray 4 Assembly
RG5-2155-000CN
3
Multi-Bin Mailbox
C4785B
4
Duplex Unit Roller 1
RB1-6822-000CN
5
Duplex Unit
C4782A
6
5-Bin Mailbox with Stapler
C4787A
7
Face-up Bin
RB1-6491-000CN
8
Control Panel Display
RG5-4384-000CN
9
Envelope Feeder
C3765B
10
Tray 2
RG5-3951-000CN
11
Tray 3
RG5-3952-000CN
12
Multiple Input Tray (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray) C4780A
13
7-bin Stand
C4784A
14
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
C4783A
EN
8
Chapter 8 – 129
Parts for HP LaserJet 8000 series
12
1
3 6
5 2
4
13
7
8
11
9
10
Major assembly locations (2 of 4)
130 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 8000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
Transfer Roller
RF5-1412-000CN
2
Main Motor
RH7-1260-000CN
3
Face-down Delivery Assembly
RG5-1874-000CN
4
Fusing Assembly 100V-120v
C3166-69012**
4
Fusing Assembly 220V-240v
C3166-69013**
5
Feeder Assembly
RG5-1834-000CN
6
Registration Assembly
RG5-1833-000CN
7
Tray 1 Pick-up Assembly
RG5-1880-100CN
8
Tray 1 Feed Roller
RB1-6730-000CN
9
Tray 1 Separation Pad
RF5-1455-000CN
10
Paper Input Unit (PIU)*
C3166-69011-000**
11
Main Gear Assembly
RG5-1847-000CN
12
Transfer Roller Assembly
RG5-1887-000CN
13
Tray 1 PCA
RG5-1884-000CN
**These parts require exchange.
EN
Chapter 8 – 131
8
Parts for HP LaserJet 8000 series
5
4
1
2
3
Major assembly locations (3 of 4)
132 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 8000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
Laser Scanner Assembly
C3166-69006**
2
Fan 1
RH7-1266-000CN
3
Switch/Sensor PCA
RG5-1846-000CN
4
High Voltage Power Supply*
C3166-69005**
5
DC Controller PCA*
C3166-69010**
**These parts require exchange.
EN
Chapter 8 – 133
8
Parts for HP LaserJet 8000 series
3
2
6
5
1 4
Major assembly locations (4 of 4)
134 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 8000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
Low Voltage Power Supply, 110V-220V
C3166-69007**
1
Low Voltage Power Supply, Universal
C3166-69008**
2
Formatter
C4186-69001**
3
Fan 3
RH7-1271-000CN
4
Fan 2
5&6 Paper Size Sensing PCA, Trays 2 and 3
RH7-1266-000CN RG5-1845-000CN
**These parts require exchange.
EN
Chapter 8 – 135
8
136 – Printer parts
EN
9
Image quality
Overview This chapter provides examples of image defects and a list of remedies. Repetitive image defect rulers are supplied at the end of the chapter to use when measuring the approximate distances between repetitive image defects.
EN
Chapter 9 – 137
Cleaning page For print-quality defects, try generating a cleaning page from the printer’s control panel (4000, 5000, or 8000 series) or from the JetSuite Pro software (3100). The HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility works on all HP monochrome printers, regardless of driver type. Running the utility at regular intervals can extend the useful life of the fuser and reduce service procedures. If your printer can not generate a cleaning page, you can download the HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility file and obtain instructions on its usage by accessing the worldwide web at www.hp.com/cposupport/eschome.html.
Note For the cleaning page to work properly, make sure to print the page on copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper).
138 – Image quality
EN
Image Defect Table For more information, see the page numbers below each image.
Background scatter (see page 142)
Black lines (see page 142)
Black pages (see page 143)
Blank page (see page 144)
9
Blank spots (see page 145)
Bottom of page is blank or graphic image is cut off (see page 145)
Character voids (see page 146)
Dirt on back of page (see page 146)
DIstorted image (see page 146)
Dropouts (see page 147)
Faded print or bubbles (see page 147)
Gray background (see page 148)
EN
Chapter 9 – 139
Horizontal black lines or smears (see page 148)
Horizontal smudges (see page 148)
Horizontal white lines (see page 149)
Light print, dark print, faded print (see page 149)
Loose toner (see page 149)
Outgoing faxes/ copies/scanned images are too light or too dark (see page 150)
Print is faded or vertically aligned white streaks are apparent (see page 150)
Random black spots (see page 151)
Repetitive defects (see page 151)
Scanned images have black dots or streaks in top and bottom margins (see page 151)
Scanned text is unclear (see page 152)
Toner Smear (see page 152)
140 – Image quality
EN
Vertical black lines (see page 152)
Vertical dots (see page 153)
Vertical white lines (see page 153)
9
EN
Chapter 9 – 141
Image defect details Background scatter •
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
Toner has spilled inside the product.
•
The pickup roller is dirty.
•
The print density setting is too low.
•
The transfer roller is dirty or worn.
Black lines •
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The toner cartridge is not seated properly.
•
The fusing assembly is contaminated or damaged.
•
The static eliminator teeth are contaminated or defective.
142 – Image quality
EN
Black pages •
The high-voltage power supply connections are dirty.
•
The high-voltage power supply is installed improperly. If the highvoltage power supply has been removed and replaced, it may not be seated properly.
•
Check the ECU (engine controller unit) for damage.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
Light is leaking into the printer. – Ensure all covers are in place.
•
The primary charging roller is bad.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The laser scanner assembly is faulty (turning laser on continuously).
•
The connectors between the laser scanner unit and the DC controller PCA are not seated properly or are defective.
•
There is a problem in the ECU or the laser scanner.
EN
Chapter 9 – 143
9
Blank pages •
No toner is available for print.
•
The laser shutter is defective.
•
The toner cartridge guide is damaged, improperly positioned, or missing.
•
No transfer roller voltage. – Check the ECU.
•
No developing bias. – Check the ECU.
•
Check the ground path.
•
The laser scanner cable assembly is defective.
•
There is a problem with the software’s configuration.
•
There is a problem with the network configuration. Some sharing devices on networks may generate a blank page as a separator. – Check with the network administrator.
•
The printer may be feeding two or more pages at once because the paper is difficult to separate.
•
The sealing tape has been left in the toner cartridge.
•
The toner cartridge is empty or defective.
•
The laser scanner door does not open properly. – Remove and reseat the toner cartridge. – Check the laser scanner shutter door for proper operation.
•
The toner cartridge guide is damaged, improperly positioned, or missing.
•
There is no transfer roller voltage. – Perform the Half Self-Test Functional Check to check all other electrophotographic processes. – Replace the transfer roller if necessary.
•
The high-voltage connector springs are dirty or defective.
144 – Image quality
EN
•
The high-voltage connectors are mounted on the high-voltage power supply PCA and protrude into the toner cartridge cavity. – Check the springs for functionality. Clean if dirty; replace if defective or missing.
•
The high-voltage power supply PCA is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
There is no developing bias. – Clean the high-voltage power supply contacts. With no developing bias charge, toner is not attracted to the drum. – Replace the ECU.
•
There is no drum ground path. – Check the drum ground. – Replace the ECU.
•
The laser scanner cable assembly is defective.
•
The page length and margins are not set correctly for the paper size.
•
Your software application is sending an extra page-eject command. – Check the software’s printing configuration information.
Blank spots •
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The transfer roller is dirty or deformed.
Bottom of page is blank or graphic image is cut off •
The page is too complex. (There is not enough memory to process the page.) – Set the resolution to 300 dpi through the software or printer driver. See the online help for printer driver issues.
EN
Chapter 9 – 145
9
Character voids •
The surface of the paper is too rough or the paper’s surface is too smooth for proper toner adhesion. – Use paper that meets HP paper specifications.
•
Printing is on the wrong side of the paper.
•
The transparencies are not designed for proper toner adhesion.
•
The transfer roller is bad.
•
The laser scanner assembly is bad.
Dirt on back •
Dirt is inside of the printer (tray separation roller, feed roller, fuser, toner cartridge).
•
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly.
•
The pressure roller in the fuser is contaminated.
Distorted image •
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly.
•
The printer operating environment does not meet HP specifications.
•
The output bin is incorrect for the paper type.
•
The connection of the cables to the laser scanner is poor.
•
The connection of the cables to the ECU is poor.
•
The laser scanner is defective.
•
The ECU is defective.
146 – Image quality
EN
Dropouts •
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications.
•
The printer’s operating environment does not meet specifications.
•
The toner density setting is wrong.
•
A single sheet of paper is defective. – Try reprinting the job.
•
The fuser setting was wrong for the paper type.*
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The high-voltage power supply PCA is defective.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
“Draft mode” or “economode” is selected in the software.
*This feature does not apply to all products.
9 Faded print or bubbles •
Check the ground path.
•
Replace the ECU.
•
The toner supply is low.
•
The print density is set incorrectly. – Change to a darker setting and retry printing.
•
If economode is on, turn it off.
•
Try a different paper lot.
•
Inspect the transfer roller for proper installation and contact. – Replace the transfer roller if it is damaged.
•
The laser scanner door is not opening properly. – Remove and reseat the toner cartridge. – Check the laser scanner door for proper operation.
•
The high-voltage contact springs are dirty or defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
EN
Chapter 9 – 147
Gray background •
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly.
•
The printer operating environment does not meet specifications.
•
The toner density setting is wrong.
•
The toner cartridge is faulty.
•
The inside of the printer is dirty.
•
The printer is printing on envelope seams. – Move the text to an area without seams.
Horizontal black lines or smears •
The laser scanner assembly or ECU is defective.
•
The toner cartridge was improperly installed.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The printer needs to be cleaned.
•
There is a problem in the heating element.
•
A gear is damaged.
3100 only •
Horizontal lines appear in the margins and across entire pages of faxes that are being sent. – The HP LaserJet 3100 product needs to be cleaned. – There is a problem in the contact image sensor.
Horizontal smudges •
The paper path is contaminated or damaged.
148 – Image quality
EN
Horizontal white lines •
The toner cartridge may be defective.
•
The fusing assembly is dirty or defective.
•
The laser scanner assembly or ECU may be faulty.
•
There is dirt in the laser path.
•
The mirror in the laser scanner is dirty.
Light print, dark print, faded print •
The toner density setting is wrong.
•
The toner cartridge is low.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly.
•
Contact is poor to the ECU.
•
The laser scanner is defective.
•
The ECU is defective.
•
The high-voltage power supply is defective.
Loose toner •
Dirt is in the printer.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
Paper might be too smooth.
•
The fuser setting for the paper type is wrong.
•
The fuser is defective.
EN
Chapter 9 – 149
9
Outgoing faxes/copies/scanned images are too light or too dark •
The contrast is not set correctly.
•
The original image is very light or very dark.
•
The scanned image is too light or too dark because the original was on a colored paper.
3100 only •
Recalibrate the product.
Print is faded or vertically aligned white steaks are apparent •
The toner cartridge is getting low on toner.
•
The paper you are using does not meet HP paper specifications.
•
The toner density setting is not adjusted correctly.
•
The internal mirror or optics are contaminated.
•
The laser scanner is damaged.
•
The document scanner needs to be recalibrated.
•
There is a problem in the contact image sensor.
•
There is a problem in the formatter.
3100 only •
The HP LaserJet 3100 product needs to be cleaned.
•
The HP LaserJet 3100 product is damaged.
150 – Image quality
EN
Random black spots •
The paper you are using does not meet HP paper specifications.
•
You are printing on the wrong side of the paper.
•
The printer requires cleaning with a cleaning page.
•
The toner cartridge is damaged.
Repetitive defects •
Locate the defective roller in the printer.
•
There is dirt on the roller or the roller is defective.
•
The toner cartridge is damaged.
•
The rollers are dirty.
•
The fusing assembly is defective or dirty.
•
The gears are worn, causing slippage or jumping.
•
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications.
9
Scanned images have black dots or streaks in top and bottom margins 3100 Only •
There is ink, glue, white-out, or some other substance on the contact image sensor.
•
There is a problem in the contact image sensor. – Replace the contact image sensor.
EN
Chapter 9 – 151
Scanned text is unclear 3100 Only •
The contrast, resolution, or brightness needs to be adjusted before scanning.
•
The original is on colored paper.
•
There is a problem in the contact image sensor. – Replace the contact image sensor.
Toner smear •
There is dirt on the paper.
•
The fusing rollers are dirty.
•
The paper does not meet HP specifications.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
Wrong fuser setting for the paper type.
•
The fusing assembly is defective.
•
There is dirt in the printer.
•
The static eliminator is dirty or is not grounded, allowing a static charge to remain on a page.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Vertical black lines •
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The toner cartridge is not seated properly.
•
The fuser entrance is dirty.
•
The fuser has scratches on it.
•
This may be a repetitive defect. If so, the lines will be repeated at a consistent interval down the page.
•
The printer needs to be cleaned.
•
There is a problem in the heating element.
152 – Image quality
EN
3100 Only •
Scanned images have unwanted lines through them. – There is ink, glue, white-out, or some other substance on the contact image sensor. – Slick paper could be the problem; use a carrier sheet to send the item. – Recalibrate the product.
Vertical dots •
The static eliminator teeth are dirty.
•
There is poor contact between the static eliminator and the ECU.
•
The transfer roller is deformed or it has deteriorated.
•
The ECU is defective.
9 Vertical white lines •
There is a lack of toner or the toner cartridge is faulty.
•
There is dirt in the laser path.
•
The fuser is defective.
•
A mirror in the laser scanner is dirty.
EN
Chapter 9 – 153
Notes
154 – Image quality
EN
LJ 4000 series repetitive defect ruler
First occurrence of print defect
Primary charging roller - 38 mm (1.5 in) Transfer roller - 47 mm (1 7/8 in) Feed roller, pre-transfer roller, and developing roller - 50 mm (2 in)
Pressure roller - 83 mm (2.5 in) Tray feed roller, separation roller, and fuser upper upper hot roller - 75 mm (2 15/16 in)
Photosensitive drum - 94 mm (3 11/16 in)
EN
Chapter 9 – 155
9
Notes
156 – Image quality
EN
LJ 5000 series repetitive defect ruler First occurrence of print defect
Primary charging roller - 44 mm (1 3/4 in) Registration roller - 50 mm (2 in) Developing cylinder - 50 mm (2 in) Feed roller - 53 mm (2 3/32 in) Transfer charging roller - 53 mm (2 3/32 in) Fusing roller - 75 mm (2 15/16 in)
Pressure roller - 79 mm (3 1/8 in)
Photosensitive drum - 94 mm (3 11/16 in)
Cassette pick-up roller - 135 mm (5 5/16 in)
EN
Chapter 9 – 157
9
Notes
158 – Image quality
EN
LJ 3100 repetitive defect ruler First occurrence of print defect
Developing cylinder - 32 mm (1.25 in) Primary charging roller - 38 mm (1.5 in) Delivery roller - 44 mm (1.75 in) Transfer roller -48 mm (1.9 in)
9
Pressure roller - 64 mm (2.5 in) Upper heating element film - 76 mm (3.0 in) Toner cartridge photosensitive drum - 76 mm (3.0 in)
EN
Chapter 9 – 159
Notes
160 – Image quality
EN
8000 repetitive defect ruler First occurrence of print defect
Registration roller - 14 mm (1.73 in) Toner cartridge primary charging roller - 44.4 mm (1.75) Face-up delivery roller - 47 mm (1.86 in) Toner cartridge developing roller - 53.5 mm (2.11 in) Transfer roller - 58.4 (2.30 in)
Fuser lower roller - 94 mm (3.71 in) Toner cartridge photosensitive drum - 94 mm (3.71 in)
Fuser upper roller - 125 mm (4.92 in)
EN
Chapter 9 – 161
9
162 – Image quality
EN
10
Wiring diagrams
Overview This chapter provides wiring diagrams for printers supported in this guide.
EN
Chapter 10 – 163
Figure 10-1 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N)
164 – Wiring diagrams
EN
10
Figure 10-2 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN) EN
Chapter 10 – 165
Figure 10-3 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 5000 series, 1 of 2)
166 – Wiring diagrams
EN
10
Figure 10-4 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 5000 series, 2 of 2)
EN
Chapter 10 – 167
Figure 10-5 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 3100, 1 of 2)
168 – Wiring diagrams
EN
10
Figure 10-6 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 3100, 2 of 2)
EN
Chapter 10 – 169
Figure 10-7 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 8000 series, 1 of 2)
170 – Wiring diagrams
EN
10
Figure 10-8 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 8000 series, 2 of 2)
EN
Chapter 10 – 171
172 – Wiring diagrams
EN
11
Services and support/ resources and training
Overview This chapter provides information on obtaining training, support, and materials.
EN
Chapter 11 – 173
How to get training Lecture/lab training (U.S. only) Service technicians who want individual, hands-on training can attend regularly scheduled lecture/lab training classes. These classes are offered throughout the country. To receive the latest schedule, call HP FIRST at (800) 333-1917, or see the HP website (www.hp.com/go/ resellertraining) and request document ID number 9104. The latest schedule will immediately be sent to the fax number of your choice. Class schedule and registration information can also be obtained by calling the centralized registration center at (512) 434-1520.
Self-paced training kits Product All LaserJet Printers
Description
Part number
Basic Hardware Training Course (prerequisite for all LaserJet service training)
5961-0880
Paper Training Video
5961-0711 (NTSC) 5961-0712 (PAL)
LJ 4000/4000 N/ 4000 T/4000 TN
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C4118-61101 C4118-61102
LJ 5000/5000 N/ 5000 GN
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C4110-61101 C4110-61102
LJ 3100
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C3948-61101 C3948-61102
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C4085-67901 C4085-67902
LJ 8000/ LJ Mopier 240
174 – Services and support/resources and training
EN
Support resources North American Response Center (NARC) The North American Response Center (NARC) is available for technical support to assist service technicians. The NARC can be reached at (800) 544-9976 (U.S.).
Other areas Outside of North America and Europe, contact your local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining technical support.
HP FIRST fax system HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a phone-in fax service that provides technical information to HP LaserJet users as well as to service personnel. Receiving a fax requires a group-3 facsimile machine or fax card. The following service-related information is available: •
service notes (HP-authorized dealers)
•
application notes
•
product data sheets
•
material safety data sheets (MSDS)
•
typeface and accessory information
•
printer support software information
•
toner information
•
forms for requesting drivers and the software matrix
EN
11
Chapter 11 – 175
To retrieve service notes (Authorized dealers, HP customer engineers (CEs) ONLY) 1 Dial (1) (800) 333-1917 (U.S.) from any touch-tone phone. 2 Select (1) for HP FIRST. 3 Select (3) for a password customer. 4 Enter the password: 737842. 5 Follow the voice prompts to enter a document ID number or to select the index. 6 Follow the voice prompts to enter your fax number or the fax number of your customer.
Note Delivery time depends on the length and complexity of the document.
HP FIRST, U.S. Call the HP ASAP system (800) 333-1917 (U.S.) and follow the voice prompts to enter HP FIRST.
HP FIRST, Europe Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers: United Kingdom
(44) (134) 0800-960271
Netherlands
(31) (20) 0800-222420
Belgium (Dutch)
(32) (2) 0800-11906
Germany
(49) (13) 081-0061
Switzerland (German)
(41) (1) 0800-551527
Austria
(43) (1) 0660-8128
For English service outside the above countries, call: (31) (20) 681-5792.
176 – Services and support/resources and training
EN
HP end-user support options Local support assistance The user’s first source of assistance should be their local dealer or service center. HP continuously provides local computer dealers and service centers with the latest information regarding products and services. To locate the nearest authorized dealer or service center, phone (800) 243-9816 (U.S.) or (800) 387-3867 (Canada).
24-hour support information Phone (800) 333-1917 to access the HP ASAP system for 24-hour automated support services. User support information includes notes for common software applications and troubleshooting tips. Users may request up to three documents per call.
Electronic information services For 24-hour access to information via modem, we suggest: •
CompuServe - The CompuServe HP Peripherals forum (GO HPPER) provides printer drivers and interactive sharing of technical communication. To subscribe, call CompuServe, Inc. at (800) 524-3388. Note: CompuServe is not an official HP support channel, but the forum is maintained and supported by users.
•
Internet - Printer drivers and product and support information can be obtained from the HP anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) site 192.6.71.2 or ftp-boi.external.hp.com. The site is available to anyone with FTP access to the Internet. Access through the World Wide Web is available at URL http://www.hp.com/.
EN
Chapter 11 – 177
11
Printer drivers by mail To obtain printer drivers, contact the software application manufacturer. HP distributes printer drivers for a few of the most popular applications. Call (970) 339-7009, 6 days a week, 24 hours a day (closed Sundays). Shipping and handling charges may apply on some printer drivers.
Telephone assistance – in warranty Call (1) (208) 323-2551 Monday through Friday from 6 am to 10 pm, Saturday 9 am to 4 pm (Mountain Time) free of charge during the warranty period. However, your standard long-distance phone charges still apply. Have your system nearby and your serial number ready when calling.
Telephone assistance – post-warranty Post-warranty telephone assistance is available to answer your product usage questions. Call (1) (900) 555-1500 ($2.50 per minute, U.S. only) or call 1-800-999-1148 ($25 per call, Visa or MasterCard, U.S. and Canada) Monday through Friday from 7 am to 6 pm and Saturday from 9 am to 3 pm (Mountain Time). Charges begin only when you connect with a support technician. Prices subject to change.
Hardware repair services To find a local authorized repair center for hardware repair needs, call (800) 243-9816. HP also offers a variety of service contract options to complement the standard warranty. Call (800) 743-8308 (U.S.) or (800) 268-1221 (Canada).
178 – Services and support/resources and training
EN
12
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
Overview This section provides information on the LaserJet 300 DPI page scanner, which is available in three models.
EN
Chapter 12 – 179
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion The HP LaserJet Companion includes the following models: •
C3989A Companion
•
C3079A Companion SE
•
C4106A Companion XI
(These are all the same product except for minor software differences.)
Description The HP LaserJet Companion is a 300-DPI page scanner, parallel port pass-through accessory designed for Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 4000 series printers.
Warranty The HP LaserJet Companion comes with a 1-year warranty, offering Central Repair only (no dealer repairs); Express Exchange (U.S. and Canada); and Repair and Return (Worldwide).
Supported media •
•
The following media sizes are supported: •
Maximum: 216 mm x 762 mm (8.5 by 30 inch)
•
Minimum: 51 mm x 89 mm (2 by 3.5 inch)
The following media weights are supported: • 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 lb to 28 lb)
180 – Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
EN
Skew specifications Some skew is normal. The maximum amount of skew that is considered normal is 3.35 millimeters (0.13 inches) over 279 millimeters (11 inches). Skew exceeding the normal amount may be caused by media that is damaged, media that does not meet the specifications, or media that is loaded incorrectly. If media meets specifications, is not damaged, and is correctly loaded, but skew remains excessive, clean the separation pad, pickup roller, and scan roller.
Cleaning Clean these parts with isopropyl alcohol: •
separation pad
•
pickup roller
•
white scan roller
Clean the image sensor with glass cleaner.
12
EN
Chapter 12 – 181
Cables Cable part numbers HP part number
Part description
8120-6963
Cable shipped with the HP LaserJet Companion
C2950A
Printer parallel cable (IEEE-1284) 2 meters (7 feet)
C2951A
Printer parallel cable (IEEE-1284) 3 meters (10 feet)
Power supply modules Output = 22VDC, + or - 25% Power supply part numbers HP part number
Part description
9100-5534
120 Vac 60 Hz (US/CN/MX)
9100-5535
230 Vac 50 Hz (EUROPE)
9100-5536
240 Vac 50 Hz (U.K.)
9100-5537
220 Vac 50 Hz (ARG)
9100-5539
240 Vac 50 Hz (AUSTRL)
9100-5541
220 Vac 50 Hz (TI/INDO)
9100-5542
220 Vac 50 Hz (HNG KNG)
182 – Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
EN
A
Acronyms and abbreviations
Acronyms and abbreviations AC
Alternating current
AUTOCONT
Automatic continue
BNC
A 10-Base 2 connector used with coaxial cables
CE
Customer engineer
CFG
Configuration on control panel
DC
Direct current
DCPS
Direct current power supply
MS-DOS
Disk operating system
DPI
Dots per inch
DTR
Data terminal ready
DTR LINE
Data terminal ready line
ECU
Engine control unit
EP
Electro-photographic
EPH
External paper handling
FRU
Field replacement unit
FTP
File transfer protocol
HP ASAP
Hewlett-Packard Automated Support Access Program
HP FIRST
Hewlett-Packard Fax information retrieval support technology
EN
Appendix A –
183
Acronyms and abbreviations (continued) HP-GL/2
Hewlett-Packard graphics language
HTML
Hypertext markup language
HV
High voltage
HVPS
High-voltage power supply
I/O
Input/output
IR
Infrared
IrDA
Infrared Data Association
IRQ
Interrupt request
JEIDA
A type of memory module
JOBID
Print job identification
JP
Jobpack
LAN
Local area network
LED
Light-emitting diode
LVPS
Low-voltage power supply
LC PICKUP ROLLER
Lower-cassette pickup roller
MB
Megabyte
MEM
Memory
MIO
Modular input/output
MP PICKUP ROLLER
Multipurpose tray pickup roller
MP Tray
Multipurpose tray
MSDS
Material safety data sheets
NARC
North American Response Center
NTSC
National Television Standard Committee
NVRAM
Nonvolatile random-access memory
Ohm
A unit of measure of electrical resistance
PAL
Phase alternation line format
PCA
Printed-circuit assembly
184 – Acronyms and abbreviations
EN
Acronyms and abbreviations (continued) PCB
Printed circuit board
PCL
Printer command language
PC PICKUP ROLLER
Paper-cassette pickup roller
PIU
Paper input unit
PJL
Printer job language
RAM
Random-access memory
RIP
Raster image process
ROM
Read-only memory
SIMM
Single inline memory module
SMO
Support materials organization Service mode
SPEC
Specifications
SRVR
Server
TCP/IP
Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol
TS l/T52
Thermoswitch
UNIX®
Network operating system using TCP/IP protocol
URL
Universal resource locator
VDC
Volts direct current
EN
Appendix A –
Appendix
SMODE
185
186 – Acronyms and abbreviations
EN
Index A
E
assemblies major locations (3100 series) 127 major locations (4000 series) 121 major locations (5000 series) 125 major locations (8000 series) 131
EIO-based hard drive 77 electronic information services 179 envelope feeder description 108 part numbers 108 envelopes See also media envelopes construction 87 gray background 98 improving print quality 98 preventing problems 86 sizes 85 specifications 85 types to avoid 86 expanded input/output 77 extended service menu (3100) 51 extended service menu tree 52 extended service mode clearing memory 58 reports 56 self-test 53 tests 55
C character voids 95 cleaning page, obtaining 140 common hardware, part numbers 117 CompuServe HP Peripherals forum 179 configuration test 53 control panel messages alphabetical 8 numerical 29 control panel test 55 country code softswitches, changing 59
F D diagnostics, accessing 50 document scanner feed test 55 document scanner motor test 56 documents, lost 13 download, firmware 60 duplexer description 108 part numbers 108 EN
fax memory test 53 faxes, lost 13 firmware download 60 firmware version 57 flash 77 fonts, ordering 104
Index – 187
H
L
hard disk, part numbers 104 hard disks, ordering 104 hardware, part numbers 117 HP ASAP 178 HP FIRST 177 HP FIRST, Europe 178 HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility file 140 HP LaserJet Companion cleaning 183 description 182 supported media 182 warranty service 182 HP Parts Direct Ordering 103 HP Planet Partners 99
labels See also media labels preventing problems 89 specifications 88 LCD characters test 55 LCD test 55 LocalTalk 77 log debug report 57 lost, documents 13
I image defects 141 individual diagnostics 56 input/output bidirectional parallel interface 72 cable lengths 74 expanded card 77 pin configurations 73 input/output cables description 106 part numbers 106 input/output cards description 104 part numbers 104 internal event log, clearing 51 internet support 179 interruptions in power 13
K keypad test 55
188 – Index
M mailbox ordering 108 part numbers 108 maintenance count, setting 47, 49 maintenance kits description 112 part numbers 112 media envelope sizes 85 envelope specifications 85 envelopes to avoid 86 label specifications 88 ordering 108 paper curl 84 paper sizes 80 part numbers 108 specifications 81 transparency specifications 90 troubleshooting problems 83 types to avoid 83 weights 82 memory ordering 104 part numbers 104, 106 product description 104, 106 menu tree, extended service 45 EN
modem dial tone test 54 modem modulation test 56 modem test 53 modem tone test 56
N North American Response Center (NARC) 177
O ordering duplexer 108 fonts 104 hard disks 104 I/O cards 104 input/output cables 106 mailbox 108 memory 104 power box 110 toner cartridges 110 trays 106, 108 upgrade kit 110
P
EN
R refill statement 100 reports extended service mode 56 log debug 57 printer fonts 57 SRAM dump 56 T.30 protocol trace 56 task stacks 57 translations 57 reset, country code 59
S scanner LED test 55 scanner plots test 55 scanner test 54 screws description 117 part numbers 117 self-paced training kits, ordering 176 self-test 53 sensor states test 55 serial number, setting 48, 49 Index – 189
Index
paper See media page count, setting 46, 49 paper size, setting default 50 paper training video 90 parallel cables connectors 74 part numbers 74 part numbers 117 pin configurations 73 post-warranty service 180 power box ordering 110 part numbers 110 power supply 63
power, interruptions 13 printer hardware part numbers 117 obtaining hardware repair 180 obtaining support 177 part numbers 121 post-warranty service 180 service center 179 warranty service 180 printer drivers, ordering 180 printer fonts report 57 product, part numbers 104, 106, 127 program test 53
service mode 43 service notes, retrieving 178 setting maintenance count 47, 49 page count 46, 49 serial number 48, 49 softswitches 59 SRAM dump report 56 support, obtaining 179 system reset, performing 58
T T.30 protocol trace report 56 task stacks report 57 tests all LCD characters 55 configuration 53 control panel 55 document scanner feed 55 document scanner motor 56 extended service mode 55 fax memory 53 individual diagnostics 56 keypad 55 LCD 55 modem 53 modem dial tone 54 modem modulation 56 modem tone 56 program 53 scanner 54 scanner LED 55 scanner plots 55 sensor states 55 toner cartridges banding 95 ordering 110 page counts 94 part numbers 110 190 – Index
resolving problems 95 weights 94 toner cracking 96 toner images, transfering 97 training classes 176 translations report 57 transparencies See also media transparencies preventing problems 90 specifications 90 trays description 106 ordering 106 part numbers 106 troubleshooting image defects 141 paper problems 83 printer problems 8
U upgrade kit ordering 110 part number 110
W warranty service, obtaining 180 white reference summary 57 wiring diagram LJ 3100 170 LJ 4000 series 166 LJ 5000 series 168 LJ 8000 172
EN
Service Websites Electronic Support Center Software, drivers, support documentation, frequently asked questions http://www.hp.com/go/support
HP Technical Training (North America) Classes and schedules http://www.hp.com/go/resellertraining
Parts Parts information http://outfield.external.hp.com/spi/welcome.htm
Service Phone Numbers All numbers listed are for North America only.
Dealer Response Line Dealer pre/post sales and service support (800) 544-9976 U.S. Only (800) 363-6594 Canada
Customer Care Center User questions, applications, LaserJet Fax (208) 323-2551
HP First Fax – Information Retrieval System Service notes, sales information, user help, software information (208) 344-4809 (800) 333-1917 U.S. Only
Customer Information Center Sales dealer locations, literature, and specifications (800) 752-0900 U.S. Only
HP Driver Distribution Center Printer drivers and software application notes orders (970) 339-7009 U.S. Only
Customer Support Sales Center Authorized repair locations (800) 243-9816 U.S. Only
Parts Direct Ordering / SMO Service parts, supplies, and accessories orders (800) 227-8164 U.S. Only
Parts Identification Service part number identification (916) 783-0804
North American Response Center Online technical assistance (800) 477-5526 HP Only
Corvallis Customer Service Center Express exchange/customer return services (916) 785-1200
Supported Products HP LaserJet 4000/4000T/4000N/4000TN printer HP LaserJet Companion 3989A HP LaserJet 5000/5000N/5000GN printer HP LaserJet 3100 multifunction printer HP LaserJet 8000/8000N/8000DN printer HP LaserJet 240 Mopier Printed on at least 50% Total Recycled Fiber with at least 10% Post-Consumer Paper
Copyright© 1998 Hewlett-Packard Co. Printed in USA
Manual Part No. 5021-8942
*5021-8942* *5021-8942* 5021-8942
Supported Products HP LaserJet Companion (minimal support only) HP LaserJet 6L HP LaserJet 5Si Mopier HP LaserJet 5Si/5Si MX HPLaserJet 5L HP LaserJet 6P/6MP HP LaserJet 5P/5MP HP LaserJet 5/5M/5N HP LaserJet 4V/4MV HP LaserJet 4P/4MP HP LaserJet 4L/4ML HP LaserJet 4+/4M+ HP LaserJet 4/4M Printed on at least HP LaserJet 4Si/4Si MX 50% Total Recycled Fiber with HP LaserJet IIISi at least 10% Post-Consumer Paper HP LaserJet IIIP HP LaserJet IIP+ HP LaserJet IIP Copyright© 1998 HP LaserJet IIID Hewlett-Packard Co. HP LaserJet III Printed in USA HP LaserJet IID HP LaserJet II Manual Part No. HP Classic LaserJet (2686D) 5021-8943 HP Classic LaserJet (2686A)
*5021-8943* *5021-8943* 5021-8943
May 1998 Edition
HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference Service Guide Volume II
HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference Service Guide Volume II
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company, 1998 All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. Publication number 5021-8942 First edition, May 1998 Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with respect to this information. HEWLETTPACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, or other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information.
Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
Trademark credits MS-DOS® is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.
Contents 1
Control panel messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Error listings, descriptions, and recommended actions
2
Service mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 How to access Service mode and related functions
3
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 DC voltages, test points, and tools
4
Input/Output (I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Printer interface and cabling information
5
Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Supported sizes and specifications for paper and special media
6
Toner cartridge information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Cartridge weights, capacities, and potential service issues
7
Printer options and replaceable parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Support matrix and part numbers for accessories
8
Printer parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Selected high-usage replacement parts
9
Image quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Image defect samples, suspect causes, and remedies
10 Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Main wiring schematics 11 Services and support/resources and training . . . . . . . . . . . 173 How and where to get training, support, and materials 12 Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 HP LaserJet information and specifications A
Acronyms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
EN
iii
Ordering other manuals The HP LaserJet Quick Reference Service Guide, Volume II, provides support for newer monochrome printers (see the following page for a complete list of supported printers). It has been created to help the HP LaserJet service engineer quickly troubleshoot common printer problems. For older monochrome printers, see the HP LaserJet Quick Reference Service Guide, Volume I. It provides support for the following printers: LJ 6L, LJ 5Si Mopier, LJ 5Si, LJ 5Si MX, LJ 5L, LJ 6P, LJ 6MP, LJ 5P, LJ 5MP, LJ 5, LJ 5M, LJ 5N, LJ 4V, LJ 4MV, LJ 4P, LJ 4MP, LJ 4L, LJ 4ML, LJ 4+, LJ 4M+, LJ4, LJ 4M, LJ 4Si, LJ 4Si MX, LJ IIISi, LJ IIIP, LJ IIP+, LJ IIP, LJ IIID, LJ III, LJ IID, LJ II, LJ 2686D, LJ 2686A. While the quick reference guides are intended to provide all the information the service engineer will need for on-site repair of HP products, they are not intended to replace the service manual for any HP LaserJet product. For detailed information about the HP LaserJet products described in this guide, see the user guide or service manual for that product. Service manuals for HP LaserJet products are available from Hewlett-Packard. The phone number for the Service Parts Order Desk is:
(800) 227-8164 (U.S. only) If you are located outside of the U.S., contact your local HP Sales and Service office.
iv
EN
Supported products Reference name used in this guide
Model number
Maximum pages per month
Service Manual part number
LJ 4000/4000T 4000N/4000TN
C4118A/C4119A/ C4120A/C4121A
65K
C4118-99024
LJ Companion
LJ C3989A/ C3979A/C4106A
N/A
HP Central Repair Only
LJ 5000/5000N/ 5000GN
C4110A/C4111A/ C4112A
65K
C4110-91033
LJ 3100
C3948A
6K
C3948-90958
LJ8000/8000N/ 8000DN
C4085A/C4086A/ C4087A
130K
C4085-91017
LJ Mopier 240
C4228A
130K
C4085-91017
Note This guide will be updated on a regular basis as the service needs change, as new products are introduced, and as information becomes available.
EN
v
vi
EN
1
Control panel messages
Overview This chapter provides a list of printer control panel messages. Alphabetical messages are listed first, followed by numerical messages. Control panel messages that are self-explanatory are not included. If you need more detailed information, see the service manual for the printer.
EN
Chapter 1 – 7
Alphabetical messages (number) is a group, group not allowed •
Enter a different one-touch key or an unassigned speed-dial code.
Access denied, menus locked •
Ask the network administrator to unlock the function.
Already in group •
While programming a group-dial code, a fax number has been added that is already in the group. – Add the next fax number to the group.
Bad duplexer connection •
Re-install the duplexer.
•
If the message persists, make sure that the duplexer is connected and that the connector is not damaged.
•
Replace the duplexer.
Bad opt tray connection •
Re-install the optional tray.
•
Make sure that the optional tray is connected and that the connector is not damaged.
•
Replace the optional tray.
8 – Control panel messages
EN
Blacklisted (France only) •
The attempted fax number has received a voice answer or no answer, was busy on the first dial and redials, or was busy with redials pending. – Unplug the power cord for the fax machine from the power strip or outlet, and then plug it back in.
Busy •
Check the fax number and try resending the fax. If the message appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
Cancel group edit, ENTER to confirm •
Back space was pressed while in a group-dial code in the Group Dial Setup level of the menu.
1 Press [Start] to return to the group-dial code and continue editing. 2 Press [Enter/Menu] to go to the Group Dial Setup level of the menu. (Press [Enter/Menu] again to choose a different group-dial code.) 3 Press [Stop/Clear] to exit the Menu settings.
Check finisher device alternates with Clear jam •
Check to see if paper is jammed in the external paper-handling finishing device.
Check finisher device alternates with Finisher align error •
EN
Check to see if an alignment error has occurred in the external paper-handling finishing device.
Chapter 1 – 9
1
Check input device alternates with Paper path open, please close it •
Check the doors and trays.
•
Check the tabs and sensor levers in the tray for proper operation. – Replace any defective tabs or sensors.
•
Replace the printed-circuit assembly (PCA) controller in the feeder.
Check output device alternates with Close output delivery path •
Make sure the paper path is closed between the printer and the external paper-handling output device.
Chosen language not available 1 Print the job using a driver for a different printer language, or add the requested language to the printer (if available). 2 Press [Go] to continue.
Clear document from scanner •
Check to see if the document is jammed or if multiple sheets of the document were loaded.
•
Check the special media lever. It should be to the left for regularweight items or to the right for thick items. Thick items must be fed one at a time.
•
Check the control panel configuration for outgoing faxes, including the “send long pages” setting.
10 – Control panel messages
EN
Close top cover •
Check SW101 for proper operation. Verify that the wires are connected.
•
If necessary, replace SW101. – If the new switch does not solve the error, the wiring or the engine controller board may be defective.
Communication error 1 Try resending the fax. 2 If the call fails again, check that the telephone cord is securely connected. Then check for a dial tone on the phone line by pressing [Manual Dial]. 3 Wait; try resending the fax later.
Note For additional details, see the HP LaserJet 3100 Product Service Manual.
Configuration err # (number 1-4) •
An error was detected in the static random-access memory (SRAM). – Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Config. stuck addr •
In Service mode only, SRAM stuck address test. – Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
EN
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Chapter 1 – 11
1
Config. tied addr. •
In Service mode only, SRAM tied address test. – Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
[Date] [Time] •
The battery has failed. You can continue to use the HP LaserJet 3100 product without replacing the battery, but if you re-enter the Menu settings and then turn off the power, the settings are erased again.
Decoding error # (number 1-3) •
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Disk device failure •
Reseat the enhanced input/output (EIO) disk or replace the old disk device with a new disk.
Disk file operation failed •
Check the filename and directory name.
•
Reattempt the operation.
Disk file system is full •
Delete the files from the EIO disk and then try again, or add a Flash dual inline memory module (DIMM).
•
Download or delete files from the HP JetAdmin software, and download or delete fonts from the HP FontSmart software.
12 – Control panel messages
EN
Disk is write protected •
Use the HP JetAdmin software to disable the write protection.
Documents were lost, START to continue 1 Press [Start]. A report is printed. 2 Check the fax log status column for the “Fax Document was Lost” message. 3 Resend the associated outgoing faxes. Ask the sender to resend incoming faxes.
Duplex error, check duplexer •
Check the duplexer for a paper jam.
•
Reseat the duplex assembly, and check the connection.
•
Replace the Duplex unit.
EIO x disk initializing •
Stand by until the EIO disk is done initializing.
EIO x disk spinning up •
Stand by until the disk accessory card is done initializing.
EIO disk x non-functional •
Replace the EIO disk.
Encoding error •
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
EN
Chapter 1 – 13
1
Envelope feeder load 1 Load the requested envelope type and size into the envelope feeder. 2 Make sure that the envelope size and type are set correctly on the Paper-Handling menu in the printer control panel. 3 Press [Go] if the envelope is already loaded in the feeder. 4 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes.
Errors likely in pages: (page range) •
Resend the fax or ask the sender to resend the fax to you.
Fax document was lost •
If you set up faxes to be sent at a future time or to be polled, print a fax log to identify which faxes were lost. Then re-enter the faxes.
•
Faxes that were received to memory (instead of printing) have been lost. Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Fax memory error # (number 1-5) •
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If you set up faxes to be sent at a future time or to be polled, print a fax log to identify which faxes may have been lost. Then, re-enter the faxes.
•
Faxes that were received to memory (instead of printing) have been lost. Ask the sender to resend the fax.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Flash device failure •
Remove the Flash DIMM and replace it with a new one.
14 – Control panel messages
EN
Flash file operation failed •
Check the filename and directory name.
•
Reattempt the operation.
1
Flash file system is full •
Delete files from the Flash DIMM or add another DIMM.
•
Download or delete files from the HP JetAdmin software, and download or delete fonts from the HP FontSmart software.
Flash is write protected •
Use the HP JetAdmin software to disable the write protection.
Group is empty, use ONE-TOUCH/SPEED DIAL 1 Begin adding fax numbers to the group-dial code by pressing the one-touch key for each number or by pressing [Speed Dial]. 2 Enter the speed-dial code for the fax number. 3 Press [Enter/Menu].
Initializing •
EN
Reseat the DIMM(s).
Chapter 1 – 15
Input device condition xx.yy 1st x = Device number in chain. 2nd x = Device type (3 types): 1 = Input 2 = Output 3 = Stapler/stacker unit yy = Device specific error. •
See the documentation that came with the paper-handling device.
Input limit reached •
The maximum number of fax numbers that can be added to an ad-hoc group is 100. Resend the fax, but only to 100 or fewer fax numbers.
Install front duplex cover •
Re-insert the duplexer’s front cover.
Install tray x •
Re-insert the specified tray.
•
Check for damaged tabs in the tray.
•
Check for damaged switches in the printer.
•
Replace the PCA controller in the feeder.
Invalid date or time •
Re-enter the date and time.
16 – Control panel messages
EN
Keypad test failed •
Run the keypad test again.
•
If the error persists, try each of the following in the order given: – Check the cabling. – Replace the control panel. – Replace the formatter.
Loading program alternates with Do not power off •
Wait for the program to load.
Long page? START to continue •
Press [Start] to continue scanning. If [Start] is not pressed within 3 seconds, the message disappears and the document scanner stops scanning because it thinks the page has jammed.
•
If sending a fax or copying a document longer than 991 mm (39 in), the control panel configuration can also be set to “Send long pages.” This ensures that long pages feed without having to monitor the task. Press [Start] before the document scanner shuts off.
Manually feed [type] [size] 1 Load the requested paper into Tray 1. 2 Press [Go] if the appropriate paper is already loaded in Tray 1. 3 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. 4 Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
Memory full - send unscanned pages •
Reload the unscanned pages and re-send them to finish the fax job.
•
Scan the unscanned pages to the computer and fax them from the computer.
EN
Chapter 1 – 17
1
Memory full - stored data lost •
Add more memory to the printer or simplify the print job.
Memory is full •
This message should clear automatically when the next task starts (for example, when you start a copy or receive a fax).
Memory settings changed •
Try changing the memory settings for I/O Buffering and Resource Saving (although default settings are usually best).
•
Install additional memory in the printer.
Memory shortage job cleared •
Press [Go] to continue.
•
On the printer control panel, change the setting for resource saving, or add more memory to the printer.
Memory shortage page simplified •
Press [Go] to continue.
•
Add more memory to the printer.
Modem error # (number 1-3) •
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, try each of the following in the order given: – Check the cabling. – Replace the LIU. – Replace the formatter.
18 – Control panel messages
EN
No answer •
Check the fax number and try resending the fax. If the message appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
No dial tone •
Check that the telephone cord is securely connected.
•
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by pressing [Manual Dial].
•
If necessary, check the wall outlet by plugging in a phone and attempting to place a call.
No fax in (number) tries •
Check the fax number and try resending the fax. If the message appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
No fax pages in memory to reprint •
Wait for a fax. As soon as a fax is in the memory, the fax will reprint.
No memory for report, erase/print document •
Print all faxes that have been received in memory.
•
If you have several faxes set up to be sent at a future time or to be polled, use job status to clear them.
No modem installed •
There is a problem with the line interface unit (LIU). – Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug in the power cord.
•
If the problem persists, replace the LIU.
•
If the problem persists, replace the formatter.
EN
Chapter 1 – 19
1
No room in fax log •
The fax log was unable to print because of an error, such as out-ofpaper. – Load paper in the paper input bin so the HP LaserJet 3100 product can print the log.
Not enough memory •
Try resending the job. If the error persists, try reducing the amount of activity on the HP LaserJet product. Cancel jobs in memory before resending the job.
Out of memory -- switching to ONE COPY •
The HP LaserJet product continues to copy, but only one copy is output. – Divide the copy job into smaller sections and then try copying again. – If you are collating the job, turn the collation feature off, make only one copy of the document at a time, or see the user guide for instructions about using the Document Assistant.
Output bin full alternates with Clear paper from [bin name] 1 Remove the media from the face-down tray. 2 Check PS1401 on the sensor PCA. 3 Make sure the sensor flag moves freely.
20 – Control panel messages
EN
Paper bin is empty, please add paper 1 Load paper.
1
2 If paper is already loaded, remove it. 3 Check for, remove, and discard any jammed sheets. 4 Reload the paper.
Password must be 4 digits •
Re-enter a four-digit password.
Paused (memory full) •
Reduce activity on the HP LaserJet product, or wait for other jobs to finish so memory will be freed.
•
If faxes are set up to be polled or sent at a future time, you may want to cancel these jobs to free memory.
Perform printer maintenance Reset the maintenance page count only after a maintenance kit has been installed. Resetting the maintenance page count causes PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE to appear after another 150,000 (LJ 5000 series), 200,000 (LJ 4000 series), or 350,000 (LJ 8000) pages have printed. 1 Hold down the [Item-] and [Value-] keys. 2 Turn the printer on. 3 Wait until RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT appears, and then release both keys.
EN
Chapter 1 – 21
PC print timed out •
Let the “print jobs retry” continue for 5 minutes. If the HP LaserJet 3100 product still does not print, resend the print job.
Phone number error •
The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 40. If you have a number longer than 40 characters, break the number into smaller chunks.
1 Enter the first part of the number, and press [Redial/Pause] as the last character in the first number. 2 Enter the second part of the number as if it were a second number going to a group. When the product dials, it will treat both numbers as if they are one.
Polling-in error •
Make sure that the sender’s fax machine is ready to be polled, and check the fax number. Then set up to poll again.
Printer comm error^1 •
Check that the parallel cable is securely connected between the HP LaserJet 3100 product and the computer.
•
If the problem persists, unplug the power cord from the power source for 5 seconds, and then replug it.
•
If the problems persists, replace the formatter.
Printer cover open or no cartridge •
Verify that the printer door is closed.
•
Check the toner cartridge for proper installation.
22 – Control panel messages
EN
Printer fixing error, replace fixing unit •
There is an error with the print engine.
•
Check the cabling to the heating element.
•
If the problem persists, replace the heating element.
•
If the problem persists, replace the ECU.
1
Printer is busy •
No action is needed. If you already started another job, the job will be completed when the HP LaserJet product becomes available.
Printer laser error, call for service •
Open and reclose the printer door.
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the problem persists, replace the laser scanner assembly.
Printer motor error, call for service •
A problem has occurred with the print engine. – Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord. – If the problem persists, replace the motor. – If the problem persists, replace the ECU.
Printer paper jam, check paper path •
EN
Check the input areas, the output areas, and the interior for the jam, and then clear the jam. The job should continue to print. If it does not, try reprinting the job.
Chapter 1 – 23
Printer signal error •
Open and reclose the printer door.
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the problem persists, replace the laser scanner assembly.
Processing job from Tray x •
Check the tray selected and the type settings. If the printer does not respond after you press the control panel keys, turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on to clear the message.
•
If paper is loaded when the printer is in Power Save mode, it might not be recognized. Open and close the affected source when the printer is in Ready mode.
RAM disk device failure •
Turn the printer off and on to clear the message.
•
If the message persists, install a new RAM disk.
RAM disk file operation failed •
Check the filename and directory name.
•
Reattempt the operation.
24 – Control panel messages
EN
RAM disk file system is full •
Delete files and then try again, or turn the printer off and then turn the printer on to delete all files on the device. (Use HP JetAdmin software, HP FontSmart software, or another software utility to delete files.)
•
If the message persists, increase the size of the RAM disk. – Change the RAM disk size from the Configuration menu in the printer control panel.
RAM disk is write protected •
Use HP JetAdmin software to disable the write protection.
Received error •
Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Redial failed •
Try resending the fax. If the fax still fails to transmit, call the recipient to check that the fax machine is on and working and to verify the fax number.
Remote fax was busy •
Try resending the fax. If the fax still fails to transmit, call the recipient to check that the fax machine is on is on and working and to verify the fax number.
Scan reference error •
Recalibrate the document scanner.
•
If the problem persists, replace the CIS.
EN
Chapter 1 – 25
1
Scanner error #1 •
An error has occurred within the SRAM.
•
Press and hold down the [Stop/Clear] key for 7 seconds to reset the product.
•
If the error persists, unplug the power cord from its power source for 10 seconds, and then replug it.
•
If the error persists, replace the CIS.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Scanner isn’t available •
The document scanner mechanism is in use. – Wait until the document scanner has finished the current job before sending the next job.
Scanner jam - reload •
Pull open the document release door and then remove the jammed document.
Speed dial (number) is not assigned •
Choose a speed-dial code that has already been assigned a fax number.
System error •
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and replug the power cord.
•
If the message is still displayed, replace the formatter.
26 – Control panel messages
EN
There are no documents in memory •
No action is required. There are no faxes to retrieve.
Tray x empty •
Load the empty tray (x) to clear the message.
•
Inspect the tray for damaged tabs.
•
Check the sensor-arm flags for damage. Be sure the flags can move freely.
•
Replace any defective sensors.
Tray x lifting •
Verify that the media can be pulled from another tray.
•
Replace the paper input unit.
Tray x load 1 Load the requested paper into the specified tray (x). Ensure that the trays are correctly adjusted for size. 2 Press [Go] to print from the next available tray. 3 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. 4 Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size. 5 Inspect the switches in the tray. 6 Remove the tray, and then turn the printer on. Push the switches by hand to see if the switches register.
EN
Chapter 1 – 27
1
Unrecognized format •
When printing, the incorrect printer driver was selected or an error occurred on the parallel interface.
1 After selecting the Print command in the software application you are using, select the HP LaserJet 3100 as the printer. 2 Reprint the job.
Unsuccessful call •
Check the fax number and try resending the fax.
•
If the message appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
Unsupported size in tray [yy] •
Load a supported paper size in the tray.
Use [type] [size] instead? 1 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes. 2 Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
28 – Control panel messages
EN
Numerical messages XX.YY printer error, press GO to continue Press [Go] on the printer control panel to clear the error message.
13 Paper jam •
Remove the jammed paper from the specified location. Check the entire paper path for other pieces of paper.
•
Open and close the top cover to clear the message.
•
Check sensors and flags in the paper path for proper operation.
13.1 Paper delay jam at paper feed area 13.2 Paper stopped jam at paper feed area •
Ensure that the paper trays are loaded properly so that paper can feed from the trays.
•
Check the input area for obstructions such as paper in the paper path or damage to the registration assembly.
•
Verify that the transfer roller is positioned correctly.
•
Check PS 102 and PS 103 (4000 series) and PS 402 and PS 403 (5000 series) for proper operation. – Replace any defective sensors or flags.
EN
Chapter 1 – 29
1
13.5 Paper delay jam at fuser 13.6 Paper stopped jam at fuser •
Check the transfer roller and small media belt to ensure that the roller and belt are operating and can feed the paper.
•
Check the paper path for obstructions at the transfer roller, toner cartridge, paper feed guide, and fuser.
•
Check PS 501 and PS 106 (4000 series), PS 1307 (5000 series), or PS 1403 (8000 series) for proper operation. Replace any defective sensors or flags.
13.9 Check left door •
Inspect the path between the fuser and delivery assemblies.
•
Check the diverter assembly.
13.10 Paper delay jam at paper reversing area/ duplexer •
Check the duplexer and the rear area of the printer for obstructions or damage.
•
In the duplexer, check PS 701 and PS 703 for proper operation.
•
Replace the duplexer if a sensor is defective.
13.11 Paper jam •
Check the entire paper path.
•
Reseat the duplexer.
•
Try the Paper Path Test.
•
Replace the duplexer.
30 – Control panel messages
EN
13.11 Paper jam in input device 1 Open the vertical transfer unit (VTU) and remove the media. 2 Verify that the entry or exit sensor can move freely. 3 If the problem persists, open the VTU and override its Open Door sensor, perform a Paper Path test from the 2,000-sheet Input Tray (or 2x500-sheet Input Tray), and make sure the feed rollers are advancing the paper. – If the rollers do not rotate, verify the connections at the main drive assembly, pickup assembly, controller PCA, and power supply. If the rollers still do not rotate or do not drop down, replace the pickup assembly. – If the rollers rotate and drop down without advancing the paper, replace the feed rollers using the maintenance kit. – If the problem persists, replace the VTU.
13.12 Paper jam •
Check the paper path between the fuser and duplex assembly.
•
Reseat the duplexer.
•
Replace the duplexer.
13.13 Paper jam •
Check the entire paper path.
•
Remove the duplex assembly and look for paper in the side of the assembly. – Retest.
•
EN
Replace the duplexer.
Chapter 1 – 31
1
13.20 Paper jam •
Check the paper path for obstructions.
•
Check that all assemblies are seated and all doors are closed.
•
Check all sensors and flags in the paper path.
13.21 Door open jam •
Check that all assemblies are seated and all doors are closed.
•
Check all sensors and flags in the paper path.
13.22 Paper jam in output device •
Open the flipper jam access door and remove the media.
•
Make sure the sensor flag moves freely.
•
Make sure that the flipper shaft is in place.
•
If the problem persists, replace the flipper assembly.
•
If the problem persists, replace the mailbox controller PCA.
20 Insufficient memory alternates with Press GO to continue •
Press [Go] to print the transferred data (some data might be lost); then simplify the print job or install additional memory.
32 – Control panel messages
EN
21 Page too complex •
Press [Go] to print the transferred data. (Some data could be lost).
•
To print the job without losing data, select Page Protect=on from the Configuration menu in the printer control panel and then print the job. Afterward, return to Page Protect=auto. Do not leave Page Protect=on; doing so could degrade performance.
•
If this message appears often, simplify the print job or install additional memory.
22 EIO x buffer overflow alternates with Press GO to continue (too much data sent to EIO card) Press [Go] to clear the message. (Data will be lost.)
•
22 Parallel I/O buffer overflow (too much data sent to parallel port) •
Check for a loose cable connection. Use a high-quality IEEE-1284 cable.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
22 Serial I/O buffer overflow alternates with Press GO to continue (too much data sent to the serial port) •
Verify that the correct option for serial pacing is selected on the I/O menu.
•
Print a Menu Map and verify that the serial pacing item (from the I/O Menu on the printer control panel) matches the setting on the computer.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
EN
Chapter 1 – 33
1
40 Bad serial transmission (data transfer error) •
Verify cable connections.
•
Verify that the printer serial configuration is set the same as the computer. – Access the serial baud rate setting from the I/O Menu on the printer control panel.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing.
40 EIO x bad transmission (connection between printer and EIO card broken) x = Description 1 = EIO slot 1 2 = EIO slot 2 •
Turn the printer off and reseat the card.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing.
41.3 Unexpected paper size •
Verify that all trays are adjusted correctly for size. (The printer attempts to print the job until size settings are correct.)
•
If you are trying to print from Tray 1, make sure that the paper-size setting in the printer control panel is configured correctly.
•
If you are trying to print from the optional 500-sheet tray, be sure to set the paper-size dial to match the paper size loaded in the tray.
•
Press [Go]. The page containing the error is automatically reprinted. (Or, press [Cancel Job] to clear the job from the printer’s memory.)
34 – Control panel messages
EN
41.x Printer error alternates with Press GO to continue •
1
A temporary printing error occurred. x = Description 1 = Unknown misprint error 2 = Beam detect error 4 = No VSYNC error 5 = Media feed error 9 = Noise VSREQ error Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically. If the error persists, try the following procedures:
•
– Reseat the connections to the laser scanner and the engine controller board. – Replace the laser scanner. – Replace the engine controller board.
50.x Fuser error x = Description 1 = Low fuser temperature 2 = Fuser warm-up service 3 = High fuser temperature 4 = Faulty fuser 5 = Inconsistent fuser 1 Turn the printer off, wait 20 minutes, and then turn the printer on. 2 If the message persists, reseat the fuser. 3 If the message persists, replace the fuser.
EN
Chapter 1 – 35
51.x Printer error (loss of beam detect) x = Description 1 = Beam detect error 2 = Laser error •
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Reseat the cables.
•
Replace the laser scanner.
52.x Printer error (the laser scanner speed is incorrect) x = Description 1 = Scanner startup error 2 = Scanner rotation error •
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Reseat the cables.
•
Replace the laser scanner.
53.xy.zz Printer memory error with an accessory The DIMM that caused the error will not be used. x = DIMM type 0 = read only memory (ROM) 1 = random access memory (RAM) y = Device location 0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM) 1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3 zz = Error number 36 – Control panel messages
EN
0 = Unsupported memory 1 = Unrecognized memory
1
2 = Unsupported memory size 3 = Failed RAM test 4 = Exceeded maximum RAM size 5 = Exceeded maximum ROM size 6 = Invalid DIMM speed 7 = DIMM reporting information incorrectly 8 = DIMM RAM parity error 9 = ROM needs to be mapped to an unsupported address 10 = DIMM address conflict 11 = PDC XROM out of bounds 12 = Unable to make a temporary mapping •
Turn the printer off, and reseat or replace the specified DIMM.
•
Try the DIMM in another slot.
•
Replace the DIMM that caused the error.
55 Printer error alternates with Press GO to continue (internal communications problem) •
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Check the power at the site.
•
Replace the formatter PCA.
•
Replace the DC controller.
•
Replace the engine controller board.
EN
Chapter 1 – 37
56.x Printer error alternates with Cycle Power to continue x = Description 1 = Illegal input 2 = Illegal output •
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Turn the printer off and on.
•
Check the printer’s configuration.
57.x Printer Error x = Description 4 = Printer fan 7 = Duplex fan •
Check the fan’s connector and verify that the fan is not blocked.
•
Replace the fan.
59.x Printer error x = Description 0 = Motor error 1 = Motor startup error 2 = Motor rotation error •
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Make sure that the fuser or toner cartridge is not hindering gear movement in the drive train.
•
Verify that the cable in the main motor is seated properly.
•
If the error persists, replace the motor.
38 – Control panel messages
EN
62.x Printer error (printer memory) x = Location of problem
1
0 = Internal memory 1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3 •
Reseat or replace the specified DIMM.
64.x Printer error (scan buffer) •
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
If the message persists, replace the formatter.
66 Error (external paper-handling device) First x = Device number in chain Second x = Device type (3 types): 1 = Input 2 = Output 3 = Stapler/stacker unit yy = Device-specific error •
Press [Go] to clear the message.
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Check all of the cables.
•
Reseat the external paper-handling device.
EN
Chapter 1 – 39
66.11 Input device failure •
Verify that the lifting plate lifts up freely by hand.
•
Verify that the paper size plates are installed correctly and are not bent.
•
Check the pickup roller for proper installation.
•
Check the pickup assembly and replace if necessary.
•
Replace Tray 4.
66.xx.yy Input device failure alternates with Check cables and cycle power •
Check for an error in an external paper-handling device. 1st x = Device number in chain 2nd x = Device type (3 types): 1 = Input 2 = Output 3 = Stapler/stacker unit yy = Device specific error
•
Press [Go] to clear the message.
•
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
•
Reseat the external paper-handling device.
68 NVRAM full check settings •
Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to determine which values have changed.
•
Hold down [Cancel Job] while turning the printer on.
40 – Control panel messages
EN
69.x Printer error x = Description
1
0 = The duplex mechanism has failed. 1 = The duplex side adjust has failed. •
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
•
Reseat the duplexer.
79.xxxx Error (printing) The printer detected an error. The numbers (xxxx) indicate the specific type of error. •
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Try printing a job from a different software application. If the job prints, go back to the first application and try printing a different file. (If the message appears only with a certain software application or print job, the customer should contact the software vendor for assistance.)
If the message persists, try the following procedures: •
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Reseat or replace the interface cable and power cycle the printer.
•
Remove the DIMMs one at a time and power cycle the printer.
•
If possible, use the parallel interface.
•
With the EIO cards removed from the printer, perform a cold reset.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
EN
Chapter 1 – 41
8x.yyyy critical error (EIO accessory) •
The EIO accessory in slot x has encountered a critical error as specified by yyyy. x = Description 1 = EIO slot 1 -The printer detected an error with the EIO card. 2 = EIO slot 2 -The printer detected an error with the EIO card. 6 = EIO slot 1 -The EIO card detected an error. The EIO card may be defective. 7 = EIO slot 2 -The EIO card detected an error. The EIO card may be defective.
•
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
•
Reseat or replace the EIO board.
42 – Control panel messages
EN
2
Service mode
Overview Service mode allows service personnel to verify and manipulate internal printer settings and to access the diagnostic feature. Service mode should be used only by authorized service personnel.
EN
Chapter 2 – 43
Service mode tasks You can perform the following tasks while in Service mode. •
Verify the page count.
•
Set the page count.
•
Set the maintenance count.
•
Verify and set the serial number.
•
Set the cold reset default. This sets the factory default paper size to either Letter or A4.
•
Turn the diagnostic function on or off (for software developer’s use only).
•
Clear the event log.
•
Use the extended Service mode.
•
Reset softswitches.
•
Perform a firmware download.
•
Recalibrate the document scanner.
•
Set the interval at which the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message appears on the control panel.
44 – Service mode
EN
Accessing Service mode 4000, 5000, and 8000 series only Use the following procedure to access Service mode. 1 Turn the printer off. 2 Press [Select] and [Cancel Job] simultaneously while turning the printer on. Hold the keys down until all lights are illuminated. (If the control panel reads INITIALIZING, the keys were released too soon.) 3 Press the right side of the [Menu] key, and then press [Select]. SERVICE MODE appears. 4 To exit Service mode, press [Go].
Accessing Service mode 3100 only Use the following procedure to access Service mode. 1 Press [Backspace#**] to access the extended service menu. 2 Use the [<] and [>] keys to select the choices given in the extended service menu (see the Extended service menu tree, page 52) and press [Enter/Menu]. See the display for further instructions. Notes about some of the menu choices are provided in the Extended service menu tree on page 52.
EN
Chapter 2 – 45
2
Setting the page count 4000, 5000, and 8000 series only The page count is stored in the printer’s non-volatile memory. If it is necessary to replace the formatter PCA, the page count should be set to the current value to reflect the age of the print engine. Use the following procedure to set the page count. 1 Before replacing the formatter PCA, print a Configuration Page to verify the current page count and serial number of the printer, if possible. Use the information on the Configuration Page to reset the page count and serial number for the new formatter PCA.
Note Press the right side of the [Menu] and [Item] buttons to increase the value (+). Press the left side of the [Menu] and [Item] buttons to decrease the value (-). 2 Press [Menu+] to display SERVICE MENU. 3 Press [Item+] to advance to the PAGES=XXXXXX display. XXXXXX represents the page count currently stored in the non-volatile memory. The underlined character denotes the position of the cursor. 4 Press [Select] to advance the cursor one digit to the right. If the last digit is currently selected, the cursor will move to the first digit when you press the [Select] key. 5 Press [Value+/-] to scroll the digit until the correct value is displayed for the underlined digit. (Pressing [Value+] when 9 is the value of the currently selected digit changes the value of the digit to 0). 6 Press [Select] to enter numeric changes to the current digit and to advance the cursor one digit to the right. 7 Press [Go] to exit the Service Menu.
46 – Service mode
EN
Setting the maintenance count 4000 and 5000 series only The maintenance count should be reset only after a maintenance kit has been installed. Resetting the maintenance count resets the maintenance counter so that the message PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE displays after another 150,000 (5000 series), 200,000 (4000 series), or 350,000 (8000 series) pages are printed.
2
Note MAINTENANCE COUNT in the Service mode Menu sets the page count interval for when the next printer service is due for the printer. The maintenance count is set initially at the factory. Editing this number is similar to editing the PAGES item. 1 Hold down the [Item-] and [Value-] keys. 2 Turn the printer on. 3 Wait until RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT displays and then release both keys.
EN
Chapter 2 – 47
Setting the serial number 4000 and 5000 series only Re-enter the serial number whenever you replace a formatter. 1 Press [Menu] to display the SERVICE MENU. 2 Press [Item+] three times. SERIAL NUMBER=XXXXXX displays. XXXXXX represents the page count currently stored in the printer’s nonvolatile memory. The underlined character denotes the position of the cursor. 3 Press [Select] to advance the cursor one digit to the right. If the last digit is currently selected, the cursor wraps around the first digit when you press the [Select] key. 4 Press [Value+/-] to scroll the digit until the correct value is displayed for the underlined digit. (Pressing [Value+] when 9 is the value of the currently selected digit will change the value of the digit to 0). 5 Press [Select] to enter numeric changes to the current digit and to advance the cursor one digit to the right. 6 Press [Go] to exit the Service Menu.
48 – Service mode
EN
Setting the page count, maintenance count, and serial number 8000 series only The page count, maintenance count, and printer serial numbers are stored in non-volatile memory. PAGECOUNT is the total number of images printed by the printer; MAINTCOUNT is the page count when the next preventive maintenance should be performed (every 350,000 images); and S.N. is the printer serial number (also located on the printer back cover). If it is necessary to replace the formatter PCA, these numbers should be set to the current values to accurately reflect the age of the print engine. The printer service manual provides the procedure for setting these values. Before removing the old formatter PCA, print a configuration page to verify the current values, if possible.
Note If it is not possible to print a configuration page, try to verify the values before replacing the formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 5, below.
After verifying the page count, maintenance count, and printer serial number from the old formatter PCA, replace it with the new PCA. 1 Enter Service mode. See “Service mode” in the printer service manual for instructions. 2 When SERVICE MODE is displayed, press [Menu] to access the Service Menu. 3 Press [Items] to display Pages = Maintenance count = Maintenance Interval = Serial Number =. 4 Enter the appropriate values for each item. 5 Press [Go] to exit Service mode.
EN
Chapter 2 – 49
2
Setting the default paper size used in a cold reset 4000, 5000, and 8000 series only Cold reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all defaults back to the factory setting. The default paper size is stored in NVRAM. Whenever the printer is cold reset, the default paper size is restored. The default paper size is set to the factory setting. Possible values are COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER and COLD RESET PAPER=A4. When replacing the formatter in countries that use the A4 paper size (in place of the letter- size paper), set the cold reset paper size to A4. To customize the cold reset paper size: 1 Enter the Service mode. See “Service Mode in the printer service manual for instructions. 2 Press [Menu] to display SERVICE MENU. 3 Press [Item+] until COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER* or A4 displays. 4 Press [Item+] to toggle between LETTER and A4. 5 Press [Select] to activate your choice. 6 Press [Go] to exit the Service Menu.
50 – Service mode
EN
Diagnostics 4000, 5000, and 8000 series only The diagnostics menu item enables or disables the use of the firmware diagnostic features. These features are accessible when DIAGNOSTICS=ON displays. To access the diagnostic features, verify that the printer is in the READY state and press [Select].
Note
2
This procedure is for software developers only.
Clear event log Select this item to clear the internal event log.
Extended service menu 3100 only Use the extended service menu to run various self-tests and to change softswitch settings, such as the country code softswitch setting. The following page shows the layout of the extended service menu settings in a hierarchical diagram.
EN
Chapter 2 – 51
Extended service menu tree Reports Help T.30 protocol trace SRAM dump Scanner plots Log debug report Task stacks Translations Printer fonts
Help prints a menu report for the product.
Softswitches Clear memory Check documents Edit SRAM SRAM dump Firmware version
See “To change the country code softswitch” on the following pages.
Memory/softswitch
Control panel Keypad test LCD test Control panel test Sensor states Speaker test All LCD characters
Various tests under Control panel can assist in troubleshooting the product.
Scanner Scanner plots Scanner LED
ADF feed test
ADF motor test Do TWAIN scan White ref summary
Scanner LED is the contact image sensor light bar test. ADF feed test runs the document feeder pickup rollers once. ADF motor test runs the document scanner motor.
Self test
Modem/PTT
52 – Service mode
Burn-in prints a report Burn-in Individual diagnostics after running the following tests: System reset Program test, Configuration test #1, Modem tone Fax memory test #2, Modem modulation Modem test #2, Scanner Modem type test #1, Scanner LED.
EN
Self-test in extended service mode 3100 only If you perform a self-test from the extended Service Menu, the printed report will also show the firmware revision number and details.
Note Print the internal reports before performing extended service mode tests. The reports contain a record of all settings and can assist you in restoring the product to its settings. The table below lists the tests that are performed during a self-test and the actions to take when tests fail. Extended service mode self-test failures Test
If the test fails, take these actions:
Configuration test #1 Replace the formatter. Fax memory test #1 Program test #1
1 Cycle power by unplugging the power cord
Configuration test #2
from the power source, waiting 10 seconds, and replugging the power cord.
Configuration test #3
2 If the test fails again, clear all memory (see
Configuration test #4
3 If the test fails again, replace the formatter.
the extended service menu tree, page 52).
Fax memory test #2 Fax memory test #3 Fax memory test #4 Fax memory test #5 Modem 1 test #1 Modem 1 test #2 Modem 1 test #3
EN
Chapter 2 – 53
2
Extended service mode self-test failures Test Modem 1 dial tone detect
If the test fails, take these actions: 1 Make sure that the telephone cable is plugged into the correct connector on the product and that the telephone line is operational (use a telephone to test the line).
2 If the test fails again, check the configuration settings in the control panel.
3 If the test fails again, replace the LIU. Scanner test #1
This test fails under normal conditions if the document scanner is busy. If the document scanner is not busy:
1 Cycle power by unplugging the power cord from the power source, waiting 10 seconds, and replugging in the power cord.
2 If the test fails again, clear all memory (see the extended service menu tree).
3 If the test fails again, replace the formatter.
54 – Service mode
EN
Other tests in extended service mode 3100 only The following charts shows tests that can be performed in extended service mode and provides a brief explanation of each test: Extended service mode tests Test
Explanation
Keypad test
Tests that all keys are functioning (by pressing the keys in sequence)
LCD test
Tests the control panel display
Control panel test
Tests the control panel lights
Sensor states
Shows current detector activation levels. Detector 1 and detector 2 are paper-size detectors. The control panel display shows the percentage of time each detector is activated
All LCD characters
Scrolls through the full list of control panel display characters
Scanner plots
Tests and recalibrates the document scanner
Scanner LED
After selecting this menu item, lift the document release door and verify that all of the LEDs in the contact image sensor are lit.
ADF feed test
Runs the document scanner pickup rollers once
ADF motor test
Runs the document scanner motor
Individual diagnostics
Run individual tests from the self-test sequence (see the extended service mode self-test failures table).
Modem tone
Generates tones with various frequencies from 300 Hz to 2425 Hz
Modem modulation
Generates various fax identification signals
EN
Chapter 2 – 55
2
Reports in extended service mode 3100 only The following chart shows reports that can be printed from extended service mode and provides a brief explanation of each report. Extended service mode reports Report
Explanation
T.30 protocol trace
Prints a report of the G3 protocol transmissions and receptions
SRAM dump
Prints SRAM address values in an address range you select
Scanner plots
Prints the calibration page
Log debug report
Prints detailed fax and memory address information. Fax information includes job number, start time used, fax ID, transmission type, pages, communication mode, and status.
Task stacks
Prints address locations of various tasks
Translations
Prints text strings used in the display, beginning with the number you select. These text strings are printed in the language currently in use by the product. Compare the numbers in this report to the numbers in an English report to translate non-English messages on the display.
Printer fonts
Prints all characters of fonts available in memory
Firmware version (under “memory/ softswitch”)
Shows firmware revision information on the control panel display
White reference summary (under “scanner”)
Displays average, minimum, and maximum white reference values
56 – Service mode
EN
Clear memory in extended service mode 3100 only
CAUTION Clearing memory clears all parameters, which can render the product illegal or inoperable. Print the internal reports before clearing memory in extended service mode. The reports contain a record of all settings and can assist you in restoring the product to its settings. To perform a system reset, use extended service mode to choose Memory/softswitch, and then choose Clear memory. Use the [<] and [>] keys to select the memory you want to clear: •
Documents (and log) deletes all documents stored in memory and all log information.
•
Phonebook deletes all numbers stored in the phonebook.
•
Configuration resets all menu settings printed in the configuration report to their defaults.
•
Softswitches resets all softswitches to their defaults.
•
Counters resets all page counts except the total number of pages printed. These page counts are printed at the end of the configuration report.
•
Everything deletes and resets all of the above. Information retained includes white reference curve, total page count, and serial number.
EN
Chapter 2 – 57
2
Softswitches 3100 only
Note Reset the country code softswitch whenever the formatter board is replaced or otherwise removed from the product, or when softswitches are reset to defaults. Extended service mode allows you to change softswitches on the 3100 product. A softswitch is a set of eight bits. See the software service manual for a complete list of softswitches.
To change the country code softswitch 1 Press [Backspace], [#], [*], and [*], in sequence, to access the extended service menu. 2 Press [<]or [>] until Memory/Softswitches appears below Service on the control panel. 3 Press [Enter/Menu]. 4 If Softswitches does not appear below Memory/Softswitches on the control panel, press [<] or [>] until it appears. 5 Press [Enter/Menu]. 6 Use the keypad to enter 101 (the “country code” softswitch). 7 Press [Enter/Menu]. 8 Use the keypad to enter the sequence that corresponds to the country in which the product is used. (See the list on the following page.)
58 – Service mode
EN
Country code softswitch sequences Australia Denmark Finland France Germany Ireland Netherlands Norway Sweden United Kingdom United States Canada
00001011 (0B hex) 00001100 (0C hex) 00001000 (08 hex) 00000111 (07 hex) 00000110 (06 hex) 00000010 (02 hex) 00001101 (0D hex) 00000101 (05 hex) 00000100 (04 hex) 00000001 (01 hex) 00000000 (00 hex) 00101001 (29 hex)
2
9 Press [Enter/Menu] to complete the softswitch change. 10 Press [Stop/Clear]. The product will exit extended service mode within a few minutes.
Firmware download 3100 only Newer versions of the firmware for the HP LaserJet 3100 product can be downloaded to the product.
To perform a firmware download 1 Restart the computer in MS-DOS® mode (do not use an MS-DOS window). 2 Press down and hold [Stop/Clear] while performing step 3. 3 Cycle power by unplugging the power cord from the power source, and then replugging in the power cord. 4 Type the following, substituting the current version of the firmware for XXX: Copy /b leonXXX.rom lpt1:
EN
Chapter 2 – 59
Recalibrating the document scanner 3100 only Recalibrate the document scanner if you notice that copies, items scanned to the computer, or faxes you send have black or white lines running through them.
To recalibrate the document scanner 1 Clean the HP LaserJet 3100 product before recalibrating it. (See “Cleaning the HP LaserJet 3100 product” in the product service manual.) 2 On the control panel, press [Enter/Menu]. 3 Press [<] once to display Service and press [Enter/Menu]. 4 Use the [<] and [>] keys to select Scan Correction and press [Enter/Menu].
5 Insert a blank, bright white piece of letter-sized paper into the document feeder tray. The HP LaserJet 3100 product pulls the piece of paper through and then prints a recalibration test page. Discard this page. The recalibration procedure is complete.
60 – Service mode
EN
3
Power supply
Overview This chapter details the distribution of AC and DC power.
EN
Chapter 3 – 61
Distribution of AC and DC power for the LaserJet 4000 series AC power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit in the engine controller board when the power switch (SW 101) is turned on. The low-voltage power supply circuit supplies +24 V DC and +3.3 V DC to the printer. DC power drives the following items: +24 VDC •
main motor
•
scanner motor
•
fan
•
high-voltage power supply
+3.3 VDC •
sensors
•
ICs on the engine controller board
•
EIO accessories
62 – Power supply
EN
3 Low-voltage power supply circuit (4000 series)
EN
Chapter 3 – 63
Distribution of AC and DC power for the LaserJet 5000 series The AC line voltage for the LaserJet 5000 printer is applied through the main switch (SW 101) and supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit through the fuse (FU1). The low-voltage power supply divides the AC voltage to +24 VDC, +5 VDC and +3.4 VDC and supplies them to the DC controller PCA. This circuit generates a zero-cross signal (ZEROX) and supplies it to the DC controller PCA. DC power is supplied as follows: +3.4 VDC •
ICs on the DC controller PCA and the BD PCA
+5 VDC •
laser driver PCA
•
sensors
+24 VDC •
high-voltage power supply PCA to drive the main motor
•
exhaust fan
•
scanner motor
•
clutches
•
solenoids
64 – Power supply
EN
3
Low-voltage power supply circuit (5000 series)
EN
Chapter 3 – 65
Distribution of AC and DC power for the HP LaserJet 3100 The AC, DC, and high-voltage power supply circuits are all contained within the ECU. The AC power circuitry supplies AC voltage whenever the power cord is connected to the AC power source. AC voltage is distributed to the DC power supply circuitry and to the AC driver circuitry. The AC driver circuitry controls AC voltage to the heating element in the fusing assembly. The DC power distribution circuitry distributes +5 V DC and +12 V DC as follows: +5 V DC •
formatter
•
photosensors
•
DC controller circuitry
•
laser/beam detect circuitry
+12 V DC •
motor
•
scanner motor
•
solenoid
+12VA DC •
high-voltage power supply
66 – Power supply
EN
Distribution of AC and DC power for the HP LaserJet 8000 series The AC and DC power supply circuits are contained in the low-voltage power supply (LVPS). The high voltages required for image formation are generated by the high-voltage power supply (HVPS). The lowvoltage power supply and distribution system are illustrated below.
3
Low-voltage power supply circuit (8000 series)
EN
Chapter 3 – 67
Protection Systems Problems on the load side, such as short-circuits, can cause an excessive flow of current from the DC power supplies or can generate abnormal voltage. When this happens, the excess-current and excessvoltage protection systems automatically shut off output voltage to protect the power supplies. If the protection systems are activated and the power supply circuit does not output DC voltage, turn the printer off, correct the problem in the faulty load, and then turn the printer on again.
68 – Power supply
EN
4
Input/Output (I/O)
Overview This chapter provides information on cabling and the printer interface.
EN
Chapter 4 – 69
Bidirectional parallel interface The formatter PCA receives incoming data through its bidirectional interface (IEEE 1284). The bidirectional parallel interface (IEEE-1284 compliant) is compatible with Centronics parallel interfaces. To take advantage of its enhanced capabilities, such as bidirectional communication, the following must be provided: •
Software application support for these features.
•
An IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable with the correct pin configuration (see Table 4-1).
4000, 5000, and 8000 only The user may configure the HIGH SPEED item in the Control Panel menu. The default setting, YES, allows the I/O to run at the higher speeds supported by most newer computers. When set to NO, the parallel interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible for older computers. The user may also configure the ADVANCED FUNCTIONS item. The default setting, ON, allows for two-way parallel communications. The OFF mode disables this advanced functionality.
70 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
Pin configurations Signal Name
Printer Pin #
nSTROBE DATA 1
1 2
Parallel Port Pin # 1 2
DATA 2
3
3
DATA 3
4
4
DATA 4 DATA 5
5 6
5 6
DATA 6 DATA 7
7 8
7 8
DATA 8 nACKNLG
9 10
9 10
BUSY CALL (PE)
11 12
11 12
SELECT nAUTOFd
13 14
13 14
On VDC (GND)
19 THRU 30
18 THRU 25
nFAULT
32
15
nSelIn
36
17
EN
4
Chapter 4 – 71
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cables HP helped develop the IEEE-1284 standard and is one of the first companies to introduce products that are compliant with it. HP offers four IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cables. Each is described below. Part number
Length
Connector type
C2950A
2 meters (7 feet)
Host A to printer B (large) connector
C2951A
3 meters (10 feet)
Host A to printer B (large) connector
C2945A
2 meters (7 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
C2946A
3 meters (10 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
C2947A
10 meters (33 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
Maximum I/O Cable Lengths Serial RS-232C RS-422A Parallel (non-IEEE-1284)
15 meters (50 feet) 610 meters (2000 feet)
Parallel (IEEE-1284) with “B” type connector Parallel (IEEE-1284) with “C” type connector
3 meters (10 feet)
72 – Input/Output (I/O)
3 meters (10 feet)
10 meters (33 feet)
EN
Attaching the printer cables The printer’s parallel port can have one or both of the following connectors: B-type parallel (large) C-type parallel (small)
B-type
C-type
Printer interface connections
RS-232-C/RS-422-A serial interface For this information, see the wiring diagram for common serial input/output cables in the printer service manual.
EN
Chapter 4 – 73
4
Configuring the computer interface To configure the computer interface, see the HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference Service Guide, Volume I.
74 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
LocalTalk I/O* The printer implements AppleTalk networking protocol through LocalTalk hardware. The LocalTalk network cable (HP part number 92215N) is connected through the EIO card.
Expanded I/O* The optional expanded I/O card can be installed in the slots provided on the Formatter PCA. The expanded I/O card provides automatic I/O switching between multiple computers or networks connected to the printer. The network version printers include the HP JetDirect Multi-protocol Network Card with Ethernet/10Base-T and 10Base-2, and LocalTalk.
Flash* Flash is provided in optional 2 and 4 megabyte (MB) flash memory DIMMs for storage of forms, fonts, and signatures.
4
Disk* The optional EIO-based hard disk is used for creating multiple original prints (mopies) and for storing forms, fonts, and signatures. *This feature does not apply to the HP LaserJet 3100.
EN
Chapter 4 – 75
76 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
5
Media specifications
Overview Use media that meet the specifications listed on the following pages. By doing so, you will minimize the incidents of paper jams, prevent premature wear to the printer, and reduce repair costs. Hewlett-Packard recommends testing print media before buying it in large quantities.
Note For complete paper specifications for all HP LaserJet printers, see the HP LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide.
EN
Chapter 5 – 77
Paper sizes Metric System Size
Metric Dimensions
U.S. Dimensions
A0
841 x 1189 mm
33.1 x 46.8 in
A3
297 x 420 mm
11.7 x 16.5 in
A4
210 x 297 mm
8.3 x 11.7 in
A5
148 x 210 mm
5.8 x 8.3. in
B4 (ISO)
250 x 353 mm
9.8 x 13.9 in
B5 (ISO)
176 x 250 mm
6.9 x 9.8 in
Imperial (U.S.) System Size
U.S. Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Ledger
11 x 17 in
279 x 432 mm
Legal
8.5 x 14 in
216 x 356 mm
Letter
8.5 x 11 in
216 x 279 mm
Executive
7.3 x 10.5 in
191 x 267 mm
Custom
5.8 x 8.2 in to 8.5 x 14 in
149 x 210 mm to 216 x 356 mm
JIS B4**
10.1 x 14.3 in
257 x 364 mm
JIS B5**
7.2 x 10 in
182 x 257 mm
J Postcard*
3.9 x 5.8 in
100 x 148 mm
J Double Postcard*
5.8 x 7.9 in
148 x 200 mm
* J - Japanese ** JIS Japanese Industry Standard
78 – Media specifications
EN
Paper specifications Category
Specifications
Acid content
5.5 pH to 8.0 pH
Basis weight: 4000 series Tray 1 4000/4000 N Tray 2 4000 T/4000 TN Tray 2 and Tray 3 4000 series optional 500-sheet tray 4000 series Duplexer 5000 series: Tray 1 Tray 2 or optional 250-sheet Tray Optional 500-sheet Tray Duplexer 3100: Paper input bin Single-sheet input slot Document feeder tray
8000 series: Standard output bin Left output bin Optional 2000-sheet input tray Duplexer
60 to 199 g/m2 (16 to 53 lbs) 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) (up to 42 lbs using the front output slot) 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) (up to 42 lbs using the front output slot) 44 to 105 g/m2 (12 to 28 lbs) (up to 67 lbs using the special media lever)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
Optional envelope feeder: 4000 series 8000 series
75 to 105 g/m2 (20 to 28 lbs) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lbs)
Caliper
3.0 to 7.0 mils (0.094-0.18 mm)
5
Curl in ream
Flat within 5 mm (0.2 in)
Condition of cut edge
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 205°C (400°F) for 0.1 second
Grain
Long grain
Moisture content
4% to 6% by weight
Smoothness
100-250 Sheffield
EN
Chapter 5 – 79
Paper weight equivalences Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight, locate the bond weight (in row 3, fourth column) and scan across the row to the cover weight (in the sixth column). The equivalent is 28 lb.
Note Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade. Metric wt (g/m2) U.S. weights (lb) or thickness (mm) Europe
Japan
Postcard* Bond thickness Wt
Text book Wt
Cover Bristol Index Wt Wt Wt
Tag Wt
37
60
60
16
41
22
27
33
64
64
17
43
24
29
35
39
75
75
20
50
28
34
42
46
80
80
21
54
30
36
44
49
80
81
22
56
31
38
46
51
90
90
24
60
33
41
50
55
100
100
27
68
37
45
55
61
105
105
28
70
39
49
58
65
120
120
32
80
44
55
67
74
120
128
34
86
47
58
71
79
135
135
36
90
50
62
75
83
148
148
0.18
39
100
55
67
82
91
157
157
0.19
42
107
58
72
87
97
163
163
0.20
43
110
60
74
90
100
176
176
0.23
199
199
47
119
65
80
97
108
53
134
74
90
110
122
* U.S. postcard measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
80 – Media specifications
EN
Troubleshooting paper problems Paper problems can be difficult to detect. The following series of steps will help isolate paper-induced problems versus printer problems: •
Isolate a paper path.
•
Isolate a brand of paper.
•
Isolate a type of paper.
•
Evaluate paper-use practices.
•
Evaluate environmental conditions.
Here are some paper usage tips: •
Turn the paper over and print on the other side. Doing so often corrects excess paper curl.
•
Rotate the paper 180° (end-for-end) to feed a different leading edge. This can help correct multi-sheet feeding problems.
Papers to avoid •
NCR self-carbon (or “carbonless” paper)
•
paper that has been preprinted (such as letterhead) with ink that will not withstand fuser heat (205° C [400° F] for 0.1 second)
•
plastic-fiber paper
•
embossed paper
•
paper with cutouts or perforations
•
chemically treated paper
•
coated paper
•
synthetic paper
•
multi-part forms
•
odd-sized paper
5
If your printer is having trouble with paper jams, multi-feeds, or misfeeds, use HP-brand paper: HP 20 lb Multi-Purpose Paper, part number 9300-2092; HP 24 lb LaserJet Paper, part number 9300-2091.
EN
Chapter 5 – 81
General tips Paper curl Paper curl results from both the heating process used to bond the print image (toner) to the paper and from the path that the paper must negotiate through the printer. Take the following actions to help reduce paper curl: 1 Turn the paper over in the input tray. Some paper packages (reams) have an arrow indicating the preferred printing side. Experiment to determine which orientation yields the least curl. 2 Try a different output paper path (if available for your printer). Using the “face-up” output path may yield more acceptable results than the standard “face-down” output bin. 3 Protect the paper from adverse environmental conditions prior to use. Paper designed for laser printing has an initial moisture content of 4-6 percent which is maintained as long as it is stored properly. Once the paper has been removed from its packaging it will dry out or absorb additional moisture, depending on the environment. Excess moisture in the paper will increase the amount of curl. 4 Try a different type or brand of paper. Not all paper is designed for laser printing. Much of the paper curl that is induced by the laser printer fusing process will tend to relax within the first 24 hours following printing. However, the curl on the leading edge of the page may remain longer because the leading edge tends to remain in contact with the fusing roller for longer periods.
82 – Media specifications
EN
Envelope specifications Category
Specifications
Basis weight
Should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 lb)
Caliper
3.3 to 5.5 mils (0.084 to 0.14 mm) single layer thickness
Curl
Less than 6 mm (0.25 in) curl across entire surface
Finishing
Accurate, sharply creased folds with no more than two thicknesses of paper at the leading edge
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 205° C (400° F) for 0.1 second
Moisture content
4% to 6% by weight
Paper
Must meet all the normal paper specifications
Smoothness
100 to 250 Sheffield
Envelope sizes Imperial (U.S.) system Size
U.S. Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Tray 1: Minimum Maximum
3 x 5 in 8.5 x 14 in
76 x 127 mm 216 x 356 mm
Optional envelope feeder: Minimum 3.5 x 6.3 in Maximum 7 x 10 in
90 x 160 mm 178 x 254 mm
EN
Chapter 5 – 83
5
Envelopes to avoid Do not use the following envelopes: •
with clasps, snaps, or tie strings
•
with transparent windows, holes, perforations, or cutouts
•
having an open flap with adhesive exposed
•
having paper, inks, adhesives, or materials that discolor, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when exposed to 205° C (400° F)
•
having extremely smooth, shiny, rough, textured, or deeply embossed surfaces
•
damaged, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped
•
constructed with encapsulating adhesives that do not require moistening, but rely instead on pressure to seal them
Preventing printer malfunctions caused by envelopes When you are printing on envelopes, use these preventive measures to avoid printer malfunctions. •
Carefully feed the envelopes into the printer.
•
Be aware of the envelope’s construction.
84 – Media specifications
EN
Envelope feeding Follow these preventive measures when feeding envelopes: •
Envelopes can be manually fed through the printer or they can be fed automatically through an envelope tray or feeder.
•
Closely inspect the leading edge of the envelopes before feeding them into the printer. Ensure that the leading edge is flat. Watch for envelope curl. Flatten the leading edge of the envelope before printing.
•
Be patient; in manual feed mode the printer displays a message when it is ready to accept the next envelope. Wait for this message to appear before inserting the next envelope.
•
Do not allow a large quantity of envelopes to accumulate in the output bin.
•
On most printers, use the rear (or front) output bin (if available) when printing envelopes. Do not use the top (face-down) output bin.
Envelope construction •
The corner folds need to be well-creased, with no more than two thicknesses of paper.
•
The envelopes must lay flat.
•
The paper grain should be diagonal to the direction of the feed.
•
Adhesives must meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
•
Basis weight must not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 pounds).
•
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, tie strings, or windows.
•
Do not use envelopes made of synthetic materials.
EN
Chapter 5 – 85
5
Label specifications Category
Specifications
Adhesive
Must not be on any external surfaces of the label before, during, or after printing. Label construction and die-cutting must not allow labels to peel off during transport, printing, or fusing.
Caliper
Must not exceed 0.18 mm (0.007 in)
Curl
In ream: flat within 13 mm (0.5 in)
Finishing precision
Cut sheet within 0.79 mm (0.031 in) of nominal and 0.20° square
Fusing compatibility
All adhesions, carrier sheets, top sheets, and other materials used in label construction must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 205° C (400° F) for 0.1 second.
Packaging
Use moisture-proof wrap to preserve properties.
86 – Media specifications
EN
Preventing printer malfunctions caused by adhesive labels As with envelopes, prevention is the best way to avoid printer malfunctions caused by adhesive labels. To prevent paper jams and feed problems, labels must meet the following requirements: •
Be cut long grain (as opposed to short grain).
•
Totally cover the carrier sheet (no spaces between labels, no removed labels).
•
Contain no excessive glue. (The adhesive should be acrylic-based emulsion and should not come into direct contact with the printer.)
•
Meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
•
Meet HP specifications for caliper.
•
Have a carrier sheet that is not too smooth.
•
Use the flat paper path (manual feed slot and rear, or front, face-up delivery door), which is the recommended printing method.
5
EN
Chapter 5 – 87
Transparency specifications Category
Specifications
Caliper
3.9 to 4.3 mils (0.100 to 0.110 mm)
Cutting angle
90° ± 0.2°
Finishing precision Cut sheet to within 0.8 mm (0.03 in) of nominal and ± 0.2° of square Fusing compatibility
Overhead transparency material must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset material, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 205° C (400° F) for 0.1 second.
Preventing printer malfunctions caused by transparencies Use these preventive measures to avoid printer malfunctions caused by transparencies: •
Use the straightest paper path to avoid curling and other problems.
•
Use transparencies with the correct resistivity.
•
Use transparencies that meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
•
Remove each printed sheet from the tray and place it on a flat surface before printing the next sheet.
88 – Media specifications
EN
HP paper training video HP has developed a training video focusing on how paper is manufactured and how the manufacturing process relates to the use of paper in HP LaserJet printers. Part numbers are shown below. Part Number
5961-0711
The Paper Video explains the manufacturing process.
5961-0712
Version (VHS Format) National Standard Television Committee (NTSC) version (U.S.) PAL version (Europe, Asia)
5
EN
Chapter 5 – 89
90 – Media specifications
EN
6
Toner cartridge information
Overview This chapter provides information on toner cartridges and their use. Hewlett-Packard recommends using HP toner cartridges, which are designed specifically to enhance the output from the HP LaserJet family of printers.
EN
Chapter 6 – 91
Cartridge weights and page counts Page count at 5% coverage
HP LaserJet
Product Cartridge Full weight
Empty weight
4000 series
C4127A
EP-A
1295 gm (45.7 oz)
1020 gm (36 oz)
6,000
4000 series
C4127X
EP-X
1445 gm (51 oz)
1000 gm (35.3 oz)
10,000
5000 series
C4129X
1880 gm (66.3 oz)
1450 gm (51.1 oz)
10,000
3100
C3906A
730 gm (26.1 oz)
640 gm (22.7 oz)
2,500
8000 series
C3909A
3000 gm (106 oz)
2200 gm (80.5 oz)
15,000
Mopier 240 C3909S
3000 gm (106 oz)
2200 gm (80.5 oz)
15,000
92 – Toner cartridge information
EN
Potential toner cartridge issues Banding When printing with a laser printer, the toner is applied across the page in horizontal strips. The page is moved through the printer and toner is continually applied. When printing text or black image pages, a large amount of toner is deposited on the page. As the amount of toner deposited on the page decreases, slight speed variations become more apparent. As the resolution (dots per inch) and the speed (pages per minute) increase, a variation in pattern intensity may appear on the page as lines or bands. The bands are more visible in certain grayscale patterns. High speed printers that are capable of printing high resolution grayscale patterns are more likely to display the pattern variations. Changing the grayscale pattern or reducing the resolution may significantly reduce the amount of banding that occurs.
Character voids Small gaps or voids may appear in some of the characters when printing on media other than standard photocopier paper. These “character voids” occur because some print media does not accept the transfer of toner as well as others. To minimize the occurrence of character voids, avoid media with a rough finish. Use media that is within the Hewlett-Packard paper specifications listed in the user guide or the HP LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide. If the finish is too rough, the surface will consist of large inconsistencies. If the finish is too smooth, toner will not adhere well. Adjusting the print density may affect the severity of character voids.
6
EN
Chapter 6 – 93
Toner cracking When the paper is folded and the crease aligns with a line of text, it is possible with certain types of paper for the text to break along the line, giving the appearance of a white line through the text. Papers that do not meet the smoothness (100-250 Sheffield, 100-500 Bendtsen) or wax pick (>11 Dennison) are likely to exhibit this effect more than others. Toner in the HP LaserJet printers is composed of minute particles of pigmented plastic material (styrene) and iron oxide. When the toner is subjected to the fusing temperature, these individual iron-impregnated plastic particles become part of a larger plastic image on the page. When the printed page is subsequently folded, the plastic image must also give, in some fashion, to accommodate the fold. If the print image has been well-set into the paper, this resulting break in the plastic will not be apparent. However, if the toner is unable to adequately penetrate the paper fibers or if, in the process of folding the paper, the paper fibers behind the toner break away from the page itself, the result will be a “white line” through the image. There are several ways to minimize this effect: •
Ensure that the paper being used meets all of the specifications provided in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide; in particular the smoothness and wax pick.
•
A lighter density setting will ensure that the toner image will be composed of less plastic material, thus minimizing the resulting effect of trying to fold the toner image.
•
For the reasons listed earlier, a more narrow character-stroke width might also help.
•
Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) paper may fix toner cracking problems (see also the HP MICR User’s Guide).
In xerographic (laser) printing, using paper that has a laid finish often causes problems. The surface roughness of the paper is often responsible for the problems. Paper that is stiffer than xerographic paper also causes problems. Stiff papers do not fold well. When stiff paper is folded and a toner image is applied to the paper’s surface, the problems are even worse.
94 – Toner cartridge information
EN
Transfer of toner image After printing a document on an HP LaserJet printer, folding it, and sending it through the mail, you might observe that a portion of the print image was transferred to opposing surfaces of the folded document. The laser printing process uses a pigmented plastic powder (toner) to form a print image that is first transferred to a sheet of paper (or other print medium) and then melted (fused) onto the surface of the paper to form a permanent image. Though paper is usually thought of as being “soft,” it is actually quite abrasive. When the printed page is folded, movement under pressure between a paper surface and the toner image may cause the paper to abrade (scratch) the toner, causing a transfer of the toner material onto the opposing surface of the paper. This can be demonstrated by rubbing a print image against (or into) a clean sheet of paper. Some machinery, such as that used by the U.S. Postal Service to sort mail, can apply the necessary pressure and agitation to cause this toner image transfer phenomenon. To minimize this effect: •
Minimize the amount (or height) of toner used to produce the print image.
•
Use a paper that is less abrasive.
•
Ensure optimal fusing of the toner (print) image to the paper.
The amount of toner used to produce a print image is controlled by the print density dial, slide, or control panel settings in the HP LaserJet printers. The print density should be adjusted for a lighter image to reduce the amount (height) of toner prone to abrasive transfer. HP LaserJet printers have been designed for optimum results with xerographic (laser) bond papers, such as XEROX 4024 photocopy paper. The properties of this type of paper (for example, surface roughness, composition, moisture content) are such that the other causes of potential toner transfer are minimized. Photocopy papers are typically less abrasive than other types of paper (such as writing bond) and are also formulated to ensure optimal fusing of the toner image. Using other types of paper will generally yield less than optimal results in laser printers. For help in selecting paper suitable for use in the EN
Chapter 6 – 95
6
HP LaserJet printers, refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. This guide can be ordered by calling HP Parts Direct at 800-227-8164 in the U.S., or HP Distribution at 970-339-7009. Because of the way that laser printing is accomplished, currently there is no way to entirely eliminate the possibility of toner transfer. However, using these techniques should yield more satisfactory results and will often reduce the problem to imperceptible levels.
Gray background on envelopes Poor print quality is normally the result of using envelopes that are of the incorrect weight or finish. The paper used to construct the envelope may be embossed; or may be too heavy, too rough or too slick; or may be made in such a way that it is incompatible with the high temperatures encountered in toner fusing. The result is that the toner does not adhere well to the surface. Also, on heavier envelopes, a gray background may appear on the front (or print side) of the envelope. To reduce the gray background, the print density may need to be set to a darker setting.
96 – Toner cartridge information
EN
HP PLANET PARTNERS The U. S., Canada, Europe, and Australia now have HP toner cartridge recycling programs. The used toner cartridge should be placed in the wrapper and box that held the new cartridge and sent back for recycling. U.S.
A brochure explaining the recycling program in the U.S., part number 50911325EUS, can be ordered. The customer returns used toner cartridges via UPS at no cost to the customer using shipping labels included in the brochure. The toner cartridges can be shipped one at a time or in volume shipments. Some of the parts are recycled to make new cartridges. Other parts are melted for re-use as raw materials. If the customer has any questions, and to receive the free recycling brochure, refer them to the Customer Information Center at (800) 752-0900.
AUSTRALIA Australian customers can send their toner cartridges to their local HP dealer. If more than 30 cartridges a month are used, contact the local dealer for instructions on how to have the cartridges picked up directly from the customer's site. For further information, contact the dealer or local HP sales office.
EUROPE
The recycling program in Europe currently includes these countries: Germany, Switzerland, Austria, United Kingdom, the Netherlands, and Sweden. If more than 30 cartridges a month are used, contact the local dealer for instructions on how to have the cartridges picked up directly from the customer's site. For further information, contact the dealer or local HP sales office.
CANADA
Canada uses Federal Express for their recycling program. At least eight but no more than 40 Toner Cartridges can be shipped at one time. Shipments of less than eight cartridges are at the shipper's expense. Call Federal Express at (800) GoFedEx; (800) 463-3339 to arrange for free pickup of the bundled cartridges. Fill out a Federal Express Waybill or obtain a preprinted one from your dealer. In Alberta, B.C., Manitoba, NWT, Saskatchewan, and the Yukon, send the bundles to: Hewlett-Packard Toner Cartridge Recycling Program 6551 Westminister Hwy, Unit 160 Richmond, B.C. V7C 4V4 Acct. No.: 1246-1740-5 In the Atlantic provinces, Ontario, and Quebec send the bundles to: Hewlett-Packard Toner Cartridge Recycling Program 6600 Goreway Drive, Unit C Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1S6 Acct. No.: 1246-1740-5 For more information, call: Canada wide: (800) 387-3867 Dept. 129; Toronto: (800) 678-9430 Ext. 4981
Note Recycling information is included in the toner cartridge package.
For additional information about HP corporate-wide, environmental policies, practices, and awards, visit www.hp.com. EN
Chapter 6 – 97
6
Refill Statement Hewlett-Packard toner cartridges have been designed to maximize the reliability of the HP LaserJet printer by including all of the components that need frequent replacement or adjustment within the cartridge. While we recognize that all parts of this critical printer mechanism will not wear consistently, the HP toner cartridge has been designed to optimize the exceptional print quality that is synonymous with the HP LaserJet printer name. While Hewlett-Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled toner cartridges during the warranty period or under a maintenance contract, we also do not recommend their use for the following reasons: 1 The HP LaserJet toner cartridge is not designed to be refilled or remanufactured. 2 Hewlett-Packard has no control or process to ensure that a refilled toner cartridge will function at the high level of reliability of a new HP LaserJet toner cartridge. Hewlett-Packard also cannot predict what the long-term effect on the printer's reliability could be from using different toner formulations found in refilled cartridges. Because the HP LaserJet printer has the highest reliability reputation in the industry, we are concerned about any usage that might affect this reputation. 3 Hewlett-Packard has no control over the actual print quality of a refilled toner cartridge. The print quality of the HP LaserJet toner cartridge directly influences the customer's perception of the HP LaserJet printer itself. The high print quality of the HP LaserJet printer is one of the primary reasons for the success of the product and we are keenly interested in maintaining that image. The entire family of HP LaserJet printers is covered under a standard one-year warranty from the date of purchase. Hewlett-Packard offers optional maintenance contracts after the one-year warranty expires. The use of refilled toner cartridges alone does not affect either the warranty or any maintenance contract purchased from HP. However, if an HP LaserJet printer failure or damage is found to be directly attributed to the use of a refilled toner cartridge, the repair will not
98 – Toner cartridge information
EN
be covered under the warranty or by the maintenance contract. Rather, standard time and material charges will be applied to service the printer for that particular failure or damage. Hewlett-Packard is constantly striving to provide the highest quality printer products possible. The HP LaserJet printer family was designed for optimum output performance when the printing mechanism is periodically replaced with a new HP toner cartridge. The HP toner cartridge is designed specifically to enhance the output from the HP family of printers. We know that the highest quality print results will be obtained when new HP toner cartridges are used with HP LaserJet printers.
6
EN
Chapter 6 – 99
100 – Toner cartridge information
EN
7
Printer options and replaceable parts
Overview The following tables list the products, product numbers, product descriptions, and service part numbers for each printer. Parts can be ordered through HP Parts Direct Ordering at (800) 227-8164 (U.S. only). For additional product support, see the inside back cover of this guide.
EN
Chapter 7 – 101
Printer options and replaceable parts Product Memory
Fonts
Enhanced I/O Cards
Hard Disk
Product Product Description Number
Service Part Number
C4135A
4 MB EDO DIMM
C4135-67901
C4136A
8 MB EDO DIMM
C4136-67901
C4137A
16 MB EDO DIMM
C4137-67901
C4140A
4 MB SDRAM DIMM
C4140-67901
C4141A
8 MB SDRAM DIMM
C4141-67901
C4142A
16 MB SDRAM DIMM
C4142-67901
C4143A
32 MB SDRAM DIMM
C4143-67901
C3913A
64 MB SDRAM DIMM
C3913-67901
C4286A
2 MB Flash DIMM
N/A
C4287A
4 MB Flash DIMM
N/A
C4292A
Traditional Chinese Font DIMM (8 MB Asian ROM)
N/A
C4293A
Simplified Chinese Font DIMM (8 MB Asian ROM)
N/A
D4838A
Korean (8 MB Asian ROM)
N/A
J3110A
Ethernet RJ-45 only
N/A
J3111A
Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC, LocalTalk
J3111-61003
J3112A
Token Ring RJ-45 and DB-9
N/A
J3113A
10/100Base-TX networks
N/A
C2985A
Hard Disk
N/A
102 – Printer options and replaceable parts
EN
EN
4000
5000
8000
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
3100
Chapter 7 – 103
7
Product
Product Product Description Number
Service Part Number
Parallel Cables
C2950A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (2.0 m)
N/A
C2951A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (3.0 m)
N/A
C2945A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to C (2.0 m)
N/A
C2946A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to C (3.0 m)
N/A
C2947A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to C (10.0 m)
N/A
C2932A
9-9 pin serial cable (male/female)
N/A
C2933A
9-25 pin serial cable (male/female)
N/A
C2809A
25-9 pin serial adaptor (male/female)
N/A
92215S
Macintosh Computer Serial Cable
N/A
92215N
Macintosh Network Cable Kit
N/A
C4781A
2,000-sheet Input Tray and Paper N/A Feeder
C4124A
500-sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
C4125-67901
C4125A
500-Sheet Universal Replacement Tray
N/A
C3122A
Standard 500-sheet Tray
N/A
C4115A
500-sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
N/A
C4117
500-Sheet Replacement Tray
C4117-69001
Serial Cables
Trays
104 – Printer options and replaceable parts
EN
4000
5000
z
z
z
z
8000
3100
z z
z z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z z
z z z z z
EN
z
Chapter 7 – 105
7
Product
Product Product Description Number
Service Part Number
Trays, continued
C4780A
Two 500-sheet trays and Paper Feeder
N/A
C4114A
250-sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
N/A
C4126A
250-sheet Universal Replacement Tray
C4126-67901
C4116A
250-sheet Replacement Tray
C4116-69001
C4098A
Tray 2 (500-sheet Input Tray) or RG5-3951-000CN Tray 4 (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray)
C4099A
Tray 3 (500-sheet Input Tray) or RG5-3952-000CN Tray 5 (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray)
C4122A
Envelope Feeder
Envelope Feeder
C3765B
Envelope Feeder
Duplexer
C4123A
Duplex Printing Accessory
C4123-69001
C4113A
Duplex Printing Accessory
C4113-69001
C4782A
Duplex Printing Accessory
C4783A
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
C4785A
Multibin Mailbox
C4787A
5-bin Mailbox with stapler
Mailbox
Media
C4122-69001
HPM1120 HP Multi-purpose Paper
M1120
HPJ1124
J1124
HP LaserJet Paper
106 – Printer options and replaceable parts
EN
4000
5000
8000
3100
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
EN
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Chapter 7 – 107
7
Product
Product Product Description Number
Service Part Number
Toner Cartridges
C4127A
Toner Cartridge (6,000 pages)
N/A
C4127X
Toner Cartridge (10,000 pages)
N/A
C4129X
Toner Cartridge (10,000 pages)
N/A
C3906A
Toner Cartridge (2,500 pages)
N/A
C3909A
Toner Cartridge (15,000 pages)
N/A
C3909S
3 Toner Cartridges (15,000 pages) (Mopier 240)
N/A
C4789A
Connects a multibin mailbox to N/A the printer when the printer is on a printer stand.
Power Box
Upgrade Kit C4095A
LJ 5Si to LJ 8000 Upgrade Kit
108 – Printer options and replaceable parts
N/A
EN
4000
5000
8000
3100
z z z z z
z
z
EN
Chapter 7 – 109
7
Product
Product Description
Service Exchange Part Number Number
Maintenance Service Maintenance Kit with C4118-67902 110V fuser (4000 series) Kit
C4118-69001*
Service Maintenance Kit with 220V fuser (4000 series)
C4118-67903
C4118-69002*
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V fuser (5000 series)
C4110-67902
C4110-69006*
Service Maintenance Kit with 220V fuser (5000 series)
C4110-67903
C4110-69007*
Preventative Maintenance Kit C3971B with 110 V fuser (8000 series)
C3971-69002*
Preventative Maintenance Kit C3972B with 220 V fuser (8000 series)
C3972-69002*
*Requires exchange
110 – Printer options and replaceable parts
EN
4000
5000
8000
3100
z z z z z z
EN
Chapter 7 – 111
7
112 – Printer options and replaceable parts
EN
8
Printer parts
Overview This chapter provides the part numbers and descriptions of the most commonly used assemblies and subassemblies in the HP LaserJet printers. The shaded numbers in the tables refer to the location of the part in the printer, as shown in the corresponding illustrations.
Note See your printer service manual for a complete listing of hardware components.
EN
Chapter 8 – 113
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
Figure 8-1
Common Hardware
114 – Printer parts
EN
Common Hardware 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6
EN
Part Number
Product Description
XB1-2300-606CN XB1-2300-507CN XB1-2300-607CN 0515-1895 XB1-2301-407CN XB1-2400-606CN XB1-2400-809CN 0515-1912 XB1-1300-807CN FA9-1449-000CN XA9-0267-000CN XA9-0253-000CN XA9-0542-000CN XA9-0540-000CN XA9-0653-000CN XA9-0653-000CN XA9-0389-000CN XA9-0654-000CN XA9-0192-000CN XA9-0828-000CN RBI-5552-000CN RAI-7636-000CN RBI-5489-000CN XA9-0342-000CN XB4-7300-609CN XB6-7300-607CN XB4-7400-809CN XA9- 0870-000CN XB4-7401-009CN XB4-7401-007CN XB4-7401-209CN XA9-0773-000CN XA9-0916-000CN XA9-0253-000CN XA9-0584-000CN
M3 x 5mm M3 x 5mm BH3 x 6mm M3 x 8mm M4 x 14mm M4 x 6mm M4 x 8mm M4 x 8mm M3 x 8 mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 10mm M4 x 8mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 10mm M4 x 6mm M3 x 6mm M3 M3 M3 x 4mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 6mm M4 x 8mm M4 x 10mm M4 x 10mm M4 x 10mm M4 x 12mm M4 x 12mm M4 x 14mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 12mm
Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Pan-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Washer-head Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Star-washer Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Shoulder Screw Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips (black) Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Self-tapping Phillips Loose Flat/Lock Washer Phillips Loose Flat/Lock Washer Phillips
Chapter 8 – 115
8
Part Number 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 10
FA9-1449-000CN XB1-2302-507CN XB6-7300-809CN XA9-0326-000CN XB6-7300-807CN XD2-1100-242CN XD2-1100-322CN XD2-1100-402CN XD2-1100-502CN XD2-1100-642CN XG9-0260-000CN XD2-2300-507CN XA9-0375-000CN XA9-0686-000CN XA9-0724-000CN XA9-0824-000CN XA9-0813-000CN
116 – Printer parts
Product Description M3 x 25mm M3 x 8mm M3 x 4mm M3 x 8mm 2.4mm 3.2mm 4.0mm 5.0mm 6.4mm 5.0mm 3m x 25 mm M3 x 6mm M3 x 8 mm M3 x 10mm M3 x 8mm
Star-washer trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Trus-head Phillips Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Retaining Ring (e-type) Grip Ring (c-type) Loose Flat/Star Washer Phillips Hexhead Screw Hexhead Screw Hexhead Screw Hexhead Screw with washer
EN
Notes
8
EN
Chapter 8 – 117
Parts for the HP LaserJet 4000 series 3
4
5
2
1 6 13
7
12
8
9
11
118 – Printer parts
10
EN
HP LaserJet 4000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
Fusing Assembly
C4118-69003 (110V)** C4118-69004 (220V)**
2
Paper Delivery Assembly
RG5-2648-000CN
Paper Pick-up Drive Assembly
RG5-2690-000CN
Pick-up Roller
RB1-8865-000CN
Feed Separation Roller
RF5-2490-000CN
Drive Coupler
RB1-8877-000CN
3
Top Cover Assembly
RG5-2663-000CN
4
Laser Scanner Assembly
5
Tray 1 Pick-up Assembly
RG5-2655-000CN
Tray 1 Pick-up Roller
RG5-3718-000CN
Front Panel
RG5-2666-000CN C4110-69008**
6
Tray 1 Assembly
7
Formatter Assembly
C4118-69008**
8
Printer Drive Assembly
RG5-2653-000CN
RG5-2656-000CN
Release Rod
RB1-8756-000CN
Main Motor
RH7-1331-000CN
9
Registration Assembly
10
Paper Feed Assembly Clutch
RG5-2652-000CN RG5-2651-000CN RB1-8974-000CN
11
ECU (Engine Controller Board)
C4118-69006 (110V)** C4118-69007 (220V)**
12
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
RG5-2643-000CN
13
Paper Feed Belt
RB1-8668-000CN
Transfer Roller
RG5-4283-000CN
Delivery Drive Assembly
RG5-3721-000CN
**These parts require exchange
EN
Chapter 8 – 119
8
Parts for the HP LaserJet 5000 series 1 2
3
4
5
6
7
Major assembly locations (1 of 2)
120 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 5000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
Fusing Assembly
C4110-69002 (110V)** C4110-69003 (220V)**
2
Registration Assembly
RG5-3524-000CN
3
Paper Pick-up Assembly
RG5-3521-000CN
4
Paper Tray
C4116-69001 (250-sheet)** C4117-69001 (500-sheet)**
5
Upper Delivery Assembly
RG5-3542-000CN
6
Paper Feed Belt Assembly
Pick-up Roller
Delivery Roller
RB2-1984-000CN RG5-3526-000CN
Paper Feed Belt (Large)
RB2-1887-000CN
Paper Feed Belt (Small)
RB2-1888-000CN
Transfer Roller
7
RB2-1820-000CN
Paper Feed Roller Assembly
RG5-3579-000CN RG5-3522-000CN
**These parts require exchange
EN
Chapter 8 – 121
8
Parts for the HP LaserJet 5000 series 3 4
2
1
Major assembly locations (2 of 2)
122 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 5000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
RG5-3544-000CN
Pick-up Drive Assembly Spring
RS5-2434-000CN
2
Main Gear Assembly
3
DC Controller
C4110-69001**
4
Formatter
C3974-69001**
Laser Scanner Assembly
C4110-69008**
DC Power Supply
C4110-69004 (110V)** C4110-69005 (220V)**
Main Motor
Top Cover Front Panel Fan
RG5-3543-000CN RH7-1357-000CN
RB2-1748-000CN RG5-3604-000CN RH7-1354-000CN
Toner Cartridge Engagement Arm
RB2-1856-000CN
Separation Pad with Spring
RG5-3585-000CN
Paper-handling PCA
RG5-3560-000CN
MP Separation Pad
RF5-2400-000CN
**These parts require exchange
EN
Chapter 8 – 123
8
Parts for the HP LaserJet 3100 1 2 3 9 6
5
8 4 7
11 12
14 10 13
Major assembly locations
124 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 3100 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies Paper Pick-up Assembly 1
2
Pick-up Roller Assembly Clutch
RG5-3486-000CN RB1-7197-020CN
Separation Arm Assembly Input Sensor Assembly
RB1-7181-000CN RB1-7182-000CN
Solenoid Transfer Guide Assembly Transfer Roller
3 4
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14
RH7-5139-000CN RG5-3452-000CN RF5-1534-000CN
Delivery Assembly
RG5-3474-020CN
Separation Guide Assembly
RG5-3475-020CN
Lever Sensor Arm Fuser Exit Roller Assembly
5
Part numbers RG5-3484-000CN
Document Scanner Assembly
RB1-7293-000CN RF5-2368-000CN RG5-4223-000CN
Pick-up Roller Assembly
RG5-4688-000CN
Scanner Motor, AC 1.08 Watts
RH7-1376-000CN
Contact Image Sensor Assembly Cable, Contact Image Sensor
RG5-4239-000CN RG5-4233-000CN
Document Scanner Guide/Cover
RB2-3436-000CN
Paper Input Support*
RB2-3362-000CN
Paper Output Support*
RB2-3410-000CN
Document Feeder Support*
RB2-3455-000CN
Document Output Support*
RB2-3470-000CN
Strap*
HB1-2867-000CN
Upper Guide Assembly
RG5-4221-000CN
Cover, Arm***
HB1-2895-000CN
Sheet, Pad***
RB2-4114-000CN
Document Scanner Separation Pad***
RB2-3430-000CN
Feed Assembly
RG5-3485-030CN
Feed Roller
RB2-1699-000CN
Control Panel Assembly
RG5-4241-000CN
* These are customer-replaceable parts. *** Replace these 3 parts as a set.
EN
Chapter 8 – 125
8
Parts for the HP LaserJet 3100
2
4
3
1 5
8
6
126 – Printer parts
7
EN
HP LaserJet 3100 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
LIU Board (U.S.) LIU Board (Worldwide)
C3948-67903 C3948-67904
2
ECU (Engine Controller Board) 110V ECU 220 V
RG5-4690-000CN RG5-4691-000CN
3
Laser Scanner Assembly
RG5-3494-050CN
4
Fixing/Fusing Assembly 110V Fixing/Fusing Assembly 220V
RG5-4678-000CN RG5-4681-000CN
5
Fixing Assembly Pressure Roller
RF5-2362-000CN
6
Formatter (without shield)
C3949-67901
7
Cable ECU to Formatter
RH2-5346-000CN
8
Fuser Exit Roller Assembly
RF5-2368-000CN
EN
Foot (4)
RF5-2663-000CN
Speaker
RH6-3845-000CN
Cable, Laser
RG5-2035-000CN
Motor, D.C. 12V
RH7-1320-000CN
RFI Shield, Formatter
C3948-00002
Chapter 8 – 127
8
Parts for HP LaserJet 8000 series
7
8 9
6 10 11
5 4
3
1 2
14 12
13
Major assembly locations (1 of 4)
128 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 8000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
2000-sheet Input Unit Assembly
C4781A
2
Tray 4 Assembly
RG5-2155-000CN
3
Multi-Bin Mailbox
C4785B
4
Duplex Unit Roller 1
RB1-6822-000CN
5
Duplex Unit
C4782A
6
5-Bin Mailbox with Stapler
C4787A
7
Face-up Bin
RB1-6491-000CN
8
Control Panel Display
RG5-4384-000CN
9
Envelope Feeder
C3765B
10
Tray 2
RG5-3951-000CN
11
Tray 3
RG5-3952-000CN
12
Multiple Input Tray (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray) C4780A
13
7-bin Stand
C4784A
14
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
C4783A
EN
8
Chapter 8 – 129
Parts for HP LaserJet 8000 series
12
1
3 6
5 2
4
13
7
8
11
9
10
Major assembly locations (2 of 4)
130 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 8000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
Transfer Roller
RF5-1412-000CN
2
Main Motor
RH7-1260-000CN
3
Face-down Delivery Assembly
RG5-1874-000CN
4
Fusing Assembly 100V-120v
C3166-69012**
4
Fusing Assembly 220V-240v
C3166-69013**
5
Feeder Assembly
RG5-1834-000CN
6
Registration Assembly
RG5-1833-000CN
7
Tray 1 Pick-up Assembly
RG5-1880-100CN
8
Tray 1 Feed Roller
RB1-6730-000CN
9
Tray 1 Separation Pad
RF5-1455-000CN
10
Paper Input Unit (PIU)*
C3166-69011-000**
11
Main Gear Assembly
RG5-1847-000CN
12
Transfer Roller Assembly
RG5-1887-000CN
13
Tray 1 PCA
RG5-1884-000CN
**These parts require exchange.
EN
Chapter 8 – 131
8
Parts for HP LaserJet 8000 series
5
4
1
2
3
Major assembly locations (3 of 4)
132 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 8000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
Laser Scanner Assembly
C3166-69006**
2
Fan 1
RH7-1266-000CN
3
Switch/Sensor PCA
RG5-1846-000CN
4
High Voltage Power Supply*
C3166-69005**
5
DC Controller PCA*
C3166-69010**
**These parts require exchange.
EN
Chapter 8 – 133
8
Parts for HP LaserJet 8000 series
3
2
6
5
1 4
Major assembly locations (4 of 4)
134 – Printer parts
EN
HP LaserJet 8000 assemblies and subassemblies Assemblies and subassemblies
Part numbers
1
Low Voltage Power Supply, 110V-220V
C3166-69007**
1
Low Voltage Power Supply, Universal
C3166-69008**
2
Formatter
C4186-69001**
3
Fan 3
RH7-1271-000CN
4
Fan 2
5&6 Paper Size Sensing PCA, Trays 2 and 3
RH7-1266-000CN RG5-1845-000CN
**These parts require exchange.
EN
Chapter 8 – 135
8
136 – Printer parts
EN
9
Image quality
Overview This chapter provides examples of image defects and a list of remedies. Repetitive image defect rulers are supplied at the end of the chapter to use when measuring the approximate distances between repetitive image defects.
EN
Chapter 9 – 137
Cleaning page For print-quality defects, try generating a cleaning page from the printer’s control panel (4000, 5000, or 8000 series) or from the JetSuite Pro software (3100). The HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility works on all HP monochrome printers, regardless of driver type. Running the utility at regular intervals can extend the useful life of the fuser and reduce service procedures. If your printer can not generate a cleaning page, you can download the HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility file and obtain instructions on its usage by accessing the worldwide web at www.hp.com/cposupport/eschome.html.
Note For the cleaning page to work properly, make sure to print the page on copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper).
138 – Image quality
EN
Image Defect Table For more information, see the page numbers below each image.
Background scatter (see page 142)
Black lines (see page 142)
Black pages (see page 143)
Blank page (see page 144)
9
Blank spots (see page 145)
Bottom of page is blank or graphic image is cut off (see page 145)
Character voids (see page 146)
Dirt on back of page (see page 146)
DIstorted image (see page 146)
Dropouts (see page 147)
Faded print or bubbles (see page 147)
Gray background (see page 148)
EN
Chapter 9 – 139
Horizontal black lines or smears (see page 148)
Horizontal smudges (see page 148)
Horizontal white lines (see page 149)
Light print, dark print, faded print (see page 149)
Loose toner (see page 149)
Outgoing faxes/ copies/scanned images are too light or too dark (see page 150)
Print is faded or vertically aligned white streaks are apparent (see page 150)
Random black spots (see page 151)
Repetitive defects (see page 151)
Scanned images have black dots or streaks in top and bottom margins (see page 151)
Scanned text is unclear (see page 152)
Toner Smear (see page 152)
140 – Image quality
EN
Vertical black lines (see page 152)
Vertical dots (see page 153)
Vertical white lines (see page 153)
9
EN
Chapter 9 – 141
Image defect details Background scatter •
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
Toner has spilled inside the product.
•
The pickup roller is dirty.
•
The print density setting is too low.
•
The transfer roller is dirty or worn.
Black lines •
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The toner cartridge is not seated properly.
•
The fusing assembly is contaminated or damaged.
•
The static eliminator teeth are contaminated or defective.
142 – Image quality
EN
Black pages •
The high-voltage power supply connections are dirty.
•
The high-voltage power supply is installed improperly. If the highvoltage power supply has been removed and replaced, it may not be seated properly.
•
Check the ECU (engine controller unit) for damage.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
Light is leaking into the printer. – Ensure all covers are in place.
•
The primary charging roller is bad.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The laser scanner assembly is faulty (turning laser on continuously).
•
The connectors between the laser scanner unit and the DC controller PCA are not seated properly or are defective.
•
There is a problem in the ECU or the laser scanner.
EN
Chapter 9 – 143
9
Blank pages •
No toner is available for print.
•
The laser shutter is defective.
•
The toner cartridge guide is damaged, improperly positioned, or missing.
•
No transfer roller voltage. – Check the ECU.
•
No developing bias. – Check the ECU.
•
Check the ground path.
•
The laser scanner cable assembly is defective.
•
There is a problem with the software’s configuration.
•
There is a problem with the network configuration. Some sharing devices on networks may generate a blank page as a separator. – Check with the network administrator.
•
The printer may be feeding two or more pages at once because the paper is difficult to separate.
•
The sealing tape has been left in the toner cartridge.
•
The toner cartridge is empty or defective.
•
The laser scanner door does not open properly. – Remove and reseat the toner cartridge. – Check the laser scanner shutter door for proper operation.
•
The toner cartridge guide is damaged, improperly positioned, or missing.
•
There is no transfer roller voltage. – Perform the Half Self-Test Functional Check to check all other electrophotographic processes. – Replace the transfer roller if necessary.
•
The high-voltage connector springs are dirty or defective.
144 – Image quality
EN
•
The high-voltage connectors are mounted on the high-voltage power supply PCA and protrude into the toner cartridge cavity. – Check the springs for functionality. Clean if dirty; replace if defective or missing.
•
The high-voltage power supply PCA is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
There is no developing bias. – Clean the high-voltage power supply contacts. With no developing bias charge, toner is not attracted to the drum. – Replace the ECU.
•
There is no drum ground path. – Check the drum ground. – Replace the ECU.
•
The laser scanner cable assembly is defective.
•
The page length and margins are not set correctly for the paper size.
•
Your software application is sending an extra page-eject command. – Check the software’s printing configuration information.
Blank spots •
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The transfer roller is dirty or deformed.
Bottom of page is blank or graphic image is cut off •
The page is too complex. (There is not enough memory to process the page.) – Set the resolution to 300 dpi through the software or printer driver. See the online help for printer driver issues.
EN
Chapter 9 – 145
9
Character voids •
The surface of the paper is too rough or the paper’s surface is too smooth for proper toner adhesion. – Use paper that meets HP paper specifications.
•
Printing is on the wrong side of the paper.
•
The transparencies are not designed for proper toner adhesion.
•
The transfer roller is bad.
•
The laser scanner assembly is bad.
Dirt on back •
Dirt is inside of the printer (tray separation roller, feed roller, fuser, toner cartridge).
•
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly.
•
The pressure roller in the fuser is contaminated.
Distorted image •
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly.
•
The printer operating environment does not meet HP specifications.
•
The output bin is incorrect for the paper type.
•
The connection of the cables to the laser scanner is poor.
•
The connection of the cables to the ECU is poor.
•
The laser scanner is defective.
•
The ECU is defective.
146 – Image quality
EN
Dropouts •
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications.
•
The printer’s operating environment does not meet specifications.
•
The toner density setting is wrong.
•
A single sheet of paper is defective. – Try reprinting the job.
•
The fuser setting was wrong for the paper type.*
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The high-voltage power supply PCA is defective.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
“Draft mode” or “economode” is selected in the software.
*This feature does not apply to all products.
9 Faded print or bubbles •
Check the ground path.
•
Replace the ECU.
•
The toner supply is low.
•
The print density is set incorrectly. – Change to a darker setting and retry printing.
•
If economode is on, turn it off.
•
Try a different paper lot.
•
Inspect the transfer roller for proper installation and contact. – Replace the transfer roller if it is damaged.
•
The laser scanner door is not opening properly. – Remove and reseat the toner cartridge. – Check the laser scanner door for proper operation.
•
The high-voltage contact springs are dirty or defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
EN
Chapter 9 – 147
Gray background •
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly.
•
The printer operating environment does not meet specifications.
•
The toner density setting is wrong.
•
The toner cartridge is faulty.
•
The inside of the printer is dirty.
•
The printer is printing on envelope seams. – Move the text to an area without seams.
Horizontal black lines or smears •
The laser scanner assembly or ECU is defective.
•
The toner cartridge was improperly installed.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The printer needs to be cleaned.
•
There is a problem in the heating element.
•
A gear is damaged.
3100 only •
Horizontal lines appear in the margins and across entire pages of faxes that are being sent. – The HP LaserJet 3100 product needs to be cleaned. – There is a problem in the contact image sensor.
Horizontal smudges •
The paper path is contaminated or damaged.
148 – Image quality
EN
Horizontal white lines •
The toner cartridge may be defective.
•
The fusing assembly is dirty or defective.
•
The laser scanner assembly or ECU may be faulty.
•
There is dirt in the laser path.
•
The mirror in the laser scanner is dirty.
Light print, dark print, faded print •
The toner density setting is wrong.
•
The toner cartridge is low.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications or is stored improperly.
•
Contact is poor to the ECU.
•
The laser scanner is defective.
•
The ECU is defective.
•
The high-voltage power supply is defective.
Loose toner •
Dirt is in the printer.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
Paper might be too smooth.
•
The fuser setting for the paper type is wrong.
•
The fuser is defective.
EN
Chapter 9 – 149
9
Outgoing faxes/copies/scanned images are too light or too dark •
The contrast is not set correctly.
•
The original image is very light or very dark.
•
The scanned image is too light or too dark because the original was on a colored paper.
3100 only •
Recalibrate the product.
Print is faded or vertically aligned white steaks are apparent •
The toner cartridge is getting low on toner.
•
The paper you are using does not meet HP paper specifications.
•
The toner density setting is not adjusted correctly.
•
The internal mirror or optics are contaminated.
•
The laser scanner is damaged.
•
The document scanner needs to be recalibrated.
•
There is a problem in the contact image sensor.
•
There is a problem in the formatter.
3100 only •
The HP LaserJet 3100 product needs to be cleaned.
•
The HP LaserJet 3100 product is damaged.
150 – Image quality
EN
Random black spots •
The paper you are using does not meet HP paper specifications.
•
You are printing on the wrong side of the paper.
•
The printer requires cleaning with a cleaning page.
•
The toner cartridge is damaged.
Repetitive defects •
Locate the defective roller in the printer.
•
There is dirt on the roller or the roller is defective.
•
The toner cartridge is damaged.
•
The rollers are dirty.
•
The fusing assembly is defective or dirty.
•
The gears are worn, causing slippage or jumping.
•
The paper does not meet HP paper specifications.
9
Scanned images have black dots or streaks in top and bottom margins 3100 Only •
There is ink, glue, white-out, or some other substance on the contact image sensor.
•
There is a problem in the contact image sensor. – Replace the contact image sensor.
EN
Chapter 9 – 151
Scanned text is unclear 3100 Only •
The contrast, resolution, or brightness needs to be adjusted before scanning.
•
The original is on colored paper.
•
There is a problem in the contact image sensor. – Replace the contact image sensor.
Toner smear •
There is dirt on the paper.
•
The fusing rollers are dirty.
•
The paper does not meet HP specifications.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
Wrong fuser setting for the paper type.
•
The fusing assembly is defective.
•
There is dirt in the printer.
•
The static eliminator is dirty or is not grounded, allowing a static charge to remain on a page.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Vertical black lines •
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The toner cartridge is not seated properly.
•
The fuser entrance is dirty.
•
The fuser has scratches on it.
•
This may be a repetitive defect. If so, the lines will be repeated at a consistent interval down the page.
•
The printer needs to be cleaned.
•
There is a problem in the heating element.
152 – Image quality
EN
3100 Only •
Scanned images have unwanted lines through them. – There is ink, glue, white-out, or some other substance on the contact image sensor. – Slick paper could be the problem; use a carrier sheet to send the item. – Recalibrate the product.
Vertical dots •
The static eliminator teeth are dirty.
•
There is poor contact between the static eliminator and the ECU.
•
The transfer roller is deformed or it has deteriorated.
•
The ECU is defective.
9 Vertical white lines •
There is a lack of toner or the toner cartridge is faulty.
•
There is dirt in the laser path.
•
The fuser is defective.
•
A mirror in the laser scanner is dirty.
EN
Chapter 9 – 153
Notes
154 – Image quality
EN
LJ 4000 series repetitive defect ruler
First occurrence of print defect
Primary charging roller - 38 mm (1.5 in) Transfer roller - 47 mm (1 7/8 in) Feed roller, pre-transfer roller, and developing roller - 50 mm (2 in)
Pressure roller - 83 mm (2.5 in) Tray feed roller, separation roller, and fuser upper upper hot roller - 75 mm (2 15/16 in)
Photosensitive drum - 94 mm (3 11/16 in)
EN
Chapter 9 – 155
9
Notes
156 – Image quality
EN
LJ 5000 series repetitive defect ruler First occurrence of print defect
Primary charging roller - 44 mm (1 3/4 in) Registration roller - 50 mm (2 in) Developing cylinder - 50 mm (2 in) Feed roller - 53 mm (2 3/32 in) Transfer charging roller - 53 mm (2 3/32 in) Fusing roller - 75 mm (2 15/16 in)
Pressure roller - 79 mm (3 1/8 in)
Photosensitive drum - 94 mm (3 11/16 in)
Cassette pick-up roller - 135 mm (5 5/16 in)
EN
Chapter 9 – 157
9
Notes
158 – Image quality
EN
LJ 3100 repetitive defect ruler First occurrence of print defect
Developing cylinder - 32 mm (1.25 in) Primary charging roller - 38 mm (1.5 in) Delivery roller - 44 mm (1.75 in) Transfer roller -48 mm (1.9 in)
9
Pressure roller - 64 mm (2.5 in) Upper heating element film - 76 mm (3.0 in) Toner cartridge photosensitive drum - 76 mm (3.0 in)
EN
Chapter 9 – 159
Notes
160 – Image quality
EN
8000 repetitive defect ruler First occurrence of print defect
Registration roller - 14 mm (1.73 in) Toner cartridge primary charging roller - 44.4 mm (1.75) Face-up delivery roller - 47 mm (1.86 in) Toner cartridge developing roller - 53.5 mm (2.11 in) Transfer roller - 58.4 (2.30 in)
Fuser lower roller - 94 mm (3.71 in) Toner cartridge photosensitive drum - 94 mm (3.71 in)
Fuser upper roller - 125 mm (4.92 in)
EN
Chapter 9 – 161
9
162 – Image quality
EN
10
Wiring diagrams
Overview This chapter provides wiring diagrams for printers supported in this guide.
EN
Chapter 10 – 163
Figure 10-1 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N)
164 – Wiring diagrams
EN
10
Figure 10-2 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN) EN
Chapter 10 – 165
Figure 10-3 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 5000 series, 1 of 2)
166 – Wiring diagrams
EN
10
Figure 10-4 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 5000 series, 2 of 2)
EN
Chapter 10 – 167
Figure 10-5 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 3100, 1 of 2)
168 – Wiring diagrams
EN
10
Figure 10-6 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 3100, 2 of 2)
EN
Chapter 10 – 169
Figure 10-7 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 8000 series, 1 of 2)
170 – Wiring diagrams
EN
10
Figure 10-8 Wiring diagram (HP LaserJet 8000 series, 2 of 2)
EN
Chapter 10 – 171
172 – Wiring diagrams
EN
11
Services and support/ resources and training
Overview This chapter provides information on obtaining training, support, and materials.
EN
Chapter 11 – 173
How to get training Lecture/lab training (U.S. only) Service technicians who want individual, hands-on training can attend regularly scheduled lecture/lab training classes. These classes are offered throughout the country. To receive the latest schedule, call HP FIRST at (800) 333-1917, or see the HP website (www.hp.com/go/ resellertraining) and request document ID number 9104. The latest schedule will immediately be sent to the fax number of your choice. Class schedule and registration information can also be obtained by calling the centralized registration center at (512) 434-1520.
Self-paced training kits Product All LaserJet Printers
Description
Part number
Basic Hardware Training Course (prerequisite for all LaserJet service training)
5961-0880
Paper Training Video
5961-0711 (NTSC) 5961-0712 (PAL)
LJ 4000/4000 N/ 4000 T/4000 TN
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C4118-61101 C4118-61102
LJ 5000/5000 N/ 5000 GN
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C4110-61101 C4110-61102
LJ 3100
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C3948-61101 C3948-61102
Self-paced Training Kit NTSC Format PAL Format
C4085-67901 C4085-67902
LJ 8000/ LJ Mopier 240
174 – Services and support/resources and training
EN
Support resources North American Response Center (NARC) The North American Response Center (NARC) is available for technical support to assist service technicians. The NARC can be reached at (800) 544-9976 (U.S.).
Other areas Outside of North America and Europe, contact your local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining technical support.
HP FIRST fax system HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a phone-in fax service that provides technical information to HP LaserJet users as well as to service personnel. Receiving a fax requires a group-3 facsimile machine or fax card. The following service-related information is available: •
service notes (HP-authorized dealers)
•
application notes
•
product data sheets
•
material safety data sheets (MSDS)
•
typeface and accessory information
•
printer support software information
•
toner information
•
forms for requesting drivers and the software matrix
EN
11
Chapter 11 – 175
To retrieve service notes (Authorized dealers, HP customer engineers (CEs) ONLY) 1 Dial (1) (800) 333-1917 (U.S.) from any touch-tone phone. 2 Select (1) for HP FIRST. 3 Select (3) for a password customer. 4 Enter the password: 737842. 5 Follow the voice prompts to enter a document ID number or to select the index. 6 Follow the voice prompts to enter your fax number or the fax number of your customer.
Note Delivery time depends on the length and complexity of the document.
HP FIRST, U.S. Call the HP ASAP system (800) 333-1917 (U.S.) and follow the voice prompts to enter HP FIRST.
HP FIRST, Europe Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers: United Kingdom
(44) (134) 0800-960271
Netherlands
(31) (20) 0800-222420
Belgium (Dutch)
(32) (2) 0800-11906
Germany
(49) (13) 081-0061
Switzerland (German)
(41) (1) 0800-551527
Austria
(43) (1) 0660-8128
For English service outside the above countries, call: (31) (20) 681-5792.
176 – Services and support/resources and training
EN
HP end-user support options Local support assistance The user’s first source of assistance should be their local dealer or service center. HP continuously provides local computer dealers and service centers with the latest information regarding products and services. To locate the nearest authorized dealer or service center, phone (800) 243-9816 (U.S.) or (800) 387-3867 (Canada).
24-hour support information Phone (800) 333-1917 to access the HP ASAP system for 24-hour automated support services. User support information includes notes for common software applications and troubleshooting tips. Users may request up to three documents per call.
Electronic information services For 24-hour access to information via modem, we suggest: •
CompuServe - The CompuServe HP Peripherals forum (GO HPPER) provides printer drivers and interactive sharing of technical communication. To subscribe, call CompuServe, Inc. at (800) 524-3388. Note: CompuServe is not an official HP support channel, but the forum is maintained and supported by users.
•
Internet - Printer drivers and product and support information can be obtained from the HP anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) site 192.6.71.2 or ftp-boi.external.hp.com. The site is available to anyone with FTP access to the Internet. Access through the World Wide Web is available at URL http://www.hp.com/.
EN
Chapter 11 – 177
11
Printer drivers by mail To obtain printer drivers, contact the software application manufacturer. HP distributes printer drivers for a few of the most popular applications. Call (970) 339-7009, 6 days a week, 24 hours a day (closed Sundays). Shipping and handling charges may apply on some printer drivers.
Telephone assistance – in warranty Call (1) (208) 323-2551 Monday through Friday from 6 am to 10 pm, Saturday 9 am to 4 pm (Mountain Time) free of charge during the warranty period. However, your standard long-distance phone charges still apply. Have your system nearby and your serial number ready when calling.
Telephone assistance – post-warranty Post-warranty telephone assistance is available to answer your product usage questions. Call (1) (900) 555-1500 ($2.50 per minute, U.S. only) or call 1-800-999-1148 ($25 per call, Visa or MasterCard, U.S. and Canada) Monday through Friday from 7 am to 6 pm and Saturday from 9 am to 3 pm (Mountain Time). Charges begin only when you connect with a support technician. Prices subject to change.
Hardware repair services To find a local authorized repair center for hardware repair needs, call (800) 243-9816. HP also offers a variety of service contract options to complement the standard warranty. Call (800) 743-8308 (U.S.) or (800) 268-1221 (Canada).
178 – Services and support/resources and training
EN
12
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
Overview This section provides information on the LaserJet 300 DPI page scanner, which is available in three models.
EN
Chapter 12 – 179
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion The HP LaserJet Companion includes the following models: •
C3989A Companion
•
C3079A Companion SE
•
C4106A Companion XI
(These are all the same product except for minor software differences.)
Description The HP LaserJet Companion is a 300-DPI page scanner, parallel port pass-through accessory designed for Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 4000 series printers.
Warranty The HP LaserJet Companion comes with a 1-year warranty, offering Central Repair only (no dealer repairs); Express Exchange (U.S. and Canada); and Repair and Return (Worldwide).
Supported media •
•
The following media sizes are supported: •
Maximum: 216 mm x 762 mm (8.5 by 30 inch)
•
Minimum: 51 mm x 89 mm (2 by 3.5 inch)
The following media weights are supported: • 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 lb to 28 lb)
180 – Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
EN
Skew specifications Some skew is normal. The maximum amount of skew that is considered normal is 3.35 millimeters (0.13 inches) over 279 millimeters (11 inches). Skew exceeding the normal amount may be caused by media that is damaged, media that does not meet the specifications, or media that is loaded incorrectly. If media meets specifications, is not damaged, and is correctly loaded, but skew remains excessive, clean the separation pad, pickup roller, and scan roller.
Cleaning Clean these parts with isopropyl alcohol: •
separation pad
•
pickup roller
•
white scan roller
Clean the image sensor with glass cleaner.
12
EN
Chapter 12 – 181
Cables Cable part numbers HP part number
Part description
8120-6963
Cable shipped with the HP LaserJet Companion
C2950A
Printer parallel cable (IEEE-1284) 2 meters (7 feet)
C2951A
Printer parallel cable (IEEE-1284) 3 meters (10 feet)
Power supply modules Output = 22VDC, + or - 25% Power supply part numbers HP part number
Part description
9100-5534
120 Vac 60 Hz (US/CN/MX)
9100-5535
230 Vac 50 Hz (EUROPE)
9100-5536
240 Vac 50 Hz (U.K.)
9100-5537
220 Vac 50 Hz (ARG)
9100-5539
240 Vac 50 Hz (AUSTRL)
9100-5541
220 Vac 50 Hz (TI/INDO)
9100-5542
220 Vac 50 Hz (HNG KNG)
182 – Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
EN
A
Acronyms and abbreviations
Acronyms and abbreviations AC
Alternating current
AUTOCONT
Automatic continue
BNC
A 10-Base 2 connector used with coaxial cables
CE
Customer engineer
CFG
Configuration on control panel
DC
Direct current
DCPS
Direct current power supply
MS-DOS
Disk operating system
DPI
Dots per inch
DTR
Data terminal ready
DTR LINE
Data terminal ready line
ECU
Engine control unit
EP
Electro-photographic
EPH
External paper handling
FRU
Field replacement unit
FTP
File transfer protocol
HP ASAP
Hewlett-Packard Automated Support Access Program
HP FIRST
Hewlett-Packard Fax information retrieval support technology
EN
Appendix A –
183
Acronyms and abbreviations (continued) HP-GL/2
Hewlett-Packard graphics language
HTML
Hypertext markup language
HV
High voltage
HVPS
High-voltage power supply
I/O
Input/output
IR
Infrared
IrDA
Infrared Data Association
IRQ
Interrupt request
JEIDA
A type of memory module
JOBID
Print job identification
JP
Jobpack
LAN
Local area network
LED
Light-emitting diode
LVPS
Low-voltage power supply
LC PICKUP ROLLER
Lower-cassette pickup roller
MB
Megabyte
MEM
Memory
MIO
Modular input/output
MP PICKUP ROLLER
Multipurpose tray pickup roller
MP Tray
Multipurpose tray
MSDS
Material safety data sheets
NARC
North American Response Center
NTSC
National Television Standard Committee
NVRAM
Nonvolatile random-access memory
Ohm
A unit of measure of electrical resistance
PAL
Phase alternation line format
PCA
Printed-circuit assembly
184 – Acronyms and abbreviations
EN
Acronyms and abbreviations (continued) PCB
Printed circuit board
PCL
Printer command language
PC PICKUP ROLLER
Paper-cassette pickup roller
PIU
Paper input unit
PJL
Printer job language
RAM
Random-access memory
RIP
Raster image process
ROM
Read-only memory
SIMM
Single inline memory module
SMO
Support materials organization Service mode
SPEC
Specifications
SRVR
Server
TCP/IP
Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol
TS l/T52
Thermoswitch
UNIX®
Network operating system using TCP/IP protocol
URL
Universal resource locator
VDC
Volts direct current
EN
Appendix A –
Appendix
SMODE
185
186 – Acronyms and abbreviations
EN
Index A
E
assemblies major locations (3100 series) 127 major locations (4000 series) 121 major locations (5000 series) 125 major locations (8000 series) 131
EIO-based hard drive 77 electronic information services 179 envelope feeder description 108 part numbers 108 envelopes See also media envelopes construction 87 gray background 98 improving print quality 98 preventing problems 86 sizes 85 specifications 85 types to avoid 86 expanded input/output 77 extended service menu (3100) 51 extended service menu tree 52 extended service mode clearing memory 58 reports 56 self-test 53 tests 55
C character voids 95 cleaning page, obtaining 140 common hardware, part numbers 117 CompuServe HP Peripherals forum 179 configuration test 53 control panel messages alphabetical 8 numerical 29 control panel test 55 country code softswitches, changing 59
F D diagnostics, accessing 50 document scanner feed test 55 document scanner motor test 56 documents, lost 13 download, firmware 60 duplexer description 108 part numbers 108 EN
fax memory test 53 faxes, lost 13 firmware download 60 firmware version 57 flash 77 fonts, ordering 104
Index – 187
H
L
hard disk, part numbers 104 hard disks, ordering 104 hardware, part numbers 117 HP ASAP 178 HP FIRST 177 HP FIRST, Europe 178 HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility file 140 HP LaserJet Companion cleaning 183 description 182 supported media 182 warranty service 182 HP Parts Direct Ordering 103 HP Planet Partners 99
labels See also media labels preventing problems 89 specifications 88 LCD characters test 55 LCD test 55 LocalTalk 77 log debug report 57 lost, documents 13
I image defects 141 individual diagnostics 56 input/output bidirectional parallel interface 72 cable lengths 74 expanded card 77 pin configurations 73 input/output cables description 106 part numbers 106 input/output cards description 104 part numbers 104 internal event log, clearing 51 internet support 179 interruptions in power 13
K keypad test 55
188 – Index
M mailbox ordering 108 part numbers 108 maintenance count, setting 47, 49 maintenance kits description 112 part numbers 112 media envelope sizes 85 envelope specifications 85 envelopes to avoid 86 label specifications 88 ordering 108 paper curl 84 paper sizes 80 part numbers 108 specifications 81 transparency specifications 90 troubleshooting problems 83 types to avoid 83 weights 82 memory ordering 104 part numbers 104, 106 product description 104, 106 menu tree, extended service 45 EN
modem dial tone test 54 modem modulation test 56 modem test 53 modem tone test 56
N North American Response Center (NARC) 177
O ordering duplexer 108 fonts 104 hard disks 104 I/O cards 104 input/output cables 106 mailbox 108 memory 104 power box 110 toner cartridges 110 trays 106, 108 upgrade kit 110
P
EN
R refill statement 100 reports extended service mode 56 log debug 57 printer fonts 57 SRAM dump 56 T.30 protocol trace 56 task stacks 57 translations 57 reset, country code 59
S scanner LED test 55 scanner plots test 55 scanner test 54 screws description 117 part numbers 117 self-paced training kits, ordering 176 self-test 53 sensor states test 55 serial number, setting 48, 49 Index – 189
Index
paper See media page count, setting 46, 49 paper size, setting default 50 paper training video 90 parallel cables connectors 74 part numbers 74 part numbers 117 pin configurations 73 post-warranty service 180 power box ordering 110 part numbers 110 power supply 63
power, interruptions 13 printer hardware part numbers 117 obtaining hardware repair 180 obtaining support 177 part numbers 121 post-warranty service 180 service center 179 warranty service 180 printer drivers, ordering 180 printer fonts report 57 product, part numbers 104, 106, 127 program test 53
service mode 43 service notes, retrieving 178 setting maintenance count 47, 49 page count 46, 49 serial number 48, 49 softswitches 59 SRAM dump report 56 support, obtaining 179 system reset, performing 58
T T.30 protocol trace report 56 task stacks report 57 tests all LCD characters 55 configuration 53 control panel 55 document scanner feed 55 document scanner motor 56 extended service mode 55 fax memory 53 individual diagnostics 56 keypad 55 LCD 55 modem 53 modem dial tone 54 modem modulation 56 modem tone 56 program 53 scanner 54 scanner LED 55 scanner plots 55 sensor states 55 toner cartridges banding 95 ordering 110 page counts 94 part numbers 110 190 – Index
resolving problems 95 weights 94 toner cracking 96 toner images, transfering 97 training classes 176 translations report 57 transparencies See also media transparencies preventing problems 90 specifications 90 trays description 106 ordering 106 part numbers 106 troubleshooting image defects 141 paper problems 83 printer problems 8
U upgrade kit ordering 110 part number 110
W warranty service, obtaining 180 white reference summary 57 wiring diagram LJ 3100 170 LJ 4000 series 166 LJ 5000 series 168 LJ 8000 172
EN
Service Websites Electronic Support Center Software, drivers, support documentation, frequently asked questions http://www.hp.com/go/support
HP Technical Training (North America) Classes and schedules http://www.hp.com/go/resellertraining
Parts Parts information http://outfield.external.hp.com/spi/welcome.htm
Service Phone Numbers All numbers listed are for North America only.
Dealer Response Line Dealer pre/post sales and service support (800) 544-9976 U.S. Only (800) 363-6594 Canada
Customer Care Center User questions, applications, LaserJet Fax (208) 323-2551
HP First Fax – Information Retrieval System Service notes, sales information, user help, software information (208) 344-4809 (800) 333-1917 U.S. Only
Customer Information Center Sales dealer locations, literature, and specifications (800) 752-0900 U.S. Only
HP Driver Distribution Center Printer drivers and software application notes orders (970) 339-7009 U.S. Only
Customer Support Sales Center Authorized repair locations (800) 243-9816 U.S. Only
Parts Direct Ordering / SMO Service parts, supplies, and accessories orders (800) 227-8164 U.S. Only
Parts Identification Service part number identification (916) 783-0804
North American Response Center Online technical assistance (800) 477-5526 HP Only
Corvallis Customer Service Center Express exchange/customer return services (916) 785-1200
Supported Products HP LaserJet 4000/4000T/4000N/4000TN printer HP LaserJet Companion 3989A HP LaserJet 5000/5000N/5000GN printer HP LaserJet 3100 multifunction printer HP LaserJet 8000/8000N/8000DN printer HP LaserJet 240 Mopier Printed on at least 50% Total Recycled Fiber with at least 10% Post-Consumer Paper
Copyright© 1998 Hewlett-Packard Co. Printed in USA
Manual Part No. 5021-8942
*5021-8942* *5021-8942* 5021-8942
